1
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
8-bit
Microcontroller
with Low Power
2.4GHz
Transceiver for
ZigBee and
IEEE 802.15.4
ATmega2564RFR2
ATmega1284RFR2
ATmega644RFR2
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
Features
• Network support by hardware assisted Multiple PAN Address Filtering
• Advanced Hardware assisted Reduced Power Consumption
• High Performance, Low Power AVR® 8-Bit Microcontroller
• Advanced RISC Architecture
- 135 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution
- 32x8 General Purpose Working Registers / On-Chip 2-cycle Multiplier
- Up to 16 MIPS Throughput at 16 MHz and 1.8V – Fully Static Operation
• Non-volatile Program and Data Memories
- 256K/128K/64K Bytes of In-System Self-Programmable Flash
• Endurance: 10’000 Write/Erase Cycles @ 125°C (25’000 Cycles @ 85°C)
- 8K/4K/2K Bytes EEPROM
• Endurance: 20’000 Write/Erase Cycles @ 125°C (100’000 Cycles @ 25°C)
- 32K/16K/8K Bytes Internal SRAM
• JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) Interface
- Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the JTAG Standard
- Extensive On-chip Debug Support
- Programming of Flash EEPROM, Fuses and Lock Bits through the JTAG interface
• Peripheral Features
- Multiple Timer/Counter & PWM channels
- Real Time Counter with Separate Oscillator
- 10-bit, 330 ks/s A/D Converter; Analog Comparator; On-chip Temperature Sensor
- Master/Slave SPI Serial Interface
- Two Programmable Serial USART
- Byte Oriented 2-wire Serial Interface
• Advanced Interrupt Handler and Power Save Modes
• Watchdog Timer with Separate On-Chip Oscillator
• Power-on Reset and Low Current Brown-Out Detector
• Fully integrated Low Power Transceiver for 2.4 GHz ISM Band
- High Power Amplifier support by TX spectrum side lobe suppression
- Supported Data Rates: 250 kb/s and 500 kb/s, 1 Mb/s, 2 Mb/s
- -100 dBm RX Sensitivity; TX Output Power up to 3.5 dBm
- Hardware Assisted MAC (Auto-Acknowledge, Auto-Retry)
- 32 Bit IEEE 802.15.4 Symbol Counter
- SFD-Detection, Spreading; De-Spreading; Framing ; CRC-16 Computation
- Antenna Diversity and TX/RX control / TX/RX 128 Byte Frame Buffer
• PLL synthesizer with 5 MHz and 500 kHz channel spacing for 2.4 GHz ISM Band
• Hardware Security (AES, True Random Generator)
• Integrated Crystal Oscillators (32.768 kHz & 16 MHz, external crystal needed)
• I/O and Package
- 33 Programmable I/O Lines
- 48-pad QFN (RoHS/Fully Green)
• Temperature Range: -40°C to 125°C Industrial
• Ultra Low Power consumption (1.8 to 3.6V) for AVR & Rx/Tx: 10.1mA/18.6 mA
- CPU Active Mode (16MHz): 4.1 mA
- 2.4GHz Transceiver: RX_ON 6.0 mA / TX 14.5 mA (maximum TX output power)
- Deep Sleep Mode: <700nA @ 25°C
• Speed Grade: 0 – 16 MHz @ 1.8 – 3.6V range with integrated voltage regulators
Applications
• ZigBee® / IEEE 802.15.4-2011/2006/2003™ – Full and Reduced Function Device
• General Purpose 2.4GHz ISM Band Transceiver with Microcontroller
• RF4CE, SP100, WirelessHART™, ISM Applications and IPv6 / 6LoWPAN
2
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
1 Pin Configurations
Figure 1-1. Pinout ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
PF2:ADC2:DIG2
PF1:ADC1
PF0:ADC0
AVDD
EVDD
AVSS:ASVSS
XTAL1
XTAL2
PE7:ICP3:INT7:CLKO
PE5:OC3C:INT5
PE4:OC3B:INT4
PE3:OC3A:AIN1
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
PF3/4:ADC3/4:TCK:DIG4
1 36
PE2:XCK0:AIN0
PF5:ADC5:TMS
2 35
PE1:TXD0
PF6:ADC6:TDO
3 34
PE0:RXD0:PCINT8
PF7:ADC7:TDI
4 ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 33
PB7:OC0A:OC1C:PCINT7
AVSS_RFP
5 32
PB6:OC1B:PCINT6
RFP
6 QFN 48 31
PB5:OC1A:PCINT5
RFN
7 30
PB4:OC2A:PCINT4
AVSS_RFN
8 7x7 mm 29
PB3:MISO:PDO:PCINT3
TST
9 28
PB2:MOSI:PDI:PCINT2
RSTN
10
27
PB1:SCK:PCINT1
PG1:DIG1
11
26
PB0:SSN:PCINT0
PG3:TOSC2
12
25
CLKI
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
PG4:TOSC1
DVSS:DSVSS
DVDD
DEVDD
PD0:SCL:INT0
PD1:SDA:INT1
PD2:RXD1:INT2
PD3:TXD1:INT3
PD4:ICP1
PD5:XCK1
PD6:T1
PD7:T0
Note:
The large center pad underneath the QFN/MLF package is made of metal and internally connected
to AVSS. It should be soldered or glued to the board to ensure good mechanical stability. If the
center pad is left unconnected, the package might loosen from the
board. It is not recommended to
use the exposed paddle as a replacement of the regular AVSS pins.
2 Disclaimer
Typical values contained in this datasheet are based on simulation and characterization
results of other AVR microcontrollers and radio transceivers manufactured in a similar
process technology. Minimum and Maximum values will be available after the device is
characterized.
3
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
3 Overview
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on
the AVR enhanced RISC architecture combined with a high data rate transceiver for the
2.4 GHz ISM band.
By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the device achieves
throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz allowing the system designer to optimize
power consumption versus processing speed.
The radio transceiver provides high data rates from 250 kb/s up to 2 Mb/s, frame
handling, outstanding receiver sensitivity and high transmit output power enabling a
very robust wireless communication.
3.1 Block Diagram
Figure 3-1 Block Diagram
The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 32 general purpose working
registers. All 32 registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU). Two
independent registers can be accessed with one single instruction executed in one
clock cycle. The resulting architecture is very code efficient while achieving throughputs
up to ten times faster than conventional CISC microcontrollers. The system includes
internal voltage regulation and an advanced power management. Distinguished by the
small leakage current it allows an extended operation time from battery.
The radio transceiver is a fully integrated ZigBee solution using a minimum number of
external components. It combines excellent RF performance with low cost, small size
and low current consumption. The radio transceiver includes a crystal stabilized
fractional-N synthesizer, transmitter and receiver, and full Direct Sequence Spread
4
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Spectrum Signal (DSSS) processing with spreading and despreading. The device is
fully compatible with IEEE802.15.4-2011/2006/2003 and ZigBee standards.
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 provides the following features: 256K/128K/64K
Bytes of In-System Programmable (ISP) Flash with read-while-write capabilities,
8K/4K/2K Bytes EEPROM, 32K/16K/8K Bytes SRAM, up to 35 general purpose I/O
lines, 32 general purpose working registers, Real Time Counter (RTC), 6 flexible
Timer/Counters with compare modes and PWM, a 32 bit Timer/Counter, 2 USART, a
byte oriented 2-wire Serial Interface, a 8 channel, 10 bit analog to digital converter
(ADC) with an optional differential input stage with programmable gain, programmable
Watchdog Timer with Internal Oscillator, a SPI serial port, IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant
JTAG test interface, also used for accessing the On-chip Debug system and
programming and 6 software selectable power saving modes.
The Idle mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counters, SPI port, and
interrupt system to continue functioning. The Power-down mode saves the register
contents but freezes the Oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until the next
interrupt or hardware reset. In Power-save mode, the asynchronous timer continues to
run, allowing the user to maintain a timer base while the rest of the device is sleeping.
The ADC Noise Reduction mode stops the CPU and all I/O modules except
asynchronous timer and ADC, to minimize switching noise during ADC conversions. In
Standby mode, the RC oscillator is running while the rest of the device is sleeping. This
allows very fast start-up combined with low power consumption. In Extended Standby
mode, both the main RC oscillator and the asynchronous timer continue to run.
Typical supply current of the microcontroller with CPU clock set to 16MHz and the radio
transceiver for the most important states is shown in the Figure 3-2 below.
Figure 3-2 Radio transceiver and microcontroller (16MHz) supply current
16,6mA
4,7mA
4,1mA
250nA
18,6mA
0
5
10
15
20
Deep Sleep SLEEP TRX_OFF RX_ON BUSY_TX
Radio transceiver and microcontroller (16MHz) supply current
I(DEVDD,EVDD) [mA]
1.8V
3.0V
3.6V
The transmit output power is set to maximum. If the radio transceiver is in SLEEP mode
the current is dissipated by the AVR microcontroller only.
In Deep Sleep mode all major digital blocks with no data retention requirements are
disconnected from main supply providing a very small leakage current. Watchdog timer,
MAC symbol counter and 32.768kHz oscillator can be configured to continue to run.
700
nA
RPC enabled □ 10.1mA
RPC disabled
5
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high-density nonvolatile memory technology.
The On-chip ISP Flash allows the program memory to be reprogrammed in-system
trough an SPI serial interface, by a conventional nonvolatile memory programmer, or by
on on-chip boot program running on the AVR core. The boot program can use any
interface to download the application program in the application Flash memory.
Software in the boot Flash section will continue to run while the application Flash
section is updated, providing true Read-While-Write operation. By combining an 8 bit
RISC CPU with In-System Self-Programmable Flash on a monolithic chip, the Atmel
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 is a powerful microcontroller that provides a highly
flexible and cost effective solution to many embedded control applications.
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 AVR is supported with a full suite of program and
system development tools including: C compiler, macro assemblers, program
debugger/simulators, in-circuit emulators, and evaluation kits.
3.2 Pin Descriptions
3.2.1 EVDD
External analog supply voltage.
3.2.2 DEVDD
External digital supply voltage.
3.2.3 AVDD
Regulated analog supply voltage (internally generated).
3.2.4 DVDD
Regulated digital supply voltage (internally generated).
3.2.5 DVSS
Digital ground.
3.2.6 AVSS
Analog ground.
3.2.7 Port B (PB7...PB0)
Port B is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each
bit). The Port B output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink
and source capability. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source
current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset
condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.
Port B also provides functions of various special features of the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
3.2.8 Port D (PD7...PD0)
Port D is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected for each
bit). The Port D output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink
and source capability. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source
current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port D pins are tri-stated when a reset
condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.
Port D also provides functions of various special features of the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
3.2.9 Port E (PE7,PE5...PE0)
Internally Port E is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected
for each bit). The Port E output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both
high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port E pins that are externally pulled low will
6
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port E pins are tri-stated when
a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.
Due to the low pin count of the QFN48 package port E6 is not connected to a pin.
Port E also provides functions of various special features of the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
3.2.10 Port F (PF7..PF5,PF4/3,PF2...PF0)
Internally Port F is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected
for each bit). The Port F output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both
high sink and source capability. As inputs, Port F pins that are externally pulled low will
source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port F pins are tri-stated when
a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.
Due to the low pin count of the QFN48 package port F3 and F4 are connected to the
same pin. The I/O configuration should be done carefully in order to avoid excessive
power dissipation.
Port F also provides functions of various special features of the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
3.2.11 Port G (PG4,PG3,PG1)
Internally Port G is a 6-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors (selected
for each bit). The Port G output buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics with both
high sink and source capability. However the driver strength of PG3 and PG4 is
reduced compared to the other port pins. The output voltage drop (VOH, VOL) is higher
while the leakage current is smaller. As inputs, Port G pins that are externally pulled low
will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port G pins are tri-stated
when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.
Due to the low pin count of the QFN48 package port G0, G2 and G5 are not connected
to a pin.
Port G also provides functions of various special features of the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
3.2.12 AVSS_RFP
AVSS_RFP is a dedicated ground pin for the bi-directional, differential RF I/O port.
3.2.13 AVSS_RFN
AVSS_RFN is a dedicated ground pin for the bi-directional, differential RF I/O port.
3.2.14 RFP
RFP is the positive terminal for the bi-directional, differential RF I/O port.
3.2.15 RFN
RFN is the negative terminal for the bi-directional, differential RF I/O port.
3.2.16 RSTN
Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will
generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to
generate a reset.
3.2.17 XTAL1
Input to the inverting 16MHz crystal oscillator amplifier. In general a crystal between
XTAL1 and XTAL2 provides the 16MHz reference clock of the radio transceiver.
3.2.18 XTAL2
Output of the inverting 16MHz crystal oscillator amplifier.
7
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
3.2.19 TST
Programming and test mode enable pin. If pin TST is not used pull it to low.
3.2.20 CLKI
Input to the clock system. If selected, it provides the operating clock of the
microcontroller.
3.3 Unused Pins
Floating pins can cause power dissipation in the digital input stage. They should be
connected to an appropriate source. In normal operation modes the internal pull-up
resistors can be enabled (in Reset all GPIO are configured as input and the pull-up
resistors are still not enabled).
Bi-directional I/O pins shall not be connected to ground or power supply directly.
The digital input pins TST and CLKI must be connected. If unused pin TST can be
connected to AVSS while CLKI should be connected to DVSS.
Output pins are driven by the device and do not float. Power supply pins respective
ground supply pins are connected together internally.
XTAL1 and XTAL2 shall never be forced to supply voltage at the same time.
3.4 Compatibility and Feature Limitations of QFN-48 Package
3.4.1 AREF
The reference voltage output of the A/D converter is not connected to a pin in the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
3.4.2 Port E6
The port E6 is not connected to a pin in the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2. The alternate
pin functions as clock input to timer 3 and external interrupt 6 are not available.
3.4.3 Port F3 and F4
The port F3 and F4 are connected to the same pin in the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
The output configuration should be done carefully in order to avoid excessive current
consumption.
The alternate pin function of port F4 is used by the JTAG interface. If the JTAG
interface is used the port F3 must be configured as input and the alternate pin function
output DIG4 (RX/TX indicator) must be disabled. Otherwise the JTAG interface will not
work. The SPIEN Fuse should be programmed in order to be able to erase a program
that accidentally drive port F3.
There are just 7 single-ended input channel to the ADC available.
3.4.4 Port G0
The port G0 is not connected to a pin in the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2. The
alternate pin function DIG3 (inverted RX/TX indicator) is not available. If the JTAG
interface is not used the DIG4 alternate pin function output of port F3 can still be used
as RX/TX indicator.
8
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
3.4.5 Port G2
The port G2 is not connected to a pin in the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2. The
alternate pin function AMR (asynchronous automated meter reading input to timer 2) is
not available.
3.4.6 Port G5
The port G5 is not connected to a pin in the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2. The
alternate pin function OC0B (output compare channel of 8-Bit timer 0) is not available.
3.4.7 RSTON
The RSTON reset output signaling the internal reset state is not connected to a pin in
the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
4 Resources
A comprehensive set of development tools and application notes, and datasheets are
available for download on http://www.atmel.com.
5 About Code Examples
This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use
various parts of the device. Be aware that not all C compiler vendors include bit
definitions in the header files and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent. Please
confirm with the C compiler documentation for more details.
These code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before
compilation. For I/O registers located in extended I/O map, "IN", "OUT", "SBIS", "SBIC",
"CBI", and "SBI" instructions must be replaced with instructions that allow access to
extended I/O. Typically "LDS" and "STS" combined with "SBRS", "SBRC", "SBR", and
"CBR".
6 Data Retention and Endurance
6.1 Data Retention
The data retention of the non-volatile memories is
• over 10 years at 125°C
• over 100 years at 25°C
6.2 Endurance of the Code Memory (FLASH)
The endurance of the code memory (FLASH) is
• 125°C – 10,000 Write/Erase cycles
• 85°C – 25,000 Write/Erase cycles
6.3 Endurance of the Data Memory (EEPROM)
The endurance of the entire data memory (EEPROM) is
• 125°C – 20,000 Write/Erase cycles
• 85°C – 50,000 Write/Erase cycles
• 25°C – 100,000 Write/Erase cycles
9
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
7 AVR CPU Core
7.1 Introduction
This section discusses the AVR core architecture in general. The main function of the
CPU core is to ensure correct program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to
access memories, perform calculation, control peripherals, and handle interrupts.
7.2 Architectural Overview
Figure 7-1.Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture
Flash
Program
Memory
Instruction
Register
Instruction
Decoder
Program
Counter
Control Lines
32 x 8
General
Purpose
Registers
ALU
Status
and Control
I/O Lines
EEPROM
Data Bus 8-bit
Data
SRAM
Direct Addressing
Indirect Addressing
Interrupt
Unit
SPI
Unit
Watchdog
Timer
Analog
Comparator
I/O Module 2
I/O Module1
I/O Module n
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard
architecture – with separate memories and buses for program and data. Instructions in
the program memory are executed with a single level pipelining. While one instruction is
being executed, the next instruction is pre-fetched from the program memory. This
concept enables instructions to be executed in every clock cycle. The program memory
is In-System Reprogrammable Flash memory.
10
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The fast-access Register File contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with
a single clock cycle access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU)
operation. In a typical ALU operation, two operands are output from the Register File,
the operation is executed, and the result is stored back in the Register File – in one
clock cycle.
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for
Data Space addressing – enabling efficient address calculations. One of these address
pointers can also be used as an address pointer for look up tables in Flash program
memory. These added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register, described
later in this section.
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a
constant and a register. Single register operations can also be executed in the ALU.
After an arithmetic operation, the Status Register is updated to reflect information about
the result of the operation.
Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions,
able to directly address the whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single
16-bit word format. Every program memory address contains a 16- or 32-bit instruction.
Program Flash memory space is divided in two sections, the Boot Program section and
the Application Program section. Both sections have dedicated Lock bits for write and
read/write protection. The SPM instruction that writes into the Application Flash memory
section must reside in the Boot Program section.
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is
stored on the Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and
consequently the Stack size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the
SRAM. All user programs must initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines
or interrupts are executed). The Stack Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O
space. The data SRAM can easily be accessed through the five different addressing
modes supported in the AVR architecture.
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional
Global Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate
Interrupt Vector in the Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have priority in accordance
with their Interrupt Vector position. The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher
the priority.
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control
Registers, SPI, and other I/O functions. The I/O Memory can be accessed directly, or as
the Data Space locations following those of the Register File, 0x20 - 0x5F. In addition,
the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 has Extended I/O space from 0x60 - 0x1FF in SRAM
where only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
7.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general
purpose working registers. Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between
general purpose registers or between a register and an immediate are executed. The
ALU operations are divided into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit
functions. Some implementations of the architecture also provide a powerful multiplier
supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication and fractional format. See the
“Instruction Set” section for a detailed description.
11
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
7.4 Status Register
The Status Register contains information about the result of the most recently executed
arithmetic instruction. This information can be used for altering program flow in order to
perform conditional operations. Note that the Status Register is updated after all ALU
operations, as specified in the Instruction Set Reference. This will in many cases
remove the need for using the dedicated compare instructions, resulting in faster and
more compact code. The Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an
interrupt routine and restored when returning from an interrupt. This must be handled by
software.
7.4.1 SREG – Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$3F ($5F) I T H S V N Z C SREG
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – I - Global Interrupt Enable
The global interrupt enable bit must be set (one) for the interrupts to be enabled. The
individual interrupt enable control is then performed in separate control registers. If the
global interrupt enable bit is cleared (zero), none of the interrupts are enabled
independent of the individual interrupt enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware
after an interrupt has occurred, and is set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent
interrupts.
• Bit 6 – T - Bit Copy Storage
The bit copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T bit as source
and destination for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the register file can be
copied into T by the BST instruction, and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a register
in the register file by the BLD instruction.
• Bit 5 – H - Half Carry Flag
The half carry flag H indicates a half carry in some arithmetic operations. See the
Instruction Set Description for detailed information.
• Bit 4 – S - Sign Bit
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the negative flag N and the two's
complement overflow flag V. See the Instruction Set Description for detailed
information.
• Bit 3 – V - Two's Complement Overflow Flag
The two's complement overflow flag V supports two's complement arithmetics. See the
Instruction Set Description for detailed information.
• Bit 2 – N - Negative Flag
The negative flag N indicates a negative result after the different arithmetic and logic
operations. See the Instruction Set Description for detailed information.
• Bit 1 – Z - Zero Flag
The zero flag Z indicates a zero result after the different arithmetic and logic operations.
See the Instruction Set Description for detailed information.
• Bit 0 – C - Carry Flag
The carry flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the Instruction
Set Description for detailed information. Note that the status register is not automatically
12
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored when returning from an interrupt
routine. This must be handled by software.
7.5 General Purpose Register File
The Register File is optimized for the AVR Enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to
achieve the required performance and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are
supported by the Register File:
• One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 16-bit result input
• One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input
Figure 7-1 below shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the
CPU.
Figure 7-1. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers
Most of the instructions operating on the Register File have direct access to all
registers, and most of them are single cycle instructions.
As shown in Figure 7-1 above each register is also assigned a data memory address,
mapping them directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not
being physically implemented as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides
great flexibility in access of the registers, as the X-, Y- and Z-pointer registers can be
set to index any register in the file.
7.5.1 The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register
The registers R26...R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage.
These registers are 16-bit address pointers for indirect addressing of the data space.
The three indirect address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as described in Figure 7-2
on page 13.
13
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 7-2. The X-, Y-, Z-registers
In the different addressing modes these address registers have functions as fixed
displacement, automatic increment, and automatic decrement (see the instruction set
reference for details).
7.6 Stack Pointer
The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for
storing return addresses after interrupts and subroutine calls. The Stack Pointer
Register always points to the top of the Stack. Note that the Stack is implemented as
growing from higher memory locations to lower memory locations. This implies that a
Stack PUSH command decreases the Stack Pointer.
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and
Interrupt Stacks are located. This Stack space in the data SRAM must be defined by
the program before any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are enabled. The
Stack Pointer must be set to point above 0x0200. The initial value of the stack pointer is
the last address of the internal SRAM.
The Stack Pointer is decremented by one when data is pushed onto the Stack with the
PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by two when the return address is pushed onto
the Stack with subroutine call or interrupt. The Stack Pointer is incremented by one
when data is popped from the Stack with the POP instruction, and it is incremented by
two when data is popped from the Stack with return from subroutine RET or return from
interrupt RETI.
When the FLASH memory exceeds 128Kbyte one additional cycle is required. In this
case the Stack Pointer is decremented by three when the return address is pushed onto
the Stack with subroutine call or interrupt and is incremented by three when data is
popped from the Stack with return from subroutine RET or return from interrupt RETI.
Note: 1. If the Stack Pointer is zero and then decremented the new Stack Pointer value will
be different within the device family: 0xffff (256K Byte FLASH memory),
0x7fff (128 K Byte FLASH memory) and 0x03fff (64 K Byte FLASH memory),
respectively. Useful upper values of the Stack Pointer are defined by the SRAM
size.
7.6.1 SPH – Stack Pointer High
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$3E ($5E) SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SPH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
14
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers SPL and SPH in the I/O
space. The number of bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the
data space in some implementations of the AVR architecture is so small that only SPL
is needed. In this case, the SPH Register will not be present.
• Bit 7:0 – SP15:8 - Stack Pointer High Byte
7.6.2 SPL – Stack Pointer Low
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$3D ($5D) SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 SPL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers SPL and SPH in the I/O
space. The number of bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the
data space in some implementations of the AVR architecture is so small that only SPL
is needed. In this case, the SPH Register will not be present.
• Bit 7:0 – SP7:0 - Stack Pointer Low Byte
7.6.3 RAMPZ – Extended Z-pointer Register for ELPM/SPM
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$3B ($5B) Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 RAMPZ1
RAMPZ0
RAMPZ
Read/Write R R R R R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
For ELPM/SPM instructions, the Z-pointer is a concatenation of RAMPZ, ZH, and ZL.
Note that LPM is not affected by the RAMPZ setting.
• Bit 7:2 – Res5:0 - Reserved
For compatibility with future devices, be sure to write these bits to zero.
• Bit 1:0 – RAMPZ1:0 - Extended Z-Pointer Value
Represent the MSB's of the Z-Pointer.
Table 7-2 RAMPZ Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
RAMPZ1:0 0 Default value of Z-pointer MSB's.
For ELPM/SPM instructions, the Z-pointer is a concatenation of RAMPZ, ZH, and ZL,
as shown in Figure 7-3 below. Note that LPM is not affected by the RAMPZ setting.
Figure 7-3. The Z-pointer used by ELPM and SPM
15
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The actual number of bits is implementation dependent. Unused bits in an
implementation will always read as zero. For compatibility with future devices, be sure
to write these bits to zero.
7.6.4 EIND – Extended Indirect Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$3C ($5C) EIND0 EIND
Read/Write RW
Initial Value 0
• Bit 0 – EIND0 - Bit 0
For EICALL/EIJMP instructions.
7.7 Instruction Execution Timing
Figure 7-4. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions
clk
1st Instruction Fetch
1st Instruction Execute
2nd Instruction Fetch
2nd Instruction Execute
3rd Instruction Fetch
3rd Instruction Execute
4th Instruction Fetch
T1 T2 T3 T4
CPU
Figure 7-5 below shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single
clock cycle an ALU operation using two register operands is executed, and the result is
stored back to the destination register.
Figure 7-5. Single Cycle ALU operation
Total Execution Time
Register Operands Fetch
ALU Operation Execute
Result Write Back
T1 T2 T3 T4
clkCPU
7.8 Reset and Interrupt Handling
The AVR provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate
Reset Vector each have a separate program vector in the program memory space. All
16
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
interrupts are assigned individual enable bits which must be written logic one together
with the Global Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the
interrupt. Depending on the Program Counter value, interrupts may be automatically
disabled when Boot Lock bits BLB02 or BLB12 are programmed. This feature improves
software security. See the section "Memory Programming" on page 502 for details.
The lowest addresses in the program memory space are by default defined as the
Reset and Interrupt Vectors. The complete list of vectors is shown in "Interrupts" on
page 241. The list also determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The
lower the address the higher is the priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and
next is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request 0. The Interrupt Vectors can be moved to
the start of the Boot Flash section by setting the IVSEL bit in the MCU Control Register
(MCUCR). Refer to "Interrupts" on page 241 for more information. The Reset Vector
can also be moved to the start of the Boot Flash section by programming the
BOOTRST Fuse, see "Memory Programming" on page 502.
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts
are disabled. The user software can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested
interrupts. All enabled interrupts can then interrupt the current interrupt routine. The I-bit
is automatically set when a Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that
sets the Interrupt Flag. For these interrupts, the Program Counter is vectored to the
actual Interrupt Vector in order to execute the interrupt handling routine, and hardware
clears the corresponding Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writing a
logic one to the flag bit position(s) to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while
the corresponding interrupt enable bit is cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and
remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the flag is cleared by software. Similarly, if
one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt Enable bit is cleared,
the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the Global
Interrupt Enable bit is set, and will then be executed by order of priority.
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present.
These interrupts do not necessarily have Interrupt Flags. If the interrupt condition
disappears before the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will not be triggered.
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and
execute one more instruction before any pending interrupt is served.
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt
routine, nor restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by
software.
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately
disabled. No interrupt will be executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs
simultaneously with the CLI instruction. The following example shows how this can be
used to avoid interrupts during the timed EEPROM write sequence.
Assembly Code Example
in r16, SREG ; store SREG value
cli ; disable interrupts during timed sequence
sbi EECR, EEMPE ; start EEPROM write
sbi EECR, EEPE
out SREG, r16 ; restore SREG value (I-bit)
17
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Assembly Code Example
C Code Example
char cSREG;
cSREG = SREG; /* store SREG value */
/* disable interrupts during timed sequence */
__disable_interrupt();
EECR |= (1<<EEMPE); /* start EEPROM write */
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);
SREG = cSREG; /* restore SREG value (I-bit) */
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be
executed before any pending interrupts, as shown in this example.
Assembly Code Example
sei ; set Global Interrupt Enable
sleep; enter sleep, waiting for interrupt
; note: will enter sleep before any pending
; interrupt(s)
C Code Example
__enable_interrupt(); /* set Global Interrupt Enable */
__sleep(); /* enter sleep, waiting for interrupt */
/* note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s) */
7.8.1 Interrupt Response Time
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is five clock cycles
minimum. After five clock cycles the program vector address for the actual interrupt
handling routine is executed. During these five clock cycle period, the Program Counter
is pushed onto the Stack. The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and this
jump takes three clock cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle
instruction, this instruction is completed before the interrupt is served. If an interrupt
occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt execution response time is
increased by five clock cycles. This increase comes in addition to the start-up time from
the selected sleep mode.
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes five clock cycles. During these five
clock cycles, the Program Counter (three bytes) is popped back from the Stack, the
Stack Pointer is incremented by three, and the I-bit in SREG is set.
18
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
8 AVR Memories
This section describes the different memories in the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2. The
AVR architecture has two main memory spaces, the Data Memory and the Program
Memory space. In addition, the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 features an EEPROM
Memory for data storage. All three memory spaces are linear and regular.
8.1 In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 contains FLASH_SIZE Bytes On-chip In-System
Reprogrammable Flash memory for program storage, see Figure 8-6 below. Since all
AVR instructions are 16 or 32 bits wide, the Flash is 16 bit wide. For software security,
the Flash Program memory space is divided into two sections, Boot Program section
and Application Program section.
The Flash memory has an endurance of at least 10'000 write/erase cycles. The
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 Program Counter (PC) is 16 bits wide, thus addressing
the required program memory locations. The operation of Boot Program section and
associated Boot Lock bits for software protection are described in detail in "Boot Loader
Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming" on page 485. "Memory Programming"
on page 502 contains a detailed description on Flash data serial downloading using the
SPI pins or the JTAG interface.
Constant tables can be allocated within the entire program memory address space (see
the LPM – Load Program Memory instruction description and ELPM – Extended Load
Program Memory instruction description).
Timing diagrams for instruction fetch and execution are presented in "Instruction
Execution Timing" on page 15.
Figure 8-6. Program Flash Memory Map
Boot Flash Section
Program Memory
Application Flash Section $0000
The application section of the Flash memory contains 3 user signature pages. These
pages can be used to store data that should never be modified by an application
program e.g. ID numbers, calibration data etc. For details see section "User Signature
Data" on page 505.
8.2 SRAM Data Memory
Figure 8-7 on page 19 shows how the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 SRAM Memory is
organized. The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 is a complex microcontroller with more
peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in the Opcode for
19
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O space from $060 – $1FF in SRAM,
only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
The first Data Memory locations address both the Register File, the I/O Memory,
Extended I/O Memory, and the internal data SRAM. The first 32 locations address the
Register file, the next 64 location the standard I/O Memory, then 416 locations of
Extended I/O memory and the following locations address the internal data SRAM.
The five different addressing modes for the data memory cover: Direct, Indirect with
Displacement, Indirect, Indirect with Pre-decrement, and Indirect with Post-increment.
In the Register file, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect addressing pointer
registers.
The direct addressing reaches the entire data space.
The Indirect with Displacement mode reaches 63 address locations from the base
address given by the Y- or Z-register.
When using register indirect addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and post-
increment, the address registers X, Y, and Z are decremented or incremented.
The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O registers, and the internal data SRAM
(SRAM_SIZE Bytes) in the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 are all accessible through all
these addressing modes. The Register File is described in "General Purpose Register
File" on page 12.
Figure 8-7. Data Memory Map
32 Registers
64 I/O Registers
Internal SRAM
(32K/16K/8K x 8)
$0000 - $001F
$0020 - $005F
$21FF
$41FF
$81FF
$FFFF
$0060 - $01FF
Data Memory
416 Ext I/O Reg.
$0200
8.2.1 Data Memory Access Times
This section describes the general access timing concepts for internal memory access.
Access to the internal data SRAM is performed in two clkCPU cycles as described in
Figure 8-8 on page 20.
20
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 8-8. On-Chip Data SRAM Access Cycles
clk
WR
RD
Data
Data
Address Address valid
T1 T2 T3
Compute Address
Read Write
CPU
Memory Access Instruction
Next Instruction
8.3 EEPROM Data Memory
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 contains EEPROM_SIZE Bytes of data EEPROM
memory. It is organized as a separate data space. Read access is byte-wise. The
access between the EEPROM and the CPU is described in the following, specifying the
EEPROM Address Registers, the EEPROM Data Register, and the EEPROM Control
Register.
For a detailed description of SPI, JTAG and Parallel data downloading to the EEPROM,
see "Serial Downloading" on page 519, "Programming via the JTAG Interface" on page
523, and "Programming the EEPROM" on page 533 respectively.
8.3.1 EEPROM Read Write Access
The EEPROM Access Registers are accessible in the I/O space, see "EEPROM
Register Description" on page 26.
The write access time for the EEPROM is given in Table 8-3 below. A self-timing
function, however, lets the user software detect when the next byte can be written. If the
user code contains instructions that write the EEPROM, some precautions must be
taken. In heavily filtered power supplies, DVDD is likely to rise or fall slowly on power-
up/down. This causes the device for some period of time to run at a voltage lower than
specified as minimum for the clock frequency used. See "Preventing EEPROM
Corruption" on page 26 for details on how to avoid problems in these situations.
In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a specific write procedure must be
followed. See the description of the EEPROM Control Register for details on this,
"EEPROM Register Description" on page 26.
When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four clock cycles before the next
instruction is executed. When the EEPROM is written, the CPU is halted for two clock
cycles before the next instruction is executed.
The calibrated oscillator is used to time the EEPROM accesses. The following table
lists the typical programming time for EEPROM access from the CPU.
Table 8-3. EEPROM Programming Time
Symbol Typical Programming time
EEPROM write (from CPU) 4.5 ms
EEPROM erase (from CPU) 8.5 ms
21
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The subsequent code examples show assembly and C functions for programming the
EEPROM with separate and combined (atomic) erase/write operations respectively.
The examples assume that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling interrupts
globally) so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions. The
examples also assume that no Flash Boot Loader is present in the software. If such
code is present, the EEPROM write function must also wait for any ongoing SPM
command to finish.
Assembly Code Example (Single Byte Programming)
EEPROM_write:
; Wait for completion of previous erase/write
sbic EECR,EEPE
rjmp EEPROM_write
; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register
out EEARH, r18
out EEARL, r17
; Write data (r16) to Data Register
out EEDR,r16
; Write is controlled with r20 and r21
ldi r20, (1<<EEMPE) + (2<<EEPM0)
ldi r21, (1<<EEMPE) + (1<<EEPE) + (2<<EEPM0)
; Start eeprom write
out EECR, r20
out EECR, r21
ret
EEPROM_erase:
; Wait for completion of previous erase/write
sbic EECR,EEPE
rjmp EEPROM_erase
; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register
out EEARH, r18
out EEARL, r17
; Set EEDR to 0xff
ser r16
out EEDR,r16
; Erase is controlled with r20 and r21
ldi r20, (1<<EEMPE) + (1<<EEPM0)
ldi r21, (1<<EEMPE) + (1<<EEPE) + (1<<EEPM0)
; Start eeprom erase
out EECR, r20
out EECR, r21
ret
; main program
…
ldi r17, addr_low
ldi r18, addr_high
call EEPROM_erase
ldi r16, ee_data
22
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
call EEPROM_write
…
C Code Example (Single Byte Programming)
void EEPROM_write(unsigned int uiAddress, unsigned char ucData)
{
/* Wait for completion of previous erase/write */
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))
;
/* Set up address */
EEAR = uiAddress;
EEDR = 255;
/* Write logical one to EEMPE and enable erase only*/
EECR = (1<<EEMPE) + (1<<EEPM0);
/* Start eeprom erase by setting EEPE */
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);
/* Wait for completion of erase */
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))
;
/* Set up Data Registers */
EEDR = ucData;
/* Write logical one to EEMPE and enable write only */
EECR = (1<<EEMPE) + (2<<EEPM0);
/* Start eeprom write by setting EEPE */
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);
}
Although the code for separate erase/write operations is more complex it is
recommended over the atomic operation. The erase operation can be omitted if the
target EEPROM byte already contains the value 255 (e.g. after a chip erase without the
EESAVE fuse set).
Assembly Code Example (Atomic Operation)
EEPROM_atomic_write:
; Wait for completion of previous write
sbic EECR,EEPE
rjmp EEPROM_atomic_write
; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register
out EEARH, r18
out EEARL, r17
; Write data (r16) to Data Register
out EEDR,r16
; Write logical one to EEMPE
sbi EECR,EEMPE
; Start eeprom write by setting EEPE
sbi EECR,EEPE
ret
23
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Example (Atomic Operation)
void EEPROM_atomic_write(unsigned int uiAddress, unsigned char ucData)
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))
;
/* Set up address and Data Registers */
EEAR = uiAddress;
EEDR = ucData;
/* Write logical one to EEMPE */
EECR |= (1<<EEMPE);
/* Start eeprom write by setting EEPE */
EECR |= (1<<EEPE);
}
The next code examples show assembly and C functions for reading the EEPROM. The
examples assume that interrupts are controlled so that no interrupts will occur during
execution of these functions.
Assembly Code Example (EEPROM Read)
EEPROM_read:
; Wait for completion of previous write
sbic EECR,EEPE
rjmp EEPROM_read
; Set up address (r18:r17) in address register
out EEARH, r18
out EEARL, r17
; Start eeprom read by writing EERE
sbi EECR,EERE
; Read data from Data Register
in r16,EEDR
ret
C Code Example (EEPROM Read)
unsigned char EEPROM_read(unsigned int uiAddress)
{
/* Wait for completion of previous write */
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE))
;
/* Set up address register */
EEAR = uiAddress;
/* Start eeprom read by writing EERE */
EECR |= (1<<EERE);
/* Return data from Data Register */
return EEDR;
}
24
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The programming time can be reduced if an entire 8 byte EEPROM page is
programmed instead of single bytes. In this case the data has to be loaded into the
page buffer first. The page buffer will auto-erase after a write or erase operation. It is
also erased after a system reset. Note that it is not possible to write more than one time
to each address without erasing the page buffer. The EEPROM page programming is
shown in following example code.
Assembly Code Example (Page Mode Programming)
EEPROM_pageerase:
sbic EECR,EEPE ; wait for completion of previous
rjmp EEPROM_pageerase ; EEPROM erase/write
; Page buffer loading is controlled with r20 and r21
ldi r20, (3<<EEPM0) + (1<<EEMPE)
ldi r21, (3<<EEPM0) + (1<<EEMPE) + (1<<EEPE)
ldi r16, 7 ; EEPROM page has 8 bytes, loop 7 bytes
ser r16
out EEDR,r16 ; set EEDR to 0xff
er_page_load:
out EEARL, r17 ; set up address in page buffer
out EECR, r20
out EECR, r21
er_load_wait:
sbic EECR, EEWE ; wait for load complete
rjmp er_load_wait
dec r17 ; decrement address counter
dec r16 ; decrement loop counter
brne er_page_load ; complete loading of 7 bytes
; Erase is controlled with r20 and r21, load 8th byte
ldi r20, (1<<EEMPE) + (1<<EEPM0)
ldi r21, (1<<EEMPE) + (1<<EEPE) + (1<<EEPM0)
out EEARL, r17 ; set up address, low byte (8th byte)
out EEARH, r18 ; set up address, high byte
out EECR, r20 ; start EEPROM page erase
out EECR, r21
ret
; main program
…
ldi r17, addr_low
ldi r18, addr_high
call EEPROM_pageerase
…
C Code Example (Page Mode Programming)(1,2)
void EEPROM_pagewrite(uint16_t uiAddress, uint8_t *ucData)
{
uint8_t byte_cnt = 0;
25
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE)); // wait finish of previous erase/write
EEAR = uiAddress; // set up address
EEDR = 255; // data for erase
do {
EECR = (1<<EEMPE) + (3<<EEPM0); // enable buffer load only
EECR |= (1<<EEPE); // start EEPROM loading
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE)); // wait for loading complete
EEARL++; // next address
} while( ++byte_cnt<7 );
EECR = (1<<EEMPE) + (1<<EEPM0); // load last byte, erase only
EECR |= (1<<EEPE); // start EEPROM erase
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE)); // wait for erase complete
EEAR = uiAddress; // set up address
byte_cnt = 0;
do {
EEDR = ucData[byte_cnt]; // load data from SRAM
EECR = (1<<EEMPE) + (3<<EEPM0); // enable buffer load only
EECR |= (1<<EEPE); // start EEPROM loading
while(EECR & (1<<EEPE)); // wait for loading complete
EEARL++; // next address
} while( ++byte_cnt<7 );
EEDR = ucData[byte_cnt]; // set up last data byte
EECR = (1<<EEMPE) + (2<<EEPM0); // load last byte, write only
EECR |= (1<<EEPE); // start EEPROM write
}
int main(void)
{
uint8_t buffer[8];
// load buffer
…
EEPROM_pagewrite(0x000, &buffer[0] ); // write EEPROM page 0
…
}
Notes: 1. The example code assumes that the part specific header file is included.
2. See section "About Code Examples" on page 8.
The EEPROM page buffer can be loaded in arbitrary order. The data in the page buffer
can also be overwritten. Loading the last byte and executing the EEPROM
programming is one command. This programming command can be an erase, a write
or a combined atomic erase/write operation just like for single byte programming mode.
26
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
8.3.2 Preventing EEPROM Corruption
During periods of low DEVDD, the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply
voltage is too low for the CPU and the EEPROM to operate properly. These issues are
the same as for board level systems using EEPROM, and the same design solutions
should be applied.
An EEPROM data corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too
low. First, a regular write sequence to the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to
operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the
supply voltage is too low.
EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following this design
recommendation:
Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply voltage.
This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD). If the detection
level of the internal BOD does not match the needed detection level, an external low
DEVDD reset protection circuit can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is
in progress, the write operation will be completed provided that the power supply
voltage is sufficient.
8.4 EEPROM Register Description
8.4.1 EEARH – EEPROM Address Register High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$22 ($42) Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 EEAR11
EEAR10
EEAR9 EEAR8 EEARH
Read/Write R R R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 X X X X
The EEPROM Address Registers EEARH and EEARL specify the EEPROM address in
the 4K bytes EEPROM space. The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly
between 0 and 4096. The initial value of EEAR is undefined. A proper value must be
written before the EEPROM may be accessed.
• Bit 7:4 – Res3:0 - Reserved
• Bit 3:0 – EEAR11:8 - EEPROM Address
8.4.2 EEARL – EEPROM Address Register Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$21 ($41) EEAR7 EEAR6 EEAR5 EEAR4 EEAR3 EEAR2 EEAR1 EEAR0 EEARL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value X X X X X X X X
The EEPROM Address Registers EEARH and EEARL specify the EEPROM address in
the 4K bytes EEPROM space. The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly
between 0 and 4096. The initial value of EEAR is undefined. A proper value must be
written before the EEPROM may be accessed.
• Bit 7:0 – EEAR7:0 - EEPROM Address
27
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
8.4.3 EEDR – EEPROM Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$20 ($40) EEDR7:0 EEDR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
For the EEPROM write operation, the EEDR Register contains the data to be written to
the EEPROM in the address given by the EEAR Register. For the EEPROM read
operation, the EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the address given
by EEAR.
• Bit 7:0 – EEDR7:0 - EEPROM Data
8.4.4 EECR – EEPROM Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$1F ($3F) Res1 Res0 EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE EECR
Read/Write R R RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 X X 0 0 X 0
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved
• Bit 5:4 – EEPM1:0 - EEPROM Programming Mode
The EEPROM Programming mode bit setting defines if a page buffer load or a
programming action will be triggered when writing EEPE. It is possible to program data
in one atomic operation (erase the old value and program the new value) or to split the
Erase and Write operations in two different operations. While EEPE is set, any write to
EEPM1:0 will be ignored. During reset, the EEPM1:0 bits will be reset to 0 unless the
EEPROM is busy programming.
Table 8-4 EEPM Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
EEPM1:0 0x00 Erase and Write in one operation (Atomic
Operation)
0x01 Erase only
0x02 Write only
0x03 Page buffer load
• Bit 3 – EERIE - EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable
Writing EERIE to one enables the EEPROM Ready Interrupt if the I bit in SREG is set.
Writing EERIE to zero disables the interrupt. The EEPROM Ready interrupt generates a
constant interrupt when EEPE is cleared.
• Bit 2 – EEMPE - EEPROM Master Write Enable
The EEMPE bit determines whether setting EEPE to one causes the EEPROM to be
written or the page buffer to be loaded. When EEMPE is set, setting EEPE within four
clock cycles will either start programming the EEPROM or load data to the EEPROM
page buffer at the selected address If EEMPE is zero, setting EEPE will have no effect.
When EEMPE has been written to one by software, hardware clears the bit to zero after
four clock cycles. See the description of the EEPE bit for an EEPROM write procedure.
• Bit 1 – EEPE - EEPROM Programming Enable
28
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The EEPROM Programming Enable Signal EEPE is the write strobe to the EEPROM. It
triggers either the programming or the page buffer loading. When address and data are
correctly set up, the EEPE bit must be written to one to write the value into the
EEPROM. The EEMPE bit must be written to one before a logical one is written to
EEPE, otherwise no EEPROM write or load takes place. The following procedure
should be adopted when writing or loading the EEPROM (the order of steps 3 and 4 is
not essential):
1. Wait until EEPE becomes zero.
2. Wait until SPMEN in SPMCSR becomes zero.
3. Write new EEPROM address to EEAR (optional).
4. Write new EEPROM data to EEDR (optional).
5. Write a logical one to the EEMPE bit while writing a zero to EEPE in EECR.
6. Within four clock cycles after setting EEMPE, write a logical one to EEPE.
The EEPROM can not be programmed and the page buffer not be loaded during a CPU
write to the Flash memory. The software must check that the Flash programming is
completed before initiating a new EEPROM write. Step 2 is only relevant if the software
contains a Boot Loader allowing the CPU to program the Flash. If the Flash is never
being updated by the CPU, step 2 can be omitted.
Caution: an interrupt between step 5 and step 6 will make the write cycle fail, since the
EEPROM Master Write Enable will time-out. If an interrupt routine accessing the
EEPROM is interrupting another EEPROM access, the EEAR or EEDR Register will be
modified, causing the interrupted EEPROM access to fail. It is recommended to have
the Global Interrupt Flag cleared during all steps to avoid these problems.
When the write access time has elapsed, the EEPE bit is cleared by hardware. The
user software can poll this bit and wait for a zero before writing the next byte. When
EEPE has been set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction is
executed.
• Bit 0 – EERE - EEPROM Read Enable
The EEPROM Read Enable Signal EERE is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When the
correct address is set up in the EEAR Register, the EERE bit must be written to a logic
one to trigger the EEPROM read. The EEPROM read access takes one instruction and
the requested data is available immediately. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is
halted for four cycles before the next instruction is executed. The user should poll the
EEPE bit before starting the read operation. If a write operation is in progress, it is
neither possible to read the EEPROM nor to change the EEAR Register.
8.5 I/O Memory
The Input/Output (I/O) space definition of the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 is shown in
"Register Summary" on page 540.
All ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. All
I/O locations may be accessed by the LD/LDS/LDD and ST/STS/STD instructions,
transferring data between the 32 general purpose working registers and the I/O space.
I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 – 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the
SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the value of single bits can be checked by
using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer to the AVR instruction set for more details.
When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 – 0x3F
29
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
must be used. When addressing I/O Registers as data space using LD and ST
instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 is a complex microcontroller with more peripheral units
than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Opcode for the IN and OUT
instructions. For the Extended I/O space from 0x60 – 0x1FF in SRAM, only the
ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits may not be modified. Reserved
registers and I/O memory addresses should never be written.
Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike
most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI instructions will only operate on the specified bit,
and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The CBI and SBI
instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.
The control registers of I/O and peripherals are explained in later sections.
8.6 General Purpose I/O Registers
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 contains three General Purpose I/O Registers.
These registers can be used for storing any information, and they are particularly useful
for storing global variables and Status Flags. General Purpose I/O Registers within the
address range 0x00 – 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI, CBI, SBIS, and
SBIC instructions.
8.6.1 GPIOR0 – General Purpose IO Register 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$1E ($3E) GPIOR07:00 GPIOR0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The three General Purpose I/O Registers can be used for storing any information.
• Bit 7:0 – GPIOR07:00 - General Purpose I/O Register 0 Value
8.6.2 GPIOR1 – General Purpose IO Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$2A ($4A) GPIOR17:10 GPIOR1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The three General Purpose I/O Registers can be used for storing any information.
• Bit 7:0 – GPIOR17:10 - General Purpose I/O Register 1 Value
8.6.3 GPIOR2 – General Purpose I/O Register 2
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$2B ($4B) GPIOR27:20 GPIOR2
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
30
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The three General Purpose I/O Registers can be used for storing any information.
• Bit 7:0 – GPIOR27:20 - General Purpose I/O Register 2 Value
8.7 Other Port Registers
The inherited control registers of missing ports located in the I/O space are kept in the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2. They can be used as general purpose I/O registers for
storing any information. Registers placed in the address range 0x00 – 0x1F are directly
bit-accessible using the SBI, CBI, SBIS and SBIC instructions.
8.7.1 PORTA – Port A Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$02 ($22) PORTA7:0 PORTA
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The PORTA register can be used as a General Purpose I/O Register for storing any
information.
• Bit 7:0 – PORTA7:0 - Port A Data Register Value
8.7.2 DDRA – Port A Data Direction Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$01 ($21) DDA7 DDA6 DDA5 DDA4 DDA3 DDA2 DDA1 DDA0 DDRA
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DDRA register can be used as a General Purpose I/O Register for storing any
information.
• Bit 7:0 – DDA7:0 - Port A Data Direction Register Value
8.7.3 PINA – Port A Input Pins Address
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$00 ($20) PINA7:0 PINA
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The PINA register is reserved for internal use and cannot be used as a General
Purpose I/O Register.
• Bit 7:0 – PINA7:0 - Port A Input Pins
31
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
8.7.4 PORTC – Port C Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$08 ($28) PORTC7:0 PORTC
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The PORTC register can be used as a General Purpose I/O Register for storing any
information.
• Bit 7:0 – PORTC7:0 - Port C Data Register Value
8.7.5 DDRC – Port C Data Direction Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$07 ($27) DDC7 DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 DDRC
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DDRC register can be used as a General Purpose I/O Register for storing any
information.
• Bit 7:0 – DDC7:0 - Port C Data Direction Register Value
8.7.6 PINC – Port C Input Pins Address
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$06 ($26) PINC7:0 PINC
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The PINC register is reserved for internal use and cannot be used as a General
Purpose I/O Register.
• Bit 7:0 – PINC7:0 - Port C Input Pins
32
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9 Low-Power 2.4 GHz Transceiver
9.1 Features
• High performance RF-CMOS 2.4 GHz radio transceiver targeted for IEEE
802.15.4™, ZigBee™, IPv6 / 6LoWPAN, RF4CE, SP100, WirelessHART™ and
ISM applications
• Outstanding link budget (103.5 dB):
o Receiver sensitivity -100 dBm
o Programmable output power from -17 dBm up to +3.5 dBm
• Ultra-low current consumption:
o TRX_OFF = 0.4 mA
o RX_ON = 12.5 mA
o BUSY_TX = 14.5 mA (at max. transmit power of +3.5 dBm)
• Optimized for low BoM cost and ease of production:
o Few external components necessary (crystal, capacitors and
antenna)
o Excellent ESD robustness
• Easy to use interface:
o Registers and frame buffer access from software
o Dedicated radio transceiver interrupts
• Radio transceiver features:
o 128 byte FIFO (SRAM) for data buffering
o Integrated RX/TX switch
o Fully integrated, fast settling PLL to support frequency hopping
o Battery monitor
o Fast wake-up time < 0.25 ms
• Special IEEE 802.15.4 2006 hardware support:
o FCS computation and clear channel assessment (CCA)
o RSSI measurement, energy detection and link quality indication
• MAC hardware accelerator:
o Automated acknowledgement, CSMA-CA and frame
retransmission
o Automatic address filtering
o Automated FCS check
• Extended Feature Set Hardware Support:
o AES 128 bit hardware accelerator
o RX/TX indication (external RF front-end control)
o RX antenna diversity
o Supported PSDU data rates: 250 kb/s, 500 kb/s, 1 Mb/s and 2 Mb/s
o True random number generation for security applications
• Compliant to IEEE 802.15.4-2006, IEEE 802.15.4-2003 and RF4CE
• Compliant to EN 300 328/440, FCC-CFR-47 Part 15, ARIB STD-66, RSS-210
33
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 features a low-power 2.4 GHz radio transceiver
designed for industrial and consumer ZigBee/IEEE 802.15.4, 6LoWPAN, RF4CE and
high data rate 2.4 GHz ISM band applications. The radio transceiver is a true peripheral
block of the AVR microcontroller. All RF-critical components except the antenna, crystal
and de-coupling capacitors are integrated on-chip. Therefore, the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 is particularly suitable for applications like:
• 2.4 GHz IEEE 802.15.4 and ZigBee systems
• 6LoWPAN and RF4CE systems
• Wireless sensor networks
• Industrial control, sensing and automation (SP100, WirelessHART)
• Residential and commercial automation
• Health care
• Consumer electronics
• PC peripherals
9.2 General Circuit Description
This radio transceiver is part of a system-on-chip solution with an AVR® microcontroller.
It comprises a complex peripheral component containing the analog radio, digital
modulation and demodulation including time and frequency synchronization and data
buffering. The number of external components for the transceiver operation is
minimized such that only the antenna, the crystal and decoupling capacitors are
required. The bidirectional differential antenna pins (RFP, RFN) are used for
transmission and reception, thus no external antenna switch is needed.
The transceiver block diagram of the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 is shown in Figure
9-9 below.
Figure 9-9. Transceiver Block Diagram
AVREG
LNA
PLL PA
PPF BPF Limiter RX
ADC
AGC
ext. PA and Power
Control
Configuration Registers
µC
Interface
RSSI
Data
Interrupts
Address
Control
DIG3/4
RFP
RFN
TX Data
Control Logic
Antenna Diversity
FTN, BATMON
XOSC
XTAL1
XTAL2
Analog Domain Digital Domain
AES
DIG1/2
AD
RX BBP
Frame
Buffer
TX BBP
DVREG
34
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The received RF signal at pins RFN and RFP is differentially fed through the low-noise
amplifier (LNA) to the RF filter (PPF) to generate a complex signal, driving the
integrated channel filter (BPF). The limiting amplifier provides sufficient gain to drive the
succeeding analog-to-digital converter (RX ADC) and generates a digital RSSI signal.
The RX ADC output signal is sampled by the digital base band receiver (RX BBP).
The transmit modulation scheme is offset-QPSK (O-QPSK) with half-sine pulse shaping
and 32-length block coding (spreading) according to [1] on page 110 and [2] on page
110. The modulation signal is generated in the digital transmitter (TX BBP) and applied
to the fractional-N frequency synthesis (PLL), to ensure the coherent phase modulation
required for demodulation of O-QPSK signals. The frequency-modulated signal is fed to
the power amplifier (PA).
A differential pin pair DIG3/DIG4 can be enabled to control an external RF front-end.
The two on-chip low-dropout voltage regulators (A|DVREG) provide the analog and
digital 1.8V supply.
An internal 128-byte RAM for RX and TX (Frame Buffer) buffers the data to be
transmitted or received.
The configuration of the reading and writing of the Frame Buffer is controlled via the
microcontroller interface.
The transceiver further contains comprehensive hardware-MAC support (Extended
Operating Mode) and a security engine (AES) to improve the overall system power
efficiency and timing. The 128-bit AES engine can be accessed in parallel to all PHY
operational transactions and states using the microcontroller interface, except during
transceiver power down state.
For applications not necessarily targeting IEEE 802.15.4 compliant networks, the radio
transceiver also supports alternative data rates up to 2 Mb/s.
For long-range applications or to improve the reliability of an RF connection the RF
performance can further be improved by using an external RF front-end or Antenna
Diversity. Both operation modes are supported by the radio transceiver with dedicated
control pins without the interaction of the microcontroller.
Additional features of the Extended Feature Set, see section "Radio Transceiver
Extended Feature Set" on page 92, are provided to simplify the interaction between
radio transceiver and microcontroller.
9.3 Transceiver to Microcontroller Interface
This section describes the internal Interface between the transceiver module and the
microcontroller. Unlike all other AVR I/O modules, the transceiver module can operate
asynchronously to the controller. The transceiver requires an accurate 16MHz crystal
clock for operation, but the controller can run at any frequency within its operating limits.
Note that the on-chip debug system (see section "Using the On-chip Debug System" on
page 473) must be disabled for the best RF performance of the radio transceiver.
9.3.1 Transceiver Configuration and Data Access
9.3.1.1 Register Access
All transceiver registers are mapped into I/O space of the controller. Due to the
asynchronous interface a register access can take up to three transceiver clock cycles.
Depending on the controller clock speed, program execution wait cycles are generated.
35
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
That means if the controller runs with about 16MHz or faster, at least three wait cycles
are generated, but if the controller runs with about 4MHz, no wait cycles are inserted. A
register access is only possible, if the transceiver clock is available. Otherwise it returns
0x00 regardless of the current register content. Therefore the transceiver must be
enabled (PRR1 Register) and not in SLEEP state.
9.3.1.2 Frame Buffer Access
The 128-byte Frame Buffer can hold the PHY service data unit (PSDU) data of one
IEEE 802.15.4 compliant RX or one TX frame of maximum length at a time. A detailed
description of the Frame Buffer can be found in section "Frame Buffer" on page 83. An
introduction to the IEEE 802.15.4 frame format can be found in section "Introduction –
IEEE 802.15.4-2006 Frame Format" on page 67.
The Frame Buffer is located within the controller I/O address space above of the
transceiver register set. The first byte of the Frame Buffer can be accessed with the
symbolical address TRXFBST and the last byte can be accessed with the symbolical
address TRXFBEND. Random access to single frame bytes is possible with “TRXFBST
+ byte index” or “TRXFBEND – byte index”. In contrast to the transceiver register
access, the Frame Buffer allows single cycle read/write operations for all controller
clock speeds.
The content of the Frame Buffer is only overwritten by a new received frame or a Frame
Buffer write access.
The Frame Buffer usage is different between received and transmitted frames.
Therefore it is not possible to retransmit a received frame without modifying the frame
buffer.
On received frames, the frame length byte is not stored in the Frame Buffer, but can be
accessed over the TST_RX_LENGTH register. During frame receive, the Link Quality
Indication (LQI) value (refer to "Link Quality Indication (LQI)" on page 78 ) is appended
to the frame data in the Frame Buffer.
For frame transmission, the first byte of the Frame Buffer must contain the frame length
information followed by the frame data. The TST_RX_LENGTH register does not need
to be written in this case.
A detailed description of the Frame Buffer usage for receive and transmit frames can be
found in Figure 9-32 on page 84.
Notes:
1. The Frame Buffer is shared between RX and TX; therefore, the frame data are overwritten by
new incoming frames. If the TX frame data are to be retransmitted, it must be ensured that no
frame was received in the meanwhile.
2. To avoid overwriting during receive, Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection can be enabled. For
details about this feature refer to section "Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection" on page 99.
3. It is not possible to retransmit received frames without inserting the frame length information at
the beginning of the Frame Buffer. That requires a complete read out of the received frame
and rewriting the modified frame to the Frame Buffer.
4. For exceptions, e.g. receiving acknowledgement frames in Extended Operating Mode
(TX_ARET) refer to section "TX_ARET_ON – Transmit with Automatic Retry and CSMA-CA
Retry" on page 63.
9.3.1.3 Transceiver Pin Register TRXPR
The Transceiver Pin Register TRXPR is located in the Controller clock domain and is
accessible even if the transceiver is in sleep state. This register provides access to the
36
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
pin functionality, known from the Atmel standalone transceiver devices (two chip
solution).
The register (TRXRST) can be used to reset the transceiver without resetting the
controller. After the reset bit was set, it is cleared immediately.
A second configuration bit (SLPTR) is used to control frame transmission or sleep and
wakeup of the transceiver. This bit is not cleared automatically.
The function of the SLPTR bit relates to the current state of the transceiver module and
is summarized in Table 9-1 below. The radio transceiver states are explained in detail in
section "Operating Modes" on page 38.
Table 9-1. SLPTR Multi-functional Configuration bit
Transceiver Status Function SLPTR Bit Description
PLL_ON TX start “0” “1” Starts frame transmission
TX_ARET_ON TX start “0” “1” Starts TX_ARET transaction
TRX_OFF Sleep “0” “1” Takes the radio transceiver into SLEEP state
SLEEP Wakeup “1” “0” Takes the radio transceiver back into TRX_OFF state;
In states PLL_ON and TX_ARET_ON, bit SLPTR is used to initiate a TX transaction.
Here bit SLPTR is sensitive on the transition from “0” to “1” only. The bit should be
cleared before the frame transmission is finished.
After initiating a state change by a “0” to “1” transition at bit SLPTR in radio transceiver
states TRX_OFF, RX_ON or RX_AACK_ON, the radio transceiver remains in the new
state as long as the bit is logical “1” and returns to the preceding state if the bit is set to
“0”.
SLEEP state
The SLEEP state is used when radio transceiver functionality is not required, and thus
the receiver module can be powered down to reduce the overall power consumption.
When the radio transceiver is in TRX_OFF state the microcontroller forces the
transceiver to SLEEP by setting SLPTR = “1”. The transceiver awakes when the
microcontroller releases bit SLPTR.
9.3.2 Interrupt Logic
9.3.2.1 Overview
The transceiver module differentiates between eight interrupt events. Internally all
pending interrupts are stored in a separate bit of the interrupt status register
(IRQ_STATUS). Each interrupt is enabled by setting the corresponding bit in the
interrupt mask register (IRQ_MASK). If an IRQ is enabled an interrupt service routine
must be defined to handle the IRQ. A pending IRQ is cleared automatically if an
Interrupt service routine is called. It is also possible to handle IRQs manually by polling
the IRQ_STATUS register. If an IRQ occurred, the appropriate IRQ_STATUS register
bit is set. The IRQ can be cleared by writing ‘1’ to the register bit. It is recommended to
clear the corresponding status bit before enabling an interrupt.
More information about interrupt handling by the controller can be found in section
"Interrupts" on page 241.
The supported interrupts for the Basic Operating Mode are summarized in Table 9-2 on
page 37.
37
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 9-2. Interrupt Description in Basic Operating Mode
IRQ Vector
Number/
Priority (1)
IRQ Name Description Section
64 TRX24_AWAKE Indicates radio transceiver reached TRX_OFF
state RESET, or SLEEP states
"TRX_OFF – Clock State" on page 40
63 TRX24_TX_END Indicates the completion of a frame
transmission
"Frame Transmit Procedure" on page 91
62 TRX24_XAH_AMI Indicates address matching "Frame Filtering" on page 58
61 TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE Indicates the end of a CCA or ED
measurement
"Energy Detection (ED)" on page 74
60 TRX24_RX_END Indicates the completion of a frame reception "Frame Transmit Procedure" on page 91
59 TRX24_RX_START Indicates the start of a PSDU reception. The
TRX_STATE changes to BUSY_RX, the PHR
is ready to be read from Frame Buffer
"Frame Receive Procedure" on page 90
58 TRX24_PLL_UNLOCK Indicates PLL unlock. If the radio transceiver
is in BUSY_TX / BUSY_TX_ARET state, the
PA is turned off immediately, END interrupts
will not happen (see Interrupt Handling on
page 89)
"Interrupt Handling" on page 89
57 TRX24_PLL_LOCK Indicates PLL lock "Interrupt Handling" on page 89
Note: 1. The lowest IRQ Number has the highest priority.
During startup from SLEEP or RESET, the radio transceiver issues an TRX24_AWAKE
interrupt when it enters state TRX_OFF.
If the microcontroller initiates an energy-detect (ED) or clear-channel-assessment
(CCA) measurement, the completion of the measurement is indicated by interrupt
TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE, refer to sections "Energy Detection (ED)" on page 74 and
"Clear Channel Assessment (CCA)" on page 76 for details.
After RESET all interrupts are disabled. During radio transceiver initialization it is
recommended to enable AWAKE to be notified once the TRX_OFF state is entered.
Note that the TRX24_AWAKE interrupt can usually not be seen when the transceiver
enters TRX_OFF state after RESET, because register IRQ_MASK is reset to mask all
interrupts. In this case, state TRX_OFF is normally entered before the microcontroller
could modify the register.
The interrupt handling in Extended Operating Mode is described in section "Interrupt
Handling" on page 65.
9.3.3 Radio Transceiver Identification
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 Transceiver module can be identified by four
registers (PART_NUM, VERSION_NUM, MAN_ID_0, MAN_ID_1). One register
contains a unique part number and one register the corresponding version number.
Two additional registers contain the JTAG manufacture ID. The transceiver
identification registers are provided for compatibility to the transceiver only device.
A unique device identification is also possible with the three AVR signature bytes. For
details about accessing this information refer to "Signature Bytes" on page 505.
38
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.3.4 TX Start Interrupt
When the TRX24 starts a frame transmission a TRX24_TX_START interrupt is issued
when the preamble starts.
Table 9-3. Interrupt Description for TX_START interrupt
IRQ Vector
Number/
Priority
IRQ Name Description enable
72 TRX24_TX_START Indicates the start of a preamble transmission.
set bit TX_START in register IRQ_MASK1
When enabled, the TX_START interrupt is issued in both basic operating modes and
extended operating modes. Thus it also indicates the frame start of a transmitted
acknowledge frame in procedure RX_AACK. In procedure TX_ARET the
TRX24_TX_START interrupt is issued separately for every frame transmission and
frame retransmission.
Figure 9-2. Interrupt timing in with TRX24_TX_START interrupt
The figure above shows the timing of TRX24_TX_START interrupt in basic operation
mode. For a description of other relevant interrupt timings see Interrupt Handling on
page 42.
The timing for extended operating modes are respective.
9.4 Operating Modes
9.4.1 Basic Operating Mode
This section summarizes all states to provide the basic functionality of the 2.4GHz radio
transceiver, such as receiving and transmitting frames, the power up sequence and
radio transceiver sleep. The Basic Operating Mode is designed for IEEE 802.15.4 and
ISM applications; the corresponding radio transceiver states are shown in Figure 9-3 on
page 39.
39
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 9-3. Basic Operating Mode State Diagram (for timing refer to Table 9-4 on page 46)
2
SLPTR = 1
SLPTR = 0
PLL_ON
R X _ O N
P L L _ O N
T R X _ O F F
(C lo c k S ta te )
X O S C = O N
RX_ON
S L E E P
(S le e p S ta t e )
X O S C = O F F
F O R C E _ T R X _ O F F
(a ll s ta t e s e x c e p t S L E E P )
S H R
D e t e c te d
F r a m e
E n d
F r a m e
E n d B U S Y _ T X
(T r a n s m it S ta t e )
P L L _ O N
(P L L S ta t e )
T X _ S T A R T
o r
TRX_OFF
TRX_OFF
3
4
57
6
8
9
1 1
1 0
1 2 1 3 T R X R S T = 0
F O R C E _ P L L _ O N
(a ll s ta te s e x c e p t S L E E P ,
T R X _ O F F )
1 4
S L P T R = 1
L e g e n d :
B l u e : R e g is te r w r ite to T R X _ S T A T E
R e d : C o n tr o l s ig n a ls v ia R e g is t e r T R X P R
G r e e n : E v e n t
B a s ic O p e r a tin g M o d e S ta t e s
S ta te tra n s itio n n u m b e r
R X _ O N
(R x L i s te n S ta te )
B U S Y _ R X
(R e c e iv e S ta te )
R E S E T
(f ro m a ll s ta te s )
T R X R S T = 1
X
Note: 1. State transition numbers correspond to Table 9-4 on page 46.
9.4.1.1 State Control
The radio transceiver states are controlled either by writing commands to bits
TRX_CMD of register TRX_STATE, or directly by the two control bits SLPTR and
TRXRST of the TRXPR register. A successful state change can be verified by reading
the radio transceiver status from register TRX_STATUS.
If TRX_STATUS = 0x1F (STATE_TRANSITION_IN_PROGRESS) the radio transceiver
is on a state transition. Do not try to initiate a further state change while the radio
transceiver is in STATE_TRANSITION_IN_PROGRESS.
Bit SLPTR is a multifunctional bit (refer to section "Transceiver Pin Register TRXPR" on
page 35 for more details). Dependent on the radio transceiver state, a “0” to “1”
transition on SLPTR causes the following state transitions:
• TRX_OFF SLEEP
• PLL_ON BUSY_TX
Whereas resetting bit SLPTR to “0” causes the following state transitions:
• SLEEP TRX_OFF
Bit TRXRST causes a reset of all radio transceiver registers and forces the radio
transceiver into TRX_OFF state.
For all states except SLEEP, the state change commands FORCE_TRX_OFF or
TRX_OFF lead to a transition into TRX_OFF state. If the radio transceiver is in active
receive or transmit states (BUSY_*), the command FORCE_TRX_OFF interrupts these
40
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
active processes, and forces an immediate transition to TRX_OFF. In contrast a
TRX_OFF command is stored until an active state (receiving or transmitting) has been
finished. After that the transition to TRX_OFF is performed.
For a fast transition from receive or active transmit states to PLL_ON state the
command FORCE_PLL_ON is provided. In contrast to FORCE_TRX_OFF this
command does not disable the PLL and the analog voltage regulator AVREG. It is not
available in states SLEEP, and RESET.
The completion of each requested state-change shall always be confirmed by reading
the bits TRX_STATUS of register TRX_STATUS.
9.4.1.2 Basic Operating Mode Description
9.4.1.2.1 SLEEP – Sleep State
In radio transceiver SLEEP state, the entire radio transceiver is disabled. No circuitry is
operating. The radio transceiver’s current consumption is reduced to leakage current
only. This state can only be entered from state TRX_OFF, by setting the bit
SLPTR = “1”.
Setting SLPTR = “0” returns the radio transceiver to the TRX_OFF state. During radio
transceiver SLEEP the register contents remains valid while the content of the Frame
Buffer and the security engine (AES) are cleared.
TRXRST = “1” in SLEEP state returns the radio transceiver to TRX_OFF state and
thereby sets all registers to their reset values.
9.4.1.2.2 TRX_OFF – Clock State
This state is reached immediately after Power On or Reset. In TRX_OFF the crystal
oscillator is running. The digital voltage regulator is enabled, thus the radio transceiver
registers, the Frame Buffer and security engine (AES) are accessible (see section
"Frame Buffer" on page 83 and "Security Module (AES)" on page 99).
SLPTR and TRXRST in register TRXPR can be used for state control (see "State
Control" on page 39 for details). The analog front-end is disabled during TRX_OFF.
Entering the TRX_OFF state from radio transceiver SLEEP, or RESET state is
indicated by the TRX24_AWAKE interrupt.
9.4.1.2.3 PLL_ON – PLL State
Entering the PLL_ON state from TRX_OFF state first enables the analog voltage
regulator (AVREG). After the voltage regulator has been settled the PLL frequency
synthesizer is enabled. When the PLL has been settled at the receive frequency to a
channel defined by bits CHANNEL of register PHY_CC_CCA a successful PLL lock is
indicated by issuing a TRX24_PLL_LOCK interrupt.
If an RX_ON command is issued in PLL_ON state, the receiver is immediately enabled.
If the PLL has not been settled before the state change nevertheless takes place. Even
if the register bits TRX_STATUS of register TRX_STATUS indicates RX_ON, actual
frame reception can only start once the PLL has locked.
The PLL_ON state corresponds to the TX_ON state in IEEE 802.15.4.
41
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.4.1.2.4 RX_ON and BUSY_RX – RX Listen and Receive State
In RX_ON state the receiver blocks and the PLL frequency synthesizer are enabled.
The receive mode is internally separated into the RX_ON and BUSY_RX states. There
is no difference between these states with respect to the analog radio transceiver
circuitry, which are always turned on. In both states the receiver and the PLL frequency
synthesizer are enabled.
During RX_ON state the receiver listens for incoming frames. After detecting a valid
synchronization header (SHR), the receiver automatically enters the BUSY_RX state.
The reception of a valid PHY header (PHR) generates an TRX24_RX_START interrupt
and receives and demodulates the PSDU data.
During PSDU reception the frame data are stored continuously in the Frame Buffer until
the last byte was received. The completion of the frame reception is indicated by an
TRX24_RX_END interrupt and the radio transceiver reenters the state RX_ON. At the
same time the bits RX_CRC_VALID of register PHY_RSSI are updated with the result
of the FCS check (see "Frame Check Sequence (FCS)" on page 72).
Received frames are passed to the frame filtering unit, refer to section "Frame Filtering"
on page 58. If the content of the MAC addressing fields of a frame (refer to
IEEE 802.15.4 section 7.2.1) matches to the expected addresses, which is further
dependent on the addressing mode, an address match interrupt (TRX24_XAH_AMI) is
issued, refer to "Interrupt Logic" on page 36. The expected address values are to be
stored in the registers Short-Address, PAN-ID and IEEE-address. Frame filtering is
available in Basic and Extended Operating Mode, refer to section "Frame Filtering" on
page 58.
Leaving state RX_ON is only possible by writing a state change command to bits
TRX_CMD of register TRX_STATE.
9.4.1.2.5 BUSY_TX – Transmit State
A transmission can only be initiated in state PLL_ON. There are two ways to start a
transmission:
• Setting Bit SLPTR of register TRXPR to ‘1’. The bit should be cleared before the
frame has been transmitted. This mode is for legacy operation and should be
replaced by the TX_START command below.
• TX_START command to bits TRX_CMD of register TRX_STATE.
Either of these causes the radio transceiver into the BUSY_TX state.
During the transition to BUSY_TX state, the PLL frequency shifts to the transmit
frequency. The actual transmission of the first data chip of the SHR starts after 16 µs to
allow PLL settling and PA ramp-up, see Figure 9-7 on page 44. After transmission of
the SHR, the Frame Buffer content is transmitted. In case the PHR indicates a frame
length of zero, the transmission is aborted.
After the frame transmission has completed, the radio transceiver automatically turns
off the power amplifier, generates a TRX24_TX_END interrupt and returns into PLL_ON
state.
9.4.1.2.6 RESET State
The RESET state is used to set back the state machine and to reset all registers of the
radio transceiver to their default values.
42
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
A reset forces the radio transceiver into the TRX_OFF state.
A reset is initiated by a ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 main reset (see "Resetting the
AVR" on page 207) or a radio transceiver reset (see "Transceiver Pin Register TRXPR"
on page 35).
During radio transceiver reset the TRXPR register is not cleared and therefore the
application software has to set the SLPTR bit to “0”.
9.4.1.3 Interrupt Handling
All interrupts provided by the radio transceiver are supported in Basic Operating Mode
(see Table 9-2 on page 37).
Required interrupts must be enabled by writing to register IRQ_MASK and the global
interrupt enable flag must be set. For a general explanation of the interrupt handling
refer to "Reset and Interrupt Handling" on page 15 and "Interrupt Logic" on page 36.
For example, interrupts are provided to observe the status of the RX and TX operations.
On receive the TRX24_RX_START interrupt indicates the detection of a valid PHR, the
TRX24_XAH_AMI interrupt an address match and the TRX24_RX_END interrupt the
completion of the frame reception.
On transmit the TRX24_TX_END interrupt indicates the completion of the frame
transmission.
Figure 9-14 on page 43 shows an example for a transmit/receive transaction between
two devices and the related interrupt events in Basic Operating Mode. Device 1
transmits a frame containing a MAC header (in this example of length 7), payload and
valid FCS. The frame is received by Device 2 which generates the interrupts during the
processing of the incoming frame. The received frame is stored in the Frame Buffer.
If the received frame passes the address filter (refer to section "Frame Filtering" on
page 58) an address match TRX24_XAH_AMI interrupt is issued after the reception of
the MAC header (MHR).
In Basic Operating Mode the TRX24_RX_END interrupt is issued at the end of the
received frame. In Extended Operating Mode (refer to "Extended Operating Mode" on
page 47) the interrupt is only issued if the received frame passes the address filter and
the FCS is valid. Further exceptions are explained in "Extended Operating Mode" on
page 47.
Processing delay tIRQ is a typical value (see chapter "Digital Interface Timing
Characteristics" on page 560).
43
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 9-14. Timing of TRX24_RX_START, TRX24_XAH_AMI, TRX24_TX_END and TRX24_RX_END Interrupts in
Basic Operating Mode
1 2 8 1 6 0 1 9 20 1 9 2 + ( 9 + m) * 3 2- 1 6 T im e [µ s ]
RX
(Device 2)
T R X 2 4 _ R X _ S T A R T
tIR Q
R X _ O N R X _ O N
I R Q
T R X _ S T A T E
I n t e rr u p t la te n c y
T R X 2 4 _
R X _ E N D
T R X 2 4 _ X A H _ A M I
tIR Q tIR Q
B U S Y _ R X
T R X 2 4 _ T X _ E N D
TX
(Device1)
P L L _ O N B U S Y _ T X P L L _ O N
I R Q
S L P T R
T R X _ S T A T E
T y p . P r o c e s s in g D e la y 1 6 µ s
Frame
on Air
P r e a m b le S F D P H R M S D U
4 1 1 mN u m b e r o f O c te ts
F r a m e C o n te n t M H R
7
F C S
2
9.4.1.4 Basic Operating Mode Timing
The following paragraphs depict state transitions and their timing properties. Timing
figures are explained in Table 9-4 on page 46 and section "Digital Interface Timing
Characteristics" on page 560.
9.4.1.4.1 Wake-up Procedure
The wake-up procedure from radio transceiver SLEEP state is shown in Figure 9-15
below. This figure implies, that the microcontroller is already running and hence, the
digital voltage regulator is enabled. If the microcontroller clock source is set to
Transceiver Clock, the crystal oscillator is also running, which reduces the radio
transceiver wake-up time further. For information about the wake-up timing of the
microcontroller, depending on the different clock source options, refer to "System Clock
and Clock Options" on page 174.
In order to calculate the total wake-up delay from microcontroller sleep mode (see
"Power Management and Sleep Modes" on page 183), the microcontroller wake-up
time, including the voltage regulator ramp-up and the radio transceiver wake-up time
has to be added.
Figure 9-15. Wake-up Procedure from Transceiver SLEEP State
0
Event
State
Block
100 400 Time [µs]
Time tT R2
TRX_O FF
TRX24_AW A KE IRQSLPTR = 0
SLEEP
200
XO SC startup XOSC enabledFTN
The radio transceiver SLEEP state is left by releasing bit SLPTR to “0”. This restarts the
XOSC if it is not already running. After tTR2 = 215 µs + 25 µs = 240 µs (see Table 9-4 on
page 46) the radio transceiver enters TRX_OFF state. If the XOSC is already running,
the radio transceiver enters TRX_OFF state after 25 µs.
44
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
During this wake-up procedure the calibration of the filter-tuning network (FTN) is
performed. Entering TRX_OFF state is signaled by the TRX24_AWAKE interrupt, if
enabled.
9.4.1.4.2 PLL_ON and RX_ON States
The transition from TRX_OFF to PLL_ON and RX_ON mode is shown in Figure 9-16
below.
Figure 9-16. Transition from TRX_OFF to PLL_ON and RX_ON State
0
Event
State
Block
100 Time [µs]
Time tTR4
TRX24_PLL_LOCK IRQ
TRX_OFF
AVREG
Command PLL_ON
PLL RX
PLL_ON
RX_ON
tTR8
RX_ON
Note: 1. If TRX_CMD = RX_ON in TRX_OFF state RX_ON state is entered immediately,
even if the PLL has not settled.
2. If the AVR ADC module is enabled, the AVREG is already started and thus the
state transition time tTR4 is reduced.
Entering the commands PLL_ON or RX_ON in TRX_OFF state initiates a ramp-up
sequence of the internal 1.8V voltage regulator for the analog domain (AVREG), if
AVREG is not already enabled by the AVR ADC module. RX_ON state can be entered
any time from PLL_ON state regardless whether the PLL has already locked as
indicated by the TRX24_PLL_LOCK interrupt.
9.4.1.4.3 BUSY_TX and RX_ON States
The transition from PLL_ON to BUSY_TX state and subsequent to RX_ON state is
shown in Figure 9-7 below.
Figure 9-7. PLL_ON to BUSY_TX to RX_ON Timing
Time [µs]0 x16 x + 32
Tim e tT R 1 1
tTR10
C om m and RX_O N
State
Block
PLL_ON RX_ONBUSY_TX
Event SLPTR
PA PLLP A, TX RXPLL
or comm and TX_STA RT
Starting from PLL_ON state it is assumed that the PLL is already locked. A
transmission is initiated either by writing “1” to bit SLPTR or by command TX_START.
The PLL settles to the transmit frequency and the PA is enabled.
45
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
tTR10 = 16 µs after initiating the transmission, the radio transceiver changes into
BUSY_TX state and the internally generated SHR is transmitted. After that the PSDU
data are transmitted from the Frame Buffer.
After completing the frame transmission, indicated by the TRX24_TX_END interrupt,
the PLL settles back to the receive frequency within tTR11 = 32 µs in state PLL_ON.
If during TX_BUSY the radio transmitter is programmed to change to a receive state it
automatically proceeds the state change to RX_ON state after finishing the
transmission.
9.4.1.4.4 Reset Procedure
The radio transceiver reset procedure is shown in Figure 9-18 below.
Figure 9-18. Reset Procedure
x
E v e n t
S ta te
B lo c k
T im e [µ s ]
T R X R S T
T R X _ O F F
x + 4 0
[T R X 2 4 _ A W A K E IR Q ]
0
v a rio u s
T im e 3 x A V R clo ck tT R 1 3
> t1 1
X O S C , D V R E G e n a b le d X O S C , D V R E G e n a b le d
x + 1 0
FTN
Note: 1. Timing parameter tTR13 = 37 µs refers to Table 9-4 on page 46; t11 refers to "Digital
Interface Timing Characteristics" on page 560.
2. If TRXRST is set during radio transceiver SLEEP state, the XOSC startup delay is
extended by the XOSC startup time.
TRXRST = “1” resets all radio transceiver registers to their default values.
The radio transceiver reset is released automatically after 3 AVR clock cycles and the
wake-up sequence without restarting XOSC and DVREG, nevertheless an FTN
calibration cycle is performed, refer to "Automatic Filter Tuning (FTN)" on page 90. After
that the TRX_OFF state is entered.
Figure 9-18 above illustrates the radio transceiver reset procedure if the radio
transceiver is in any state but not in SLEEP state.
If the radio transceiver was in SLEEP state, the SLPTR bit in the TRXPR register must
be cleared prior to clearing the TRXRST bit in order to enter the TRX_OFF state.
Otherwise the radio transceiver enters the SLEEP state immediately.
If the radio transceiver was in SLEEP state and the Transceiver Clock is not selected as
the microcontroller clock source, the XOSC is enabled before entering TRX_OFF state.
If register TRX_STATUS indicates STATE_TRANSITION_IN_PROGRESS during
system initialization until the radio transceiver reaches TRX_OFF, do not try to initiate a
further state change while the radio transceiver is in this state.
Note that before accessing the radio transceiver module the TRX24_AWAKE event
should be checked.
46
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.4.1.4.5 State Transition Timing Summary
The transition numbers correspond to Table 9-4 below. See measurement setup in
"Basic Application Schematic" on page 538.
Table 9-4. Radio Transceiver State Transition Timing
No Symbol
Transition Time [µs], (typ) Comments
1 tTR2 SLEEP TRX_OFF 240 Depends on crystal oscillator setup (CL = 10 pf)
TRX_OFF state indicated by TRX24_AWAKE interrupt
2 tTR3 TRX_OFF SLEEP 35 · 1 / fCLKM For fCLKM > 250 kHz
3 tTR4 TRX_OFF PLL_ON 110 Depends on external capacitor at AVDD (1 µF nom)
4 tTR5 PLL_ON TRX_OFF 1
5 tTR6 TRX_OFF RX_ON 110 Depends on external capacitor at AVDD (1 µF nom)
6 tTR7 RX_ON TRX_OFF 1
7 tTR8 PLL_ON RX_ON 1
8 tTR9 RX_ON PLL_ON 1 Transition time is also valid for TX_ARET_ON, RX_AACK_ON
9 tTR10 PLL_ON BUSY_TX 16
When setting bit SLPTR or TRX_CMD = TX_START, the first
symbol transmission is delayed by 16 µs (PLL settling and
PA ramp up).
10 tTR11 BUSY_TX PLL_ON 32 PLL settling time from TX_BUSY to PLL_ON state
11 tTR12 All modes TRX_OFF 1
Using TRX_CMD = FORCE_TRX_OFF (see register
TRX_STATE),
Not valid for SLEEP state
12 tTR13 RESET TRX_OFF 37 Not valid for SLEEP state
13 tTR14 Various
states PLL_ON 1
Using TRX_CMD = FORCE_PLL_ON (see register
TRX_STATE),
Not valid for SLEEP, RESET and TRX_OFF
The state transition timing is calculated based on the timing of the individual blocks
shown in Table 9-9 on page 55. The worst case values include maximum operating
temperature, minimum supply voltage, and device parameter variations.
Table 9-9. Analog Block Initialization and Settling Time
No Symbol
Block Time [µs], (typ) Time [µs], (max)
Comments
15 tTR15 XOSC 215 1000 Leaving SLEEP state, depends on crystal Q factor and load
capacitor
16 tTR16 FTN 25 FTN tuning time, fixed
17 tTR17 DVREG 60 1000 Depends on external bypass capacitor at DVDD
(CB3 = 1 µF nom., 10 µF worst case), depends on VDEVDD
18 tTR18 AVREG 60 1000 Depends on external bypass capacitor at AVDD
(CB1 = 1 µF nom., 10 µF worst case) , depends on VEVDD
19 tTR19 PLL, initial 110 155 PLL settling time TRX_OFF PLL_ON, including 60 µs
AVREG settling time
20 tTR20 PLL, settling 11 24 Settling time between channel switch
21 tTR21 PLL, CF cal 35 PLL center frequency calibration, refer to "Calibration
Loops" on page 89
22 tTR22 PLL, DCU cal 6 PLL DCU calibration, refer to "Calibration Loops" on
page 89
23 tTR23 PLL, RX TX
16 Maximum PLL settling time RX TX
47
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
No Symbol
Block Time [µs], (typ) Time [µs], (max)
Comments
24 tTR24 PLL, TX RX
32 Maximum PLL settling time TX RX
25 tTR25 RSSI, update 2 RSSI update period in receive states, refer to "Reading
RSSI" on page 74
26 tTR26 ED 140 ED measurement period, refer to "Measurement
Description" on page 75
27 tTR27 SHR, sync 96 Typical SHR synchronization period, refer to
"Measurement Description" on page 75
28 tTR28 CCA 140 CCA measurement period, refer to "Configuration and
CCA Request" on page 77
29 tTR29 Random value
1 Random value update period, refer to "Random
Number Generator" on page 92
9.4.2 Extended Operating Mode
The Extended Operating Mode is a hardware MAC accelerator and goes beyond the
basic radio transceiver functionality provided by the Basic Operating Mode. It handles
time critical MAC tasks requested by the IEEE 802.15.4 standard or by hardware such
as automatic acknowledgement, automatic CSMA-CA and retransmission. This results
in a more efficient IEEE 802.15.4 software MAC implementation including reduced code
size and may allow operating at lower microcontroller clock rates.
The Extended Operating Mode is designed to support IEEE 802.15.4-2006 compliant
frames; the mode is backward compatible to IEEE 802.15.4-2003 and supports non
IEEE 802.15.4 compliant frames. This mode comprises the following procedures:
Automatic acknowledgement (RX_AACK) divides into the tasks:
• Frame reception and automatic FCS check;
• Configurable addressing fields check;
• Interrupt indicating address match;
• Interrupt indicating frame reception, if it passes address filtering and FCS check;
• Automatic ACK frame transmission (if the received frame passed the address filter
and FCS check and if an ACK is required by the frame type and ACK request);
• Support of slotted acknowledgment using SLPTR bit for frame start.
Automatic CSMA-CA and Retransmission (TX_ARET) divides into the tasks:
• CSMA-CA including automatic CCA retry and random back-off;
• Frame transmission and automatic FCS field generation;
• Reception of ACK frame (if an ACK was requested);
• Automatic frame retry if ACK was expected but not received;
• Interrupt signaling with transaction status.
Automatic FCS check and generation (refer to "Frame Check Sequence (FCS)" on
page 72) is used by the RX_AACK and TX_ARET modes. In RX_AACK mode an
automatic FCS check is always performed for incoming frames.
An ACK received in TX_ARET mode within the time required by IEEE 802.15.4 is
accepted if the FCS is valid and if the sequence number of the ACK matches the
sequence number of the previously transmitted frame. Dependent on the value of the
48
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
frame pending subfield in the received acknowledgement frame the transaction status is
set according to Table 9-19 on page 64.
The state diagram including the Extended Operating Mode states is shown in Figure 9-
19 below. Yellow marked states represent the Basic Operating Mode; blue marked
states represent the Extended Operating Mode.
Figure 9-19. Extended Operating Mode State Diagram
2
SLPTR = 1
L e g e n d :
B lu e : R e g is te r W rite to T R X _ S T A T E
R e d : C o n tro l s ig n a ls v ia R e g iste r T R X P R
G r e e n : E v e n t
B a s ic O pe ra tin g M o d e S ta te s
E x te n d e d O p e ra tin g M od e S ta te s
SLPTR = 0
PLL_ON
R X _ O N
P L L _ O N
T R X _ O F F
(C lo c k S ta te )
X O S C = O N
RX_ON
SLEEP
(S le e p S ta t e )
X O S C = O F F
F O R C E _ T R X _ O F F
(a ll m o d e s e x c e p t S L E E P )
F ra m e
E n d F ra m e
E n d
B U S Y _ T X
(T ra n s m it S ta te )
R X _ O N
(R x L is te n S ta te )
B U S Y _R X
(R e c e iv e S ta te )
TRX_OFF
TRX_OFF
3
4
57
6
8
9
1 1
1 0
B U S Y _ R X _ A A C K B U S Y _ T X _ A R E T
S H R
D e t e c t e d
T ra n s -
a c tio n
F in i s h e d
TX_ARET_ON
PLL_ON
S L P T R = 1
o r
T X _ S T A R T
F ra m e
E n d
PLL_ON
RX_AACK_ON
TX_ARET_ON
RX_AACK_ON
F ro m / T o
T R X _ O F F F ro m / To
T R X _ O F F
T R X R S T = 01 2 1 3
F O R C E _ P L L _ O N
1 4
S L P T R = 1
o r
T X _ S T A R T
S H R
D e t e ct e d
T X _ A R E T _ O NR X _ A A C K _ O N
P L L _ O N
(P L L S ta te )
se e n o te s
RESET
(fro m a ll sta te s )
T R X R S T = 1
TRX_OFF
TRX_OFF
Note: 1. State transition numbers correspond to Table 9-4 on page 46.
49
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.4.2.1 State Control
The Extended Operating Mode states RX_AACK and TX_ARET are controlled via the
bits TRX_CMD of register TRX_STATE, which receives the state transition commands.
The states are entered from TRX_OFF or PLL_ON state as illustrated in Figure 9-19 on
page 48. The completion of each state change command shall always be confirmed by
reading the TRX_STATUS register.
RX_AACK - Receive with Automatic ACK
A state transition to RX_AACK_ON from PLL_ON or TRX_OFF is initiated by writing the
command RX_AACK_ON to the register bits TRX_CMD. The state change can be
confirmed by reading register TRX_STATUS, those changes to RX_AACK_ON or
BUSY_RX_AACK on success. BUSY_RX_AACK is returned if a frame is currently
being received.
The RX_AACK state is left by writing command TRX_OFF or PLL_ON to the register
bits TRX_CMD. If the radio transceiver is within a frame receive or acknowledgment
procedure (BUSY_RX_AACK) the state change is executed after finish. Alternatively,
the commands FORCE_TRX_OFF or FORCE_PLL_ON can be used to cancel the
RX_AACK transaction and change into radio transceiver state TRX_OFF or PLL_ON
respectively.
TX_ARET - Transmit with Automatic Retry and CSMA-CA Retry
Similarly, a state transition to TX_ARET_ON from PLL_ON or TRX_OFF is initiated by
writing command TX_ARET_ON to register bits TRX_CMD. The radio transceiver is in
the TX_ARET_ON state after TRX_STATUS register changes to TX_ARET_ON. The
TX_ARET transaction is started with writing ‘1’ to the SLPTR bit of the TRXPR register
or writing the command TX_START to register bits TRX_CMD.
TX_ARET state is left by writing the command TRX_OFF or PLL_ON to the register bits
TRX_CMD. If the radio transceiver is within a CSMA-CA, a frame-transmit or an
acknowledgment procedure (BUSY_TX_ARET) the state change is executed after
finish. Alternatively, the command FORCE_TRX_OFF or FORCE_PLL_ON can be
used to instantly terminate the TX_ARET transaction and change into radio transceiver
states TRX_OFF or PLL_ON, respectively.
Note that a state change request from TRX_OFF to RX_AACK_ON or TX_ARET_ON
internally passes the state PLL_ON to initiate the radio transceiver. Thus the readiness
to receive or transmit data is delayed accordingly. It is recommended to use interrupt
TRX24_PLL_LOCK as an indicator.
9.4.2.2 Configuration
The use of the Extended Operating Mode is based on Basic Operating Mode
functionality. Only features beyond the basic radio transceiver functionality are
described in the following sections. For details on the Basic Operating Mode refer to
section "Basic Operating Mode" on page 38.
When using the RX_AACK or TX_ARET modes, the following registers needs to be
configured.
RX_AACK configuration steps:
• Short address, PAN-ID and IEEE address (register SHORT_AADR_0,
SHORT_ADDR_1, PAN_ID_0, PAN_ID_1, IEEE_ADDR_0 … IEEE_ADDR_7)
• Configure RX_AACK properties (register XAH_CTRL_0, CSMA_SEED_1)
o Handling of Frame Version Subfield
50
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
o Handling of Pending Data Indicator
o Characterize as PAN coordinator
o Handling of Slotted Acknowledgement
• Additional Frame Filtering Properties (register XAH_CTRL_1, CSMA_SEED_1)
o Promiscuous Mode
o Enable or disable automatic ACK generation
o Handling of reserved frame types
The addresses for the address match algorithm are to be stored in the appropriate
address registers. Additional control of the RX_AACK mode is done with registers
XAH_CTRL_1 and CSMA_SEED_1.
As long as a short address has not been set, only broadcast frames and frames
matching the IEEE address can be received.
Configuration examples for different device operating modes and handling of various
frame types can be found in section "Description of RX_AACK Configuration Bits" on
page 53.
TX_ARET configuration steps:
• Leave register bit TX_AUTO_CRC_ON = 1 register TRX_CTRL_1
• Configure CSMA-CA
o MAX_FRAME_RETRIES register XAH_CTRL_0
o MAX_CSMA_RETRIES register XAH_CTRL_0
o CSMA_SEED registers CSMA_SEED_0, CSMA_SEED_1
o MAX_BE, MIN_BE register CSMA_BE
• Configure CCA (see section "Configuration and CCA Request" on page 77)
MAX_FRAME_RETRIES (register XAH_CTRL_0) defines the maximum number of
frame retransmissions.
The register bits MAX_CSMA_RETRIES (register XAH_CTRL_0) configure the number
of CSMA-CA retries after a busy channel is detected.
The CSMA_SEED_0 and CSMA_SEED_1 registers define a random seed for the back-
off-time random-number generator of the radio transceiver.
The MAX_BE and MIN_BE register bits (register CSMA_BE) set the maximum and
minimum CSMA back-off exponent (according to [1] on page 110).
9.4.2.3 RX_AACK_ON – Receive with Automatic ACK
The general functionality of the RX_AACK procedure is shown in Figure 9-20 on page
52.
The gray shaded area is the standard flow of a RX_AACK transaction for
IEEE 802.15.4 compliant frames (refer to section "Configuration of IEEE Scenarios" on
page 54). All other procedures are exceptions for specific operating modes or frame
formats (refer to section "Configuration of non IEEE 802.15.4 Compliant Scenarios" on
page 56).
The frame filtering operation is described in detail in section "Frame Filtering" on page
58.
In RX_AACK_ON state, the radio transceiver listens for incoming frames. After
detecting SHR and a valid PHR, the radio transceiver parses the frame content of the
MAC header (MHR) as described in section "PHY Header (PHR)" on page 67.
51
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Generally, at nodes, configured as a normal device or PAN coordinator, a frame is not
indicated if the frame filter does not match and the FCS is invalid. Otherwise, the
TRX_24_RX_END interrupt is issued after the completion of the frame reception. The
microcontroller can then read the frame. An exception applies if promiscuous mode is
enabled (see section "Configuration of IEEE Scenarios" on page 54). In that case a
TRX_24_RX_END interrupt is issued even if the FCS fails.
If the content of the MAC addressing fields of the received frame (refer to
IEEE 802.15.4 section 7.2.1) matches one of the configured addresses, dependent on
the addressing mode, an address match interrupt (TRX24_XAH_AMI) is issued (refer to
section "Frame Filtering" on page 58). The expected address values are to be stored in
registers Short-address, PAN-ID and IEEE-address. Frame filtering as described in
section "Frame Filtering" on page 58 is also valid for Basic Operating Mode.
During reception the radio transceiver parses bit[5] (ACK Request) of the frame control
field of the received data or the MAC command frame to check if an ACK reply is
expected. In that case and if the frame passes the third level of filtering (see
IEEE 802.15.4-2006, section 7.5.6.2), the radio transceiver automatically generates and
transmits an ACK frame. After the ACK transmission is finished, a TRX24_TX_END
interrupt is generated.
The content of the frame pending subfield of the ACK response is set by bit
AACK_SET_PD of register CSMA_SEED_1 when the ACK frame is sent in response to
a data request MAC command frame, otherwise this subfield is set to “0”. The
sequence number is copied from the received frame.
Optionally, the start of the transmission of the acknowledgement frame can be
influenced by register bit AACK_ACK_TIME. Default value (according to standard
IEEE 802.15.4, page 54) is 12 symbol times after the reception of the last symbol of a
data or MAC command frame.
If the bit AACK_DIS_ACK of register CSMA_SEED_1 is set, no acknowledgement
frame is sent even if an acknowledgment frame was requested. This is useful for
operating the MAC hardware accelerator in promiscuous mode (see section
"Configuration of non IEEE 802.15.4 Compliant Scenarios" on page 56).
The status of the RX_AACK operation is indicated by the bits TRAC_STATUS of
register TRAC_STATUS.
During the operations described above the radio transceiver remains in
BUSY_RX_AACK state.
52
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 9-20. Flow Diagram of RX_AACK
Reserved Frames
TRX_STATE = R X_AACK_ON
SHR detected
TRX_STATE = B USY_RX_AACK
Scanning MHR
Frame reception
Frame
Filtering
ACK requested
(see Note 3)
Wait 12 symbol
periods
Transmit ACK
TRX_STATE = RX_AACK_ON
N
Y
N
Y
Generate TRX24_RX_START
interrupt
AACK_PROM_MODE
== 1
Generate TR X24_XAH _AMI
interrupt
Y
Generate TRX24_RX_END
interrupt
Frame reception
Note 3: Additional conditions:
- ACK requested &
- ACK_DIS_ACK==0 &
- fram e_version<=AACK_FVN_MO D E
Slotted Operation
== 0
Y
AACK_ACK_TIME
== 0
Y
Wait 2 symbol
periods
Wait 6 symbol
periods
SLPTR bit
= 1
N
N
Generate
TRX24_RX_END
interrupt
N
Y
N
AACK_ACK_TIME
== 0
Y
Wait 2 symbol
periods
N
FCS valid
(see Note 2)
Y
N
AACK_UPLD_RES_FT
== 1
FCS valid
Generate
TRX24_RX_EN D
interrupt
Y
Y
N
N
N
Note 2: FCS check is omitted for Promiscous Mode FCF[2:0]
> 3
N
Y
Y
Prom iscuous Mode
Note 1: Frame Filtering, Promiscuous Mode and
Reserved Fram es:
- A radio transc eiver in Prom iscuous
Mode, or configured to receive Reserved
Frames handles received frames passing
the third level of filtering
- F or details refer to the description of
Promiscuous Mode and Reserved
Frame Types
(see Note 1)
GenerateTRX24_TX_END
interrupt
53
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.4.2.3.1 Description of RX_AACK Configuration Bits
Overview
The following table summarizes all register bits which affect the behavior of a
RX_AACK transaction. For address filtering it is further required to setup address
registers to match to the expected address.
Configuration and address bits are to be set in TRX_OFF or PLL_ON state prior to
switching to RX_AACK mode.
A graphical representation of various operating modes is illustrated in Figure 9-20 on
page 52.
Table 9-6. Overview of RX_AACK Configuration Bits
Register Name Register Bits Description
SHORT_ADDR_0/1
PAN_ADDR_0/1
IEEE_ADDR_0
…
IEEE_ADDR_7
Set node addresses
RX_SAFE_MODE 7 Protect buffer after frame receive
AACK_PROM_MODE 1 Support promiscuous mode
AACK_ACK_TIME 2 Change auto acknowledge start time
AACK_UPLD_RES_FT 4 Enable reserved frame type reception, needed to
receive non-standard compliant frames
AACK_FLTR_RES_FT 5 Filter reserved frame types like data frame type,
needed for filtering of non-standard compliant
frames
SLOTTED_OPERATION 0 If set, acknowledgment transmission has to be
triggered by register bit SLPTR
AACK_I_AM_COORD 3 If set, the device is a PAN coordinator
AACK_DIS_ACK 4 Disable generation of acknowledgment
AACK_SET_PD 5 Set frame pending subfield in Frame Control Field
(FCF), refer to section "Overview" on page 72
AACK_FVN_MODE 7:6 Controls the ACK behavior, depending on FCF
frame version number
The usage of the RX_AACK configuration bits for various operating modes of a node is
explained in the following sections. Configuration bits not mentioned in the following two
sections should be set to their reset values.
All registers mentioned in Table 9-6 above are described in section "Register Summary"
on page 66.
Note, that the general behavior of the Extended Feature Set settings:
• OQPSK_DATA_RATE (PSDU data rate)
• SFD_VALUE (alternative SFD value)
• ANT_DIV (Antenna Diversity)
• RX_PDT_LEVEL (blocking frame reception of lower power signals)
are completely independent from RX_AACK mode (see "Radio Transceiver Extended
Feature Set" on page 92). Each of these operating modes can be combined with the
RX_AACK mode.
54
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.4.2.3.2 Configuration of IEEE Scenarios
Normal Device
The Table 9-7 below shows a typical RX_AACK configuration of an IEEE 802.15.4
device operated as a normal device rather than a PAN coordinator or router.
Table 9-7. Configuration of IEEE 802.15.4 Devices
Register Name Register Bits Description
SHORT_ADDR_0/1
PAN_ADDR_0/1
IEEE_ADDR_0
…
IEEE_ADDR_7
Set node addresses
RX_SAFE_MODE 7 0: disable frame protection
1: enable frame protection
SLOTTED_OPERATION 0 0: if transceiver works in unslotted mode
1: if transceiver works in slotted mode
AACK_FVN_MODE 7:6 Controls the ACK behavior, depending on FCF
frame version number
0x00 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0, i.e. according to IEEE 802.15.4-2003
frames
0x01 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0 or 1, i.e. frames according to
IEEE 802.15.4-2006
0x10 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0 or 1 or 2
0x11 : acknowledges all frames, independent of
the FCF frame version number
Notes: 1. If no short address has been configured before the device has been assigned one
by the PAN-coordinator, only frames directed to either the broadcast address or
the IEEE address are received.
2. In IEEE 802.15.4-2003 standard the frame version subfield did not yet exist but
was marked as reserved. According to this standard, reserved fields have to be set
to zero. On the other hand, IEEE 802.15.4-2003 standard requires ignoring
reserved bits upon reception. Thus, there is a contradiction in the standard which
can be interpreted in two ways:
a) If a network should only allow access to nodes which use the
IEEE 802.15.4-2003, then AACK_FVN_MODE should be set to 0.
b) If a device should acknowledge all frames independent of its frame version,
AACK_FVN_MODE should be set to 3. However, this can result in conflicts with
co-existing IEEE 802.15.4-2006 standard compliant networks.
The same holds for PAN coordinators as described below.
PAN-Coordinator
Table 9-8 on page 55 shows the RX_AACK configuration for a PAN coordinator.
55
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 9-8. Configuration of a PAN Coordinator
Register Name Register Bits Description
SHORT_ADDR_0/1
PAN_ADDR_0/1
IEEE_ADDR_0
…
IEEE_ADDR_7
Set node addresses
RX_SAFE_MODE 7 0: disable frame protection
1: enable frame protection
SLOTTED_OPERATION 0 0: if transceiver works in unslotted mode
1: if transceiver works in slotted mode
AACK_I_AM_COORD 3 1: device is PAN coordinator
AACK_SET_PD 5 0: frame pending subfield is not set in FCF
1: frame pending subfield is set in FCF
AACK_FVN_MODE 7:6 Controls the ACK behavior, depends on FCF
frame version number
0x00 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0, i.e. according to IEEE 802.15.4-2003
frames
0x01 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0 or 1, i.e. frames according to
IEEE 802.15.4-2006
0x10 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0 or 1 or 2
0x11 : acknowledges all frames, independent of
the FCF frame version number
Promiscuous Mode
The promiscuous mode is described in IEEE 802.15.4-2006, section 7.5.6.5. This mode
is further illustrated in Radio Transceiver Extended Feature Set on page 92. According
to IEEE 802.15.4-2006 when in promiscuous mode, the MAC sub layer shall pass
received frames with correct FCS to the next higher layer without further processing.
That implies that frames should never be acknowledged.
Only second level filter rules as defined by IEEE 802.15.4-2006, section 7.5.6.2, are
applied to the received frame.
Table 9-9 below shows the typical configuration of a device operating in promiscuous
mode.
Table 9-9. Configuration of Promiscuous Mode
Register Name Register Bits Description
SHORT_ADDR_0/1
PAN_ADDR_0/1
IEEE_ADDR_0
…
IEEE_ADDR_7
Each address shall be set: 0x00
AACK_PROM_MODE 1 1: Enable promiscuous mode
AACK_DIS_ACK 4 1: Disable generation of acknowledgment
56
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Name Register Bits Description
AACK_FVN_MODE 7:6 Controls the ACK behavior, depends on FCF frame
version number
0x00 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0, i.e. according to IEEE 802.15.4-2003
frames
0x01 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0 or 1, i.e. frames according to
IEEE 802.15.4-2006
0x10 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0 or 1 or 2
0x11 : acknowledges all frames, independent of the
FCF frame version number
Second level of filtering according to IEEE 802.15.4-2006, section 7.5.6.2, is applied to
a received frame if the radio transceiver is in promiscuous mode. However, a
TRX24_RX_END interrupt is issued even if the FCS is invalid. Thus it is necessary to
read bit RX_CRC_VALID of register PHY_RSSI after the TRX24_RX_END interrupt in
order to verify the reception of a frame with a valid FCS.
If a device, operating in promiscuous mode, receives a frame with a valid FCS which in
addition passed the third level filtering according to IEEE 802.15.4-2006, section
7.5.6.2, an acknowledgement frame would be transmitted. According to the definition of
the promiscuous mode a received frame shall not be acknowledged even if it is
requested. Thus bit AACK_DIS_ACK of register CSMA_SEED_1 has to be set to 1.
In all receive modes a TRX24_AMI interrupt is issued, when the received frame
matches the node’s address according to the filter rules described in section "Frame
Filtering" on page 58.
Alternatively, in RX_ON state of the Basic Operating Mode when a valid PHR is
detected a TRX24_RX_START interrupt is generated and the frame is received. The
end of the frame reception is signalized with a TRX24_RX_END interrupt. At the same
time the bit RX_CRC_VALID of register PHY_RSSI is updated with the result of the
FCS check (see "Overview" on page 72). The RX_CRC_VALID bit must be checked in
order to dismiss corrupted frames according to the definition of the promiscuous mode.
9.4.2.3.3 Configuration of non IEEE 802.15.4 Compliant Scenarios
Sniffer
Table 9-10 below shows a RX_AACK configuration to setup a sniffer device. Other
RX_AACK configuration bits should be set to their reset values (see Table 9-6 on page
53). All frames received are indicated by a TRX24_RX_START and TRX24_RX_END
interrupt. Bit RX_CRC_VALID of register PHY_RSSI is updated after frame reception
with the result of the FCS check (see "Overview" on page 72). The RX_CRC_VALID bit
needs to be checked in order to dismiss corrupted frames.
Table 9-10. Configuration of a Sniffer Device
Register Name Register Bits Description
AACK_PROM_MODE 1 1: Enable promiscuous mode
AACK_DIS_ACK 4 1: Disable generation of acknowledgment
This operating mode is similar to the promiscuous mode.
57
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Reception of Reserved Frames
Frames with reserved frame types (see section Table 9-19 on page 69) can also be
handled in RX_AACK mode. This might be required when implementing proprietary,
non-standard compliant protocols. It is an extension of the address filtering in
RX_AACK mode. Received frames are either handled similar to data frames or may be
allowed to completely bypass the address filter.
Table 9-11 below shows the required configuration for a node to receive reserved
frames and Figure 9-20 on page 52 shows the corresponding flow chart.
Table 9-11. RX_AACK Configuration to Receive Reserved Frame Types
Register Name Register Bits Description
SHORT_ADDR_0/1
PAN_ADDR_0/1
IEEE_ADDR_0
…
IEEE_ADDR_7
Set node addresses
RX_SAFE_MODE 7 0: disable frame protection
1: enable frame protection
AACK_UPLD_RES_FT 4 1 : Enable reserved frame type reception
AACK_FLTR_RES_FT 5 Filter reserved frame types like data frame type,
see note below
0 : disable
1 : enable
SLOTTED_OPERATION 0 0: if transceiver works in un-slotted mode
1: if transceiver works in slotted mode
AACK_I_AM_COORD 3 0: device is not PAN coordinator
1: device is PAN coordinator
AACK_DIS_ACK 4 0: Enable generation of acknowledgment
1: Disable generation of acknowledgment
AACK_FVN_MODE 7:6 Controls the ACK behavior, depends on FCF
frame version number
0x00 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0, i.e. according to IEEE 802.15.4-2003
frames
0x01 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0 or 1, i.e. frames according to
IEEE 802.15.4-2006
0x10 : acknowledges only frames with version
number 0 or 1 or 2
0x11 : acknowledges all frames, independent of
the FCF frame version number
There are two different options for handling reserved frame types.
1. AACK_UPLD_RES_FT = 1, AACK_FLT_RES_FT = 0:
Any non-corrupted frame with a reserved frame type is indicated by a
TRX24_RX_END interrupt. No further address filtering is applied on those frames.
A TRX24_AMI interrupt is never generated and the acknowledgment subfield is
ignored.
2. AACK_UPLD_RES_FT = 1, AACK_FLT_RES_FT = 1:
58
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
If AACK_FLT_RES_FT = 1 any frame with a reserved frame type is filtered by the
address filter similar to a data frame as described in the standard. Consequently, a
TRX24_AMI interrupt is generated upon address match. A TRX24_RX_END
interrupt is only generated if the address matched and the frame was not
corrupted. An acknowledgment is only send, when the ACK request subfield was
set in the received frame and a TRX24_RX_END interrupt occurred.
Note that It is not allowed to set AACK_FLTR_RES_FT = 1 and have register bit
AACK_FLTR_RES_FT set to 0.
Short Acknowledgment Frame (ACK) Start Timing
The bit AACK_ACK_TIME of register XAH_CTRL_1 defines the symbol time between
frame reception and transmission of an acknowledgment frame.
Table 9-12. Overview of RX_AACK Configuration Bits
Register Name Register Bit Description
AACK_ACK_TIME 2 0: Standard compliant acknowledgement timing of 12
symbol periods. In slotted acknowledgement operation
mode, the acknowledgment frame transmission can be
triggered 6 symbol periods after reception of the frame
earliest.
1: Reduced acknowledgment timing of 2 symbol periods
(32 µs).
Note that this feature can be used in all scenarios, independent of other configurations.
However, shorter acknowledgment timing is especially useful when using High Data
Rate Modes to increase battery lifetime and to improve the overall data throughput; see
"High Data Rate Modes" on page 93 for details.
9.4.2.4 Frame Filtering
Frame Filtering is an evaluation whether or not a received frame is dedicated for this
node. To accept a received frame and to generate an address match interrupt
(TRX24_AMI) a filtering procedure as described in IEEE 802.15.4-2006 chapter 7.5.6.2.
(Third level of filtering) is applied to the frame. The radio transceiver’s RX_AACK mode
accepts only frames that satisfy all of the following requirements (quote from
IEEE 802.15.4-2006, 7.5.6.2):
1. The Frame Type subfield shall not contain a reserved frame type.
2. The Frame Version subfield shall not contain a reserved value.
3. If a destination PAN identifier is included in the frame, it shall match macPANId or
shall be the broadcast PAN identifier (0xFFFF).
4. If a short destination address is included in the frame, it shall match either
macShortAddress or the broadcast address (0xFFFF). Otherwise, if an extended
destination address is included in the frame, it shall match aExtendedAddress.
5. If the frame type indicates that the frame is a beacon frame, the source PAN
identifier shall match macPANId unless macPANId is equal to 0xFFFF, in which
case the beacon frame shall be accepted regardless of the source PAN identifier.
6. If only source addressing fields are included in a data or MAC command frame, the
frame shall be accepted only if the device is the PAN coordinator and the source
PAN identifier matches macPANId.
The radio transceiver requires two additional rules:
1. The frame type indicates that the frame is not an ACK frame (refer toTable 9-7 on
page 54).
59
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
2. At least one address field must be configured.
Address match, indicated by the TRX24_AMI interrupt is further controlled by the
content of subfields of the frame control field of a received frame according to the
following rule:
If (Destination Addressing Mode = 0 OR 1) AND (Source Addressing Mode = 0) no
TRX24_AMI interrupt is generated, refer to Figure 9-27 on page 69. This effectively
causes all acknowledgement frames not to be announced which otherwise always pass
the filter regardless of whether they are intended for this device or not.
For backward compatibility to IEEE 802.15.4-2003 third level filter rule 2 (Frame
Version) can be disabled by the bits AACK_FVN_MODE of register CSMA_SEED_1.
Frame filtering is available in Extended and Basic Operating Mode (see section "Basic
Operating Mode" on page 38); a frame passing the frame filtering generates an
TRX24_AMI interrupt, if enabled.
Note: 1. Filter rule 1 is affected by register bits AACK_FLTR_RES_FT and
AACK_UPLD_RES_FT (see register "XAH_CTRL_1 – Transceiver
Acknowledgment Frame Control Register 1" on page 132).
2. Filter rule 2 is affected by register bits AACK_FVN_MODE (see register
"CSMA_SEED_1 – Transceiver Acknowledgment Frame Control Register 2" on
page 144).
9.4.2.4.1 RX_AACK Slotted Operation – Slotted Acknowledgement
The radio transceiver supports slotted acknowledgement operation according to
IEEE 802.15.4-2006, section 5.5.4.1.
In RX_AACK mode with bit SLOTTED_OPERATION of register XAH_CTRL_0 set, the
transmission of an acknowledgement frame has to be controlled by the microcontroller.
If an ACK frame has to be transmitted the radio transceiver expects writing SLPTR=1 to
actually start the transmission. This waiting state is signaled 6 symbol periods after the
reception of the last symbol of a data or MAC command frame by bits TRAC_STATUS
of register XAH_CTRL_0, which are set to SUCCESS_WAIT_FOR_ACK in that case. In
networks using slotted operation the start of the acknowledgment frame and thus the
exact timing must be provided by the microcontroller.
A timing example of an RX_AACK transaction with bit SLOTTED_OPERATION of
register XAH_CTRL_0 set is shown in the next figure. The acknowledgement frame is
ready to transmit 6 symbol times after the reception of the last symbol of a data or MAC
command frame. The transmission of the acknowledgement frame is initiated by the
microcontroller by writing SLPTR=1 and starts 16µs (tTR10) later. The interrupt latency
tIRQ is specified in section "Digital Interface Timing Characteristics" on page 560.
60
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 9-11. Example Timing of an RX_AACK Transaction for Slotted Operation
RX/TX Frame
on Air
R X _A A C K _O N
T R X_ STA TE
Fram e Type
R X _A AC K_O N
R X /T X R X TX
T R X24 _ R X_ E N D
IRQ
RX
Typ . P rocessing Delay tIR Q
51 20 704 time [µ s]
64 1 026
Data F ram e (L e n gth = 10, A CK =1) AC K Fram e
SFD
96 µ s
(6 sy m bols)
SL P TR
tT R 1 0
TX R X
SLPTR
AC K transmission in itiated by m icr oco ntrolle r
BU S Y _R X_ A AC K
R X
waiting perio d sig naled by register bits TR A C _S TATUS
tIR Q
T R X24 _ TX _ EN D
If bit AACK_ACK_TIME of register XAH_CTRL_1 is set, an acknowledgment frame can
be sent already 2 symbol times after the reception of the last symbol of a data or MAC
command frame.
9.4.2.4.2 RX_AACK Mode Timing
A timing example of an RX_AACK transaction is shown in the next figure. In this
example a data frame of length 10 with an ACK request is received. The radio
transceiver changes to state BUSY_RX_AACK after SFD detection. The completion of
the frame reception is indicated by a TRX24_RX_END interrupt. Interrupts
TRX24_RX_START and TRX24_AMI are disabled in this example. The ACK frame is
automatically transmitted after a default wait period of 12 symbols (192 µs), bit
AACK_ACK_TIME = 0 (reset value). The interrupt latency tIRQ is specified in section
"Digital Interface Timing Characteristics" on page 560.
Figure 9-12. Example Timing of an RX_AACK Transaction
RX/TX Frame
on Air
R X _A AC K _O N B U S Y _R X_A A C K
TR X_ST A TE
Frame Type
R X _ AAC K _O N
RX /TX R X TX
T R X2 4 _R X _ EN D
IRQ
RX
Typ. Processing Dela y tIR Q
51 20 704 tim e [µ s]
64 108 8
D ata F ram e (Length = 10, A CK = 1) AC K Fra m e
S F D
192 µs
(1 2 s ym bols)
T R X 24 _ TX _ E N D
tIR Q
If bit AACK_ACK_TIME of register XAH_CTRL_1 is set, an acknowledgment frame is
sent already 2 symbol times after the reception of the last symbol of a data or MAC
command frame.
9.4.2.5 MAF – Multiple Address Filter
Certain scenarios, like different PANs, may require to extend the address filter to
multiple PANs. The address filter was extended to support four PANs.
The address filter unit consists of four independent filter blocks. The incoming signal is
analyzed in parallel by all filter blocks. Each block can be enabled separately and is
61
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
configured by a short address and pan ID. The IEEE 64 bit address is the same for
every filter block.
There are some separate configuration bits for every filter block (see Table 9-13 below).
Table 9-13. Additional register set for Multiple Address Filter
Register Name Description
{MAFSA0H,MAFSA0L} short address for filter #0
both register are mirror register of
{SHORT_ADDR_1,SHORT_ADDR_0}
{MAFSA1H,MAFSA1L} short address for filter #1
{MAFSA2H,MAFSA2L} short address for filter #2
{MAFSA3H,MAFSA3L} short address for filter #3
{MAFPA0H,MAFPA0L} Pan ID for filter #0
both register are mirror register of
{PAN_ID_1,PAN_ID_0}
{MAFPA1H,MAFPA1L} Pan ID for filter #1
{MAFPA2H,MAFPA2L} Pan ID for filter #2
{MAFPA3H,MAFPA3L} Pan ID for filter #3
MAFCR0 bits MAFxEN to enable filter #x
MAFCR1 bits AACK_I_AM_COORDx to enable filter #x as coordinator
bits AACK_SET_PDx to enable pending data bit of filter #x
TRX24_AMIx each address filter #x generates the respective TRX24_AMIx
interrupt
Note: There are some register which are mirrored.
• MAFSA0H <--> SHORT_ADDR_0
• MAFSA1H <--> SHORT_ADDR_1
• MAFPA0H <--> PAN_ID_0
• MAFPA1H <--> PAN_ID_1
• bit AACK_I_AM_COORD (register CSMA_SEED_1) <-->
bit AACK_I_AM_COORD0 (register MAFCR1)
• bit AACK_SET_PD (register CSMA_SEED_1) <-->
bit AACK_SET_PD (register MAFCR1)
That means access to the registers is equal, the internal function can be written or read by both
registers.
Bit MAF0EN is set by reset to provide backward compatibility. The four address filter
blocks generate four address match interrupts.
Table 9-14. Additional AMI Interrupts for Multiple Address Filter
Interrupt Name Description
TRX24_AMI0 address match interrupt from address filter #0, enabled bit AMI0 in
register IRQ_MASK1 is set
TRX24_AMI1 address match interrupt from address filter #1, enabled bit AMI1 in
register IRQ_MASK1 is set
TRX24_AMI2 address match interrupt from address filter #2, enabled bit AMI2 in
register IRQ_MASK1 is set
62
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Interrupt Name Description
TRX24_AMI3 address match interrupt from address filter #3, enabled bit AMI3 in
register IRQ_MASK1 is set
Note: If bit AMI_EN is set in register IRQ_MASK, interrupt TRX24_XAH_AMI occures if any of the
four filter detects an address match.
It is not allowed to configure two enabled address filter to the same short address and
PAN.
63
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.4.2.6 TX_ARET_ON – Transmit with Automatic Retry and CSMA-CA Retry
Figure 9-13. Flow Diagram of TX_ARET
T R X _ S T A T E = TX _ A R E T _ O N
cs m a _ rctr = 0
T R X _ S T A T E = T X _ A R E T _ O N
N
Y
F a ilu r e
S u c c e ss
N
Y
fram e _ rctr = 0
T ra n s m it F ra m e
fram e _rc tr = fram e_ rctr + 1
Y
N
N
Y
T R A C _S T A T U S =
N O _ AC K
T R A C _ S T A T U S =
S U C C E S S
T R A C _ S T A T U S =
C H A N N E L _ A C C E S S _ F A IL U R E
Issu e T R X 2 4 _ T X _ E N D inte rru pt
CCA
R e s u lt
A C K re q ue s te d
A C K va lid
T R A C _ S T A T U S =
S U C C E S S _ D A T A _ P E N D I N G
Y
N
R e c e ive A C K
u ntil tim eo u t
Y
N
T R X _S T A T E = B U S Y _ T X _ A R E T
T R A C _S T A T U S = IN V A L ID
MAX_CSM A_RETRIES
<7
Y
N
cs m a _ rctr >
MAX_CSM A_RETRIES
Y
N o te 1: If M A X _ C S M A _ R E T R IE S = 7 n o retry is
p e rform e d
(se e N o te 1)
R a n d om B ac k -O ff
cs m a _ rc tr = csm a _ rc tr + 1
C C A
S ta rt T X
fra m e _rc tr >
M A X _ F R A M E _ R E T R IE S D a ta P e nd in g
N
64
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Overview
The implemented TX_ARET algorithm is shown in Figure 9-13 on page 63.
In TX_ARET mode, the radio transceiver first executes the CSMA-CA algorithm, as
defined by IEEE 802.15.4–2006, section 7.5.1.4, initiated by a transmit start event. If
the channel is IDLE a frame is transmitted from the Frame Buffer. If the
acknowledgement frame is requested the radio transceiver additionally checks for an
ACK reply.
A TRX24_TX_END interrupt indicates the completion of the TX_ARET transmit
transaction.
Description
Configuration and address bits are to be set in TRX_OFF or PLL_ON state prior to
switching to TX_ARET mode. It is further recommended to transfer the PSDU data to
the Frame Buffer in advance. The transaction is started by either writing SLPTR=1 as
described in section "Transceiver Pin Register TRXPR" on page 35 or writing a
TX_START command to register TRX_STATE.
If the CSMA-CA detects a busy channel, it is retried as specified by bits
MAX_CSMA_RETRIES of register XAH_CTRL_0. In case that CSMA-CA does not
detect a clear channel after MAX_CSMA_RETRIES it aborts the TX_ARET transaction,
issues a TRX24_TX_END interrupt and sets the value of the TRAC_STATUS register
bits to CHANNEL_ACCESS_FAILURE.
During transmission of a frame the radio transceiver parses bit 5 (ACK Request) of the
MAC header (MHR) frame control field of the PSDU data (PSDU octet #1) to be
transmitted to check if an ACK reply is expected.
If an ACK is expected the radio transceiver automatically switches into receive mode to
wait for a valid ACK reply. After receiving an ACK frame the Frame Pending subfield of
that frame is parsed and the status register bits TRAC_STATUS are updated
accordingly (see Table 9-19 below). This receive procedure does not overwrite the
Frame Buffer content. Transmit data in the Frame Buffer is not changed during the
entire TX_ARET transaction. Received frames other than the expected ACK frame are
discarded.
If no valid ACK is received or after timeout of 54 symbol periods (864 µs), the radio
transceiver retries the entire transaction (including CSMA-CA) until the maximum
number of retransmissions as set by the bits MAX_FRAME_RETRIES in register
XAH_CTRL_0 is exceeded.
After that, the microcontroller may read the value of the bits TRAC_STATUS of register
TRX_STATE to verify whether the transaction was successful or not. The register bits
are set according to the following cases:
Table 9-19. Interpretation of the TRAC_STATUS register bits
Value Name Description
0 SUCCESS The transaction was responded by a valid
ACK, or, if no ACK is requested, after a
successful frame transmission
1 SUCCESS_DATA_PENDING Equivalent to SUCCESS; indicates pending
frame data according to the MHR frame
control field of the received ACK response
3 CHANNEL_ACCESS_FAILURE
Channel is still busy after
MAX_CSMA_RETRIES of CSMA-CA
65
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Value Name Description
5 NO_ACK No acknowledgement frames were received
during all retry attempts
7 INVALID Entering TX_ARET mode sets
TRAC_STATUS = 7
Note that if no ACK is expected (according to the content of the received frame in the
Frame Buffer), the radio transceiver issues a TRX24_TX_END interrupt directly after
the frame transmission has been completed. The value of the bits TRAC_STATUS of
register TRX_STATE is set to SUCCESS.
A value of MAX_CSMA_RETRIES = 7 initiates an immediate TX_ARET transaction
without performing CSMA-CA. This is required to support slotted acknowledgement
operation. Further the value MAX_FRAME_RETRIES is ignored and the TX_ARET
transaction is performed only once.
A timing example of a TX_ARET transaction is shown in Figure 9-14 below .
Figure 9-14. Example Timing of a TX_ARET Transaction
RX/TX Frame
on Air
TX_ARET_ON BUSY_TX_ARET
TR X_STATE
FrameType
TX_ARET_O N
RX/TX RX
RX_END
IRQ
Typ. Processing Delay 16 µs
6720 x time [µs]
128 x+352
SLPTR
TX
tIRQ
Data Frame (Length = 10, ACK=1) ACK Frame
32 µstC SMA-C A
TXCSMA-CA RX
Note: 1. tCSMA-CA defines the random CSMA-CA processing time.
Here an example data frame of length 10 with an ACK request is transmitted, see Table
9-16 on page 66. After the transmission the radio transceiver switches to receive mode
and expects an acknowledgement response. During the whole transaction including
frame transmit, wait for ACK and ACK receive the radio transceiver status register
TRX_STATUS signals BUSY_TX_ARET.
A successful reception of the acknowledgment frame is indicated by the
TRX24_TX_END interrupt. The status register TRX_STATUS changes back to
TX_ARET_ON. The TX_ARET status register TRAC_STATUS changes as well to
TRAC_STATUS = SUCCESS or TRAC_STATUS = SUCCESS_DATA_PENDING if the
frame pending subfield of the received ACK frame was set to 1.
9.4.2.7 Interrupt Handling
The interrupt handling in the Extended Operating Mode is similar to the Basic Operating
Mode (see section "Interrupt Handling" on page 42). The microcontroller enables
interrupts by setting the appropriate bit in register IRQ_MASK.
For RX_AACK and TX_ARET the following interrupts (Table 9-16 on page 66) inform
about the status of a frame reception and transmission:
66
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 9-16. Interrupt Handling in Extended Operating Mode
Mode Interrupt Description
RX_AACK TRX24_RX_START Indicates a PHR reception
TRX24_AMI Issued at address match
TRX24_RX_END Signals completion of RX_AACK transaction if
successful
- A received frame must pass the address filter;
- The FCS is valid
TX_ARET TRX24_TX_END Signals completion of TX_ARET transaction
Both TRX24_PLL_LOCK Entering RX_AACK_ON or TX_ARET_ON state from
TRX_OFF state, the TRX24_PLL_LOCK interrupt
signals that the transaction can be started
RX_AACK
For RX_AACK it is recommended to enable the TRX24_RX_END interrupt. This
interrupt is issued only if a frame passes the frame filtering (see section "Frame
Filtering" on page 58) and has a valid FCS. This is different to Basic Operating Mode
(see section "Basic Operating Mode" on page 38). The use of the other interrupts is
optional.
On reception of a valid PHR a TRX24_RX_START interrupt is issued. The TRX24_AMI
interrupt indicates an address match (see filter rules in section "Frame Filtering" on
page 58). The completion of a frame reception with a valid FCS is indicated by the
TRX24_RX_END interrupt.
Thus it can happen that a TRX24_RX_START and/or a TRX24_AMI interrupt are
issued, but no TRX24_RX_END interrupt.
The end of an acknowledgment transmission is confirmed by a TRX24_TX_END
interrupt.
TX_ARET
In TX_ARET interrupt TRX24_TX_END is only issued after completing the entire
TX_ARET transaction.
Acknowledgement frames do not issue a TRX24_RX_START, TRX24_AMI or a
TRX24_RX_END interrupt.
All other interrupts as described in section Table 9-2 on page 37 are also available in
Extended Operating Mode.
9.4.2.8 Register Summary
The following registers (Table 9-17 below) are to be configured to control the Extended
Operating Mode:
Table 9-17. Register Summary
Register Name Description
TRX_STATUS Radio transceiver status, CCA result
TRX_STATE Radio transceiver state control, TX_ARET status
TRX_CTRL_1 TX_AUTO_CRC_ON
PHY_CC_CCA CCA mode control, Table 9-24 on page 76
CCA_THRES CCA threshold settings, see "Overview" on page 76
XAH_CTRL_1 RX_AACK control
67
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Name Description
IEEE_ADDR_7
….
IEEE_ADDR_0
PAN_ID_1
PAN_ID_0
SHORT_ADDR_1
SHORT_ADDR_0
Address filter configuration
Short address, PAN-ID and IEEE address
XAH_CTRL_0 TX_ARET control, retries value control
CSMA_SEED_0 CSMA-CA seed value
CSMA_SEED_1 CSMA-CA seed value, RX_AACK control
CSMA_BE CSMA-CA back-off exponent control
9.5 Functional Description
9.5.1 Introduction – IEEE 802.15.4-2006 Frame Format
Figure 9-15 below provides an overview of the physical layer (PHY) frame structure as
defined by IEEE 802.15.4. Figure 9-16 on page 68 shows the frame structure of the
medium access control (MAC) layer.
Figure 9-15. IEEE 802.15.4 Frame Format - PHY-Layer Frame Structure (PPDU)
9.5.1.1 PHY Protocol Layer Data Unit (PPDU)
9.5.1.1.1 Synchronization Header (SHR)
The SHR consists of a four-octet preamble field (all zero), followed by a single byte
start-of-frame delimiter (SFD) which has the predefined value 0xA7. During transmit,
the SHR is automatically generated by the radio transceiver, thus the Frame Buffer
shall contain PHR and PSDU only.
The transmission of the SHR requires 160 µs (10 symbols). As the frame buffer access
is normally faster than the over-air data rate, this allows the application software to
initiate a transmission without having transferred the full frame data already. Instead it is
possible to subsequently write the frame content.
During frame reception, the SHR is used for synchronization purposes. The matching
SFD determines the beginning of the PHR and the following PSDU payload data.
9.5.1.1.2 PHY Header (PHR)
The PHY header is a single octet following the SHR. The least significant 7 bits denote
the frame length of the following PSDU, while the most significant bit of that octet is
reserved, and shall be set to 0 for IEEE 802.15.4 compliant frames.
68
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
On receive the PHR is returned as the first octet during Frame Buffer read access, the
most significant bit always set to 0. For IEEE 802.15.4 compliant operation bit 8 has to
be masked by software. The reception of a valid PHR is signaled by a
TRX24_RX_START interrupt.
On transmit the PHR has to be written first to the Frame Buffer.
9.5.1.1.3 PHY Payload (PHY Service Data Unit, PSDU)
The PSDU has a variable length between 0 and aMaxPHYPacketSize (127, maximum
PSDU size in octets) whereas the last two octets are used for the Frame Check
Sequence (FCS). The length of the PSDU is signaled by the frame length field (PHR)
as described in Table 9-18 below. The PSDU contains the MAC Protocol Layer Data
Unit (MPDU).
Received frames with a frame length field set to 0x00 (invalid PHR) are not by an
interrupt.
Table 9-18 below summarizes the type of payload versus the frame length value.
Table 9-18. Frame Length Field - PHR
Frame Length Value Payload
0 - 4 Reserved
5 MPDU (Acknowledgement)
6 – 8 Reserved
9 - aMaxPHYPacketSize MPDU
9.5.1.2 MAC Protocol Layer Data Unit (MPDU)
Figure 9-16 below shows the frame structure of the MAC layer.
Figure 9-16. IEEE 802.15.4 Frame Format - MAC-Layer Frame Structure (MPDU)
9.5.1.2.1 MAC Header (MHR) Fields
The MAC header consists of the Frame Control Field (FCF), a sequence number, and
the addressing fields (which are of variable length and can even be empty in certain
situations).
69
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.5.1.2.2 Frame Control Field (FCF)
The FCF consists of 16 bits, and occupies the first two octets of either the MPDU or the
PSDU, respectively.
Figure 9-27. IEEE 802.15.4-2006 Frame Control Field (FCF)
Bit [2:0]: describe the frame type. Table 9-19 below summarizes frame types defined
by IEEE 802.15.4, section 7.2.1.1.1.
Table 9-19. Frame Control Field – Frame Type Subfield
Frame Control Field Bit Assignments Description
Frame Type Value
b2 b1 b0
Value
000 0 Beacon
001 1 Data
010 2 Acknowledge
011 3 MAC command
100 – 111 4 – 7 Reserved
This subfield is used for address filtering by the third level filter rules. Only frame types
0 – 3 pass the third level filter rules (refer to section "Frame Filtering" on page 58).
Automatic address filtering of the radio transceiver is enabled when using the
RX_AACK mode (refer to "RX_AACK_ON – Receive with Automatic ACK" on page 50).
A reserved frame (frame type value > 3) can be received if bit AACK_UPLD_RES_FT of
register XAH_CTRL_1 is set. For details refer to chapter "Configuration of non IEEE
802.15.4 Compliant Scenarios" on page 56. Address filtering is also provided in Basic
Operating Mode as explained in "Basic Operating Mode" on page 38.
Bit 3: indicates whether security processing applies to this frame.
Bit 4: is the “Frame Pending” subfield. This field can be set in an acknowledgment
frame (ACK) in response to a data request MAC command frame. This bit indicates that
the node, which transmitted the ACK, has more data to send to the node receiving the
ACK.
For acknowledgment frames automatically generated by the radio transceiver, this bit is
set according to the content of bit AACK_SET_PD of register CSMA_SEED_1 if the
received frame was a data request MAC command frame.
Bit 5: forms the “Acknowledgment Request” subfield. If this bit is set within a data or
MAC command frame that is not broadcast, the recipient shall acknowledge the
reception of the frame within the time specified by IEEE 802.15.4 (i.e. within 192 µs for
non beacon-enabled networks).
The radio transceiver parses this bit during RX_AACK mode and transmits an
acknowledgment frame if necessary.
In TX_ARET mode this bit indicates if an acknowledgement frame is expected after
transmitting a frame. If this is the case, the receiver waits for the acknowledgment
frame, otherwise the TX_ARET transaction is finished.
70
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Bit 6: the “Intra-PAN” subfield indicates that in a frame, where both, the destination and
source addresses are present, the PAN-ID of the source address filed is omitted. In
RX_AACK mode this bit is evaluated by the address filter logic of the radio transceiver.
Bit [11:10]: the “Destination Addressing Mode” subfield describes the format of the
destination address of the frame. The values of the address modes are summarized in
Table 9-20 below according to IEEE 802.15.4:
Table 9-20. Frame Control Field – Destination and Source Addressing Mode
Frame Control Field Bit Assignments Description
Addressing Mode
b11 b10
b15 b14
Value
00 0 PAN identifier and address fields are not present
01 1 Reserved
10 2 Address field contains a 16-bit short address
11 3 Address field contains a 64-bit extended address
If the destination address mode is either 2 or 3 (i.e. if the destination address is
present), it always consists of a 16-bit PAN-ID first followed by either the 16-bit or 64-bit
address as defined by the mode.
Bit [13:12]: the “Frame Version” subfield specifies the version number corresponding to
the frame. These register bits are reserved in IEEE-802.15.4-2003.
This subfield shall be set to 0 to indicate a frame compatible with IEEE 802.15.4-2003
and 1 to indicate an IEEE 802.15.4-2006 frame. All other subfield values shall be
reserved for future use.
The bit AACK_FVN_MODE of register CSMA_SEED_1 controls the RX_AACK
behavior of frame acknowledgements. This register determines if, depending on the
Frame Version Number, a frame is acknowledged or not. This is necessary for
backward compatibility to IEEE 802.15.4-2003 and for future use. Even if frame version
numbers 2 and 3 are reserved, it can be handled by the radio transceiver. For details
refer to "CSMA_SEED_1 – Transceiver Acknowledgment Frame Control Register 2" on
page 144.
See IEEE 802.15.4-2006, section 7.2.3 for details on frame compatibility.
Table 9-21. Frame Control Field – Frame Version Subfield
Frame Control Field Bit Assignments Description
Frame Version
b13 b12
Value
00 0 Frames are compatible with IEEE 802.15.4-2003
01 1 Frames are compatible with IEEE 802.15.4-2006
10 2 Reserved
11 3 Reserved
Bit [15:14]: the “Source Addressing Mode” subfield, with similar meaning as
“Destination Addressing Mode” (refer to Table 9-20 above).
The subfields of the FCF (Bits 0–2, 3, 6, 10–15) affect the address filter logic of the
radio transceiver while executing a RX_AACK operation (see "RX_AACK_ON –
Receive with Automatic ACK" on page 50).
71
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.5.1.2.3 Frame Compatibility between IEEE 802.15.4-2003 and IEEE 802.15.4-2006
All unsecured frames according to IEEE 802.15.4-2006 are compatible with unsecured
frames compliant with IEEE 802.15.4-2003 with two exceptions: a coordinator
realignment command frame with the “Channel Page” field present (see IEEE 802.15.4-
2006 7.3.8) and any frame with a MAC Payload field larger than
aMaxMACSafePayloadSize octets.
Compatibility for secured frames is shown in the following table, which identifies the
security operating modes for IEEE 802.15.4-2006.
Table 9-22. Frame Control Field – Security and Frame Version
Frame Control Field Bit Assignments Description
Security Enabled
b3
Frame Version
b13 b12
0 00 No security. Frames are compatible between
IEEE 802.15.4-2003 and IEEE 802.15.4-2006.
0 01 No security. Frames are not compatible between
IEEE 802.15.4-2003 and IEEE 802.15.4-2006.
1 00 Secured frame formatted according to
IEEE 802.15.4-2003. This frame type is not
supported in IEEE 802.15.4-2006.
1 01 Secured frame formatted according to
IEEE 802.15.4-2006
9.5.1.2.4 Sequence Number
The one-octet sequence number following the FCF identifies a particular frame, so that
duplicated frame transmissions can be detected. While operating in RX_AACK mode,
the content of this field is copied from the frame to be acknowledged into the
acknowledgment frame.
9.5.1.2.5 Addressing Fields
The addressing fields of the MPDU are used by the radio transceiver for address
matching indication. The destination address (if present) is always first, followed by the
source address (if present). Each address field consists of the Intra PAN-ID and a
device address. If both addresses are present and the “Intra PAN-ID compression”
subfield in the FCF is set to one, the source Intra PAN-ID is omitted.
Note that in addition to these general rules IEEE 802.15.4 further restricts the valid
address combinations for the individual possible MAC frame types. For example the
situation where both addresses are omitted (source addressing mode = 0 and
destination addressing mode = 0) is only allowed for acknowledgment frames. The
address filter in the radio transceiver has been designed to apply to IEEE 802.15.4
compliant frames. It can be configured to handle other frame formats and exceptions.
9.5.1.2.6 Auxiliary Security Header Field
The Auxiliary Security Header specifies information required for security processing and
has a variable length. This field determines how the frame is actually protected (security
level) and which keying material from the MAC security PIB is used (see
IEEE 802.15.4-2006, 7.6.1). This field shall be present only if the Security Enabled
72
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
subfield b3 is set to one (see section "Frame Compatibility between IEEE 802.15.4-
2003 and IEEE 802.15.4-2006" on page 71). For details of its structure see
IEEE 802.15.4-2006, 7.6.2 Auxiliary security header.
9.5.1.2.7 MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU)
This is the actual MAC payload. It is usually structured according to the individual frame
type. A description can be found in IEEE 802.15.4-2006, chapter 5.5.3.2.
9.5.1.2.8 MAC Footer (MFR) Fields
The MAC footer consists of a two-octet Frame Checksum (FCS). For details refer to the
following section "Frame Check Sequence (FCS)" below.
9.5.2 Frame Check Sequence (FCS)
The Frame Check Sequence (FCS) is characterized by:
• Indicate bit errors based on a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) of 16 bit length;
• Uses International Telecommunication Union (ITU) CRC polynomial;
• Automatically evaluated during reception;
• Can be automatically generated during transmission.
9.5.2.1 Overview
The FCS is intended for use at the MAC layer to detect corrupted frames at a first level
of filtering. It is computed by applying an ITU CRC polynomial to all transferred bytes
following the length field (MHR and MSDU fields). The frame check sequence has a
length of 16 bit and is located in the last two bytes of a frame (MAC footer, see Figure
9-16 on page 68).
The radio transceiver applies an FCS check on each received frame. The result of the
FCS check is stored in bit RX_CRC_VALID of register PHY_RSSI.
On transmit the radio transceiver generates and appends the FCS bytes during the
frame transmission. This behavior can be disabled by setting the bit
TX_AUTO_CRC_ON = 0 in register TRX_CTRL_1.
9.5.2.2 CRC calculation
The CRC polynomial used in IEEE 802.15.4 networks is defined by
1)( 51216
16 +++= xxxxG
The FCS shall be calculated for transmission using the following algorithm:
Let
12
2
1
1
0
)( −−
−− ++++= kk
kk bxbxbxbxM K
be the polynomial representing the sequence of bits for which the checksum is to be
computed. Multiply M(x) by x16 giving the polynomial
16
)()( xxMxN ⋅=
Divide )(xN modulo 2 by the generator polynomial G16(x) to obtain the remainder
polynomial
1514
14
1
15
0...)( rxrxrxrxR ++++=
The FCS field is given by the coefficients of the remainder polynomial, R(x).
73
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Example:
Consider a 5 octet ACK frame. The MHR field consists of
0100 0000 0000 0000 0101 0110.
The leftmost bit (b0) is transmitted first in time. The FCS is in this case
0010 0111 1001 1110.
The leftmost bit (r0) is transmitted first in time.
9.5.2.3 Automatic FCS generation
The automatic FCS generation is performed with register bit TX_AUTO_CRC_ON = 1
(reset value). This allows the radio transceiver to autonomously compute the FCS. For
a frame with a frame length specified as N (3 ≤ N ≤ 127), the FCS is calculated on the
first N-2 octets in the Frame Buffer and the resulting FCS field is transmitted in place of
the last two octets from the Frame Buffer.
If the automatic FCS generation of the radio transceivers is enabled, the Frame Buffer
write access can be stopped right after MAC payload. There is no need to write FCS
dummy bytes.
In RX_AACK mode, when a received frame needs to be acknowledged, the FCS of the
ACK frame is always automatically generated by the radio transceiver, independent of
the TX_AUTO_CRC_ON setting.
Example:
A frame transmission of length five with TX_AUTO_CRC_ON set, is started with a
Frame Buffer write access of five bytes (the last two bytes can be omitted). The first
three bytes are used for FCS generation; the last two bytes are replaced by the
internally calculated FCS.
9.5.2.4 Automatic FCS check
An automatic FCS check is applied on each received frame with a frame length N ≥ 2.
The bit RX_CRC_VALID of register PHY_RSSI is set if the FCS of a received frame is
valid. The register bit is updated when issuing a TRX24_RX_END interrupt and remains
valid until a new frame reception causes the next TRX24_RX_END interrupt.
In RX_AACK mode, the radio transceiver rejects the frame and the TRX24_RX_END
interrupt is not issued if the FCS of the received frame is not valid.
In TX_ARET mode, the FCS and the sequence number of an ACK are automatically
checked. The ACK is not accepted if one of those is not correct.
9.5.3 Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
The Received Signal Strength Indicator is characterized by:
• Minimum RSSI level is -90 dBm (RSSI_BASE_VAL);
• Dynamic range is 81 dB;
• Minimum RSSI value is 0;
• Maximum RSSI value is 28.
9.5.3.1 Overview
The RSSI is a 5-bit value indicating the receive power in the selected channel in steps
of 3 dB. No attempt is made to distinguish IEEE 802.15.4 signals from others. Only the
74
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
received signal strength is evaluated. The RSSI provides the basis for an ED
measurement. See section "Energy Detection (ED)" below for details.
9.5.3.2 Reading RSSI
In Basic Operating Mode the RSSI value is valid in any receive state, and is updated
every tTR25 = 2 µs to register PHY_RSSI.
It is not recommended to read the RSSI value when using the Extended Operating
Mode. The automatically generated ED value should then be used (see section "Energy
Detection (ED)" below).
9.5.3.3 Data Interpretation
The RSSI value is a 5-bit value indicating the receive power in steps of 3 dB and with a
range of 0- 28.
An RSSI value of 0 indicates a receiver RF input power of PRF < -90 dBm. For an RSSI
value in the range of 1 to 28, the RF input power can be calculated as follows:
PRF = RSSI_BASE_VAL + 3 • (RSSI - 1) [dBm]
Figure 9-18. Mapping between RSSI Value and Received Input Power
-100
-90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
RSSI
Receiver Input Power P
RF
[dBm]
Measured
Ideal
9.5.4 Energy Detection (ED)
The Energy Detection (ED) module is characterized by:
• 85 unique energy levels defined;
• 1 dB resolution.
9.5.4.1 Overview
The receiver ED measurement is used by the network layer as part of a channel
selection algorithm. It is an estimation of the received signal power within the bandwidth
of an IEEE 802.15.4 channel. No attempt is made to identify or decode signals on the
channel. The ED value is calculated by averaging RSSI values over eight symbols
(128 µs).
75
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
For High Data Rate Modes the automated ED measurement duration is reduced to
32 µs as described in "High Data Rate Modes" on page 93. The measurement period in
these modes is still 128 µs for manually initiated ED measurements as long as the
receiver is in RX_ON state.
9.5.4.2 Measurement Description
There are two ways to initiate an ED measurement:
• Manually, by writing an arbitrary value to register PHY_ED_LEVEL, or
• Automatically, after detection of a valid SHR of an incoming frame.
For manually initiated ED measurements the radio transceiver needs to be in one of the
states RX_ON or BUSY_RX. The end of the ED measurement is indicated by a
TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE interrupt.
The automatic ED measurement is started if a SHR is detected. The end of the
automatic measurement is not signaled by an interrupt.
The measurement result is stored after tTR26 = 140 µs (128 µs measurement duration
and processing delay) in register PHY_ED_LEVEL.
Thus by using Basic Operating Mode a valid ED value from the currently received frame
is accessible 108 µs after the TRX24_RX_START interrupt and remains valid until the
next incoming frame generates a new TRX24_RX_START interrupt or until another ED
measurement is initiated.
When using the Extended Operating Mode it is recommended to mask the
TRX24_RX_START interrupt. Hence the interrupt cannot be used as timing reference.
A successful frame reception is signalized by the TRX24_RX_END interrupt. The
minimum time span between a TRX24_RX_END interrupt and a following SFD
detection is tTR27 = 96 µs due to the length of the SHR. The ED value needs to be read
within 224 µs including the ED measurement time after the TRX24_RX_END interrupt.
Otherwise it could be overwritten by the result of the next measurement cycle. This is
important for time critical applications or if the TRX24_RX_START interrupt is not used
to indicate the reception of a frame.
The values of the register PHY_ED_LEVEL are:
Table 9-23. Register Bit PHY_ED_LEVEL Interpretation
PHY_ED_LEVEL Description
0xFF Reset value
0x00 … 0x53 ED measurement result of the last ED measurement
Note: 1. It is not recommended to manually initiate an ED measurement when using the
Extended Operating Mode.
9.5.4.3 Data Interpretation
The PHY_ED_LEVEL is an 8-bit register. The ED value of the radio transceiver has a
valid range from 0x00 to 0x53 with a resolution of 1 dB. All other values do not occur. A
value of 0xFF indicates the reset value. A value of PHY_ED_LEVEL = 0 indicates that
the measured energy is less than -90 dBm (see parameter RSSI_BASE_VAL in section
"Receiver Characteristics" on page 562). Due to environmental conditions (temperature,
voltage, semiconductor parameters etc.) the calculated ED value has a maximum
tolerance of ±5 dB, this is to be considered as constant offset over the measurement
range.
An ED value of 0 indicates an RF input power of PRF ≤ -90 dBm. For an ED value in the
range of 0 to 83, the RF input power can be calculated as follows:
76
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
PRF = -90 + ED [dBm]
Figure 9-19. Mapping between values in PHY_ED_LEVEL and Received Input Power
-100
-90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Register PHY_ED_LEVEL Value
Receiver Input Power P
RF
[dBm]
Measured
Ideal
9.5.4.4 Interrupt Handling
The TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE interrupt is issued at the end of a manually initiated ED
measurement.
Note that an ED request should only be initiated in one of the receive states. Otherwise
the radio transceiver generates a TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE interrupt but no ED
measurement was performed.
9.5.5 Clear Channel Assessment (CCA)
The main features of the Clear Channel Assessment (CCA) module are:
• All 4 modes are available as defined by IEEE 802.15.4-2006 in section 6.9.9;
• Adjustable threshold for energy detection algorithm.
9.5.5.1 Overview
A CCA measurement is used to detect a clear channel. Four modes are specified by
IEEE 802.15.4-2006:
Table 9-24. CCA Mode Overview
CCA Mode Description
1 Energy above threshold.
CCA shall report a busy medium upon detecting any energy above the ED
threshold.
2 Carrier sense only.
CCA shall report a busy medium only upon the detection of a signal with the
modulation and spreading characteristics of an IEEE 802.15.4 compliant signal.
The signal strength may be above or below the ED threshold.
77
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
CCA Mode Description
0, 3 Carrier sense with energy above threshold.
CCA shall report a busy medium using a logical combination of
- Detection of a signal with the modulation and spreading characteristics of
this standard and
- Energy above the ED threshold.
Where the logical operator may be configured as either OR (mode 0) or
AND (mode 3).
9.5.5.2 Configuration and CCA Request
The CCA modes are configurable via register PHY_CC_CCA.
Usimg the Basic Operating Mode, a CCA request can be initiated manually by setting
CCA_REQUEST = 1 of register PHY_CC_CCA, if the radio transceiver is in any RX
state. The current channel status (CCA_STATUS) and the CCA completion status
(CCA_DONE) are accessible in register TRX_STATUS.
The CCA evaluation is done over eight symbol periods and the result is accessible
tTR28 = 140 µs (128 µs measurement duration and processing delay) after the request.
The end of a manually initiated CCA measurement is indicated by a
TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE interrupt.
The sub-register CCA_ED_THRES of register CCA_THRES defines the received power
threshold of the “energy above threshold” algorithm. The threshold is calculated by
RSSI_BASE_VAL + 2 • CCA_ED_THRES [dBm]. Any received power above this level
is interpreted as a busy channel.
Note that it is not recommended to manually initiate a CCA measurement when using
the Extended Operating Mode.
9.5.5.3 Data Interpretation
The current channel status (CCA_STATUS) and the CCA completion status
(CCA_DONE) are accessible in register TRX_STATUS. Note, register bits CCA_DONE
and CCA_STATUS are cleared in response to a CCA_REQUEST.
The completion of a measurement cycle is indicated by CCA_DONE = 1. If the radio
transceiver detected no signal (idle channel) during the measurement cycle, the
CCA_STATUS bit is set to 1.
When using the “energy above threshold” algorithm, any received power above
CCA_ED_THRES level is interpreted as a busy channel. The “carrier sense” algorithm
reports a busy channel when detecting an IEEE 802.15.4 signal above the
RSSI_BASE_VAL (see parameter RSSI_BASE_VAL in "Transceiver Electrical
Characteristics" on page 560). The radio transceiver is also able to detect signals below
this value, but the detection probability decreases with the signal power.
9.5.5.4 Interrupt Handling
The TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE interrupt is issued at the end of a manually initiated CCA
measurement.
Note: A CCA request should only be initiated in the receive states of Basic Operating Mode.
Otherwise the radio transceiver generates a TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE interrupt and
sets the register bit CCA_DONE = 1 even if no CCA measurement was performed.
78
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.5.5.5 Measurement Time
The response time for a manually initiated CCA measurement depends on the receiver
state.
In RX_ON state the CCA measurement is done over eight symbol periods and the
result is accessible 140 µs after the request (see section "Configuration and CCA
Request" on page 77).
In BUSY_RX state the CCA measurement duration depends on the CCA Mode and the
CCA request relative to the reception of an SHR. The end of the CCA measurement is
indicated by a TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE interrupt. The variation of a CCA measurement
period in BUSY_RX state is described in Table 9-25 below.
Table 9-25. CCA Measurement Period and Access in BUSY_RX state
CCA Mode Request within ED measurement(1) Request after ED measurement
1 Energy above threshold.
CCA result is available after finishing
automated ED measurement period.
CCA result is immediately available
after request.
2 Carrier sense only.
CCA result is immediately available after request.
3 Carrier sense with Energy above threshold (AND).
CCA result is available after finishing
automated ED measurement period.
CCA result is immediately available
after request.
0 Carrier sense with Energy above threshold (OR).
CCA result is available after finishing
automated ED measurement period.
CCA result is immediately available
after request.
Note: 1. After receiving the SHR an automated ED measurement is started with a length of
8 symbol periods (PSDU rate 250 kb/s), refer to section "Energy Detection (ED)"
on page 74. This automated ED measurement must be finished to provide a result
for the CCA measurement. Only one automated ED measurement per frame is
performed.
It is recommended to perform CCA measurements in RX_ON state only. To avoid
accidental switching to BUSY_RX state the SHR detection can be disabled by setting
bit RX_PDT_DIS of register RX_SYN. Refer to section "Receiver (RX)" on page 80 for
details. The receiver remains in RX_ON state to perform a CCA measurement until the
register bit RX_PDT_DIS is set back to continue the frame reception. In this case the
CCA measurement duration is 8 symbol periods.
9.5.6 Link Quality Indication (LQI)
According to IEEE 802.15.4 the LQI measurement is a characterization of the strength
and/or quality of a received packet. The measurement may be implemented using
receiver ED, a signal-to-noise ratio estimation or a combination of these methods. The
use of the LQI result by the network or application layers is not specified in this
standard. LQI values shall be an integer ranging from 0x00 to 0xFF. The minimum and
maximum LQI values (0x00 and 0xFF) should be associated with the lowest and
highest quality compliant signals, respectively, and LQI values in between should be
uniformly distributed between these two limits.
9.5.6.1 Overview
The LQI measurement of the radio transceiver is implemented as a measure of the link
quality which can be described with the packet error rate (PER) of this link. A LQI value
79
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
can be associated with an expected packet error rate. The PER is the ratio of erroneous
received frames to the total number of received frames. A PER of zero indicates no
frame error whereas at a PER of one no frame was received correctly.
The radio transceiver uses correlation results of multiple symbols within a frame to
determine the LQI value. This is done for each received frame. The minimum frame
length for a valid LQI value is two octets PSDU. LQI values are integers ranging from 0
to 255.
The following figure shows an example of a conditional packet error rate when receiving
a certain LQI value.
Figure 9-20. Conditional Packet Error Rate versus LQI
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
0 50 100 150 200 250
PER
LQI
The values are taken from received frames of PSDU length of 20 octets on
transmission channels with reasonable low multipath delay spreads. If the transmission
channel characteristic has a higher multipath delay spread than assumed in the
example, the PER is slightly higher for a certain LQI value. Since the packet error rate
is a statistical value, the PER shown in Figure 9-20 above is based on a huge number
of transactions. A reliable estimation of the packet error rate cannot be based on a
single or a small number of LQI values.
9.5.6.2 Request a LQI Measurement
The LQI byte can be obtained after a frame has been received by the radio transceiver.
One additional byte is automatically attached to the received frame containing the LQI
value. This information can also be read via Frame Buffer read access, see "User
accessible Frame Content" on page 84. The LQI byte can be read after the
TRX24_RX_END interrupt.
9.5.6.3 Data Interpretation
According to IEEE 802.15.4 a low LQI value is associated with low signal strength
and/or high signal distortions. Signal distortions are mainly caused by interference
signals and/or multipath propagation. High LQI values indicate a sufficient high signal
power and low signal distortions.
80
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Note that the received signal power as indicated by the received signal strength
indication (RSSI) value or energy detection (ED) value of the radio transceiver do not
characterize the signal quality and the ability to decode a signal.
As an example, a received signal with an input power of about 6 dB above the receiver
sensitivity likely results in a LQI value close to 255 for radio channels with very low
signal distortions. For higher signal power the LQI value becomes independent of the
actual signal strength. This is because the packet error rate for these scenarios tends
towards zero and further increased signal strength i.e. increasing the transmission
power does not decrease the error rate any further. In this case RSSI or ED can be
used to evaluate the signal strength and the link margin.
ZigBee networks often require the identification of the “best” routing between two
nodes. Both the LQI and the RSSI/ED can be used for this, dependent on the
optimization criteria. If a low packet error rate (corresponding to high throughput) is the
optimization criteria then the LQI value should be taken into consideration. If a low
transmission power or the link margin is the optimization criteria then the RSSI/ED
value is also helpful.
Combinations of LQI, RSSI and ED are possible for routing decisions. As a rule of
thumb RSSI and ED values are useful to differentiate between links with high LQI
values. Transmission links with low LQI values should be discarded for routing
decisions even if the RSSI/ED values are high. This is because RSSI and ED do not
say anything about the possibility to decode a signal. It is only an information about the
received signal strength whereas the source can be an interferer.
9.6 Module Description
9.6.1 Receiver (RX)
9.6.1.1 Overview
The receiver is split into an analog radio front-end and a digital base band processor
(RX BBP) according to the following figure. The digital base band processor and the
control engine are connected to the Frame Buffer and control registers which are
located in the microcontroller I/O memory space (see "I/O Memory" on page 28 and
"Transceiver to Microcontroller Interface" on page 34 ).
Figure 9-21. Receiver Block Diagram
LNA PPF BPF Lim iter R X
ADC
AG C R SSI
RFP
RFN
Analog D om ain D igital Dom ain
RX BBP Frame
Buffer
LO
Control
µC
I/F
Registers
$01FF
$0180
$017F
$0140
I/O
Mem ory
Space
The differential RF signal is amplified by a low noise amplifier (LNA), filtered (PPF) and
down converted to an intermediate frequency by a mixer. Channel selectivity is
performed using an integrated band pass filter (BPF). A limiting amplifier (Limiter)
provides sufficient gain to overcome the DC offset of the succeeding analog-to-digital
81
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
converter (RX ADC) and generates a digital RSSI signal. The ADC output signal is
sampled and processed further by the digital base band receiver (RX BBP).
The RX BBP performs additional signal filtering and signal synchronization. The
frequency offset of each frame is calculated by the synchronization unit and is used
during the remaining receive process to correct the offset. The receiver is designed to
handle frequency and symbol rate deviations up to ±120 ppm caused by combined
receiver and transmitter deviations. For details refer to chapter "General RF
Specifications" on page 561. Finally the signal is demodulated and the data are stored
in the Frame Buffer.
In Basic Operating Mode (see "Basic Operating Mode" on page 38), the reception of a
frame is indicated by a TRX24_RX_START interrupt. Accordingly its end is signalized
by a TRX24_RX_END interrupt. Based on the quality of the received signal a link
quality indicator (LQI) is calculated and appended to the frame. For details refer to.
Additional signal processing is applied to the frame data to provide further status
information like ED value (register PHY_ED_LEVEL) and FCS correctness (register
PHY_RSSI).
Beyond these features the Extended Operating Mode of the radio transceiver supports
address filtering and pending data indication. For details refer to "Extended Operating
Mode" on page 47.
9.6.1.2 Frame Receive Procedure
The frame receive procedure including the radio s setup for reception and reading
PSDU data from the Frame Buffer is described in "Frame Receive Procedure" on page
90.
9.6.1.3 Configuration
In Basic Operating Mode the receiver is enabled by writing command RX_ON to the
TRX_CMD bits of register TRX_STATE in the states TRX_OFF or PLL_ON. Similarly in
Extended Operating Mode the receiver is enabled for RX_AACK operation from the
states TRX_OFF or PLL_ON by writing the command RX_AACK_ON. There is no
additional configuration required to receive IEEE 802.15.4 compliant frames when using
the Basic Operating Mode. However, the frame reception in the Extended Operating
Mode requires further register configurations. For details refer to "Extended Operating
Mode" on page 47.
The receiver has an outstanding sensitivity performance of -100 dBm. At certain
environmental conditions or for High Data Rate Modes (see "High Data Rate Modes" on
page 93) it may be useful to manually decrease this sensitivity. This is achieved by
adjusting the detector threshold of the synchronization header using the
RX_PDT_LEVEL bits of register RX_SYN. Received signals with a RSSI value below
the threshold do not activate the demodulation process.
Furthermore, it may be useful to protect a received frame against overwriting by
subsequent received frames.
A Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection is enabled with register bit RX_SAFE_MODE
(TRX_CTRL_2) set (refer to "Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection" on page 99). After a
frame has been received, the buffer is protected for new incoming frames and the
receiver remains in RX_ON or RX_AACK_ON state until the RX_SAFE_MODE bit is
cleared by the controller. The Frame Buffer content is only protected if the FCS is valid.
A Static Frame Buffer Protection is enabled with bit RX_PDT_DIS of register RX_SYN
set. The receiver remains in RX_ON or RX_AACK_ON state and no further SHR is
detected until the register bit RX_PDT_DIS is set back.
82
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.6.2 Transmitter (TX)
9.6.2.1 Overview
The transmitter consists of a digital base band processor (TX BBP) and an analog front
end as shown in the following figure.
Figure 9-22. Transmitter Block Diagram
PLL – TX M odulation PA
Ext. RF front-end and
Output Power Control
DIG3/4
RFP
RFN TX Data
Analog Dom ain
TX BBP
Control
Buf
Digital Dom ain
Fram e
Buffer
µC
I/F
Registers
I/O
Mem ory
Space
$01FF
$017F
$0180
$0140
The TX BBP reads the frame data from the Frame Buffer and performs the bit-to-
symbol and symbol-to-chip mapping as specified by IEEE 802.15.4 in section 6.5.2.
The O-QPSK modulation signal is generated and fed into the analog radio front end.
The fractional-N frequency synthesizer (PLL) converts the baseband transmit signal to
the RF signal which is amplified by the power amplifier (PA). The PA output is internally
connected to bidirectional differential antenna pins (RFP, RFN) so that no external
antenna switch is needed.
9.6.2.2 Frame Transmit Procedure
The frame transmit procedure including writing PSDU data in the Frame Buffer and
initiating a transmission is described in section "Frame Transmit Procedure" on page
91. The controller must ensure to provide valid frame data before starting the frame
transmission. For save operation, it is recommended to write the complete frame into
the Frame Buffer before starting the frame transmission.
9.6.2.3 Configuration
The maximum output power of the transmitter is typically +3.5 dBm. The output power
can be configured via the TX_PWR bits of register PHY_TX_PWR. The output power of
the transmitter can be controlled over a 20 dB range.
A transmission can be started from PLL_ON or TX_ARET_ON state by writing ‘1’ to bit
SLPTR of the TRXPR register or by writing TX_START command to the TRX_CMD bits
of register TRX_STATE.
9.6.2.4 TX Power Ramping
To optimize the TX output power spectral density (PSD) the TX may be controlled by
register PHY_TX_PWR and PARCR. The PA ramps up prior to TX data sent and ramps
down after the TX data are completed. The signal sent during PA ramp up/down
process is not modulated. The PLL frequency (+500kHz or -500kHz relative to carrier
frequency) may be selected, separate for the PA ramp up and down process.
A timing example using default settings illustrates the sequence in the next figure. In
this example the transmission is initiated with the rising edge of the SLPTR bit. The
modulation starts 16 µs after SLPTR.
83
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 9-23. TX Power Ramping
When using en external RF front-end (refer to "RX/TX Indicator" on page 97) it may be
required to adjust the startup time of the external PA relative to the internal building
blocks to optimize the overall PSD. This can be achieved by PARCR register in the bits
PALTU/PALTD.
9.6.2.5 TX Spectrum side lobe suppression
The output signal TX may be filtered to suppress spectral side lobes. This might be
necessary if an external PA is used. By setting bit PLL_TX_FLT of register
TRX_CTRL_1, the TX signal will be filtered. Filtering has influence to signal quality,
thus EVM of the transmit signal slightly degrades (refer to Transmitter Characteristics
on page 561).
9.6.3 Frame Buffer
The radio transceiver contains a 128 byte dual port SRAM. One port of the frame buffer
is directly connected to the controller I/O space. Therefore random access to single
frame bytes is possible. The other port connects to the internal transmitter and receiver
modules. Both ports are independent and simultaneously accessible for data
communication.
The Frame Buffer uses the controller I/O address space 0x180 to 0x1FF for RX and TX
operation of the radio transceiver and can keep one IEEE 802.15.4 RX or one TX frame
of maximum length at a time.
Frame Buffer access is only possible if the radio transceiver is enabled (PRTRX24 bit in
the Power Reduction Register PRR1 is not set) and not in SLEEP state.
9.6.3.1 Data Management
Data in the Frame Buffer (received data or data to be transmitted) remain valid as long
as:
• No new frame or other data are written into the buffer;
• No new frame is received (in any BUSY_RX state);
• No state change into radio transceiver SLEEP state is made;
• No radio transceiver RESET (see bit TRXRST in "TRXPR – Transceiver Pin
Register" on page 197) or system reset took place;
84
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit PRTRX24 in register "PRR1 – Power Reduction Register 1" on page 196 is not
set;
By default there is no protection of the Frame Buffer against overwriting. If a frame is
received during a Frame Buffer read access of a previously received frame, the stored
data might be overwritten.
Finally the application software should check the transferred frame data integrity by a
FCS check.
The state of the radio transceiver should be changed to PLL_ON state after reception to
protect the Frame Buffer content against overwriting with new, incoming frames. This
can be achieved by writing immediately the command PLL_ON to the TRX_CMD bits of
register TRX_STATE after receiving the frame indicated by a TRX24_RX_END
interrupt.
Alternatively Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection can be used to protect received frames
against overwriting. For details refer to "Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection" on page 99.
Both procedures do not protect the Frame Buffer from overwriting by the application
software.
In Extended Operating Mode during TX_ARET operation (see "TX_ARET_ON –
Transmit with Automatic Retry and CSMA-CA Retry" on page 63) the radio transceiver
switches to receive if an acknowledgement of a previously transmitted frame was
requested. During this period received frames are evaluated but not stored in the Frame
Buffer. This allows the radio transceiver to wait for an acknowledgement frame and
retry the frame transmission without writing the frame data to the Frame Buffer again.
A radio transceiver state change except a transition to radio transceiver SLEEP state or
a radio transceiver RESET does not affect the Frame Buffer content. The Frame Buffer
is powered off and the stored data gets lost if the radio transceiver is forced into radio
transceiver SLEEP state.
Access conflicts may occur when reading and writing data simultaneously at the two
independent ports of the Frame Buffer TX/RX BBP and Controller interface.
9.6.3.2 User accessible Frame Content
The radio transceiver supports an IEEE 802.15.4 compliant frame format as shown in
the following figure.
Figure 9-32. Transceiver Frame Structure
Preamble Sequence SFD PHR(1) Payload LQI(2)
FCS
04 5 6 y + 3 y + 5 y + 6
Frame
Access SHR not accesible
RX: Frame Buffer content
PHY generated
Length [octets]
Duration 4 octets / 128 µs 1 y octets / y • 32 µs (y <= 128) 1
TX: Frame Buffer content
Notes: 1. Stored into Frame Buffer for TX operation
2. Stored into Frame Buffer during frame reception.
A frame comprises two sections. The radio transceiver internally generated SHR field
and the user accessible part are stored in the Frame Buffer. The SHR contains the
85
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
preamble and the SFD field. The variable frame section contains the PHR and the
PSDU including the FCS (see "Overview" on page 72).
The Frame Buffer content differs depending on the direction of the communication
(receive or transmit). To access the data follow the procedures described in "Radio
Transceiver Usage" on page 90.
During frame reception, the payload and the link quality indicator (LQI) value of a
successfully received frame are stored in the Frame Buffer. The radio transceiver
appends the LQI value to the frame data after the last received octet. Information of the
frame length is not stored in the Frame Buffer. The frame length information is located
in register TST_RX_LENGTH.
The SHR (except the SFD used to generate the last octet of the SHR) can generally not
be read by the application software.
The PHR and the PSDU need to be stored in the Frame Buffer for frame transmission.
The PHR byte is the first byte in the Frame Buffer (address 0x180) and must be
calculated based on the PHR and the PSDU. The maximum frame size supported by
the radio transceiver is 128 bytes. If the TX_AUTO_CRC_ON bit is set in the register
TRX_CTRL_1 – Transceiver Control Register 1, the FCS field of the PSDU is replaced
by the automatically calculated FCS during frame transmission. There is no need to
write the FCS field when using the automatic FCS generation.
Manipulating individual bytes of the Frame Buffer is simply possible by accessing the
appropriate buffer address.
The minimum frame length supported by the radio transceiver for non IEEE 802.15.4
compliant frames is one byte (Frame Length Field + 1 byte of data).
9.6.4 Battery Monitor (BATMON)
The main features of the battery monitor are:
• Configurable voltage threshold range from 1.7V to 3.675V
• Generates an interrupt when supply voltage drops below the threshold
9.6.4.1 Overview
The battery monitor (BATMON) detects and indicates a low supply voltage of EVDD.
This is done by comparing the voltage of EVDD with a configurable, internal threshold
voltage. A simplified schematic of the BATMON with the most important input and
output signals is shown in the following figure.
Figure 9-25. Simplified Schematic of BATMON
BATMON_HR
BATMON_VTH
4
EVDD
Threshold
Voltage
BATMON_OK
„1“
BATMON_IRQ
For input-to-output mapping
see BATMON register
DAC
+
-
D
Q
clear
86
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.6.4.2 Configuration
The Battery Monitor can be configured using the BATMON register. Register subfield
BATMON_VTH sets the threshold voltage. It is configurable with a resolution of 75 mV
in the upper voltage range (BATMON_HR = 1) and with a resolution of 50 mV in the
lower voltage range (BATMON_HR = 0).
9.6.4.3 Data Interpretation
The bit BATMON_OK of register BATMON monitors the current value of the battery
voltage:
• If BATMON_OK = 0 then the battery voltage is lower than the threshold voltage;
• If BATMON_OK = 1 then the battery voltage is higher than the threshold voltage;
The value BATMON_OK should be read out to verify the current supply voltage value
after setting a new threshold.
Note: The battery monitor is inactive during SLEEP states. Refer to status register
TRX_STATUS for details.
9.6.4.4 Interrupt Handling
A supply voltage drop below the configured threshold value is indicated by the
BAT_LOW interrupt. The BAT_LOW status bit as well as the BATLOW_EN bit is
located in the BATMON register. If BATLOW_EN =0, no IRQ is issued, but the status
flag is set if the battery low event occurs.
The interrupt is only issued if BATMON_OK changes from 1 to 0 and the event is stored
until the IRQ handler is called or the BAT_LOW IRQ is cleared manually by writing ‘1’ to
the BAT_LOW status flag.
No interrupt is generated when:
• The battery voltage is below the default 1.8V threshold at power up (BATMON_OK
was never 1) or
• A new threshold is set which is still above the current supply voltage (BATMON_OK
remains 0).
Noise or temporary voltage drops may generate unwanted interrupts when the battery
voltage is close to the programmed threshold voltage. To avoid this:
• Disable the BAT_LOW interrupt with the BATLOW_EN Bit in the BATMON register
and treat the battery as empty or
• Set a lower threshold value.
9.6.5 Crystal Oscillator (XOSC)
The main features of the crystal oscillator are:
• Amplitude controlled 16 MHz generation;
• 215 µs typical settling time after leaving SLEEP state;
• Configurable trimming with a capacitance array;
9.6.5.1 Overview
The crystal oscillator generates the reference frequency for the radio transceiver. All
other internally generated frequencies of the radio transceiver are derived from this
unique frequency. The overall system performance is therefore critically determined by
the accuracy of the crystal reference frequency. The external components of the crystal
87
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
oscillator should be selected carefully and the related board layout should be done with
caution as described in section "Application Circuits" on page 538.
The register XOSC_CTRL provides access to the control signals of the oscillator. Two
operating modes are supported. It is recommended to use the integrated oscillator
setup as described in Figure 9-26 below. Nevertheless a reference frequency can be
fed to the internal circuitry by using an external clock reference as shown in Figure 9-27
on page 88.
9.6.5.2 Integrated Oscillator Setup
The output frequency of the internal oscillator depends on the load capacitance
between the crystal pins XTAL1 and XTAL2. The total load capacitance CL must be
equal to the specified load capacitance of the crystal itself. It consists of the external
capacitors CX and parasitic capacitances connected to the XTAL nodes.
The following figure shows all parasitic capacitances, such as PCB stray capacitances
and the pin input capacitance summarized to CPAR.
Figure 9-26. Simplified XOSC Schematic with External Components
CX CX
16MHz XTAL2XTAL1
EVDD
CTRIM
CTRIM
CPAR
CPAR
IC internal
PCB
XTAL_TRIM[3:0]
EVDD
VEVDD
XTAL_TRIM[3:0]
Additional internal trimming capacitors CTRIM are available. Any value in the range from
0 pF to 4.5 pF with a 0.3 pF resolution is selectable using XTAL_TRIM of register
XOSC_CTRL. To calculate the total load capacitance, the following formula can be
used
CL = 0.5 • (CX + CTRIM + CPAR).
The trimming capacitors provide the possibility to reduce frequency deviations caused
by variations of the production process or by tolerances of external components. Note
that the oscillation frequency can only be reduced by increasing the trimming
capacitance. The frequency deviation caused by one step of CTRIM decreases with
increasing values of the crystal load capacitor.
An amplitude control circuit is included to ensure stable operation under different
operating conditions and for different crystal types. Enabling the crystal oscillator after
leaving SLEEP state causes a slightly higher current during the amplitude build-up
phase to guarantee a short start-up time. The current is reduced to the amount
88
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
necessary for a robust oscillation during stable operation. This also keeps the drive
level of the crystal low.
Crystals with a higher load capacitance are generally less sensitive to parasitic pulling
effects caused by variations of external components or board and circuit parasitics. On
the other hand a larger crystal load capacitance results in a longer start-up time and a
higher steady state current consumption.
9.6.5.3 External Reference Frequency Setup
When using an external reference frequency, the signal must be connected to
pin XTAL1 as indicated in Figure 9-27 below and the bits XTAL_MODE of register
XOSC_CTRL need to be set to the external oscillator mode. The oscillation peak-to-
peak amplitude shall between 100 mV and 500 mV, the optimum range is between
400 mV and 500 mV. Pin XTAL2 should not be wired
Figure 9-27. Setup for Using an External Frequency Reference
XTAL2
XTAL1
IC internal
PCB
16 MHz
9.6.6 Frequency Synthesizer (PLL)
The main features of the phase-locked loop are:
• Generate RX/TX frequencies for all 2.4 GHz channels of IEEE 802.15.4;
• Autonomous calibration loops for stable operation within the operating range;
• Two PLL-interrupts for status indication;
• Fast PLL settling to support frequency hopping;
9.6.6.1 Overview
The PLL generates the RF frequencies for the radio transceiver. During receive
operation the frequency synthesizer works as a local oscillator for the receive frequency
of the radio transceiver. During transmit operation the voltage-controlled oscillator
(VCO) is directly modulated to generate the RF transmit signal. The frequency
synthesizer is implemented as a fractional-N PLL.
Two calibration loops ensure correct PLL functionality within the specified operating
limits.
9.6.6.2 Frequency Agility
When the PLL is enabled during state transition from TRX_OFF to PLL_ON the settling
time is typically tTR4 = 110 µs including the settling time of the analog voltage regulator
(AVREG) and the PLL self calibration (refer to Table 9-9 on page 46Table 9-9). A lock
of the PLL is indicated with a TRX24_PLL_LOCK interrupt.
Switching between 2.4 GHz ISM band channels in PLL_ON or RX_ON states is
typically done within tTR20 = 11 µs. This makes the radio transceiver highly suitable for
frequency hopping applications.
89
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The PLL frequency is changed to the transmit frequency within tTR23 = 16 µs after
starting the transmit procedure and before starting the transmission. After the
transmission the PLL settles back to the receive frequency within tTR24 = 32 µs. This
frequency step does not generate a TRX24_PLL_LOCK or TRX24_PLL_UNLOCK
interrupt within these time spans.
9.6.6.3 Calibration Loops
Due to temperature, supply voltage and part-to-part variations of the radio transceiver
the VCO characteristics diverge. Two automated control loops are implemented to
ensure a stable operation: center frequency (CF) tuning and delay cell (DCU)
calibration. Both calibration loops are initiated automatically when the PLL is enabled
during state transition from TRX_OFF to PLL_ON. The center frequency calibration is
additionally initiated when the PLL changes to a center frequency of another channel.
It is recommended to initiate the calibration loops manually if the PLL operates for a
long time on the same channel e.g. more than 5 min or the operating temperature
changes significantly. Both calibration loops can be initiated manually by setting
PLL_CF_START = 1 of register PLL_CF and PLL_DCU_START = 1 of register
PLL_DCU. The device must be in PLL_ON or RX_ON state to start the calibration. The
completion of the center frequency tuning is indicated by a TRX24_PLL_LOCK
interrupt.
Both calibration loops may be run simultaneously.
9.6.6.4 Interrupt Handling
Two different interrupts indicate the PLL status. The TRX24_PLL_LOCK interrupt
indicates that the PLL has locked. The TRX24_PLL_UNLOCK interrupt indicates an
unexpected unlock condition.
A TRX24_PLL_LOCK interrupt is supposed to occur in the following situations:
• State change from TRX_OFF to PLL_ON / RX_ON/ RX_AACK_ON/
TX_ARET_ON;
• Channel change in states PLL_ON / RX_ON/ RX_AACK_ON/ TX_ARET_ON;
Any other occurrences of PLL interrupts indicate erroneous behavior and require
checking of the actual device status.
The state transition from BUSY_TX to PLL_ON after successful transmission does not
generate a TRX24_PLL_LOCK interrupt within the settling period.
If a TRX24_PLL_UNLOCK interrupt occurs while the device is receiving/transmitting a
frame the associated interrupts (TRX24_RX_END, TRX24_TX_END) will no happen.
9.6.6.5 RF Channel Selection
The PLL is designed to support 16 channels in the 2.4 GHz ISM band with channel
spacing of 5 MHz according to IEEE 802.15.4. The center frequency of these channels
is defined as follows:
Fc = 2405 + 5 (k – 11) in [MHz], for k = 11, 12 ... 26
where k is the channel number.
The channel k is selected by the CHANNEL bits of register PHY_CC_CCA (see
"PHY_CC_CCA – Transceiver Clear Channel Assessment (CCA) Control Register" on
page 120).
90
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Additionally, the PLL supports all frequencies from 2322 MHz to 2527 MHz with 500
kHz frequency spacing. The frequency is selected by CC_BAND (see "CC_CTRL_1 –
Channel Control Register 1" on page 135) and CC_NUMBER (see "CC_CTRL_0 –
Channel Control Register 0" on page 135).
Table 9-26 shows the settings of the register bits CC_BAND and CC_NUMBER.
Table 9-26. Frequency Bands and Numbers
CC_BAND(1) CC_NUMBER Description
0x0 Not used Channels according to IEEE 802.15.4; frequency selected
by register bits CHANNEL (register 0x08, PHY_CC_CCA).
0x1, … , 0x7 0x00 – 0xFF reserved
0x8 0x00 – 0x1F reserved
0x8 0x20 – 0xFF 2322 MHz – 2433.5 MHz
Fc [MHz] = 2306 + 0.5 • CC_NUMBER
0x9 0x00 – 0xBA 2434 MHz – 2527 MHz.
Fc [MHz] = 2434 + 0.5 • CC_NUMBER
0x9 0xBB – 0xFF reserved
0xA, … , 0xF 0x00 – 0xFF reserved
9.6.7 Automatic Filter Tuning (FTN)
The FTN is incorporated to compensate device tolerances for temperature, supply
voltage variations as well as part-to-part variations of the radio transceiver. The filter-
tuning result is used to correct the transfer function of the analog baseband filter and
the time constant of the PLL loop-filter (refer to "General Circuit Description" on page
33).
An FTN calibration cycle is initiated automatically when entering the radio transceiver
TRX_OFF state from the SLEEP or RESET state.
Although receiver and transmitter are very robust against these variations, it is
recommended to initiate the FTN manually if the radio transceiver does not use the
SLEEP state. A calibration cycle is to be initiated in states TRX_OFF, PLL_ON or
RX_ON if necessary. This applies in particular to the High Data Rate Modes with a
much higher sensitivity to variations of the BPF transfer function. The recommended
calibration interval is 5 min or less.
9.7 Radio Transceiver Usage
This section describes the basic procedures to receive and transmit frames with the
radio transceiver.
9.7.1 Frame Receive Procedure
A frame reception comprises of two actions: The PHY listens for a frame, receives and
demodulates the frame to the Frame Buffer and signalizes its reception to the
application software. The application software reads the available frame data from the
Frame Buffer after or during the progress of the frame reception.
While in state RX_ON or RX_AACK_ON the radio transceiver searches for incoming
frames on the selected channel. First a TRX24_RX_START interrupt indicates the
detection of an IEEE 802.15.4 compliant frame assuming the appropriate interrupts are
Notes: 1. CC_CTRL_0 and CCTRL_1 form a combined16 bit register. Changed CC_BAND
values in register CC_CTRL_1 are effective after writing to register CC_CTRL_0.
91
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
enabled. The frame reception is completed when issuing the TRX24_RX_END
interrupt.
Different Frame Buffer read access scenarios are recommended for:
• Non-time critical applications: read access starts after the TRX24_RX_END interrupt;
• Time-critical applications: read access starts after the TRX24_RX_START interrupt;
The controller must ensure to read valid Frame Buffer contents. Reading frame data
before frame reception is finished can lead to invalid data, if buffer regions are
accessed which are not yet updated with the new frame.
While receiving a frame the data needs to be primarily stored in the Frame Buffer
before reading it. This is ensured by accessing the first Frame Buffer byte at least 32 µs
after the TRX24_RX_START interrupt.
It is recommended for operations considered to be not time-critical to wait for the
TRX24_RX_END interrupt before starting a Frame Buffer read access. The following
figure illustrates the frame receive procedure using the TRX24_RX_END interrupt.
Figure 9-28. Transactions between radio transceiver and microcontroller during receive
Transceiver
Microcontroller
IRQ issued (TRX24_R X_START)
IRQ issued (TRX24_RX_END)
Read frame data (Fram e Buffer access)
Read TST_RX_LENGTH register
(Register access)
Critical protocol timing could require starting the Frame Buffer read access after the
TRX24_RX_START interrupt. The first byte of the frame data can be read 32 µs after
the TRX24_RX_START interrupt. The application software must ensure to read slower
than the frame is received. Otherwise a Frame Buffer under-run occurs and the frame
data may be not valid.
9.7.2 Frame Transmit Procedure
A frame transmission comprises of the two actions Frame Buffer write access and
transmission of the Frame Buffer content. Both actions can be run in parallel if required
by critical protocol timing.
Figure 9-29 on page 92 illustrates the frame transmit procedure by consecutively writing
and transmitting the frame. The frame transmission is initiated writing SLPTR or writing
command TX_START to register TRX_STATE after a Frame Buffer write access and
while the radio transceiver is in state PLL_ON or TX_ARET_ON. The TRX24_TX_END
interrupt indicates the completion of the transaction.
92
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 9-29. Transaction between radio transceiver and microcontroller during transmit
Transceiver
Microcontroller
Write frame data (Frame Buffer access)
Write TRX_CMD = TX_START, or write SLPTR
(Register access)
IRQ issued (TX_END)
Alternatively a frame transmission can be started first, followed by the Frame Buffer
write access (PSDU data) as shown in Figure 9-30 below. This is applicable for time
critical applications.
A transmission is initiated either by writing SLPTR or by writing the TX_START
command to the TRX_CMD bits of register TRX_STATE. The radio transceiver then
starts transmitting the SHR which is internally generated.
This first phase requires 16 µs for PLL settling and 160 µs for SHR transmission. The
PHR must be available in the Frame Buffer before this time elapses. Furthermore the
Frame Buffer must be filled faster than the frame is transmitted to prevent a buffer
under-run.
Figure 9-30. Time Optimized Frame Transmit Procedure
Write frame data (Frame Buffer access)
Write TRX_CMD = TX_START, or write SLPTR
(Register access)
Transceiver
Microcontroller
IRQ issued (TX_END)
9.8 Radio Transceiver Extended Feature Set
9.8.1 Random Number Generator
The radio transceiver incorporates a 2-bit, noise observing, true random number
generator to be used to:
• Generate random seeds for CSMA-CA algorithm (see"Extended Operating Mode" on
page 47);
• Generate random values for AES key generation (see "Security Module (AES)" on
page 99);
The values are stored in bits RND_VALUE of register PHY_RSSI. The random number
is updated every tTR29 = 1 µs in Basic Operation Mode receive states with locked PLL.
93
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Note, if the PLL is not locked or unlocks in receive states or either antenna diversity or
RPC mode is enabled, the RND_VALUE is zero.
9.8.2 High Data Rate Modes
The main features of the High Data Rate Modes are:
• High Data Rate Communication up to 2 Mb/s;
• Support of Basic and Extended Operating Mode;
• Support of other features of the Extended Feature Set;
9.8.2.1 Overview
The radio transceiver also supports alternative data rates higher than 250 kb/s for
applications beyond IEEE 802.15.4 compliant networks.
The selection of a data rate does not affect the remaining functionality. Thus it is
possible to run all features and operating modes of the radio transceiver in various
combinations.
The data rate can be selected by writing bits OQPSK_DATA_RATE of register
TRX_CTRL_2.
The High Data Rate Modes occupy the same RF channel bandwidth as the
IEEE 802.15.4 – 2.4 GHz 250 kb/s standard mode. The sensitivity of the receiver is
reduced due to the decreased spreading factor. The following table shows typical
values of the sensitivity for different data rates.
Table 9-27. High Data Rate Sensitivity
High Data Rate Sensitivity Comment
250 kb/s -100 dBm PER ≤ 1%, PSDU length of 20 octets
500 kb/s -96 dBm PER ≤ 1%, PSDU length of 20 octets
1000 kb/s -94 dBm PER ≤ 1%, PSDU length of 20 octets
2000 kb/s -86 dBm PER ≤ 1%, PSDU length of 20 octets
By default there is no header based signaling of the data rate within a transmitted
frame. Thus nodes using a data rate other than the default IEEE 802.15.4 data rate of
250 kb/s are to be consistently configured in advance. The configurable start of frame
delimiter (SFD) could be alternatively used as an indicator of the PHY data rate (see
"Configurable Start-Of-Frame Delimiter (SFD)" on page 98).
9.8.2.2 High Data Rate Packet Structure
Higher data rate modulation is restricted to only the payload octets in order to allow
appropriate frame synchronization. The SHR and the PHR field are transmitted with the
IEEE 802.15.4 compliant data rate of 250 kb/s (refer to "Introduction – IEEE 802.15.4-
2006 Frame Format" on page 67).
A comparison of the general packet structure for different data rates with an example
PSDU length of 80 octets is shown in Figure 9-31 on page 94.
94
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 9-31. High Data Rate Frame Structure
250 kb/s
0 time [µs]192
SFD
PHR
832 1472 2752
500 kb/s
SFD
PHR
1000 kb/s
SFD
PHR
2000 kb/s
SFD
PHR
512
FCS
FCS
PSDU: 80 octets
PSDU: 80 octets
PSDU: 80 octets
PSDU: 80 octets
The effective data rate is smaller than the selected data rate due to the overhead
caused by the SHR, the PHR and the FCS. The overhead depends further on the
length of the PSDU. A graphical representation of the effective data rate is shown in the
following figure:
Figure 9-32. Effective Data Rate “B” for High Data Rate Mode
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
PSDU length in octets
B [kbps]
2000
1000
500
250
2000 kbps
1000 kbps
500 kbps
250 kbps
Therefore High Data Rate transmission and reception is useful for large PSDU lengths
due to the higher effective data rate or to reduce the power consumption of the system.
Furthermore the active on-air time using High Data Rate Modes is significantly reduced.
9.8.2.3 High Data Rate Frame Buffer Access
The Frame Buffer access to read or write frames for High Data Rate communication is
similar to the procedure described in "Frame Buffer" on page 83. However the last byte
in the Frame Buffer after the PSDU data is the ED value rather than the LQI value.
9.8.2.4 High Data Rate Energy Detection
According to IEEE 802.15.4 the ED measurement duration is 8 symbol periods. For
frames operated at higher data rates the automated ED measurement duration is
reduced to 32 µs to take the reduced frame length into account ("Energy Detection
(ED)" on page 74).
95
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.8.2.5 High Data Rate Mode Options
Receiver Sensitivity Control
The different data rates between PPDU header (SHR and PHR) and PHY payload
(PSDU) cause a different sensitivity between header and payload. This can be adjusted
by defining sensitivity threshold levels of the receiver. The receiver does not receive
frames with an RSSI level below the defined sensitivity threshold level (register bits
RX_PDT_LEVEL > 0). Under these operating conditions the receiver current
consumption is reduced by 500 µA (refer to chapter "Current Consumption
Specifications" on page 563).
A description of the settings to control the sensitivity threshold with register RX_SYN
can be found in section "RX_SYN – Transceiver Receiver Sensitivity Control Register"
on page 131.
Reduced Acknowledgment Timing
On higher data rates the IEEE 802.15.4 compliant acknowledgment frame response
time of 192 µs significantly reduces the effective data rate of the network. To minimize
this influence in Extended Operating Mode RX_AACK (see section "RX_AACK_ON –
Receive with Automatic ACK" on page 50), the acknowledgment frame response time
can be reduced to 32 µs. Figure 9-33 below illustrates an example for a reception and
acknowledgement of a frame with a data rate of 2000 kb/s and a PSDU length of 80
symbols. The PSDU length of the acknowledgment frame is 5 octets according to
IEEE 802.15.4.
Figure 9-33. High Data Rate AACK Timing
0time [µs]
192 512
AACK_ACK_TIME = 0 PSDU: 80 octets
SFD
PHR
SFD
PHR
704 916
32 µs
PSDU: 80 octets
SFD
PHR
SFD
PHR
192 µs
544
AACK_ACK_TIME = 1
ACK
ACK
The acknowledgment time is reduced from 192 µs to 32 µs if bit AACK_ACK_TIME of
register XAH_CTRL_1 is set.
9.8.3 Antenna Diversity
The main features of the Antenna Diversity implementation are:
• Improves signal path robustness between nodes;
• Self-contained antenna diversity algorithm of the radio transceiver;
• Direct register based antenna selection;
9.8.3.1 Overview
The receive signal strength may vary and affect the link quality even for small changes
of the antenna location due to multipath propagation effects between network nodes.
These fading effects can result in an increased error floor or loss of the connection
between devices.
Antenna Diversity can be applied to reduce the effects of multipath propagation and
fading hence improving the reliability of a RF connection between network nodes.
96
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Antenna Diversity uses two antennas to switch to the most reliable RF signal path. This
is done by the radio transceiver during RX_ON and RX_AACK_ON state without
interaction of the application software. Both antennas should be carefully separated
from each other to ensure highly independent receive signals.
Antenna Diversity can be used in Basic and Extended Operating Modes and can also
be combined with other features and operating modes like High Data Rate Mode and
RX/TX Indication.
9.8.3.2 Antenna Diversity Application Example
A block diagram for an application using an antenna switch is shown in the following
figure.
Figure 9-34. External Antenna Diversity – Block Diagram
10
9
8
7
2
1
14 15
DIG2
DIG4
AVSS
RFP
RFN
AVSS
DIG3
DIG1
Balun
ANT0
ANT1
RF-
Switch
B1SW1
...
...
Generally, the Antenna Diversity algorithm is enabled with bit ANT_DIV_EN=1 in
register ANT_DIV. For the External Antenna Diversity the control of the antenna switch
(SW1) must be enabled by bit ANT_EXT_SW_EN of register ANT_DIV. Under this
condition the control pins DIG1 and DIG2 are configured as outputs. DIG1 and DIG2
are used to feed the antenna switch signal and its inverse to the differential inputs of the
RF Switch (SW1). See also "Alternate Functions of Port F" on page 230 and "Alternate
Functions of Port G" on page 232.
The selected antenna is indicated by bit ANT_SEL of register ANT_DIV. The antenna
selection continues searching for new frames on both antennas after the frame
reception is completed. However the register bit ANT_SEL maintains its previous value
(from the last received frame) until a new SHR has been found and the selection
algorithm locked into one antenna again. Then the register bit ANT_SEL is updated.
The antenna defined by the ANT_CTRL bits of register ANT_DIV is selected for
transmission. If for example the same antenna as selected for reception is to be used
for transmission, the antenna must be set using the ANT_CTRL bits based on the value
read from the ANT_SEL bit. It is recommended to read bit ANT_SEL after the
TRX24_RX_START interrupt.
The autonomous search and selection allows the use of Antenna Diversity during
reception even if the application software currently does not control the radio
transceiver for instance in Extended Operating Mode.
97
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
An application software defined selection of a certain antenna can be done by disabling
the automatic Antenna Diversity algorithm (ANT_DIV_EN = 0) and selecting one
antenna using register bit ANT_CTRL.
If the radio transceiver is not in a receive or transmit state, it is recommended to disable
register bit ANT_EXT_SW_EN and to set the port pins DIG1 and DIG2 to output low via
the I/O port control register (DDG1 = 1, PORTG1 = 0, DDF2 = 1, PORTF2 = 0). In this
way the power consumption of the external RF switch is reduced and leakage currents
are avoided especially during sleep modes.
9.8.3.3 Antenna Diversity with Extended Operation Modes
A combination of Extended Operation Mode and antenna diversity is allowed.
While the radio transceiver is in RX_AACK_ON state, it switches to an antenna with a
reliable signal. The receive antenna selection is also used for transmission of an
automatic acknowledge frame.
While the radio transceiver is in TX_ARET state, the selected antenna is automatically
changed for every frame transmission retry.
9.8.3.4 Antenna Diversity Sensitivity Control
The detection threshold of the receiver has to be adjusted due to a different receive
algorithm used by the Antenna Diversity algorithm. It is recommended to set bits
PDT_THRES of register RX_CTRL to 3.
9.8.4 RX/TX Indicator
The main features are:
• RX/TX Indicator to control an external RF Front-End;
• Application software independent RF Front-End Control;
• Provide TX Timing Information;
9.8.4.1 Overview
While IEEE 802.15.4 is a low-cost, low-power standard, solutions supporting higher
transmit output power are occasionally desirable. A differential control pin pair can
indicate that the radio transceiver is currently in transmit mode to simplify the control of
an optional external RF front-end.
The control of an external RF front-end is done via the digital control pins DIG3/DIG4.
The function of this pin pair is enabled with bit PA_EXT_EN of register TRX_CTRL_1.
Pin DIG3 is set to low level and DIG4 to high level while the transmitter is turned off.
The two pins change the polarity when the radio transceiver starts transmitting. This
differential pin pair can be used to control PA, LNA and RF switches. See also
"Alternate Functions of Port F" on page 230 and "Alternate Functions of Port G" on
page 232.
If the radio transceiver is not in a receive or transmit state, it is recommended to disable
register bit PA_EXT_EN and to set the port pins DIG3 and DIG4 to output low via the
I/O port control register (DDG0 = 1, PORTG0 = 0, DDF3 = 1, PORTF3 = 0). In this way
the power consumption of external RF switches and other building blocks is reduced
and leakage currents are avoided especially during sleep modes.
98
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.8.4.2 External RF-Front End Control
The setup time of the external power amplifier (PA) relative to the internal building
blocks should be adjusted when using an external RF front-end including a power
amplifier to optimize the overall power spectral density (PSD) mask.
Figure 9-35. TX Power Ramping Control for RF Front-Ends
0 6 8 10
TRX _S TA TE
SLPTR
PLL_ON
2 12 14 16 18 Length [µs]
PA buffer
4
PA
PA_BU F_LT
PA_LT
DIG3
DIG4
Modulation 1 1 1 1 1 10 00
BUSY_TX
The start-up sequence of the individual building blocks of the internal transmitter is
shown in the previous figure. The transmission is actually initiated by writing ‘1’ to
SLPTR. The radio transceiver state changes from PLL_ON to BUSY_TX and the PLL
settles to the transmit frequency within 16 µs (parameter tTR23 at page 46). The
modulation starts 16 µs (parameter tTR10 at page 46) after the SLPTR=1. The PA buffer
and the internal PA are enabled during this time.
The control of an external PA is done via the differential pin pair DIG3 and DIG4.
DIG3 = H / DIG4 = L indicates that the transmission starts and can be used to enable
an external PA. The timing of pins DIG3/DIG4 can be adjusted relative to the start of the
frame and the activation of the internal PA buffer. This is controlled using the register
bits PA_BUF_LT and PA_LT. For details refer to Figure 9-23 on page 83 and chapter
"Transmitter (TX)" on page 82.
9.8.5 RX Frame Time Stamping
To determine the exact timing of an incoming frame e.g. for beaconing networks, the
Symbol Counter should be used. SFD Time Stamping is enabled by setting bit SCTSE
of the Symbol Counter Control Register SCCR0. The actual 32 Bit Symbol Counter
value is captured in the SFD Time Stamp register SCTSR at the time, the SFD has
been received. For details see section "SFD and Beacon Timestamp Generation" on
page 158.
9.8.6 Configurable Start-Of-Frame Delimiter (SFD)
The SFD is a field indicating the end of the SHR and the start of the packet data. The
length of the SFD is 1 octet (2 symbols). This octet is used for byte synchronization only
and is not included in the Frame Buffer.
The value of the SFD could be changed if it is needed to operate non IEEE 802.15.4
compliant networks. An IEEE 802.15.4 compliant network node does not synchronize to
frames with a different SFD value.
99
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The register SFD_VALUE contains the one octet start-of-frame delimiter (SFD) to
synchronize to a received frame. It is not recommended to set the low-order 4 bits to 0
due to the way the SHR is formed.
9.8.7 Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 continues the reception of incoming frames as long
as it is in any receive state. When a frame was successfully received and stored into
the Frame Buffer, the following frame will overwrite the Frame Buffer content again. To
relax the timing requirements for a Frame Buffer read access the Dynamic Frame
Buffer Protection prevents that a new valid frame passes to the Frame Buffer until the
buffer protection bit is cleared (RX_SAFE_MODE = 0).
A received frame is automatically protected against overwriting:
• in Basic Operating Mode, if its FCS is valid
• in Extended Operating Mode, if an TRX24_RX_END interrupt is generated
The Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection is enabled, if register bit RX_SAFE_MODE
(register TRX_CTRL_2, see "TRX_CTRL_2 – Transceiver Control Register 2" on page
123) is set and the radio transceiver state is RX_ON or RX_AACK_ON.
Notes:
3. Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection only prevents write accesses from the air interface not from
the application software. The application software may still modify the Frame Buffer content.
4. Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection influences SRT (see "SRT – Smart Receiving Technology"
on page 104) when a frame has been received successfully.
9.8.8 Security Module (AES)
The security module (AES) is characterized by:
• Hardware accelerated encryption and decryption;
• Compatible with AES-128 standard (128 bit key and data block size);
• ECB (encryption/decryption) mode and CBC (encryption) mode support;
• Stand-alone operation, independent of other blocks;
• Uses 16MHz crystal clock of the transceiver;
9.8.8.1 Overview
The security module is based on an AES-128 core according to the FIPS197 standard
[6]. and provides two modes, the Electronic Code Book (ECB) and the Cipher Block
Chaining (CBC). The security module works independent of other building blocks of the
radio transceiver. Encryption and decryption can be performed in parallel to a frame
transmission or reception.
During radio transceiver SLEEP the registers of the security engine (AES) are cleared
(see section "SLEEP – Sleep State" on page 40).
The ECB and CBC modules including the AES core are clocked with the 16 MHz Radio
Transceiver Crystal Oscillator.
Controlling the security block is possible over 5 Registers within AVR I/O space:
Table 9-28. Security Module Address Space Overview
Register Name Description
AES_STATUS AES status register
100
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Name Description
AES_CTRL AES control register
AES_KEY Access to 16 Byte key buffer
AES_STATE Access to 16 Byte data buffer
9.8.8.2 Security Module Preparation
The use of the security module requires a configuration of the security engine before
starting a security operation. The following steps are required:
Table 9-29. AES Engine Configuration Steps
Step Description Description
1 Key Setup Write encryption or decryption key to KEY
buffer
(16 consecutive byte writes to AES_KEY)
2 AES configuration Select AES mode: ECB or CBC
Select encryption or decryption
Enable the AES Encryption Ready Interrupt
AES_READY
3 Write Data Write plain text or cipher text to DATA buffer
(16 consecutive byte writes to AES_STATE)
4 Start operation Start AES operation
5 Wait for AES finished:
1. AES_READY IRQ or
2. polling AES_DONE bit
(register AES_STATUS) or
3. wait for 24 µs
Wait until AES encryption/decryption is finished
successfully
6 Read Data Read cipher text or plain text from DATA buffer
(16 consecutive byte reads from AES_STATE)
Before starting any security operation a 16 Byte key must be written to the security
engine (refer to section "Security Key Setup" on page 101). This can be done by 16
consecutive write accesses to the I/O register AES_KEY. An internal address counter is
incremented automatically with every read/ write operation. An AES encryption/
decryption run resets the internal byte counter. If the key and data buffer has not been
read or written completely (all 16 Bytes), the following encryption/ decryption operation
will finish with an error.
The following step selects either Electronic Code Book (ECB) or Cipher Block Chaining
(CBC) as the AES_MODE. These modes are explained in more detail in section
"Security Operation Modes" on page 101. Encryption or decryption must be further
selected with bit AES_DIR of register AES_CTRL.
If the AES Error or AES Ready IRQ is used, the interrupt must be enabled with bit
AES_IM.
Next the 128-bit plain text or cipher text data has to be provided to the AES hardware
engine. The 16 data bytes must be consecutively written to the AES_STATE register.
The AES_STATE register can be accessed in the same way as the key register (refer to
"Security Key Setup" on page 101).
The encryption or decryption is initiated with bit AES_REQUEST = 1.
101
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The operation takes 24 µs and the completed encryption/ decryption is indicated by the
AES_READY IRQ and the AES_DONE bit. The internal byte counter of the key and
data buffer is cleared and the resulting data can be read out.
For additional information about the key and data buffer please refer to section
"AES_KEY – AES Encryption and Decryption Key Buffer Register" on page 112 and
"AES_STATE – AES Plain and Cipher Text Buffer Register" on page 112.
Notes: 1. Access to the security block is not possible while the radio transceiver is in state
SLEEP.
2. All configurations of the security module, the SRAM content and keys are reset
during SLEEP or RESET states.
9.8.8.3 Security Key Setup
The key is stored in a 16 Byte sequential buffer. To read or write the contents of the
buffer, 16 consecutive read or write operations to the AES_KEY register are required.
A 16-folded read access to registers AES_KEY returns the last round key of the
preceding security operation. This is the key required for the corresponding ECB
decryption operation after an ECB encryption operation. However the initial AES key
written to the security module in advance of an AES run (see step 1 in Table 9-29 on
page 100) is not modified during an AES operation. This initial key is used for the next
AES run although it cannot be read from AES_KEY.
Before accessing the Key Buffer it must be ensured, that the internal address counter is
initialized correctly. This is the cases after Radio Transceiver Reset (see TRXPR –
Transceiver Pin Register on page 197) or a completed AES Encryption/ Decryption
operation. After an interrupted buffer read or write access, Address pointer
reinitialization is recommended by a simple read access to the AES_CTRL register.
Note: 1. ECB decryption is not required for IEEE 802.15.4 or ZigBee security processing.
The radio transceiver provides this functionality as an additional feature.
9.8.8.4 Security Operation Modes
9.8.8.4.1 Electronic Code Book (ECB)
ECB is the basic operating mode of the security module and is configured by the
AES_CTRL register. The bit AES_MODE = 0 defines the ECB mode and bit AES_DIR
selects the direction to either encryption or decryption. The data to be processed has to
be written to registers AES_STATE.
A security operation can be started by writing the start command AES_REQUEST = 1
(AES_CTRL register).
The ECB encryption operation is illustrated in Figure 9-36 on page 102. Figure 9-37 on
page 102 shows the ECB decryption mode which is supported in a similar way.
102
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 9-36. ECB Mode - Encryption
Block Cipher
Encryption
Encryption
Key
Plaintext
Ciphertext
Block Cipher
Encryption
Plaintext
Ciphertext
Encryption
Key
Figure 9-37. ECB Mode - Decryption
Block Cipher
Decryption
Decryption
Key
Plaintext
Ciphertext
Block Cipher
Decryption
Decryption
Key
Plaintext
Ciphertext
Due to the nature of AES algorithm the initial key to be used when decrypting is not the
same as the one used for encryption. Instead it is the last round key. This last round
key is the content of the key address space stored after running one full encryption
cycle and must be saved for decryption. If the decryption key has not been saved, it has
to be recomputed by first running a dummy encryption (of an arbitrary plain text) using
the original encryption key. Then the resulting round key must be fetched from the key
memory and written back into the key memory as the decryption key.
ECB decryption is not used by either IEEE 802.15.4 or ZigBee frame security. Both of
these standards do not directly encrypt the payload. Instead they protect the payload by
applying a XOR operation between the original payload and the resulting (AES-) cipher
text with a nonce (number used once). As the nonce is the same for encryption and
decryption only ECB encryption is required. Decryption is performed by a XOR
operation between the received cipher text and its own encryption result concluding in
the original plain text payload upon success.
9.8.8.4.2 Cipher Block Chaining (CBC)
In CBC mode the result of a previous AES operation is XOR-combined with the new
incoming vector forming the new plain text to encrypt as shown in the next figure. This
mode is used for the computation of a cryptographic checksum (message integrity
code, MIC).
103
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 9-38. CBC Mode - Encryption
Block Cipher
Encryption
Encryption
Key
Ciphertext
Block Cipher
Encryption
Plaintext
Ciphertext
Plaintext Initialization Vector (IV)
Encryption
Key
ECB
mode
CBC
mode
After preparing the AES key and defining the AES operation direction register bit
AES_DIR, the data has to be provided to the AES engine and the CBC operation can
be started.
The first CBC run has to be configured as ECB to process the initial data (plain text
XOR with an initialization vector provided by the application software). All succeeding
AES runs are to be configured as CBC by setting bit AES_MODE = 1 (AES_CTRL
register). Bit AES_DIR (AES_CTRL register) must be set to AES_DIR = 0 to enable
AES encryption. The data to be processed has to be transferred to the AES_STATE
register. Setting bit AES_REQUEST = 1 (AES_CTRL register) as described in section
"Security Operation Modes" on page 101 starts the first encryption. This causes the
next 128 bits of plain text data to be XORed with the previous cipher text data, see
Figure 9-38 above.
According to IEEE 802.15.4 the input for the very first CBC operation has to be
prepared by a XOR operation of the plain text with the initialization vector (IV). The
value of the initialization vector is 0. However any other initialization vector can be
applied for non-compliant usage. This operation has to be prepared by the application
software.
Note that the MIC algorithm of the IEEE 802.15.4-2006 standard requires CBC mode
encryption only because it implements a one-way hash function.
The status of the security processing is indicated by register AES_STATUS. After a
AES processing time of 24 µs the register bit AES_DONE changes to 1 (register
AES_STATUS) indicating that the security operation has finished (see "Digital Interface
Timing Characteristics" on page 560).
The end of the AES processing can also be indicated by the AES_READY Interrupt.
The bit AES_ER of register AES_STATUS is set if the operation has finished with an
error. Otherwise this bit is zero but AES_DONE is ‘1’.
9.8.8.5 AES Interrupt Handling
The AES Interrupt handling is slightly different from all other IRQ’s. If the AES_IM Bit
(AES_CTRL Register) and the global interrupt enable flag is set, the AES core can
generate an AES Ready Interrupt (AES_READY). If the IRQ is issued, the
AES_STATUS register must be read to check the finish status of the last operation. If
AES_DONE is set, the last AES operation finished successfully. If AES_ER is set, an
error occurred during the last operation. The AES_ER flag is cleared automatically
during the read access to the AES_STATUS register. The AES_DONE flag is cleared
during the next read or write access to the AES_STATE (AES data) register.
The two status flags must be cleared before a new Interrupt can be issued.
104
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
If AES_IM is not set, the processing status can be polled by software (AES_STATUS
register), but no Interrupt occurs.
9.8.9 Receiver Override
The RX Override feature improves the network throughput under busy conditions.
When an incoming received frame is overlayed by a later starting stronger signal, the
overlayed signal would surely destroy the received frame. With an enabled RX Override
feature, the receiver breakes the reception and restarts synchronisation to the stronger
signal. The IRQs are set like after reception of a wrong FCS.
The feature RX Override is enabled if the bit RX_OVERRIDE in register RX_SYN is set.
9.8.10 Reduced Power Consumption Mode (RPC)
9.8.10.1 Overview
The Reduced Power Consumption mode is characterized by:
• Significant power reduction for several transceiver operating modes
• Self-contained, self-calibrating and adaptive power reduction schemes
The RPC mode of the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 offers a variety of independent
techniques and methods to significantly reduce the power consumption of the radio
transceiver. RPC is applicable to selected operating modes and is transparent to most
other extended features.
In this context an RPC state change (disable or enable) needs to be understood as a
major state change within all transceiver sections (TX, RX, PLL, state machines) and
has to respect the associated settling time as specified in "State Transition Timing
Summary" on page 46. In case of RX_ON / RX_AACK_ON / PLL_ON the PLL needs
time to settle (tTR20=11µs).
To achieve the lowest possible power consumption set register TRX_RPC to 0xFF. For
disabling the Reduced Power Consumption modes set register TRX_RPC to 0xC1 or
0x01. See "TRX_RPC – Transceiver Reduced Power Consumption Control" on page
136 for detailed description of the TRX_RPC register bits.
9.8.10.2 RPC Methods and Elements
9.8.10.2.1 PES – PLL Energy Saving
The PES mode is activated with bit PLL_RPC_EN of register TRX_RPC set to one.
Applicable to states: PLL_ON and TX_ARET_ON
A state change towards PLL_ON or TX_ARET_ON causes an initial PLL calibration run,
immediately followed by entering the PES mode. A state change towards RX or TX
states, a channel switch or PLL calibration causes a PLL wake-up. After finishing such
an operation, the PLL automatically enters the PES mode.
9.8.10.2.2 SRT – Smart Receiving Technology
The SRT mode is activated with bit RX_RPC_EN of register TRX_RPC set to one.
105
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Applicable to states: RX_ON, RX_AACK_ON and TX_ARET_ON
SRT reduces the average power consumption during RX listening periods. In typical
environment situations SRT reduces the average current consumption of the
transceiver in the RX_ON state by up to 50%. The configuration of SRT is done with the
RX_RPC_CTRL bits of register TRX_RPC.
Notes: 1. It’s recommended to disable SRT during RSSI measurements or RND
generation.
2. During CCA or/and ED scan the SRT is disabled automatically.
3. If autonomous antenna diversity is enabled, SRT cannot achieve the maximum
effect.
4. The effective reduction of the current consumption may vary depending on
operating conditions (wireless traffic, temperature, channel noise, frequency
settings).
5. SRT shall be disabled when using the Random Number Generator. The total
access time to the random value in PHY_RSSI – Receiver Signal Strength
Indicator Register after SRT-disable is 2·tTR29+tTR20.
6. When a frame is received successfully while SRT and Dynamic Frame Buffer
Protection are enabled the SRT is blocked until RX_SAFE_MODE bit in the
register TRX_CTRL_2 is set to 0 to release the protection.
9.8.10.2.3 ERD – Extended Receiver Desensitizing
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 ERD is activated with bit PDT_RPC_EN of register
TRX_RPC set to one.
Applicable to states: RX_ON, RX_AACK_ON and TX_ARET_ON
In combination with RX_PDT_LEVEL settings, the average RX current is further
significantly reduced, for details refer to "Current Consumption Specifications" on page
563.
Setting RX_PDT_LEVEL = 0x08 requires special attention. In contrast to definitions in
section "RX_SYN – Transceiver Receiver Sensitivity Control Register" on page 131, the
sensitivity is reduced to -80 dBm only. However the average RX_ON current is much
lower than for comparable register settings.
Notes: 1. With RX_PDT_LEVEL ≥ 0x08, RSSI/ED can not resolve receiver input levels
from -80 dBm to -67 dBm.
2. During CCA or/and ED scan the ERD is disabled automatically.
9.8.10.2.4 PAM – PAN Address Match Recognition
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 PAM is activated with bit IPAN_RPC_EN of register
TRX_RPC set to one. PAM is automatically deactivated if RX override is enabled (see
"Receiver Override" on page 104 and "RX_SYN – Transceiver Receiver Sensitivity
Control Register" on page 131 for details).
Applicable to states: RX_AACK_ON
The indication of an address match fail of the IEEE 802.15.4 frame filtering (see "Frame
Filtering" on page 58) stops the receive procedure in two ways:
1. If the PAN address does not match, a new listen period starts immediately,
106
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
2. If the PAN address matches (but not the short destination address), the radio
transceiver enters power saving mode for the remaining frame. If acknowledgement
is also requested, power saving continues through the acknowledgement period. .
Notes: 1. PAM is applicable to short acknowledgement times and reserved frame types as
set by the bits AACK_ACK_TIME and AACK_FLTR_RES_FT of register
XAH_CTRL_1, respectively (see "XAH_CTRL_1 – Transceiver Acknowledgment
Frame Control Register 1" on page 132).
2. PAM is disabled automatically if promiscuous mode is enabled with bit
AACK_PROM_MODE in register XAH_CTRL_1) set to one..
9.8.10.2.5 Miscellaneous Power Reduction Functions
Applicable to states: RX_ON and RX_AACK_ON
In addition to Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection, refer to section "Dynamic Frame Buffer
Protection" on page 99. During Dynamic Frame Buffer Protection, the radio transceiver
automatically enters the power save mode.
Applicable to states: TX_ARET_ON
In addition to CSMA-CA retry, refer to section "TX_ARET_ON – Transmit with
Automatic Retry and CSMA-CA Retry" on page 63. After starting the TX_ARET
transaction, a random back-off period is performed. Within this back-off period the radio
transceiver automatically enters power saving mode.
Applicable to states: TX_ARET_ON and RX_AACK_ON
In addition to the TX/RX turnaround time, refer to section "Extended Operating Mode"
on page 47. The radio transceiver automatically enters power saving mode in:
• TX_ARET: during the time waiting for an ACK frame, or
• RX_AACK: during the time waiting for ACK transmission.
Note: 1. To handle nodes configured with a RX/TX turnaround time less than 12 symbols,
set RX_RPC_CTRL = 0 within TX_ARET state or set bit AACK_ACK_TIME of
register XAH_CTRL_1 to one.
9.9 Continuous Transmission Test Mode
9.9.1 Overview
The 2.4GHz transceiver offers a Continuous Transmission Test Mode to support final
application / production tests as well as certification tests. In this test mode the radio
transceiver transmits continuously a previously transferred frame (PRBS mode) or a
continuous wave signal (CW mode).
In CW mode two different signal frequencies per channel can be transmitted:
• f1 = fCH + 0.5 MHz
• f2 = fCH - 0.5 MHz
Here fCH is the channel center frequency programmed by register PHY_CC_CCA.
Note that in CW mode it is not possible to transmit a RF signal directly on the channel
center frequency. PSDU data in the Frame Buffer must contain at least a valid PHR
(see section "Introduction – IEEE 802.15.4-2006 Frame Format" on page 67). It is
recommended to use a frame of maximum length (127 bytes) and arbitrary PSDU data
107
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
for the PRBS mode. The SHR and the PHR are not transmitted. The transmission starts
with the PSDU data and is repeated continuously.
9.9.2 Configuration
All register configurations shall be setup as follows before enabling Continuous
Transmission Test Mode:
• TX channel setting (optional);
• TX output power setting (optional);
• Mode selection (PRBS / CW);
An access to the registers TST_CTRL_DIGI and PART_NUM enables the Continuous
Transmission Test Mode.
The transmission is started by enabling the PLL (TRX_CMD = PLL_ON) and writing the
TX_START command to register TRX_STATE.
Even for CW signal transmission it is required to write valid PSDU data (see chapter
"Frame Buffer Access " on page 35) to the Frame Buffer. The first byte defines the
frame length information. The frame length has to match to the length of the pattern
stored in the frame buffer. For PRBS mode it is recommended to use a frame of
maximum length.
The detailed programming sequence is shown in Table 9-30 below. The column R/W
informs about writing (W) or reading (R) a register or the Frame Buffer.
Table 9-30. Continuous Transmission Programming Sequence
Step Action Register R/
W
Value Description
1 RESET Reset the transceiver
2 Register Access IRQ_MASK W 0x01 Set IRQ mask register, enable
PLL_LOCK interrupt and set
global AVR IRQ enable
3 Register Access TRX_CTRL_1 W 0x00 Disable TX_AUTO_CRC_ON
4 Register Access TRX_STATE W 0x03 Set radio transceiver state
TRX_OFF
5 Register Access PHY_CC_CCA W 0x33 Set IEEE 802.15.4 CHANNEL,
e.g. 19
6 Register Access PHY_TX_PWR W 0x00 Set TX output power, e.g. to Pmax
7 Register Access TRX_STATUS R 0x08 Verify TRX_OFF state
8 Register Access TST_CTRL_DIGI W 0x0F Enable Continuous Transmission
Test Mode – step # 1
9(1) Register Access TRX_CTRL_2 W 0x03 Enable High Data Rate Mode, 2
Mb/s
10(1) Register Access RX_CTRL W 0xA7 Configure High Data Rate Mode
11(2) Frame Buffer
Write Access
W Write PSDU data (even for CW
mode), refer to Table 9-31 on
page 108
12 Register Access PART_NUM W 0x54 Enable Continuous Transmission
Test Mode – step # 2
13 Register Access PART_NUM W 0x46 Enable Continuous Transmission
Test Mode – step # 3
14 Register Access TRX_STATE W 0x09 Enable PLL_ON state
108
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Step Action Register R/
W
Value Description
15 Interrupt event R 0x01 Wait for PLL_LOCK interrupt
16 Register Access TRX_STATE W 0x02 Initiate Transmission,
enter BUSY_TX state
17 Measurement Perform measurement
18 Register Access PART_NUM W 0x00 Disable Continuous
Transmission Test Mode
19 RESET Reset the transceiver
Notes: 1. Only required for CW mode, do not configure for PRBS mode.
2. Frame Buffer content varies for different modulation schemes.
The content of the Frame Buffer has to be defined for Continuous Transmission PRBS
mode or CW mode. To measure the power spectral density (PSD) mask of the
transmitter it is recommended to use a random sequence of maximum length for the
PSDU data.
To measure CW signals it is necessary to write either 0x00 or 0xFF to each byte of the
Frame Buffer according to the given frame length. For details refer to Table 9-31 below.
Table 9-31. Frame Buffer Content (after frame length information) for various
Continuous Transmission Modulation Schemes
Step Action Frame Content Comment
11 Frame Buffer
Write Access
Random Sequence modulated RF signal
0x00 (each byte) fCH – 0.5 MHz, CW signal
0xFF (each byte) fCH + 0.5 MHz, CW signal
9.10 Abbreviations
AACK - Automatic acknowledgement
ACK - Acknowledgement
ADC - Analog-to-digital converter
AD - Antenna diversity
AGC - Automated gain control
AES - Advanced encryption standard
ARET - Automatic retransmission
AVREG - Voltage regulator for analog building blocks
AWGN - Additive White Gaussian Noise
BATMON - Battery monitor
BBP - Base band processor
BPF - Band pass filter
CBC - Cipher block chaining
CRC - Cyclic redundancy check
CCA - Clear channel assessment
109
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
CSMA-CA - Carrier sense multiple access/Collision avoidance
CW - Continuous wave
DVREG - Voltage regulator for digital building blocks
ECB - Electronic code book
ED - Energy detection
ESD - Electro static discharge
EVM - Error vector magnitude
FCF - Frame control field
FCS - Frame check sequence
FIFO - First in first out
FTN - Filter tuning network
GPIO - General purpose input output
ISM - Industrial, scientific, and medical
LDO - Low-drop output
LNA - Low-noise amplifier
LO - Local oscillator
LQI - Link quality indicator
LSB - Least significant bit
MAC - Medium access control
MFR - MAC footer
MHR - MAC header
MSB - Most significant bit
MSDU - MAC service data unit
MPDU - MAC protocol data unit
MSK - Minimum shift keying
O-QPSK - Offset - quadrature phase shift keying
PA - Power amplifier
PAN - Personal area network
PCB - Printed circuit board
PER - Packet error rate
PHR - PHY header
PHY - Physical layer
PLL - Phase locked loop
POR - Power-on reset
PPF - Poly-phase filter
PRBS - Pseudo random bit sequence
110
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
PSDU - PHY service data unit
PSD - Power spectral mask
QFN - Quad flat no-lead package
RF - Radio frequency
RSSI - Received signal strength indicator
RX - Receiver
SFD - Start-of-frame delimiter
SHR - Synchronization header
SPI - Serial peripheral interface
SRAM - Static random access memory
SSBF - Single side band filter
TX - Transmitter
VCO - Voltage controlled oscillator
VREG - Voltage regulator
XOSC - Crystal oscillator
9.11 Reference Documents
[1] IEEE Std 802.15.4™-2006: Wireless Medium Access Control (MAC) and
Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications for Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area
Networks (LR-WPANs)
[2] IEEE Std 802.15.4™-2003: Wireless Medium Access Control (MAC) and
Physical Layer (PHY) Specifications for Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area
Networks (LR-WPANs)
[3] IEEE Std 802.15.4™-2011: Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks
(WPANs)
[4] ANSI / ESD-STM5.1-2001: ESD Association Standard Test Method for
electrostatic discharge sensitivity testing – Human Body Model (HBM).
[5] ESD-STM5.3.1-1999: ESD Association Standard Test Method for electrostatic
discharge sensitivity testing – Charged Device Model (CDM).
[6] NIST FIPS PUB 197: Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), Federal
Information Processing Standards Publication 197, US Department of
Commerce/NIST, November 26, 2001
111
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12 Register Description
9.12.1 AES_CTRL – AES Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($13C) AES_REQUEST
Res AES_MODE
Res AES_DIR
AES_IM
Res1 Res0 AES_CTRL
Read/Write RW R RW R RW RW R R
Initial Value
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register controls the operation of the security module. Do not access this register
during AES operation to read the AES core status. A read or write access to the register
stops the ongoing processing. To read the AES status use bit AES_DONE of register
AES_STATUS. Note that the AES_CTRL register is cleared when entering the radio
transceiver SLEEP state.
• Bit 7 – AES_REQUEST - Request AES Operation.
A write access with AES_REQUEST = 1 initiates the AES operation.
• Bit 6 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 5 – AES_MODE - Set AES Operation Mode
This register bit sets the AES operation mode (ECB/CBC Mode).
Table 9-32 AES_MODE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
AES_MODE 0 AES Mode is ECB (Electronic Code Book).
1 AES Mode is CBC (Cipher Block Chaining).
• Bit 4 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 3 – AES_DIR - Set AES Operation Direction
This register bit sets the AES operation direction to either encryption or decryption.
Table 9-33 AES_DIR Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
AES_DIR 0 AES operation is encryption.
1 AES operation is decryption.
• Bit 2 – AES_IM - AES Interrupt Enable
This register bit is used to enable the AES interrupt.
• Bit 1:0 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
These bits are reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The
register bits must always be written with the reset value.
112
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12.2 AES_STATUS – AES Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($13D) AES_ER
Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 AES_DONE
AES_STATUS
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This read-only register signals the status of the security module and operation. Note
that the AES_STATUS register is cleared when entering the radio transceiver SLEEP
state.
• Bit 7 – AES_ER - AES Operation Finished with Error
This register bit indicates an error during AES module run. An error occurs if accessing
AES_CTRL while an AES operation is running or if AES_KEY or AES_STATE Memory
is not loaded completely or less than 16 Byte read from AES_STATE.
• Bit 6:1 – Res5:0 - Reserved
These bits are reserved for future use.
• Bit 0 – AES_DONE - AES Operation Finished with Success
This register bit indicates a successfully finished operation of the AES module.
9.12.3 AES_STATE – AES Plain and Cipher Text Buffer Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($13E) AES_STATE7:0 AES_STATE
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The AES_STATE register accesses a 16 byte internal data buffer. The buffer is
accessed by reading or writing 16 times to the same address location (AES_STATE). If
the buffer is not completely read or written an error occurs when an AES operation is
started. Note that the AES_STATE register is cleared when entering the radio
transceiver SLEEP state.
• Bit 7:0 – AES_STATE7:0 - AES Plain and Cipher Text Buffer
These bits represent the data buffer for the AES operation.
9.12.4 AES_KEY – AES Encryption and Decryption Key Buffer Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($13F) AES_KEY7:0 AES_KEY
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The AES key register accesses a 128 Bit internal buffer that holds the Encryption or
Decryption Key. The AES_KEY buffer is a 16 Byte buffer. The buffer is accessed by
reading or writing 16 fold to the same address location (AES_KEY). A read access to
registers AES_KEY returns the last round key of the preceding security operation. This
is the key that is required for the corresponding ECB decryption operation after an ECB
113
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
encryption operation. However, the initial AES key written to the security module in
advance of an AES run is not modified during an AES operation. This initial key is used
for the next AES run even if it cannot be read from AES_KEY register. Note that the
AES_KEY register is cleared when entering the radio transceiver SLEEP state.
• Bit 7:0 – AES_KEY7:0 - AES Encryption/Decryption Key Buffer
These bits represent the data buffer for the AES Encryption/Decryption key.
9.12.5 TRX_STATUS – Transceiver Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($141) CCA_DONE CCA_STATUS TST_STATUS TRX_STATUS4 TRX_STATUS
Read/Write R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($141) TRX_STATUS3 TRX_STATUS2 TRX_STATUS1 TRX_STATUS0 TRX_STATUS
Read/Write R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This read-only register signals the present state of the radio transceiver as well as the
status of the CCA operation. A state change is initiated by writing a state transition
command to the TRX_CMD bits of register TRX_STATE. The register is not accessible
in SLEEP state.
• Bit 7 – CCA_DONE - CCA Algorithm Status
This bit indicates if a CCA request is completed. This is also indicated by a
TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE interrupt. Note that register bit CCA_DONE is cleared in
response to a CCA_REQUEST.
Table 9-34 CCA_DONE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CCA_DONE 0 CCA calculation not finished
1 CCA calculation finished
• Bit 6 – CCA_STATUS - CCA Status Result
The result of the CCA measurement is available in register bit CCA_STATUS after a
CCA request is completed. Note that register bit CCA_STATUS is cleared in response
to a CCA_REQUEST.
Table 9-35 CCA_STATUS Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CCA_STATUS 0 Channel indicated as busy.
1 Channel indicated as idle.
• Bit 5 – TST_STATUS - Test mode status
This bit is reserved for internal use. It indicates the status of the test mode.
Table 9-36 TST_STATUS Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
TST_STATUS 0 Test mode is disabled.
1 Test mode is active.
114
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 4:0 – TRX_STATUS4:0 - Transceiver Main Status
The register bits TRX_STATUS signal the current radio transceiver status. Do not try to
initiate a further state change while the radio transceiver is in
STATE_TRANSITION_IN_PROGRESS state. Values not listed in the following table
are reserved.
Table 9-37 TRX_STATUS Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
TRX_STATUS4:0 0x01 BUSY_RX
0x02 BUSY_TX
0x06 RX_ON
0x08 TRX_OFF
0x09 PLL_ON
0x0F SLEEP
0x11 BUSY_RX_AACK
0x12 BUSY_TX_ARET
0x16 RX_AACK_ON
0x19 TX_ARET_ON
0x1F STATE_TRANSITION_IN_PROGRESS
9.12.6 TRX_STATE – Transceiver State Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($142) TRAC_STATUS2
TRAC_STATUS1
TRAC_STATUS0
TRX_CMD4 TRX_STATE
Read/Write R R R RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($142) TRX_CMD3 TRX_CMD2 TRX_CMD1 TRX_CMD0 TRX_STATE
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
The states of the radio transceiver are controlled via register TRX_STATE using
register bits TRX_CMD. The read-only register bits TRAC_STATUS indicate the status
or result of an Extended Operating Mode transaction. A successful state transition shall
be confirmed by reading register bits TRX_STATUS. This register is used for both Basic
and Extended Operating Mode.
• Bit 7:5 – TRAC_STATUS2:0 - Transaction Status
The status of the RX_AACK and TX_ARET procedure is indicated by register bits
TRAC_STATUS. TRAC_STATUS is only valid in Extended Operating Modes (note,
TRAC_STATUS is valid 2us after the respective procedure is finished by TX_END or
RX_END IRQ). Details of the algorithm and a description of the status information are
given in the RX_AACK_ON and TX_ARET_ON sections of the data-sheet. Even though
the reset value for register bits TRAC_STATUS is 0, the RX_AACK and TX_ARET
procedures set the register bits to TRAC_STATUS = 7 (INVALID) when it is started. Not
115
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
all status values are used in both RX_AACK and TX_ARET transactions. In TX_ARET
the status SUCCESS_DATA_PENDING indicates a successful reception of an ACK
frame with frame pending bit set to 1. In RX_AACK the status
SUCCESS_WAIT_FOR_ACK indicates an ACK frame is about to sent in RX_AACK
slotted acknowledgment. Slotted acknowledgment operation must be enabled with the
SLOTTED_OPERATION bit of register XAH_CTRL_0. The application software must
set the SLPTR bit of register TRXPWR at the next back-off slot boundary in order to
initiate a transmission of the ACK frame. For details refer to IEEE 802.15.4-2006,
chapter 5.5.4.1. Values not listed in the following table are reserved.
Table 9-38 TRAC_STATUS Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
TRAC_STATUS2:0 0 SUCCESS (RX_AACK, TX_ARET)
1 SUCCESS_DATA_PENDING (TX_ARET)
2 SUCCESS_WAIT_FOR_ACK (RX_AACK)
3 CHANNEL_ACCESS_FAILURE (TX_ARET)
5 NO_ACK (TX_ARET)
7 INVALID (RX_AACK, TX_ARET)
• Bit 4:0 – TRX_CMD4:0 - State Control Command
A write access to register bits TRX_CMD initiates a state transition of the radio
transceiver towards the new state as defined by the write access. Do not try to initiate a
further state change while the radio transceiver is in
STATE_TRANSITION_IN_PROGRESS state (see TRX_STATUS register).
FORCE_PLL_ON is not valid for the SLEEP state as well as during
STATE_TRANSITION_IN_PROGRESS towards the SLEEP state. Values not listed in
the following table are reserved and mapped to NOP.
Table 9-39 TRX_CMD Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
TRX_CMD4:0 0x00 NOP
0x02 TX_START
0x03 FORCE_TRX_OFF
0x04 FORCE_PLL_ON
0x06 RX_ON
0x08 TRX_OFF
0x09 PLL_ON (TX_ON)
0x16 RX_AACK_ON
0x19 TX_ARET_ON
9.12.7 TRX_CTRL_0 – Reserved
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($143) Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 TRX_CTRL_0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
This register is reserved for future use.
• Bit 7:0 – Res7:0 - Reserved
116
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
These bits are reserved for future use.
9.12.8 TRX_CTRL_1 – Transceiver Control Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($144) PA_EXT_EN IRQ_2_EXT_EN TX_AUTO_CRC_ON
PLL_TX_FLT TRX_CTRL_1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($144) Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 TRX_CTRL_1
Read/Write R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
The TRX_CTRL_1 register is a multi purpose register to control various operating
modes and settings of the radio transceiver.
• Bit 7 – PA_EXT_EN - External PA support enable
This register bit enables pin DIG3 and pin DIG4 to indicate the transmit state of the
radio transceiver. The control of the external RF front-end is disabled when this bit is 0.
Both pins DIG3 and DIG4 are then defined by the register of I/O ports F and G (PORTF,
DDRF, PORTG, DDRG). The control of the external front-end is enabled when this bit is
1. DIG3 and DIG4 then indicate the state of the radio transceiver. Pin DIG3 is high and
pin DIG4 is low in the state TX_BUSY. In all other states pin DIG3 is low and pin DIG4
is high. It is recommended to set PA_EXT_EN=1 only in receive or transmit states to
reduce the power consumption or avoid leakage current of external RF switches or
other building blocks especially during SLEEP state.
• Bit 6 – IRQ_2_EXT_EN - Connect Frame Start IRQ to TC1
When this bit is set to one the capture input of Timer/Counter 1 is connected to the RX
frame start signal and pin DIG2 becomes an output, driving the RX frame start signal.
Antenna Diversity RF switch control (ANT_EXT_SW_EN=1) shall not be used at the
same time, because it shares the same device pin. The function IRQ_2_EXT_EN is
available for alternate frame time stamping using Timer/Counter 1. In general the
preferred method for frame time stamping is using the symbol counter.
• Bit 5 – TX_AUTO_CRC_ON - Enable Automatic CRC Calculation
This register bit controls the automatic FCS generation for TX operations. The
automatic FCS algorithm is performed autonomously by the radio transceiver if register
bit TX_AUTO_CRC_ON=1.
• Bit 4 – PLL_TX_FLT - Enable PLL TX Filter
PLL TX filtering controls the output spectrum of the transmitted signal to decrease
sidelobes. This is required for systems with an external power amplifier. TX filtering
influences the signal quality. The EVM of the transmitted signal slightly degrades.
• Bit 3:0 – Res3:0 - Reserved
117
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12.9 PHY_TX_PWR – Transceiver Transmit Power Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($145) Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 TX_PWR3
TX_PWR2
TX_PWR1
TX_PWR0
PHY_TX_PWR
Read/Write R R R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register controls the output power of the transmitter.
• Bit 7:4 – Res3:0 - Reserved
• Bit 3:0 – TX_PWR3:0 - Transmit Power Setting
These register bits determine the TX output power of the radio transceiver.
Table 9-40 TX_PWR Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
TX_PWR3:0 0 3.5 dBm
1 3.3 dBm
2 2.8 dBm
3 2.3 dBm
4 1.8 dBm
5 1.2 dBm
6 0.5 dBm
7 -0.5 dBm
8 -1.5 dBm
9 -2.5 dBm
10 -3.5 dBm
11 -4.5 dBm
12 -6.5 dBm
13 -8.5 dBm
14 -11.5 dBm
15 -16.5 dBm
9.12.10 PARCR – Power Amplifier Ramp up/down Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($138) PALTD2
PALTD1
PALTD0
PALTU2
PALTU1
PALTU0
PARDFI PARUFI
PARCR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
This Register controls the power up and power down behavior of the Power Amplifier.
• Bit 7:5 – PALTD2:0 - ext. PA Ramp Down Lead Time
These bits control the ramp down lead time for the external power amplifier.
Table 9-41 PALTD Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PALTD2:0 0 -3µs
118
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
1 -2µs
2 -1µs
3 0µs
4 1µs
5 2µs
6 3µs
7 4µs
• Bit 4:2 – PALTU2:0 - ext. PA Ramp Up Lead Time
These bits control the ramp up lead time for the external power amplifier.
Table 9-42 PALTU Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PALTU2:0 0 -3µs
1 -2µs
2 -1µs
3 0µs
4 1µs
5 2µs
6 3µs
7 4µs
• Bit 1 – PARDFI - Power Amplifier Ramp Down Frequency Inversion
If this bit is clear, the PLL frequency is +500kHz (relative to carrier) while PA is ramping
down and -500kHz otherwise.
• Bit 0 – PARUFI - Power Amplifier Ramp Up Frequency Inversion
If this bit is clear, the PLL frequency is -500kHz (relative to carrier) while PA is ramping
up and +500kHz otherwise.
9.12.11 PHY_RSSI – Receiver Signal Strength Indicator Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($146) RX_CRC_VALID RND_VALUE1 RND_VALUE0 RSSI4 PHY_RSSI
Read/Write R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($146) RSSI3 RSSI2 RSSI1 RSSI0 PHY_RSSI
Read/Write R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
The PHY_RSSI register is a multi purpose register that indicates FCS validity, provides
random numbers and shows the current RSSI value.
• Bit 7 – RX_CRC_VALID - Received Frame CRC Status
Reading this register bit indicates whether the last received frame has a valid FCS or
not. The register bit is updated when issuing a TRX24_RX_END interrupt and remains
119
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
valid until the next TRX24_RX_END interrupt is issued, caused by a new frame
reception.
Table 9-43 RX_CRC_VALID Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
RX_CRC_VALID 0 CRC (FCS) not valid
1 CRC (FCS) valid
• Bit 6:5 – RND_VALUE1:0 - Random Value
A 2-bit random value can be retrieved by reading register bits RND_VALUE. The value
can be used for random numbers for security applications. Note that the radio
transceiver shall be in Basic Operating Mode receive state. The values are updated
every 1 µs. Ensure that register bit RX_PDT_DIS (register RX_SYN) is set to 0 at least
1 µs before reading a random value.
• Bit 4:0 – RSSI4:0 - Receiver Signal Strength Indicator
The result of the automated RSSI measurement is stored in these register bits. The
value is updated every 2µs in receive states. The read value is a number between 0
and 28 indicating the received signal strength as a linear curve on a logarithmic input
power scale (dBm) with a resolution of 3 dB. A RSSI value of 0 indicates a RF input
power lower than RSSI_BASE_VAL (-90 dBm). A value of 28 marks a power higher or
equal to -10 dBm.
Table 9-44 RSSI Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
RSSI4:0 0 Minimum RSSI value: P(RF) < -90 dBm
1 P(RF) = RSSI_BASE_VAL+3 · (RSSI-1)
[dBm]
2 ...
28 Maximum RSSI value: P(RF) ≥ -10 dBm
9.12.12 PHY_ED_LEVEL – Transceiver Energy Detection Level Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($147) ED_LEVEL7 ED_LEVEL6 ED_LEVEL5 ED_LEVEL4 PHY_ED_LEVEL
Read/Write R R R R
Initial Value 1 1 1 1
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($147) ED_LEVEL3 ED_LEVEL2 ED_LEVEL1 ED_LEVEL0 PHY_ED_LEVEL
Read/Write R R R R
Initial Value 1 1 1 1
This register contains the result of an Energy Detection measurement.
• Bit 7:0 – ED_LEVEL7:0 - Energy Detection Level
The minimum ED value (ED_LEVEL = 0) indicates a receiver power less than or equal
to RSSI_BASE_VAL. The range is 83 dB with a resolution of 1 dB and an absolute
accuracy of ±5 dB. A manual ED measurement can be initiated by a write access to this
register. A value of 0xFF signals that no measurement has yet been started (reset
value). The measurement duration is 8 symbol periods (128 µs) for a data rate of 250
kb/s. For High Data Rate Modes the automated measurement duration is reduced to 32
µs. For manually initiated ED measurements in these modes the measurement period is
120
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
still 128 µs as long as the receiver is in RX_ON state. A value other than 0xFF indicates
the result of the last ED measurement.
Table 9-45 ED_LEVEL Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ED_LEVEL7:0 0x00 Minimum result of last ED measurement
0x01 P(RF) = RSSI_BASE_VAL+ED [dBm]
0x02 ...
0x53 Maximum result of last ED measurement
0xFF Reset value
9.12.13 PHY_CC_CCA – Transceiver Clear Channel Assessment (CCA) Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($148) CCA_REQUEST CCA_MODE1 CCA_MODE0 CHANNEL4 PHY_CC_CCA
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($148) CHANNEL3 CHANNEL2 CHANNEL1 CHANNEL0 PHY_CC_CCA
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 0 1 1
This register is provided to initiate and control a CCA measurement.
• Bit 7 – CCA_REQUEST - Manual CCA Measurement Request
A manual CCA measurement is initiated with setting CCA_REQUEST=1. The end of
the CCA measurement is indicated by the TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE interrupt. Register
bits CCA_DONE and CCA_STATUS of register TRX_STATUS are updated after a
CCA_REQUEST. The register bit is automatically cleared after requesting a CCA
measurement with CCA_REQUEST=1.
• Bit 6:5 – CCA_MODE1:0 - Select CCA Measurement Mode
The CCA mode can be selected using these register bits. Note that IEEE 802.15.4-
2006 CCA Mode 3 defines the logical combination of CCA Mode 1 and 2 with the
logical operators AND or OR. This can be selected with CCA_MODE=0 for logical
operation OR and CCA_MODE=3 for logical operation AND.
Table 9-46 CCA_MODE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CCA_MODE1:0 0 Mode 3a, Carrier sense OR energy above
threshold
1 Mode 1, Energy above threshold
2 Mode 2, Carrier sense only
3 Mode 3b, Carrier sense AND energy above
threshold
• Bit 4:0 – CHANNEL4:0 - RX/TX Channel Selection
These register bits define the RX/TX channel. The channel assignment is according to
IEEE 802.15.4.
121
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 9-47 CHANNEL Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CHANNEL4:0 11 2405 MHz
12 2410 MHz
13 2415 MHz
14 2420 MHz
15 2425 MHz
16 2430 MHz
17 2435 MHz
18 2440 MHz
19 2445 MHz
20 2450 MHz
21 2455 MHz
22 2460 MHz
23 2465 MHz
24 2470 MHz
25 2475 MHz
26 2480 MHz
9.12.14 CCA_THRES – Transceiver CCA Threshold Setting Register
Bit 7 6
NA ($149) CCA_CS_THRES3 CCA_CS_THRES2 CCA_THRES
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 1 1
Bit 5 4
NA ($149) CCA_CS_THRES1 CCA_CS_THRES0 CCA_THRES
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 3 2
NA ($149) CCA_ED_THRES3 CCA_ED_THRES2 CCA_THRES
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 1
Bit 1 0
NA ($149) CCA_ED_THRES1 CCA_ED_THRES0 CCA_THRES
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 1 1
This register sets the threshold level for the Energy Detection (ED) of the Clear Channel
Assessment (CCA).
• Bit 7:4 – CCA_CS_THRES3:0 - CS Threshold Level for CCA Measurement
These bits are reserved for internal use.
• Bit 3:0 – CCA_ED_THRES3:0 - ED Threshold Level for CCA Measurement
122
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
These bits define the received power threshold of the Energy above threshold
algorithm. The threshold is calculated by RSSI_BASE_VAL + 2CCA_ED_THRES
[dBm]. Any received power above this level is interpreted as a busy channel.
9.12.15 RX_CTRL – Transceiver Receive Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($14A) SDM_MODE1 SDM_MODE0 ACR_MODE SOFT_MODE RX_CTRL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 0 1 1
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($14A) PDT_THRES3 PDT_THRES2 PDT_THRES1 PDT_THRES0 RX_CTRL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 1 1 1
The register controls the sensitivity of the Antenna Diversity Mode. Note that in High
Data Rate modes the ACR module will always be disabled.
• Bit 7:6 – SDM_MODE1:0 - Sigma-Delta Modulator Order and Delay
Compensation
These bits are reserved for internal use. They select the order of the sigma-delta
modulator (SDM), turn on or off the delay compensation unit (DCU) and other internal
functions.
Table 9-48 SDM_MODE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
SDM_MODE1:0 0 SDM mode 1 selected (Mash 1), DCU turned
on
1 SDM mode 1 with random carry threshold
2 SDM mode 2 selected (Mash 1-1), DCU
turned on
3 SDM mode 2 with random ACCU2
• Bit 5 – ACR_MODE - Adjacent Channel Rejection Mode
This bit is reserved for internal use. It turns on or off the ACR module. For high rate
modes the ACR module will be always disabled.
• Bit 4 – SOFT_MODE - Correlator Soft Mode
This bit is reserved for internal use. It controls the correlation function of the digital
baseband processor. Furthermore the bit enables or disables the data scrambling in the
high data rate modes.
• Bit 3:0 – PDT_THRES3:0 - Receiver Sensitivity Control
These register bits control the sensitivity of the receiver correlation unit. If the Antenna
Diversity algorithm is enabled the value shall be set to PDT_THRES = 3. Otherwise it
shall be set back to the reset value. Values not listed in the following table are reserved.
Table 9-49 PDT_THRES Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PDT_THRES3:0 0x7 Reset value, to be used if Antenna Diversity
algorithm is disabled
123
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x3 Recommended correlator threshold for
Antenna Diversity operation
9.12.16 SFD_VALUE – Start of Frame Delimiter Value Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($14B) SFD_VALUE7:0 SFD_VALUE
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
This register contains the one octet start-of-frame delimiter (SFD) to synchronize to a
received frame. The lower 4 bits must not be all zero to avoid decoding conflicts.
• Bit 7:0 – SFD_VALUE7:0 - Start of Frame Delimiter Value
For compliant IEEE 802.15.4 networks set SFD_VALUE = 0xA7. This is the default
value of the register. To establish non IEEE 802.15.4 compliant networks the SFD value
can be changed to any other value. If enabled a RX_START interrupt is issued only if
the received SFD matches the register content of SFD_VALUE and a valid PHR is
received.
Table 9-50 SFD_VALUE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
SFD_VALUE7:0 0xA7 IEEE 802.15.4 compliant value of the SFD
9.12.17 TRX_CTRL_2 – Transceiver Control Register 2
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($14C) RX_SAFE_MODE
Res4 Res3 Res2 TRX_CTRL_2
Read/Write RW R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($14C) Res1 Res0 OQPSK_DATA_RATE1
OQPSK_DATA_RATE0
TRX_CTRL_2
Read/Write R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This register controls the data rate setting of the radio transceiver.
• Bit 7 – RX_SAFE_MODE - RX Safe Mode
If this bit is set, the next received frame will be protected and not overwritten by
following frames. Set this bit to 0 to release the buffer (and set it again for further
protection).
• Bit 6:2 – Res4:0 - Reserved
• Bit 1:0 – OQPSK_DATA_RATE1:0 - Data Rate Selection
A write access to these register bits sets the OQPSK PSDU data rate used by the radio
transceiver. The reset value OQPSK_DATA_RATE = 0 is the PSDU data rate according
to IEEE 802.15.4. All other values are used in High Data Rate Modes.
124
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 9-51 OQPSK_DATA_RATE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
OQPSK_DATA_RATE1:0 0 250 kb/s (IEEE 802.15.4 compliant)
1 500 kb/s
2 1000 kb/s
3 2000 kb/s
9.12.18 ANT_DIV – Antenna Diversity Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($14D) ANT_SEL Res2 Res1 Res0 ANT_DIV
Read/Write R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($14D) ANT_DIV_EN ANT_EXT_SW_EN
ANT_CTRL1 ANT_CTRL0 ANT_DIV
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 1
This register controls the Antenna Diversity.
• Bit 7 – ANT_SEL - Antenna Diversity Antenna Status
This register bit signals the currently selected antenna path. The selection may be
based either on the last antenna diversity cycle (ANT_DIV_EN = 1) or on the content of
register bits ANT_CTRL.
Table 9-52 ANT_SEL Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ANT_SEL 0 Antenna 0
1 Antenna 1
• Bit 6:4 – Res2:0 - Reserved
• Bit 3 – ANT_DIV_EN - Enable Antenna Diversity
If this register bit is set the Antenna Diversity algorithm is enabled. On reception of a
frame the algorithm selects an antenna autonomously during SHR search. This
selection is kept until
1. A new SHR search starts or
2. Receive states are left or
3. A manually programming of bits ANT_CTRL occurred. If ANT_DIV_EN = 1 the bit
ANT_EXT_SW_EN shall also be set to 1.
Table 9-53 ANT_DIV_EN Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ANT_DIV_EN 0 Antenna Diversity algorithm disabled
1 Antenna Diversity algorithm enabled
• Bit 2 – ANT_EXT_SW_EN - Enable External Antenna Switch Control
If enabled, pin DIG1 and pin DIG2 become output pins and provide a differential control
signal for an external Antenna Diversity switch. The selection of a specific antenna is
done either by the automatic Antenna Diversity algorithm (ANT_DIV_EN = 1) or
125
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
according to bits ANT_CTRL if the Antenna Diversity algorithm is disabled. Do not
enable Antenna Diversity RF switch control (ANT_EXT_SW_EN = 1) and RX Frame
Time Stamping (IRQ_2_EXT_EN = 1, see register TRX_CTRL_1) at the same time. If
this bit is set the control pins DIG1/DIG2 are activated in all radio transceiver states as
long as bit ANT_EXT_SW_EN is also set. If the radio transceiver is not in a receive or
transmit state, it is recommended to disable bit ANT_EXT_SW_EN to reduce the power
consumption or avoid leakage current of an external RF switch especially during
SLEEP state. If bit ANT_EXT_SW_EN = 0, the output pins DIG1 and DIG2 are
controlled by the register of I/O ports F and G (PORTF, DDRF, PORTG, DDRG).
Table 9-54 ANT_EXT_SW_EN Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ANT_EXT_SW_EN 0 Antenna Diversity RF switch control disabled
1 Antenna Diversity RF switch control enabled
• Bit 1:0 – ANT_CTRL1:0 - Static Antenna Diversity Switch Control
These bits provide a static control of an Antenna Diversity switch. This register setting
defines the selected antenna if ANT_DIV_EN is set to 0 (Antenna Diversity disabled).
Register values 1 and 2 are valid for ANT_EXT_SW_EN = 1.
Table 9-55 ANT_CTRL Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ANT_CTRL1:0 0 Reserved
1 Antenna 1: DIG1=L, DIG2=H
2 Antenna 0: DIG1=H, DIG2=L
3 Default value for ANT_EXT_SW_EN=0;
Mandatory setting for applications not using
Antenna Diversity
9.12.19 IRQ_MASK – Transceiver Interrupt Enable Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($14E) AWAKE_EN TX_END_EN AMI_EN CCA_ED_DONE_EN
IRQ_MASK
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($14E) RX_END_EN RX_START_EN PLL_UNLOCK_EN
PLL_LOCK_EN IRQ_MASK
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This register is used to enable or disable individual interrupts of the radio transceiver.
An interrupt is enabled if the corresponding bit is set to 1. All interrupts are disabled
after the power up sequence or reset. If an interrupt is enabled it is recommended to
read the interrupt status register IRQ_STATUS first to clear the history.
• Bit 7 – AWAKE_EN - Awake Interrupt Enable
• Bit 6 – TX_END_EN - TX_END Interrupt Enable
• Bit 5 – AMI_EN - Address Match Interrupt Enable
• Bit 4 – CCA_ED_DONE_EN - End of ED Measurement Interrupt Enable
• Bit 3 – RX_END_EN - RX_END Interrupt Enable
126
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 2 – RX_START_EN - RX_START Interrupt Enable
• Bit 1 – PLL_UNLOCK_EN - PLL Unlock Interrupt Enable
• Bit 0 – PLL_LOCK_EN - PLL Lock Interrupt Enable
9.12.20 IRQ_MASK1 – Transceiver Interrupt Enable Register 1
Bit 7 6
NA ($BE) Res2 Res1 IRQ_MASK1
Read/Write R R
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 5 4
NA ($BE) Res0 MAF_3_AMI_EN IRQ_MASK1
Read/Write R RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 3 2
NA ($BE) MAF_2_AMI_EN MAF_1_AMI_EN IRQ_MASK1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 1 0
NA ($BE) MAF_0_AMI_EN TX_START_EN IRQ_MASK1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
This register is used to enable or disable additional interrupts of the radio transceiver.
An interrupt is enabled if the corresponding bit is set to 1. All interrupts are disabled
after the power up sequence or reset. If an interrupt is enabled it is recommended to
read the interrupt status register IRQ_STATUS first to clear the history.
• Bit 7:5 – Res2:0 - Reserved Bit
• Bit 4 – MAF_3_AMI_EN - Address Match Interrupt enable Address filter 3
• Bit 3 – MAF_2_AMI_EN - Address Match Interrupt enable Address filter 2
• Bit 2 – MAF_1_AMI_EN - Address Match Interrupt enable Address filter 1
• Bit 1 – MAF_0_AMI_EN - Address Match Interrupt enable Address filter 0
• Bit 0 – TX_START_EN - Transmit Start Interrupt enable
9.12.21 IRQ_STATUS – Transceiver Interrupt Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($14F) AWAKE TX_END AMI CCA_ED_DONE
IRQ_STATUS
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($14F) RX_END RX_START PLL_UNLOCK PLL_LOCK IRQ_STATUS
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
127
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This register contains the status of the pending interrupt requests. An interrupt is
pending if the associated bit has a value of one. Such a pending interrupts can be
manually cleared by writing a 1 to that register bit. Interrupts are automatically cleared
when the corresponding interrupt service routine is being executed.
• Bit 7 – AWAKE - Awake Interrupt Status
• Bit 6 – TX_END - TX_END Interrupt Status
• Bit 5 – AMI - Address Match Interrupt Status
• Bit 4 – CCA_ED_DONE - End of ED Measurement Interrupt Status
• Bit 3 – RX_END - RX_END Interrupt Status
• Bit 2 – RX_START - RX_START Interrupt Status
• Bit 1 – PLL_UNLOCK - PLL Unlock Interrupt Status
• Bit 0 – PLL_LOCK - PLL Lock Interrupt Status
9.12.22 IRQ_STATUS1 – Transceiver Interrupt Status Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($BF) Res2 Res1 Res0 MAF_3_AMI IRQ_STATUS1
Read/Write R R R RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($BF) MAF_2_AMI MAF_1_AMI MAF_0_AMI TX_START IRQ_STATUS1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This register contains the status of additional pending interrupt requests. An interrupt is
pending if the associated bit has a value of one. Such a pending interrupts can be
manually cleared by writing a 1 to that register bit. Interrupts are automatically cleared
when the corresponding interrupt service routine is being executed.
• Bit 7:5 – Res2:0 - Reserved Bit
• Bit 4 – MAF_3_AMI - Address Match Interrupt Status Address filter 3
• Bit 3 – MAF_2_AMI - Address Match Interrupt Status Address filter 2
• Bit 2 – MAF_1_AMI - Address Match Interrupt Status Address filter 1
• Bit 1 – MAF_0_AMI - Address Match Interrupt Status Address filter 0
• Bit 0 – TX_START - Transmit Start Interrupt Status
9.12.23 VREG_CTRL – Voltage Regulator Control and Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($150) AVREG_EXT AVDD_OK AVREG_TRIM1 AVREG_TRIM0 VREG_CTRL
Read/Write RW R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($150) DVREG_EXT DVDD_OK DVREG_TRIM1 DVREG_TRIM0 VREG_CTRL
Read/Write RW R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
128
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This register controls the use of the voltage regulators and indicates their status.
• Bit 7 – AVREG_EXT - Use External AVDD Regulator
This bit is reserved for IC test and should not be modified by the application firmware. If
set, this register bit disables the internal analog voltage regulator to apply an external
regulated 1.8V supply for the analog building blocks.
Table 9-56 AVREG_EXT Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
AVREG_EXT 0 Internal AVDD voltage regulator for the
analog section is enabled.
1 Internal AVDD voltage regulator is disabled.
• Bit 6 – AVDD_OK - AVDD Supply Voltage Valid
This register bit indicates if the internal 1.8V regulated voltage supply AVDD has
settled. The bit is set to logic high if AVREG_EXT = 1.
Table 9-57 AVDD_OK Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
AVDD_OK 0 Analog voltage regulator disabled or supply
voltage not stable
1 Analog supply voltage has settled
• Bit 5:4 – AVREG_TRIM1:0 - Adjust AVDD Supply Voltage
These bits are reserved for internal use. They allow adjusting the value of the analog
supply voltage (AVDD).
Table 9-58 AVREG_TRIM Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
AVREG_TRIM1:0 0 1.80V
1 1.75V
2 1.84V
3 1.88V
• Bit 3 – DVREG_EXT - Use External DVDD Regulator
This bit may be set in the Register, but is deactivated in the design. The DVREG_EXT
functionality to deactivate the digital voltage regulator is no implemented anymore
Table 9-59 DVREG_EXT Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DVREG_EXT 0 Internal DVDD voltage regulator for the
digital section is enabled.
1 Internal DVDD voltage regulator is disabled;
use external regulated 1.8V supply voltage
for the digital section.
• Bit 2 – DVDD_OK - DVDD Supply Voltage Valid
This register bit indicates if the internal 1.8V regulated voltage supply DVDD has
settled. The bit is set to logic high if DVREG_EXT = 1.
Table 9-60 DVDD_OK Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DVDD_OK 0 Digital voltage regulator disabled or supply
voltage not stable
129
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
1 Digital supply voltage has settled
• Bit 1:0 – DVREG_TRIM1:0 - Adjust DVDD Supply Voltage
These bits are reserved for internal use. They allow adjusting the value of the digital
supply voltage (DVDD).
Table 9-61 DVREG_TRIM Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DVREG_TRIM1:0 0 1.80V
1 1.75V
2 1.84V
3 1.88V
9.12.24 BATMON – Battery Monitor Control and Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($151) BAT_LOW BAT_LOW_EN BATMON_OK BATMON_HR BATMON
Read/Write RW RW R RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($151) BATMON_VTH3 BATMON_VTH2 BATMON_VTH1 BATMON_VTH0
BATMON
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 0
This register configures the battery monitor to observe the supply voltage at EVDD. The
status of the EVDD supply voltage is accessible by reading bit BATMON_OK with
respect to the actual BATMON settings. Furthermore the Battery Monitor Interrupt can
be controlled with the bits BAT_LOW and BAT_LOW_EN similar to the function of the
IRQ_STATUS and IRQ_MASK register for other radio transceiver interrupts.
• Bit 7 – BAT_LOW - Battery Monitor Interrupt Status
A BATMON Interrupt is pending if this bit is set. Writing one to this bit if it has been at
one will clear the interrupt.
• Bit 6 – BAT_LOW_EN - Battery Monitor Interrupt Enable
The Battery Monitor Interrupt is enabled if this bit is set to one. The Battery Monitor will
not generate an interrupt if this bit is zero.
• Bit 5 – BATMON_OK - Battery Monitor Status
The register bit BATMON_OK indicates the level of the external supply voltage with
respect to the programmed threshold BATMON_VTH.
Table 9-62 BATMON_OK Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
BATMON_OK 0 The battery voltage is below the threshold.
1 The battery voltage is above the threshold.
• Bit 4 – BATMON_HR - Battery Monitor Voltage Range
This bit sets the range and resolution of the battery monitor.
130
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 9-63 BATMON_HR Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
BATMON_HR 0 Enables the low range, see BATMON_VTH
1 Enables the high range, see BATMON_VTH
• Bit 3:0 – BATMON_VTH3:0 - Battery Monitor Threshold Voltage
The threshold values for the battery monitor are set by these register bits according to
the following table.
Table 9-64 BATMON_VTH Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
BATMON_VTH3:0 0x0 2.550V / 1.70V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0x1 2.625V / 1.75V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0x2 2.700V / 1.80V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0x3 2.775V / 1.85V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0x4 2.850V / 1.90V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0x5 2.925V / 1.95V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0x6 3.000V / 2.00V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0x7 3.075V / 2.05V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0x8 3.150V / 2.10V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0x9 3.225V / 2.15V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0xA 3.300V / 2.20V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0xB 3.375V / 2.25V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0xC 3.450V / 2.30V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0xD 3.525V / 2.35V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0xE 3.600V / 2.40V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
0xF 3.675V / 2.45V (BATMON_HR=1/0)
9.12.25 XOSC_CTRL – Crystal Oscillator Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($152) XTAL_MODE3 XTAL_MODE2 XTAL_MODE1 XTAL_MODE0 XOSC_CTRL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($152) XTAL_TRIM3 XTAL_TRIM2 XTAL_TRIM1 XTAL_TRIM0 XOSC_CTRL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This register controls the operation of the 16MHz crystal oscillator.
• Bit 7:4 – XTAL_MODE3:0 - Crystal Oscillator Operating Mode
These register bits set the operating mode of the 16 MHz crystal oscillator. For normal
operation the default value is set to XTAL_MODE = 0xF after reset. For use with an
external clock source it is recommended to set XTAL_MODE = 0x4.
131
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 9-65 XTAL_MODE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
XTAL_MODE3:0 0x4 Internal crystal oscillator disabled; use
external reference frequency.
0xF Internal crystal oscillator enabled; amplitude
regulation of oscillation enabled.
• Bit 3:0 – XTAL_TRIM3:0 - Crystal Oscillator Load Capacitance Trimming
These register bits control two internal capacitance arrays connected to pins XTAL1
and XTAL2. A capacitance value in the range from 0 pF to 4.5 pF is selectable with a
resolution of 0.3 pF.
Table 9-66 XTAL_TRIM Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
XTAL_TRIM3:0 0x0 0.0 pF, trimming capacitors disconnected
0x1 0.3 pF, trimming capacitor switched on
0x2 ...
0xF 4.5 pF, trimming capacitor switched on
9.12.26 RX_SYN – Transceiver Receiver Sensitivity Control Register
Bit 7 6
NA ($155) RX_PDT_DIS RX_OVERRIDE RX_SYN
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 1
Bit 5 4
NA ($155) RXO_CFG1 RXO_CFG0 RX_SYN
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 3 2
NA ($155) RX_PDT_LEVEL3 RX_PDT_LEVEL2 RX_SYN
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 1 0
NA ($155) RX_PDT_LEVEL1 RX_PDT_LEVEL0 RX_SYN
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
This register controls the sensitivity threshold of the receiver.
• Bit 7 – RX_PDT_DIS - Prevent Frame Reception
RX_PDT_DIS = 1 prevents the reception of a frame even if the radio transceiver is in
receive modes. An ongoing frame reception is not affected. This operation mode is
independent of the setting of register bits RX_PDT_LEVEL.
• Bit 6 – RX_OVERRIDE - Receiver Override Function
If this bit is set, the receiver restarts the reception if a co-channel interferer is detected.
This function is not directly visible, but should lead to a better co-channel interference
suppression.
132
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 5 – RXO_CFG1 - RX_OVERRIDE Configuration
Configures the different RX_OVERRIDE options.
• Bit 4 – RXO_CFG0 - RX_OVERRIDE configuration
Configures the different RX_OVERRIDE options.
• Bit 3:0 – RX_PDT_LEVEL3:0 - Reduce Receiver Sensitivity
These register bits reduce the receiver sensitivity such that frames with a RSSI level
below the RX_PDT_LEVEL threshold level are not received (RX_PDT_LEVEL>0). The
threshold level can be calculated according to the following formula: RX_THRES >
RSSI_BASE_VAL+3·(RX_PDT_LEVEL-1), for RX_PDT_LEVEL>0. If register bits
RX_PDT_LEVEL>0 the current consumption of the receiver in states RX_ON and
RX_AACK_ON is reduced by 500 µA. If register bits RX_PDT_LEVEL=0 (reset value)
all frames with a valid SHR and PHR are received, independently of their signal
strength. Examples for certain register settings are given in the following table.
Table 9-67 RX_PDT_LEVEL Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
RX_PDT_LEVEL3:0 0x0 RX_THRES ≤ RSSI_BASE_VAL (Reset
value); RSSI value not considered
0x1 RX_THRES > RSSI_BASE_VAL + 0 · 3;
RSSI > -90 dBm
0x2 ...
0xE RX_THRES > RSSI_BASE_VAL + 13 · 3;
RSSI > -51 dBm
0xF RX_THRES > RSSI_BASE_VAL + 14 · 3;
RSSI > -48 dBm
9.12.27 XAH_CTRL_1 – Transceiver Acknowledgment Frame Control Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($157) Res1 Res0 AACK_FLTR_RES_FT
AACK_UPLD_RES_FT
XAH_CTRL_1
Read/Write R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($157) Res AACK_ACK_TIME
AACK_PROM_MODE
Res XAH_CTRL_1
Read/Write R RW RW R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This register is a multi-purpose control register for various RX_AACK settings.
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 5 – AACK_FLTR_RES_FT - Filter Reserved Frames
This register bit shall only be set if AACK_UPLD_RES_FT = 1. If
AACK_FLTR_RES_FT = 1 reserved frame types are filtered similar to data frames as
specified in IEEE 802.15.4-2006. Reserved frame types are explained in IEEE 802.15.4
section 7.2.1.1.1. If AACK_FLTR_RES_FT = 0 a received, reserved frame is only
checked for a valid FCS.
133
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 4 – AACK_UPLD_RES_FT - Process Reserved Frames
If AACK_UPLD_RES_FT = 1 received frames indicated as reserved are further
processed. A RX_END interrupt is generated if the FCS of those frames is valid. In
conjunction with the configuration bit AACK_FLTR_RES_FT set, these frames are
handled like IEEE 802.15.4 compliant data frames during RX_AACK transaction. An
AMI interrupt is issued if the address in the received frame matches the node address.
That means if a reserved frame passes the third level filter rules, an acknowledgment
frame is generated and transmitted if it was requested by the received frame. If this is
not wanted bit AACK_DIS_ACK in register CSMA_SEED_1 has to be set.
• Bit 3 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 2 – AACK_ACK_TIME - Reduce Acknowledgment Time
According to IEEE 802.15.4, section 7.5.6.4.2 the transmission of an acknowledgment
frame shall commence 12 symbols (aTurnaroundTime) after the reception of the last
symbol of a data or MAC command frame. This is achieved with the reset value of the
register bit AACK_ACK_TIME. If AACK_ACK_TIME = 1 an acknowledgment frame is
alternatively sent already 2 symbol periods (32 µs) after the reception of the last symbol
of a data or MAC command frame. This may be applied to proprietary networks or
networks using the High Data Rate Modes to increase battery lifetime and to improve
the overall data throughput. This setting affects also to acknowledgment frame
response time for slotted acknowledgment operation.
Table 9-68 AACK_ACK_TIME Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
AACK_ACK_TIME 0 12 symbols acknowledgment time
1 2 symbols acknowledgment time
• Bit 1 – AACK_PROM_MODE - Enable Promiscuous Mode
This register bit enables the promiscuous mode within the RX_AACK mode; refer to
IEEE 802.15.4-2006 chapter 7.5.6.5. If this bit is set, every incoming frame with a valid
PHR finishes with a RX_END interrupt even if the third level filter rules do not match or
the FCS is not valid. The bit RX_CRC_VALID of register PHY_RSSI is set accordingly.
If this bit is set and a frame passes the third level filter rules, an acknowledgment frame
is generated and transmitted unless disabled by bit AACK_DIS_ACK of register
CSMA_SEED_1.
• Bit 0 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
9.12.28 FTN_CTRL – Transceiver Filter Tuning Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($158) FTN_START FTN_ROUND FTNV5 FTNV4 FTN_CTRL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 1 0 1
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($158) FTNV3 FTNV2 FTNV1 FTNV0 FTN_CTRL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 0 0 0
134
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This register controls the operation of the calibration loop of the filter tuning network.
• Bit 7 – FTN_START - Start Calibration Loop of Filter Tuning Network
FTN_START = 1 initiates the calibration of the filter tuning network. When the
calibration cycle has finished after at most 25 µs the register bit is automatically reset to
0.
• Bit 6 – FTN_ROUND - Round Filter Tuning Calibration Result
This bit is reserved for internal use.
• Bit 5:0 – FTNV5:0 - Filter Tuning Calibration Result
These bits are reserved for internal use.
9.12.29 PLL_CF – Transceiver Center Frequency Calibration Control Register
Bit 7 6
NA ($15A) PLL_CF_START EN_PLL_CF PLL_CF
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 1
Bit 5 4
NA ($15A) PLL_VMOD_TUNE1 PLL_VMOD_TUNE0 PLL_CF
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 1
Bit 3 2
NA ($15A) PLL_CF3 PLL_CF2 PLL_CF
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 1
Bit 1 0
NA ($15A) PLL_CF1 PLL_CF0 PLL_CF
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 1 1
This register controls the operation of the center frequency calibration loop.
Consecutive read/write commands to this register must include a wait time of at least
500ns between each access.
• Bit 7 – PLL_CF_START - Start Center Frequency Calibration
PLL_CF_START = 1 initiates the center frequency calibration. The calibration cycle has
finished after 35 µs (typical). The register bit is cleared immediately after finishing the
calibration.
• Bit 6 – EN_PLL_CF - Enable Center Frequency Tuning
This bit is reserved for internal use.
• Bit 5:4 – PLL_VMOD_TUNE1:0 - VCO Modulation Tuning
These bits are reserved for internal use.
• Bit 3:0 – PLL_CF3:0 - Center Frequency Control Word
These bits are reserved for internal use.
135
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12.30 PLL_DCU – Transceiver Delay Cell Calibration Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($15B) PLL_DCU_START
Res PLL_DCUW5 PLL_DCUW4 PLL_DCU
Read/Write RW R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($15B) PLL_DCUW3 PLL_DCUW2 PLL_DCUW1 PLL_DCUW0 PLL_DCU
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This register controls the operation of the calibration loop of the delay cell.
• Bit 7 – PLL_DCU_START - Start Delay Cell Calibration
PLL_DCU_START = 1 initiates the delay cell calibration. The calibration cycle has
finished after at most 6 µs. The register bit is cleared immediately after finishing the
calibration.
• Bit 6 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 5:0 – PLL_DCUW5:0 - Delay Range Setting
These bits are reserved for internal use.
9.12.31 CC_CTRL_0 – Channel Control Register 0
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($153) CC_NUMBER7 CC_NUMBER6 CC_NUMBER5 CC_NUMBER4 CC_CTRL_0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($153) CC_NUMBER3 CC_NUMBER2 CC_NUMBER1 CC_NUMBER0 CC_CTRL_0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This register controls the frequency of the transceiver PLL. CC_CTRL_0 and
CC_CTRL_1 form a 16 bit register. Changed CC_CTRL_1 bits are updated only when
writing to CC_CTRL_0.
• Bit 7:0 – CC_NUMBER7:0 - Channel Number
These register bits set the channel number
9.12.32 CC_CTRL_1 – Channel Control Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($154) CC_BAND3
CC_BAND2
CC_BAND1
CC_BAND0
CC_CTRL_1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value
0 0 0 0
136
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This register controls the band of the transceiver PLL. CC_CTRL_0 and CC_CTRL_1
form a 16 bit register. Changed CC_BAND bits are updated only when writing to
register CC_CTRL_0.
• Bit 3:0 – CC_BAND3:0 - Channel Band
These register bits set the channel band
9.12.33 TRX_RPC – Transceiver Reduced Power Consumption Control
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($156) RX_RPC_CTRL1
RX_RPC_CTRL0
RX_RPC_EN PDT_RPC_EN TRX_RPC
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($156) PLL_RPC_EN Res0 IPAN_RPC_EN XAH_RPC_EN TRX_RPC
Read/Write RW R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 1
The TRX_RPC register controls the Reduced Power Consumption / Smart Receiving
Modes.
• Bit 7:6 – RX_RPC_CTRL1:0 - Smart Receiving Mode Timing
The register bits RX_RPC_CTRL[1:0] are used for timing calculation within smart
receiving mode.
Table 9-69 RX_RPC_CTRL Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
RX_RPC_CTRL1:0 0 Activates minimum power saving behaviour
for smart receiving mode
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Activates maximum power saving behaviour
for smart receiving mode
• Bit 5 – RX_RPC_EN - Receiver Smart Receiving Mode Enable
If the bit RX_RPC_EN is set, the receiver is periodically in power-save during all RX
states to reduce the current consumption while listening for incoming signals. Note: this
feature causes a sensitivity loss of approximately 2 dB.
• Bit 4 – PDT_RPC_EN - Smart Receiving Mode Reduced Sensitivity Enable
If the bit PDT_RPC_EN is set, the RX sensitivity is reduced and the current
consumption is decreased. Note that together with this setting the value of the register
RX_PDT_LEVEL should be adapted.
• Bit 3 – PLL_RPC_EN - PLL Smart Receiving Mode Enable
If bit PLL_RPC_EN is set, the PLL is in power-save during the transceiver states
PLL_ON or TX_ARET_ON while no frame transmission has been initiated.
• Bit 2 – Res0 - Reserved
• Bit 1 – IPAN_RPC_EN - Smart Receiving Mode IPAN Handling Enable
137
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
If the bit IPAN_RPC_EN is set, RPC for IPAN is enabled. This causes a transceiver
power-save while receiving a frame with matching PAN but not matching address. Note
that an enabled RX override feature will automatically disable the IPAN_RPC_EN
function.
• Bit 0 – XAH_RPC_EN - Smart Receiving in Extended Operating Modes Enable
If the bit XAH_RPC_EN is set, RPC functionality for the Extended Operating Mode is
enabled. This reduces the PLL power consumption during the CSMA/CA back-off time,
a transmit/receive turnaround in TX_ARET state or an active frame protection
(RX_SAFE_MODE).
9.12.34 PART_NUM – Device Identification Register (Part Number)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($15C) PART_NUM7:0 PART_NUM
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
This register contains the part number of the device.
• Bit 7:0 – PART_NUM7:0 - Part Number
These bits decode the part number of the device according to the following table.
Table 9-70 PART_NUM Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PART_NUM7:0 0x94 RFR2 family
9.12.35 VERSION_NUM – Device Identification Register (Version Number)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($15D) VERSION_NUM7:0 VERSION_NUM
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
This register contains the version number of the device. The device identification
overwrites the Reset value.
• Bit 7:0 – VERSION_NUM7:0 - Version Number
These bits decode the version number of the device according to the following table.
Table 9-71 VERSION_NUM Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
VERSION_NUM7:0 12 Revision A
1 Revision B
3 Revision C
4 Revision D
138
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12.36 MAN_ID_0 – Device Identification Register (Manufacture ID Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($15E) MAN_ID_07:00 MAN_ID_0
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
Bits [7:0] of the 32-bit JEDEC manufacturer ID are stored in this register. Bits [15:8] are
stored in register MAN_ID_1. The highest 16 bits of the JEDEC ID are not stored in
registers.
• Bit 7:0 – MAN_ID_07:00 - Manufacturer ID (Low Byte)
These bits contain bits [7:0] of the 32-bit JEDEC manufacturer ID.
9.12.37 MAN_ID_1 – Device Identification Register (Manufacture ID High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($15F) MAN_ID_17:10 MAN_ID_1
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bits [15:8] of the 32-bit JEDEC manufacturer ID are stored in this register. Bits [7:0] are
stored in register MAN_ID_0. The highest 16 bits of the JEDEC ID are not stored in
registers.
• Bit 7:0 – MAN_ID_17:10 - Manufacturer ID (High Byte)
These bits contain bits [15:8] of the 32-bit JEDEC manufacturer ID.
Table 9-72 MAN_ID_ Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
MAN_ID_17:10 0x00 Atmel JEDEC manufacturer ID, bits [15:8] of
32 bit manufacturer ID: 00 00 00 1F
9.12.38 SHORT_ADDR_0 – Transceiver MAC Short Address Register (Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($160) SHORT_ADDR_07:00 SHORT_ADDR_0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the MAC short address for Frame Filter
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – SHORT_ADDR_07:00 - MAC Short Address
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the MAC short address.
139
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12.39 SHORT_ADDR_1 – Transceiver MAC Short Address Register (High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($161) SHORT_ADDR_17:10 SHORT_ADDR_1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the upper 8 bits of the MAC short address for Frame Filter
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – SHORT_ADDR_17:10 - MAC Short Address
These bits contain the bits [15:8] of the MAC short address.
9.12.40 PAN_ID_0 – Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register (Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($162) PAN_ID_07:00 PAN_ID_0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – PAN_ID_07:00 - MAC Personal Area Network ID
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the MAC PAN ID.
9.12.41 PAN_ID_1 – Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register (High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($163) PAN_ID_17:10 PAN_ID_1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the upper 8 bits of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – PAN_ID_17:10 - MAC Personal Area Network ID
These bits contain the bits [15:8] of the MAC PAN ID.
9.12.42 IEEE_ADDR_0 – Transceiver MAC IEEE Address Register 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($164) IEEE_ADDR_07:00 IEEE_ADDR_0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the bits [7:0] of the MAC IEEE address for Frame Filter address
recognition.
140
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 7:0 – IEEE_ADDR_07:00 - MAC IEEE Address
These bits map to the bits [7:0] of the 64 bit MAC IEEE address.
9.12.43 IEEE_ADDR_1 – Transceiver MAC IEEE Address Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($165) IEEE_ADDR_17:10 IEEE_ADDR_1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the bits [15:8] of the MAC IEEE address for Frame Filter address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – IEEE_ADDR_17:10 - MAC IEEE Address
These bits map to the bits [15:8] of the 64 bit MAC IEEE address.
9.12.44 IEEE_ADDR_2 – Transceiver MAC IEEE Address Register 2
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($166) IEEE_ADDR_27:20 IEEE_ADDR_2
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the bits [23:16] of the MAC IEEE address for Frame Filter
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – IEEE_ADDR_27:20 - MAC IEEE Address
These bits map to the bits [23:16] of the 64 bit MAC IEEE address.
9.12.45 IEEE_ADDR_3 – Transceiver MAC IEEE Address Register 3
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($167) IEEE_ADDR_37:30 IEEE_ADDR_3
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the bits [31:24] of the MAC IEEE address for Frame Filter
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – IEEE_ADDR_37:30 - MAC IEEE Address
These bits map to the bits [31:24] of the 64 bit MAC IEEE address.
141
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12.46 IEEE_ADDR_4 – Transceiver MAC IEEE Address Register 4
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($168) IEEE_ADDR_47:40 IEEE_ADDR_4
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the bits [39:32] of the MAC IEEE address for Frame Filter
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – IEEE_ADDR_47:40 - MAC IEEE Address
These bits map to the bits [39:32] of the 64 bit MAC IEEE address.
9.12.47 IEEE_ADDR_5 – Transceiver MAC IEEE Address Register 5
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($169) IEEE_ADDR_57:50 IEEE_ADDR_5
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the bits [47:40] of the MAC IEEE address for Frame Filter
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – IEEE_ADDR_57:50 - MAC IEEE Address
These bits map to the bits [47:40] of the 64 bit MAC IEEE address.
9.12.48 IEEE_ADDR_6 – Transceiver MAC IEEE Address Register 6
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($16A) IEEE_ADDR_67:60 IEEE_ADDR_6
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the bits [55:48] of the MAC IEEE address for Frame Filter
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – IEEE_ADDR_67:60 - MAC IEEE Address
These bits map to the bits [55:48] of the 64 bit MAC IEEE address.
9.12.49 IEEE_ADDR_7 – Transceiver MAC IEEE Address Register 7
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($16B) IEEE_ADDR_77:70 IEEE_ADDR_7
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the bits [63:56] of the MAC IEEE address for Frame Filter
address recognition.
142
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 7:0 – IEEE_ADDR_77:70 - MAC IEEE Address
These bits map to the bits [63:56] of the 64 bit MAC IEEE address.
9.12.50 XAH_CTRL_0 – Transceiver Extended Operating Mode Control Register
Bit 7 6
NA ($16C) MAX_FRAME_RETRIES3 MAX_FRAME_RETRIES2 XAH_CTRL_0
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 5 4
NA ($16C) MAX_FRAME_RETRIES1 MAX_FRAME_RETRIES0 XAH_CTRL_0
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 1 1
Bit 3 2
NA ($16C) MAX_CSMA_RETRIES2 MAX_CSMA_RETRIES1 XAH_CTRL_0
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 1 0
Bit 1 0
NA ($16C) MAX_CSMA_RETRIES0 SLOTTED_OPERATION XAH_CTRL_0
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
This register is used to control various settings of the Extended Operating Mode.
• Bit 7:4 – MAX_FRAME_RETRIES3:0 - Maximum Number of Frame Re-
transmission Attempts
The setting of MAX_FRAME_RETRIES in TX_ARET mode specifies the number of
attempts to retransmit a frame when it was not acknowledged by the recipient. The
transaction gets canceled if the number of attempts exceeds MAX_FRAME_RETRIES.
Table 9-73 MAX_FRAME_RETRIES Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
MAX_FRAME_RETRIES3:0 0x0 Retransmission of frame is not attempted.
0x1 Retransmission of frame is attempted once.
0x2 ...
0xF Retransmission of frame is attempted 15
times.
• Bit 3:1 – MAX_CSMA_RETRIES2:0 - Maximum Number of CSMA-CA Procedure
Repetition Attempts
MAX_CSMA_RETRIES specifies the number of retries in TX_ARET mode to repeat the
CSMA-CA procedure before the transaction gets canceled. According to IEEE 802.15.4
the valid range of MAX_CSMA_RETRIES is 0 to 5. A value of MAX_CSMA_RETRIES =
7 initiates an immediate frame transmission without performing CSMA-CA. This may
especially be required for slotted acknowledgment operation. MAX_CSMA_RETRIES =
6 is reserved.
143
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 9-74 MAX_CSMA_RETRIES Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
MAX_CSMA_RETRIES2:0 0x0 No repetition of CSMA-CA procedure
0x1 One repetition of CSMA-CA procedure
0x2 ...
0x5 Five repetitions (highest IEEE 802.15.4
compliant value)
0x6 Reserved
0x7 Immediate frame re-transmission without
performing CSMA-CA
• Bit 0 – SLOTTED_OPERATION - Set Slotted Acknowledgment
When using RX_AACK mode in networks operating in beacon or slotted mode
according to IEEE 802.15.4-2006, chapter 5.5.1 the register bit
SLOTTED_OPERATION indicates that acknowledgment frames are to be sent on back-
off slot boundaries (slotted acknowledgment). If this register bit is set the
acknowledgment frame transmission has to be initiated by the application software
using bit SLPTR of register TRXPR. This waiting state is signaled in sub register
TRAC_STATUS of register TRX_STATE with value SUCCESS_WAIT_FOR_ACK.
Table 9-75 SLOTTED_OPERATION Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
SLOTTED_OPERATION 0 The radio transceiver operates in unslotted
mode. An acknowledgment frame is
automatically sent if requested.
1 The transmission of an acknowledgment
frame has to be controlled by the
microcontroller.
9.12.51 CSMA_SEED_0 – Transceiver CSMA-CA Random Number Generator Seed Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($16D) CSMA_SEED_07:00 CSMA_SEED_0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the CSMA_SEED. The upper 3 bits are part of
register CSMA_SEED_1. CSMA_SEED is the seed for the random number generation
that determines the length of the back-off period in the CSMA-CA algorithm. It is
recommended to initialize registers CSMA_SEED by random values. This can be done
using the bits RND_VALUE of register PHY_RSSI.
• Bit 7:0 – CSMA_SEED_07:00 - Seed Value for CSMA Random Number
Generator
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the CSMA_SEED.
144
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12.52 CSMA_SEED_1 – Transceiver Acknowledgment Frame Control Register 2
Bit 7 6
NA ($16E) AACK_FVN_MODE1 AACK_FVN_MODE0 CSMA_SEED_1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 1
Bit 5 4
NA ($16E) AACK_SET_PD AACK_DIS_ACK CSMA_SEED_1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 3 2
NA ($16E) AACK_I_AM_COORD CSMA_SEED_12 CSMA_SEED_1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 1 0
NA ($16E) CSMA_SEED_11 CSMA_SEED_10 CSMA_SEED_1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 1 0
This register is a control register for RX_AACK and contains a part of the CSMA_SEED
for the CSMA-CA algorithm.
• Bit 7:6 – AACK_FVN_MODE1:0 - Acknowledgment Frame Filter Mode
The frame control field of the MAC header (MHR) contains a frame version subfield.
The setting of AACK_FVN_MODE specifies the frame filtering behavior of the radio
transceiver. According to the content of these register bits the radio transceiver passes
frames with a specific frame version number, number group or independent of the
frame version number. Thus the register bits AACK_FVN_MODE define the maximum
acceptable frame version. Received frames with a higher frame version number than
configured do not pass the address filter and are not acknowledged.
Table 9-76 AACK_FVN_MODE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
AACK_FVN_MODE1:0 0 Acknowledge frames with version number 0
1 Acknowledge frames with version number 0
or 1
2 Acknowledge frames with version number 0
or 1 or 2
3 Acknowledge frames independent of frame
version number
• Bit 5 – AACK_SET_PD - Set Frame Pending Sub-field
The content of AACK_SET_PD bit is copied into the frame pending subfield of the
acknowledgment frame if the acknowledgment is the answer to a data request MAC
command frame. If in addition the bits AACK_FVN_MODE of this register are
configured to accept frames with a frame version other than 0 or 1, the content of
register bit AACK_SET_PD is also copied into the frame pending subfield of the
acknowledgment frame for any MAC command frame with a frame version of 2 or 3 that
have the security enabled subfield set to 1. This is done in the assumption that a future
version of the IEEE 802.15.4 standard might change the length or structure of the
auxiliary security header, so that it is not possible to safely detect whether the MAC
command frame is actually a data request command or not.
145
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 4 – AACK_DIS_ACK - Disable Acknowledgment Frame Transmission
If this bit is set no acknowledgment frames are transmitted in RX_AACK Extended
Operating Mode even if requested.
• Bit 3 – AACK_I_AM_COORD - Set Personal Area Network Coordinator
This register bit has to be set if the node is a PAN coordinator. It is used for address
filtering in RX_AACK.
• Bit 2:0 – CSMA_SEED_12:10 - Seed Value for CSMA Random Number
Generator
These bits contain the bits [10:8] of the CSMA_SEED. The lower part is defined in
register CSMA_SEED_0. See register CSMA_SEED_0 for details.
9.12.53 CSMA_BE – Transceiver CSMA-CA Back-off Exponent Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($16F) MAX_BE3 MAX_BE2 MAX_BE1 MAX_BE0 CSMA_BE
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 1 0 1
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($16F) MIN_BE3 MIN_BE2 MIN_BE1 MIN_BE0 CSMA_BE
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 1
This register controls the back-off exponent for the CSMA-CA procedure.
• Bit 7:4 – MAX_BE3:0 - Maximum Back-off Exponent
These register bits define the maximum back-off exponent used in the CSMA-CA
algorithm to generate a pseudo random number for back off the CCA. For details refer
to IEEE 802.15.4-2006, section 7.5.1.4. Valid values are 3 to 8.
Table 9-77 MAX_BE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
MAX_BE3:0 1 This value is not valid for the maximum
back-off exponent.
2 This value is not valid for the maximum
back-off exponent.
3 Minimum, IEEE compliant value for the
maximum back-off exponent.
4 ...
8 Maximum, IEEE compliant value for the
maximum back-off exponent.
• Bit 3:0 – MIN_BE3:0 - Minimum Back-off Exponent
These register bits define the minimum back-off exponent used in the CSMA-CA
algorithm to generate a pseudo random number for back off the CCA. For details refer
to IEEE 802.15.4-2006, section 7.5.1.4. Valid values are MAX_BE, MAX_BE-1), ..., 0.
If MIN_BE = 0 and MAX_BE = 0 the CCA back off period is always set to 0.
146
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 9-78 MIN_BE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
MIN_BE3:0 0 Minimum value of minimum back-off
exponent.
1 ...
8 Maximum value of minimum back-off
exponent. MIN_BE must be smaller or equal
to MAX_BE.
9.12.54 MAFCR0 – Multiple Address Filter Configuration Register 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($10C) Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 MAF3EN
MAF2EN
MAF1EN
MAF0EN
MAFCR0
Read/Write R R R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
With this register, the four independent Address Filter can be enabled or disabled.
• Bit 7:4 – Res3:0 - Reserved Bit
These bits are reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The
register bits must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 3 – MAF3EN - Multiple Address Filter 3 Enable
This bit enables the Multiple Address Filter 3. If the bit is set and the corresponding
Short Address and PAN ID Register is configured, an address match is indicated in the
IRQ_STATUS1 register and an interrupt occurs if the interrupt enable flag is set in the
IRQ_MASK register.
• Bit 2 – MAF2EN - Multiple Address Filter 2 Enable
This bit enables the Multiple Address Filter 2. If the bit is set and the corresponding
Short Address and PAN ID Register is configured, an address match is indicated in the
IRQ_STATUS1 register and an interrupt occurs if the interrupt enable flag is set in the
IRQ_MASK register.
• Bit 1 – MAF1EN - Multiple Address Filter 1 Enable
This bit enables the Multiple Address Filter 1. If the bit is set and the corresponding
Short Address and PAN ID Register is configured, an address match is indicated in the
IRQ_STATUS1 register and an interrupt occurs if the interrupt enable flag is set in the
IRQ_MASK register.
• Bit 0 – MAF0EN - Multiple Address Filter 0 Enable
This bit enables the Multiple Address Filter 0. If the bit is set and the corresponding
Short Address and PAN ID Register is configured, an address match is indicated in the
IRQ_STATUS1 register and an interrupt occurs if the interrupt enable flag is set in the
IRQ_MASK register.
147
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12.55 MAFCR1 – Multiple Address Filter Configuration Register 1
Bit 7 6
NA ($10D) AACK_3_SET_PD AACK_3_I_AM_COORD MAFCR1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 5 4
NA ($10D) AACK_2_SET_PD AACK_2_I_AM_COORD MAFCR1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 3 2
NA ($10D) AACK_1_SET_PD AACK_1_I_AM_COORD MAFCR1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 1 0
NA ($10D) AACK_0_SET_PD AACK_0_I_AM_COORD MAFCR1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
With this register, the behavior of the four independent Address Filters can be
configured.
• Bit 7 – AACK_3_SET_PD - Set Data Pending bit for address filter 3.
Set the data pending subfield in Frame Control Field (FCF) for automatic frame
acknowledge. The content of AACK_SET_PD3 bit is copied into the frame pending
subfield of the acknowledgment frame if the ACK is the answer to a data request MAC
command frame.
• Bit 6 – AACK_3_I_AM_COORD - Enable PAN Coordinator mode for address
filter 3.
This register bit has to be set if the node is a PAN coordinator for address filter 3. It is
used for frame filtering in RX_AACK. If set, the device acts as a PAN coordinator within
the filtered network, i.e. it responds to a null address. If the devices handles multiple
networks, it can operate as coordinator for one network and as a end node for the other
network simultaneously.
• Bit 5 – AACK_2_SET_PD - Set Data Pending bit for address filter 2.
Set the data pending subfield in Frame Control Field (FCF) for automatic frame
acknowledge. The content of AACK_SET_PD2 bit is copied into the frame pending
subfield of the acknowledgment frame if the ACK is the answer to a data request MAC
command frame.
• Bit 4 – AACK_2_I_AM_COORD - Enable PAN Coordinator mode for address
filter 2.
This register bit has to be set if the node is a PAN coordinator for address filter 2. It is
used for frame filtering in RX_AACK. If set, the device acts as a PAN coordinator within
the filtered network, i.e. it responds to a null address. If the devices handles multiple
networks, it can operate as coordinator for one network and as a end node for the other
network simultaneously.
• Bit 3 – AACK_1_SET_PD - Set Data Pending bit for address filter 1.
Set the data pending subfield in Frame Control Field (FCF) for automatic frame
acknowledge. The content of AACK_SET_PD1 bit is copied into the frame pending
148
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
subfield of the acknowledgment frame if the ACK is the answer to a data request MAC
command frame.
• Bit 2 – AACK_1_I_AM_COORD - Enable PAN Coordinator mode for address
filter 1.
This register bit has to be set if the node is a PAN coordinator for address filter 1. It is
used for frame filtering in RX_AACK. If set, the device acts as a PAN coordinator within
the filtered network, i.e. it responds to a null address. If the devices handles multiple
networks, it can operate as coordinator for one network and as a end node for the other
network simultaneously.
• Bit 1 – AACK_0_SET_PD - Set Data Pending bit for address filter 0.
Set the data pending subfield in Frame Control Field (FCF) for automatic frame
acknowledge. The content of AACK_SET_PD0 bit is copied into the frame pending
subfield of the acknowledgment frame if the ACK is the answer to a data request MAC
command frame.
• Bit 0 – AACK_0_I_AM_COORD - Enable PAN Coordinator mode for address
filter 0.
This register bit has to be set if the node is a PAN coordinator for address filter 0. It is
used for frame filtering in RX_AACK. If set, the device acts as a PAN coordinator within
the filtered network, i.e. it responds to a null address. If the devices handles multiple
networks, it can operate as coordinator for one network and as a end node for the other
network simultaneously.
9.12.56 MAFPA0H – Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register for Frame Filter 0 (High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($111) MAFPA0H7:0 MAFPA0H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the upper 8 bits of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 0 address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFPA0H7:0 - MAC Personal Area Network ID high Byte for Frame
Filter 0
These bits contain the bits [15:8] of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 0.
9.12.57 MAFPA0L – Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register for Frame Filter 0 (Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($110) MAFPA0L7:0 MAFPA0L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 0 address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFPA0L7:0 - MAC Personal Area Network ID low Byte for Frame
Filter 0
149
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 0.
9.12.58 MAFPA1H – Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register for Frame Filter 1 (High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($115) MAFPA1H7:0 MAFPA1H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the upper 8 bits of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 1 address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFPA1H7:0 - MAC Personal Area Network ID high Byte for Frame
Filter 1
These bits contain the bits [15:8] of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 1.
9.12.59 MAFPA1L – Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register for Frame Filter 1 (Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($114) MAFPA1L7:0 MAFPA1L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 1 address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFPA1L7:0 - MAC Personal Area Network ID low Byte for Frame
Filter 1
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 1.
9.12.60 MAFPA2H – Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register for Frame Filter 2 (High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($119) MAFPA2H7:0 MAFPA2H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the upper 8 bits of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 2 address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFPA2H7:0 - MAC Personal Area Network ID high Byte for Frame
Filter 2
These bits contain the bits [15:8] of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 2.
150
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12.61 MAFPA2L – Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register for Frame Filter 2 (Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($118) MAFPA2L7:0 MAFPA2L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 2 address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFPA2L7:0 - MAC Personal Area Network ID low Byte for Frame
Filter 2
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 2.
9.12.62 MAFPA3H – Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register for Frame Filter 3 (High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($11D) MAFPA3H7:0 MAFPA3H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the upper 8 bits of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 3 address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFPA3H7:0 - MAC Personal Area Network ID high Byte for Frame
Filter 3
These bits contain the bits [15:8] of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 3.
9.12.63 MAFPA3L – Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register for Frame Filter 3 (Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($11C) MAFPA3L7:0 MAFPA3L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 3 address
recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFPA3L7:0 - MAC Personal Area Network ID low Byte for Frame
Filter 3
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the MAC PAN ID for Frame Filter 3.
9.12.64 MAFSA0H – Transceiver MAC Short Address Register for Frame Filter 0 (High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($10F) MAFSA0H7:0 MAFSA0H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
151
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This register contains the upper 8 bits of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 0
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFSA0H7:0 - MAC Short Address high Byte for Frame Filter 0
These bits contain the bits [15:8] of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 0.
9.12.65 MAFSA0L – Transceiver MAC Short Address Register for Frame Filter 0 (Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($10E) MAFSA0L7:0 MAFSA0L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 0
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFSA0L7:0 - MAC Short Address low Byte for Frame Filter 0
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 0.
9.12.66 MAFSA1H – Transceiver MAC Short Address Register for Frame Filter 1 (High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($113) MAFSA1H7:0 MAFSA1H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the upper 8 bits of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 1
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFSA1H7:0 - MAC Short Address high Byte for Frame Filter 1
These bits contain the bits [15:8] of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 1.
9.12.67 MAFSA1L – Transceiver MAC Short Address Register for Frame Filter 1 (Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($112) MAFSA1L7:0 MAFSA1L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 1
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFSA1L7:0 - MAC Short Address low Byte for Frame Filter 1
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 1.
152
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.12.68 MAFSA2H – Transceiver MAC Short Address Register for Frame Filter 2 (High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($117) MAFSA2H7:0 MAFSA2H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the upper 8 bits of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 2
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFSA2H7:0 - MAC Short Address high Byte for Frame Filter 2
These bits contain the bits [15:8] of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 2.
9.12.69 MAFSA2L – Transceiver MAC Short Address Register for Frame Filter 2 (Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($116) MAFSA2L7:0 MAFSA2L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 2
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFSA2L7:0 - MAC Short Address low Byte for Frame Filter 2
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 2.
9.12.70 MAFSA3H – Transceiver MAC Short Address Register for Frame Filter 3 (High Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($11B) MAFSA3H7:0 MAFSA3H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the upper 8 bits of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 3
address recognition.
• Bit 7:0 – MAFSA3H7:0 - MAC Short Address high Byte for Frame Filter 3
These bits contain the bits [15:8] of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 3.
9.12.71 MAFSA3L – Transceiver MAC Short Address Register for Frame Filter 3 (Low Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($11A) MAFSA3L7:0 MAFSA3L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
This register contains the lower 8 bits of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 3
address recognition.
153
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 7:0 – MAFSA3L7:0 - MAC Short Address low Byte for Frame Filter 3
These bits contain the bits [7:0] of the MAC short address for Frame Filter 3.
9.12.72 TST_CTRL_DIGI – Transceiver Digital Test Control Register
Bit 7 6
NA ($176) TST_CTRL_DIG_7 TST_CTRL_DIG_6 TST_CTRL_DIGI
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 5 4
NA ($176) TST_CTRL_DIG_5 TST_CTRL_DIG_4 TST_CTRL_DIGI
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 3 2
NA ($176) TST_CTRL_DIG3 TST_CTRL_DIG2 TST_CTRL_DIGI
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
Bit 1 0
NA ($176) TST_CTRL_DIG1 TST_CTRL_DIG0 TST_CTRL_DIGI
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
This register takes part in the activation sequence of the continuous transmission test
mode. Other functionality of this register is reserved for internal use.
• Bit 7 – TST_CTRL_DIG_7 - Disable Receiver Baseband Frequency Synthesis
This bit is reserved for internal use. It is used to switch the frequency synthesis of the
receiver baseband path. A value of 0 switches the synthesis on. A value of 1 switches
the synthesis off.
• Bit 6 – TST_CTRL_DIG_6 - Disable Receiver Baseband Drift Compensation
This bit is reserved for internal use. It is used to switch the drift compensation of the
receiver baseband path. A value of 0 switches the compensation on. A value of 1
switches the compensation off.
• Bit 5 – TST_CTRL_DIG_5 - Enable Switch of Transceiver FIFO
This bit is reserved for internal use. It is used enable a bypass for TX/RX FIFO buffers.
A frame transmit will be write the TX FIFO data directly into the RX FIFO data field with
the same address. This test can be used for the RX/TX FIFO test. A value of 0 disables
the bypass. A value of 1 enables the bypass.
• Bit 4 – TST_CTRL_DIG_4 - Switch Receiver Input Data
This bit is reserved for internal use. It is used to switch the input source from the
receiver. A value of 0 selects the default RX ADC path. A value of 1 selects the DIG1
pin as a receive data source.
• Bit 3:0 – TST_CTRL_DIG3:0 - Digital Test Controller Register
This sub-register selects a test controller function. All values not listed int the following
table are reserved for internal use.
154
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 9-79 TST_CTRL_DIG Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
TST_CTRL_DIG3:0 0 NORMAL (no test is active)
15 TST_CONT_TX (continuous transmit)
9.12.73 TST_RX_LENGTH – Transceiver Received Frame Length Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($17B) RX_LENGTH7 RX_LENGTH6 RX_LENGTH5 RX_LENGTH4 TST_RX_LENGTH
Read/Write R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($17B) RX_LENGTH3 RX_LENGTH2 RX_LENGTH1 RX_LENGTH0 TST_RX_LENGTH
Read/Write R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This register contains the frame length information of a received frame. This information
is not stored in the frame buffer. The frame length information is written to this register
after the last received octet.
• Bit 7:0 – RX_LENGTH7:0 - Received Frame Length
These bits contain the length of the last received frame.
9.12.74 TRXFBST – Start of frame buffer
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($180) TRXFBST7:0 TRXFBST
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register is the first byte of the 128 byte long frame buffer of the radio transceiver.
• Bit 7:0 – TRXFBST7:0 - Frame Buffer Start Byte
9.12.75 TRXFBEND – End of frame buffer
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($1FF) TRXFBEND7:0 TRXFBEND
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register is the last byte of the 128 byte long frame buffer of the radio transceiver.
• Bit 7:0 – TRXFBEND7:0 - Frame Buffer End Byte
155
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
32Bit Symbol Counter
compare
unit 1 interrupt
generation
320µs
backoff slot
counter
configuration
register
compare
unit 2
compare
unit 3
clock
prescaler
clock
select
SFD
timestamp
Beacon
timestamp
32kHz
RTC
16MHz
xtal
AVR I/O Bus
10 MAC Symbol Counter
Figure 10-1. Symbol Counter Overview
10.1 Main Features
The MAC symbol counter provides symbol timing information for IEEE 802.15.4
wireless networks. The counter time base can be derived from the 16 MHz crystal or
the RTC (32.768 kHz crystal on TOSC) during operation. In deep-sleep mode the
counter operates from the RTC clock. The module provides the following features:
• Backoff slot counter with interrupt generation
• Counter clock source selection between XTAL1 (16 MHz) and TOSC1 (RTC)
• Automatic RTC clock selection for sleep mode operation and automatic
fallback
• 3 independent compare units with relative and absolute compare mode and
interrupt generation (support for slotted operation and superframe handling)
• Low-power, deep-sleep mode operation and system wake up with all symbol
counter interrupt events
• Automatic SFD and incoming beacon timestamping
• Manual beacon timestamping
• Manual timer synchronization within a 16 µs symbol period by resetting clock
prescaler and backoff slot counter
• Atomic read/write access for 32 bit registers
10.2 Clock source selection and Sleep/Active mode operation
The symbol counter can be sourced by the transceiver clock or by the asynchronous
Real Time Clock (RTC) oscillator. If the transceiver goes from active mode into sleep
mode, the symbol counter clock source is switched to the RTC clock automatically. A
156
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
clock source change is indicated in the bit SCCKSEL of Register "SCCR0 – Symbol
Counter Control Register 0" on page 169 . The bit SCCKSEL can not be written if the
radio transceiver is in SLEEP mode.
After wake up, the counter switches back to the clock source which was selected before
going to sleep mode. Switching the clock source from RTC to 16 MHz resets the 16
MHz clock prescaler. This makes sure, that after switching back the clock source, the
symbol counter starts counting with a full 16 µs symbol period.
The clock source can be selected with bit SCCKSEL in the SCCR0 Register
Note: The AVR system clock has to be at least 4 times the symbol counter clock
frequency. The symbol counter clock frequency is usually 62.5kHz, which would require
a minimum of 250kHz AVR system clock frequency.
10.3 32 bit Register Access (Atomic Read/Write)
All 32 bit registers support atomic read or write operation. That means reading or writing
the least significant xxxLL byte (the register name ends in LL) updates or captures the
complete 32 bit value.
Read Access: 1. Reading the LL-Byte captures the 32 bit value in a temporary register
2. Read the upper 3 bytes
Write Access: 1. Write the upper 3 byte
2. Writing the LL-Byte stores the 32 bit value in the counter registers
The same temporary register is used for all 32 bit register of the MAC symbol counter.
10.4 Symbol Counter (32 bit, SCCNT)
The symbol counter is a 32 bit counter which can be sourced by a 62.5 kHz clock,
derived from the 16 MHz system clock or from the RTC (32.768 kHz). If sourced by the
RTC, a special control circuitry ensures that the counter error does not exceed one
symbol period.
The symbol counter can be set or read from the controller. Reading must start with the
least significant byte. If the least significant byte is accessed, all 32 bit of the counter
are captured. A read access to SCCNTLL requires a maximum of three AVR clocks.
Reading the upper three bytes of the counter requires two CPU clock cycles for each
byte.
Writing to the counter should start with the most significant byte. Writing the least
significant byte initiates the counter update and the new 32 bit counter value is loaded
into the counter with the next available counter clock edge. This can take up to 16 µs
beginning from the low byte write operation, if the counter is sourced by the RTC.
If the counter clock is derived from the 16 MHz clock system, the new counter value is
stored immediately.
During the counter update cycle, the counter busy flag SCBSY in the SCSR register is
set to “1”. As long as this bit is “1”, no further read/write access to the counter should be
initiated. The same applies if the AVR is forced to any sleep mode with disabled AVR
clock, right after writing to the SCCNT register. If the counter busy flag is not checked
before going to sleep, it is possible that the counter register is not updated correctly.
The symbol counter overflow is indicated by a overflow interrupt. The interrupt is
generated when the counter turns from 0xFFFFFFFF to 0x00000000.
10.5 Symbol Counter SFD Timestamp Register (32 bit, SCTSR, Read Only)
The SFD timestamp register stores the symbol counter value at the time, the SFD has
been detected. The Register value becomes valid if a valid frame length byte (frame
157
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
length > 0) has been detected, but it is not checked if the received frame is valid (CRC
check). Timestamping must be enabled in the control register (Bit SCTSE of Register
SCCR0). A read access to SCTSRLL requires a maximum of three AVR clocks.
Reading the upper three bytes of the timestamp requires two CPU clock cycles for each
byte.
Note that there is no separate interrupt provided for timestamping. Instead the
TRX24_RX_START interrupt can be used (see "Interrupt Vectors in
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2" on page 241).
10.6 Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Register (32 bit, SCBTSR)
If timestamping is enabled in the SCCR register, the beacon timestamp register is
updated with the SFD timestamp at the end of the received frame, if the received frame
was a beacon frame with valid FCS and:
• Source PAN identifier == {PAN_ID_1, PAN_ID_0}
or
• {PAN_ID_1, PAN_ID_0} == 0xFFFF
PAN_ID_0 and PAN_ID_1 are register of the radio transceiver, see "PAN_ID_0 –
Transceiver Personal Area Network ID Register (Low Byte)" on page 139.
Beacon timestamps can also be generated manually. Writing “1” to SCMBTS of
Register SCCR0 captures the current symbol counter value and stores it in the beacon
timestamp register. The bit is cleared automatically afterwards.
It is also possible to manually set the register in order to provide a distinct starting value
for the relative compare modes (see next section).
10.7 Compare Unit (3x 32 bit, SCOCR1, SCOCR2, SCOCR3)
The compare unit contains 3 independent 32 bit compare modules and is used to
compare the current counter value with the value stored in the compare register, and
optionally the beacon timestamp register. There are two possible modes available
which can be selected separately for all three compare modules:
1. Absolute Compare: In this mode the value stored in the compare register is
compared directly with the symbol counter value (SCCNT == SCOCRx). If the values
are equal an interrupt is generated.
2. Relative Compare: This mode allows the compare between the current symbol
counter value and the compare value plus the beacon timestamp value (SCCNT ==
SCBTSR + SCOCRx). This mode can be used to generate an interrupt at a time offset
relative to the value stored in the beacon timestamp register.
Note that a beacon timestamp is valid after a valid FCS. The relative compare must
exceed the beacon length, otherwise no relative compare interrupt will occur.
10.8 Interrupt Control Registers
The interrupt status and mask registers control the interrupt generation. Each interrupt
can be enabled in SCIRQM (Symbol Counter IRQ Mask Register). If an interrupt
occurs, the appropriate interrupt flag within the interrupt status register is set regardless
of the interrupt mask register setting. If the appropriate interrupt is enabled, an interrupt
is generated.
The interrupt flags can be cleared either by:
1. Entering the respective interrupt handler, or
2. Writing “one” to the according interrupt flag in the interrupt status register.
158
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
All Interrupts can be used to wakeup the controller from any sleep state.
10.9 Backoff Slot Counter
The backoff slot counter can be used to provide accurate MAC protocol timing. The
counter is sourced by the transceiver clock and works only if the transceiver clock is
running. If the transceiver is disabled or in sleep mode the counter is also disabled.
The counter generates periodic Interrupts every 20 symbols, i.e. every 320 µs.
10.10 Symbol Counter Usage
10.10.1 SFD and Beacon Timestamp Generation
The SFD timestamp register is updated with the symbol counter value at the time the
SFD value has been received completely. For an incoming frame, the register is valid
after the RX_START IRQ was issued until the next RX_START IRQ. SFD timestamps
are generated for all incoming frames with valid SFD and length field even if the PSDU
is corrupted (invalid FCS).
Figure 10-2. SFD and Beacon Timestamp Generation
Note that Figure 10-2 contains no exact timing information; it is for visualization only.
The beacon timestamp register is updated with the SFD timestamp value at the end of
the frame (RX_END IRQ), if the received frame was a beacon frame with valid FCS and
expected source PAN identifier or { PAN_ID_1, PAN_ID_0} = 0xFFFF.
The register value is valid until a new beacon frame has been received or the beacon
timestamp is updated manually. A manual beacon timestamp can be generated by
writing “1” to SCMBTS of the SCCR0 register.
10.10.2 Relative Compare Mode for Superframe Access Timing
The IEEE 802.15.4 describes a superframe structure which contains different time slots
where a device can access the channel.
159
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The Symbol Counter together with the three compare units provide support for waking
up the device at the right time to receive the beacon for superframe synchronization
and at certain times within the superframe.
A typical superframe timing scenario using the symbol counter relative compare mode
is shown in Figure 10-3 below. The Symbol Counter values in the figure do not reflect
realistic time intervals but demonstrate the principle of operation.
Figure 10-3. Relative Compare Mode
326
Beacon
Beacon
327
328
329
324
325
404
405
406
407
402
403
482
483
484
485
480
481
637
638
640
641
635
636
323
Activation
Activation
The compare match registers are programmed with symbol intervals relative to the
beacon frame SFD timestamp. For instance the SCCMP1 is programmed to 80,
because the first Granted Time Slot (GTS1) is expected 80 symbols after the beacon
frame. Register SCCMP2 is programmed to 156 to meet GTS3 156 symbols after the
beacon frame. SCCMP3 is programmed to 312. This is the time interval where the
beacon of the next superframe is expected. Because it requires some time to activate
the transceiver and there is also some timing drift possible, the compare interrupt must
be programmed to wake up some symbols in advance to make sure the next beacon is
not missed.
If the controller receives a compare match wake up event it is activating the transceiver.
After the frame operations are finished, the system can go back to sleep until the next
compare match event occurs.
10.11 Register Description
10.11.1 SCCSR – Symbol Counter Compare Source Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($DB) Res1 Res0 SCCS31
SCCS30
SCCS21
SCCS20
SCCS11
SCCS10
SCCSR
Read/Write R R RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
160
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The Register describes the source timestamp register used for the relative compare
mode. The time stamp source can be selected separately for each compare unit.
Possible sources for the relative compare are the Transmit Timestamp, the Receive
Timestamp or the Beacon Timestamp (default).
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 5:4 – SCCS31:30 - Symbol Counter Compare Source select register for
Compare Unit 3
This configuration bits allow the selection of the source timestamp used for the relative
compare mode. The default selection is the Beacon Timestamp Register, but the
Transmit Frame Timestamp or the Receive Frame Timestamp register can also be
selected.
Table 10-80 SCCS3 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
SCCS31:30 0 Compare Unit 3 Relative Compare Source =
Beacon Timestamp Register
1 Compare Unit 3 Relative Compare Source =
Transmit Frame Timestamp Register
2 Compare Unit 3 Relative Compare Source =
Received Frame Timestamp Register
• Bit 3:2 – SCCS21:20 - Symbol Counter Compare Source select register for
Compare Unit 2
This configuration bits allow the selection of the source timestamp used for the relative
compare mode. The default selection is the Beacon Timestamp Register, but the
Transmit Frame Timestamp or the Receive Frame Timestamp register can also be
selected.
Table 10-81 SCCS2 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
SCCS21:20 0 Compare Unit 2 Relative Compare Source =
Beacon Timestamp Register
1 Compare Unit 2 Relative Compare Source =
Transmit Frame Timestamp Register
2 Compare Unit 2 Relative Compare Source =
Received Frame Timestamp Register
• Bit 1:0 – SCCS11:10 - Symbol Counter Compare Source select register for
Compare Unit 1
This configuration bits allow the selection of the source timestamp used for the relative
compare mode. The default selection is the Beacon Timestamp Register, but the
Transmit Frame Timestamp or the Receive Frame Timestamp register can also be
selected.
Table 10-82 SCCS1 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
SCCS11:10 0 Compare Unit 1 Relative Compare Source =
Beacon Timestamp Register
1 Compare Unit 1 Relative Compare Source =
Transmit Frame Timestamp Register
161
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
2 Compare Unit 1 Relative Compare Source =
Received Frame Timestamp Register
10.11.2 SCCNTHH – Symbol Counter Register HH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($E4) SCCNTHH7:0 SCCNTHH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the most significant byte of the 32 bit Symbol Counter.
• Bit 7:0 – SCCNTHH7:0 - Symbol Counter Register HH-Byte
10.11.3 SCCNTHL – Symbol Counter Register HL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($E3) SCCNTHL7:0 SCCNTHL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second most significant byte of the 32 bit Symbol Counter.
• Bit 7:0 – SCCNTHL7:0 - Symbol Counter Register HL-Byte
10.11.4 SCCNTLH – Symbol Counter Register LH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($E2) SCCNTLH7:0 SCCNTLH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second least significant byte of the 32 bit Symbol Counter.
• Bit 7:0 – SCCNTLH7:0 - Symbol Counter Register LH-Byte
10.11.5 SCCNTLL – Symbol Counter Register LL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($E1) SCCNTLL7:0 SCCNTLL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the least significant byte of the 32 bit Symbol Counter.
• Bit 7:0 – SCCNTLL7:0 - Symbol Counter Register LL-Byte
162
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
10.11.6 SCTSRHH – Symbol Counter Frame Timestamp Register HH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($EC) SCTSRHH7:0 SCTSRHH
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the most significant byte of the 32 bit frame (SFD) timestamp
register
• Bit 7:0 – SCTSRHH7:0 - Symbol Counter Frame Timestamp Register HH-Byte
10.11.7 SCTSRHL – Symbol Counter Frame Timestamp Register HL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($EB) SCTSRHL7:0 SCTSRHL
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second most significant byte of the 32 bit Frame (SFD)
Timestamp Register
• Bit 7:0 – SCTSRHL7:0 - Symbol Counter Frame Timestamp Register HL-Byte
10.11.8 SCTSRLH – Symbol Counter Frame Timestamp Register LH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($EA) SCTSRLH7:0 SCTSRLH
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second least significant byte of the 32 bit Frame (SFD)
Timestamp Register
• Bit 7:0 – SCTSRLH7:0 - Symbol Counter Frame Timestamp Register LH-Byte
10.11.9 SCTSRLL – Symbol Counter Frame Timestamp Register LL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($E9) SCTSRLL7:0 SCTSRLL
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the least significant byte of the 32 bit Frame (SFD) Timestamp
Register
• Bit 7:0 – SCTSRLL7:0 - Symbol Counter Frame Timestamp Register LL-Byte
163
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
10.11.10 SCTSTRHH – Symbol Counter Transmit Frame Timestamp Register HH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($FC) SCTSTRHH7:0 SCTSTRHH
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the most significant byte of the 32 bit Transmit Frame Timestamp
Register. The Transmit Frame Timestamp Register is updated one symbol before the
beginning of the frame transmission (preamble transmission). To allign the Transmit
Frame Timestamp with a Received Frame Timestamp (SFD Timestamp),a fixed offset
of 11 symbols (1 Symbol Startup + 8 Symbols Preamble + 2 Symbols SFD) need to be
added to the Transmit Timestamp .
• Bit 7:0 – SCTSTRHH7:0 - Symbol Counter Transmit Frame Timestamp Register
HH-Byte
10.11.11 SCTSTRHL – Symbol Counter Transmit Frame Timestamp Register HL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($FB) SCTSTRHL7:0 SCTSTRHL
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second most significant byte of the 32 bit Transmit Frame
Timestamp Register.
• Bit 7:0 – SCTSTRHL7:0 - Symbol Counter Transmit Frame Timestamp Register
HL-Byte
10.11.12 SCTSTRLH – Symbol Counter Transmit Frame Timestamp Register LH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($FA) SCTSTRLH7:0 SCTSTRLH
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second least significant byte of the 32 bit Transmit Frame
Timestamp Register.
• Bit 7:0 – SCTSTRLH7:0 - Symbol Counter Transmit Frame Timestamp Register
LH-Byte
10.11.13 SCTSTRLL – Symbol Counter Transmit Frame Timestamp Register LL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($F9) SCTSTRLL7:0 SCTSTRLL
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
164
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This register contains the least significant byte of the 32 bit Transmit Frame Timestamp
Register.
• Bit 7:0 – SCTSTRLL7:0 - Symbol Counter Transmit Frame Timestamp Register
LL-Byte
10.11.14 SCRSTRHH – Symbol Counter Received Frame Timestamp Register HH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($DA) SCRSTRHH7:0 SCRSTRHH
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the most significant byte of the 32 bit Received Frame Timestamp
Register. The Received Frame Timestamp Register is updated at the end of the frame
reception with the contents of the Frame Timestamp Register (SFD timestamp) if the
received frame was valid (FCS ok). If the transceiver auto modes are enabled and
address filtering is active, the Received Frame Timestamp is only updated, if there was
an address match also.
• Bit 7:0 – SCRSTRHH7:0 - Symbol Counter Received Frame Timestamp
Register HH-Byte
10.11.15 SCRSTRHL – Symbol Counter Received Frame Timestamp Register HL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($D9) SCRSTRHL7:0 SCRSTRHL
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second most significant byte of the 32 bit Received Frame
Timestamp Register.
• Bit 7:0 – SCRSTRHL7:0 - Symbol Counter Received Frame Timestamp Register
HL-Byte
10.11.16 SCRSTRLH – Symbol Counter Received Frame Timestamp Register LH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($D8) SCRSTRLH7:0 SCRSTRLH
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second least significant byte of the 32 bit Received Frame
Timestamp Register.
• Bit 7:0 – SCRSTRLH7:0 - Symbol Counter Received Frame Timestamp Register
LH-Byte
165
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
10.11.17 SCRSTRLL – Symbol Counter Received Frame Timestamp Register LL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($D7) SCRSTRLL7:0 SCRSTRLL
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the least significant byte of the 32 bit Received Frame Timestamp
Register.
• Bit 7:0 – SCRSTRLL7:0 - Symbol Counter Received Frame Timestamp Register
LL-Byte
10.11.18 SCBTSRHH – Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Register HH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($E8) SCBTSRHH7:0 SCBTSRHH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the most significant byte of the 32 bit Beacon Timestamp
Register. The Beacon Timestamp Register is updated with the contents of the Frame
Timestamp Register if the received frame was a valid beacon frame with matching
source PAN identifier or register {PAN_ID_1, PAN_ID_0} = 0xFFFF.
• Bit 7:0 – SCBTSRHH7:0 - Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Register HH-
Byte
10.11.19 SCBTSRHL – Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Register HL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($E7) SCBTSRHL7:0 SCBTSRHL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second most significant byte of the 32 bit Beacon Timestamp
Register.
• Bit 7:0 – SCBTSRHL7:0 - Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Register HL-
Byte
10.11.20 SCBTSRLH – Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Register LH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($E6) SCBTSRLH7:0 SCBTSRLH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
166
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This register contains the second least significant byte of the 32 bit Beacon Timestamp
Register.
• Bit 7:0 – SCBTSRLH7:0 - Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Register LH-
Byte
10.11.21 SCBTSRLL – Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Register LL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($E5) SCBTSRLL7:0 SCBTSRLL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the least significant byte of the 32 bit Beacon Timestamp
Register.
• Bit 7:0 – SCBTSRLL7:0 - Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Register LL-Byte
10.11.22 SCOCR1HH – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 1 HH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($F8) SCOCR1HH7:0 SCOCR1HH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the most significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for the first
compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR1HH7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 1 HH-Byte
10.11.23 SCOCR1HL – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 1 HL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($F7) SCOCR1HL7:0 SCOCR1HL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second most significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for
the first compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR1HL7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 1 HL-Byte
10.11.24 SCOCR1LH – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 1 LH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($F6) SCOCR1LH7:0 SCOCR1LH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
167
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This register contains the second least significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for
the first compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR1LH7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 1 LH-Byte
10.11.25 SCOCR1LL – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 1 LL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($F5) SCOCR1LL7:0 SCOCR1LL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the least significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for the first
compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR1LL7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 1 LL-Byte
10.11.26 SCOCR2HH – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 2 HH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($F4) SCOCR2HH7:0 SCOCR2HH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the most significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for the
second compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR2HH7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 2 HH-Byte
10.11.27 SCOCR2HL – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 2 HL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($F3) SCOCR2HL7:0 SCOCR2HL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second most significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for
the second compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR2HL7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 2 HL-Byte
10.11.28 SCOCR2LH – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 2 LH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($F2) SCOCR2LH7:0 SCOCR2LH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
168
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This register contains the second least significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for
the second compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR2LH7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 2 LH-Byte
10.11.29 SCOCR2LL – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 2 LL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($F1) SCOCR2LL7:0 SCOCR2LL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the least significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for the
second compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR2LL7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 2 LL-Byte
10.11.30 SCOCR3HH – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 3 HH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($F0) SCOCR3HH7:0 SCOCR3HH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the most significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for the third
compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR3HH7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 3 HH-Byte
10.11.31 SCOCR3HL – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 3 HL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($EF) SCOCR3HL7:0 SCOCR3HL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the second most significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for
the third compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR3HL7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 3 HL-Byte
10.11.32 SCOCR3LH – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 3 LH-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($EE) SCOCR3LH7:0 SCOCR3LH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
169
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This register contains the second least significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for
the third compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR3LH7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 3 LH-Byte
10.11.33 SCOCR3LL – Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 3 LL-Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($ED) SCOCR3LL7:0 SCOCR3LL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register contains the least significant byte of the 32 bit compare value for the third
compare unit
• Bit 7:0 – SCOCR3LL7:0 - Symbol Counter Output Compare Register 3 LL-Byte
10.11.34 SCCR0 – Symbol Counter Control Register 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($DC) SCRES SCMBTS
SCEN SCCKSEL
SCTSE SCCMP3
SCCMP2
SCCMP1
SCCR0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Control Register 0 is used to setup the operating mode of the symbol counter and
the compare units
• Bit 7 – SCRES - Symbol Counter Synchronization
If this bit is set to 1, the 16 MHz clock prescaler as well as the backoff slot counter is
cleared. This function can be used to align the symbol timing within one 16 µs symbol
period and to restart the backoff slot counter with a complete 320 µs period. This
feature works only if the symbol counter module operates with the 16 MHz clock from
XTAL1. After switching to RTC clock source, the symbol period synchronization is lost.
This bit is cleared automatically.
• Bit 6 – SCMBTS - Manual Beacon Timestamp
With this bit a manual beacon timestamp can be generated. If set to 1, the current
symbol counter value is stored into the beacon timestamp register. The bit is cleared
afterwards. The manual beacon timestamping can be used in conjunction with the
relative compare mode of the three compare units to generate compare match
interrupts without having a beacon frame received.
• Bit 5 – SCEN - Symbol Counter enable
This bit activates the symbol counter module. If the bit is not set, the counter, backoff
slot counter and the compare unit are disabled and disconnected from the clock. In this
way the power consumption can be reduced. All registers can be accessed, but write
access to the counter register SCCNT is not possible.
• Bit 4 – SCCKSEL - Symbol Counter Clock Source select
With this bit the clock source for the symbol counter can be selected. If the bit is one,
the RTC clock from TOSC1 is selected, otherwise the symbol counter operates with the
clock from XTAL1. During transceiver sleep modes the clock falls back to the RTC clock
170
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
source, regardless of the selected clock. After wakeup, it switches back to the previosly
selected clock source.
• Bit 3 – SCTSE - Symbol Counter Automatic Timestamping enable
This bit enables automatic SFD and Beacon Timestamping. If the bit is zero, no
automatic timestamp capturing is possible. Only manual beacon timestamping can be
used.
• Bit 2 – SCCMP3 - Symbol Counter Compare Unit 3 Mode select
This bit enables the relative compare mode for compare unit 3. If enabled, the counter
value is compared against the content of the timestamp register selected in Compare
Source Register SCCSR select bits SCCS3 plus the content of the compare register 3
(SCCNT == timestamp+SCOCR3). Otherwise, the counter is compared against the
compare register 3 (SCCNT == SCOCR3).
• Bit 1 – SCCMP2 - Symbol Counter Compare Unit 2 Mode select
This bit enables the relative compare mode for compare unit 2. If enabled, the counter
value is compared against the content of the timestamp register selected in Compare
Source Register SCCSR select bits SCCS2 plus the content of the compare register 2
(SCCNT == timestamp+SCOCR2). Otherwise, the counter is compared against the
compare register 2 (SCCNT == SCOCR2).
• Bit 0 – SCCMP1 - Symbol Counter Compare Unit 1 Mode select
This bit enables the relative compare mode for compare unit 1. If enabled, the counter
value is compared against the content of the timestamp register selected in Compare
Source Register SCCSR select bits SCCS1 plus the content of the compare register 1
(SCCNT == timestamp+SCOCR1). Otherwise, the counter is compared against the
compare register 1 (SCCNT == SCOCR1).
10.11.35 SCCR1 – Symbol Counter Control Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($DD) Res6 Res5 SCBTSM SCCKDIV2 SCCR1
Read/Write R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($DD) SCCKDIV1 SCCKDIV0 SCEECLK SCENBO SCCR1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This register is used to enable the backoff slot counter.
• Bit 7:6 – Res6:5 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 5 – SCBTSM - Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Mask Register
This bit must be set to disable automatic beacon timestamping. All other timestamps as
well as manual beacon timestamping is not effected by this setting.
• Bit 4:2 – SCCKDIV2:0 - Clock divider for synchronous clock source (16MHz
Transceiver Clock)
171
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The 3 Bit value controls the symbol counter clock prescaler. The input clock to the
prescaler is the 16MHz transceiver clock. The different prescaler values are defined in
the table below. The default prescaler setting is 62.5kHz. If the transceiver clock is
selected, the counter continues on the RTC time base during sleep mode, regardless of
the SCCKDIV setting.
Table 10-83 SCCKDIV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
SCCKDIV2:0 0 Transceiver Clock divided by 256, (62.5kHz)
1 Transceiver Clock divided by 128, (125kHz)
2 Transceiver Clock divided by 64, (250kHz)
3 Transceiver Clock divided by 32, (500kHz)
4 Transceiver Clock divided by 16, (1MHz)
5 Transceiver Clock divided by 8, (2MHz)
6 Transceiver Clock divided by 4, (4MHz)
• Bit 1 – SCEECLK - Enable External Clock Source on PG2
If this bit is set, a asynchronous clock provided on PG2 can be used to run the symbol
counter. SCEECLK overrieds SCCKSEL and forces the selection of the external clock
source. The clock source on PG2 can have a maximum frequency of 1/4 of the
controller clock speed. If selected, the clock on PG2 is used during sleep mode also.
• Bit 0 – SCENBO - Backoff Slot Counter enable
If this bit is set, the backoff slot counter starts working. To enable the corresponding
IRQ the SCIRQM register must be updated.
10.11.36 SCSR – Symbol Counter Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($DE) Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 SCBSY SCSR
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:1 – Res6:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 0 – SCBSY - Symbol Counter busy
This bit is set if a write operation to the symbol counter register is pending. This bit is
set after writing the counter low byte (SCCNTLL) until the symbol counter is updated
with the new value. This update process can take up to 16 µs and during this time no
read or write access to the 32 bit counter register should occur.
10.11.37 SCIRQS – Symbol Counter Interrupt Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($E0) Res2 Res1 Res0 IRQSBO
IRQSOF
IRQSCP3
IRQSCP2
IRQSCP1
SCIRQS
Read/Write R R R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
172
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The Interrupt Status Register indicates pending interrupt requests. If the corresponding
interrupt mask bit is set, an interrupt service routine is called and the status bit is
cleared automatically. It is also possible to clear the status bit by writing "1" to the
selected bit.
• Bit 7:5 – Res2:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 4 – IRQSBO - Backoff Slot Counter IRQ
This interrupt is generated every 320 µs, that means every 20 symbols.
• Bit 3 – IRQSOF - Symbol Counter Overflow IRQ
This interrupt is generated when the 32 bit counter turns from 0xFFFFFFF to
0x00000000.
• Bit 2 – IRQSCP3 - Compare Unit 3 Compare Match IRQ
This interrupt indicates a compare match on compare unit 3.
• Bit 1 – IRQSCP2 - Compare Unit 2 Compare Match IRQ
This interrupt indicates a compare match on compare unit 2.
• Bit 0 – IRQSCP1 - Compare Unit 1 Compare Match IRQ
This interrupt indicates a compare match on compare unit 1.
10.11.38 SCIRQM – Symbol Counter Interrupt Mask Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($DF) Res2 Res1 Res0 IRQMBO
IRQMOF
IRQMCP3
IRQMCP2
IRQMCP1
SCIRQM
Read/Write R R R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Interrupt Mask Register is used to enable corresponding interrupts. After reset all
interrupts are disabled. Disabled interrupts are still captured in the interrupt status
register SCIRQS, but no interrupt is requested. Before enabling an interrupt, the
corresponding interrupt status bit should be cleared by writing a 1. If the status bit is set
and the IRQ gets enabled, the IRQ handler is called immediately.
• Bit 7:5 – Res2:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. The result of a read access is undefined. The register
bit must always be written with the reset value.
• Bit 4 – IRQMBO - Backoff Slot Counter IRQ enable
This bit enables the SCNT_BACKOFF interrupt.
• Bit 3 – IRQMOF - Symbol Counter Overflow IRQ enable
This bit enables the SCNT_OVFL interrupt.
• Bit 2 – IRQMCP3 - Symbol Counter Compare Match 3 IRQ enable
This bit enables the SCNT_CMP3 interrupt.
• Bit 1 – IRQMCP2 - Symbol Counter Compare Match 2 IRQ enable
This bit enables the SCNT_CMP2 interrupt.
173
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 0 – IRQMCP1 - Symbol Counter Compare Match 1 IRQ enable
This bit enables the SCNT_CMP1 interrupt.
174
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
11 System Clock and Clock Options
This section describes the clock options for the AVR microcontroller.
11.1 Overview
Figure 11-1 below presents the principal clock systems in the AVR and their
distribution. All of the clocks need not be active at a given time. In order to reduce
power consumption, the clocks to modules not being used can be halted by using
different sleep modes, as described in chapter "Power Management and Sleep Modes"
on page 183. The clock systems are detailed below.
Figure 11-1. Clock Distribution
Asynchronous
Timer
General I/O
Modules ADC CPU Core RAM Flash and
EEPROM
Radio
Transceiver
AVR Clock
Control Unit
System Clock
Prescaler
Reset Logic Watchdog Timer
Timer/Counter
Oscillator
(32.768kHz)
Transceiver Crystal
Oscillator
(16MHz)
Calibrated RC
Oscillator (16MHz)
Watchdog Oscillator
(128kHz)
TOSC1
TOSC2
XTAL1
XTAL2
Clock
Multiplexer
1/8 Clock Prescaler
Clock
Multiplexer
Clock
Multiplexer
clkCPU
clkADC
clkI/O
clkASY
clkR AM REG F
clkCAL IB
clkFLASH
Source clock
clkW D T
External Clock
CLKI
1:2
Prescaler
Sym bol
Counter
AMR
clkRCOS C
clkTRX
11.2 Clock Systems and their Distribution
The AVR Clock Control Unit distributes the pre-scaled system clock to the various
functional blocks of the device. The radio transceiver always runs with the 16 MHz
crystal oscillator clock.
11.2.1 CPU Clock – clkCPU
The CPU clock is routed to parts of the system concerned with operation of the AVR
core. Examples of such modules are the General Purpose Register File, the Status
Register and the data memory holding the Stack Pointer. Halting the CPU clock inhibits
the core from performing general operations and calculations.
175
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
11.2.2 I/O Clock – clkI/O
The I/O clock is used by the majority of the I/O modules, like Timer/Counters, SPI, and
USART. The I/O clock is also used by the External Interrupt module, but note that some
external interrupts are detected by asynchronous logic, allowing such interrupts to be
detected even if the I/O clock is halted. Also note that start condition detection in the 2-
wire serial interface (TWI) module is carried out asynchronously when clkI/O is halted.
Similar the TWI address recognition in all sleep modes also occurs asynchronously.
11.2.3 Flash Clock – clkFLASH
The Flash clock controls operation of the Flash interface. The Flash clock is usually
active simultaneously with the CPU clock.
11.2.4 Asynchronous Timer Clock – clkASY
The Asynchronous Timer clock allows the Asynchronous Timer/Counter to be clocked
directly from an external clock or an external 32 kHz clock crystal. The dedicated clock
domain allows using this Timer/Counter as a real-time counter even if the device is in
sleep mode.
11.2.5 ADC Clock – clkADC
The ADC is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This allows halting the CPU and
I/O clocks in order to reduce noise generated by digital circuitry. This gives more
accurate ADC conversion results.
11.3 Clock Sources
The device has the following clock source options, selectable by Flash Fuse bits as
shown below. The clock from the selected source is input to the AVR clock generator,
and routed to the appropriate modules.
Table 11-1. Device Clocking Options Select(1)
Device Clocking Option CKSEL3:0
Transceiver clock 1111 – 0110
Reserved 0101 - 0100
Internal 128 kHz RC Oscillator 0011
Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator 0010
External Clock 0000
Reserved 0001
Notes: 1. For all fuses “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means programmed.
11.3.1 Default Clock Source
The device is shipped with internal RC oscillator at 16.0 MHz, the 1:2 prescaler enabled
and with the fuse CKDIV8 programmed, resulting in 1.0 MHz system clock. The startup
time is set to maximum time. (CKSEL = "0010", SUT = "10", CKDIV8 = "0"). The default
setting ensures that all users can make their desired clock source setting using any
available programming interface.
11.3.2 Clock Start-up Sequence
Any clock source needs a minimum number of oscillating cycles before it can be
considered stable.
176
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
To ensure sufficient startup time, the device issues an internal reset with a time-out
delay (tTOUT) after the device reset is released by all other reset sources. Section
"Power-on Reset" on page 208 describes the start conditions for the internal reset. The
delay (tTOUT) is timed from the Watchdog Oscillator and the number of cycles in the
delay is set by the SUTx and CKSELx fuse bits. The selectable delays are shown in
Table 11-2 below. The frequency of the Watchdog Oscillator is voltage dependent as
shown in section "Typical Characteristics" on page 564.
Table 11-2. Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles
Typ Time-out Number of Cycles
0 ms 0
4.0 ms 512
64 ms 8K (8,192)
Main purpose of the delay is to keep the AVR in reset until it is supplied with a stable
VDEVDD. The delay will not monitor the actual voltage and it will be required to select a
delay longer than the DEVDD rise time. If this is not possible, an internal or external
Brown-Out Detection (BOD) circuit should be used. A BOD circuit will ensure sufficient
VDEVDD before it releases the reset, and the time-out delay can be disabled. Disabling
the time-out delay without utilizing a Brown-Out Detection circuit is not recommended.
The oscillator is required to oscillate for a minimum number of cycles before the clock is
considered stable. An internal ripple counter monitors the oscillator output clock, and
keeps the internal reset active for a given number of clock cycles. The reset is then
released and the device will start to execute. The recommended oscillator start-up time
is dependent on the clock type, and varies from 6 cycles for an externally applied clock
to 32K cycles for a low frequency crystal.
The start-up sequence for the clock includes both the time-out delay and the start-up
time when the device starts up from reset. When starting up from Power-save or Power-
down mode, DEVDD is assumed to be at a sufficient level and only the start-up time is
included.
11.4 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator
By default, the Internal RC Oscillator provides an approximate 16 MHz clock. The RC
oscillator is voltage and temperature dependent, but can be very accurately calibrated
by the user. See chapter "Clock Characteristics" on page 552 and "Internal Oscillator
Speed" on page 587 for more details. The device is shipped with the CKDIV8 Fuse and
the 1:2 system clock prescaler programmed. See section "System Clock Prescaler" on
page 179 for more details.
This clock may be selected as the system clock by programming the CKSEL Fuses as
shown in Table 11-3 on page 177. If selected, it will operate with no external
components. During reset, hardware loads the pre-programmed calibration value into
the OSCCAL Register and thereby automatically calibrates the RC Oscillator. The
accuracy of this calibration is shown as Factory calibration in section "Clock
Characteristics" on page 552.
By changing the OSCCAL register (see "OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Value" on
page 180) from Software, it is possible to get a higher calibration accuracy than by
using the factory calibration. The accuracy of this calibration is shown as User
calibration in section "Clock Characteristics" on page 552.
177
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
When this Oscillator is used as the chip clock, the Watchdog Oscillator will still be used
for the Watchdog Timer and for the Reset Time-out. For more information on the pre-
programmed calibration value, see the section "Calibration Byte" on page 505.
Table 11-3. Internal Calibrated RC Oscillator Operating Modes(1)(2)
Frequency Range (MHz) CKSEL3:0
9.6 ... 22.4 0010
Notes: 2. The device is shipped with this option selected.
When this Oscillator is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as
shown in the following table.
Table 11-4. Start-up times for the internal calibrated RC Oscillator clock selection
Power Conditions Start-up Time from Power-
down and Power-save
Additional Delay from
Reset
SUT1:0
BOD enabled 6 CK 14CK 00
Fast rising power 6 CK 14CK + 4.0 ms 01
Slowly rising power 6 CK 14CK + 64 ms(1) 10
Reserved 11
Notes: 1. The device is shipped with this option selected
11.5 128 kHz Internal Oscillator
The 128 kHz Internal Oscillator is an ultra-low power RC oscillator providing a clock of
approximate 128 kHz nominal frequency. This clock may be selected as the system
clock by programming the CKSEL Fuses to “0011” as shown in the following table.
Table 11-5. 128 kHz Internal Oscillator Operating Modes(1)
Nominal Frequency CKSEL3:0
128 kHz 0011
Notes: 1. Note that the 128 kHz oscillator is a very low power clock source, and is not
designed for high accuracy
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as
shown in the following table.
Table 11-6. Start-up Times for the 128 kHz Internal Oscillator
Power Conditions Start-up Time from Power-down
and Power-save
Additional Delay from
Reset
SUT1:0
BOD enabled 6 CK 14CK 00
Fast rising power 6 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 01
Slowly rising power 6 CK 14CK + 64 ms 10
Reserved 11
11.6 External Clock
To drive the device from an external clock source, CLKI should be used as shown in
Figure 11-2 on page 178. To run the device on an external clock, the CKSEL Fuses
must be programmed to “0000”.
178
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 11-2. External Clock Drive Configuration
CLKI
VSS
external clock
When this clock source is selected, start-up times are determined by the SUT Fuses as
shown in Table 11-8 below.
Table 11-7. External Clock Frequency
Nominal Frequency CKSEL3:0
0 – 16 MHz 0000
Table 11-8. Start-up Times for the External Clock Selection
Power Conditions Start-up Time from Power-down
and Power-save
Additional Delay from
Reset
SUT1:0
BOD enabled 6 CK 14 CK 00
Fast rising power 6 CK 14 CK + 4.0 ms 01
Slowly rising power 6 CK 14 CK + 64 ms 10
Reserved 11
When applying an external clock, it is required to avoid sudden changes in the applied
clock frequency to ensure stable operation of the microcontroller unit (MCU). A variation
in frequency of more than 2% from one clock cycle to the next can lead to unpredictable
behavior. If changes of more than 2% are required, ensure that the MCU is kept in
Reset during the changes.
Note that the System Clock Prescaler can be used to implement run-time changes of
the internal clock frequency while still ensuring stable operation. Refer to section
"System Clock Prescaler" on page 179 for details.
11.7 Transceiver Crystal Oscillator
The integrated crystal oscillator for the radio transceiver generates a low-jitter 16MHz
clock frequency. See section "Crystal Oscillator (XOSC)" on page 86 for details about
the operation of this oscillator. The AVR core and the radio transceiver operate
synchronously on the same clock if this oscillator is selected. If the transceiver crystal
oscillator is selected as AVR core clock, it remains enabled even if the radio transceiver
is in SLEEP mode or its power reduction bit PRTRX24 is set.
Table 11-9. Transceiver Crystal Clock Operating Mode
Frequency Range (MHz) CKSEL3:0(1)
16 1111 - 0110
Notes: 1. All CKSEL fuse values have the same significance.
179
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 11-10. Start-up Times for the Transceiver Oscillator Clock Selection
Power Conditions Start-up Time from
Power-down and
Power-save
Additional Delay
from Reset
CKSEL0 SUT1:0
fast rising power 258 CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 0 00
slowly rising power 258 CK 14CK + 65 ms 0 01
BOD enabled 1K CK 14CK + 0 ms 0 10
fast rising power 1K CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 0 11
slowly rising power 1K CK 14CK + 65 ms 1 00
BOD enabled 16K CK 14CK + 0 ms 1 01
fast rising power 16K CK 14CK + 4.1 ms 1 10
slowly rising power 16K CK 14CK + 65 ms 1 11
11.8 Clock Output Buffer
The device can output the system clock on the CLKO pin. To enable the output, the
CKOUT Fuse has to be programmed. This mode is suitable when the chip clock is used
to drive other circuits on the system. The clock also will be output during reset, and the
normal operation of I/O pin will be overridden when the fuse is programmed. Any clock
source, including the internal RC Oscillator, can be selected when the clock is output on
CLKO. If the System Clock Prescaler is used, it is the divided system clock that is
output.
Special attention is required to prevent unwanted radiation from the connected PCB
clock trace. Proper filtering can help to suppress higher harmonics.
11.9 Timer/Counter Oscillator
The device can operate the Timer/Counter2 as well as the MAC Symbol Counter from
the 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator or an external clock source. See section "Application
Circuits" on page 538 for the watch crystal connection and the asynchronous control
register "ASSR – Asynchronous Status Register" on page 358 to get the 32.768 kHz
crystal oscillator enabled by the control bit AS2.
11.10 System Clock Prescaler
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 has a system clock prescaler, and the system clock
can be divided by setting the “CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register”. This feature can be
used to decrease the system clock frequency and the power consumption when the
requirement for processing power is low. This can be used with all clock source options,
and it will affect the clock frequency of the CPU and all synchronous peripherals. The
clocks clkI/O, clkADC, clkCPU, and clkFLASH are divided by a factor as shown in CLKPR –
Clock Prescale Register on page 181.
The prescaler clock division factor of the internal RC-Oscillator is different from all other
clock sources, see register description CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register on page 181
Flash, EEPROM, Fuse- and Lock-bit programming is not allowed while using RC-
Oscillator with CLKPS=0xF (clkCPU = 16MHz).
When switching between prescaler settings, the System Clock Prescaler ensures that
no glitches occur in the clock system. It also ensures that no intermediate frequency is
higher than neither the clock frequency corresponding to the previous setting nor the
clock frequency corresponding to the new setting.
180
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The prescaler is implemented as a ripple counter running at the frequency of the
undivided clock, which may be faster than the CPU's clock frequency. Hence, it is not
possible to determine the state of the prescaler - even if it were readable. The exact
time it takes to switch from one clock division to another cannot be exactly predicted.
From the time the CLKPS values are written, it takes between t1 + t2 and t1 + 2t2 before
the new clock frequency is active. In this interval 2 active clock edges are produced.
Here t1 is the previous clock period and t2 is the clock period corresponding to the new
prescaler setting.
To avoid unintentional changes of clock frequency, a special write procedure must be
followed to change the CLKPS bits:
1. Write the Clock Prescaler Change Enable (CLKPCE) bit to one and all other bits in
CLKPR to zero.
2. Within four cycles, write the desired value to CLKPS while writing a zero to
CLKPCE.
Interrupts must be disabled when changing prescaler settings to make sure the write
procedure is not interrupted.
It is not required to change the prescaler setting of an existing software package written
for an 8MHz internal RC oscillator. The change of the prescaler (additional 1:2 divider)
is compensated by doubling the RC oscillator frequency of the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
11.11 Register Description
11.11.1 OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Value
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($66) CAL7 CAL6 CAL5 CAL4 CAL3 CAL2 CAL1 CAL0 OSCCAL
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Oscillator Calibration Register is used to trim the Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator
to remove process variations from the oscillator frequency. A preprogrammed
calibration value is automatically written to this register during chip reset, giving the
Factory calibrated frequency. The application software can write this register to change
the oscillator frequency. The oscillator can be calibrated to frequencies as specified in
the section "Electrical Characteristics". Calibration outside that range is not guaranteed.
Note that this oscillator is used to time EEPROM and Flash write accesses and these
write times will be affected accordingly. The calibration to very high frequencies can
cause EEPROM or Flash erase/write failures. The CAL7 bit determines the range of
operation for the oscillator. Setting this bit to 0 gives the lowest frequency range, setting
this bit to 1 gives the highest frequency range. The two frequency ranges are
overlapping, in other words a setting of OSCCAL = 0x7F gives a higher frequency than
OSCCAL = 0x80. The CAL6..0 bits are used to tune the frequency within the selected
range. A setting of 0x00 gives the lowest frequency in that range, and a setting of 0x7F
gives the highest frequency in the range.
• Bit 7:0 – CAL7:0 - Oscillator Calibration Tuning Value
Table 11-11 CAL Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CAL7:0 0x00 Calibration value for lowest oscillator
frequency
181
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x7f End value of low frequency range calibration
0x80 Start value of high frequency range
calibration
0xff Calibration value for highest oscillator
frequency
11.11.2 CLKPR – Clock Prescale Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($61) CLKPCE
Res2 Res1 Res0 CLKPS3
CLKPS2
CLKPS1
CLKPS0
CLKPR
Read/Write RW R R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – CLKPCE - Clock Prescaler Change Enable
The CLKPCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the CLKPS bits. The
CLKPCE bit is only updated when the other bits in CLKPR are simultaneously written to
zero. CLKPCE is cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when CLKPS bits
are written. Rewriting the CLKPCE bit within this time-out period does neither extend
the time-out period, nor clear the CLKPCE bit.
• Bit 6:4 – Res2:0 - Reserved
• Bit 3:0 – CLKPS3:0 - Clock Prescaler Select Bits
These bits define the division factor between the selected clock source and the internal
system clock. These bits can be written run-time to vary the clock frequency to suit the
application requirements. As the divider divides the master clock input to the MCU, the
speed of all synchronous peripherals is reduced when a division factor is used. The
division factors are given in the following table. Note that the factor is different when
using the internal 16MHz RC oscillator as the clock source. The CKDIV8 Fuse
determines the initial value of the CLKPS bits. If CKDIV8 is not programmed, the
CLKPS bits will be reset to 0000. If CKDIV8 is programmed, CLKPS bits are reset to
0011 giving a division factor of 8 at start up. This feature should be used if the selected
clock source has a higher frequency than the maximum frequency of the device at the
present operating conditions. Note that any value can be written to the CLKPS bits
regardless of the CKDIV8 Fuse setting. The Application software must ensure that a
sufficient division factor is chosen if the selected clock source has a higher frequency
than the maximum frequency of the device at the present operating conditions. The
device is shipped with the CKDIV8 Fuse programmed.
Table 11-12 CLKPS Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CLKPS3:0 0x0 Division factor 1 / RC-Oscillator 2
0x1 Division factor 2 / RC-Oscillator 4
0x2 Division factor 4 / RC-Oscillator 8
0x3 Division factor 8 / RC-Oscillator 16
0x4 Division factor 16 / RC-Oscillator 32
0x5 Division factor 32 / RC-Oscillator 64
0x6 Division factor 64 / RC-Oscillator 128
0x7 Division factor 128 / RC-Oscillator 256
182
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x8 Division factor 256 / RC-Oscillator 512
0x9 Reserved
0xA Reserved
0xB Reserved
0xC Reserved
0xD Reserved
0xE Reserved
0xF Division factor 1 only permitted for RC-
Oscillator. Flash and EEPROM programming
is not allowed.
183
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
12 Power Management and Sleep Modes
Sleep modes enable the application to shut down unused modules in the MCU, thereby
saving power. The AVR microcontroller and the RF transceiver provide various sleep
modes allowing the user to tailor the power consumption to the application’s
requirements.
12.1 Deep-Sleep Mode
When the microcontroller goes into Power-down or Power-save modes while the
transceiver is in SLEEP state the device enters the Deep-Sleep mode.
Sending the microcontroller to Power-down or Power-save is not allowed during the
wake-up phase of the transceiver. The TRX24_AWAKE interrupt shall be used to wait
for the transceiver is operational.
The DVDD voltage regulator and the associated power chain will be switched off.
Remaining running logic will then be supplied from the Low Leakage Voltage Regulator.
Even the AVDD regulator will switched off. See chapter "Radio Transceiver" on page
188 how to disable the radio transceiver.
Before entering Deep-Sleep mode the automatic calibration of the Low Leakage
Voltage Regulator must be completed. This automatic calibration can be temporarily
disabled for very short wake-up times. For details see "Low Leakage Voltage Regulator
(LLVREG)" on page 192.
The SRAM blocks use the data retention mode to preserve its content while saving
leakage power. The Low Leakage Voltage Regulator has only limited driving
capabilities, see section "Supply Voltage and Leakage Control" on page 189 for details.
Therefore the remaining running logic must be clocked with low frequencies only.
The Deep-Sleep mode can be finished by a wake-up source shown by the Table 12-1
on page 184. Then DVDD voltage regulator and the associated power chain will be
switched on. If the power-chain is completely enabled the standard AVR wake-up
procedure continues (for details see chapter "Power-chain" on page 189).
Note that the wake-up time from Deep-sleep mode is significantly longer than the wake-
up time from the Power-down or Power-save mode because the entire power-chain will
be restarted.
Additionally note that if the ADC is enabled and/or running a conversion, while entering
Deep-sleep mode, the ADC supply voltage is switched off. Therefore the ADC must be
disabled before entering Deep-sleep mode to avoid an undefined ADC operation.
If Timer/Counter 2 is not operated asynchronously (i.e., AS2 in ASSR is 0), the timer is
kept running in all sleep modes (see chapter Power-save Mode on page 186). This
implies the main oscillator (as selected by the fuse configuration) is kept running. The
power chain remains enabled and the device does not enter the Deep-Sleep mode.
Assembly Code Example
…
ldi r16, (1<<SLPTR)
sts TRXPR, r16 ; disable transceiver
ldi r16, (2<<SM0) + (1<<SE) ; select power down mode
out SMCR, r16 ; enable sleep mode
sleep ; go to deep sleep
…
184
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Example(1)
#include <avr/sleep.h>
int main(void)
{
…
TRXPR = 1 << SLPTR; // sent transceiver to sleep
set_sleep_mode(SLEEP_MODE_PWR_DOWN); // select power down mode
sleep_enable();
sleep_cpu(); // go to deep sleep
sleep_disable(); // executed after wake-up
…
}
Notes: 1. See also section "About Code Examples" on page 8.
The C-source code example uses high level functions from the library. Deep-Sleep
mode will not be entered during on-chip debug sessions. Refer to section "Transceiver
Pin Register TRXPR" on page 35 for a description of the functionality of the SLPTR bit.
12.2 AVR Microcontroller Sleep Modes
In chapter "System Clock and Clock Options" on page 174 the different clock systems
in the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2, and their distribution were presented. Figure 11-1
on page 174 is helpful in selecting an appropriate sleep mode. The following table
shows the different sleep modes and their wake-up sources.
Table 12-1. Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in the Different Sleep Modes
Active Clock Domains Oscillators Wake-up Sources
Sleep
Mode
clkCPU
clkFLASH
clkIO
clkADC
clkASY
Main
Clock-
source
Enabled
Timer Oscillator
Enabled
INT7:0 and Pin
Change
TWI Address
Match
Timer
/Counter2
SPM/EEPROM
Ready
ADC
WDT Interrupt
Other I/O
Symbol Counter
Transceiver
Idle X X X X X(2) X X X X X X X X(4) X(4)
ADCNRM
X X X X(2) X(3) X X(2) X X X X(4) X(4)
Power-
down X(3) X X X(4) X(4)
Power-
save X X(2) X(3) X X X X(4) X(4)
Standby
(1) X X(3) X X X(4) X(4)
Extended
Standby X(2) X X(2) X(3) X X X X(4) X(4)
Notes: 1. Only recommended with external crystal or resonator selected as clock source.
2. If Timer/Counter2 is running in asynchronous mode.
3. For INT7:4, only level interrupt.
4. The Symbol Counter and/or the Transceiver can wakeup the AVR if the Transceiver
Oscillator is enabled (Transceiver not in SLEEP).
185
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
To enter any of the sleep modes, the SE bit in in the SMCR register (see "SMCR –
Sleep Mode Control Register" on page 194) must be written to logic one and a SLEEP
instruction must be executed. The SM2, SM1, and SM0 bits in the SMCR Register
select which sleep mode will be activated by the SLEEP instruction. See chapter
"Register Description" on page 194 for a summary.
If an enabled interrupt occurs while the MCU is in a sleep mode, the MCU wakes up.
The MCU is then halted for four cycles in addition to the start-up time, executes the
interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP. The
contents of the Register File and SRAM are unaltered when the device wakes up from
sleep. Note that SRAM data retention must be enabled in some sleep modes to
preserve the memory contents (see section "SRAM with Data Retention" on page 191).
If a reset occurs during sleep mode, the MCU wakes up and executes from the Reset
Vector.
12.2.1 Idle Mode
When the SM2:0 bits are written to 000 in the SMCR register, the SLEEP instruction
makes the MCU enter Idle mode, stopping the CPU but allowing the SPI, USART,
Analog Comparator, ADC, 2-wire Serial Interface, Timer/Counters, Watchdog, and the
interrupt system to continue operating. This sleep mode basically halts clkCPU and
clkFLASH, while allowing the other clocks to run.
Idle mode enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered interrupts as well as
internal ones like the Timer Overflow and USART Transmit Complete interrupts. If
wake-up from the Analog Comparator interrupt is not required, the Analog Comparator
can be powered down by setting the ACD bit in the Analog Comparator Control and
Status Register – ACSR. This will reduce power consumption in Idle mode. If the ADC
is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered.
12.2.2 ADC Noise Reduction Mode
When the SM2:0 bits are written to 001, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter
ADC Noise Reduction mode (ADCNRM), stopping the CPU but allowing the ADC, the
external interrupts, 2-wire Serial Interface address match, Timer/Counter2 and the
Watchdog to continue operating (if enabled). This sleep mode basically halts clkI/O,
clkCPU, and clkFLASH, while allowing the other clocks to run.
This improves the noise environment for the ADC, enabling higher resolution
measurements. If the ADC is enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this
mode is entered. Apart form the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt, only an External
Reset, a Watchdog System Reset, a Watchdog interrupt, a Brown-out Reset, a 2-wire
serial interface interrupt, a Timer/Counter2 interrupt, an SPM/EEPROM ready interrupt,
an external level interrupt on INT7:4 or a pin change interrupt can wakeup the MCU
from ADC Noise Reduction mode.
12.2.3 Power-down Mode
When the SM2:0 bits are written to 010, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter
Power-down mode. In this mode, the 16 MHz crystal oscillator is stopped (if selected by
CKSEL fuses), while the external interrupts, the 2-wire Serial Interface, and the
Watchdog continue operating (if enabled). Only an External Reset, a Watchdog Reset,
a Brown-out Reset, 2-wire Serial Interface address match, an external level interrupt on
INT7:4, an external interrupt on INT3:0, a pin change interrupt, or a symbol counter
interrupt can wake up the MCU. This sleep mode basically halts all generated clocks,
allowing operation of asynchronous modules only.
186
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down mode, the
changed level must be held for some time to wake up the MCU. Refer to section
"External Interrupts" on page 248 for details.
When waking up from Power-down mode, there is a delay from the wake-up condition
occurs until the wake-up becomes effective. This allows the clock to restart and become
stable after have been stopped. The wake-up period is defined by the same CKSEL
Fuses that define the Reset Time-out period, as described in chapter "System Clock
and Clock Options" on page 174.
12.2.4 Power-save Mode
When the SM2:0 bits are written to 011, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter
Power-save mode. This mode is identical to Power-down, with one exception:
If Timer/Counter2 is enabled, it will keep running during sleep. The device can wake up
from either Timer Overflow or Output Compare event from Timer/Counter2 if the
corresponding Timer/Counter2 interrupt enable bits are set in TIMSK2, and the Global
Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is set. If Timer/Counter2 is not running, Power-down mode
is recommended instead of Power-save mode.
The Timer/Counter2 can be clocked both synchronously and asynchronously in Power-
save mode. If the Timer/Counter2 is not using the asynchronous clock, the
Timer/Counter Oscillator is stopped during sleep. If the Timer/Counter2 is not using the
synchronous clock, the clock source is stopped during sleep. Note that even if the
synchronous clock is running in Power-save, this clock is only available for the
Timer/Counter2. Timer/Counter2 operation is described in detail in section "8-bit
Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation" on page 339.
12.2.5 Standby Mode
When the SM2:0 bits are 110 and the crystal oscillator of the radio transceiver is
selected, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Standby mode. This mode is
identical to Power-down with the exception that the Oscillator is kept running. From
Standby mode, the device wakes up in six clock cycles.
12.2.6 Extended Standby Mode
When the SM2:0 bits are 111 and the crystal oscillator of the radio transceiver is
selected, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Extended Standby mode. This
mode is identical to Power-save mode with the exception that the oscillator is kept
running. From Extended Standby mode, the device wakes up in six clock cycles.
12.3 Power Reduction Register
The Power Reduction Register (PRR), see "PRR0 – Power Reduction Register0" on
page 195, "PRR1 – Power Reduction Register 1" on page 196 and "PRR2 – Power
Reduction Register 2" on page 197, provide a method to stop the clock to individual
peripherals to reduce power consumption.
Note that when the clock for a peripheral is stopped, then:
• The current state of the peripheral is frozen.
• The associated registers can not be read or written.
• Resources used by the peripheral (e.g. IO pins) will remain occupied.
The peripheral unit should in most cases be disabled before stopping the clock. Waking
up a module, which is done by clearing the bit in PRR, puts the module in the same
state as before the shutdown. Exceptions are the SRAM blocks and the radio
187
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
transceiver. The SRAM is shut down by a DRT switch and the radio transceiver is in
reset state if its respective power reduction bit is set.
Module shutdown can be used in Idle mode and Active mode to significantly reduce the
overall power consumption. See chapter "Typical Characteristics" on page 564 for
examples. In all other sleep modes, the clock is already stopped.
12.4 Minimizing Power Consumption
There are several issues to consider when trying minimizing the power consumption in
an AVR controlled system. In general, sleep modes should be used as much as
possible, and the sleep mode should be selected so that as few as possible of the
device’s functions are operating. All functions not needed should be disabled. In
particular, the following modules may need special consideration when trying to achieve
the lowest possible power consumption.
12.4.1 Analog to Digital Converter
If enabled, the ADC will be enabled in all sleep modes. To save power, the ADC should
be disabled before entering any sleep mode. Refer to chapter "ADC – Analog to Digital
Converter" on page 442 for details on ADC operation.
12.4.2 Analog Comparator
When entering Idle mode, the Analog Comparator should be disabled if not used. When
entering ADC Noise Reduction mode the Analog Comparator should also be disabled.
In other sleep modes, the Analog Comparator is automatically disabled. However, if the
Analog Comparator is set up to use the Internal Voltage Reference as input, the Analog
Comparator should be disabled in all sleep modes. Otherwise, the Internal Voltage
Reference will be enabled, independent of sleep mode. Refer to "AC – Analog
Comparator" on page 438 for details on how to configure the Analog Comparator.
12.4.3 Brown-out Detector
If the Brown-out Detector is enabled by the BODLEVEL Fuses, it will be disabled in
Deep-sleep mode. Refer to "Brown-out Detection" on page 209 for details on how to
configure the Brown-out Detector. It is recommended to enable the Brown-out Detector.
12.4.4 Internal Voltage Reference
The Internal Voltage Reference will be enabled when needed by the Brown-out
Detection, the Analog Comparator or the ADC. If these modules are disabled as
described in the sections above, the internal voltage reference will be disabled and not
consume power. When turned on again, the user must allow the reference to start up
before the output is used. If the reference is kept on in sleep mode, the output can be
used immediately. Refer to "Internal Voltage Reference" on page 210 for details on the
start-up time.
12.4.5 Watchdog Timer
If the Watchdog Timer is not needed in the application, the module should be turned off.
If the Watchdog Timer is enabled, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence,
always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to
the total current consumption. Refer to "Watchdog Timer" on page 211 for details on
how to configure the Watchdog Timer.
188
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
12.4.6 Port Pins
When entering a sleep mode, all port pins should be configured to use minimum power.
The most important is then to ensure that no pins drive resistive loads. In sleep modes
where both the I/O clock (clkI/O) and the ADC clock (clkADC) are stopped, the input
buffers of the device will be disabled. This ensures that no power is consumed by the
input logic when not needed. In some cases, the input logic is needed for detecting
wake-up conditions, and it will then be enabled. Refer to the section "I/O-Ports" on page
217 for details on which pins are enabled. If the input buffer is enabled and the input
signal is left floating or have an analog signal level close to DEVDD/2, the input buffer
will use excessive power.
For analog input pins, the digital input buffer should be disabled at all times. An analog
signal level close to DEVDD/2 on an input pin can cause significant current even in
active mode. Digital input buffers can be disabled by writing to the Digital Input Disable
Registers DIDR1 and DIDR0. Refer to "DIDR1 – Digital Input Disable Register 1" on
page 440 and "DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0" on page 467 for details.
12.4.7 On-chip Debug System
If the On-chip debug system is enabled by the OCDEN Fuse and the chip enters sleep
mode, the main clock source is enabled, and hence, always consumes power. In the
deeper sleep modes, this will contribute significantly to the total current consumption.
There are three alternative ways to disable the OCD system:
• Disable the OCDEN Fuse.
• Disable the JTAGEN Fuse.
• Write one to the JTD bit in MCUCR.
12.4.8 Symbol Counter
The Symbol Counter acts as a separate counter, which uses either the 16MHz clock
from XTAL1/XTAL2 crystal pins or the clock from PG3/PG4 low frequency crystal pins.
If the Symbol Counter module is not used, it should be disabled, see section "MAC
Symbol Counter" on page 155.
12.4.9 Radio Transceiver
The radio transceiver module is automatically starting its state machine after power on.
While the CPU is in any sleep mode, the radio transceiver remains active. This enables
the radio transceiver to wakeup the MCU if a pending action is over (frame received or
transmission completed). The radio transceiver will be inactive during sleep, if either the
its power reduction bit PRTRX24 in register PRR1 is set or it is send into SLEEP mode,
see "PRR1 – Power Reduction Register 1" on page 196 for details. After reactivation
the 16MHz crystal oscillator is started first and afterwards the radio transceiver with
TRX_OFF state.
The radio transceiver is derived from a stand alone solution that was partly controlled
by external pins. Now the radio transceiver is fully controlled by individual register bits.
The radio transceiver has a separate reset signal. A radio transceiver reset is initiated
by setting bit TRXRST in register TRXPR. This bit is self-resetting.
The radio transceiver signal SLPTR can be controlled by the bit SLPTR in register
TRXPR and is used to set the radio transceiver into SLEEP mode (assuming
TRX_STATE is TRX_OFF). This bit has a multiple function, see section "Low-Power 2.4
GHz Transceiver" on page 32 for a detailed description of the radio transceiver.
189
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
12.5 Supply Voltage and Leakage Control
For battery applications using DEEP_SLEEP periods, the leakage current defines the
system life time. Due to the typical strong temperature dependency of the leakage
current, major contributors to the leakage budget are turned off:
• Analog and digital voltage regulator,
• Non-volatile memory (NVM),
• SRAM,
• Digital signal processor of the radio transceiver including AES engine.
If the CPU uses one of the sleep modes “power-down” or “power-save”, the above
mentioned blocks will be switched off by power switches. When the CPU wakes up, the
blocks are switched on again. There are some additional exceptions (internal voltage
regulator, SRAM, radio transceiver), see section "Power-chain" below .
The supply voltage control is mainly hidden to the application, it is not necessary to
configure the supply voltage control. Nevertheless some configurations can be done in
order to get the maximum effect and the lowest sleep current, for details see section
"SRAM with Data Retention" on page 191.
12.5.1 Power-chain
The following figure shows the major dependencies of the power-chain and how the
power switches are situated inside the chain.
Figure 12-1. Power-chain connections
power_control bandgap DVREG
LLVREG
drt_switch
First SRAM
drt_switch
Last SRAM
power_switch
Radio
Transceiver
power_switch
NVM
powerchain_ ok
llvreg_ok
trx24_sleeps
Startup and Wakeup from DEEP_SLEEP
After power-on reset (POR) or wakeup from DEEP_SLEEP the power switches of the
blocks will be enabled one after another (power-chained) to decrease current peaks.
The blocks will be enabled in the following order:
1. Bandgap reference and voltage regulator,
2. Digital voltage regulator (DVREG) and low leakage voltage regulator (LLVREG),
3. first SRAM block (lower 4k bytes),
4. last SRAM block (upper 4k bytes),
5. Radio transceiver including AES engine,
6. Non-volatile memory.
If the power-chain is completely enabled the standard AVR wake-up procedure
continues.
190
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 12-2 shows the chained startup procedure after power up. The Figure 12-3
shows the startup from DEEP_SLEEP. A module is only switched on if it is not
deselected by power reduction register (PRR1 or PRR2). This is possible for SRAM
blocks and radio transceiver power switch. At the end of the startup, the pin RSTON is
enabled. Depending of the currently enabled memory blocks (NSRAM), the startup
procedure takes different time.
tSTARTUP_TOTAL = tBG + tDVREG + NSRAM·tDRT_ON + 3·tPWRSW_ON + tOSC_STARTUP
The SRAM is organized in 4kByte blocks, the NVM in 128kByte blocks. Deselected
SRAM blocks (by PRR2 register) reduce the wakeup time from DEEP_SLEEP. For
further timing information see "Power Management Electrical Characteristics" on page
554.
Figure 12-2. Timing visualization of power up
s ta r t u p
bandgap
s ta r t u p
D V R E G
D R T s w i tc h
S R A M # 0
P O R D R T s w it c h
S R A M # 1
D R T s w i tc h
S R A M # 2
D R T s w it c h
S R A M # 3
p o w e r s w i tc h
r a d io t r a n s .
p o w e r s w itc h
N V M
o s c il la t o r
s ta r t u p
tP O R tB G tD V R E G tD R T _ O N tD R T _ O N tD R T _ O N tD R T _ O N tP W R S W _ O N tP W R S W _ O N tO S C _ S T A R T U P
R S T O N
tS T A R T U P
Figure 12-3. Timing visualization of wakeup from DEEP_SLEEP
s t a r t u p
bandgap
s ta r t u p
D V R E G
D R T s w itc h
S R A M # 0
S L E E P D R T s w i t c h
S R A M # 1
D R T s w i t c h
S R A M # 2
D R T s w itc h
S R A M # 3
p o w e r s w itc h
r a d i o tr a n s .
p o w e r s w itc h
N V M
o s c il la t o r
s ta r t u p
tB G tD V R E G tD R T _ O N tD R T _ O N tD R T _ O N tD R T _ O N tP W R S W _ O N tP W R S W _ O N tO S C _ S T A R T U P
tS T A R T U P
Sleep
Six sleep modes are defined for the CPU. Disabling the power-chain and thus switching
off of the above mentioned blocks makes only sense for the modes “power-down” and
“power-save”. Also an enabled radio transceiver prevents the power-chain from being
disabled.
In order to disable the power-chain, one of the following conditions must fit:
• The radio transceiver has to be disabled (power reduction register PRR1 bit
PRTRX24).
• The radio transceiver is sent into SLEEP mode (register TRXPR bit SLPTR).
The SRAM blocks may be configured separately to decrease their leakage current (see
section "SRAM with Data Retention" on page 191).
The following table shows the different implemented sleep modes and the behavior of
the power-chain depending on the current state of the radio transceiver.
Table 12-2. Power states of microcontroller and radio transceiver
AVR State Radio Transceiver State Powerchain
ON ON ON
ON off (SLEEP or power reduction) ON
off (1…6) ON ON
off (1,4…6) off (SLEEP or power reduction) ON
191
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
AVR State Radio Transceiver State Powerchain
off (2,3)
DEEP SLEEP
off (SLEEP or power reduction) off (7)
Notes: 1. Idle
2. Power Down
3. Power Save
4. ADC Noise Reduction Mode
5. Standby
6. Extended Standby
7. If the OCDEN fuse is programmed, the Power-chain is always on
12.5.2 SRAM with Data Retention
It is necessary to prevent any data loss of the SRAM when setting the CPU in one of
the DEEP_SLEEP modes. For that purpose the SRAM blocks will not be completely
switched off if the power-chain is disabled. The supply voltage for any individual SRAM
block is decreased to reduce its leakage current but guaranteeing its data retention.
The SRAM memory is divided into 4kByte blocks. Each block can be fully switched off
by setting the correspondent bit (PRRAM0 ... PRRAM3) in register PRR2 (see "PRR2 –
Power Reduction Register 2" on page 197). This enables the application software to
switch off unused SRAM memory to save power and to reduce leakage currents.
Every SRAM block can be enabled again by resetting the respective bit (PRRAM0 ...
PRRAM3) of register PRR2. For each SRAM block n the bit DRTSWOK of the
corresponding register DRTRAMn shows the state of the DRT switch (logic high means
SRAM block can be accessed).
If the power-chain is switched off during deep-sleep modes, the content of the SRAM
blocks must be sustained. To provide data retention and lowest leakage current, a data
retention block controls the SRAM behavior during deep-sleep. Since the leakage
current is dramatically depending from the voltage of the SRAM, the supply voltage can
be decreased by enabling the data retention mode DRT.
Every SRAM block n is controlled by its assigned register DRTRAMn. The bit ENDRT
enables the data retention mode during deep-sleep. If this bit is zero, the respective
SRAM block is completely switched off.
Table 12-3. SRAM behavior while in deep-sleep mode
ENDRT Power-chain SRAM supply voltage
1 ON 1.8V (DVDD)
0 ON 1.8V (DVDD)
1 off Reduced
0 off Disconnected
The lower 4-bit of the register DRTRAMn are reserved and should not be changed. The
reset value of the DRT voltage settings are preprogrammed during the manufacturing
process and need not to be changed.
12.5.3 Voltage Regulators (AVREG, DVREG)
The main features of the Voltage Regulator blocks are:
• Bandgap stabilized 1.8V supply for analog and digital domain;
• Low dropout (LDO) voltage regulator;
192
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Configurable to use an external voltage regulator;
The internal voltage regulators supply a stabilized voltage to the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2. The AVREG provides the regulated 1.8V supply voltage
for the analog section and the DVREG supplies the 1.8V supply voltage for the digital
section. The DVREG is enabled during startup and is switched off if the power-chain is
disabled. The AVREG is enabled only on request by either the A/D converter or the
radio transceiver.
A simplified schematic of the internal voltage regulator is shown in Figure 12-4 below.
Figure 12-4. Simplified Schematic of AVREG/DVREG
Ban d gap
voltage
referen ce
1.25V
A V DD ,
D V D D
(D )EV D D
The voltage regulators require bypass capacitors for stable operation. The value of the
bypass capacitors determines their settling time. The bypass capacitors shall be placed
as close as possible to the pins and shall be connected to ground with the shortest
possible traces.
The voltage regulators can be configured with the register VREG_CTRL. It is
recommended to use the internal regulators but it is also possible to supply the low
voltage domains by an external voltage supply. For this configuration the internal
analog voltage regulator needs to be switched off by setting the register bit
AVREG_EXT = 1 (see "VREG_CTRL – Voltage Regulator Control and Status Register"
on page 127). The internal digital voltage regulator may not be switched off, an external
voltage has to overdrive the internal voltage. A regulated external supply voltage of
1.8V must then be connected to the pins 13, 14 (DVDD) and pin 29 (AVDD). When
turning on the external supply ensure a sufficiently long stabilization time before
interacting with the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
The status bits AVDD_OK = 1 and DVDD_OK = 1 of register VREG_CTRL indicate an
enabled and stable internal supply voltage. Reading value 0 indicates that the internal
supply voltage is disabled or not yet settled to the final value.
In case the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 is not supplied with a sufficient (D)EVDD and
the digital voltage regulator output voltage is too low, a power on reset (POR) is
initiated.
12.5.4 Low Leakage Voltage Regulator (LLVREG)
The main digital voltage regulator (DVREG) will be switched off during the
DEEP_SLEEP modes “power-down” and “power-save”. The Low Leakage Voltage
Regulator will then keep the digital supply voltage to provide data retention. No
application software control is required.
During the active power states, when the main voltage regulator supplies the chip, the
Low Leakage Voltage Regulator is digitally calibrated. Its output voltage is adjusted to
193
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
match the output voltage of the main regulator. This fixed calibration result is stored and
used when the chip enters a power-down state where the main regulator is switched off.
Because the calibration setting is fixed, temperature and load current variations during
the following DEEP_SLEEP period are not regulated out. Thus the output voltage may
drift away from the target value. However the design guarantees that for allowed
operating conditions the output voltage will stay within valid limits. After every wake-up
a new calibration cycle is initiated.
The output driving capability of the Low Leakage Voltage Regulator is limited. Its main
purpose is to provide the leakage current of the connected analog and digital blocks.
At least one full calibration cycle of the Low Leakage Voltage Regulator has to be
completed before the power-chain can be disabled. Therefore if the CPU uses one of
the DEEP_SLEEP modes “power down” or “power save”, the power-chain is not
disabled before the Low Leakage Voltage Regulator completed this first calibration
cycle.
By default the LLVREG automatically starts the calibration after finishing the power-on
reset and the wake-up/start-up procedures (see section "Low Leakage Voltage
Regulator Control" below for a detailed description of the Low Leakage Voltage
Regulator).
Notes: 1. The LLVREG calibration will be inaccurate at a DEVDD supply voltage of
1.8V or lower. Therefore when operating the device at 1.8V the LLVREG
calibration should be disabled and the register values of LLDRL and
LLDRH should be set to 0x06 and 0x0f, respectively.
2. When waking up from Deep Sleep mode the LLVREG calibration starts
after 4 clock cycles of the 128 kHz oscillator. If the device goes to sleep
again earlier then the old calibration values will be used.
12.5.5 Low Leakage Voltage Regulator Control
The three register LLCR, LLDRL and LLDRH allow the software to monitor the
calibration process and to modify or correct the calibration results. The automatic
calibration is the normal operation mode. It is an internal process that does not require
any software interaction. Nevertheless the calibration is transparent for the user through
LLCR, LLDRL and LLDRH (control and data register respectively).
The register access requires a minimum system clock of at least the output frequency
of the 128 kHz RC oscillator. The register access will not work if the system clock is
slower. See chapter "System Clock and Clock Options" on page 174 for details on how
to set the system clock frequency.
Before the device can enter the sleep mode “power down” or “power save” the first
calibration cycle of the Low Leakage Voltage Regulator must be completed to get valid
data in LLDRL and LLDRH. The cycle time tCAL (see Table 35-28 on page 555) is not
fixed. It depends on the temperature, manufacturing process and the frequency of the
128 kHz RC oscillator (independent of the Watchdog setting).
Systems that require very short power-up times may temporarily disable the calibration
process by setting bit LLENCAL to 0. After disabling the calibration the register values
read from LLCR, LLDRL and LLDRH will be stable after at most five 64 kHz clock
cycles (clock output of the 128 kHz RC oscillator divided by 2).
The output voltage of the Low Leakage Voltage Regulator in sleep mode will be the
most accurate if constantly calibrated to compensate for any environmental changes
(e.g. temperature). However these changes may be slow enough to skip the calibration
194
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
during some power-up cycles (e.g. calibrate only every 10th power-up time and use the
old calibration results during all other times).
After the completion of the power-up process the calibration will start automatically if bit
LLENCAL in the control register LLCR is 1 (default). The completion of a calibration
cycle is indicated by the bit LLDONE in that same register. After the first cycle the
calibration will continue to run until either the device goes into a sleep mode (“power
down” or “power save”) or by setting the LLENCAL bit to 0. The output voltage of the
Low Leakage Voltage Regulator is then defined by the values in the data register
LLDRL and LLDRH and by the bits LLTCO and LLSHORT of the control register.
Write access to the three register is granted when the bit LLENCAL is set to 0. The
application software can then modify the calibration results. Higher values in the data
register generate lower output voltages in the sleep modes. In general it is not
recommended nor required to alter the automatically generated calibration result.
The write access to the three register must follow a certain scheme to be successful.
The registers are implemented in the I/O clock domain while the logic of the Low
Leakage Voltage Regulator runs with 64 kHz (clock output of the 128 kHz RC oscillator
divided by 2). It takes at least two 64 kHz clock cycles before the data written to the
register take effect in the regulator circuit. The write access from the software must be
aware of this process. Furthermore the value of LLDRH must be written first followed by
LLDRL. Otherwise the LLDRH write access will be ignored. The following Assembler
code fragment shows a working example. Note the polling of bit 3 LLCAL of the LLCR
register to verify the completion of the synchronization process.
Assembly Code Example
…
clr r20
sts LLDRH,r18 ; write LLDRH first
sts LLDRL,r19 ; write LLDRL second
sts LLCR,r20 ; bit 0 cleared = disable automatic calibration
; poll LLCAL bit of LLCR to check if automatic calibration is
; turned of
wait_calib:
lds r20,LLCR
sbrc r20,3
rjmp wait_calib ; not executed if bit 3 of LLCR is cleared
…
12.6 Register Description
12.6.1 SMCR – Sleep Mode Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$33 ($53) Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 SM2 SM1 SM0 SE SMCR
Read/Write R R R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Sleep Mode Control Register contains control bits for power management.
• Bit 7:4 – Res3:0 - Reserved
• Bit 3:1 – SM2:0 - Sleep Mode Select bit 2
195
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
These bits select between the five available sleep modes. Standby modes are only
recommended for use with external crystals or resonators.
Table 12-103 SM Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
SM2:0 0x00 Idle
0x01 ADC Noise Reduction (If Available)
0x02 Power Down
0x03 Power Save
0x04 Reserved
0x05 Reserved
0x06 Standby
0x07 Extended Standby
• Bit 0 – SE - Sleep Enable
The SE bit must be written to logic one to make the MCU enter the sleep mode when
the SLEEP instruction is executed. To avoid the MCU entering the sleep mode unless it
is the programmers purpose, it is recommended to write the Sleep Enable (SE) bit to
one just before the execution of the SLEEP instruction and to clear it immediately after
waking up.
12.6.2 PRR0 – Power Reduction Register0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($64) PRTWI PRTIM2 PRTIM0 PRPGA PRTIM1 PRSPI PRUSART0
PRADC PRR0
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – PRTWI - Power Reduction TWI
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the TWI by stopping the clock to the module.
When waking up the TWI again, the TWI should be re initialized to ensure proper
operation.
• Bit 6 – PRTIM2 - Power Reduction Timer/Counter2
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter2 module. When the
Timer/Counter2 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 5 – PRTIM0 - Power Reduction Timer/Counter0
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter0 module. When the
Timer/Counter0 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 4 – PRPGA - Power Reduction PGA
Writing a logic one to this bit reduced the power consumption of the programmable gain
amplifier. The block is not turned off. Only the current levels in the amplifiers are
reduced. Reducing the PGA current levels is only recommended for slow ADC clock
frequencies. A new ADC conversion using the PGA should be delayed by a default
start-up time after changing (setting or resetting) this bit.
• Bit 3 – PRTIM1 - Power Reduction Timer/Counter1
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter1 module. When the
Timer/Counter1 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
196
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 2 – PRSPI - Power Reduction Serial Peripheral Interface
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Serial Peripheral Interface by stopping the
clock to the module. When waking up the SPI again, the SPI should be re initialized to
ensure proper operation.
• Bit 1 – PRUSART0 - Power Reduction USART
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the USART0 by stopping the clock to the
module. When waking up the USART0 again, the USART0 should be reinitialized to
ensure proper operation.
• Bit 0 – PRADC - Power Reduction ADC
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the ADC. The ADC must be disabled (reset
ADEN bit in register ADCSRA) before shut down. The analog comparator cannot use
the ADC input MUX when the ADC is shut down.
12.6.3 PRR1 – Power Reduction Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($65) Res PRTRX24
PRTIM5 PRTIM4 PRTIM3 PRUSART1
PRR1
Read/Write R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 6 – PRTRX24 - Power Reduction Transceiver
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the transceiver (disconnect from the power
supply). In power-down and power-save modes the power-chain will be disabled when
this bit is one. Writing a logic zero to this bit will re-enable the transceiver.
• Bit 5 – PRTIM5 - Power Reduction Timer/Counter5
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter5 module. When the
Timer/Counter5 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 4 – PRTIM4 - Power Reduction Timer/Counter4
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter4 module. When the
Timer/Counter4 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 3 – PRTIM3 - Power Reduction Timer/Counter3
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter3 module. When the
Timer/Counter3 is enabled, operation will continue like before the shutdown.
• Bit 0 – PRUSART1 - Power Reduction USART1
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the USART1 by stopping the clock to the
module. When waking up the USART1 again, the USART1 should be reinitialized to
ensure proper operation.
197
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
12.6.4 PRR2 – Power Reduction Register 2
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($63) Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PRRAM3
PRRAM2
PRRAM1
PRRAM0
PRR2
Read/Write R R R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Power Reduction Register PRR2 allows to individually disable all four SRAM
blocks. Setting any PRRAM3:0 bit to one will completely switch off (disconnect from the
power supply) the corresponding SRAM block. This enables the application to disable
unused SRAM memory to save power. Every SRAM block can be re-enabled by
reseting the appropriate PRRAM3:0 bit.
• Bit 7:4 – Res3:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3 – PRRAM3 - Power Reduction SRAM 3
Setting this bit to one will disable the SRAM block 3. Setting this bit to zero will enable
the SRAM block 3.
• Bit 2 – PRRAM2 - Power Reduction SRAM 2
Setting this bit to one will disable the SRAM block 2. Setting this bit to zero will enable
the SRAM block 2.
• Bit 1 – PRRAM1 - Power Reduction SRAM 1
Setting this bit to one will disable the SRAM block 1. Setting this bit to zero will enable
the SRAM block 1.
• Bit 0 – PRRAM0 - Power Reduction SRAM 0
Setting this bit to one will disable the SRAM block 0. Setting this bit to zero will enable
the SRAM block 0.
12.6.5 TRXPR – Transceiver Pin Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($139) Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 ATBE TRXTST
SLPTR TRXRST
TRXPR
Read/Write R R R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The register TRXPR allows to control basic actions of the radio transceiver like reset or
state transitions. The register bit functionality is inherited from the external pins of the
stand-alone radio transceiver.
• Bit 7:4 – Res3:0 - Reserved
• Bit 3 – ATBE - Analog Test-bus Enable
The analog test-bus can be enabled by setting this bit to one. The test-bus can only be
activated in the test-mode. Internal analog signals are then available at the TSTOP,
TSTON, TSIP and TSTIN pins.
• Bit 2 – TRXTST - Transceiver Test-mode Enable
The TRXTST bit enables the test-functionality of the transceiver. In addition the general
device test-mode must be enabled by applying the appropriate test-signature.
198
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 1 – SLPTR - Multi-purpose Transceiver Control Bit
The bit SLPTR is a multi-functional bit to control transceiver state transitions.
Dependent on the radio transceiver state, a rising edge of bit SLPTR causes the
following state transitions: TRX_OFF => SLEEP (level sensitive), PLL_ON =>
BUSY_TX. Whereas the falling edge of bit SLPTR causes the following state transition:
SLEEP => TRX_OFF (level sensitive). When the radio transceiver is in TRX_OFF state
the microcontroller forces the transceiver to SLEEP by setting SLPTR = H. The
Transceiver awakes when the microcontroller releases the bit SLPTR. In states
PLL_ON and TX_ARET_ON, bit SLPTR is used as trigger input to initiate a TX
transaction. Here SLPTR is sensitive on rising edge only. After initiating a state change
by a rising edge at Bit SLPTR in radio transceiver states TRX_OFF, RX_ON or
RX_AACK_ON, the radio transceiver remains in the new state as long as the pin is
logical high and returns to the preceding state with the falling edge.
• Bit 0 – TRXRST - Force Transceiver Reset
The RESET state is used to set back the state machine and to reset all registers of the
transceiver (except IRQ_MASK) to their default values. A reset forces the radio
transceiver into the TRX_OFF state and resets all transceiver register to their default
values. A reset is initiated with bit TRXRST = H. The bit is cleared automatically. During
transceiver reset the microcontroller has to set the radio transceiver control bit SLPTR
to the default value.
12.6.6 DRTRAM0 – Data Retention Configuration Register #0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($135) Res1 Res0 DRTSWOK
ENDRT DRTMP1
DRTMP0
DRTMN1
DRTMN0
DRTRAM0
Read/Write R R R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DRTRAM0 register controls the behavior of SRAM block #0 (ATmega256RF block
#0 and #1 in parallel) in the power-states "power-save" and "power-down". To prevent
any data loss the SRAM will not completely disconnected from the power supply.
Reserved bits will be overwritten during chip reset by the factory calibration and should
not be modified.
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved
• Bit 5 – DRTSWOK - DRT Switch OK
This bit indicates the status of the SRAM power-switch. A logical one indicates that the
SRAM supply voltage is fully available and the memory may be accessed normally.
• Bit 4 – ENDRT - Enable SRAM Data Retention
During "Deep-Sleep" each SRAM block will either be switched off or provides data
retention of its memory content. This bit must set to one if data retention mode should
be used. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the power supply)
and all its data are lost.
• Bit 3:2 – DRTMP1:0 - Positive Data Retention Voltage Setting
The bits DRTMP1:0 define the reduction of the positive supply voltage during data
retention (DRT) mode. A preprogrammed calibration value is automatically written to
this register during chip reset, giving the factory value. The DRT mode must be enabled
by setting ENDRT high. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the
power supply) and all its data are lost. The typical voltage reduction levels are shown in
the following table.
199
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 12-104 DRTMP Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DRTMP1:0 0 500 mV
1 425 mV
2 360 mV
3 < 5 mV
• Bit 1:0 – DRTMN1:0 - Negative Data Retention Voltage Setting
The bits DRTMN1:0 define the reduction of the negative supply voltage during data
retention (DRT) mode. A preprogrammed calibration value is automatically written to
this register during chip reset, giving the factory value. The DRT mode must be enabled
by setting ENDRT high. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the
power supply) and all its data are lost. The typical voltage reduction levels are shown in
the following table.
Table 12-105 DRTMN Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DRTMN1:0 0 525 mV
1 415 mV
2 325 mV
3 < 5 mV
12.6.7 DRTRAM1 – Data Retention Configuration Register #1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($134) Res1 Res0 DRTSWOK
ENDRT DRTMP1
DRTMP0
DRTMN1
DRTMN0
DRTRAM1
Read/Write R R R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DRTRAM1 register controls the behavior of SRAM block #1 (ATmega256RF block
#2 and #3 in parallel) in the power-states "power-save" and "power-down". To prevent
any data loss the SRAM will not completely disconnected from the power supply.
Reserved bits will be overwritten during chip reset by the factory calibration and should
not be modified.
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved
• Bit 5 – DRTSWOK - DRT Switch OK
This bit indicates the status of the SRAM power-switch. A logical one indicates that the
SRAM supply voltage is fully available and the memory may be accessed normally.
• Bit 4 – ENDRT - Enable SRAM Data Retention
During "Deep-Sleep" each SRAM block will either be switched off or provides data
retention of its memory content. This bit must set to one if data retention mode should
be used. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the power supply)
and all its data are lost.
• Bit 3:2 – DRTMP1:0 - Positive Data Retention Voltage Setting
The bits DRTMP1:0 define the reduction of the positive supply voltage during data
retention (DRT) mode. A preprogrammed calibration value is automatically written to
this register during chip reset, giving the factory value. The DRT mode must be enabled
by setting ENDRT high. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the
200
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
power supply) and all its data are lost. The typical voltage reduction levels are shown in
the following table.
Table 12-106 DRTMP Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DRTMP1:0 0 500 mV
1 425 mV
2 360 mV
3 < 5 mV
• Bit 1:0 – DRTMN1:0 - Negative Data Retention Voltage Setting
The bits DRTMN1:0 define the reduction of the negative supply voltage during data
retention (DRT) mode. A preprogrammed calibration value is automatically written to
this register during chip reset, giving the factory value. The DRT mode must be enabled
by setting ENDRT high. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the
power supply) and all its data are lost. The typical voltage reduction levels are shown in
the following table.
Table 12-107 DRTMN Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DRTMN1:0 0 525 mV
1 415 mV
2 325 mV
3 < 5 mV
12.6.8 DRTRAM2 – Data Retention Configuration Register #2
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($133) DISPC Res DRTSWOK
ENDRT DRTMP1
DRTMP0
DRTMN1
DRTMN0
DRTRAM2
Read/Write RW R R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DRTRAM2 register controls the behavior of SRAM block #2 (ATmega256RF block
#4 and #5 in parallel) in the power-states "power-save" and "power-down". To prevent
any data loss the SRAM will not completely disconnected from the power supply.
Reserved bits will be overwritten during chip reset by the factory calibration and should
not be modified.
• Bit 7 – DISPC - Disable Power-chain of SRAM 2
This bit allows to temporarily disable the power-chain of the SRAM block #2
(ATmega256RF block #4 and #5 in parallel) . In this way the block can be put into data
retention (DRT) mode to measure the DRT voltage levels. See section "SRAM DRT
Voltage Measurement" for details.
• Bit 6 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5 – DRTSWOK - DRT Switch OK
This bit indicates the status of the SRAM power-switch. A logical one indicates that the
SRAM supply voltage is fully available and the memory may be accessed normally.
201
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 4 – ENDRT - Enable SRAM Data Retention
During "Deep-Sleep" each SRAM block will either be switched off or provides data
retention of its memory content. This bit must set to one if data retention mode should
be used. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the power supply)
and all its data are lost.
• Bit 3:2 – DRTMP1:0 - Positive Data Retention Voltage Setting
The bits DRTMP1:0 define the reduction of the positive supply voltage during data
retention (DRT) mode. A preprogrammed calibration value is automatically written to
this register during chip reset, giving the factory value. The DRT mode must be enabled
by setting ENDRT high. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the
power supply) and all its data are lost. The typical voltage reduction levels are shown in
the following table.
Table 12-108 DRTMP Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DRTMP1:0 0 500 mV
1 425 mV
2 360 mV
3 < 5 mV
• Bit 1:0 – DRTMN1:0 - Negative Data Retention Voltage Setting
The bits DRTMN1:0 define the reduction of the negative supply voltage during data
retention (DRT) mode. A preprogrammed calibration value is automatically written to
this register during chip reset, giving the factory value. The DRT mode must be enabled
by setting ENDRT high. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the
power supply) and all its data are lost. The typical voltage reduction levels are shown in
the following table.
Table 12-109 DRTMN Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DRTMN1:0 0 525 mV
1 415 mV
2 325 mV
3 < 5 mV
12.6.9 DRTRAM3 – Data Retention Configuration Register #3
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($132) Res1 Res0 DRTSWOK
ENDRT DRTMP1
DRTMP0
DRTMN1
DRTMN0
DRTRAM3
Read/Write R R R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DRTRAM3 register controls the behavior of SRAM block #3 (ATmega256RF block
#6 and #7 in parallel) in the power-states "power-save" and "power-down". To prevent
any data loss the SRAM will not completely disconnected from the power supply.
Reserved bits will be overwritten during chip reset by the factory calibration and should
not be modified.
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved
• Bit 5 – DRTSWOK - DRT Switch OK
202
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This bit indicates the status of the SRAM power-switch. A logical one indicates that the
SRAM supply voltage is fully available and the memory may be accessed normally.
• Bit 4 – ENDRT - Enable SRAM Data Retention
During "Deep-Sleep" each SRAM block will either be switched off or provides data
retention of its memory content. This bit must set to one if data retention mode should
be used. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the power supply)
and all its data are lost.
• Bit 3:2 – DRTMP1:0 - Positive Data Retention Voltage Setting
The bits DRTMP1:0 define the reduction of the positive supply voltage during data
retention (DRT) mode. A preprogrammed calibration value is automatically written to
this register during chip reset, giving the factory value. The DRT mode must be enabled
by setting ENDRT high. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the
power supply) and all its data are lost. The typical voltage reduction levels are shown in
the following table.
Table 12-110 DRTMP Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DRTMP1:0 0 500 mV
1 425 mV
2 360 mV
3 < 5 mV
• Bit 1:0 – DRTMN1:0 - Negative Data Retention Voltage Setting
The bits DRTMN1:0 define the reduction of the negative supply voltage during data
retention (DRT) mode. A preprogrammed calibration value is automatically written to
this register during chip reset, giving the factory value. The DRT mode must be enabled
by setting ENDRT high. Otherwise the SRAM is switched off (disconnected from the
power supply) and all its data are lost. The typical voltage reduction levels are shown in
the following table.
Table 12-111 DRTMN Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
DRTMN1:0 0 525 mV
1 415 mV
2 325 mV
3 < 5 mV
12.6.10 LLCR – Low Leakage Voltage Regulator Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($12F) Res1 Res0 LLDONE
LLCOMP
LLCAL LLTCO LLSHORT
LLENCAL
LLCR
Read/Write R R R R R RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
This register allows to monitor and to control the calibration process of the low-leakage
voltage regulator. The automatic calibration is the normal operation mode. However,
certain circumstances may require to disable this automatic process for instance to
save power-up time. The results of the automatic calibration can also be modified when
required by the application for instance to get a higher or lower output voltage.
203
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5 – LLDONE - Calibration Done
This bit indicates the last state of the calibration algorithm. The data register contents is
updated with new calibration data after the bit changed to 1. The bit will only be high for
one 64kHz clock period, because a new calibration loop is started automatically.
• Bit 4 – LLCOMP - Comparator Output
This bit indicates the output state of the comparator of the low-leakage voltage
regulator. In this way the calibration progress can be directly monitored for debug
purposes. The state of the bit changes at most every 64kHz clock period.
• Bit 3 – LLCAL - Calibration Active
This bit indicates that the automatic calibration is in progress. The analog part of the
calibration circuit is powered up if the bit is 1.
• Bit 2 – LLTCO - Temperature Coefficient of Current Source
This bit shows the status of the selection of the temperature coefficient. The state of the
bit is updated in the course of the automatic calibration. A valid value is present after
the LLDONE bit is 1 for the first time. Write access is only enabled when the automatic
calibration is turned off (LLENCAL is 0). This bit should not be changed without further
information.
• Bit 1 – LLSHORT - Short Lower Calibration Circuit
This bit shows the status of the short switch for the lower calibration circuit. The state of
the bit is updated in the course of the automatic calibration. A valid value is present
after the LLDONE bit is 1 for the first time. If this bit is set to 1 register LLDRL has no
function. Write access is only possible when the automatic calibration is turned off
(LLENCAL is 0). This bit should not be changed without further information.
• Bit 0 – LLENCAL - Enable Automatic Calibration
This bit enables the automatic calibration. The automatic calibration runs if the state of
the bit is 1. Write access to the two data register and the bits LLSHORT and LLTCO is
then denied. If the state of LLENCAL is 0 then the calibration algorithm is stopped and
the output voltage of the low-leakage voltage regulator is defined by the values in the
two data register LLDRL and LLDRH and by the bits LLSHORT and LLTCO.
12.6.11 LLDRH – Low Leakage Voltage Regulator Data Register (High-Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($131) Res2 Res1 Res0 LLDRH4
LLDRH3
LLDRH2
LLDRH1
LLDRH0
LLDRH
Read/Write R R R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The high-byte of the calibration data can be accessed through this register. Write
access is only enabled when the bit LLENCAL of the LLCR register is 0. Then the data
bits LLDRH4:0 directly control the output voltage of the low-leakage voltage regulator.
Higher numbers generate lower voltages. If the bit LLENCAL is 1 then the results of the
automatic calibration are stored.
• Bit 7:5 – Res2:0 - Reserved
These bits are reserved for future use.
204
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 4:0 – LLDRH4:0 - High-Byte Data Register Bits
Value of the high-byte calibration result
Table 12-112 LLDRH Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
LLDRH4:0 0x00 Calibration limit for fast process corner/high
output voltage
0x10 Calibration limit for slow process corner/low
output voltage
12.6.12 LLDRL – Low Leakage Voltage Regulator Data Register (Low-Byte)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($130) Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 LLDRL3 LLDRL2 LLDRL1 LLDRL0
LLDRL
Read/Write R R R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The low-byte of the calibration data can be accessed through this register. Write access
is only enabled when the bit LLENCAL of the LLCR register is 0. Then the data bits
LLDRL3:0 directly control the output voltage of the low-leakage voltage regulator.
Higher numbers generate lower voltages. The contents of this register is meaningless
when the bit LLSHORT of the LLCR register is 1. If the bit LLENCAL is 1 then the
results of the automatic calibration are stored.
• Bit 7:4 – Res3:0 - Reserved
These bits are reserved for future use.
• Bit 3:0 – LLDRL3:0 - Low-Byte Data Register Bits
Value of the low-byte calibration result
Table 12-113 LLDRL Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
LLDRL3:0 0x00 Calibration limit for fast process corner/high
output voltage
0x08 Calibration limit for slow process corner/low
output voltage
12.6.13 DPDS0 – Port Driver Strength Register 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($136) PFDRV1
PFDRV0
PEDRV1
PEDRV0
PDDRV1
PDDRV0
PBDRV1
PBDRV0
DPDS0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The output driver strength can be set individually for each digital I/O port. The following
tables show output current levels for a typical supply voltage of DEVDD = 3.3V. Refer to
section "Electrical Characteristics" for details.
• Bit 7:6 – PFDRV1:0 - Driver Strength Port F
205
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 12-114 PFDRV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PFDRV1:0 0 2 mA
1 4 mA
2 6 mA
3 8 mA
• Bit 5:4 – PEDRV1:0 - Driver Strength Port E
Table 12-115 PEDRV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PEDRV1:0 0 2 mA
1 4 mA
2 6 mA
3 8 mA
• Bit 3:2 – PDDRV1:0 - Driver Strength Port D
Table 12-116 PDDRV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PDDRV1:0 0 2 mA
1 4 mA
2 6 mA
3 8 mA
• Bit 1:0 – PBDRV1:0 - Driver Strength Port B
Table 12-117 PBDRV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PBDRV1:0 0 2 mA
1 4 mA
2 6 mA
3 8 mA
12.6.14 DPDS1 – Port Driver Strength Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($137) Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PGDRV1
PGDRV0
DPDS1
Read/Write R R R R R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The output driver strength can be set individually for each digital I/O port. The following
table shows output current levels for a typical supply voltage of DEVDD = 3.3V. Refer to
section "Electrical Characteristics" for details.
• Bit 7:2 – Res5:0 - Reserved
• Bit 1:0 – PGDRV1:0 - Driver Strength Port G
Driver strength can be set for port G except the port pins PG3 and PG4. The leakage
current of the ports PG3 and PG4 is reduced.
206
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 12-118 PGDRV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PGDRV1:0 0 2 mA
1 4 mA
2 6 mA
3 8 mA
207
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
13 System Control and Reset
13.1 Resetting the AVR
During reset, all I/O Registers are set to their initial values, and the program starts
execution from the Reset Vector. The instruction placed at the Reset Vector must be a
JMP – Absolute Jump – instruction to the reset handling routine. If the program never
enables an interrupt source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program
code can be placed at these locations. This is also the case if the Reset Vector is in the
Application section while the Interrupt Vectors are in the Boot section or vice versa. The
circuit diagram in Figure 13-1 on page 208 shows the reset logic."System and Reset
Characteristics" on page 553 defines the electrical parameters of the reset circuitry.
The I/O ports of the AVR are immediately reset to their initial state when a reset source
goes active. This does not require any clock source to be running.
After all reset sources have gone inactive, a delay counter is invoked, stretching the
internal reset. This allows the power to reach a stable level before normal operation
starts. The time-out period of the delay counter is defined by the user through the SUT
and CKSEL Fuses. The different selections for the delay period are presented in "Clock
Sources" on page 175.
13.2 Reset Sources
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 has five sources of reset:
• Power-on Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the Power-on
Reset threshold (VPOT).
• External Reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RSTN pin for
longer than the minimum pulse length.
• Watchdog Reset. The MCU is reset when the Watchdog Timer period expires and
the Watchdog is enabled.
• Brown-out Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage EVDD is below the
Brown-out Reset threshold (VBOT) and the Brown-out Detector is enabled.
• JTAG AVR Reset. The MCU is reset as long as there is a logic one in the Reset
Register, one of the scan chains of the JTAG system. Refer to the section "IEEE
1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan" on page 476 for details.
208
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 13-1. Reset Logic
EVDD
RSTN
Delay Counters
S Q
R
MCU Status
Register (MCUSR)
BODLEVEL [2..0]
CKSEL[3:0]
CK
TIMEOUT
WDRF
BORF
EXTRF
DATA BUS
SPIKE
FILTER
Pull-up Resistor
JTRF
SUT[1:0]
JTAG Reset
Register
Brown-out
Reset Circuit
Power-on
Reset Circuit
Reset Circuit
Watchdog
Timer
Watchdog
Oscillator
Clock
Generator
INTERNAL RESET
COUNTER RESET
PORF
DEVDD
13.2.1 Power-on Reset
A Power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by a dynamic, on-chip detection circuit.
The POR is active when DEVDD is rising. The electrical characteristics are defined in
"System and Reset Characteristics" on page 553. The POR circuit can be used to
trigger the start-up reset. To detect a failure in the supply voltage (e.g. a voltage drop)
the brown-own detector should be used.
A Power-on Reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is reset from Power-on.
Reaching the Power-on Reset threshold voltage invokes the delay counter, which
determines how long the device is kept in RESET after the DEVDD rise. The RESET
signal is activated again without any delay, when DEVDD decreases below the
detection level.
Figure 13-2. MCU Start-up, RSTN Tied to DEVDD
DEVDD
RSTN
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
VPOT
VRST
tTOUT
209
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 13-3. MCU Start-up, RSTN Extended Externally
VCC
RSTN
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
VPOT
VRST
tTOUT
13.2.2 External Reset
An External Reset is generated by a low level on the RSTN pin. Reset pulses longer
than the minimum pulse width (see "System and Reset Characteristics" on page 553)
will generate a reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed
to generate a reset. When the applied signal reaches the Reset Threshold Voltage –
VRST – on its positive edge, the delay counter starts the MCU after the Time-out period –
tTOUT – has expired.
Figure 13-4. Reset During Operation
DEVDD
RSTN
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
tTOUT
VRST
13.2.3 Brown-out Detection
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 has an On-chip Brown-out Detection (BOD) circuit for
monitoring the EVDD level during operation by comparing it to a fixed trigger level. The
trigger level for the BOD can be selected by the BODLEVEL Fuses. The trigger level
has a hysteresis to ensure spike free Brown-out Detection. The hysteresis on the
detection level should be interpreted as VBOT+ = VBOT + VHYST/2 and VBOT-= VBOT -
VHYST/2.
When the BOD is enabled, and EVDD decreases to a value below the trigger level
(VBOT- in Figure 13-5 on page 210), the Brown-out Reset is immediately activated. When
EVDD increases above the trigger level (VBOT+ in Figure 13-5 on page 210), the delay
counter starts the MCU after the Time-out period tTOUT has expired.
The BOD circuit will only detect a drop in EVDD if the voltage stays below the trigger
level for longer than tBOD given in "System and Reset Characteristics" on page 553.
210
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 13-5. Brown-out Reset During Operation
EVDD
RSTN
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
tTOUT
VBOT-
VBOT+
13.2.4 Watchdog Reset
When the Watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of one CK cycle
duration. On the falling edge of this pulse, the delay timer starts counting the Time-out
period tTOUT. See "Watchdog Timer" on page 211. for details on operation of the
Watchdog Timer.
Figure 13-6. Watchdog Reset During Operation
DEVDD
RSTN
RESET
TIME-OUT
INTERNAL
RESET
tTOUT
1 CK Cycle
WDT
TIME-OUT
13.3 Internal Voltage Reference
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 features an internal bandgap reference. This reference is
used for Brown-out Detection, and it can be used as an input to the Analog Comparator
or the ADC.
Voltage Reference Enable Signals and Start-up Time
The voltage reference has a start-up time that may influence the way it should be used.
The start-up time is given in "System and Reset Characteristics" on page 553. To save
power, the reference is not always turned on. The reference is on during the following
situations:
1. When the BOD is enabled (by programming the BODLEVEL [2:0] Fuse).
2. When the bandgap reference is connected to the Analog Comparator (by setting the
ACBG bit in ACSR).
3. When the ADC is enabled.
Thus, when the BOD is not enabled, after setting the ACBG bit or enabling the ADC,
the user must always allow the reference to start up before the output from the Analog
Comparator or ADC is used. To reduce power consumption in Power-down mode, the
user can avoid the three conditions above to ensure that the reference is turned off
before entering Power-down mode.
211
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
13.4 Watchdog Timer
13.4.1 Features
• Clocked from separate On-chip Oscillator
• 3 Operating modes
- Interrupt
- System Reset
- Interrupt and System Reset
• Selectable Time-out period from 16ms to 8s
• Possible Hardware fuse Watchdog always on (WDTON) for fail-safe mode
Figure 13-7. Watchdog Timer
128kHz
OSCILLATOR
OSC/2K
OSC/4K
OSC/8K
OSC/16K
OSC/32K
OSC/64K
OSC/128K
OSC/256K
OSC/512K
OSC/1024K
WDP0
WDP1
WDP2
WDP3
WATCHDOG
RESET
WDE
WDIF
WDIE
MCU RESET
INTERRUPT
13.4.2 Overview
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 has an Enhanced Watchdog Timer (WDT). The WDT is a
timer counting cycles of a separate on-chip 128 kHz oscillator. The WDT gives an
interrupt or a system reset when the counter reaches a given time-out value. In normal
operation mode, it is required that the system uses the WDR -Watchdog Timer Reset -
instruction to restart the counter before the time-out value is reached. If the system
doesn't restart the counter, an interrupt or system reset will be issued.
In Interrupt mode, the WDT gives an interrupt when the timer expires. This interrupt can
be used to wake the device from sleep-modes, and also as a general system timer.
One example is to limit the maximum time allowed for certain operations, giving an
interrupt when the operation has run longer than expected. In System Reset mode, the
WDT gives a reset when the timer expires. This is typically used to prevent system
hang-up in case of runaway code. The third mode, Interrupt and System Reset mode,
combines the other two modes by first giving an interrupt and then switch to System
Reset mode. This mode will for instance allow a safe shutdown by saving critical
parameters before a system reset.
The Watchdog always on (WDTON) fuse, if programmed, will force the Watchdog Timer
to System Reset mode. With the fuse programmed the System Reset mode bit (WDE)
and Interrupt mode bit (WDIE) are locked to 1 and 0 respectively. To further ensure
212
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
program security, alterations to the Watchdog set-up must follow timed sequences. The
sequence for clearing WDE and changing time-out configuration is as follows:
1. In the same operation, write a logic one to the Watchdog change enable bit (WDCE)
and WDE. A logic one must be written to WDE regardless of the previous value of
the WDE bit.
2. Within the next four clock cycles, write the WDE and Watchdog prescaler bits (WDP)
as desired, but with the WDCE bit cleared. This must be done in one operation.
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for turning off the
Watchdog Timer. The example assumes that interrupts are controlled (e.g. by disabling
interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during the execution of these
functions.
Assembly Code Example, Disable Watchdog Timer(1)
WDT_off:
; Turn off global interrupt
cli
; Reset Watchdog Timer
wdr
; Clear WDRF in MCUSR
in r16, MCUSR
andi r16, (0xff & (0<<WDRF))
out MCUSR, r16
; Write logical one to WDCE and WDE
; Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional time-out
lds r16, WDTCSR
ori r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; Turn off WDT
ldi r16, (0<<WDE)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; Turn on global interrupt
sei
ret
C Code Example, Disable Watchdog Timer (1)
void WDT_off(void)
{
disable_interrupt();
watchdog_reset();
/* Clear WDRF in MCUSR*/
MCUSR &= ~(1<<WDRF);
/* Write logical one to WDCE and WDE */
/* Keep old prescaler setting to prevent unintentional time-out */
WDTCSR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);
/* Turn off WDT */
WDTCSR = 0x00;
__enable_interrupt();
}
213
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Note: 1. The example code assumes that the part specific header file is included.
If the Watchdog is accidentally enabled, for example by a runaway pointer or brown-out
condition, the device will be reset and the Watchdog Timer will stay enabled. If the code
is not set up to handle the Watchdog, this might lead to an eternal loop of time-out
resets. To avoid this situation, the application software should always clear the
Watchdog System Reset Flag (WDRF) and the WDE control bit in the initialization
routine, even if the Watchdog is not in use.
The following code example shows one assembly and one C function for changing the
time-out value of the Watchdog Timer.
Assembly Code Example, Prescaler Change(1,2)
WDT_Prescaler_Change:
; Turn off global interrupt
cli
; Reset Watchdog Timer
wdr
; Start timed sequence
lds r16, WDTCSR
ori r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; --Got four cycles to set the new values from here –
; Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s)
ldi r16, (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; --Finished setting new values, used 2 cycles –
; Turn on global interrupt
sei
ret
C Code Example, Prescaler Change(1,2)
void WDT_Prescaler_Change(void)
{
__disable_interrupt();
__watchdog_reset();
/* Start timed sequence */
WDTCSR |= (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);
/* Set new prescaler(time-out) value = 64K cycles (~0.5 s) */
WDTCSR = (1<<WDE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0);
__enable_interrupt();
}
Note: 1. The example code assumes that the part specific header file is included.
2. The Watchdog Timer should be reset before any change of the WDP
bits, since a change in the WDP bits can result in a time-out when
switching to a shorter time-out period.
When using the Watchdog Timer in Interrupt Mode the WDIE bit must be used as
shown in the following code example.
214
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Assembly Code Example, Interrupt Mode(1,2)
WDT_Interrupt_Mode:
; Turn off global interrupt
cli
; Reset Watchdog Timer
wdr
; Start timed sequence, use WDCE and WDE bits
ldi r16, (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; --Got four cycles to set the new values from here –
; Use WDIE bit to set new time-out value (64K cycles ~0.5 s)
ldi r16, (1<<WDIF) | (1<<WDIE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0)
sts WDTCSR, r16
; --Finished setting new values, used 2 cycles –
; Turn on global interrupt
sei
ret
C Code Example, Interrupt Mode(1,2)
void WDT_Interrupt_Mode(void)
{
__disable_interrupt();
__watchdog_reset();
/* Start timed sequence, use WDCE and WDE bits*/
WDTCSR = (1<<WDCE) | (1<<WDE);
/* Use WDIE bit to set time-out value (64k cycles ~0.5 s) */
WDTCSR = (1<<WDIF) | (1<<WDIE) | (1<<WDP2) | (1<<WDP0);
__enable_interrupt();
}
Note: 1. The example code assumes that the part specific header file is included.
2. The Watchdog Timer should be reset before any change of the WDP
bits, since a change in the WDP bits can result in a time-out when
switching to a shorter time-out period.
To clear any pending old Watchdog interrupt the WDIF bit is written to one together with
the WDIE bit.
13.5 Register Description
13.5.1 MCUSR – MCU Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$34 ($54) Res2 Res1 Res0 JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF MCUSR
Read/Write R R R RW R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU
reset. To make use of the Reset Flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read
and then Reset the MCUSR as early as possible in the program. If the register is
215
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
cleared before another reset occurs, the source of the reset can be found by examining
the Reset Flags. Note, after power on the bit EXTRF has to be ignored.
• Bit 7:5 – Res2:0 - Reserved
• Bit 4 – JTRF - JTAG Reset Flag
This bit is set if a reset is being caused by a logic one in the JTAG Reset Register
selected by the JTAG instruction AVR_RESET. This bit is reset by a Power-on Reset,
or by writing a logic zero to the flag.
• Bit 3 – WDRF - Watchdog Reset Flag
This bit is set if a Watchdog Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by
writing a logic zero to the flag.
• Bit 2 – BORF - Brown-out Reset Flag
This bit is set if a Brown-out Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by
writing a logic zero to the flag.
• Bit 1 – EXTRF - External Reset Flag
This bit is set if an External Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by
writing a logic zero to the flag.
• Bit 0 – PORF - Power-on Reset Flag
This bit is set if a Power-on Reset occurs. The bit is reset only by writing a logic zero to
the flag.
13.5.2 WDTCSR – Watchdog Timer Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($60) WDIF WDIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 WDTCSR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – WDIF - Watchdog Timeout Interrupt Flag
This bit is set when a time-out occurs in the Watchdog Timer and the Watchdog Timer
is configured for interrupt. WDIF is cleared by hardware when executing the
corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, WDIF is cleared by writing a logic
one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG and WDIE are set, the Watchdog Time-out
Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 6 – WDIE - Watchdog Timeout Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the Watchdog
Interrupt is enabled. If WDE is cleared in combination with this setting, the Watchdog
Timer is in Interrupt Mode, and the corresponding interrupt is executed if time-out in the
Watchdog Timer occurs. If WDE is set, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt and System
Reset Mode. The first time-out in the Watchdog Timer will set WDIF. Executing the
corresponding interrupt vector will clear WDIE and WDIF automatically by hardware
(the Watchdog goes to System Reset Mode). This is useful for keeping the Watchdog
Timer security while using the interrupt. To stay in Interrupt and System Reset Mode,
WDIE must be set after each interrupt. This should however not be done within the
interrupt service routine itself, as this might compromise the safety-function of the
Watchdog System Reset mode. If the interrupt is not executed before the next time-out,
a System Reset will be applied.
216
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 13-1. Watchdog Timer Configuration
WDTON(1) WDE WDIE Mode Action on Time-out
1 0 0 Stopped None
1 0 1 Interrupt Mode Interrupt
1 1 0 System Reset Mode Reset
1 1 1 Interrupt and System
Reset Mode
Interrupt, then go to
System Reset Mode
0 x x System Reset Mode Reset
Note: 1. WDTON Fuse set to “0“ means programmed and “1” means un-programmed.
• Bit 4 – WDCE - Watchdog Change Enable
This bit is used in timed sequences for changing WDE and prescaler bits. To clear the
WDE bit, and/or change the prescaler bits, WDCE must be set. Once written to one,
hardware will clear WDCE after four clock cycles.
• Bit 3 – WDE - Watch Dog Enable
When the WDE is set (one) the Watchdog Timer is enabled. WDE is overridden by
WDRF in MCUSR. This means that WDE is always set when WDRF is set. To clear
WDE, WDRF must be cleared first. This feature ensures multiple resets during
conditions causing failure, and a safe start-up after the failure.
• Bit 5, 2:0 – WDP3:0 – Watchdog Timer Prescaler 3, 2, 1 and 0
The WDP3:0 bits determine the Watchdog Timer prescaling when the Watchdog Timer
is running. The following table also shows approximate time-out values.
Table 13-2. WDP Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WDP3:0 0x00 Oscillator Cycles 2k, (16ms)
0x01 Oscillator Cycles 4k, (32ms)
0x02 Oscillator Cycles 8k, (64ms)
0x03 Oscillator Cycles 16k, (0.125s)
0x04 Oscillator Cycles 32k, (0.25s)
0x05 Oscillator Cycles 64k, (0.5s)
0x06 Oscillator Cycles 128k, (1.0s)
0x07 Oscillator Cycles 256k, (2.0s)
0x08 Oscillator Cycles 512k, (4.0s)
0x09 Oscillator Cycles 1024k, (8.0s)
217
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
14 I/O-Ports
14.1 Introduction
All ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 ports have true Read-Modify-Write functionality when
used as general digital I/O ports. This means that the direction of one port pin can be
changed without unintentionally changing the direction of any other pin with the SBI and
CBI instructions. The same applies when changing drive value (if configured as output)
or enabling/disabling of pull-up resistors (if configured as input). Each output buffer has
symmetrical drive characteristics with both configurable sink and source capability.
Every port is individually configurable in four different drive strengths. The pin driver is
strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins have individually selectable
pull-up resistors with a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O pins have protection
diodes to both DEVDD and DVSS as indicated in Figure 14-1 below. Refer to "Electrical
Characteristics" on page 550 for a complete list of parameters.
Figure 14-1. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic
All registers and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case
“x” represents the numbering letter for the port, and a lower case “n” represents the bit
number. However, when using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form
must be used. For example, PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Port B, here documented generally
as PORTxn.
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the Data
Register – PORTx, Data Direction Register – DDRx, and the Port Input Pins – PINx.
The Port Input Pins I/O location is read only, while the Data Register and the Data
Direction Register are read/write. However, writing a logic one to a bit in the PINx
Register, will result in a toggle in the corresponding bit in the Data Register. In addition,
the Pull-up Disable – PUD bit in MCUCR disables the pull-up function for all pins in all
ports when set.
Using the I/O port as General Digital I/O is described in "Ports as General Digital I/O"
on page 218. Most port pins are multiplexed with alternate functions for the peripheral
features on the device. How each alternate function interferes with the port pin is
described in "Alternate Port Functions" on page 222. Refer to the individual module
sections for a full description of the alternate functions.
Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not affect the use
of the other pins in the port as general digital I/O.
218
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
14.2 Ports as General Digital I/O
The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 14-2 below
shows a functional description of one I/O-port pin, here generically called Pxn.
Figure 14-2. General Digital I/O(1)
DPDS0/DPDS1
DPDS0/DPDS1: drive strength register
Note: 1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port.
clkI/O, SLEEP, and PUD are common to all ports.
14.2.1 Configuring the Port
Drive strength of output buffers is configurable port-wise. Source/sink capably of 2mA,
4mA, 6mA or 8mA is selectable through registers DPDS1 and DPDS0. Note that pins
PG3 and PG4 of PORTG have fixed drive strength of 2mA to enable the operation of
the low power crystal oscillator.
14.2.2 Configuring the Pin
Each port pin consists of three register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, and PINxn. The DDxn bits
are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the PORTxn bits at the PORTx I/O address,
and the PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address.
The DDxn bit in the DDRx Register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written
logic one, Pxn is configured as an output pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is
configured as an input pin.
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an input pin, the pull-up
resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTxn has to be written logic
zero or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The port pins are tri-stated when
reset condition becomes active, even if no clocks are running.
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin
is driven high (one). If PORTxn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an
output pin, the port pin is driven low (zero).
219
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
14.2.3 Toggling the Pin
Writing a logic one to PINxn toggles the value of PORTxn, independent on the value of
DDRxn. Note that the SBI instruction can be used to toggle one single bit in a port.
14.2.4 Switching Between Input and Output
When switching between tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) and output high ({DDxn,
PORTxn} = 0b11), an intermediate state with either pull-up enabled {DDxn, PORTxn} =
0b01) or output low ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b10) must occur. Normally, the pull-up
enabled state is fully acceptable, as a high-impedance environment will not notice the
difference between a strong high driver and a pull-up. If this is not the case, the PUD bit
in the MCUCR Register can be set to disable all pull-ups in all ports.
Switching between input with pull-up and output low generates the same problem. The
user must use either the tri-state ({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b00) or the output high state
({DDxn, PORTxn} = 0b11) as an intermediate step.
The following table summarizes the control signals for the pin value.
Table 14-1. Port Pin Configurations
DDxn
PORTxn
PUD
(in MCUCR)
I/O Pull-up Comment
0 0 X Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z)
0 1 0 Input Yes Pxn will source current if ext. pulled low.
0 1 1 Input No Tri-state (Hi-Z)
1 0 X Output No Output Low (Sink)
1 1 X Output No Output High (Source)
14.2.5 Reading the Pin Value
Independent of the setting of Data Direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through
the PINxn Register bit. As shown in Figure 14-2 on page 218, the PINxn Register bit
and the preceding latch constitute a synchronizer. This is needed to avoid meta-stability
if the physical pin changes value near the edge of the internal clock, but it also
introduces a delay. Figure 14-3 on page 220 shows a timing diagram of the
synchronization when reading an externally applied pin value. The maximum and
minimum propagation delays are denoted tPD,MAX and tPD,MIN respectively.
220
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 14-3. Synchronization when reading an external applied pin value
Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock.
The latch is closed when the clock is low, and goes transparent when the clock is high,
as indicated by the shaded region of the “SYNC LATCH” signal. The signal value is
latched when the system clock goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn Register at the
succeeding positive clock edge. As indicated by the two arrows tPD,MAX and tPD,MIN, a
single signal transition on the pin will be delayed between ½ and 1½ system clock
period depending upon the time of assertion.
When reading back a software assigned pin value, a NOP instruction must be inserted
as indicated in Figure 14-4 below. The out instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at
the positive edge of the clock. In this case, the delay tPD through the synchronizer is 1
system clock period.
Figure 14-4. Synchronization when reading software assigned pin value
The following code example shows how to set port B pins 0 and 1 high, 2 and 3 low,
and define the port pins from 4 to 7 as input with pull-ups assigned to port pins 6 and 7.
The resulting pin values are read back again, but as previously discussed, a NOP
instruction is included to be able to read back the value recently assigned to some of
the pins.
221
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Assembly Code Example(1)
…
; Define pull-ups and set outputs high
; Define directions for port pins
ldi r16,(1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0)
ldi r17,(1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0)
out PORTB,r16
out DDRB,r17
; Insert nop for synchronization
nop
; Read port pins
in r16,PINB
…
C Code Example
unsigned char i;
…
/* Define pull-ups and set outputs high */
/* Define directions for port pins */
PORTB = (1<<PB7)|(1<<PB6)|(1<<PB1)|(1<<PB0);
DDRB = (1<<DDB3)|(1<<DDB2)|(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0);
/* Insert nop for synchronization*/
__no_operation();
/* Read port pins */
i = PINB;
…
Note: 1. For the assembly program, two temporary registers are used to minimize the time
from pull-ups are set on pins 0, 1, 6, and 7, until the direction bits are correctly set,
defining bit 2 and 3 as low and redefining bits 0 and 1 as strong high drivers.
14.2.6 Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes
As shown in Figure 14-2 on page 218, the digital input signal can be clamped to ground
at the input of the Schmitt-Trigger. The signal denoted SLEEP in the figure, is set by the
MCU Sleep Controller in Power-down mode, Power-save mode, and Standby mode to
avoid high power consumption if some input signals are left floating, or have an analog
signal level close to VDEVDD/2.
SLEEP is overridden for port pins enabled as external interrupt pins. If the external
interrupt request is not enabled, SLEEP is active also for these pins. SLEEP is also
overridden by various other alternate functions as described in "Alternate Port
Functions" on page 222.
If a logic high level (“one”) is present on an asynchronous external interrupt pin
configured as “Interrupt on Rising Edge, Falling Edge, or Any Logic Change on Pin”
while the external interrupt is not enabled, the corresponding External Interrupt Flag will
be set when resuming from the above mentioned Sleep mode, as the clamping in these
sleep mode produces the requested logic change.
14.2.7 Unconnected Pins
If some pins are unused, it is recommended to ensure that these pins have a defined
level. Even though most of the digital inputs are disabled in the deep sleep modes as
222
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
described above, floating inputs should be avoided to reduce current consumption in all
other modes where the digital inputs are enabled (Reset-, Active- and Idle-mode).
The simplest method to ensure a defined level of an unused pin is to enable the internal
pull-up. In this case, the pull-up will be disabled during reset. If low power consumption
during reset is important, it is recommended to use an external pull-up or pull-down.
Connecting unused pins directly to DEVDD or DVSS is not recommended, since this
may cause excessive currents if the pin is accidentally configured as an output.
14.3 Alternate Port Functions
Most port pins have alternate functions in addition to being general digital I/O ports.
Figure 14-5 below shows how the port pin control signals from the simplified Figure
14-2 on page 218 can be overridden by alternate functions. The overriding signals may
not be present in all port pins, but the figure serves as a generic description applicable
to all port pins in the AVR microcontroller family.
Figure 14-5. Alternate Port Functions (1)
223
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Note: 1. WRx, WPx, WDx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port.
clkI/O, SLEEP, and PUD are common to all ports. All other signals are unique for
each pin.
The following table summarizes the function of the overriding signals. The pin and port
indexes from Figure 14-5 on page 222 are not shown in the succeeding tables. The
overriding signals are generated internally in the modules having the alternate function.
Table 14-2. Generic Description of Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions
Signal Name Full Name Description
PUOE Pull-up Override
Enable
If this signal is set, the pull-up enable is controlled by
the PUOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the pull-up is
enabled when {DDxn, PORTxn, PUD} = 0b010.
PUOV Pull-up Override
Value
If PUOE is set, the pull-up is enabled/disabled when
PUOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the
DDxn, PORTxn, and PUD Register bits.
DDOE Data Direction
Override Enable
If this signal is set, the Output Driver Enable is
controlled by the DDOV signal. If this signal is cleared,
the Output driver is enabled by the DDxn Register bit.
DDOV Data Direction
Override Value
If DDOE is set, the Output Driver is enabled/disabled
when DDOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of
the DDxn Register bit.
PVOE Port Value Override
Enable
If this signal is set and the Output Driver is enabled, the
port value is controlled by the PVOV signal. If PVOE is
cleared, and the Output Driver is enabled, the port
Value is controlled by the PORTxn Register bit.
PVOV Port Value Override
Value
If PVOE is set, the port value is set to PVOV,
regardless of the setting of the PORTxn Register bit.
PTOE Port Toggle Override
Enable
If PTOE is set, the PORTxn Register bit is inverted.
DIEOE Digital Input Enable
Override Enable
If this bit is set, the Digital Input Enable is controlled by
the DIEOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Digital
Input Enable is determined by MCU state (Normal
mode, sleep mode).
DIEOV Digital Input Enable
Override Value
If DIEOE is set, the Digital Input is enabled/disabled
when DIEOV is set/cleared, regardless of the MCU
state (Normal mode, sleep mode).
DI Digital Input This is the Digital Input to alternate functions. In the
figure, the signal is connected to the output of the
Schmitt-Trigger but before the synchronizer. Unless the
Digital Input is used as a clock source, the module with
the alternate function will use its own synchronizer.
AIO Analog Input/Output This is the Analog Input/output to/from alternate
functions. The signal is connected directly to the pad,
and can be used bi-directionally.
The following subsections shortly describe the alternate functions for each port, and
relate the overriding signals to the alternate function. Refer to the alternate function
description for further details.
14.3.1 Alternate Functions of Port B
The Port B pins with alternate functions are shown in the following table.
224
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 14-3. Port B Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin Alternate Functions
PB7 OC0A/OC1C/PCINT7 (Output Compare and PWM Output A for
Timer/Counter0, Output Compare and PWM Output C for Timer/Counter1 or
Pin Change Interrupt 7)
PB6 OC1B/PCINT6 (Output Compare and PWM Output B for Timer/Counter1 or
Pin Change Interrupt 6)
PB5 OC1A/PCINT5 (Output Compare and PWM Output A for Timer/Counter1 or
Pin Change Interrupt 5)
PB4 OC2A/PCINT4 (Output Compare and PWM Output A for Timer/Counter2 or
Pin Change Interrupt 4)
PB3 MISO/PDO/PCINT3 (SPI Bus Master Input/Slave Output, Programming Data
Output or Pin Change Interrupt 3)
PB2 MOSI/PDI/PCINT2 (SPI Bus Master Output/Slave Input , Programming Data
Input or Pin Change Interrupt 2)
PB1 SCK/PCINT1 (SPI Bus Serial Clock or Pin Change Interrupt 1)
PB0 SS¯ ¯ /PCINT0 (SPI Slave Select input or Pin Change Interrupt 0)
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:
• OC0A/OC1C/PCINT7, Bit 7
OC0A, Output Compare Match A output: The PB7 pin can serve as an external output
for the Timer/Counter0 Output Compare. The pin has to be configured as an output
(DDB7 set “one”) to serve this function. The OC0A pin is also the output pin for the
PWM mode timer function.
OC1C, Output Compare Match C output: The PB7 pin can serve as an external output
for the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare C. The pin has to be configured as an output
(DDB7 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC1C pin is also the output pin for the
PWM mode timer function.
PCINT7, Pin Change Interrupt source 7: The PB7 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• OC1B/PCINT6, Bit 6
OC1B, Output Compare Match B output: The PB6 pin can serve as an external output
for the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare B. The pin has to be configured as an output
(DDB6 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC1B pin is also the output pin for the
PWM mode timer function.
PCINT6, Pin Change Interrupt source 6: The PB6 pin can serve as an external interrupt
sourceOC1A, Output Compare Match A output: The PB5 pin can serve as an external
output for the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare A. The pin has to be configured as an
output (DDB5 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC1A pin is also the output pin for
the PWM mode timer function.
PCINT5, Pin Change Interrupt source 5: The PB5 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• OC2A/PCINT4, Bit 4
OC2A, Output Compare Match output: The PB4 pin can serve as an external output for
the Timer/Counter2 Output Compare. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB4
set (one)) to serve this function. The OC2A pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode
timer function.
2
25
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
PCINT4, Pin Change Interrupt source 4: The PB4 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• MISO/PDO/PCINT3 – Port B, Bit 3
MISO: Master Data input, Slave Data output pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is
enabled as a master, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of
DDB3. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, the data direction of this pin is controlled by
DDB3. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the
PORTB3 bit.
PDO, SPI Serial Programming Data Output. During Serial Program Downloading, this
pin is used as data output line (see section "Serial Downloading" on page 519 for
details).
PCINT3, Pin Change Interrupt source 3: The PB3 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• MOSI/PDI/PCINT2 – Port B, Bit 2
MOSI: SPI Master Data output, Slave Data input for SPI channel. When the SPI is
enabled as a slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB2.
When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by
DDB2. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the
PORTB2 bit.
PDI, SPI Serial Programming Data Input. During Serial Program Downloading, this pin
is used as data input line (see section "Serial Downloading" on page 519 for details).
PCINT2, Pin Change Interrupt source 2: The PB2 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• SCK/PCINT1 – Port B, Bit 1
SCK: Master Clock output, Slave Clock input pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is
enabled as a slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB1.
When the SPI0 is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by
DDB1. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the
PORTB1 bit.
PCINT1, Pin Change Interrupt source 1: The PB1 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
• SS¯ ¯ /PCINT0 – Port B, Bit 0
SS¯ ¯ : Slave Port Select input. When the SPI is enabled as a slave, this pin is configured
as an input regardless of the setting of DDB0. As a slave, the SPI is activated when this
pin is driven low. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is
controlled by DDB0. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be
controlled by the PORTB0 bit.
Table 14-4 below and Table 14-5 on page 226 relate the alternate functions of Port B to
the overriding signals shown in Figure 14-5 on page 222. SPI MSTR INPUT and SPI
SLAVE OUTPUT constitute the MISO signal, while MOSI is divided into SPI MSTR
OUTPUT and SPI SLAVE INPUT.
PCINT0, Pin Change Interrupt source 0: The PB0 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
Table 14-4. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB7:PB4
Signal
Name
PB7/OC0A/OC1C PB6/OC1B PB5/OC1A PB4/OC2A
PUOE 0 0 0 0
226
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Signal
Name
PB7/OC0A/OC1C PB6/OC1B PB5/OC1A PB4/OC2A
PUOV 0 0 0 0
DDOE 0 0 0 0
DDOV 0 0 0 0
PVOE OC0/OC1C
ENABLE
OC1B ENABLE OC1A ENABLE OC2A ENABLE
PVOV OC0/OC1C OC1B OC1A OC2A
DIEOE
PCINT7•PCIE0 PCINT6•PCIE0 PCINT5•PCIE0 PCINT4•PCIE0
DIEOV
1 1 1 1
DI PCINT7 INPUT PCINT6 INPUT PCINT5 INPUT PCINT4 INPUT
AIO – – – –
Table 14-5. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB3:PB0
Signal
Name
PB3/MISO/PDO PB2/MOSI/PDI PB1/SCK PB0/SS¯ ¯
PUOE SPE•MSTR SPE•(~MSTR) SPE•(~MSTR) SPE•(~MSTR)
PUOV PORTB3•(~PUD) PORTB2•(~PUD) PORTB1•(~PUD) PORTB0•(~PUD)
DDOE SPE•MSTR SPE•(~MSTR) SPE•(~MSTR) SPE•(~MSTR)
DDOV 0 0 0 0
PVOE SPE•(~MSTR) SPE•MSTR SPE•MSTR 0
PVOV SPI SLAVE
OUTPUT
SPI MSTR
OUTPUT
SCK OUTPUT 0
DIEOE
PCINT3•PCIE0 PCINT2•PCIE0 PCINT1•PCIE0 PCINT0•PCIE0
DIEOV
1 1 1 1
DI SPI MSTR INPUT
PCINT3 INPUT
SPI SLAVE INPUT
PCINT2 INPUT
SCK INPUT
PCINT1 INPUT
SPI SS¯ ¯ PCINT0
INPUT
AIO – – – –
14.3.2 Alternate Functions of Port D
The Port D pins with alternate functions are shown in the following table.
Table 14-6. Port D Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin Alternate Function
PD7 T0 (Timer/Counter0 Clock Input)
PD6 T1 (Timer/Counter1 Clock Input)
PD5 XCK1 (USART1 External Clock Input/Output)
PD4 ICP1 (Timer/Counter1Input Capture Trigger)
PD3 INT3/TXD1 (External Interrupt3 Input or USART1 Transmit Pin)
PD2 INT2/RXD 1(External Interrupt2 Input or USART1 Receive Pin)
PD1 INT1/SDA (External Interrupt1 Input or TWI Serial Data)
PD0 INT0/SCL (External Interrupt0 Input or TWI Serial Clock)
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:
• T0 – Port D, Bit 7
T0, this is Timer/Counter0 counter source.
227
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• T1 – Port D, Bit 6
T1, this is Timer/Counter1 counter source.
• XCK1 – Port D, Bit 5
XCK1, USART1 External clock: The Data Direction Register (DDD5) controls whether
the clock is output (DDD5 set) or input (DDD5 cleared). The XCK1 pin is active only
when the USART1 operates in Synchronous mode.
• ICP1 – Port D, Bit 4
ICP1 – Input Capture Pin 1: The PD4 pin can act as an input capture pin for
Timer/Counter1.
• INT3/TXD1 – Port D, Bit 3
INT3, External Interrupt source 3: The PD3 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source to the MCU.
TXD1, Transmit Data (Data output pin for the USART1). When the USART1 Transmitter
is enabled, this pin is configured as an output regardless of the value of DDD3.
• INT2/RXD1 – Port D, Bit 2
INT2, External Interrupt source 2: The PD2 pin can serve as an External Interrupt
source to the MCU.
RXD1, Receive Data (Data input pin for the USART1). When the USART1 receiver is
enabled this pin is configured as an input regardless of the value of DDD2. When the
USART forces this pin to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the PORTD2
bit.
• INT1/SDA – Port D, Bit 1
INT1, External Interrupt source 1: The PD1 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source to the MCU.
SDA, 2-wire Serial Interface Data: When the TWEN bit in TWCR is set (one) to enable
the 2-wire Serial Interface, pin PD1 is disconnected from the port and becomes the
Serial Data I/O pin for the 2-wire Serial Interface. In this mode, there is a spike filter on
the pin to suppress spikes shorter than 50 ns on the input signal, and the pin is driven
by an open drain driver with slew rate limitation.
• INT0/SCL – Port D, Bit 0
INT0, External Interrupt source 0: The PD0 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source to the MCU.
SCL, 2-wire Serial Interface Clock: When the TWEN bit in TWCR is set (one) to enable
the 2-wire Serial Interface, pin PD0 is disconnected from the port and becomes the
Serial Clock I/O pin for the 2-wire Serial Interface. In this mode, there is a spike filter on
the pin to suppress spikes shorter than 50 ns on the input signal, and the pin is driven
by an open drain driver with slew-rate limitation.
Table 14-7 below and Table 14-8 on page 228 relates the alternate functions of Port D
to the overriding signals shown in Figure 14-5 on page 222.
Table 14-7. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PD7:PD4
Signal
Name
PD7/T0 PD6/T1 PD5/XCK1 PD4/ICP1
PUOE 0 0 0 0
PUOV 0 0 0 0
DDOE 0 0 XCK1 OUTPUT
ENABLE
0
228
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Signal
Name
PD7/T0 PD6/T1 PD5/XCK1 PD4/ICP1
DDOV 0 0 1 0
PVOE 0 0 XCK1 OUTPUT
ENABLE
0
PVOV 0 0 XCK1 OUTPUT 0
DIEOE 0 0 0 0
DIEOV 0 0 0 0
DI T0 INPUT T1 INPUT XCK1 INPUT ICP1 INPUT
AIO – – – –
Table 14-8. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PD3:PD0
Signal
Name
PD3/INT3/TXD1 PD2/INT2/RXD1 PD1/INT1/SDA PD0/INT0/SCL
PUOE TXEN1 RXEN1 TWEN TWEN
PUOV 0 PORTD2&(~PUD) PORTD1&(~PUD) PORTD0&(~PUD)
DDOE TXEN1 RXEN1 TWEN TWEN
DDOV 1 0 SDA_OUT SCL_OUT
PVOE TXEN1 0 TWEN TWEN
PVOV TXD1 0 0 0
DIEOE INT3 ENABLE INT2 ENABLE INT1 ENABLE INT0 ENABLE
DIEOV 1 1 1 1
DI INT3 INPUT INT2 INPUT/RXD1 INT1 INPUT INT0 INPUT
AIO - - SDA INPUT SCL INPUT
Note: 1. When enabled, the 2-wire Serial Interface enables Slew-Rate controls on the
output pins PD0 and PD1. This is not shown in this table. In addition, spike filters
are connected between the AIO outputs shown in the port figure and the digital
logic of the TWI module.
14.3.3 Alternate Functions of Port E
The Port E pins with alternate functions are shown in the following table.
Table 14-9. Port E Pins Alternate Functions
Port
Pin
Alternate Function
PE7 INT7/ICP3/CLK0 (External Interrupt7 Input, Timer/Counter3 Input Capture Trigger or
Divided System Clock)
PE6 INT6/T3 (External Interrupt6 Input or Timer/Counter3 Clock Input)
PE5 INT5/OC3C (External Interrupt5 Input or Output Compare and PWM Output C for
Timer/Counter3)
PE4 INT4/OC3B (External Interrupt4 Input or Output Compare and PWM Output B for
Timer/Counter3)
PE3 AIN1/OC3A (Analog Comparator Negative Input or Output Compare and PWM Output A
for Timer/Counter3)
PE2 AIN0/XCK0 (Analog Comparator or Positive Input or USART0 external clock input/output)
PE1 TXD0 (USART0 Transmit Pin)
229
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Port
Pin
Alternate Function
PE0 RXD0/PCINT8 (USART0 Receive Pin or Pin Change Interrupt8)
• INT7/ICP3/CLKO – Port E, Bit 7
INT7, External Interrupt source 7: The PE7 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
ICP3, Input Capture Pin 3: The PE7 pin can act as an input capture pin for
Timer/Counter3.
CLKO - Divided System Clock: The divided system clock can be output on the PE7 pin.
The divided system clock will be output if the CKOUT Fuse is programmed, regardless
of the PORTE7 and DDE7 settings. It will also be output during reset.
• INT6/T3 – Port E, Bit 6
INT6, External Interrupt source 6: The PE6 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
T3, this is the Timer/Counter3 counter source.
• INT5/OC3C – Port E, Bit 5
INT5, External Interrupt source 5: The PE5 pin can serve as an External Interrupt
source.
OC3C, Output Compare Match C output: The PE5 pin can serve as an External output
for the Timer/Counter3 Output Compare C. The pin has to be configured as an output
(DDE5 set “one”) to serve this function. The OC3C pin is also the output pin for the
PWM mode timer function.
• INT4/OC3B – Port E, Bit 4
INT4, External Interrupt source 4: The PE4 pin can serve as an External Interrupt
source.
OC3B, Output Compare Match B output: The PE4 pin can serve as an External output
for the Timer/Counter3 Output Compare B. The pin has to be configured as an output
(DDE4 set (one)) to serve this function. The OC3B pin is also the output pin for the
PWM mode timer function.
• AIN1/OC3A – Port E, Bit 3
AIN1 – Analog Comparator Negative input. This pin is directly connected to the
negative input of the Analog Comparator.
OC3A, Output Compare Match A output: The PE3 pin can serve as an External output
for the Timer/Counter3 Output Compare A. The pin has to be configured as an output
(DDE3 set “one”) to serve this function. The OC3A pin is also the output pin for the
PWM mode timer function.
• AIN0/XCK0 – Port E, Bit 2
AIN0 – Analog Comparator Positive input. This pin is directly connected to the positive
input of the Analog Comparator.
XCK0, this is the USART0 External clock. The Data Direction Register (DDE2) controls
whether the clock is output (DDE2 set) or input (DDE2 cleared). The XCK0 pin is active
only when the USART0 operates in Synchronous mode.
• TXD0 – Port E, Bit 1
TXD0, this is the USART0 Transmit pin.
• RXD0/PCINT8 – Port E, Bit 0
230
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
RXD0, USART0 Receive Pin. Receive Data (Data input pin for the USART0). When the
USART0 receiver is enabled this pin is configured as an input regardless of the value of
DDRE0. When the USART0 forces this pin to be an input, a logical one in PORTE0 will
turn on the internal pull-up.
PCINT8, Pin Change Interrupt source 8: The PE0 pin can serve as an external interrupt
source.
Table 14-10 below and Table 14-11 below relates the alternate functions of Port E to
the overriding signals shown in Figure 14-5 on page 222.
Table 14-10. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PE7:PE4
Signal
Name
PE7/INT7/ICP3 PE6/INT6/T3 PE5/INT5/OC3C PE4/INT4/OC3B
PUOE 0 0 0 0
PUOV 0 0 0 0
DDOE 0 0 0 0
DDOV 0 0 0 0
PVOE 0 0 OC3C ENABLE OC3B ENABLE
PVOV 0 0 OC3C OC3B
DIEOE INT7 ENABLE INT6 ENABLE INT5 ENABLE INT4 ENABLE
DIEOV 1 1 1 1
DI INT7 INPUT / ICP3
INPUT
INT7 INPUT / T3
INPUT
INT5 INPUT INT4 INPUT
AIO – – – –
Table 14-11. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PE3:PE0
Signal
Name
PE3/AIN1/OC3A PE2/AIN0/XCK0 PE1/TXD0 PE0 /
RXD0/PCINT8
PUOE 0 0 TXEN0 RXEN0
PUOV 0 0 0 PORTE0 & (~PUD)
DDOE 0 XCK0 OUTPUT
ENABLE
TXEN0 RXEN0
DDOV 0 1 1 0
PVOE OC3BENABLE XCK0 OUTPUT
ENABLE
TXEN0 0
PVOV OC3B XCK0 OUTPUT TXD0 0
DIEOE 0 0 0 PCINT8 & PCIE1
DIEOV 0 0 0 1
DI 0 XCK0 INPUT – RXD0
PE0 0 0 0 PCINT8 INPUT
AIO AIN1 INPUT AIN0 INPUT - -
14.3.4 Alternate Functions of Port F
The Port F has an alternate function as analog input for the ADC as shown in Table
14-12 on page 231. If some Port F pins are configured as outputs, it is essential that
these do not switch when a conversion is in progress. This might corrupt the result of
the conversion. If the JTAG interface is enabled, the pull-up resistors on pins PF7(TDI),
PF5(TMS), and PF4(TCK) will be activated even if a Reset occurs.
231
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 14-12. Port F Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin Alternate Function
PF7 ADC7/TDI (ADC input channel 7 or JTAG Test Data Input)
PF6 ADC6/TDO (ADC input channel 6 or JTAG Test Data Output)
PF5 ADC5/TMS (ADC input channel 5 or JTAG Test Mode Select)
PF4 ADC4/TCK (ADC input channel 4 or JTAG Test Clock)
PF3 ADC3/DIG4 (ADC input channel 3 or Radio Transceiver RX/TX Indicator
Output)
PF2 ADC2/DIG2 (ADC input channel 2 or Radio Transceiver Antenna Diversity
Control Output)
PF1 ADC1 (ADC input channel 1)
PF0 ADC0 (ADC input channel 0)
• TDI, ADC7 – Port F, Bit 7
ADC7, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 7.
TDI, JTAG Test Data In: Serial input data to be shifted in to the Instruction Register or
Data Register (scan chains). When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be
used as an I/O pin.
• TDO, ADC6 – Port F, Bit 6
ADC6, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 6.
TDO, JTAG Test Data Out: Serial output data from Instruction Register or Data
Register. When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
The TDO pin is tri-stated unless TAP states that shift out data are entered.
• TMS, ADC5 – Port F, Bit 5
ADC5, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 5.
TMS, JTAG Test Mode Select: This pin is used for navigating through the TAP-
controller state machine. When the JTAG interface is enabled, this pin can not be used
as an I/O pin.
• TCK, ADC4 – Port F, Bit 4
ADC4, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 4.
TCK, JTAG Test Clock: JTAG operation is synchronous to TCK. When the JTAG
interface is enabled, this pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
• DIG4, ADC3 – Port F, Bit 3
ADC3, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 3.
DIG4, Radio Transceiver RX/TX Indicator Output: If the bit PA_EXT_EN in
TRX_CTRL_1 is set to one then the PF3 pin serves as the Radio Transceiver
receive/transmit indicator output to control an external RF front-end.
• DIG2, ADC2 – Port F, Bit 2
ADC2, Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 2.
DIG2, Radio Transceiver Antenna Diversity Control Output: If the bit
ANT_EXT_SW_EN in ANT_DIV is set to one then the PF2 pin serves as a Radio
Transceiver output to control External Antenna Diversity.
• ADC1 – ADC0 – Port F, Bit 1:0
Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 1:0.
232
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 14-13. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PF7:PF4
Signal
Name
PF7/ADC7/TDI PF6/ADC6/TDO PF5/ADC5/TMS PF4/ADC4/TCK
PUOE JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN
PUOV 1 0 1 1
DDOE JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN
DDOV 0 SHIFT_IR+SHIFT_DR 0 0
PVOE 0 JTAGEN 0 0
PVOV 0 TDO 0 0
DIEOE JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN JTAGEN
DIEOV 0 0 0 0
DI – – – –
AIO TDI/ADC7 INPUT ADC6 INPUT TMS/ADC5
INPUT
TCK/ADC4 INPUT
Table 14-14. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PF3:PF0
Signal
Name
PF3/ADC3/DIG4 PF2/ADC2/DIG2 PF1/ADC1 PF0/ADC0
PUOE 0 0 0 0
PUOV 0 0 0 0
DDOE PA_EXT_EN ANT_EXT_SW_EN 0 0
DDOV PA_EXT_EN ANT_EXT_SW_EN 0 0
PVOE PA_EXT_EN ANT_EXT_SW_EN 0 0
PVOV DIG4 DIG2 0 0
DIEOE 0 0 0 0
DIEOV 0 0 0 0
DI – – – –
AIO ADC3 INPUT ADC2 INPUT ADC1 INPUT ADC0 INPUT
14.3.5 Alternate Functions of Port G
The Port G alternate pin configuration is as follows:
Table 14-15. Port G Pins Alternate Functions
Port Pin Alternate Function
PG5 OC0B (Output Compare and PWM Output B for Timer/Counter0)
PG4 TOSC1 (RTC Oscillator Timer/Counter2)
PG3 TOSC2 (RTC Oscillator Timer/Counter2)
PG2 AMR (Automated Meter Reading - Counter Input for Timer/Counter2)
PG1 DIG1 (Radio Transceiver Antenna Diversity Control Output)
PG0 DIG3 (Radio Transceiver RX/TX Indicator Output)
• OC0B – Port G, Bit 5
OC0B, Output Compare match B output: The PG5 pin can serve as an external output
for the TImer/Counter0 Output Compare. The pin has to be configured as an output
(DDG5 set) to serve this function. The OC0B pin is also the output pin for the PWM
mode timer function.
• TOSC1 – Port G, Bit 4
233
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
TOSC2, Timer Oscillator pin 1: Setting the AS2 bit to one and the EXCLKAMR bit to
zero in ASSR, enables asynchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2 by a Crystal
Oscillator. The pin PG4 is disconnected from the port, and becomes the input of the
inverting Oscillator amplifier. In this mode, a Crystal Oscillator is connected to this pin,
and the pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
TOSC2 – Port G, Bit 3
TOSC2, Timer Oscillator pin 2: Setting the AS2 bit to one and the EXCLKAMR bit to
zero in ASSR, enables asynchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2 by a Crystal
Oscillator. The pin PG3 is disconnected from the port, and becomes the inverting output
of the Oscillator amplifier. In this mode, a Crystal Oscillator is connected to this pin, and
the pin can not be used as an I/O pin.
• AMR – Port G, Bit 2
AMR, Automated Meter Reading Input: Setting the AS2 and the EXCLKAMR bits in
ASSR to one, enables asynchronous clocking of Timer/Counter2 by the AMR pin
• DIG1 – Port G, Bit 1
DIG1, Radio Transceiver Antenna Diversity Control Output: If the bit
ANT_EXT_SW_EN in ANT_DIV is set to one then the PG1 pin serves as a Radio
Transceiver output to control External Antenna Diversity.
• DIG3 – Port G, Bit 0
DIG3, Radio Transceiver RX/TX Indicator Output: If the bit PA_EXT_EN in
TRX_CTRL_1 is set to one then the PG0 pin serves as the Radio Transceiver
receive/transmit indicator output to control an external RF front-end.
Table 14-16 below relates the alternate functions of Port G to the overriding signals
shown in Figure 14-5 on page 222.
Table 14-16. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PG5:PG2
Signal
Name
PG5/OC0B PG4/TOSC1 PG3/TOSC2 PG2/AMR
PUOE – AS2 &
(~EXCLKAMR)
AS2 &
(~EXCLKAMR) &
(~EXCLK)
AS2 & EXCLKAMR
PUOV – 0 0 0
DDOE – AS2 &
(~EXCLKAMR)
AS2 &
(~EXCLKAMR) &
(~EXCLK)
AS2 & EXCLKAMR
DDOV – 0 0 0
PVOE OC0B Enable 0 0 0
PVOV OC0B 0 0 0
DIEOE – AS2 &
(~EXCLKAMR)
AS2 &
(~EXCLKAMR) &
(~EXCLK)
AS2 & EXCLKAMR
DIEOV – EXCLK 0 1
DI – – – AMR
AIO – T/C2
OSC INPUT
T/C2
OSC OUTPUT
–
234
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 14-17. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions PG1:PG0
Signal
Name
PG1/DIG1 PG0/DIG3
PUOE 0 0
PUOV 0 0
DDOE ANT_EXT_SW_EN PA_EXT_EN
DDOV ANT_EXT_SW_EN PA_EXT_EN
PVOE ANT_EXT_SW_EN PA_EXT_EN
PVOV DIG1 DIG3
DIEOE 0 0
DIEOV 0 0
DI – –
AIO – –
14.4 Register Description
For a detailed description of register MCUCR see chapter "MCUCR – MCU Control
Register" on page 247.
14.4.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$35 ($55) PUD MCUCR
Read/Write RW
Initial Value 0
The MCU Control Register contains control bits of the general Microcontroller Unit
functions.
• Bit 4 – PUD - Pull-up Disable
When this bit is written to one, the I/O ports pull-up resistors are disabled even if the
DDxn and PORTxn Registers are configured to enable the pull-up resistor ({DDxn,
PORTxn} = 2'b01). See section "Ports as General Digital I/O" for more details about this
feature.
14.4.2 DPDS0 – Port Driver Strength Register 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($136) PFDRV1
PFDRV0
PEDRV1
PEDRV0
PDDRV1
PDDRV0
PBDRV1
PBDRV0
DPDS0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The output driver strength can be set individually for each digital I/O port. The following
tables show output current levels for a typical supply voltage of DEVDD = 3.3V. Refer to
section "Electrical Characteristics" for details.
• Bit 7:6 – PFDRV1:0 - Driver Strength Port F
235
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 14-18 PFDRV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PFDRV1:0 0 2 mA
1 4 mA
2 6 mA
3 8 mA
• Bit 5:4 – PEDRV1:0 - Driver Strength Port E
Table 14-19 PEDRV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PEDRV1:0 0 2 mA
1 4 mA
2 6 mA
3 8 mA
• Bit 3:2 – PDDRV1:0 - Driver Strength Port D
Table 14-20 PDDRV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PDDRV1:0 0 2 mA
1 4 mA
2 6 mA
3 8 mA
• Bit 1:0 – PBDRV1:0 - Driver Strength Port B
Table 14-21 PBDRV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PBDRV1:0 0 2 mA
1 4 mA
2 6 mA
3 8 mA
14.4.3 DPDS1 – Port Driver Strength Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($137) Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PGDRV1
PGDRV0
DPDS1
Read/Write R R R R R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The output driver strength can be set individually for each digital I/O port. The following
table shows output current levels for a typical supply voltage of DEVDD = 3.3V. Refer to
section "Electrical Characteristics" for details.
• Bit 7:2 – Res5:0 - Reserved
• Bit 1:0 – PGDRV1:0 - Driver Strength Port G
Driver strength can be set for port G except the port pins PG3 and PG4. The leakage
current of the ports PG3 and PG4 is reduced.
236
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 14-22 PGDRV Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
PGDRV1:0 0 2 mA
1 4 mA
2 6 mA
3 8 mA
14.4.4 PORTB – Port B Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$05 ($25) PORTB7:0 PORTB
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
If PORTBn is written logic one when the PORTB pin n is configured as an input pin, the
pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTBn has to be written
logic zero or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. If PORTBn is written logic
one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If
PORTBn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is
driven low (zero).
• Bit 7:0 – PORTB7:0 - Port B Data Register Value
14.4.5 DDRB – Port B Data Direction Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$04 ($24) DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 DDRB
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DDBn bit in the DDRB Register selects the direction of the PORTB pin n. If DDBn
is written logic one, PBn is configured as an output pin. If DDBn is written logic zero,
PBn is configured as an input pin.
• Bit 7:0 – DDB7:0 - Port B Data Direction Register Value
14.4.6 PINB – Port B Input Pins Address
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$03 ($23) PINB7:0 PINB
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register allows access to the PORTB pins independent of the setting of the Data
Direction bit DDBn. The port pin can be read through the PINBn Register bit, and
writing a logic one to PINBn toggles the value of PORTBn.
• Bit 7:0 – PINB7:0 - Port B Input Pins Value
237
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
14.4.7 PORTD – Port D Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$0B ($2B) PORTD7:0 PORTD
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
If PORTDn is written logic one when the PORTD pin n is configured as an input pin, the
pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTDn has to be written
logic zero or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. If PORTDn is written logic
one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If
PORTDn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is
driven low (zero).
• Bit 7:0 – PORTD7:0 - Port D Data Register Value
14.4.8 DDRD – Port D Data Direction Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$0A ($2A) DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 DDRD
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DDDn bit in the DDRD Register selects the direction of the PORTD pin n. If DDDn
is written logic one, PDn is configured as an output pin. If DDDn is written logic zero,
PDn is configured as an input pin.
• Bit 7:0 – DDD7:0 - Port D Data Direction Register Value
14.4.9 PIND – Port D Input Pins Address
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$09 ($29) PIND7:0 PIND
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register allows access to the PORTD pins independent of the setting of the Data
Direction bit DDDn. The port pin can be read through the PINDn Register bit, and
writing a logic one to PINDn toggles the value of PORTDn.
• Bit 7:0 – PIND7:0 - Port D Input Pins Value
14.4.10 PORTE – Port E Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$0E ($2E) PORTE7:0 PORTE
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
238
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
If PORTEn is written logic one when the PORTE pin n is configured as an input pin, the
pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTEn has to be written
logic zero or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. If PORTEn is written logic
one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If
PORTEn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is
driven low (zero).
• Bit 7:0 – PORTE7:0 - Port E Data Register Value
14.4.11 DDRE – Port E Data Direction Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$0D ($2D) DDE7 DDE6 DDE5 DDE4 DDE3 DDE2 DDE1 DDE0 DDRE
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DDEn bit in the DDRE Register selects the direction of the PORTE pin n. If DDEn
is written logic one, PEn is configured as an output pin. If DDEn is written logic zero,
PEn is configured as an input pin.
• Bit 7:0 – DDE7:0 - Port E Data Direction Register Value
14.4.12 PINE – Port E Input Pins Address
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$0C ($2C) PINE7:0 PINE
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register allows access to the PORTE pins independent of the setting of the Data
Direction bit DDEn. The port pin can be read through the PINEn Register bit, and
writing a logic one to PINEn toggles the value of PORTEn.
• Bit 7:0 – PINE7:0 - Port E Input Pins Value
14.4.13 PORTF – Port F Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$11 ($31) PORTF7:0 PORTF
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
If PORTFn is written logic one when the PORTF pin n is configured as an input pin, the
pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTFn has to be written
logic zero or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. If PORTFn is written logic
one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If
PORTFn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is
driven low (zero).
• Bit 7:0 – PORTF7:0 - Port F Data Register Value
239
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
14.4.14 DDRF – Port F Data Direction Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$10 ($30) DDF7 DDF6 DDF5 DDF4 DDF3 DDF2 DDF1 DDF0 DDRF
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DDFn bit in the DDRF Register selects the direction of the PORTF pin n. If DDFn is
written logic one, PFn is configured as an output pin. If DDFn is written logic zero, PFn
is configured as an input pin.
• Bit 7:0 – DDF7:0 - Port F Data Direction Register Value
14.4.15 PINF – Port F Input Pins Address
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$0F ($2F) PINF7:0 PINF
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register allows access to the PORTF pins independent of the setting of the Data
Direction bit DDFn. The port pin can be read through the PINFn Register bit, and writing
a logic one to PINFn toggles the value of PORTFn.
• Bit 7:0 – PINF7:0 - Port F Input Pins Value
14.4.16 PORTG – Port G Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$14 ($34) Res1 Res0 PORTG5
PORTG4
PORTG3
PORTG2
PORTG1
PORTG0
PORTG
Read/Write R R RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
If PORTGn is written logic one when the PORTG pin n is configured as an input pin, the
pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PORTGn has to be written
logic zero or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. If PORTGn is written logic
one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If
PORTGn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is
driven low (zero).
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5:0 – PORTG5:0 - Port G Data Register Value
240
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
14.4.17 DDRG – Port G Data Direction Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$13 ($33) Res1 Res0 DDG5 DDG4 DDG3 DDG2 DDG1 DDG0 DDRG
Read/Write R R RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The DDGn bit in the DDRG Register selects the direction of the PORTG pin n. If DDGn
is written logic one, PGn is configured as an output pin. If DDGn is written logic zero,
PGn is configured as an input pin.
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5:0 – DDG5:0 - Port G Data Direction Register Value
14.4.18 PING – Port G Input Pins Address
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$12 ($32) Res1 Res0 PING5 PING4 PING3 PING2 PING1 PING0 PING
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
This register allows access to the PORTG pins independent of the setting of the Data
Direction bit DDGn. The port pin can be read through the PINGn Register bit, and
writing a logic one to PINGn toggles the value of PORTGn.
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5:0 – PING5:0 - Port G Input Pins Value
241
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
15 Interrupts
This section describes the specifics of the interrupt handling as performed in
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2. For a general explanation of the AVR interrupt handling,
refer to "Reset and Interrupt Handling" on page 15.
15.1 Interrupt Vectors in ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 15-1. Reset and Interrupt Vectors
Vector
No.
Program
Address(2) Source Interrupt Definition
0 $0000(1) RESET
External Pin, Power-on Reset, Brown-out
Reset, Watchdog Reset, and JTAG AVR
Reset
1 $0002 INT0 External Interrupt Request 0
2 $0004 INT1 External Interrupt Request 1
3 $0006 INT2 External Interrupt Request 2
4 $0008 INT3 External Interrupt Request 3
5 $000A INT4 External Interrupt Request 4
6 $000C INT5 External Interrupt Request 5
7 $000E INT6 External Interrupt Request 6
8 $0010 INT7 External Interrupt Request 7
9 $0012 PCINT0 Pin Change Interrupt Request 0
10 $0014 PCINT1 Pin Change Interrupt Request 1
11 $0016(3) PCINT2 Pin Change Interrupt Request 2
12 $0018 WDT Watchdog Time-out Interrupt
13 $001A TIMER2_COMPA Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A
14 $001C TIMER2_COMPB Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B
15 $001E TIMER2_OVF Timer/Counter2 Overflow
16 $0020 TIMER1_CAPT Timer/Counter1 Capture Event
17 $0022 TIMER1_COMPA Timer/Counter1 Compare Match A
18 $0024 TIMER1_COMPB Timer/Counter1 Compare Match B
19 $0026 TIMER1_COMPC Timer/Counter1 Compare Match C
20 $0028 TIMER1_OVF Timer/Counter1 Overflow
21 $002A TIMER0_COMPA Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A
22 $002C TIMER0_COMPB Timer/Counter0 Compare match B
23 $002E TIMER0_OVF Timer/Counter0 Overflow
24 $0030 SPI_STC SPI Serial Transfer Complete
25 $0032 USART0_RX USART0 Rx Complete
26 $0034 USART0_UDRE USART0 Data Register Empty
27 $0036 USART0_TX USART0 Tx Complete
28 $0038 ANALOG_COMP Analog Comparator
242
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Vector
No.
Program
Address(2) Source Interrupt Definition
29 $003A ADC ADC Conversion Complete
30 $003C EE_READY EEPROM Ready
31 $003E TIMER3_CAPT Timer/Counter3 Capture Event
32 $0040 TIMER3_COMPA Timer/Counter3 Compare Match A
33 $0042 TIMER3_COMPB Timer/Counter3 Compare Match B
34 $0044 TIMER3_COMPC Timer/Counter3 Compare Match C
35 $0046 TIMER3_OVF Timer/Counter3 Overflow
36 $0048 USART1_RX USART1 Rx Complete
37 $004A USART1_UDRE USART1 Data Register Empty
38 $004C USART1_TX USART1 Tx Complete
39 $004E TWI 2-wire Serial Interface
40 $0050 SPM_READY Store Program Memory Ready
41 $0052(3) TIMER4_CAPT Timer/Counter4 Capture Event
42 $0054 TIMER4_COMPA Timer/Counter4 Compare Match A
43 $0056 TIMER4_COMPB Timer/Counter4 Compare Match B
44 $0058 TIMER4_COMPC Timer/Counter4 Compare Match C
45 $005A TIMER4_OVF Timer/Counter4 Overflow
46 $005C(3) TIMER5_CAPT Timer/Counter5 Capture Event
47 $005E TIMER5_COMPA Timer/Counter5 Compare Match A
48 $0060 TIMER5_COMPB Timer/Counter5 Compare Match B
49 $0062 TIMER5_COMPC Timer/Counter5 Compare Match C
50 $0064 TIMER5_OVF Timer/Counter5 Overflow
51 $0066(3) Reserved
52 $0068(3) Reserved
53 $006A(3) Reserved
54 $006C(3) Reserved
55 $006E(3) Reserved
56 $0070(3) Reserved
57 $0072 TRX24_PLL_LOCK Transceiver PLL Lock
58 $0074 TRX24_PLL_UNLOCK Transceiver PLL Unlock
59 $0076 TRX24_RX_START Transceiver Receive Start
60 $0078 TRX24_RX_END Transceiver Receive End
61 $007A TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE Transceiver CCAED Meassurement finished
62 $007C TRX24_XAH_AMI Transceiver Frame Address Match
63 $007E TRX24_TX_END Transceiver Transmit End
64 $0080 TRX24_AWAKE Transceiver Wakeup finished
243
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Vector
No.
Program
Address(2) Source Interrupt Definition
65 $0082 SCNT_CMP1 Symbol Counter Compare Match 1
66 $0084 SCNT_CMP 2 Symbol Counter Compare Match 2
67 $0086 SCNT_CMP 3 Symbol Counter Compare Match 3
68 $0088 SCNT_OVFL Symbol Counter Overflow
69 $008A SCNT_BACKOFF Symbol Counter Backoff Slot Counter
70 $008C AES_READY AES Encryption Ready
71 $008E BAT_LOW Battery Monitor Alert
72 $0090 TRX24_TX_START Transceiver Transmit Start
73 $0092 TRX24_AMI0 Transceiver Address Match Filter 0
74 $0094 TRX24_AMI1 Transceiver Address Match Filter 1
75 $0096 TRX24_AMI2 Transceiver Address Match Filter 2
76 $0098 TRX24_AMI3 Transceiver Address Match Filter 3
Note: 1. When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the device will jump to the Boot Loader
address at reset, see "Memory Programming" on page 502.
2. When the IVSEL bit in MCUCR is set, Interrupt Vectors will be moved to the start
of the Boot Flash Section. The address of each Interrupt Vector will then be the
address in this table added to the start address of the Boot Flash Section.
3. Not useful in ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 due to limited pin count.
15.2 Reset and Interrupt Vector Placement
Table 15-2 below shows Reset and Interrupt Vectors placement for the various
combinations of BOOTRST and IVSEL settings. If the program never enables an
interrupt source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used, and regular program code can be
placed at these locations. This is also the case if the Reset Vector is in the Application
section while the Interrupt Vectors are in the Boot section or vice versa.
Table 15-2. Reset and Interrupt Vectors Placement (1)
BOOTRST IVSEL Reset Address Interrupt Vectors Start Address
1 0 0x0000 0x0002
1 1 0x0000 Boot Reset Address + 0x0002
0 0 Boot Reset Address 0x0002
0 1 Boot Reset Address Boot Reset Address + 0x0002
Note: 1. The Boot Reset Address is shown in Table 30-10 on page 498 through Table 30-6
on page 496. For the BOOTRST Fuse “1” means unprogrammed while “0” means
programmed.
The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector
Addresses in ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 is:
Address Labels Code Comments
0x0000
jmp RESET ;Reset Handler
0x0002
jmp INT0 ;IRQ0 Handler
0x0004
jmp INT1 ;IRQ1 Handler
0x0006
jmp INT2 ;IRQ2 Handler
244
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
0x0008
jmp INT3 ;IRQ3 Handler
0x000A
jmp INT4 ;IRQ4 Handler
0x000C
jmp INT5 ;IRQ5 Handler
0x000E
jmp INT6 ;IRQ6 Handler
0x0010
jmp INT7 ;IRQ7 Handler
0x0012
jmp PCINT0 ;PCINT0 Handler
0x0014
jmp PCINT1 ;PCINT1 Handler
0x0016
jmp PCINT2 ;PCINT2 Handler
0X0018
jmp WDT ;Watchdog Timeout Handler
0x001A
jmp TIM2_COMPA ;Timer2 CompareA Handler
0x001C
jmp TIM2_COMPB ;Timer2 CompareB Handler
0x001E
jmp TIM2_OVF ;Timer2 Overflow Handler
0x0020
jmp TIM1_CAPT ;Timer1 Capture Handler
0x0022
jmp TIM1_COMPA ;Timer1 CompareA Handler
0x0024
jmp TIM1_COMPB ;Timer1 CompareB Handler
0x0026
jmp TIM1_COMPC ;Timer1 CompareC Handler
0x0028
jmp TIM1_OVF ;Timer1 Overflow Handler
0x002A
jmp TIM0_COMPA ;Timer0 CompareA Handler
0x002C
jmp TIM0_COMPB ;Timer0 CompareB Handler
0x002E
jmp TIM0_OVF ;Timer0 Overflow Handler
0x0030
jmp SPI_STC ;SPI Transfer Complete Handler
0x0032
jmp USART0_RX ;USART0 RX Complete Handler
0x0034
jmp USART0_UDRE ;USART0,UDR Empty Handler
0x0036
jmp USART0_TX ;USART0 TX Complete Handler
0x0038
jmp ANA_COMP ;Analog Comparator Handler
0x003A
jmp ADC ;ADC Conversion Complete Handler
0x003C
jmp EE_RDY ;EEPROM Ready Handler
0x003E
jmp TIM3_CAPT ;Timer3 Capture Handler
0x0040
jmp TIM3_COMPA ;Timer3 CompareA Handler
0x0042
jmp TIM3_COMPB ;Timer3 CompareB Handler
0x0044
jmp TIM3_COMPC ;Timer3 CompareC Handler
0x0046
jmp TIM3_OVF ;Timer3 Overflow Handler
0x0048
jmp USART1_RX ;USART1 RX Complete Handler
0x004A
jmp USART1_UDRE ;USART1,UDR Empty Handler
0x004C
jmp USART1_TX ;USART1 TX Complete Handler
0x004E
jmp TWI ;2-wire Serial Handler
0x0050
jmp SPM_RDY ;SPM Ready Handler
0x0052
jmp TIM4_CAPT ;Timer4 Capture Handler
0x0054
jmp TIM4_COMPA ;Timer4 CompareA Handler
0x0056
jmp TIM4_COMPB ;Timer4 CompareB Handler
0x0058
jmp TIM4_COMPC ;Timer4 CompareC Handler
0x005A
jmp TIM4_OVF ;Timer4 Overflow Handler
0x005C
jmp TIM5_CAPT ;Timer5 Capture Handler
0x005E
jmp TIM5_COMPA ;Timer5 CompareA Handler
0x0060
jmp TIM5_COMPB ;Timer5 CompareB Handler
0x0062
jmp TIM5_COMPC ;Timer5 CompareC Handler
0x0064
jmp TIM5_OVF ;Timer5 Overflow Handler
0x0066
jmp 0x15e ;0x15e <__bad_interrupt>
0x0068
jmp 0x15e ;0x15e <__bad_interrupt>
0x006A
jmp 0x15e ;0x15e <__bad_interrupt>
0x006C
jmp 0x15e ;0x15e <__bad_interrupt>
0x006E
jmp 0x15e ;0x15e <__bad_interrupt>
0x0070
jmp 0x15e ;0x15e <__bad_interrupt>
0x0072
jmp TRX24_PLL_LOCK ;Transceiver PLL Lock Handler
0x0074
jmp TRX24_PLL_UNLOCK ;Transceiver PLL Unlock Handler
0x0076
jmp TRX24_RX_START ;Transceiver RX Start Handler
0x0078
jmp TRX24_RX_END ;Transceiver RX End Handler
0x007A
jmp TRX24_CCA_ED_DONE ;Transceiver CCAED DONE Handler
245
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
0x007C
jmp TRX24_XAH_AMI ;Transceiver Addr. Match Handler
0x007E
jmp TRX24_TX_END ;Transceiver Transmit End Handler
0x0080
jmp TRX24_AWAKE ;Transceiver Wake Up Handler
0x0082
jmp SCNT_CMP1 ;Symbol Counter Compare Match 1
0x0084
jmp SCNT_CMP2 ;Symbol Counter Compare Match 2
0x0086
jmp SCNT_CMP3 ;Symbol Counter Compare Match 3
0x0088
jmp SCNT_OVFL ;Symbol Counter Overflow Handler
0x008A
jmp SCNT_BACKOFF ;Symbol Backoff Slot Counter H.
0x008C
jmp AES_READY ;Encryption/Decryption Ready H.
0x008E
jmp BAT_LOW ;Batterie Monitor Alert Handler
0x0090
jmp
TRX24_TX_START ;Transceiver Transmit Start Hand.
0x0092
jmp
TRX24_AMI0 ;Transceiver Address Match 0 H.
0x0094
jmp
TRX24_AMI1 ;Transceiver Address Match 1 H.
0x0096
jmp
TRX24_AMI2 ;Transceiver Address Match 2 H.
0x0098
jmp
TRX24_AMI3 ;Transceiver Address Match 3 H.
;
0x009A RESET:
ldi r16, high(RAMEND)
;Main program start
0x009B
out SPH,r16 ;Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x009C
ldi r16, low(RAMEND)
0x009D
out SPL,r16
0x009E
sei
;Enable interrupts
0x009F
<instr> xxx
... ... ... ...
When the BOOTRST Fuse is unprogrammed, the Boot section size set to 8KBytes and
the IVSEL bit in the MCUCR Register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most
typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses is:
Address Labels Code Comments________________________
0x0000 RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND) ;Main program start
0x0001 out SPH,r16 ;Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0x0002 ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0x0003 out SPL,r16
0x0004 sei ;Enable interrupts
0x0005 <instr> xxx
.org 0xF002
0xF002 jmp EXT_INT0 ;IRQ0 Handler
0xF004 jmp EXT_INT1 ;IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0xF098 jmp TRX24_AMI3 ;Transceiver Address Match 3 H.
When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed and the Boot section size set to 8KBytes,
the most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector
Addresses is:
Address Labels Code Comments________________________
.org 0x0002
0x0002 jmp EXT_INT0 ;IRQ0 Handler
0x0004 jmp EXT_INT1 ;IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
.org 0xF000
0xF000 RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND) ;Main program start
0xF001 out SPH,r16 ;Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0xF002 ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0xF003 out SPL,r16
0xF004 sei ;Enable interrupts
0xF005 <instr> xxx
246
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
When the BOOTRST Fuse is programmed, the Boot section size set to 8KBytes and
the IVSEL bit in the MCUCR Register is set before any interrupts are enabled, the most
typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector Addresses is:
Address Labels Code Comments________________________
.org 0xF000
0xF000 jmp RESET ;Reset handler
0xF002 jmp EXT_INT0 ;IRQ0 Handler
0xF004 jmp EXT_INT1 ;IRQ1 Handler
... ... ... ;
0xF09A RESET: ldi r16,high(RAMEND) ; Main program start
0xF09B out SPH,r16 ;Set Stack Pointer to top of RAM
0xF09C ldi r16,low(RAMEND)
0xF09D out SPL,r16
0xF09E sei ;Enable interrupts
0xF09F <instr> xxx
15.3 Moving Interrupts Between Application and Boot Section
The MCU Control Register controls the placement of the Interrupt Vector table, see
Code Example below. For more details, see "Reset and Interrupt Handling" on page 15.
Assembly Code Example
Move_interrupts:
; Get MCUCR
in r16, MCUCR
mov r17, r16
; Enable change of Interrupt Vectors
ori r16, (1<<IVCE)
out MCUCR, r16
; Move interrupts to Boot Flash section
ori r16, (1<<IVSEL)
out MCUCR, r17
ret
C Code Example
void Move_interrupts(void)
{
uchar temp;
/* Get MCUCR */
temp = MCUCR;
/* Enable change of Interrupt Vectors */
MCUCR = temp|(1<<IVCE);
/* Move interrupts to Boot Flash section */
MCUCR = temp|(1<<IVSEL);
}
247
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
15.4 Register Description
15.4.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$35 ($55) JTD Res1 Res0 PUD Res1 Res0 IVSEL IVCE MCUCR
Read/Write RW R R RW R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The MCU Control Register contains control bits for general Microcontroller Unit
functions.
• Bit 7 – JTD - JTAG Interface Disable
When this bit is zero, the JTAG interface is enabled if the JTAGEN Fuse is
programmed. If this bit is one, the JTAG interface is disabled. In order to avoid
unintentional disabling or enabling of the JTAG interface, a timed sequence must be
followed when changing this bit: The application software must write this bit to the
desired value twice within four cycles to change its value. Note that this bit must not be
altered when using the On-chip Debug system.
• Bit 6:5 – Res1:0 - Reserved
• Bit 4 – PUD - Pull-up Disable
When this bit is written to one, the I/O ports pull-up resistors are disabled even if the
DDxn and PORTxn Registers are configured to enable the pull-up resistor ({DDxn,
PORTxn} = 2'b01). See section "Ports as General Digital I/O" for more details about this
feature.
• Bit 3:2 – Res1:0 - Reserved
• Bit 1 – IVSEL - Interrupt Vector Select
When the IVSEL bit is cleared (zero), the Interrupt Vectors are placed at the start of the
Flash memory. When this bit is set (one), the Interrupt Vectors are moved to the
beginning of the Boot Loader section of the Flash. The actual address of the start of the
Boot Flash Section is determined by the BOOTSZ Fuses. Refer to the section "Memory
Programming" for details. To avoid unintentional changes of Interrupt Vector tables, a
special write procedure must be followed to change the IVSEL bit (see section "Moving
Interrupts Between Application and Boot Section" for details): 1. Write the Interrupt
Vector Change Enable (IVCE) bit to one; 2. Within four cycles, write the desired value
to IVSEL while writing a zero to IVCE. Interrupts will be automatically disabled while this
sequence is executed. Interrupts are disabled in the same cycle IVCE is set, and they
remain disabled until after the instruction following the write to IVSEL. If IVSEL is not
written, interrupts remain disabled for four cycles. The I-bit in the Status Register is
unaffected by the automatic disabling. Note that if Interrupt Vectors are placed in the
Boot Loader section and Boot Lock bit BLB02 is programmed, interrupts are disabled
while executing from the Application section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the
Application section and Boot Lock bit BLB12 is programed, interrupts are disabled while
executing from the Boot Loader section.
• Bit 0 – IVCE - Interrupt Vector Change Enable
The IVCE bit must be written to logic one to enable change of the IVSEL bit. IVCE is
cleared by hardware four cycles after it is written or when IVSEL is written. Setting the
IVCE bit will disable interrupts as explained in the IVSEL description.
248
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
16 External Interrupts
The External Interrupts are triggered by the INT7:0 pin or any of the PCINT8:0 pins.
Observe that if enabled, the interrupts will trigger even if the INT7:0 or PCINT8:0 pins
are configured as outputs. This feature provides a way of generating a software
interrupt.
The Pin Change Interrupt PCI0 will trigger if any enabled PCINT7:0 pin toggles, Pin
change interrupt PCI1 if the enabled PCINT8 toggles. PCINT23:9 have no function
inside the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2. Their corresponding I/O port are not
implemented. PCMSK1 and PCMSK0 Registers control which pins contribute to the pin
change interrupts. PCI2 and PCMSK2 associated to PCINT23:16 have no task in this
design. Pin change interrupts on PCINT8:0 are detected asynchronously. This implies
that these interrupts can be used for waking the part also from sleep modes other than
Idle mode.
The External Interrupts can be triggered by a falling or rising edge or a low level. This is
set up as indicated in the specification for the External Interrupt Control Registers –
EICRA (INT3:0) and EICRB (INT7:4). When the external interrupt is enabled and is
configured as level triggered, the interrupt will trigger as long as the pin is held low.
Note that recognition of falling or rising edge interrupts on INT7:4 requires the presence
of an I/O clock, described in "Overview" on page 3. Low level interrupts and the edge
interrupt on INT3:0 are detected asynchronously. This implies that these interrupts can
be used for waking the part also from sleep modes other than Idle mode. The I/O clock
is halted in all sleep modes except Idle mode.
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down, the
required level must be held long enough for the MCU to complete the wake-up to trigger
the level interrupt. If the level disappears before the end of the Start-up Time, the MCU
will still wake up, but no interrupt will be generated. The start-up time is defined by the
SUT and CKSEL Fuses as described in "Clock Sources" on page 175.
16.1 Pin Change Interrupt Timing
An example of timing of a pin change interrupt is shown in Figure 16-1 below.
Figure 16-1. Normal Pin Change Interrupt
clk
PCINT(n)
pin_lat
pin_sync
pcint_in_(n)
pcint_syn
pcint_setflag
PCIF
PCINT(0)
pin_sync
pcint_syn
pin_lat
D Q
LE
pcint_setflag
PCIF
clk
clk
PCINT(0) in PCMSK(x)
pcint_in_(0)
0
x
249
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
16.2 Register Description
16.2.1 EICRA – External Interrupt Control Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($69) ISC31 ISC30 ISC21 ISC20 ISC11 ISC10 ISC01 ISC00 EICRA
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The External Interrupts 3 - 0 are activated by the external pins INT3:0 if the SREG I-flag
and the corresponding interrupt mask in the EIMSK is set. The level and edges on the
external pins that activate the interrupts are defined in the following tables. Edges on
INT3:0 are registered asynchronously. Pulses on INT3:0 pins wider than the minimum
pulse width of typical 50 ns will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not
guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If low level interrupt is selected, the low level must
be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an
interrupt. If enabled, a level triggered interrupt will generate an interrupt request as long
as the pin is held low. When changing the ISCn bit, an interrupt can occur. Therefore, it
is recommended to first disable INTn by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the EIMSK
Register. Then, the ISCn bit can be changed. Finally, the INTn interrupt flag should be
cleared by writing a logical one to its Interrupt Flag bit (INTFn) in the EIFR Register
before the interrupt is re-enabled. When changing the ISCn1/ISCn0 bits, the interrupt
must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the EIMSK Register. Otherwise
an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed.
• Bit 7:6 – ISC31:30 - External Interrupt 3 Sense Control Bit
Table 16-145 ISC3 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ISC31:30 0x00 The low level of INTn generates an interrupt
request.
0x01 Any edge of INTn generates asynchronously
an interrupt request.
0x02 The falling edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
0x03 The rising edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
• Bit 5:4 – ISC21:20 - External Interrupt 2 Sense Control Bit
Table 16-146 ISC2 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ISC21:20 0x00 The low level of INTn generates an interrupt
request.
0x01 Any edge of INTn generates asynchronously
an interrupt request.
0x02 The falling edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
0x03 The rising edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
• Bit 3:2 – ISC11:10 - External Interrupt 1 Sense Control Bit
250
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 16-147 ISC1 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ISC11:10 0x00 The low level of INTn generates an interrupt
request.
0x01 Any edge of INTn generates asynchronously
an interrupt request.
0x02 The falling edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
0x03 The rising edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
• Bit 1:0 – ISC01:00 - External Interrupt 0 Sense Control Bit
Table 16-148 ISC0 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ISC01:00 0x00 The low level of INTn generates an interrupt
request.
0x01 Any edge of INTn generates asynchronously
an interrupt request.
0x02 The falling edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
0x03 The rising edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
16.2.2 EICRB – External Interrupt Control Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($6A) ISC71 ISC70 ISC61 ISC60 ISC51 ISC50 ISC41 ISC40 EICRB
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The External Interrupts 7 - 4 are activated by the external pins INT7:4 if the SREG I-flag
and the corresponding interrupt mask in the EIMSK is set. The level and edges on the
external pins that activate the interrupts are defined in the following tables. Edges on
INT7:4 are registered asynchronously. Pulses on INT7:4 pins wider than the minimum
pulse width of typical 50 ns will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not
guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If low level interrupt is selected, the low level must
be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an
interrupt. If enabled, a level triggered interrupt will generate an interrupt request as long
as the pin is held low. When changing the ISCn bit, an interrupt can occur. Therefore, it
is recommended to first disable INTn by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the EIMSK
Register. Then, the ISCn bit can be changed. Finally, the INTn interrupt flag should be
cleared by writing a logical one to its Interrupt Flag bit (INTFn) in the EIFR Register
before the interrupt is re-enabled. When changing the ISCn1/ISCn0 bits, the interrupt
must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the EIMSK Register. Otherwise
an interrupt can occur when the bits are changed.
• Bit 7:6 – ISC71:70 - External Interrupt 7 Sense Control Bit
Table 16-149 ISC7 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ISC71:70 0x00 The low level of INTn generates an interrupt
251
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
request.
0x01 Any edge of INTn generates asynchronously
an interrupt request.
0x02 The falling edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
0x03 The rising edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
• Bit 5:4 – ISC61:60 - External Interrupt 6 Sense Control Bit
Table 16-150 ISC6 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ISC61:60 0x00 The low level of INTn generates an interrupt
request.
0x01 Any edge of INTn generates asynchronously
an interrupt request.
0x02 The falling edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
0x03 The rising edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
• Bit 3:2 – ISC51:50 - External Interrupt 5 Sense Control Bit
Table 16-151 ISC5 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ISC51:50 0x00 The low level of INTn generates an interrupt
request.
0x01 Any edge of INTn generates asynchronously
an interrupt request.
0x02 The falling edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
0x03 The rising edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
• Bit 1:0 – ISC41:40 - External Interrupt 4 Sense Control Bit
Table 16-152 ISC4 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ISC41:40 0x00 The low level of INTn generates an interrupt
request.
0x01 Any edge of INTn generates asynchronously
an interrupt request.
0x02 The falling edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
0x03 The rising edge of INTn generates
asynchronously an interrupt request.
252
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
16.2.3 EIMSK – External Interrupt Mask Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$1D ($3D) INT7 INT6 INT5 INT4 INT3 INT2 INT1 INT0 EIMSK
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
When an INT7:0 bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set
(one), the corresponding external pin interrupt is enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control
bits in the External Interrupt Control Registers EICRA and EICRB define whether the
External Interrupt is activated on rising or falling edge or level sensed. Activity on any of
these pins will trigger an interrupt request even if the pin is enabled as an output. This
provides a way of generating a software interrupt.
• Bit 7:0 – INT7:0 - External Interrupt Request Enable
Table 16-153 INT Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
INT7:0 0x00 All external pin interrupts are disabled.
0xff All external pin interrupts are enabled.
16.2.4 EIFR – External Interrupt Flag Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$1C ($3C) INTF7 INTF6 INTF5 INTF4 INTF3 INTF2 INTF1 INTF0 EIFR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
When an edge or logic change on the INT7:0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF7:0
becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the corresponding interrupt enable bit
INT7:0 in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the interrupt vector. The flag is
cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by
writing a logical one to it. These flags are always cleared when INT7:0 are configured
as level interrupt. Note that when entering sleep mode with the INT3:0 interrupts
disabled, the input buffers on these pins will be disabled. This may cause a logic
change in internal signals which will set the INTF3:0 flags. See "Digital Input Enable
and Sleep Modes" for more information.
• Bit 7:0 – INTF7:0 - External Interrupt Flag
Table 16-154 INTF Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
INTF7:0 0x00 No edge or logic change on INT7:0
occurred.
0x01 A edge or logic change on INT0 occurred
and triggered an interrupt request.
0x02 ...
0x80 A edge or logic change on INT7 occurred
and triggered an interrupt request.
253
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
16.2.5 PCICR – Pin Change Interrupt Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($68) Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PCIE2 PCIE1 PCIE0 PCICR
Read/Write R R R R R RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:3 – Res4:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 2 – PCIE2 - Pin Change Interrupt Enable 2
When the PCIE2 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one),
pin change interrupt 2 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT23:16 pin will
cause an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is
executed from the PCI2 Interrupt Vector. PCINT23:16 pins are enabled individually by
the PCMSK2 Register. Note that the I/O ports corresponding to PCINT23:16 are not
implemented. Therefore PCIE2 has no function in this device.
• Bit 1 – PCIE1 - Pin Change Interrupt Enable 1
When the PCIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one),
pin change interrupt 1 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT15:8 pin will
cause an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is
executed from the PCI1 Interrupt Vector. PCINT15:8 pins are enabled individually by
the PCMSK1 Register. Note that the I/O ports corresponding to PCINT15:9 are not
implemented.
• Bit 0 – PCIE0 - Pin Change Interrupt Enable 0
When the PCIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one),
pin change interrupt 0 is enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT7:0 pin will cause
an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin Change Interrupt Request is executed
from the PCI0 Interrupt Vector. PCINT7:0 pins are enabled individually by the PCMSK0
Register.
16.2.6 PCIFR – Pin Change Interrupt Flag Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$1B ($3B) Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PCIF2 PCIF1 PCIF0 PCIFR
Read/Write R R R R R RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:3 – Res4:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 2 – PCIF2 - Pin Change Interrupt Flag 2
When a logic change on any PCINT23:16 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF2
becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE2 bit in PCICR are set (one), the
MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the
interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical
one to it. Note that the I/O ports corresponding to PCINT23:16 are not implemented.
Therefore PCIF2 has no function in this device.
254
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 1 – PCIF1 - Pin Change Interrupt Flag 1
When a logic change on any PCINT15:8 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF1
becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE1 bit in PCICR are set (one), the
MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the
interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical
one to it. Note that the I/O ports corresponding to PCINT15:9 are not implemented.
• Bit 0 – PCIF0 - Pin Change Interrupt Flag 0
When a logic change on any PCINT7:0 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF0
becomes set (one). If the I-bit in SREG and the PCIE0 bit in PCICR are set (one), the
MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag is cleared when the
interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical
one to it.
16.2.7 PCMSK2 – Pin Change Mask Register 2
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($6D) PCINT23 PCINT22 PCINT21 PCINT20 PCMSK2
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($6D) PCINT19 PCINT18 PCINT17 PCINT16 PCMSK2
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Note that the PCMSK2 register has no function in this device. The I/O ports associated
to PCINT23:16 are not implemented. Normally each bit PCINT23:16 selects whether
the pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT23:16 is set
and the PCIE2 bit in PCICR is set, the pin change interrupt is enabled on the
corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT23:16 is cleared, the pin change interrupt on the
corresponding I/O pin is disabled.
• Bit 7:0 – PCINT23:16 - Pin Change Enable Mask
16.2.8 PCMSK1 – Pin Change Mask Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($6C) PCINT15 PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PCMSK1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($6C) PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 PCMSK1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit PCINT8 selects whether the pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding
I/O pin. If PCINT8 is set and the PCIE1 bit in PCICR is set, the pin change interrupt is
enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT8 is cleared, the pin change interrupt on
the corresponding I/O pin is disabled.
255
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 7:1 – PCINT15:9 - Pin Change Enable Mask
Bits 15:9 of the PCMSK1 register have no function in this device. The I/O ports
associated to PCINT15:9 are not implemented.
• Bit 0 – PCINT8 - Pin Change Enable Mask 8
If this bit is set to one the pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is enabled.
If this bit is set to zero the pin change interrupt is disabled.
16.2.9 PCMSK0 – Pin Change Mask Register 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($6B) PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 PCMSK0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Each bit PCINT7:0 selects whether the pin change interrupt is enabled on the
corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT7:0 is set and the PCIE0 bit in PCICR is set, the pin
change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT7:0 is cleared, the pin
change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled.
• Bit 7:0 – PCINT7:0 - Pin Change Enable Mask
256
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
17 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM
17.1 Features
• Two Independent Output Compare Units
• Double Buffered Output Compare Registers
• Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload)
• Glitch Free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
• Variable PWM Period
• Frequency Generator
• Three Independent Interrupt Sources (TOV0, OCF0A, and OCF0B)
17.2 Overview
Timer/Counter0 is a general purpose 8-bit Timer/Counter module with two independent
Output Compare Units and with PWM support. It allows accurate program execution
timing (event management) and wave generation.
A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 17-1. For the
actual placement of I/O pins refer to section "Pin Configurations" on page 2. CPU
accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The device-
specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the "Register Description" on page
268.
Figure 17-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram
Clock Select
Timer/Counter
DATA BUS
OCRnA
OCRnB
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
Generation
Waveform
Generation
OCnA
OCnB
=
Fixed
TOP
Value
Control Logic
= 0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
OCnA
(Int.Req.)
OCnB
(Int.Req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clkTn
257
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
17.2.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT0) and Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are
8-bit registers. Interrupt request signals (abbreviated to Int.Req. in the figure) are all
visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR0). All interrupts are individually
masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK0). TIFR0 and TIMSK0 are not
shown in the figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler or by an external clock
source on the T0 pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and
edge the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The Timer/Counter
is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is
referred to as the timer clock (clkT0).
The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B) are compared
with the Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the
Waveform Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output
Compare pins (OC0A and OC0B); see "Output Compare Unit" on page 258 for details.
The Compare Match event will also set the Compare Flag (OCF0A or OCF0B) which
can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request.
17.2.2 Definitions
Many register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case
“n” replaces the Timer/Counter number (in this case 0). A lower case “x” replaces the
Output Compare Unit (in this case Compare Unit A or Compare Unit B). However when
using the register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used i.e.,
TCNT0 for accessing Timer/Counter0 counter value and so on.
The definitions in Table 17-1 are also used extensively throughout the document.
Table 17-1. Definitions
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00.
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).
TOP The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in
the count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value
0xFF (MAX) or the value stored in the OCR0A Register. The assignment is
dependent on the mode of operation.
17.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock
source is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select
(CS02:0) bits located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0B). For details on
clock sources and prescaler see Timer/Counter 0, 1, 3, 4, and 5 Prescaler on page 334
17.4 Counter Unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter
unit. Figure 17-2 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings.
258
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 17-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram
DATA BUS
TCNTn Control Logic
count
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
Clock Select
top
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clkTn
bottom
direction
clear
Signal description (internal signals):
count Increment or decrement TCNT0 by 1;
direction Select between increment and decrement;
clear Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero);
clkTn Timer/Counter clock referred to as clkT0 in the following text;
top Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value;
bottom Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero);
Depending of the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented or
decremented at each timer clock (clkT0). clkT0 can be generated from an external or
internal clock source selected by the Clock Select bits (CS02:0). When no clock source
is selected (CS02:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can be
accessed by the CPU regardless of whether clkT0 is present or not. A CPU write access
overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM01 and WGM00 bits
located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0A) and the WGM02 bit located in
the Timer/Counter Control Register B (TCCR0B). There are close connections between
how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output
Compare outputs OC0A and OC0B. For more details about advanced counting
sequences and waveform generation, see "Modes of Operation" on page 262.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set according to the mode of operation
selected by the WGM02:0 bits. TOV0 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
17.5 Output Compare Unit
The 8-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the Output Compare
Registers (OCR0A and OCR0B). The comparator signals a match whenever TCNT0
equals OCR0A or OCR0B. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF0A or
OCF0B) at the next clock cycle of the timer. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled,
the Output Compare Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The Output
Compare Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. The flag can
alternatively be software-cleared by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The
Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to the
operating mode set by the WGM02:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits.
The MAX and BOTTOM signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the
special cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (refer to "Modes of
Operation" on page 262).
259
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 17-3. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
OCFnx (Int.Req.)
= (8-bit Comparator )
OCRnx
OCnx
DATA BUS
TCNTn
WGMn1:0
Waveform Generator
top
FOCn
COMnX1:0
bottom
The OCR0x Registers are double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width
Modulation (PWM) modes. For the normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes
of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the
update of the OCR0x Compare Registers to either TOP or BOTTOM of the counting
sequence. The synchronization prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical
PWM pulses and thereby making the output glitch-free.
The OCR0x Register access may seem complex, but this is not the case. When the
double buffering is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR0x Buffer Register. If
double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR0x directly.
17.5.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be
forced by writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC0x) bit. Forcing Compare
Match will not set the OCF0x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC0x pin will be
updated as if a real Compare Match had occurred (the COM0x1:0 bits settings define
whether the OC0x pin is set, cleared or toggled).
17.5.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT0 Write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT0 Register will block any Compare Match that
occur in the next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows
OCR0x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT0 without triggering an interrupt
when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled.
17.5.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all Compare Matches for one
timer clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT0 while using the Output
Compare Unit, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the
value written to TCNT0 equals the OCR0x value, the Compare Match will be missed
resulting in an incorrect waveform generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value
equal to BOTTOM when the counter is down-counting.
The setup of the OC0x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register
for the port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC0x value is to use the Force
Output Compare (FOC0x) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OC0x Registers keep their
values even when changing between Waveform Generation modes.
260
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Be aware that the COM0x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare
value. A Change of the COM0x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.
17.6 Compare Match Output Unit
The Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform
Generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC0x) state at the
next Compare Match. The COM0x1:0 bits control also the OC0x pin output source.
Figure 17-4 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM0x1:0 bit
setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the
parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers (DDR and PORT) affected by the
COM0x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC0x state, the reference is to the
internal OC0x Register and not to the OC0x pin. The OC0x Register is reset to “0” if a
system reset occurs.
Figure 17-4. Compare Match Output Unit Schematic
PORT
DDR
D Q
D Q
OCnx
Pin
OCnx
D Q
Waveform
Generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BUS
FOCn
clkI/O
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC0x) from the
Waveform Generator if either of the COM0x1:0 bits are set. However the OC0x pin
direction (input or output) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) of the
port pin. The Data Direction Register bit of the OC0x pin (DDR_OC0x) must be set as
output before the OC0x value is visible at the pin. The port override function is
independent of the Waveform Generation mode.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initializing the OC0x state before the
output is enabled. Note that some COM0x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain
modes of operation (see "Register Description" on page 268).
17.6.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits differently in Normal, CTC and PWM
modes. A setting of COM0x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator in all modes that no
action on the OC0x Register is to be performed on the next Compare Match. For
compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 17-2. For fast PWM
mode refer to Table 17-3 and for phase correct PWM refer to Table 17-4.
261
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
A state change of the COM0x1:0 bits will have effect at the first Compare Match after
the bits are written. For non-PWM modes the action can be forced to have immediate
effect by using the FOC0x strobe bits.
The following table shows the COM0x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are
set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 17-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM0A1
COM0B1
COM0A0
COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0x disconnected;
0 1 Toggle OC0x on Compare Match;
1 0 Clear OC0x on Compare Match;
1 1 Set OC0x on Compare Match;
Table 17-3 shows the COM0x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM01:0 bits are set to fast
PWM mode.
Table 17-3. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode
COM0A1
COM0B1
COM0A0
COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0x disconnected.
0 1
WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected.
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match.
OC0B: not applicable, reserved function;
1 0 Clear OC0x on Compare Match, set OC0x at BOTTOM, (non-
inverting mode).
1 1 Set OC0x on Compare Match, clear OC0x at BOTTOM, (inverting
mode).
Note: A special case occurs when OCR0x equals TOP and COM0x1 is set. In this case, the
Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See "Fast PWM
Mode" on page 263.
Table 17-4 shows the COM0x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are set to
phase correct PWM mode.
Table 17-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode
COM0A1
COM0B1
COM0A0
COM0B0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC0x disconnected.
0 1
WGM02 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC0A Disconnected.
WGM02 = 1: Toggle OC0A on Compare Match.
OC0B: not applicable, reserved function;
1 0 Clear OC0x on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC0x on
Compare Match when down-counting.
1 1 Set OC0x on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC0x on
Compare Match when down-counting.
Note: A special case occurs when OCR0x equals TOP and COM0x1 is set. In this case, the
Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See "Fast PWM
Mode" on page 263 for more details.
262
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
17.7 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare
pins, is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM02:0) and
Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not affect
the counting sequence while the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The COM0x1:0
bits control whether the PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or
non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM0x1:0 bits control whether the
output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a Compare Match (see "Output Compare
Unit" on page 258).
For detailed timing information see "Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams" on page 266.
Table 17-5 shows the function of the WGM2:0 bits of registers TCCR0A and TCCR0B.
These bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum
(TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used.
Table 17-5. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description
Mode WGM2 WGM1 WGM0
Timer/Counter
Mode of
Operation TOP
Update of
OCRX at
TOV Flag
Set on(0,0)
0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX
1 0 0 1 PWM, Phase
Correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM
2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX
3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF TOP MAX
4 1 0 0 Reserved – – –
5 1 0 1 PWM, Phase
Correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM
6 1 1 0 Reserved – – –
7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA BOTTOM TOP
Notes: 1. MAX = 0xFF
2. BOTTOM = 0x00
17.7.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM02:0 = 0). In this mode the
counting direction is always up (incrementing) and no counter clear is performed. The
counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 8-bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then
restarts from the BOTTOM (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow
Flag (TOV0) will be set at the same timer clock cycle when the TCNT0 becomes zero.
The TOV0 Flag in this case behaves like a 9th bit, except that it is only set and not
cleared. However, the timer resolution can be increased by software utilizing the timer
overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV0 Flag. There are no special cases
to consider in the Normal mode. A new counter value can be written at anytime.
The Output Compare Unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. It is
not recommended to use the Output Compare for waveform generation in Normal
mode, since this will occupy too much CPU time.
17.7.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) mode (WGM02:0 = 2), the OCR0A Register is used
to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when
the counter value (TCNT0) matches OCR0A. The OCR0A value defines the TOP value
263
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
for the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the
Compare Match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation of counting external
events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 17-5. The counter value
(TCNT0) increases until a Compare Match occurs between TCNT0 and OCR0A. The
counter (TCNT0) is then cleared.
Figure 17-5. CTC Mode Timing Diagram
TCNTn
OCn
(Toggle)
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 4
Period 2 3
(COMnx1:0 = 1)
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by
using the OCF0A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can
update the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the
counter is running with no or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the
CTC mode does not have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to
OCR0A is lower than the current value of TCNT0, the counter will miss the Compare
Match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFF) and wrap
around starting at 0x00 before the Compare Match can occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to toggle
its logical level on each Compare Match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to
toggle mode (COM0A1:0 = 1). The OC0A value will not be visible on the port pin unless
the data direction of the pin is set to output. The generated waveform will have a
maximum frequency of fOC0 = fclkI/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform
frequency is defined by the following equation:
)01(2
/
0xOCRN
f
fOclkI
xOC +⋅⋅
=
The N variable represents the prescaler factor (1, 8, 64, 256 or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV0 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle
that the counter changes from MAX to 0x00.
17.7.3 Fast PWM Mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode (WGM02:0 = 3 or 7) provides a high
frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM mode differs from the
other PWM modes by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to
TOP and then restarts from BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM2:0 = 3, and
OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 7. In non-inverting Compare Output mode the Output
Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match between TCNT0 and OCR0x and
set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode the output is set on Compare
Match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating
frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as in the phase correct PWM
mode that uses dual-slope operation. This high frequency operation makes the fast
264
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification and DAC applications. The
high frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils, capacitors),
and therefore reduces total system cost.
In fast PWM mode, the counter is incremented until the counter value matches the TOP
value. The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram
for the fast PWM mode is shown in Figure 17-6. The TCNT0 value is shown in the
timing diagram as a histogram illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram
includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on
the TCNT0 slopes represent Compare Matches between OCR0x and TCNT0.
Figure 17-6. Fast PWM Mode Timing Diagram
TCNTn
OCRnx Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
1
Period 2 3
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set
4 5 6 7
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches TOP.
The interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the compare value if the interrupt
is enabled.
In fast PWM mode the compare unit allows generating PWM waveforms on the OC0x
pins. Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to 2 will produce a non-inverted PWM. An inverted
PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to 3. Setting the COM0A1:0
bits to 1 allows the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02 bit is set.
This option is not available for the OC0B pin (see Table 17-3 on page 261). The actual
OC0x value will only be visible at the port pin if the data direction of the port pin is set to
output. The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at
the Compare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0, and by clearing (or setting) the OC0x
Register at the timer clock cycle when the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to
BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency for the output fOC0xPWM can be calculated with the following
equation:
256
/
0⋅
=
N
f
fOclkI
xPWMOC
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256 or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represent special cases when generating
a PWM waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to BOTTOM,
the output will be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR0A
265
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
equal to MAX will result in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of
the output set by the COM0A1:0 bits.)
A frequency with 50% duty cycle waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved
by setting OC0x to toggle its logical level on each Compare Match (COM0x1:0 = 1). The
generated waveform will have a maximum frequency of fOC0xPWM = fclkI/O/2 when OCR0A
is set to zero. This feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC mode, except that in the
fast PWM mode the double buffer feature of the Output Compare unit is enabled.
17.7.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct pulse-width modulation (PWM) mode (WGM02:0 = 1 or 5) provides a
phase-correct, high-resolution PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct
PWM mode is based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from
BOTTOM to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when
WGM2:0 = 1 and TOP = OCR0A when WGM2:0 = 5. In non-inverting Compare Output
mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the Compare Match between TCNT0
and OCR0x while up-counting, and OC0x is set on the Compare Match while down-
counting. The operation is inverted in inverting Output Compare mode. The dual-slope
operation has a lower maximum operation frequency than single-slope operation.
However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are
preferred for motor control applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches
TOP. The counter changes the direction when reaching TOP. The TCNT0 value will be
equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM
mode is shown in Figure 17-7 below. The TCNT0 value is shown in the timing diagram
as a histogram illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted
and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes
represent Compare Matches between OCR0x and TCNT0.
Figure 17-7. Phase Correct PWM Mode Timing Diagram
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 2 3
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Update
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches
BOTTOM. The Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the
counter reaches the BOTTOM value.
266
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generating PWM waveforms on
the OC0x pins. Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to 2 will produce a non-inverted PWM. An
inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM0x1:0 to 3. Setting the
COM0A0 bits to 1 allows the OC0A pin to toggle on Compare Matches if the WGM02
bit is set. This option is not available for the OC0B pin (see Table 17-4 on page 261).
The actual OC0x value will only be visible at the port pin if the data direction for the port
pin is set to output. The PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC0x
Register at the Compare Match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter
increments, and by setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at Compare Match between
OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output
fOC0xPCPWM when using phase-correct PWM can be calculated with the following
equation:
510
/
0⋅
=
N
f
fOclkI
xPCPWMOC
The N variable represents the prescale factor (1, 8, 64, 256 or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR0A Register represent special cases when generating
a PWM waveform output in the phase-correct PWM mode. If the OCR0A is set equal to
BOTTOM, the output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be
continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have
the opposite logic values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 17-7 OCnx has a transition from high to low even
though there is no Compare Match. The reason of this transition is to guarantee
symmetry around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without
Compare Match:
• OCR0x changes its value from MAX like in Figure 17-7 on page 265. When the
OCR0x value is MAX the OC0x pin value is the same as the result of a down-
counting Compare Match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OC0x value at
MAX must correspond to the result of an up-counting Compare Match.
• The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR0x. For that
reason it misses the Compare Match and hence the OC0x change that would have
happened on the way up.
17.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT0) is therefore
shown as a clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information
on when Interrupt Flags are set. Figure 17-8 contains timing data for basic
Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value
in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode.
Figure 17-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TOVn
clkI/O
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
267
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 17-9 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 17-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram with Prescaler (fclkI/O/8)
TOVn
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
Figure 17-10 shows the setting of OCF0B and OCF0A in all modes except CTC and
PWM mode, where OCR0A is TOP.
Figure 17-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, setting of OCF0x with Prescaler (fclkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
Figure 17-11 shows the setting of OCF0A and the clearing of TCNT0 in CTC mode and
fast PWM mode where OCR0A is TOP.
Figure 17-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode
with Prescaler (fclkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
268
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
17.9 Register Description
17.9.1 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$23 ($43) TSM Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PSRASY
PSRSYNC
GTCCR
Read/Write RW R R R R R R RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – TSM - Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this
mode the value that is written to the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits is kept, hence
keeping the corresponding prescaler reset signals asserted. This ensures that the
corresponding Timer/Counters are halted and can be configured to the same value
without the risk of one of them advancing during the configuration. When the TSM bit is
written to zero, the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits are cleared by hardware and the
Timer/Counters simultaneously start counting.
• Bit 6:2 – Res4:0 - Reserved
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 1 – PSRASY - Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally
cleared immediately by hardware. If the bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating
in asynchronous mode, the bit will remain one until the prescaler has been reset. The
bit will not be cleared by hardware if the TSM bit is set.
• Bit 0 – PSRSYNC - Prescaler Reset for Synchronous Timer/Counters
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, Timer/Counter3,
Timer/Counter4 and Timer/Counter5 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared
immediately by hardware, except if the TSM bit is set. Note that Timer/Counter0,
Timer/Counter1, Timer/Counter3, Timer/Counter4 and Timer/Counter5 share the same
prescaler and a reset of this prescaler will affect all timers.
17.9.2 TCCR0A – Timer/Counter0 Control Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$24 ($44) COM0A1
COM0A0
COM0B1
COM0B0
Res1 Res0 WGM01 WGM00
TCCR0A
Read/Write RW RW RW RW R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – COM0A1:0 - Compare Match Output A Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0A) behavior. If one or both of the
COM0A1:0 bits are set, the OC0A output overrides the normal port functionality of the
I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit
corresponding to the OC0A pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. When
OC0A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0A1:0 bits depends on the
WGM02:0 bit setting. The following shows the COM0A1:0 bit functionality when the
WGM02:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM). For the functionality in
other modes refer to section "Operating Modes".
269
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 17-6 COM0A Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM0A1:0 0 Normal port operation, OC0A disconnected
1 Toggle OC0A on Compare Match
2 Clear OC0A on Compare Match
3 Set OC0A on Compare Match
• Bit 5:4 – COM0B1:0 - Compare Match Output B Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC0B) behavior. If one or both of the
COM0B1:0 bits are set, the OC0B output overrides the normal port functionality of the
I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit
corresponding to the OC0B pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. When
OC0B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM0B1:0 bits depends on the
WGM02:0 bit setting. The following shows the COM0B1:0 bit functionality when the
WGM02:0 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM). For the functionality in
other modes refer to section "Operating Modes".
Table 17-7 COM0B Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM0B1:0 0 Normal port operation, OC0B disconnected
1 Toggle OC0B on Compare Match
2 Clear OC0B on Compare Match
3 Set OC0B on Compare Match
• Bit 3:2 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 1:0 – WGM01:00 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM02 bit found in the TCCR0B Register, these bits control the
counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and
what type of waveform generation to be used according to the following table. Modes of
operation supported by the Timer/Counter0 unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear
Timer on Compare Match (CTC) mode, and two types of Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM) modes (see section "Modes of Operation" for details).
Table 17-8 WGM0 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WGM02:00 0x0 Normal mode of operation
0x1 PWM, phase correct, TOP=0xFF
0x2 CTC, TOP = OCRA
0x3 Fast PWM, TOP=0xFF
0x4 Reserved
0x5 PWM, Phase correct, TOP = OCRA
0x6 Reserved
0x7 Fast PWM, TOP=OCRA
270
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
17.9.3 TCCR0B – Timer/Counter0 Control Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$25 ($45) FOC0A FOC0B Res1 Res0 WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 TCCR0B
Read/Write W W R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – FOC0A - Force Output Compare A
The FOC0A bit is only active when the WGM02:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero
when TCCR0B is written in a PWM operation mode. When writing a logical one to the
FOC0A bit, an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit.
The OC0A output is changed according to its COM0A1:0 bits setting. Note that the
FOC0A bit is implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the
COM0A1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced compare. A FOC0A strobe will
not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0A as TOP.
The FOC0A bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC0B - Force Output Compare B
The FOC0B bit is only active when the WGM02:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode.
However, for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero
when TCCR0B is written in a PWM operation mode. When writing a logical one to the
FOC0B bit, an immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit.
The OC0B output is changed according to its COM0B1:0 bits setting. Note that the
FOC0B bit is implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the
COM0B1:0 bits that determines the effect of the forced compare. A FOC0B strobe will
not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR0B as TOP.
The FOC0B bit is always read as zero.
• Bit 5:4 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3 – WGM02 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM01:00 bits found in the TCCR0A Register, these bits control
the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value,
and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC)
mode, and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see section "Modes of
Operation").
• Bit 2:0 – CS02:00 - Clock Select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter0
according to the following table.If external pin modes are used for Timer/Counter0,
transitions on the T0 pin will clock the counter even if the pin is configured as an output.
This feature allows software control of the counting.
Table 17-9 CS0 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CS02:00 0x00 No clock source (Timer/Counter0 stopped)
0x01 clkIO/1 (no prescaling)
0x02 clkIO/8 (from prescaler)
0x03 clkIO/64 (from prescaler)
271
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x04 clkIO/256 (from prescaler)
0x05 clkIO/1024 (from prescaler)
0x06 External clock source on T0 pin, clock on
falling edge
0x07 External clock source on T0 pin, clock on
rising edge
17.9.4 TCNT0 – Timer/Counter0 Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
$26 ($46) TCNT0_7 TCNT0_6 TCNT0_5 TCNT0_4 TCNT0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
$26 ($46) TCNT0_3 TCNT0_2 TCNT0_1 TCNT0_0 TCNT0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to
the Timer/Counter0 unit 8-bit counter. Writing to the TCNT0 Register blocks (removes)
the Compare Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter (TCNT0) while
the counter is running, introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match between TCNT0
and the OCR0x Registers.
• Bit 7:0 – TCNT0_7:0 - Timer/Counter0 Byte
17.9.5 OCR0A – Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
$27 ($47) OCR0A_7 OCR0A_6 OCR0A_5 OCR0A_4 OCR0A
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
$27 ($47) OCR0A_3 OCR0A_2 OCR0A_1 OCR0A_0 OCR0A
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC0A pin.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR0A_7:0 - Output Compare Register
272
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
17.9.6 OCR0B – Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4
$28 ($48) OCR0B_7 OCR0B_6 OCR0B_5 OCR0B_4 OCR0B
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
$28 ($48) OCR0B_3 OCR0B_2 OCR0B_1 OCR0B_0 OCR0B
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC0B pin.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR0B_7:0 - Output Compare Register
17.9.7 TIMSK0 – Timer/Counter0 Interrupt Mask Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($6E) Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0 TIMSK0
Read/Write R R R R R RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:3 – Res4:0 - Reserved
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 2 – OCIE0B - Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0B bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is
executed if a Compare Match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the OCF0B bit is set
in the Timer/Counter0 Interrupt Flag Register TIFR0.
• Bit 1 – OCIE0A - Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE0A bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is
executed if a Compare Match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the OCF0A bit is set
in the Timer/Counter0 Interrupt Flag Register TIFR0.
• Bit 0 – TOIE0 - Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE0 bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if an overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs i.e., when the TOV0 bit is set in the
Timer/Counter0 Interrupt Flag Register TIFR0.
273
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
17.9.8 TIFR0 – Timer/Counter0 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$15 ($35) Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 OCF0B OCF0A TOV0 TIFR0
Read/Write R R R R R RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:3 – Res4:0 - Reserved
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 2 – OCF0B - Timer/Counter0 Output Compare B Match Flag
The OCF0B bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and
the data in OCR0B Output Compare Register. OCF0B is cleared by hardware when
executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0B is cleared
by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0B (Timer/Counter
Compare B Match Interrupt Enable) and OCF0B are set, the Timer/Counter Compare
Match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 1 – OCF0A - Timer/Counter0 Output Compare A Match Flag
The OCF0A bit is set when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter0 and
the data in OCR0A Output Compare Register. OCF0A is cleared by hardware when
executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF0A is cleared
by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE0A (Timer/Counter
Compare A Match Interrupt Enable) and OCF0A are set, the Timer/Counter Compare
Match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – TOV0 - Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag
The bit TOV0 is set when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared by
hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively,
TOV0 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE0
(Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable) and TOV0 are set, the Timer/Counter0
Overflow interrupt is executed. The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM02:0 bit
setting.
274
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18 16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter 1, 3, 4, and 5)
18.1 Features
• True 16-bit Design (i.e., allows 16-bit PWM)
• Three independent Output Compare Units
• Double Buffered Output Compare Registers
• One Input Capture Unit
• Input Capture Noise Canceller
• Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload)
• Glitch-free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)
• Variable PWM Period
• Frequency Generator
• External Event Counter
• Numerous independent interrupt sources
o TOV1, OCF1A, OCF1B, OCF1C, ICF1
o TOV3, OCF3A, OCF3B, OCF3C, ICF3
o TOV4, OCF4A, OCF4B, OCF4C
o TOV5, OCF5A, OCF5B, OCF5C
18.2 Overview
The 16-bit Timer/Counter unit allows accurate program execution timing (event
management), wave generation and signal timing measurement.
Most register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case
“n” replaces the Timer/Counter number, and a lower case “x” replaces the Output
Compare unit channel. However when using the register or bit defines in a program, the
precise form must be used i.e., TCNT1 for accessing Timer/Counter1 counter value and
so on.
A simplified block diagram of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 18-1. For the
actual placement of I/O pins, see section "Pin Configurations" on page 2. CPU
accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins are shown in bold. The device-
specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the section "Register Description" on
page 296.
The Power Reduction Timer/Counter1 bit, PRTIM1, in "PRR0 – Power Reduction
Register0" on page 195 must be written to zero to enable Timer/Counter1 module.
The Power Reduction bits of Timer/Counter3 (PRTIM3), Timer/Counter4 bit (PRTIM4)
and Timer/Counter5 (PRTIM5) in "PRR1 – Power Reduction Register 1" on page 196
must be written to zero to enable the respective Timer/Counter module.
Note, note the complete Timer/Counter I/O functionality is provided for each
Timer/Counter module depending on the available I/O pins.
275
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 18-1. 16-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram(1)
Clock Select
Timer/Counter
DATA BUS
OCRnA
OCRnB
ICRn
=
=
TCNTn
Waveform
Generation
Waveform
Generation
OCnA
OCnB
Noise
Canceler
ICPn
=
Fixed
TOP
Values
Edge
Detector
Control Logic
= 0
TOP BOTTOM
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
OCnA
(Int.Req.)
OCnB
(Int.Req.)
ICFn (Int.Req.)
TCCRnA TCCRnB
( From Analog
Comparator Ouput )
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clkTn
Notes: 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 2, Table 14-3 on page 224 and Table 14-9 en page
228 for Timer/Counter1, 2 and 3 pin placements and description.
18.2.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNTn) Output Compare Registers (OCRnA/B/C) and Input
Capture Register (ICRn) are all 16-bit registers. Special procedures must be followed
when accessing the 16-bit registers. These procedures are described in the section
"Accessing 16-bit Registers" on page 276. The Timer/Counter Control Registers
(TCCRnA/B/C) are 8-bit registers and have no CPU access restrictions. Interrupt
requests (shorten as Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register
(TIFRn). All interrupts are individually masked with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register
(TIMSKn). TIFRn and TIMSKn are not shown in the figure since these registers are
shared by other timer units.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler or by an external clock
source on the Tn pin. The Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and
which clock edge the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The
Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the clock
select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkTn).
The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCRnA/B/C) are compared with the
276
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Timer/Counter value at all time. The result of the compare can be used by the
Waveform Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output
Compare pin (OCnA/B/C). See section "Output Compare Units" on page 282 for details.
The compare match event will also set the Compare Match Flag (OCFnA/B/C) which
can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request.
The Input Capture Register can capture the Timer/Counter value at a given external
(edge triggered) event on either the Input Capture pin (ICPn) or on the Analog
Comparator pins (see "AC – Analog Comparator" on page 438). The Input Capture unit
includes a digital filtering unit (Noise Canceller) for reducing the chance of capturing
noise spikes.
The TOP value, or maximum Timer/Counter value, can in some modes of operation be
defined by either the OCRnA Register, the ICRn Register or by a set of fixed values.
When using OCRnA as TOP value in a PWM mode, the OCRnA Register can not be
used for generating a PWM output. However the TOP value will in this case be double
buffered allowing the TOP value to be changed at run time. If a fixed TOP value is
required, the ICRn Register can be used as an alternative, freeing the OCRnA to be
used as PWM output.
18.2.2 Definitions
The following definitions are used extensively throughout the document:
Table 18-1. Definitions
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes 0x0000.
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFFFF (decimal 65535).
TOP The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in
the count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be one of the fixed
values: 0x00FF, 0x01FF, 0x03FF or to the value stored in the OCRnA or ICRn
Register. The assignment is dependent of the mode of operation.
18.3 Accessing 16-bit Registers
The TCNTn, OCRnA/B/C and ICRn are 16-bit registers that can be accessed by the
AVR CPU via the 8-bit data bus. The 16-bit register must be byte accessed using two
read or write operations. Each 16-bit timer has a single 8-bit register for temporary
storing of the high byte of the 16-bit access. The same Temporary Register is shared
between all 16-bit registers within each 16-bit timer. Accessing the low byte triggers the
16-bit read or write operation. When the low byte of a 16-bit register is written by the
CPU, the written low byte and the high byte stored in the Temporary Register are both
copied into the 16-bit register in the same clock cycle. When the low byte of a 16-bit
register is read by the CPU, the high byte of the 16-bit register is copied into the
Temporary Register in the same clock cycle as the low byte is read.
Not all 16-bit accesses use the Temporary Register for the high byte. Reading the
OCRnA/B/C 16-bit registers does not involve using the Temporary Register.
To do a 16-bit write, the high byte must be written before the low byte. For a 16-bit read,
the low byte must be read before the high byte.
The following code examples show how to access the 16-bit timer registers assuming
that no interrupt updates the temporary register. The same principle can be used
directly for accessing the OCRnA/B/C and ICRn Registers. Note that when using the C-
programming language, the compiler handles the 16-bit access.
277
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Assembly Code Examples(1)
...
; Set TCNTn to 0x01FF
ldi r17,0x01
ldi r16,0xFF
out TCNTnH,r17
out TCNTnL,r16
; Read TCNTn into r17:r16
in r16,TCNTnL
in r17,TCNTnH
...
C Code Examples(1)
unsigned int i;
...
/* Set TCNTn to 0x01FF */
TCNTn = 0x1FF;
/* Read TCNTn into i */
i = TCNTn;
...
Notes: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8.
The assembly code example returns the TCNTn value in the r17:r16 register pair.
It is important to notice that accessing 16-bit registers are atomic operations. If an
interrupt occurs between the two instructions accessing the 16-bit register and the
interrupt code updates the temporary register by accessing the same or any other of the
16-bit Timer Registers, then the result of the access outside the interrupt will be
corrupted. Therefore the main code must disable the interrupts during the 16-bit access
when both the main code and the interrupt code update the temporary register.
The following code examples show how to do an atomic read of the TCNTn Register
contents. Reading any of the OCRnA/B/C or ICRn Registers can be done by using the
same principle.
The assembly code example returns the TCNTn value in the r17:r16 register pair.
Assembly Code Examples(1)
TIM16_ReadTCNTn:
; Save global interrupt flag
in r18,SREG
; Disable interrupts
cli
; Read TCNTn into r17:r16
in r16,TCNTnL
in r17,TCNTnH
; Restore global interrupt flag
out SREG,r18
ret
278
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Examples(1)
unsigned int TIM16_ReadTCNTn( void )
{
unsigned char sreg;
unsigned int i;
/* Save global interrupt flag */
sreg = SREG;
/* Disable interrupts */
__disable_interrupt();
/* Read TCNTn into i */
i = TCNTn;
/* Restore global interrupt flag */
SREG = sreg;
return i;
}
Notes: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8 .
The following code examples show how to do an atomic write of the TCNTn Register
contents. Writing any of the OCRnA/B/C or ICRn Registers can be done by using the
same principle.
The assembly code example requires that the r17:r16 register pair contains the value to
be written to TCNTn.
Assembly Code Examples(1)
TIM16_WriteTCNTn:
; Save global interrupt flag
in r18,SREG
; Disable interrupts
cli
; Set TCNTn to r17:r16
out TCNTnH,r17
out TCNTnL,r16
; Restore global interrupt flag
out SREG,r18
ret
279
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Examples(1)
void TIM16_WriteTCNTn( unsigned int i )
{
unsigned char sreg;
unsigned int i;
/* Save global interrupt flag */
sreg = SREG;
/* Disable interrupts */
__disable_interrupt();
/* Set TCNTn to i */
TCNTn = i;
/* Restore global interrupt flag */
SREG = sreg;
}
Notes: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8 .
18.3.1 Reusing the Temporary High Byte Register
If writing to more than one 16-bit register where the high byte is the same for all
registers written, then the high byte only needs to be written once. However note that
the same rule of atomic operation described previously also applies in this case.
18.4 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock
source is selected by the Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select
(CSn2:0) bits located in the Timer/Counter control Register B (TCCRnB). For details on
clock sources and prescaler, see "Timer/Counter 0, 1, 3, 4, and 5 Prescaler" on page
334.
18.5 Counter Unit
The main part of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable 16-bit bi-directional
counter unit. The following figure shows a block diagram of the counter and its
surroundings.
Figure 18-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram
TEMP (8-bit)
DATA BUS (8-bit)
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)
TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit) Control Logic
Count
Clear
Direction
TOVn
(Int.Req.)
Clock Select
TOP BOTTOM
Tn
Edge
Detector
( From Prescaler )
clkTn
Signal description (internal signals):
Count Increment or decrement TCNTn by 1;
Direction Select between increment and decrement;
280
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Clear Clear TCNTn (set all bits to zero);
clkTn Timer/Counter clock;
TOP Signalize that TCNTn has reached maximum value;
BOTTOM Signalize that TCNTn has reached minimum value (zero);
The 16-bit counter is mapped into two 8-bit I/O memory locations: Counter High
(TCNTnH) contains the upper eight bits of the counter and Counter Low (TCNTnL)
contains the lower eight bits. The TCNTnH Register can only be indirectly accessed by
the CPU. When the CPU does an access to the TCNTnH I/O location, the CPU
accesses the high byte temporary register (TEMP). The temporary register is updated
with the TCNTnH value when the TCNTnL is read and TCNTnH is updated with the
temporary register value when TCNTnL is written. This allows the CPU to read or write
the entire 16-bit counter value within one clock cycle via the 8-bit data bus. It is
important to notice that there are special cases of writing to the TCNTn Register giving
unpredictable results when the counter is running. These special cases are described in
the sections of their importance.
Depending on the mode of operation, the counter is cleared, incremented or
decremented at each timer clock (clkTn). The clkTn can be generated from an external or
internal clock source selected by the Clock Select bits (CSn2:0). The timer is stopped
when no clock source is selected (CSn2:0 = 0). However, the TCNTn value can be
accessed by the CPU independent of whether clkTn is present or not. A CPU write
overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the settings of the Waveform Generation
mode bits (WGMn3:0) located in the Timer/Counter Control Registers A and B
(TCCRnA and TCCRnB). There are close connections between how the counter
behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs
OCnx. For more details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation,
see "Modes of Operation" on page 286.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set according to the mode of operation
selected by the WGMn3:0 bits. TOVn can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
18.6 Input Capture Unit
The Timer/Counter incorporates an input capture unit that can capture external events
and give them a time-stamp indicating time of occurrence. The external signal indicating
an event, or multiple events, can be applied via the ICPn pin or alternatively, for the
Timer/Counter1 only, via the Analog Comparator unit. The time-stamps can then be
used to calculate frequency, duty-cycle and other features of the signal applied.
Alternatively the time-stamps can be used for creating a log of the events.
The Input Capture unit is illustrated by the block diagram shown in Figure 18-3. The
elements of the block diagram not direct parts of the input capture unit are gray shaded.
The small “n” in register and bit names indicates the Timer/Counter number.
A capture will be triggered when a change of the logic level (an event) occurs on the
Input Capture Pin (ICPn), or alternatively on the analog Comparator output (ACO), and
this change matches the setting of the edge detector. When a capture is triggered, the
16-bit value of the counter (TCNTn) is written to the Input Capture Register (ICRn). The
Input Capture Flag (ICFn) is set at the same system clock as the TCNTn value is
copied into ICRn Register. If enabled (TICIEn = 1), the input capture flag generates an
input capture interrupt. The ICFn flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is
executed. Alternatively the ICFn flag can be software-cleared by writing a logical one to
its I/O bit location.
281
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 18-3. Input Capture Unit Block Diagram
ICFn (Int.Req.)
Analog
Comparator
WRITE ICRn (16-bit Register)
ICRnH (8-bit)
Noise
Canceler
ICPn
Edge
Detector
TEMP (8-bit)
DATA BUS (8-bit)
ICRnL (8-bit)
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)
TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit)
ACIC* ICNC ICES
ACO*
Note: 1. The Analog Comparator Output (ACO) can only trigger the Timer/Counter1 ICP –
not Timer/Counter3, 4 or 5.
Reading the 16-bit value in the Input Capture Register (ICRn) is done by first reading
the low byte (ICRnL) and then the high byte (ICRnH). When the low byte is read the
high byte is copied into the high byte Temporary Register (TEMP). The CPU will access
the TEMP Register when reading the ICRnH I/O location.
The ICRn Register can only be written when using a Waveform Generation mode that
utilizes the ICRn Register for defining the counter’s TOP value. In these cases the
Waveform Generation mode (WGMn3:0) bits must be set before the TOP value can be
written to the ICRn Register. When writing the ICRn Register the high byte must be
written to the ICRnH I/O location before the low byte is written to ICRnL.
For more information on how to access the 16-bit registers refer to "Accessing 16-bit
Registers" on page 276.
18.6.1 Input Capture Trigger Source
The main trigger source for the input capture unit is the Input Capture Pin (ICPn).
Timer/Counter1 can alternatively use the analog comparator output as trigger source for
the input capture unit. The Analog Comparator is selected as trigger source by setting
the analog Comparator Input Capture (ACIC) bit in the Analog Comparator Control and
Status Register (ACSR). Be aware that changing trigger source can trigger a capture.
The input capture flag must therefore be cleared after the change.
Both the Input Capture Pin (ICPn) and the Analog Comparator output (ACO) inputs are
sampled using the same technique as for the Tn pin (Figure 19-1 on page 334). The
edge detector is also identical. However, when the noise canceller is enabled,
additional logic is inserted before the edge detector increasing the delay by four system
282
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
clock cycles. Note that the input of the noise canceller and edge detector is always
enabled unless the Timer/Counter is set in a Waveform Generation mode that uses
ICRn to define TOP.
An input capture can be software-triggered by controlling the port of the ICPn pin.
18.6.2 Noise Canceller
The noise canceller improves noise immunity by using a simple digital filtering scheme.
The noise canceller input is monitored over four samples and all four must be equal for
changing the output that in turn is used by the edge detector.
The noise canceller is enabled by setting the Input Capture Noise Canceller (ICNCn) bit
in Timer/Counter Control Register B (TCCRnB). When enabled the noise canceller
introduces additional four system clock cycles of delay from a change applied to the
input to the update of the ICRn Register. The noise canceller uses the system clock and
is therefore not affected by the prescaler.
18.6.3 Using the Input Capture Unit
The main challenge when using the Input Capture unit is to assign enough processor
capacity for handling the incoming events. The time between two events is critical. The
ICRn will be overwritten with a new value if the processor has not read the captured
value in the ICRn Register before the next event occurs. In this case the result of the
capture will be incorrect.
When using the Input Capture interrupt, the ICRn Register should be read as early in
the interrupt handler routine as possible. Even though the Input Capture interrupt has
relatively high priority, the maximum interrupt response time is dependent on the
maximum number of clock cycles it takes to handle any of the other interrupt requests.
It is not recommended to use the Input Capture unit in any mode of operation where the
TOP value (resolution) is actively changed while counting.
Measurement of the duty cycle of an external signal requires that the trigger edge is
changed after each capture. Changing the edge sensing must be done as early as
possible after the ICRn Register has been read. After a change of the edge, the Input
Capture Flag (ICFn) must be cleared by software (writing a logical one to the I/O bit
location). For measuring frequency only, the clearing of the ICFn Flag is not required (if
an interrupt handler is used).
18.7 Output Compare Units
The 16-bit comparator continuously compares TCNTn with the Output Compare
Register (OCRnx). If TCNTn equals OCRnx the comparator signals a match. A match
will set the Output Compare Flag (OCFnx) at the next clock cycle of the timer. If
enabled (OCIEnx = 1), the Output Compare Flag generates an Output Compare
interrupt. The OCFnx Flag is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed.
Alternatively the OCFnx Flag can be software-cleared by writing a logical one to its I/O
bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output
according to the Waveform Generation mode bits (WGMn3:0) and Compare Output
mode bits (COMnx1:0). The TOP and BOTTOM signals are used by the Waveform
Generator for handling the special cases of the extreme values in some modes of
operation (see "Modes of Operation" on page 286).
A special feature of Output Compare unit A allows it to define the Timer/Counter TOP
value i.e., the counter resolution. In addition to the counter resolution, the TOP value
defines the period time for waveforms generated by the Waveform Generator.
283
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 18-4 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. The small “n” in the
register and bit names indicates the device number (n = Timer/Counter n), and the “x”
indicates Output Compare unit A, B or C. The elements of the block diagram not direct
parts of the Output Compare unit are gray shaded.
Figure 18-4. Output Compare Unit Block Diagram
OCFnx (Int.Req.)
= (16-bit Comparator )
OCRnx Buffer (16-bit Register)
OCRnxH Buf. (8-bit)
OCnx
TEMP (8-bit)
DATA BUS (8-bit)
OCRnxL Buf. (8-bit)
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)
TCNTnH (8-bit) TCNTnL (8-bit)
COMnx1:0WGMn3:0
OCRnx (16-bit Register)
OCRnxH (8-bit) OCRnxL (8-bit)
Waveform Generator
TOP
BOTTOM
The OCRnx Register is double buffered when using any of the twelve Pulse Width
Modulation (PWM) modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes
of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the
update of the OCRnx Compare Register to either TOP or BOTTOM of the counting
sequence. The synchronization prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical
PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.
The OCRnx Register access may seem complex, but this is not the case. When the
double buffering is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCRnx Buffer Register. If
double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCRnx directly. The content of the
OCR1x (Buffer or Compare) Register is only changed by a write operation (the
Timer/Counter does not update this register automatically as the TCNT1 and ICR1
Register). Therefore OCR1x is not read via the high byte temporary register (TEMP).
However, it is a good practice to read the low byte first similar to accessing other 16-bit
registers. Writing the OCRnx Registers must be done via the TEMP Register since the
compare of all 16 bits is done continuously. The high byte (OCRnxH) has to be written
first. The TEMP Register will be updated with the value written by the CPU to the high
byte I/O location. Then when the low byte (OCRnxL) is written to the lower eight bits,
the high byte will be copied into the upper 8-bits of either the OCRnx buffer or OCRnx
Compare Register in the same system clock cycle.
For more information of how to access the 16-bit registers refer to "Accessing 16-bit
Registers" on page 276.
284
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.7.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM Waveform Generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be
forced by writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOCnx) bit. Forcing compare
match will not set the OCFnx Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OCnx pin will be
updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COMn1:0 bits settings define
whether the OCnx pin is set, cleared or toggled).
18.7.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNTn Write
All CPU writes to the TCNTn Register will block any compare match that occurs in the
next clock cycle of the timer even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCRnx
to be initialized to the same value as TCNTn without triggering an interrupt when the
Timer/Counter clock is enabled.
18.7.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNTn in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one
timer clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNTn using any of the
Output Compare channels, independent of whether the Timer/Counter is running or not.
If the value written to TCNTn equals the OCRnx value, the compare match will be
missed resulting in incorrect waveform generation. Do not write the TCNTn equal to
TOP in PWM modes with variable TOP values. The compare match for the TOP will be
ignored and the counter will continue to 0xFFFF. Similarly, do not write the TCNTn
value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is down-counting.
The setup of the OCnx should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register
for the port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OCnx value is to use the Force
Output Compare (FOCnx) strobe bits in Normal mode. The OCnx Register keeps its
value even when changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COMnx1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare
value. A change of the COMnx1:0 bits will immediately take effect.
18.8 Compare Match Output Unit
The Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform
Generator uses the COMnx1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OCnx) state at the
next compare match. Secondly the COMnx1:0 bits control the OCnx pin output source.
Figure 18-5 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COMnx1:0 bit
setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the
parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers (DDR and PORT) that are affected by
the COMnx1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OCnx state, the reference is to the
internal OCnx Register and not to the OCnx pin. After a system reset the OCnx
Register will have a value of “0”.
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OCnx) from the
Waveform Generator if either of the COMnx1:0 bits are set. However, the OCnx pin
direction (input or output) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the
port pin. The Data Direction Register bit for the OCnx pin (DDR_OCnx) must be set as
output before the OCnx value is visible on the pin. The port override function is
generally independent of the Waveform Generation mode, but there are some
exceptions. Refer to Table 18-2, Table 18-3 and Table 18-4 on page 286 for details.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OCnx state
before the output is enabled. Note that some COMnx1:0 bit settings are reserved for
certain modes of operation (see section "Register Description" on page 296).
The COMnx1:0 bits have no effect on the Input Capture unit.
285
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 18-5. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
PORT
DDR
D Q
D Q
OCnx
Pin
OCnx
D Q
Waveform
Generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BUS
FOCnx
clkI/O
18.8.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COMnx1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC and PWM
modes. A setting of COMnx1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator in all modes that no
action on the OCnx Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For
compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 18-2. For fast PWM
mode refer to Table 18-3 and for phase-correct and phase-and-frequency-correct PWM
refer to Table 18-4.
A change of the COMnx1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after
the bits are written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate
effect by using the FOCnx strobe bits.
Table 18-2 shows the COMnx1:0 bit functionality when the WGMn3:0 bits are set to a
normal or a CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 18-2. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM
COMnA1
COMnB1
COMnC1
COMnA0
COMnB0
COMnC0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC disconnected.
0 1 Toggle OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match.
1 0 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match (set output to low
level).
1 1 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match (set output to high
level).
Table 18-3 shows the COMnx1:0 bit functionality when the WGMn3:0 bits are set to the
fast PWM mode.
286
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 18-3. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM
COMnA1
COMnB1
COMnC1
COMnA0
COMnB0
COMnC0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC disconnected.
0 1
WGM13:0 = 14 or 15: Toggle OC1A on Compare Match, OC1B and
OC1C disconnected (normal port operation). For all other WGM1
settings, normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B/OC1C disconnected.
1 0 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match; set
OCnA/OCnB/OCnC at BOTTOM (non-inverting mode).
1 1 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match, clear
OCnA/OCnB/OCnC at BOTTOM (inverting mode).
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCRnA/OCRnB/OCRnC equals TOP and
COMnA1/COMnB1/COMnC1 is set. In this case the compare match is ignored, but
the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See "Fast PWM Mode" on page 288 for more
details.
Table 18-4 shows the COMnx1:0 bit functionality when the WGMn3:0 bits are set to the
phase correct and phase and frequency correct PWM mode.
Table 18-4. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct and Phase/Frequency Correct
PWM
COMnA1
COMnB1
COMnC1
COMnA0
COMnB0
COMnC0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC disconnected.
0 1
WGM13:0 =9 or 11: Toggle OC1A on Compare Match, OC1B and
OC1C disconnected (normal port operation). For all other WGM1
settings, normal port operation, OC1A/OC1B/OC1C disconnected.
1 0 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match when up-counting.
Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match when down-counting.
1 1 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match when up-counting.
Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on compare match when down-counting.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCRnA/OCRnB/OCRnC equals TOP and
COMnA1/COMnB1/COMnC1 is set. See "Phase and Frequency Correct PWM
Mode" on page 292 for more details.
18.9 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare
pins, is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGMn3:0) and
the Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode bits do not
affect the counting sequence, but the Waveform Generation mode bits do. The
COMnx1:0 bits control whether the PWM output generated should be inverted or not
(inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COMnx1:0 bits control if the
output should be set, cleared or toggle at a compare match (See "Compare Match
Output Unit" on page 284)
287
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 18-5. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description (1)
Mode WGMn3
WGMn2
(CTCn)
WGMn1
(PWMn1)
WGMn0)
(PWMn0)
Timer/Counter
Mode of Operation TOP
Update of
OCRnx at
TOVn Flag
Set on
0 0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFFFF Immediate MAX
1 0 0 0 1 PWM, Phase Correct, 8-bit 0x00FF TOP BOTTOM
2 0 0 1 0 PWM, Phase Correct, 9-bit 0x01FF TOP BOTTOM
3 0 0 1 1 PWM, Phase Correct, 10-bit 0x3FF TOP BOTTOM
4 0 1 0 0 CTC OCRnA Immediate MAX
5 0 1 0 1 Fast PWM, 8-bit 0x00FF BOTTOM TOP
6 0 1 1 0 Fast PWM, 9-bit 0x01FF BOTTOM TOP
7 0 1 1 1 Fast PWM, 10-bit 0x03FF BOTTOM TOP
8 1 0 0 0 PWM, Phase and Frequency
Correct ICRn BOTTOM BOTTOM
9 1 0 0 1 PWM, Phase and Frequency
Correct OCRnA BOTTOM BOTTOM
10 1 0 1 0 PWM, Phase Correct ICRn TOP BOTTOM
11 1 0 1 1 PWM, Phase Correct OCRnA TOP BOTTOM
12 1 1 0 0 CTC ICRn Immediate MAX
13 1 1 0 1 (Reserved) – – –
14 1 1 1 0 Fast PWM ICRn BOTTOM TOP
15 1 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRnA BOTTOM TOP
Notes: 1. The CTCn and PWMn1:0 bit definition names are obsolete. Use the WGMn2:0 definitions. However, the functionality
and location of these bits are compatible with previous versions of the timer.
For detailed timing information refer to "Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams" on page 294.
18.9.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGMn3:0 = 0). In this mode the
counting direction is always up (incrementing) and no counter clear is performed. The
counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 16-bit value (MAX = 0xFFFF) and
then restarts from the BOTTOM (0x0000). In normal operation the Timer/Counter
Overflow Flag (TOVn) will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNTn becomes
zero. In this case the TOVn Flag behaves like a 17th bit, except that it is only set and not
cleared. However the timer resolution can be increased by software when combined
with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOVn Flag. There are no
special cases to consider in the Normal mode. A new counter value can be written
anytime.
The Input Capture unit is easy to use in Normal mode. However it is important to note
that the maximum interval between the external events must not exceed the resolution
of the counter. The timer overflow interrupt or the prescaler must be used to extend the
resolution for the capture unit if the intervals between events are too long.
The Output Compare units can be used to generate interrupts at some given time.
Using the Output Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not
recommended because this will occupy too much CPU time.
18.9.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) mode (WGMn3:0 = 4 or 12), the OCRnA or ICRn
Register are used to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is
288
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNTn) matches either the OCRnA (WGMn3:0
= 4) or the ICRn (WGMn3:0 = 12). The OCRnA or ICRn define the top value for the
counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare
match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in the following figure. The counter
value (TCNTn) increases until a compare match occurs with either OCRnA or ICRn,
and then counter (TCNTn) is cleared.
Figure 18-6. CTC Mode Timing Diagram
TCNTn
OCnA
(Toggle)
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
1 4
Period 2 3
(COMnA1:0 = 1)
Each time the counter reaches the TOP value an interrupt can be generated by either
the OCFnA or ICFn Flag according to the register used to define the TOP value. If the
interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP
value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when the counter is
running with no or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode
does not have the double buffering feature. The counter will miss the compare match if
the new value written to OCRnA or ICRn is lower than the current value of TCNTn. The
counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFFFF) and wrap around
starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can occur. In many cases this feature is
not desirable. The fast PWM mode is available as an alternative using OCRnA for
defining TOP (WGMn3:0 = 15). The OCRnA then will be double buffered.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OCnA output can be set to toggle
its logical level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to
toggle mode (COMnA1:0 = 1). The OCnA value will not be visible on the port pin unless
the data direction for the pin is set to output (DDR_OCnA = 1). The waveform
generated will have a maximum frequency of fOCnA = fclkI/O/2 when OCRnA is set to zero
(0x0000). The waveform frequency is given by the following equation:
)1(2
/
OCRnAN
f
fOclkI
OCnA +⋅⋅
=
The N variable represents the prescaler factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOVn Flag is set in the same clock cycle of
the timer when the counter changes from MAX to 0x0000.
18.9.3 Fast PWM Mode
The fast Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode (WGMn3:0 = 5, 6, 7, 14 or 15) provides
a high frequency PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the
other PWM options by its single-slope operation. The counter counts from BOTTOM to
TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output
Compare (OCnx) is cleared on the compare match between TCNTn and OCRnx, and
289
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
OCnx is set at BOTTOM. In inverting Compare Output mode output is set on compare
match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-slope operation, the operating
frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase-correct and phase
and frequency correct PWM modes that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency
makes the fast PWM mode well suited for power regulation, rectification and DAC
applications. High frequency allows physically small sized external components (coils,
capacitors), hence reducing total system cost.
The PWM resolution for fast PWM can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either
ICRn or OCRnA. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to
0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to MAX). The PWM
resolution RFPWM in bits can be calculated with the following equation:
)2log(
)1log(
+
=TOP
RFPWM
In fast PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either
one of the fixed values 0x00FF, 0x01FF or 0x03FF (WGMn3:0 = 5, 6 or 7), the value in
ICRn (WGMn3:0 = 14) or the value in OCRnA (WGMn3:0 = 15). The counter is then
cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast PWM mode is
shown in Figure 18-7. The figure shows fast PWM mode when OCRnA or ICRn is used
to define TOP. The TCNTn value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for
illustrating the single-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted
PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNTn slopes represent compare
matches between OCRnx and TCNTn. The OCnx Interrupt Flag will be set when a
compare match occurs.
Figure 18-7. Fast PWM Mode Timing Diagram
TCNTn
OCRnx / TOP Update
and TOVn Interrupt Flag
Set and OCnA Interrupt
Flag Set or ICFn
Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
1 7
Period 2 3 4 5 6 8
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. In
addition the OCnA or ICFn Flag is set at the same timer clock cycle as TOVn is set
when either OCRnA or ICRn is used to define the TOP value. If one of the interrupts are
enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be utilized for updating the TOP and compare
values.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is
higher or equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. A compare match will
never occur between the TCNTn and the OCRnx if the TOP value is lower than any of
the Compare Registers. Note that when working with fixed TOP values the unused bits
are masked to zero when any of the OCRnx Registers are written.
290
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The procedure for updating ICRn differs from updating OCRnA when used for defining
the TOP value. The ICRn Register is not double buffered. This means that if ICRn is
changed to a low value while the counter is running with no or a low prescaler value,
there is a risk that the newly written ICRn value is lower than the current value of
TCNTn. In consequence the counter will miss the compare match at the TOP value.
The counter must then count to the MAX value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at
0x0000 before the compare match can occur. The OCRnA Register is double buffered
though. This feature allows writing the OCRnA I/O location at anytime. When the
OCRnA I/O location is written the new value will be put first into the OCRnA Buffer
Register. The OCRnA Compare Register will then be updated with the value in the
Buffer Register at the next clock cycle of the timer when TCNTn matches TOP. The
update is done at the same timer clock cycle as the TCNTn is cleared and the TOVn
Flag is set.
The definition of TOP with the ICRn Register works well for fixed TOP values.
Combined with ICRn, the OCRnA Register is free to be used for generating a PWM
output on OCnA. However, if the base PWM frequency is actively changed (by
modifying the TOP value), working with the OCRnA as TOP is clearly a better choice
due to its double buffer feature.
In fast PWM mode the compare units allow the generation of PWM waveforms on the
OCnx pins. Setting the COMnx1:0 bits to 2 will produce a non-inverted PWM and an
inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COMnx1:0 to 3 (see Table 18-3
on page 286). The actual OCnx value will only be visible on the port pin if the data
direction of the port pin is set to output (DDR_OCnx). The PWM waveform is generated
by setting (or clearing) the OCnx Register at the compare match between OCRnx and
TCNTn, and by clearing (or setting) the OCnx Register at the timer clock cycle the
counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
The PWM frequency of the output fOCnxPWM can be calculated with the following
equation:
)1(
/
TOPN
f
fOclkI
OCnxPWM +⋅
=
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256 or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCRnx Register represent special cases when generating a
PWM waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCRnx is set equal to BOTTOM
(0x0000), the output will be a narrow spike for each TOP+1 timer clock cycle. Setting
the OCRnx equal to TOP will result in a constant high or low output (depending on the
polarity of the output set by the COMnx1:0 bits.)
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved
by setting OCnA to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COMnA1:0 = 1).
This applies only if OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 15). The
waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOCnA = fclkI/O/2 when OCRnA is
set to zero (0x0000). This feature is similar to the OCnA toggle in CTC mode, except
the double buffer feature of the Output Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
18.9.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode (WGMn3:0 = 1, 2, 3, 10 or 11)
provides a high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase
correct PWM mode is, like the phase and frequency correct PWM mode, based on a
dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP
and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output
Compare (OCnx) is cleared on the compare match between TCNTn and OCRnx while
291
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
up-counting, and set on the compare match while down-counting. In inverting Output
Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has a lower
maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However these modes are
preferred for motor control applications due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope
PWM modes.
The PWM resolution for the phase correct PWM mode can be fixed to 8, 9 or 10 bit, or
be defined by either ICRn or OCRnA. The minimum resolution allowed is 2 bit (ICRn or
OCRnA set to 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to
MAX). The PWM resolution RPCPWM in bits can be calculated with the following equation:
)2log(
)1log(
+
=TOP
RPCPWM
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches
either one of the fixed values 0x00FF, 0x01FF or 0x03FF (WGMn3:0 = 1, 2, or 3), the
value in ICRn (WGMn3:0 = 10) or the value in OCRnA (WGMn3:0 = 11). The counter
has then reached the TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNTn value will be
equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM
mode is shown on Figure 18-8 below. The figure shows phase correct PWM mode
when OCRnA or ICRn is used to define TOP. The TCNTn value is shown in the timing
diagram as a histogram illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-
inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNTn
slopes represent compare matches between OCRnx and TCNTn. The OCnx Interrupt
Flag will be set when a compare match occurs.
Figure 18-8. Phase Correct PWM Mode Timing Diagram
OCRnx/TOP Update and
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
1 2 3 4
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on Bottom)
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set each time the counter reaches
BOTTOM. When either OCRnA or ICRn is used for defining the TOP value, the OCnA
or ICFn Flag is set accordingly at the same timer clock cycle as the OCRnx Registers
are updated with the double buffer value (at TOP). The Interrupt Flags can be used to
generate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is
higher or equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower
than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the
292
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
TCNTn and the OCRnx. Note that when working with fixed TOP values, the unused bits
are masked to zero when any of the OCRnx Registers are written. As the third period
shown in Figure 18-8 illustrates, changing the TOP actively while the Timer/Counter is
running in the phase correct mode can result in an asymmetrical output. The reason for
this can be found in the update time of the OCRnx Register. Since the OCRnx update
occurs at TOP, the PWM period starts and ends at TOP. This implies that the length of
the falling slope is determined by the previous TOP value, while the length of the rising
slope is determined by the new TOP value. When these two values are not equal the
two slopes of the period will differ in length. The difference in length gives the
asymmetrical result of the output.
It is recommended to use the phase and frequency correct mode instead of the phase
correct mode when changing the TOP value while the Timer/Counter is running. When
using a static TOP value there are practically no differences between the two modes of
operation.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generating PWM waveforms on
the OCnx pins. Setting the COMnx1:0 bits to 2 will produce a non-inverted PWM. An
inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COMnx1:0 to 3 (see Table 18-4
on page 286). The actual OCnx value will only be visible on the port pin if the data
direction of the port pin is set to output (DDR_OCnx). The PWM waveform is generated
by setting (or clearing) the OCnx Register at the compare match between OCRnx and
TCNTn when the counter increments, and by clearing (or setting) the OCnx Register at
compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn when the counter decrements. The PWM
frequency of the output fOCnxPCPWM when using phase-correct PWM can be calculated
with the following equation:
)2
/
TOPN
f
fOclkI
OCnxPCPWM ⋅⋅
=
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCRnx Register represent special cases when generating a
PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCRnx is set equal to
BOTTOM the output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the output will be
continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have
the opposite logic values. If OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 11)
and COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output will toggle with a 50% duty cycle.
18.9.5 Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode
The phase and frequency correct Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode (WGMn3:0 = 8
or 9) provides a high resolution phase and frequency correct PWM waveform
generation option. The phase and frequency correct PWM mode is, like the phase
correct PWM mode, based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly
from BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting
Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OCnx) is cleared on the compare match
between TCNTn and OCRnx while up-counting, and set on the compare match while
down-counting. In inverting Compare Output mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-
slope operation gives a lower maximum operation frequency compared to the single-
slope operation. However these modes are preferred for motor control applications due
to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes.
The main difference between the phase correct and the phase and frequency correct
PWM mode is the time the OCRnx Register is updated by the OCRnx Buffer Register,
(see Figure 18-8 on page 291 and Figure 18-9 on page 293).
293
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The PWM resolution for the phase and frequency correct PWM mode can be defined by
either ICRn or OCRnA. The minimum resolution allowed is 2 bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to
0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16 bit (ICRn or OCRnA set to MAX). The PWM
resolution RPFCPWM in bits can be calculated with the following equation:
)2log(
)1log(
+
=TOP
RPFCPWM
In phase and frequency correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter
value matches either the value in ICRn (WGMn3:0 = 8), or the value in OCRnA
(WGMn3:0 = 9). The counter has then reached TOP and changes the count direction.
The TCNTn value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for
the phase correct and frequency correct PWM mode is shown in Figure 18-9 below.
The figure shows phase and frequency correct PWM mode when OCRnA or ICRn is
used to define TOP. The TCNTn value is shown in the timing diagram as a histogram
for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted
PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNTn slopes represent compare
matches between OCRnx and TCNTn. The OCnx Interrupt Flag will be set when a
compare match occurs.
Figure 18-9. Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode Timing Diagram
OCRnx/TOP Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on Bottom)
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set
(Interrupt on TOP)
1 2 3 4
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOVn) is set at the timer clock cycle when the
OCRnx Registers are updated with the double-buffered value (at BOTTOM). The OCnA
or ICFn Flag is set after TCNTn has reached TOP when either OCRnA or ICRn is used
for defining the TOP value. The Interrupt Flags can then be used to generate an
interrupt each time the counter reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value.
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is
higher or equal to the value of all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower
than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will never occur between the
TCNTn and the OCRnx.
As Figure 18-9 shows the output generated is, in contrast to the phase correct mode,
symmetrical in all periods. Since the OCRnx Registers are updated at BOTTOM, the
length of the rising and the falling slopes will always be equal. This gives symmetrical
output pulses and is therefore frequency correct.
294
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The definition of TOP with the ICRn Register works well when using fixed TOP values.
Combined with ICRn the OCRnA Register is available for generating a PWM output on
OCnA. However, if the base PWM frequency is actively changed by modifying the TOP
value, using the OCRnA as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer
feature.
In phase and frequency correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generating PWM
waveforms on the OCnx pins. Setting the COMnx1:0 bits to 2 will produce a non-
inverted PWM. An inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COMnx1:0 to
3 (see Table 18-4 on page 286). The actual OCnx value will only be visible at the port
pin if the data direction of the port pin is set to output (DDR_OCnx). The PWM
waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OCnx Register at the compare match
between OCRnx and TCNTn when the counter increments, and by clearing (or setting)
the OCnx Register at compare match between OCRnx and TCNTn when the counter
decrements. The PWM frequency of the output fOCnxPFCPWM when using phase and
frequency correct PWM can be calculated with the following equation:
)2
/
TOPN
f
fOclkI
OCnxPFCPWM ⋅⋅
=
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCRnx Register represent special cases when generating a
PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCRnx is set equal to
BOTTOM the output will be continuously low and if set equal to TOP the output will be
set to high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the
opposite logic values. If OCR1A is used to define the TOP value (WGM13:0 = 9) and
COM1A1:0 = 1, the OC1A output will toggle with a 50% duty cycle.
18.10 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkTn) is therefore
shown as a clock enable signal in the following figures. The figures include information
on when Interrupt Flags are set and when the OCRnx Register is updated with the
OCRnx buffer value (only for modes utilizing double buffering). Figure 18-10 shows a
timing diagram for the setting of OCFnx.
Figure 18-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCFnx, no Prescaling
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
OCFnx
clkI/O
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
295
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 18-11 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 18-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCFnx with Prescaler (fclkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
Figure 18-12 shows the count sequence close to TOP in various modes. When using
phase and frequency correct PWM mode the OCRnx Register is updated at BOTTOM.
The timing diagrams will be the same, but TOP should be replaced by BOTTOM, TOP-
1 by BOTTOM+1 and so on. The same renaming applies for modes that set the TOVn
Flag at BOTTOM.
Figure 18-12. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
TOVn (FPWM)
and ICFn (if used
as TOP)
OCRnx
(Update at TOP)
TCNTn
(CTC and FPWM)
TCNTn
(PC and PFC PWM) TOP - 1 TOP TOP - 1 TOP - 2
Old OCRnx Value New OCRnx Value
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
clkI/O
296
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 18-13 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 18-13. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram with Prescaler (fclkI/O/8)
TOVn (FPWM)
and ICFn (if used
as TOP)
OCRnx
(Update at TOP)
TCNTn
(CTC and FPWM)
TCNTn
(PC and PFC PWM) TOP - 1 TOP TOP - 1 TOP - 2
Old OCRnx Value New OCRnx Value
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clk
I/O
clk
Tn
(clk
I/O
/8)
18.11 Register Description
18.11.1 TCCR1A – Timer/Counter1 Control Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($80) COM1A1
COM1A0
COM1B1
COM1B0
COM1C1
COM1C0
WGM11 WGM10
TCCR1A
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – COM1A1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel A
The COM1A1:0 bits control the output compare behavior of pin OC1A. If one or both of
the COM1A1:0 bits are written to one, the OC1A output overrides the normal port
functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However note that the Data Direction
Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC1A pin must be set in order to enable the
output driver. When the OC1A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM1A1:0
bits is dependent of the WGM13:0 bits setting. The following table shows the
COM1A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-6 COM1A Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM1A1:0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC
disconnected.
1 Toggle OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match.
2 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match (set output to low level).
3 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare Match
(set output to high level).
• Bit 5:4 – COM1B1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel B
297
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The COM1B1:0 bits control the output compare behavior of pin OC1B. If one or both of
the COM1B1:0 bits are written to one, the OC1B output overrides the normal port
functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However note that the Data Direction
Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC1B pin must be set in order to enable the
output driver. When the OC1A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM1B1:0
bits is dependent of the WGM13:0 bits setting. The following table shows the
COM1B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-7 COM1B Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM1B1:0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC
disconnected.
1 Toggle OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match.
2 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match (set output to low level).
3 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare Match
(set output to high level).
• Bit 3:2 – COM1C1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel C
The COM1C1:0 bits control the output compare behavior of pin OC1C. If one or both of
the COM1C1:0 bits are written to one, the OC1C output overrides the normal port
functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However note that the Data Direction
Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC1C pin must be set in order to enable the
output driver. When the OC1A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM1C1:0
bits is dependent of the WGM13:0 bits setting. The following table shows the
COM1C1:0 bit functionality when the WGM13:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-8 COM1C Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM1C1:0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC
disconnected.
1 Toggle OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match.
2 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match (set output to low level).
3 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare Match
(set output to high level).
• Bit 1:0 – WGM11:10 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM13:12 bits, found in the TCCR1B Register, these bits control
the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value
and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC)
mode, and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For more information
on the different modes see section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-9 WGM1 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WGM13:10 0x0 Normal mode of operation
0x1 PWM, phase correct, 8-bit
298
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x2 PWM, phase correct, 9-bit
0x3 PWM, phase correct, 10-bit
0x4 CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0x5 Fast PWM, 8-bit
0x6 Fast PWM, 9-bit
0x7 Fast PWM, 10-bit
0x8 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
ICRn
0x9 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
OCRnA
0xA PWM, Phase correct, TOP = ICRn
0xB PWM, Phase correct, TOP = OCRnA
0xC CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0xD Reserved
0xE Fast PWM, TOP = ICRn
0xF Fast PWM, TOP = OCRnA
18.11.2 TCCR1B – Timer/Counter1 Control Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($81) ICNC1 ICES1 Res WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 TCCR1B
Read/Write RW RW R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – ICNC1 - Input Capture 1 Noise Canceller
Setting this bit (to one) activates the Input Capture Noise Canceler. When the Noise
Canceler is activated, the input from the Input Capture Pin (ICP1) is filtered. The filter
function requires four successive equal valued samples of the ICP1 pin for changing its
output. The input capture is therefore delayed by four Oscillator cycles when the noise
canceler is enabled.
• Bit 6 – ICES1 - Input Capture 1 Edge Select
This bit selects which edge on the Input Capture Pin (ICP1) that is used to trigger a
capture event. When the ICES1 bit is written to zero, a falling (negative) edge is used
as trigger. When the ICES1 bit is written to one, a rising (positive) edge will trigger the
capture. When a capture is triggered according to the ICES1 setting, the counter value
is copied into the Input Capture Register (ICR1). The event will also set the Input
Capture Flag (ICF1). This can be used to cause an Input Capture Interrupt, if this
interrupt is enabled. When the ICR1 is used as TOP value (see description of the
WGM13:0 bits located in the TCCR1A and the TCCR1B Register), the ICP1 is
disconnected and consequently the input capture function is disabled.
• Bit 5 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 4:3 – WGM13:12 - Waveform Generation Mode
299
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Combined with the WGM11:10 bits, found in the TCCR1A Register, these bits control
the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value
and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC)
mode, and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For more information
on the different modes see section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-10 WGM1 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WGM13:10 0x0 Normal mode of operation
0x1 PWM, phase correct, 8-bit
0x2 PWM, phase correct, 9-bit
0x3 PWM, phase correct, 10-bit
0x4 CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0x5 Fast PWM, 8-bit
0x6 Fast PWM, 9-bit
0x7 Fast PWM, 10-bit
0x8 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
ICRn
0x9 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
OCRnA
0xA PWM, Phase correct, TOP = ICRn
0xB PWM, Phase correct, TOP = OCRnA
0xC CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0xD Reserved
0xE Fast PWM, TOP = ICRn
0xF Fast PWM, TOP = OCRnA
• Bit 2:0 – CS12:10 - Clock Select
The three clock select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter1
according to the following table. If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter1,
transitions on the T1 pin will clock the counter even if the pin is configured as an output.
This feature allows software control of the counting.
Table 18-11 CS1 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CS12:10 0x00 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
0x01 clkIO/1 (no prescaling)
0x02 clkIO/8 (from prescaler)
0x03 clkIO/64 (from prescaler)
0x04 clkIO/256 (from prescaler)
0x05 clkIO/1024 (from prescaler)
0x06 External clock source on Tn pin, clock on
falling edge
0x07 External clock source on Tn pin, clock on
rising edge
300
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.3 TCCR1C – Timer/Counter1 Control Register C
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($82) FOC1A FOC1B FOC1C Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 TCCR1C
Read/Write RW RW RW R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – FOC1A - Force Output Compare for Channel A
The FOC1A bit is only active when the WGM13:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC1A bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the
waveform generation unit. The OC1A output is changed according to its COM1A1:0 bits
setting. Note that the FOC1A bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the value
present in the COM1A1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC1A strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR1A as TOP. The FOC1A bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC1B - Force Output Compare for Channel B
The FOC1B bit is only active when the WGM13:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC1B bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the
waveform generation unit. The OC1B output is changed according to its COM1B1:0 bits
setting. Note that the FOC1B bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the value
present in the COM1B1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC1B strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR1B as TOP. The FOC1B bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 5 – FOC1C - Force Output Compare for Channel C
The FOC1C bit is only active when the WGM13:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC1C bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the
waveform generation unit. The OC1C output is changed according to its COM1C1:0 bits
setting. Note that the FOC1C bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the value
present in the COM1C1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC1C strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR1C as TOP. The FOC1C bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 4:0 – Res4:0 - Reserved
These bits are reserved for future use.
18.11.4 TCNT1H – Timer/Counter1 High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($85) TCNT1H7:0 TCNT1H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT1H and TCNT1L, combined TCNT1) give
direct access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit
counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously
when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit
temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other
301
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details. Modifying the
counter (TCNT1) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare
match between TCNT1 and one of the OCR1x Registers. Writing to the TCNT1
Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all
compare units.
• Bit 7:0 – TCNT1H7:0 - Timer/Counter1 High Byte
18.11.5 TCNT1L – Timer/Counter1 Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($84) TCNT1L7:0 TCNT1L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT1H and TCNT1L, combined TCNT1) give
direct access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit
counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously
when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit
temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other
16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details. Modifying the
counter (TCNT1) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare
match between TCNT1 and one of the OCR1x Registers. Writing to the TCNT1
Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all
compare units.
• Bit 7:0 – TCNT1L7:0 - Timer/Counter1 Low Byte
18.11.6 OCR1AH – Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register A High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($89) OCR1AH7:0 OCR1AH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT1). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC1A pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR1AH7:0 - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register High Byte
18.11.7 OCR1AL – Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register A Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($88) OCR1AL7:0 OCR1AL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
302
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT1). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC1A pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR1AL7:0 - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register Low Byte
18.11.8 OCR1BH – Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register B High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($8B) OCR1BH7:0 OCR1BH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT1). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC1B pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR1BH7:0 - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register High Byte
18.11.9 OCR1BL – Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register B Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($8A) OCR1BL7:0 OCR1BL
Read/Write R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT1). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC1B pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR1BL7:0 - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register Low Byte
303
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.10 OCR1CH – Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register C High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($8D) OCR1CH7:0 OCR1CH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT1). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC1C pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR1CH7:0 - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register High Byte
18.11.11 OCR1CL – Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register C Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($8C) OCR1CL7:0 OCR1CL
Read/Write R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT1). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC1C pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR1CL7:0 - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Register Low Byte
18.11.12 ICR1H – Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($87) ICR1H7:0 ICR1H
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Input Capture Register is updated with the counter (TCNT1) value each time an
event occurs on the ICP1 pin or on the Analog Comparator output. The Input Capture
Register can be used for defining the counter TOP value. The Input Capture Register is
16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read simultaneously when
the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary
High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit
registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – ICR1H7:0 - Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register High Byte
304
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.13 ICR1L – Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($86) ICR1L7:0 ICR1L
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Input Capture Register is updated with the counter (TCNT1) value each time an
event occurs on the ICP1 pin or on the Analog Comparator output. The Input Capture
Register can be used for defining the counter TOP value. The Input Capture Register is
16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read simultaneously when
the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary
High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit
registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – ICR1L7:0 - Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register Low Byte
18.11.14 TIMSK1 – Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Mask Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($6F) Res1 Res0 ICIE1 Res OCIE1C OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 TIMSK1
Read/Write R R RW R R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5 – ICIE1 - Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt is enabled. The
corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the ICF1 Flag, located in TIFR1, is
set.
• Bit 4 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3 – OCIE1C - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare C Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare C Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF1C Flag, located in
TIFR1, is set.
• Bit 2 – OCIE1B - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare B Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare B Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF1B Flag, located in
TIFR1, is set.
• Bit 1 – OCIE1A - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare A Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Output Compare A Match interrupt is enabled.
305
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF1A Flag, located in
TIFR1, is set.
• Bit 0 – TOIE1 - Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding
Interrupt Vector is executed when the TOV1 Flag, located in TIFR1, is set.
18.11.15 TIFR1 – Timer/Counter1 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$16 ($36) Res1 Res0 ICF1 Res OCF1C OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 TIFR1
Read/Write R R RW R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5 – ICF1 - Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Flag
This flag is set when a capture event occurs on the ICP1 pin. When the Input Capture
Register (ICR1) is set by the WGM13:0 to be used as the TOP value, the ICF1 Flag is
set when the counter reaches the TOP value. ICF1 is automatically cleared when the
Input Capture Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, ICF1 can be cleared by writing
a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 4 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3 – OCF1C - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare C Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT1) value matches the
Output Compare Register C (OCR1C). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC1C)
strobe will not set the OCF1C Flag. OCF1C is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match C Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF1C can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 2 – OCF1B - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare B Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT1) value matches the
Output Compare Register B (OCR1B). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC1B)
strobe will not set the OCF1B Flag. OCF1B is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match B Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF1B can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 1 – OCF1A - Timer/Counter1 Output Compare A Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT1) value matches the
Output Compare Register A (OCR1A). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC1A)
strobe will not set the OCF1A Flag. OCF1A is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match A Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF1A can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 0 – TOV1 - Timer/Counter1 Overflow Flag
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM13:0 bits setting of the Timer/Counter1
Control Register. In Normal and CTC modes, the TOV1 Flag is set when the timer
306
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
overflows. TOV1 is automatically cleared when the Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt
Vector is executed. Alternatively, TOV1 can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit
location.
18.11.16 TCCR3A – Timer/Counter3 Control Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($90) COM3A1
COM3A0
COM3B1
COM3B0
COM3C1
COM3C0
WGM31 WGM30
TCCR3A
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – COM3A1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel A
The COM3A1:0 bits control the output compare behavior of pin OC3A. If one or both of
the COM3A1:0 bits are written to one, the OC3A output overrides the normal port
functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However note that the Data Direction
Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC3A pin must be set in order to enable the
output driver. When the OC3A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM3A1:0
bits is dependent of the WGM33:0 bits setting. The following table shows the
COM3A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM33:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-12 COM3A Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM3A1:0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC
disconnected.
1 Toggle OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match.
2 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match (set output to low level).
3 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare Match
(set output to high level).
• Bit 5:4 – COM3B1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel B
The COM3B1:0 bits control the output compare behavior of pin OC3B. If one or both of
the COM3B1:0 bits are written to one, the OC3B output overrides the normal port
functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However note that the Data Direction
Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC3B pin must be set in order to enable the
output driver. When the OC3B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM3B1:0
bits is dependent of the WGM33:0 bits setting. The following table shows the
COM3B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM33:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-13 COM3B Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM3B1:0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC
disconnected.
1 Toggle OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match.
2 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match (set output to low level).
3 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare Match
307
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
(set output to high level).
• Bit 3:2 – COM3C1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel C
The COM3C1:0 bits control the output compare behavior of pin OC3C. If one or both of
the COM3C1:0 bits are written to one, the OC3C output overrides the normal port
functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to. However note that the Data Direction
Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC3C pin must be set in order to enable the
output driver. When the OC3C is connected to the pin, the function of the COM3C1:0
bits is dependent of the WGM33:0 bits setting. The following table shows the
COM3C1:0 bit functionality when the WGM33:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-14 COM3C Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM3C1:0 0 Normal port operation, OCnA/OCnB/OCnC
disconnected.
1 Toggle OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match.
2 Clear OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare
Match (set output to low level).
3 Set OCnA/OCnB/OCnC on Compare Match
(set output to high level).
• Bit 1:0 – WGM31:30 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM33:32 bits, found in the TCCR3B Register, these bits control
the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value
and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC)
mode, and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For more information
on the different modes see section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-15 WGM3 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WGM33:30 0x0 Normal mode of operation
0x1 PWM, phase correct, 8-bit
0x2 PWM, phase correct, 9-bit
0x3 PWM, phase correct, 10-bit
0x4 CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0x5 Fast PWM, 8-bit
0x6 Fast PWM, 9-bit
0x7 Fast PWM, 10-bit
0x8 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
ICRn
0x9 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
OCRnA
0xA PWM, Phase correct, TOP = ICRn
0xB PWM, Phase correct, TOP = OCRnA
0xC CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0xD Reserved
308
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0xE Fast PWM, TOP = ICRn
0xF Fast PWM, TOP = OCRnA
18.11.17 TCCR3B – Timer/Counter3 Control Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($91) ICNC3 ICES3 Res WGM33 WGM32 CS32 CS31 CS30 TCCR3B
Read/Write RW RW R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – ICNC3 - Input Capture 3 Noise Canceller
Setting this bit (to one) activates the Input Capture Noise Canceler. When the Noise
Canceler is activated, the input from the Input Capture Pin (ICP3) is filtered. The filter
function requires four successive equal valued samples of the ICP3 pin for changing its
output. The input capture is therefore delayed by four Oscillator cycles when the noise
canceler is enabled.
• Bit 6 – ICES3 - Input Capture 3 Edge Select
This bit selects which edge on the Input Capture Pin (ICP3) that is used to trigger a
capture event. When the ICES3 bit is written to zero, a falling (negative) edge is used
as trigger. When the ICES3 bit is written to one, a rising (positive) edge will trigger the
capture. When a capture is triggered according to the ICES3 setting, the counter value
is copied into the Input Capture Register (ICR3). The event will also set the Input
Capture Flag (ICF3). This can be used to cause an Input Capture Interrupt, if this
interrupt is enabled. When the ICR3 is used as TOP value (see description of the
WGM33:0 bits located in the TCCR3A and the TCCR3B Register), the ICP3 is
disconnected and consequently the input capture function is disabled.
• Bit 5 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 4:3 – WGM33:32 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM31:30 bits, found in the TCCR3A Register, these bits control
the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value
and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC)
mode, and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For more information
on the different modes see section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-16 WGM3 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WGM33:30 0x0 Normal mode of operation
0x1 PWM, phase correct, 8-bit
0x2 PWM, phase correct, 9-bit
0x3 PWM, phase correct, 10-bit
0x4 CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0x5 Fast PWM, 8-bit
0x6 Fast PWM, 9-bit
309
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x7 Fast PWM, 10-bit
0x8 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
ICRn
0x9 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
OCRnA
0xA PWM, Phase correct, TOP = ICRn
0xB PWM, Phase correct, TOP = OCRnA
0xC CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0xD Reserved
0xE Fast PWM, TOP = ICRn
0xF Fast PWM, TOP = OCRnA
• Bit 2:0 – CS32:30 - Clock Select
The three clock select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter3
according to the following table. If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter3,
transitions on the T3 pin will clock the counter even if the pin is configured as an output.
This feature allows software control of the counting.
Table 18-17 CS3 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CS32:30 0x00 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
0x01 clkIO/1 (no prescaling)
0x02 clkIO/8 (from prescaler)
0x03 clkIO/64 (from prescaler)
0x04 clkIO/256 (from prescaler)
0x05 clkIO/1024 (from prescaler)
0x06 External clock source on Tn pin, clock on
falling edge
0x07 External clock source on Tn pin, clock on
rising edge
18.11.18 TCCR3C – Timer/Counter3 Control Register C
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($92) FOC3A FOC3B FOC3C Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 TCCR3C
Read/Write RW RW RW R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – FOC3A - Force Output Compare for Channel A
The FOC3A bit is only active when the WGM33:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC3A bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the
waveform generation unit. The OC3A output is changed according to its COM3A1:0 bits
setting. Note that the FOC3A bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the value
present in the COM3A1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC3A strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR3A as TOP. The FOC3A bits are always read
as zero.
310
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 6 – FOC3B - Force Output Compare for Channel B
The FOC3B bit is only active when the WGM33:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC3B bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the
waveform generation unit. The OC3B output is changed according to its COM3B1:0 bits
setting. Note that the FOC3B bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the value
present in the COM3B1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC3B strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR1B as TOP. The FOC3B bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 5 – FOC3C - Force Output Compare for Channel C
The FOC3C bit is only active when the WGM33:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC3C bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the
waveform generation unit. The OC3C output is changed according to its COM3C1:0 bits
setting. Note that the FOC3C bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the value
present in the COM3C1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC3C strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR3C as TOP. The FOC3C bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 4:0 – Res4:0 - Reserved
These bits are reserved for future use.
18.11.19 TCNT3H – Timer/Counter3 High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($95) TCNT3H7:0 TCNT3H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT3H and TCNT3L, combined TCNT3) give
direct access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit
counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously
when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit
temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other
16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details. Modifying the
counter (TCNT3) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare
match between TCNT3 and one of the OCR3x Registers. Writing to the TCNT3
Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all
compare units.
• Bit 7:0 – TCNT3H7:0 - Timer/Counter3 High Byte
18.11.20 TCNT3L – Timer/Counter3 Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($94) TCNT3L7:0 TCNT3L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
311
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT3H and TCNT3L, combined TCNT3) give
direct access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit
counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously
when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit
temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other
16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details. Modifying the
counter (TCNT3) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare
match between TCNT3 and one of the OCR3x Registers. Writing to the TCNT3
Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all
compare units.
• Bit 7:0 – TCNT3L7:0 - Timer/Counter3 Low Byte
18.11.21 OCR3AH – Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register A High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($99) OCR3AH7:0 OCR3AH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT3). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC3A pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR3AH7:0 - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register High Byte
18.11.22 OCR3AL – Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register A Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($98) OCR3AL7:0 OCR3AL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT3). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC3A pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR3AL7:0 - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register Low Byte
312
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.23 OCR3BH – Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register B High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($9B) OCR3BH7:0 OCR3BH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT3). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC3B pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR3BH7:0 - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register High Byte
18.11.24 OCR3BL – Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register B Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($9A) OCR3BL7:0 OCR3BL
Read/Write R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT3). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC3B pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR3BL7:0 - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register Low Byte
18.11.25 OCR3CH – Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register C High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($9D) OCR3CH7:0 OCR3CH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT3). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC3C pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR3CH7:0 - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register High Byte
313
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.26 OCR3CL – Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register C Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($9C) OCR3CL7:0 OCR3CL
Read/Write R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT3). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC3C pin. The Output Compare
Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written
simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using
an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all
the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR3CL7:0 - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare Register Low Byte
18.11.27 ICR3H – Timer/Counter3 Input Capture Register High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($97) ICR3H7:0 ICR3H
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Input Capture Register is updated with the counter (TCNT3) value each time an
event occurs on the ICP3 pin. The Input Capture Register can be used for defining the
counter TOP value. The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the
high and low bytes are read simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers,
the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – ICR3H7:0 - Timer/Counter3 Input Capture Register High Byte
18.11.28 ICR3L – Timer/Counter3 Input Capture Register Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($96) ICR3L7:0 ICR3L
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Input Capture Register is updated with the counter (TCNT3) value each time an
event occurs on the ICP3 pin. The Input Capture Register can be used for defining the
counter TOP value. The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the
high and low bytes are read simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers,
the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – ICR3L7:0 - Timer/Counter3 Input Capture Register Low Byte
314
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.29 TIMSK3 – Timer/Counter3 Interrupt Mask Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($71) Res1 Res0 ICIE3 Res OCIE3C OCIE3B OCIE3A TOIE3 TIMSK3
Read/Write R R RW R R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5 – ICIE3 - Timer/Counter3 Input Capture Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter3 Input Capture interrupt is enabled. The
corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the ICF3 Flag, located in TIFR3, is
set.
• Bit 4 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3 – OCIE3C - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare C Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter3 Output Compare C Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF3C Flag, located in
TIFR3, is set.
• Bit 2 – OCIE3B - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare B Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter3 Output Compare B Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF3B Flag, located in
TIFR3, is set.
• Bit 1 – OCIE3A - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare A Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter3 Output Compare A Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF3A Flag, located in
TIFR3, is set.
• Bit 0 – TOIE3 - Timer/Counter3 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter3 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding
Interrupt Vector is executed when the TOV3 Flag, located in TIFR3, is set.
18.11.30 TIFR3 – Timer/Counter3 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$18 ($38) Res1 Res0 ICF3 Res OCF3C OCF3B OCF3A TOV3 TIFR3
Read/Write R R RW R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
315
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5 – ICF3 - Timer/Counter3 Input Capture Flag
This flag is set when a capture event occurs on the ICP3 pin. When the Input Capture
Register (ICR3) is set by the WGM33:0 to be used as the TOP value, the ICF3 Flag is
set when the counter reaches the TOP value. ICF3 is automatically cleared when the
Input Capture Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, ICF3 can be cleared by writing
a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 4 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3 – OCF3C - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare C Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT3) value matches the
Output Compare Register C (OCR3C). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC3C)
strobe will not set the OCF3C Flag. OCF3C is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match C Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF3C can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 2 – OCF3B - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare B Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT3) value matches the
Output Compare Register B (OCR3B). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC3B)
strobe will not set the OCF3B Flag. OCF3B is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match B Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF3B can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 1 – OCF3A - Timer/Counter3 Output Compare A Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT3) value matches the
Output Compare Register A (OCR3A). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC3A)
strobe will not set the OCF3A Flag. OCF3A is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match A Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF3A can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 0 – TOV3 - Timer/Counter3 Overflow Flag
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM33:0 bits setting of the Timer/Counter3
Control Register. In Normal and CTC modes, the TOV3 Flag is set when the timer
overflows. TOV3 is automatically cleared when the Timer/Counter3 Overflow Interrupt
Vector is executed. Alternatively, TOV3 can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit
location.
18.11.31 TCCR4A – Timer/Counter4 Control Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($A0) COM4A1
COM4A0
COM4B1
COM4B0
COM4C1
COM4C0
WGM41 WGM40
TCCR4A
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – COM4A1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel A
The Timer/Counter4 has only limited functionality. Therefore the COM4A1:0 bits do not
control the output compare behavior of any pin. The following table shows the
316
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
COM4A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM43:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-18 COM4A Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM4A1:0 0 Normal operation
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
• Bit 5:4 – COM4B1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel B
The Timer/Counter4 has only limited functionality. Therefore the COM4B1:0 bits do not
control the output compare behavior of any pin. The following table shows the
COM4B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM43:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-19 COM4B Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM4B1:0 0 Normal operation
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
• Bit 3:2 – COM4C1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel C
The Timer/Counter4 has only limited functionality. Therefore the COM4C1:0 bits do not
control the output compare behavior of any pin. The following table shows the
COM4C1:0 bit functionality when the WGM43:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-20 COM4C Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM4C1:0 0 Normal operation
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
• Bit 1:0 – WGM41:40 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM43:42 bits, found in the TCCR4B Register, these bits control
the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value
and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC)
mode, and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For more information
on the different modes see section "Modes of Operation". Note that Timer/Counter4 has
only limited functionality. It cannot be connected to any I/O pin.
Table 18-21 WGM4 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WGM43:40 0x0 Normal mode of operation
0x1 PWM, phase correct, 8-bit
0x2 PWM, phase correct, 9-bit
0x3 PWM, phase correct, 10-bit
0x4 CTC, TOP = OCRnA
317
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x5 Fast PWM, 8-bit
0x6 Fast PWM, 9-bit
0x7 Fast PWM, 10-bit
0x8 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
ICRn
0x9 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
OCRnA
0xA PWM, Phase correct, TOP = ICRn
0xB PWM, Phase correct, TOP = OCRnA
0xC CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0xD Reserved
0xE Fast PWM, TOP = ICRn
0xF Fast PWM, TOP = OCRnA
18.11.32 TCCR4B – Timer/Counter4 Control Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($A1) ICNC4 ICES4 Res WGM43 WGM42 CS42 CS41 CS40 TCCR4B
Read/Write RW RW R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – ICNC4 - Input Capture 4 Noise Canceller
Timer/Counter4 has only limited functionality. It is not connected to any Input Capture
Pin. Therefore this bit has no meaningful function.
• Bit 6 – ICES4 - Input Capture 4 Edge Select
Timer/Counter4 has only limited functionality. It is not connected to any Input Capture
Pin. Therefore this bit has no meaningful function.
• Bit 5 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 4:3 – WGM43:42 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM41:40 bits, found in the TCCR4A Register, these bits control
the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value
and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC)
mode, and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For more information
on the different modes see section "Modes of Operation". Note that Timer/Counter4 has
only limited functionality. It cannot be connected to any I/O pin.
Table 18-22 WGM4 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WGM43:40 0x0 Normal mode of operation
0x1 PWM, phase correct, 8-bit
0x2 PWM, phase correct, 9-bit
0x3 PWM, phase correct, 10-bit
318
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x4 CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0x5 Fast PWM, 8-bit
0x6 Fast PWM, 9-bit
0x7 Fast PWM, 10-bit
0x8 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
ICRn
0x9 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
OCRnA
0xA PWM, Phase correct, TOP = ICRn
0xB PWM, Phase correct, TOP = OCRnA
0xC CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0xD Reserved
0xE Fast PWM, TOP = ICRn
0xF Fast PWM, TOP = OCRnA
• Bit 2:0 – CS42:40 - Clock Select
The three clock select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter4
according to the following table. External pin modes cannot be used for the
Timer/Counter4.
Table 18-23 CS4 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CS42:40 0x00 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
0x01 clkIO/1 (no prescaling)
0x02 clkIO/8 (from prescaler)
0x03 clkIO/64 (from prescaler)
0x04 clkIO/256 (from prescaler)
0x05 clkIO/1024 (from prescaler)
0x06 Reserved
0x07 Reserved
18.11.33 TCCR4C – Timer/Counter4 Control Register C
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($A2) FOC4A FOC4B FOC4C Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 TCCR4C
Read/Write RW RW RW R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – FOC4A - Force Output Compare for Channel A
The FOC4A bit is only active when the WGM43:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC4A bit, an immediate compare match is forced. Due to
the limited functionality of the Timer/Counter4 the match has no direct impact on any
output pin. Note that the FOC4A bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the
value present in the COM4A1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC4A strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
319
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR4A as TOP. The FOC4A bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC4B - Force Output Compare for Channel B
The FOC4B bit is only active when the WGM43:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC4B bit, an immediate compare match is forced. Due to
the limited functionality of the Timer/Counter4 the match has no direct impact on any
output pin. Note that the FOC4B bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the
value present in the COM4B1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC4B strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR4B as TOP. The FOC4B bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 5 – FOC4C - Force Output Compare for Channel C
The FOC4C bit is only active when the WGM43:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC4C bit, an immediate compare match is forced. Due to
the limited functionality of the Timer/Counter4 the match has no direct impact on any
output pin. Note that the FOC4C bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the
value present in the COM4C1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC4C strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR4C as TOP. The FOC4C bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 4:0 – Res4:0 - Reserved
These bits are reserved for future use.
18.11.34 TCNT4H – Timer/Counter4 High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($A5) TCNT4H7:0 TCNT4H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT4H and TCNT4L, combined TCNT4) give
direct access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit
counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously
when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit
temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other
16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details. Modifying the
counter (TCNT4) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare
match between TCNT4 and one of the OCR4x Registers. Writing to the TCNT4
Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all
compare units.
• Bit 7:0 – TCNT4H7:0 - Timer/Counter4 High Byte
18.11.35 TCNT4L – Timer/Counter4 Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($A4) TCNT4L7:0 TCNT4L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
320
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT4H and TCNT4L, combined TCNT4) give
direct access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit
counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously
when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit
temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other
16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details. Modifying the
counter (TCNT4) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare
match between TCNT4 and one of the OCR4x Registers. Writing to the TCNT4
Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all
compare units.
• Bit 7:0 – TCNT4L7:0 - Timer/Counter4 Low Byte
18.11.36 OCR4AH – Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register A High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($A9) OCR4AH7:0 OCR4AH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT4). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR4AH7:0 - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register High Byte
18.11.37 OCR4AL – Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register A Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($A8) OCR4AL7:0 OCR4AL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT4). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR4AL7:0 - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register Low Byte
321
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.38 OCR4BH – Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register B High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($AB) OCR4BH7:0 OCR4BH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT4). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR4BH7:0 - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register High Byte
18.11.39 OCR4BL – Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register B Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($AA) OCR4BL7:0 OCR4BL
Read/Write R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT4). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR4BL7:0 - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register Low Byte
18.11.40 OCR4CH – Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register C High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($AD) OCR4CH7:0 OCR4CH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT4). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR4CH7:0 - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register High Byte
322
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.41 OCR4CL – Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register C Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($AC) OCR4CL7:0 OCR4CL
Read/Write R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT4). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR4CL7:0 - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare Register Low Byte
18.11.42 ICR4H – Timer/Counter4 Input Capture Register High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($A7) ICR4H7:0 ICR4H
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Timer/Counter4 has only limited functionality. It is not connected to any I/O pin.
Therefore the contents of this register is never updated with the counter (TCNT4) value.
The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes
are read simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is
performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register
is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for
details.
• Bit 7:0 – ICR4H7:0 - Timer/Counter4 Input Capture Register High Byte
18.11.43 ICR4L – Timer/Counter4 Input Capture Register Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($A6) ICR4L7:0 ICR4L
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Timer/Counter4 has only limited functionality. It is not connected to any I/O pin.
Therefore the contents of this register is never updated with the counter (TCNT4) value.
The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes
are read simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is
performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register
is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for
details.
• Bit 7:0 – ICR4L7:0 - Timer/Counter4 Input Capture Register Low Byte
323
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.44 TIMSK4 – Timer/Counter4 Interrupt Mask Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($72) Res1 Res0 ICIE4 Res OCIE4C OCIE4B OCIE4A TOIE4 TIMSK4
Read/Write R R RW R R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5 – ICIE4 - Timer/Counter4 Input Capture Interrupt Enable
The Timer/Counter4 has only limited functionality. It does not have an Input Capture
pin. Therefore this bit has no useful meaning.
• Bit 4 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3 – OCIE4C - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare C Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter4 Output Compare C Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF4C Flag, located in
TIFR4, is set.
• Bit 2 – OCIE4B - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare B Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter4 Output Compare B Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF4B Flag, located in
TIFR4, is set.
• Bit 1 – OCIE4A - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare A Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter4 Output Compare A Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF4A Flag, located in
TIFR4, is set.
• Bit 0 – TOIE4 - Timer/Counter4 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter4 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding
Interrupt Vector is executed when the TOV4 Flag, located in TIFR4, is set.
18.11.45 TIFR4 – Timer/Counter4 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$19 ($39) Res1 Res0 ICF4 Res OCF4C OCF4B OCF4A TOV4 TIFR4
Read/Write R R RW R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
324
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 5 – ICF4 - Timer/Counter4 Input Capture Flag
The Timer/Counter4 has only limited functionality. It does not have an Input Capture
pin. Therefore this bit has no useful meaning.
• Bit 4 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3 – OCF4C - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare C Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT4) value matches the
Output Compare Register C (OCR4C). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC4C)
strobe will not set the OCF4C Flag. OCF4C is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match C Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF4C can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 2 – OCF4B - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare B Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT4) value matches the
Output Compare Register B (OCR4B). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC4B)
strobe will not set the OCF4B Flag. OCF4B is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match B Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF4B can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 1 – OCF4A - Timer/Counter4 Output Compare A Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT4) value matches the
Output Compare Register A (OCR4A). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC4A)
strobe will not set the OCF4A Flag. OCF4A is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match A Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF4A can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 0 – TOV4 - Timer/Counter4 Overflow Flag
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM43:0 bits setting of the Timer/Counter4
Control Register. In Normal and CTC modes, the TOV4 Flag is set when the timer
overflows. TOV4 is automatically cleared when the Timer/Counter4 Overflow Interrupt
Vector is executed. Alternatively, TOV4 can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit
location.
18.11.46 TCCR5A – Timer/Counter5 Control Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($120) COM5A1
COM5A0
COM5B1
COM5B0
COM5C1
COM5C0
WGM51 WGM50
TCCR5A
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – COM5A1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel A
The Timer/Counter5 has only limited functionality. Therefore the COM5A1:0 bits do not
control the output compare behavior of any pin. The following table shows the
COM5A1:0 bit functionality when the WGM53:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-24 COM5A Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM5A1:0 0 Normal operation
325
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
• Bit 5:4 – COM5B1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel B
The Timer/Counter5 has only limited functionality. Therefore the COM5B1:0 bits do not
control the output compare behavior of any pin. The following table shows the
COM5B1:0 bit functionality when the WGM53:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-25 COM5B Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM5B1:0 0 Normal operation
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
• Bit 3:2 – COM5C1:0 - Compare Output Mode for Channel C
The Timer/Counter5 has only limited functionality. Therefore the COM5C1:0 bits do not
control the output compare behavior of any pin. The following table shows the
COM5C1:0 bit functionality when the WGM53:0 bits are set to a normal or a CTC mode
(non-PWM). For the other functionality refer to section "Modes of Operation".
Table 18-26 COM5C Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM5C1:0 0 Normal operation
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
• Bit 1:0 – WGM51:50 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM53:52 bits, found in the TCCR5B Register, these bits control
the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value
and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC)
mode, and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For more information
on the different modes see section "Modes of Operation". Note that Timer/Counter5 has
only limited functionality. It cannot be connected to any I/O pin.
Table 18-27 WGM5 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WGM53:50 0x0 Normal mode of operation
0x1 PWM, phase correct, 8-bit
0x2 PWM, phase correct, 9-bit
0x3 PWM, phase correct, 10-bit
0x4 CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0x5 Fast PWM, 8-bit
0x6 Fast PWM, 9-bit
0x7 Fast PWM, 10-bit
326
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x8 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
ICRn
0x9 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
OCRnA
0xA PWM, Phase correct, TOP = ICRn
0xB PWM, Phase correct, TOP = OCRnA
0xC CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0xD Reserved
0xE Fast PWM, TOP = ICRn
0xF Fast PWM, TOP = OCRnA
18.11.47 TCCR5B – Timer/Counter5 Control Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($121) ICNC5 ICES5 Res WGM53 WGM52 CS52 CS51 CS50 TCCR5B
Read/Write RW RW R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – ICNC5 - Input Capture 5 Noise Canceller
Timer/Counter5 has only limited functionality. It is not connected to any Input Capture
Pin. Therefore this bit has no meaningful function.
• Bit 6 – ICES5 - Input Capture 5 Edge Select
Timer/Counter5 has only limited functionality. It is not connected to any Input Capture
Pin. Therefore this bit has no meaningful function.
• Bit 5 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 4:3 – WGM53:52 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM51:50 bits, found in the TCCR5A Register, these bits control
the counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value
and what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC)
mode, and three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For more information
on the different modes see section "Modes of Operation". Note that Timer/Counter5 has
only limited functionality. It cannot be connected to any I/O pin.
Table 18-28 WGM5 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WGM53:50 0x0 Normal mode of operation
0x1 PWM, phase correct, 8-bit
0x2 PWM, phase correct, 9-bit
0x3 PWM, phase correct, 10-bit
0x4 CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0x5 Fast PWM, 8-bit
0x6 Fast PWM, 9-bit
327
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x7 Fast PWM, 10-bit
0x8 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
ICRn
0x9 PWM, Phase and frequency correct, TOP =
OCRnA
0xA PWM, Phase correct, TOP = ICRn
0xB PWM, Phase correct, TOP = OCRnA
0xC CTC, TOP = OCRnA
0xD Reserved
0xE Fast PWM, TOP = ICRn
0xF Fast PWM, TOP = OCRnA
• Bit 2:0 – CS52:50 - Clock Select
The three clock select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter5
according to the following table. External pin modes cannot be used for the
Timer/Counter5.
Table 18-29 CS5 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CS52:50 0x00 No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)
0x01 clkIO/1 (no prescaling)
0x02 clkIO/8 (from prescaler)
0x03 clkIO/64 (from prescaler)
0x04 clkIO/256 (from prescaler)
0x05 clkIO/1024 (from prescaler)
0x06 Reserved
0x07 Reserved
18.11.48 TCCR5C – Timer/Counter5 Control Register C
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($122) FOC5A FOC5B FOC5C Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 TCCR5C
Read/Write RW RW RW R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – FOC5A - Force Output Compare for Channel A
The FOC5A bit is only active when the WGM53:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC5A bit, an immediate compare match is forced. Due to
the limited functionality of the Timer/Counter5 the match has no direct impact on any
output pin. Note that the FOC5A bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the
value present in the COM5A1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC5A strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR5A as TOP. The FOC5A bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC5B - Force Output Compare for Channel B
328
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The FOC5B bit is only active when the WGM53:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC5B bit, an immediate compare match is forced. Due to
the limited functionality of the Timer/Counter5 the match has no direct impact on any
output pin. Note that the FOC5B bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the
value present in the COM5B1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC5B strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR5B as TOP. The FOC5B bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 5 – FOC5C - Force Output Compare for Channel C
The FOC5C bit is only active when the WGM53:0 bits specify a non-PWM mode. When
writing a logical one to the FOC5C bit, an immediate compare match is forced. Due to
the limited functionality of the Timer/Counter5 the match has no direct impact on any
output pin. Note that the FOC5C bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the
value present in the COM5C1:0 bits that determine the effect of the forced compare. A
FOC5C strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on
Compare Match (CTC) mode using OCR5C as TOP. The FOC5C bits are always read
as zero.
• Bit 4:0 – Res4:0 - Reserved
These bits are reserved for future use.
18.11.49 TCNT5H – Timer/Counter5 High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($125) TCNT5H7:0 TCNT5H
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT5H and TCNT5L, combined TCNT5) give
direct access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit
counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously
when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit
temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other
16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details. Modifying the
counter (TCNT5) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare
match between TCNT5 and one of the OCR5x Registers. Writing to the TCNT5
Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all
compare units.
• Bit 7:0 – TCNT5H7:0 - Timer/Counter5 High Byte
18.11.50 TCNT5L – Timer/Counter5 Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($124) TCNT5L7:0 TCNT5L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT5H and TCNT5L, combined TCNT5) give
direct access, both for read and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit
329
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously
when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit
temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other
16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for details. Modifying the
counter (TCNT5) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare
match between TCNT5 and one of the OCR5x Registers. Writing to the TCNT5
Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all
compare units.
• Bit 7:0 – TCNT5L7:0 - Timer/Counter5 Low Byte
18.11.51 OCR5AH – Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register A High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($129) OCR5AH7:0 OCR5AH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT5). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR5AH7:0 - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register High Byte
18.11.52 OCR5AL – Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register A Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($128) OCR5AL7:0 OCR5AL
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT5). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR5AL7:0 - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register Low Byte
18.11.53 OCR5BH – Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register B High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($12B) OCR5BH7:0 OCR5BH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
330
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT5). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR5BH7:0 - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register High Byte
18.11.54 OCR5BL – Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register B Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($12A) OCR5BL7:0 OCR5BL
Read/Write R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT5). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR5BL7:0 - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register Low Byte
18.11.55 OCR5CH – Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register C High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($12D) OCR5CH7:0 OCR5CH
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT5). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR5CH7:0 - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register High Byte
331
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.56 OCR5CL – Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register C Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($12C) OCR5CL7:0 OCR5CL
Read/Write R RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT5). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt. The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high
and low bytes are written simultaneously when the CPU writes to these registers, the
access is performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This
temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-
bit Registers" for details.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR5CL7:0 - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare Register Low Byte
18.11.57 ICR5H – Timer/Counter5 Input Capture Register High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($127) ICR5H7:0 ICR5H
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Timer/Counter5 has only limited functionality. It is not connected to any I/O pin.
Therefore the contents of this register is never updated with the counter (TCNT5) value.
The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes
are read simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is
performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register
is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for
details.
• Bit 7:0 – ICR5H7:0 - Timer/Counter5 Input Capture Register High Byte
18.11.58 ICR5L – Timer/Counter5 Input Capture Register Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($126) ICR5L7:0 ICR5L
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Timer/Counter5 has only limited functionality. It is not connected to any I/O pin.
Therefore the contents of this register is never updated with the counter (TCNT5) value.
The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes
are read simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is
performed using an 8-bit temporary High Byte Register (TEMP). This temporary register
is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See section "Accessing 16-bit Registers" for
details.
• Bit 7:0 – ICR5L7:0 - Timer/Counter5 Input Capture Register Low Byte
332
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.11.59 TIMSK5 – Timer/Counter5 Interrupt Mask Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($73) Res1 Res0 ICIE5 Res OCIE5C OCIE5B OCIE5A TOIE5 TIMSK5
Read/Write R R RW R R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 5 – ICIE5 - Timer/Counter5 Input Capture Interrupt Enable
The Timer/Counter5 has only limited functionality. It does not have an Input Capture
pin. Therefore this bit has no useful meaning.
• Bit 4 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3 – OCIE5C - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare C Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter5 Output Compare C Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF5C Flag, located in
TIFR5, is set.
• Bit 2 – OCIE5B - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare B Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter5 Output Compare B Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF5B Flag, located in
TIFR5, is set.
• Bit 1 – OCIE5A - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare A Match Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter5 Output Compare A Match interrupt is enabled.
The corresponding Interrupt Vector is executed when the OCF5A Flag, located in
TIFR5, is set.
• Bit 0 – TOIE5 - Timer/Counter5 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts
globally enabled), the Timer/Counter5 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding
Interrupt Vector is executed when the TOV5 Flag, located in TIFR5, is set.
18.11.60 TIFR5 – Timer/Counter5 Interrupt Flag Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$1A ($3A) Res1 Res0 ICF5 Res OCF5C OCF5B OCF5A TOV5 TIFR5
Read/Write R R RW R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – Res1:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
333
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 5 – ICF5 - Timer/Counter5 Input Capture Flag
The Timer/Counter5 has only limited functionality. It does not have an Input Capture
pin. Therefore this bit has no useful meaning.
• Bit 4 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3 – OCF5C - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare C Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT5) value matches the
Output Compare Register C (OCR5C). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC5C)
strobe will not set the OCF5C Flag. OCF5C is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match C Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF5C can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 2 – OCF5B - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare B Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT5) value matches the
Output Compare Register B (OCR5B). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC5B)
strobe will not set the OCF5B Flag. OCF5B is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match B Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF5B can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 1 – OCF5A - Timer/Counter5 Output Compare A Match Flag
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT5) value matches the
Output Compare Register A (OCR5A). Note that a Forced Output Compare (FOC5A)
strobe will not set the OCF5A Flag. OCF5A is automatically cleared when the Output
Compare Match A Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, OCF5A can be cleared by
writing a logic one to its bit location.
• Bit 0 – TOV5 - Timer/Counter5 Overflow Flag
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM53:0 bits setting of the Timer/Counter5
Control Register. In Normal and CTC modes, the TOV5 Flag is set when the timer
overflows. TOV5 is automatically cleared when the Timer/Counter5 Overflow Interrupt
Vector is executed. Alternatively, TOV5 can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit
location.
334
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
19 Timer/Counter 0, 1, 3, 4, and 5 Prescaler
Timer/Counter 0, 1, 3, 4, and 5 share the same prescaler module, but the
Timer/Counters can have different prescaler settings. The description below applies to
all Timer/Counters. Tn is used as a general name, n = 0, 1, 3, 4, or 5.
19.1 Internal Clock Source
The Timer/Counter can be clocked directly by the system clock (by setting the CSn2:0 =
1). This provides the fastest operation with a maximum Timer/Counter clock frequency
equal to system clock frequency (fclkI/O). Alternatively one of four taps from the prescaler
can be used as a clock source. The prescaled clock has a frequency of either fclkI/O/8,
fclkI/O/64, fclkI/O/256 or fclkI/O/1024.
19.2 Prescaler Reset
The prescaler is free running, i.e., operates independently of the Clock Select logic of
the Timer/Counter, and it is shared by the Timer/Counter Tn. Since the prescaler is not
affected by the Timer/Counter’s clock select, the state of the prescaler will have
implications for situations where a prescaled clock is used. One example of prescaling
artifacts occurs when the timer is enabled and clocked by the prescaler (6 > CSn2:0 >
1). The number of system clock cycles from the moment the timer is enabled until the
first count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system clock cycles, where N equals the
prescaler divisor (8, 64, 256, or 1024).
It is possible to use the prescaler reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program
execution. However care must be taken if the other Timer/Counter that shares the same
prescaler also uses prescaling. A prescaler reset will affect the prescaler period for all
connected Timer/Counters.
19.3 External Clock Source
An external clock source applied to the Tn pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock
(clkTn). The Tn pin is sampled once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization
logic. The synchronized (sampled) signal is then passed through the edge detector.
Figure 19-1 shows a functional equivalent block diagram of the Tn synchronization and
edge detector logic. The registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal
system clock (clkI/O). The latch is transparent in the high period of the internal system
clock.
The edge detector generates one clkTn pulse for each positive (CSn2:0 = 7) or negative
(CSn2:0 = 6) edge it detects.
Figure 19-1. Tn/T0 Pin Sampling
Tn_sync
(To Clock
Select Logic)
Edge DetectorSynchronization
D QD Q
LE
D Q
Tn
clkI/O
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system
clock cycles from an edge applied to the Tn pin to the counter being updated.
335
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when Tn has been stable for at
least one system clock cycle. Otherwise there is a risk of generating a false
Timer/Counter clock pulse.
Each half period of the applied, external clock must be longer than one system clock
cycle to ensure correct sampling. The external clock must be guaranteed to have less
than half the system clock frequency (fExtClk < fclkI/O/2) given a 50/50% duty cycle. Since
the edge detector uses sampling, the maximum frequency of a detectable external
clock is half the sampling frequency (Nyquist sampling theorem). However due to
variation of the system clock frequency and duty cycle caused by Oscillator source
(crystal, resonator and capacitors) tolerances, it is recommended to limit the maximum
frequency of an external clock source to less than fclkI/O/2.5. An external clock source
can not be prescaled.
Figure 19-2. Prescaler for synchronous Timer/Counters
PSR10
Clear
Tn
Tn
clkI/O
Synchronization
Synchronization
TIMER/COUNTERn CLOCK SOURCE
clkTn
TIMER/COUNTERn CLOCK SOURCE
clkTn
CSn0
CSn1
CSn2
CSn0
CSn1
CSn2
19.4 Register Description
19.4.1 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$23 ($43) TSM Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PSRASY
PSRSYNC
GTCCR
Read/Write RW R R R R R R RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – TSM - Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this
mode the value that is written to the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits is kept, hence
keeping the corresponding prescaler reset signals asserted. This ensures that the
corresponding Timer/Counters are halted and can be configured to the same value
without the risk of one of them advancing during the configuration. When the TSM bit is
written to zero, the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits are cleared by hardware and the
Timer/Counters simultaneously start counting.
• Bit 6:2 – Res4:0 - Reserved
336
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 1 – PSRASY - Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally
cleared immediately by hardware. If the bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating
in asynchronous mode, the bit will remain one until the prescaler has been reset. The
bit will not be cleared by hardware if the TSM bit is set.
• Bit 0 – PSRSYNC - Prescaler Reset for Synchronous Timer/Counters
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter0, Timer/Counter1, Timer/Counter3,
Timer/Counter4 and Timer/Counter5 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally cleared
immediately by hardware, except if the TSM bit is set. Note that Timer/Counter0,
Timer/Counter1, Timer/Counter3, Timer/Counter4 and Timer/Counter5 share the same
prescaler and a reset of this prescaler will affect all timers.
337
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
20 Output Compare Modulator (OCM1C0A)
20.1 Overview
The Output Compare Modulator (OCM) allows generation of waveforms modulated with
a carrier frequency. The modulator uses the outputs from the Output Compare Unit C of
the 16-bit Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Unit of the 8-bit Timer/Counter0.
For more details about these Timer/Counters see "Timer/Counter 0, 1, 3, 4, and 5
Prescaler" on page 334 and "8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous
Operation" on page 339.
Figure 20-1. Output Compare Modulator, Block Diagram
OC1C
Pin
OC1C /
OC0A / PB7
Timer/Counter 1
Timer/Counter 0 OC0A
When the modulator is enabled, the two output compare channels are modulated
together as shown in the block diagram (Figure 20-1 above).
20.2 Description
The Output Compare unit 1C and Output Compare unit 2 share the PB7 port pin for
output. The outputs of the Output Compare units (OC1C and OC0A) override the
normal PORTB7 Register when one of them is enabled (i.e., when COMnx1:0 is not
equal to zero). When both OC1C and OC0A are enabled at the same time, the
modulator is automatically enabled.
The functional equivalent schematic of the modulator is shown on in the following
figure. The schematic includes part of the Timer/Counter units and the port B bit 7
output driver circuit.
Figure 20-2. Output Compare Modulator, Schematic
PORTB7 DDRB7
D QD Q
Pin
COMA01
COMA00
DATABUS
OC1C /
OC0A/ PB7
COM1C1
COM1C0
Modulator
1
0
OC1C
D Q
OC0A
D Q
( From Waveform Generator )
( From Waveform Generator )
0
1
Vcc
338
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
When the modulator is enabled the type of modulation (logical AND or OR) can be
selected by the PORTB7 Register. Note that the DDRB7 controls the direction of the
port independent of the COMnx1:0 bit setting.
20.3 Timing Example
Figure 20-3 below illustrates the modulator in action. In this example the
Timer/Counter1 is set to operate in fast PWM mode (non-inverted) and Timer/Counter0
uses CTC waveform mode with toggle Compare Output mode (COMnx1:0 = 1).
Figure 20-3. Output Compare Modulator, Timing Diagram
1 2
OC0A
(CTC Mode)
OC1C
(FPWM Mode)
PB7
(PORTB7 = 0)
PB7
(PORTB7 = 1)
(Period) 3
clk
I/O
In this example Timer/Counter2 provides the carrier while the modulating signal is
generated by the Output Compare unit C of the Timer/Counter1.
The resolution of the PWM signal (OC1C) is reduced by the modulation. The reduction
factor is equal to the number of system clock cycles of one period of the carrier (OC0A).
In this example the resolution is reduced by a factor of two. The reason for the
reduction is illustrated in Figure 20-3 above at the second and third period of the PB7
output when PORTB7 equals zero. The period 2 high time is one cycle longer than the
period 3 high time, but the result on the PB7 output is equal in both periods.
339
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
21 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation
21.1 Features
Timer/Counter2 is a general purpose, single channel, 8-bit Timer/Counter module. The
main features are:
• Single channel counter
• Clear timer on compare match (auto reload)
• Glitch-free, phase-correct pulse-width modulator (PWM)
• Frequency generator
• 10 bit clock prescaler
• Overflow and compare match interrupt sources (TOV2, OCF2A and OCF2B)
• Able to run with external 32 kHz watch crystal independent of the I/O clock
21.2 Overview
A simplified block diagram of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is shown on Figure 21-1 on page
340. For the current placement of I/O pins, see chapter "Pin Configurations" on page 2.
CPU accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O pins, are shown in bold. The
device-specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the "Register Description" on
page 354.
The Power Reduction Timer/Counter2 bit PRTIM2 in register PRR0 (see "PRR0 –
Power Reduction Register0" on page 195) must be written to zero to enable
Timer/Counter2 module.
Note: OC2B is implemented but not routed to a pin and for this reason it can’t be used.
21.2.1 Registers
The Timer/Counter (TCNT2) and Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are 8
bit registers. Interrupt request (abbreviated to Int.Req.) signals are all visible in the
Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR2). All interrupts are individually masked with the
Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK2). TIFR2 and TIMSK2 are not shown in the
figure.
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, asynchronously clocked
from the TOSC1/2 pins or alternatively from the Automated Meter Reading (AMR) pin
as detailed later in this section. The asynchronous operation is controlled by the
Asynchronous Status Register (ASSR). The Clock Select logic block controls which
clock source the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement) its value. The
Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock
Select logic is referred to as the timer clock (clkT2).
The double buffered Output Compare Register (OCR2A and OCR2B) are compared
with the Timer/Counter value at all times. The result of the compare can be used by the
Waveform Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency output on the Output
Compare pins (OC2A and OC2B). See chapter "Output Compare Unit" on page 346 for
details. The compare match event will also set the Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B)
which can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request.
21.2.2 Definitions
Many register and bit references in this document are written in general form. A lower
case “n” replaces the Timer/Counter number, in this case 2. However, when using the
340
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT2 for
accessing Timer/Counter2 counter value and so on.
Figure 21-1. 8-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram
The definitions in Table Table 21-1 below are also used extensively throughout the
section.
Table 21-1. Definitions
BOTTOM The counter reaches the BOTTOM when it becomes zero (0x00).
MAX The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255).
TOP The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the
count sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX)
or the value stored in the OCR2A Register. The assignment is dependent on the
mode of operation.
21.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal synchronous or an external
asynchronous clock source. The clock source clkT2 is by default equal to the MCU
clock, clkI/O. When the AS2 bit in the ASSR Register is written to logic one, the clock
source is either taken from the Timer/Counter Oscillator connected to TOSC1 and
TOSC2 or from the AMR pin. For details on asynchronous operation, see section
341
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
"Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2" on page 350. For details on clock sources
and prescaler, see section "Timer/Counter Prescaler" on page 353.
21.4 Counter Unit
The main part of the 8-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable bi-directional counter
unit. Figure 21-2 below shows a block diagram of the counter and its surrounding
environment.
Figure 21-2. Counter Unit Block Diagram
Signal description (internal signals):
count Increment or decrement TCNT2 by 1.
direction Selects between increment and decrement.
clear Clear TCNT2 (set all bits to zero).
clkTn Timer/Counter clock, referred to as clkT2 in the following.
top Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached maximum value.
bottom Signalizes that TCNT2 has reached minimum value (zero).
Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or
decremented at each timer clock (clkT2). clkT2 can be generated from an external or
internal clock source, selected by the Clock Select bits (CS22:0). When no clock source
is selected (CS22:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT2 value can be
accessed by the CPU, regardless of whether clkT2 is present or not. A CPU write
overrides (has priority over) all counter clear or count operations.
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the WGM21 and WGM20 bits
located in the Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR2A) and the WGM22 located in the
Timer/Counter Control Register B (TCCR2B). There are close connections between
how the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output
Compare outputs OC2A and OC2B. For more details about advanced counting
sequences and waveform generation, see chapter "Modes of Operation" below.
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set according to the mode of operation
selected by the WGM22:0 bits. TOV2 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.
21.5 Modes of Operation
The mode of operation, i.e., the behaviour of the Timer/Counter and the Output
Compare pins, is defined by the combination of the Waveform Generation mode
(WGM22:0) and Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0) bits. The Compare Output mode
bits do not affect the counting sequence, while the Waveform Generation mode bits do.
The COM2x1:0 bits control whether the PWM output generated should be inverted or
342
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
not (inverted or non-inverted PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM2x1:0 bits control
whether the output should be set, cleared, or toggled at a compare match (see chapter
"Compare Match Output Unit" on page 347).
For detailed timing information refer to chapter "Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams" on
page 349.
The following table shows the function of the WGM22:0 bits of registers TCCR2A and
TCCR2B. These bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the source for
maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform generation to be used.
Table 21-2. Waveform Generation Mode Bit Description
Mode WGM2 WGM1 WGM0
Timer/Counter
Mode of
Operation TOP
Update of
OCRX at
TOV Flag
Set on(1,2)
0 0 0 0 Normal 0xFF Immediate MAX
1 0 0 1 PWM, Phase
Correct 0xFF TOP BOTTOM
2 0 1 0 CTC OCRA Immediate MAX
3 0 1 1 Fast PWM 0xFF TOP MAX
4 1 0 0 Reserved – – –
5 1 0 1 PWM, Phase
Correct OCRA TOP BOTTOM
6 1 1 0 Reserved – – –
7 1 1 1 Fast PWM OCRA BOTTOM TOP
Notes: 1. MAX = 0xFF
2. BOTTOM = 0x00
21.5.1 Normal Mode
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM22:0 = 0). In this mode the
counting direction is always up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The
counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum 8 bit value (TOP = 0xFF) and then
restarts from the bottom (0x00). In normal operation the Timer/Counter Overflow Flag
(TOV2) will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT2 becomes zero. The
TOV2 Flag in this case behaves like a ninth bit, except that it is only set, not cleared.
However combined with the timer overflow interrupt that automatically clears the TOV2
Flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no special cases to
consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written anytime.
The Output Compare unit can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using
the Output Compare to generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended,
since this will occupy too much of the CPU time.
21.5.2 Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM22:0 = 2), the OCR2A Register is used
to manipulate the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when
the counter value (TCNT2) matches the OCR2A. The OCR2A defines the top value for
the counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare
match output frequency. It also simplifies the operation of counting external events.
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Table 20-3. The counter value
(TCNT2) increases until a compare match occurs between TCNT2 and OCR2A, and
then counter (TCNT2) is cleared.
343
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 21-3. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram
TCNTn
OCn
(Toggle)
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 4
Period 2 3
(COMnx1:0 = 1)
An interrupt can be generated each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by
using the OCF2A Flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be
used for updating the TOP value. However, changing TOP to a value close to BOTTOM
when the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care
since the CTC mode does not have the double buffering feature. If the new value
written to OCR2A is lower than the current value of TCNT2, the counter will miss the
compare match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value (0xFF) and
wrap around starting at 0x00 before the compare match can occur.
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC2A output can be set to toggle
its logical level on each compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to
toggle mode (COM2A1:0 = 1). The OC2A value will not be visible on the port pin unless
the data direction for the pin is set to output. The waveform generated will have a
maximum frequency of fOC2A = fclkI/O/2 when OCR2A is set to zero (0x00). The waveform
frequency is defined by the following equation
)1(2
/
OCRnxN
f
fOclkI
OCnx +⋅⋅
=
The N variable represents the pre-scale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV2 Flag is set in the same timer clock cycle
that the counter counts from MAX to 0x00.
21.5.3 Fast PWM Mode
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. If
the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the
compare value.
In fast PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms on the
OC2x pin. Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an
inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is
defined as 0xFF when WGM22:0 = 3, and OCR2A when WGM22:0 = 7 (see section
"Register Description" on page 354 for register TCCR2A). The actual OC2x value will
only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The
PWM waveform is generated by setting (or clearing) the OC2x Register at the compare
match between OCR2x and TCNT2, and clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the
timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).
344
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 21-4. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
TCNTn
OCRnx Update and
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
1
Period 2 3
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Interrupt Flag Set
4 5 6 7
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:
256
/
⋅
=
N
f
fOclkI
OCnxPWM
The N variable represents the pre-scale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating
a PWM waveform output in the fast PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to BOTTOM,
the output will be a narrow spike for each MAX+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR2A
equal to MAX will result in a constantly high or low output (depending on the polarity of
the output set by the COM2A1:0 bits.)
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved
by setting OC2x to toggle its logical level on each compare match (COM2x1:0 = 1). The
waveform generated will have a maximum frequency of fOC2A = fclkI/O/2 when OCR2A is
set to zero. This feature is similar to the OC2A toggle in CTC mode, except the double
buffer feature of the Output Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.
21.5.4 Phase Correct PWM Mode
The phase correct PWM mode (WGM22:0 = 1 or 5) provides a high resolution phase
correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is based on a
dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM to TOP and then
from TOP to BOTTOM. TOP is defined as 0xFF when WGM22:0 = 1, and OCR2A when
WGM22:0 = 5. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC2x) is
cleared on the compare match between TCNT2 and OCR2x while up-counting, and set
on the compare match while down-counting. In inverting Output Compare mode, the
operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation has lower maximum operation
frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the
dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications.
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches
TOP. When the counter reaches TOP, it changes the count direction. The TCNT2 value
will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct
PWM mode is shown on Figure 21-5 on page 345. The TCNT2 value is in the timing
diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram
345
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on
the TCNT2 slopes represent compare matches between OCR2x and TCNT2.
Figure 21-5. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set
OCnx Interrupt Flag Set
1 2 3
TCNTn
Period
OCnx
OCnx
(COMnx1:0 = 2)
(COMnx1:0 = 3)
OCRnx Update
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV2) is set each time the counter reaches
BOTTOM. The Interrupt Flag can be used to generate an interrupt each time the
counter reaches the BOTTOM value.
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare unit allows generation of PWM waveforms
on the OC2x pin. Setting the COM2x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM.
An inverted PWM output can be generated by setting the COM2x1:0 to three. TOP is
defined as 0xFF when WGM22:0 = 3, and OCR2A when WGM22:0 = 7 (see section
"Register Description" on page 354 for register TCCR2A). The actual OC2x value will
only be visible on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output. The
PWM waveform is generated by clearing (or setting) the OC2x Register at the compare
match between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the counter increments, and setting (or
clearing) the OC2x Register at compare match between OCR2x and TCNT2 when the
counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct
PWM can be calculated by the following equation:
510
/_
⋅
=
N
f
fOIclk
OCnxPCPWM
The N variable represents the pre-scale factor (1, 8, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 1024).
The extreme values for the OCR2A Register represent special cases when generating
a PWM waveform output in the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR2A is set equal to
BOTTOM, the output will be continuously low and if set equal to MAX the output will be
continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have
the opposite logic values.
At the very start of period 2 in Figure 21-5 above OCnx has a transition from high to low
even though there is no Compare Match. The point of this transition is to guarantee
symmetry around BOTTOM. There are two cases that give a transition without
Compare Match.
346
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• OCR2A changes its value from MAX, like in Figure 21-5 on page 345. When the
OCR2A value is MAX the OCn pin value is the same as the result of a down-
counting compare match. To ensure symmetry around BOTTOM the OCn value at
MAX must correspond to the result of an up-counting Compare Match.
• The timer starts counting from a value higher than the one in OCR2A, and for that
reason misses the Compare Match and hence the OCn change that would have
happened on the way up.
21.6 Output Compare Unit
The 8 bit comparator continuously compares TCNT2 with the Output Compare Register
(OCR2A and OCR2B). Whenever TCNT2 equals OCR2A or OCR2B, the comparator
signals a match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF2A or OCF2B) at the
next timer clock cycle. If the corresponding interrupt is enabled, the Output Compare
Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The Output Compare Flag is
automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively, the Output Compare
Flag can be cleared by software by writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The
Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output according to
operating mode set by the WGM22:0 bits and Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0) bits.
The max and bottom signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the
special cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (chapter "Modes of
Operation" on page 341).
Figure 21-6 below shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit.
Figure 21-6. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram
OCFn (Int.Req.)
= (8-bit Comparator )
OCRn
OCxy
DATA BUS
TCNTn
WGMn1:0
Waveform Generator
top
FOCn
COMn1:0
bottom
The OCR2x Register is double buffered when using any of the Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM) modes. For the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of
operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double buffering synchronizes the
update of the OCR2x Compare Register to either top or bottom of the counting
sequence. The synchronization prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical
PWM pulses, thereby making the output glitch-free.
347
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The OCR2x Register access may seem complex, but this is not the case. When the
double buffering is enabled, the CPU has access to the OCR2x Buffer Register, and if
double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR2x directly.
21.6.1 Force Output Compare
In non-PWM waveform generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be
forced by writing a one to the Force Output Compare (FOC2x) bit. Forcing compare
match will not set the OCF2x Flag or reload/clear the timer, but the OC2x pin will be
updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COM2x1:0 bits settings define
whether the OC2x pin is set, cleared or toggled).
21.6.2 Compare Match Blocking by TCNT2 Write
All CPU write operations to the TCNT2 Register will block any compare match that
occurs in the next timer clock cycle, even when the timer is stopped. This feature allows
OCR2x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT2 without triggering an interrupt
when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled.
21.6.3 Using the Output Compare Unit
Since writing TCNT2 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one
timer clock cycle, there are risks involved when changing TCNT2 when using the
Output Compare channel, independently of whether the Timer/Counter is running or
not. If the value written to TCNT2 equals the OCR2x value, the compare match will be
missed, resulting in incorrect waveform generation. Similarly, do not write the TCNT2
value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is down-counting.
The setup of the OC2x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register
for the port pin to output. The easiest way of setting the OC2x value is to use the Force
Output Compare (FOC2x) strobe bit in Normal mode. The OC2x Register keeps its
value even when changing between Waveform Generation modes.
Be aware that the COM2x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare
value. A change of the COM2x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.
21.7 Compare Match Output Unit
The Compare Output mode (COM2x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform
Generator uses the COM2x1:0 bits for defining the Output Compare (OC2x) state at the
next compare match. Also, the COM2x1:0 bits control the OC2x pin output source.
Figure 20-7 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the COM2x1:0 bit
setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only
the parts of the general I/O Port Control Registers (DDR and PORT) that are affected
by the COM2x1:0 bits are shown. When referring to the OC2x state, the reference is for
the internal OC2x Register, not the OC2x pin.
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC2x) from the
Waveform Generator if either of the COM2x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC2x pin
direction (input or output) is still controlled by the Data Direction Register (DDR) for the
port pin. The Data Direction Register bit for the OC2x pin (DDR_OC2x) must be set as
output before the OC2x value is visible on the pin. The port override function is
independent of the Waveform Generation mode.
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC2x state
before the output is enabled. Note that some COM2x1:0 bit settings are reserved for
certain modes of operation. See section "Register Description" on page 354 for details.
348
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 21-7. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic
PORT
DDR
D Q
D Q
OCnx
Pin
OCnx
D Q
Waveform
Generator
COMnx1
COMnx0
0
1
DATA BUS
FOCn
clkI/O
21.7.1 Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation
The Waveform Generator uses the COM2x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM
modes. Setting the COM2x1:0 = 0 for all modes tells the Waveform Generator that no
action on the OC2x Register is to be performed on the next compare match. For
compare output actions in the non-PWM modes for fast PWM mode and for phase
correct PWM refer to section "Register Description" on page 354 for register TCCR2A.
A change of the COM2x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after
the bits are written. For non-PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate
effect by using the FOC2x strobe bits.
The following table shows the COM2x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM02:0 bits are
set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM).
Table 21-3. Compare Output Mode, non-PWM Mode
COM2x1 COM2x0
Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2x disconnected;
0 1 Toggle OC2x on Compare Match;
1 0 Clear OC2x on Compare Match;
1 1 Set OC2x on Compare Match;
Table 17-3 shows the COM2x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM21:0 bits are set to fast
PWM mode.
Table 21-4. Compare Output Mode, Fast PWM Mode
COM2x1 COM2x0
Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2x disconnected.
0 1
WGM22 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC2A Disconnected.
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on Compare Match.
OC2B: not applicable, reserved function;
349
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
COM2x1 COM2x0
Description
1 0 Clear OC2x on Compare Match, set OC2x at BOTTOM, (non-
inverting mode).
1 1 Set OC2x on Compare Match, clear OC2x at BOTTOM, (inverting
mode).
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2x equals TOP and COM2x1 is set. In this case,
the Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See "Fast
PWM Mode" on page 343.
Table 17-4 shows the COM2x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM22:0 bits are set to
phase correct PWM mode.
Table 21-5. Compare Output Mode, Phase Correct PWM Mode
COM2x1 COM2x0 Description
0 0 Normal port operation, OC2x disconnected.
0 1
WGM22 = 0: Normal Port Operation, OC2A Disconnected.
WGM22 = 1: Toggle OC2A on Compare Match.
OC2B: not applicable, reserved function;
1 0 Clear OC2x on Compare Match when up-counting. Set OC2x on
Compare Match when down-counting.
1 1 Set OC2x on Compare Match when up-counting. Clear OC2x on
Compare Match when down-counting.
Note: 1. A special case occurs when OCR2x equals TOP and COM2x1 is set. In this case,
the Compare Match is ignored, but the set or clear is done at TOP. See "Phase
Correct PWM Mode" on page 344 for more details.
21.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams
The following figures show the Timer/Counter in synchronous mode, and the timer clock
(clkT2) is therefore shown as a clock enable signal. In asynchronous mode, clkI/O should
be replaced by the Timer/Counter Oscillator clock. The figures include information on
when Interrupt Flags are set. Figure 21-8 below contains timing data for basic
Timer/Counter operation. The figure shows the count sequence close to the MAX value
in all modes other than phase correct PWM mode.
Figure 21-8. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling
clkTn
(clkI/O/1)
TOVn
clkI/O
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
350
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 21-9 below shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.
Figure 21-9. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclkI/O/8)
TOVn
TCNTn MAX - 1 MAX BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
Figure 21-10 below shows the setting of OCF2A in all modes except CTC mode.
Figure 21-10. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF2A, with Prescaler
(fclkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
OCRnx Value
OCRnx - 1 OCRnx OCRnx + 1 OCRnx + 2
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
Figure 21-11 below shows the setting of OCF2A and the clearing of TCNT2 in CTC
mode.
Figure 21-11. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Clear Timer on Compare Match mode,
with Prescaler (fclkI/O/8)
OCFnx
OCRnx
TCNTn
(CTC)
TOP
TOP - 1 TOP BOTTOM BOTTOM + 1
clkI/O
clkTn
(clkI/O/8)
21.9 Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously, some considerations must be taken.
351
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Warning: When switching between asynchronous and synchronous clocking of
Timer/Counter2, the Timer Registers TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x might be
corrupted. A safe procedure for switching clock source is:
1. Disable the Timer/Counter2 interrupts by clearing OCIE2x and TOIE2.
2. Select clock source by setting AS2 as appropriate.
3. Write new values to TCNT2, OCR2x, and TCCR2x.
4. To switch to asynchronous operation: Wait for TCN2UB, OCR2xUB, and TCR2xUB.
5. Clear the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flags.
6. Enable interrupts, if needed.
• The CPU main clock frequency must be more than four times the Oscillator
frequency.
• When writing to one of the registers TCNT2, OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the value is
transferred to a temporary register, and latched after two positive edges on TOSC1.
The user should not write a new value before the contents of the temporary register
have been transferred to its destination. Each of the five mentioned registers have
their individual temporary register, which means that e.g. writing to TCNT2 does not
disturb an OCR2x write in progress. To detect that a transfer to the destination
register has taken place, the Asynchronous Status Register – ASSR has been
implemented.
• When entering Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode after having written to
TCNT2, OCR2x, or TCCR2x, the user must wait until the written register has been
updated if Timer/Counter2 is used to wake up the device. Otherwise, the MCU will
enter sleep mode before the changes are effective. This is particularly important if
any of the Output Compare2 interrupt is used to wake up the device, since the
Output Compare function is disabled during writing to OCR2x or TCNT2. If the write
cycle is not finished, and the MCU enters sleep mode before the corresponding
OCR2xUB bit returns to zero, the device will never receive a compare match
interrupt, and the MCU will not wake up.
• If Timer/Counter2 is used to wake the device up from Power-save or ADC Noise
Reduction mode, precautions must be taken if the user wants to re-enter one of
these modes: The interrupt logic needs one TOSC1 cycle to be reset. If the time
between wake-up and re-entering sleep mode is less than one TOSC1 cycle, the
interrupt will not occur, and the device will fail to wake up. If the user is in doubt
whether the time before re-entering Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode is
sufficient, the following algorithm can be used to ensure that one TOSC1 cycle has
elapsed:
1. Write a value to TCCR2x, TCNT2, or OCR2x.
2. Wait until the corresponding Update Busy Flag in ASSR returns to zero. .
3. Enter Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode.
C Code Example (Fragment)(1)
ISR( TIMER2_OVF_vect ) {…} // TC2 overflow IRQ service routine
int main(void){
…
ASSR = 1<<AS2; // turn on 32kHz crystal oscillator
TIMSK2 = 1<<TOIE2; // enable TC2 overflow interrupt
TCCR2B = 0x05; // divide clock by 128 (1s interrupts)
do
{} while(ASSR & (1<<TCR2BUB)); // check if busy
352
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Example (Fragment)(1)
…
do { // main loop
…
TRXPR = 1 << SLPTR; // disable transceiver
set_sleep_mode(SLEEP_MODE_PWR_SAVE);
TCNT2 = 0; // reset counter
do // check if busy before sleeping
{} while(ASSR & (1<<TCN2UB));
sleep_enable();
sleep_cpu(); // go to deep-sleep (power-
save)
sleep_disable(); // executed after wakeup
…
}
…
}
Notes: 1. See section "About Code Examples" on page 8.
• When the asynchronous operation is selected, the 32.768 kHz Oscillator for
Timer/Counter2 is always running, except in Power-down and Standby modes. After
a Power-up Reset or wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode, the user should
be aware of the fact that this Oscillator might take as long as one second to stabilize.
The user is advised to wait for at least one second before using Timer/Counter2
after power-up or wake-up from Power-down or Standby mode. The contents of all
Timer/Counter2 Registers must be considered lost after a wake-up from Power-
down or Standby mode due to unstable clock signal upon start-up, no matter
whether the Oscillator is in use or a clock signal is applied to the TOSC1 pin.
• Description of wake up from Power-save or ADC Noise Reduction mode when the
timer is clocked asynchronously: When the interrupt condition is met, the wake up
process is started on the following cycle of the timer clock, that is, the timer is always
advanced by at least one before the processor can read the counter value. After
wake-up, the MCU is halted for four cycles, it executes the interrupt routine, and
resumes execution from the instruction following SLEEP.
• Reading of the TCNT2 Register shortly after wake-up from Power-save may give an
incorrect result. Since TCNT2 is clocked on the asynchronous TOSC clock, reading
TCNT2 must be done through a register synchronized to the internal I/O clock
domain. Synchronization takes place for every rising TOSC1 edge. When waking up
from Power-save mode, and the I/O clock (clkI/O) again becomes active, TCNT2 will
read as the previous value (before entering sleep) until the next rising TOSC1 edge.
The phase of the TOSC clock after waking up from Power-save mode is essentially
unpredictable, as it depends on the wake-up time. The recommended procedure for
reading TCNT2 is thus as follows:
1. Write any value to either of the registers OCR2x or TCCR2x.
2. Wait for the corresponding Update Busy Flag to be cleared.
3. Read TCNT2.
• During asynchronous operation, the synchronization of the Interrupt Flags for the
asynchronous timer takes 3 processor cycles plus one timer cycle. The timer is
therefore advanced by at least one before the processor can read the timer value
353
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
causing the setting of the Interrupt Flag. The Output Compare pin is changed on the
timer clock and is not synchronized to the processor clock.
• If the CPU wakes up from asynchronous timer and goes back to sleep again, it may
wakeup multiple times or the IRQ is called multiple times. This may be avoided if the
CPU waits with the next sleep instruction until the next asynchronous clock arrives.
21.10 Timer/Counter Prescaler
Figure 21-12. Prescaler for Timer/Counter2
The register ASSR defines the clock source for the asynchronous Timer/Counter2. The
clock source for Timer/Counter2 is named clkT2S. clkT2S is by default connected to the
main system I/O clock clkI/O. By setting the AS2 bit in ASSR, Timer/Counter2 is
asynchronously clocked either from the TOSC1 or from the AMR pin. This enables the
use of Timer/Counter2 as a Real Time Counter (RTC).
The TOSC1 pin is selected by setting the EXCLKAMR bit in the ASSR register to logic
zero. Under this condition TOSC1 and TOSC2 are disconnected from Port G and a
crystal can then be connected between the TOSC1 and TOSC2 pins to serve as an
independent clock source for Timer/Counter2. The Oscillator is optimized for use with a
32.768 kHz crystal. By setting the EXCLK bit in the ASSR, a 32 kHz external clock can
be applied on TOSC1.
Setting the EXCLKAMR bit to logic one selects the AMR pin as the Timer/Counter2
clock source. Thus the 32 kHz oscillator can be used by the MAC symbol counter while
the Timer/Counter2 uses pin AMR as clock source, see "MAC Symbol Counter" on
page 155.
A complete overview of the implemented asynchronous clock sources can be found in
Table 21-6 on page 354. The last column mentions which pins are available for GPIO
functionality. For details about the ASSR register refer to section "Register Description"
on page 354.
For Timer/Counter2, the possible pre-scaled selections are: clkT2S/8, clkT2S/32, clkT2S
/64, clkT2S/128, clkT2S/256, and clkT2S/1024. Additionally, clkT2S as well as 0 (stop) may
be selected. Setting the PSRASY bit in GTCCR resets the prescaler. This allows the
user to operate with a predictable prescaler.
354
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 21-6. Asynchronous clock selection for Timer/Counter2 and Symbol-Counter
AS2 EXCLK EXCLKAMR
Timer/Counter2
clock source
32 kHz crystal Osc.
(TOSC1/TOSC2)
PG2, PG3, PG4
as GPIOs
0 0 0 clkI/O off PG2, PG3, PG4
0 1 0 not defined not defined not defined
1 0 0 32 kHz crystal Osc on PG2
1 1 0 TOSC1 (PG4) off PG2, PG3
0 0 1 clkI/O off PG2, PG3, PG4
0 1 1 not defined not defined not defined
1 0 1 AMR (PG2) on
1 1 1 AMR (PG2) off PG3, PG4
21.11 Register Description
21.11.1 TIMSK2 – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($70) Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 OCIE2B OCIE2A TOIE2 TIMSK2
Read/Write R R R R R RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:3 – Res4:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 2 – OCIE2B - Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match B Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE2B bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one),
the Timer/Counter2 Compare Match B interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt
is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the OCF2B bit is
set in the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register TIFR2.
• Bit 1 – OCIE2A - Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match A Interrupt Enable
When the OCIE2A bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one),
the Timer/Counter2 Compare Match A interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt
is executed if a compare match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the OCF2A bit is
set in the Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register TIFR2.
• Bit 0 – TOIE2 - Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable
When the TOIE2 bit is written to one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt is executed
if an overflow in Timer/Counter2 occurs i.e., when the TOV2 bit is set in the
Timer/Counter2 Interrupt Flag Register TIFR2.
21.11.2 TIFR2 – Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$17 ($37) Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 OCF2B OCF2A TOV2 TIFR2
Read/Write R R R R R RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
355
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 7:3 – Res4:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 2 – OCF2B - Output Compare Flag 2 B
The OCF2B bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2
and the data in OCR2B Output Compare Register2. OCF2B is cleared by hardware
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2B is
cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2B
(Timer/Counter2 Compare Match Interrupt Enable), and OCF2B are set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 1 – OCF2A - Output Compare Flag 2 A
The OCF2A bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter2
and the data in OCR2A Output Compare Register2. OCF2A is cleared by hardware
when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, OCF2A is
cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the I-bit in SREG, OCIE2A
(Timer/Counter2 Compare Match Interrupt Enable), and OCF2A are set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match Interrupt is executed.
• Bit 0 – TOV2 - Timer/Counter2 Overflow Flag
The TOV2 bit is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter2. TOV2 is cleared
by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively,
TOV2 is cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the SREG I-bit, TOIE2A
(Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV2 are set (one), the
Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is executed. In PWM mode, this bit is set when
Timer/Counter2 changes counting direction at 0x00.
21.11.3 TCCR2A – Timer/Counter2 Control Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($B0) COM2A1
COM2A0
COM2B1
COM2B0
Res1 Res0 WGM21 WGM20
TCCR2A
Read/Write RW RW RW RW R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – COM2A1:0 - Compare Match Output A Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2A) behavior. If one or both of the
COM2A1:0 bits are set, the OC2A output overrides the normal port functionality of the
I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit
corresponding to the OC2A pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. When
OC2A is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2A1:0 bits depends on the
WGM22:20 bit settings. The following table shows the COM2A1:0 bit functionality when
the WGM22:20 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM). Refer to section
"Compare Match Output Unit" for a description of the functionality in the other modes.
Table 21-7 COM2A Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM2A1:0 0 Normal port operation, OC2A disconnected
1 Toggle OC2A on Compare Match
2 Clear OC2A on Compare Match
356
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
3 Set OC2A on Compare Match
• Bit 5:4 – COM2B1:0 - Compare Match Output B Mode
These bits control the Output Compare pin (OC2B) behavior. If one or both of the
COM2B1:0 bits are set, the OC2B output overrides the normal port functionality of the
I/O pin it is connected to. However, note that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit
corresponding to the OC2B pin must be set in order to enable the output driver. When
OC2B is connected to the pin, the function of the COM2B1:0 bits depends on the
WGM22:20 bit settings. The following table shows the COM2B1:0 bit functionality when
the WGM22:20 bits are set to a normal or CTC mode (non-PWM). Refer to section
"Compare Match Output Unit" for a description of the functionality in the other modes.
Table 21-8 COM2B Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
COM2B1:0 0 Normal port operation, OC2B disconnected
1 Toggle OC2B on Compare Match
2 Clear OC2B on Compare Match
3 Set OC2B on Compare Match
• Bit 3:2 – Res1:0 - Reserved
• Bit 1:0 – WGM21:20 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM22 bit found in the TCCR2B Register, these bits control the
counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and
what type of waveform generation to be used. Modes of operation supported by the
Timer/Counter2 unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare Match
(CTC) mode, and two types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes (see section
"Modes of Operation" for details).
Table 21-9 WGM2 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
WGM22:20 0x0 Normal mode of operation
0x1 PWM, phase correct, TOP=0xFF
0x2 CTC, TOP = OCRA
0x3 Fast PWM, TOP=0xFF
0x4 Reserved
0x5 PWM, Phase correct, TOP = OCRA
0x6 Reserved
0x7 Fast PWM, TOP=OCRA
21.11.4 TCCR2B – Timer/Counter2 Control Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($B1) FOC2A FOC2B Res1 Res0 WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 TCCR2B
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – FOC2A - Force Output Compare A
357
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The FOC2A bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode. However,
for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR2B
is written in PWM mode operation. When writing a logical one to the FOC2A bit, an
immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2A
output is changed according to its COM2A1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2A bit is
implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2A1:0 bits that
determines the effect of the forced compare. A FOC2A strobe will not generate any
interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR2A as TOP. The FOC2A bit
is always read as zero.
• Bit 6 – FOC2B - Force Output Compare B
The FOC2B bit is only active when the WGM bits specify a non-PWM mode. However,
for ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be set to zero when TCCR2B
is written in PWM mode operation. When writing a logical one to the FOC2B bit, an
immediate Compare Match is forced on the Waveform Generation unit. The OC2B
output is changed according to its COM2B1:0 bits setting. Note that the FOC2B bit is
implemented as a strobe. Therefore it is the value present in the COM2B1:0 bits that
determines the effect of the forced compare. A FOC2B strobe will not generate any
interrupt, nor will it clear the timer in CTC mode using OCR2B as TOP. The FOC2B bit
is always read as zero.
• Bit 5:4 – Res1:0 - Reserved
• Bit 3 – WGM22 - Waveform Generation Mode
Combined with the WGM21:20 bits found in the TCCR2A Register, this bit controls the
counting sequence of the counter, the source for maximum (TOP) counter value, and
what type of waveform generation to be used. See description of "TCCR2A -
Timer/Counter2 Control Register A" for details.
• Bit 2:0 – CS22:20 - Clock Select
The three Clock Select bits select the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter2. If
external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter2, transitions on the T2 pin will clock
the counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software
control of the counting.
Table 21-10 CS2 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CS22:20 0x00 No clock source (Timer/Counter2 stopped)
0x01 clkT2S/1 (no prescaling)
0x02 clkT2S/8 (from prescaler)
0x03 clkT2S/32 (from prescaler)
0x04 clkT2S/64 (from prescaler)
0x05 clkT2S/128 (from prescaler)
0x06 clkT2S/256 (from prescaler)
0x07 clkT2S/1024 (from prescaler)
21.11.5 TCNT2 – Timer/Counter2
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($B2) TCNT27:20 TCNT2
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
358
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The Timer/Counter Register gives direct access, both for read and write operations, to
the 8-bit counter unit of the Timer/Counter2. Writing to the TCNT2 Register blocks
(removes) the Compare Match on the following timer clock. Modifying the counter
(TCNT2) while the counter is running, introduces a risk of missing a Compare Match
between TCNT2 and the OCR2x Registers.
• Bit 7:0 – TCNT27:20 - Timer/Counter2 Byte
21.11.6 OCR2A – Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($B3) OCR2A7:0 OCR2A
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Register A contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC2A pin.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR2A7:0 - Output Compare Register
21.11.7 OCR2B – Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($B4) OCR2B7:0 OCR2B
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Output Compare Register B contains an 8-bit value that is continuously compared
with the counter value (TCNT2). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare
interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the OC2B pin.
• Bit 7:0 – OCR2B7:0 - Output Compare Register
21.11.8 ASSR – Asynchronous Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($B6) EXCLKAMR
EXCLK
AS2 TCN2UB
OCR2AUB
OCR2BUB
TCR2AUB
TCR2BUB
ASSR
Read/Write
RW RW RW R R R R R
Initial 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The register ASSR controls the asynchronous clocks for Timer/Counter2 and enables
the asynchronous 32kHz clock for the symbol counter. Three bits
(AS2,EXCLK,EXCLKAMR) are used to control the clocks. Note, to prevent clock spikes
on asynchronous clock wires, every access to ASSR should change only one of the
three bits.
• Bit 7 – EXCLKAMR - Enable External Clock Input for AMR
359
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The bit EXCLKAMR extends the available clock sources for Timer/Counter2. If this bit is
written to one, and asynchronous clock is selected (bit AS2 set), AMR functionality is
enabled and Timer/Counter2 is clocked by pin AMR.
• Bit 6 – EXCLK - Enable External Clock Input
When EXCLK is written to one, and asynchronous clock is selected, the external clock
input buffer is enabled and an external clock can be input on Timer Oscillator 1
(TOSC1) pin instead of a 32 kHz crystal. Writing to EXCLK should be done before
asynchronous operation is selected. Note that the crystal Oscillator will only run when
this bit is zero.
• Bit 5 – AS2 - Timer/Counter2 Asynchronous Mode
When AS2 is written to zero, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the I/O clock, clkI/O.
When AS2 is written to one, Timer/Counter2 is clocked from a crystal Oscillator
connected to the Timer Oscillator 1 (TOSC1) pin. When the value of AS2 is changed,
the contents of TCNT2, OCR2A, OCR2B, TCCR2A and TCCR2B might be corrupted.
• Bit 4 – TCN2UB - Timer/Counter2 Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCNT2 is written, this bit becomes
set. When TCNT2 has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is
cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCNT2 is ready to be
updated with a new value.
• Bit 3 – OCR2AUB - Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register A Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2A is written, this bit
becomes set. When OCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register,
this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2A is ready to
be updated with a new value.
• Bit 2 – OCR2BUB - Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register B Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2B is written, this bit
becomes set. When OCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register,
this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that OCR2B is ready to
be updated with a new value.
• Bit 1 – TCR2AUB - Timer/Counter2 Control Register A Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2A is written, this bit
becomes set. When TCCR2A has been updated from the temporary storage register,
this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2A is ready
to be updated with a new value.
• Bit 0 – TCR2BUB - Timer/Counter2 Control Register B Update Busy
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2B is written, this bit
becomes set. When TCCR2B has been updated from the temporary storage register,
this bit is cleared by hardware. A logical zero in this bit indicates that TCCR2B is ready
to be updated with a new value.
21.11.9 GTCCR – General Timer Counter Control register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$23 ($43) TSM PSRASY
GTCCR
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
360
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 7 – TSM - Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this
mode the value that is written to the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits is kept, hence
keeping the corresponding prescaler reset signals asserted. This ensures that the
corresponding Timer/Counters are halted and can be configured to the same value
without the risk of one of them advancing during the configuration. When the TSM bit is
written to zero, the PSRASY and PSRSYNC bits are cleared by hardware and the
Timer/Counters simultaneously start counting.
• Bit 1 – PSRASY - Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. This bit is normally
cleared immediately by hardware. If the bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating
in asynchronous mode, the bit will remain one until the prescaler has been reset. The
bit will not be cleared by hardware if the TSM bit is set.
361
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
22 SPI- Serial Peripheral Interface
22.1 Features
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer
between the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 and peripheral devices or between several
AVR devices.
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 SPI includes the following features:
• Full-duplex, Three-wire Synchronous Data Transfer
• Master or Slave Operation
• LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer
• Seven Programmable Bit Rates
• End of Transmission Interrupt Flag
• Write Collision Flag Protection
• Wake-up from Idle Mode
• Double Speed (CK/2) Master SPI Mode
22.2 Functional Description
USART can also be used in Master SPI mode, see "USART in SPI Mode" on page 399.
The Power Reduction SPI bit, PRSPI, in "PRR0 – Power Reduction Register0" on page
195 must be written to zero to enable SPI module. The block diagram of the SPI
interface is shown in Figure 22-1 on page 362.
The interconnection between Master and Slave CPUs with SPI is shown in Figure 22-2
on page 362. The system consists of two shift Registers, and a Master clock generator.
The SPI Master initiates the communication cycle when pulling low the Slave Select SS
__
pin of the desired Slave. Master and Slave prepare the data to be sent in their
respective shift Registers, and the Master generates the required clock pulses on the
SCK line to interchange data. Data is always shifted from Master to Slave on the Master
Out – Slave In, MOSI, line, and from Slave to Master on the Master In – Slave Out,
MISO, line. After each data packet, the Master will synchronize the Slave by pulling
high the Slave Select, SS
__
, line.
When configured as a Master, the SPI interface has no automatic control of the SS
__
line.
This must be handled by user software before communication can start. When this is
done, writing a byte to the SPI Data Register starts the SPI clock generator, and the
hardware shifts the eight bits into the Slave. After shifting one byte, the SPI clock
generator stops, setting the end of Transmission Flag (SPIF). If the SPI Interrupt Enable
bit (SPIE) in the SPCR Register is set, an interrupt is requested. The Master may
continue to shift the next byte by writing it into SPDR, or signal the end of packet by
pulling high the Slave Select, SS
__
line. The last incoming byte will be kept in the Buffer
Register for later use.
When configured as a Slave, the SPI interface will remain sleeping with MISO tri-stated
as long as the SS
__
pin is driven high. In this state, software may update the contents of
the SPI Data Register, SPDR, but the data will not be shifted out by incoming clock
pulses on the SCK pin until the SS pin is driven low. As one byte has been completely
shifted, the end of Transmission Flag, SPIF is set. If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit, SPIE,
in the SPCR Register is set, an interrupt is requested. The Slave may continue to place
new data to be sent into SPDR before reading the incoming data. The last incoming
byte will be kept in the Buffer Register for later use.
362
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 22-1. SPI Block Diagram(1)
SPI2X
SPI2X
DIVIDER
/2/4/8/16/32/64/128
Note: 1. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 2 and Table 14-3 on page 224 for SPI pin placement.
Figure 22-2. SPI Master-slave Interconnection
SHIFT
ENABLE
The system is single buffered in the transmit direction and double buffered in the
receive direction. This means that bytes to be transmitted cannot be written to the SPI
Data Register before the entire shift cycle is completed. When receiving data, however,
a received character must be read from the SPI Data Register before the next character
has been completely shifted in. Otherwise, the first byte is lost. In SPI Slave mode, the
363
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
control logic will sample the incoming signal of the SCK pin. To ensure correct sampling
of the clock signal, the minimum low and high periods should be:
Low period: longer than 2 CPU clock cycles
High period: longer than 2 CPU clock cycles
When the SPI is enabled, the data direction of the MOSI, MISO, SCK, and SS
__
pins is
overridden according to Table 21-1. For more details on automatic port overrides, refer
to "Alternate Port Functions" on page 222.
Table 22-1. Pin Overrides(1)
Pin Direction, Master SPI Direction, Slave SPI
MOSI User Defined Input
MISO Input User Defined
SCK User Defined Input
SS User Defined Input
Note: 1. See "Alternate Functions of Port B" on page 223 for a detailed description of how
to define the direction of the user defined SPI pins.
The following code examples show how to initialize the SPI as a Master and how to
perform a simple transmission. DDR_SPI in the examples must be replaced by the
actual Data Direction Register controlling the SPI pins. DD_MOSI, DD_MISO and
DD_SCK must be replaced by the actual data direction bits for these pins. E.g. if MOSI
is placed on pin PB5, replace DD_MOSI with DDB5 and DDR_SPI with DDRB.
Assembly Code Example(1)
SPI_MasterInit:
; Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input
ldi r17,(1<<DD_MOSI)|(1<<DD_SCK)
out DDR_SPI,r17
; Enable SPI, Master, set clock rate fck/16
ldi r17,(1<<SPE)|(1<<MSTR)|(1<<SPR0)
out SPCR,r17
ret
SPI_MasterTransmit:
; Start transmission of data (r16)
out SPDR,r16
Wait_Transmit:
; Wait for transmission complete
sbis SPSR,SPIF
rjmp Wait_Transmit
ret
364
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Example(1)
void SPI_MasterInit(void)
{
/* Set MOSI and SCK output, all others input */
DDR_SPI = (1<<DD_MOSI)|(1<<DD_SCK);
/* Enable SPI, Master, set clock rate fck/16 */
SPCR = (1<<SPE)|(1<<MSTR)|(1<<SPR0);
}
void SPI_MasterTransmit(char cData)
{
/* Start transmission */
SPDR = cData;
/* Wait for transmission complete */
while(!(SPSR & (1<<SPIF)))
;
}
Note: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8
Assembly Code Example(1)
SPI_SlaveInit:
; Set MISO output, all others input
ldi r17,(1<<DD_MISO)
out DDR_SPI,r17
; Enable SPI
ldi r17,(1<<SPE)
out SPCR,r17
ret
SPI_SlaveReceive:
; Wait for reception complete
sbis SPSR,SPIF
rjmp SPI_SlaveReceive
; Read received data and return
in r16,SPDR
ret
365
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Example(1)
void SPI_SlaveInit(void)
{
/* Set MISO output, all others input */
DDR_SPI = (1<<DD_MISO);
/* Enable SPI */
SPCR = (1<<SPE);
}
char SPI_SlaveReceive(void)
{
/* Wait for reception complete */
while(!(SPSR & (1<<SPIF)))
;
/* Return Data Register */
return SPDR;
}
Note: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8;
22.3 Pin Functionality Slave Select Pin SS
__
22.3.1 Slave Mode
When the SPI is configured as a Slave, the Slave Select (SS
__
) pin is always input. When
SS
__
is held low, the SPI is activated, and MISO becomes an output if configured so by
the user. All other pins are inputs. When SS
__
is driven high, all pins are inputs, and the
SPI is passive, which means that it will not receive incoming data. Note that the SPI
logic will be reset once the SS
__
pin is driven high. The SS
__
pin is useful for packet/byte
synchronization to keep the slave bit counter synchronous with the master clock
generator. When the SS
__
pin is driven high, the SPI slave will immediately reset the send
and receive logic, and drop any partially received data in the Shift Register.
22.3.2 Master Mode
When the SPI is configured as a Master (MSTR in SPCR is set), the user can
determine the direction of the SS
__
pin. If SS
__
is configured as an output, the pin is a
general output pin which does not affect the SPI system. Typically, the pin will be
driving the SS
__
pin of the SPI Slave. If SS
__
is configured as an input, it must be held high
to ensure Master SPI operation. If the SS
__
pin is driven low by peripheral circuitry when
the SPI is configured as a Master with the SS
__
pin defined as an input, the SPI system
interprets this as another master selecting the SPI as a slave and starting to send data
to it. To avoid bus contention, the SPI system takes the following actions:
1. The MSTR bit in SPCR is cleared and the SPI system becomes a Slave. As a result
of the SPI becoming a Slave, the MOSI and SCK pins become inputs.
2. The SPIF Flag in SPSR is set, and if the SPI interrupt is enabled, and the I-bit in
SREG is set, the interrupt routine will be executed.
Thus, when interrupt-driven SPI transmission is used in Master mode, and there exists
a possibility that SS
__
is driven low, the interrupt should always check that the MSTR bit
is still set. If the MSTR bit has been cleared by a slave select, it must be set by the user
to re-enable SPI Master Mode.
366
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
22.3.3 Data Mode
There are four combinations of SCK phase and polarity with respect to serial data,
which are determined by control bits CPHA and CPOL. The SPI data transfer formats
are shown in Figure 22-3 below and Figure 22-4 below. Data bits are shifted out and
latched in on opposite edges of the SCK signal, ensuring sufficient time for data signals
to stabilize. This is clearly seen in the summary of Table 22-2 below:
Table 22-2. CPOL Functionality
Leading Edge Trailing Edge SPI Mode
CPOL=0, CPHA=0 Sample (Rising) Setup (Falling) 0
CPOL=0, CPHA=1 Setup (Rising) Sample (Falling) 1
CPOL=1, CPHA=0 Sample (Falling) Setup (Rising) 2
CPOL=1, CPHA=1 Setup (Falling) Sample (Rising) 3
Figure 22-3. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
LSB
MSB
SCK (CPOL = 0)
mode 0
SAMPLE I
MOSI/MISO
CHANGE 0
MOSI PIN
CHANGE 0
MISO PIN
SCK (CPOL = 1)
mode 2
SS
MSB
LSB
Bit 6
Bit 1
Bit 5
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 5
MSB first (DORD = 0)
LSB first (DORD = 1)
Figure 22-4. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 1
SCK (CPOL = 0)
mode 1
SAMPLE I
MOSI/MISO
CHANGE 0
MOSI PIN
CHANGE 0
MISO PIN
SCK (CPOL = 1)
mode 3
SS
MSB
LSB
Bit 6
Bit 1
Bit 5
Bit 2
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 1
Bit 6
LSB
MSB
MSB first (DORD = 0)
LSB first (DORD = 1)
367
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
22.4 Register Description
22.4.1 SPCR – SPI Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$2C ($4C) SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 SPCR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – SPIE - SPI Interrupt Enable
This bit causes the SPI interrupt to be executed if SPIF bit in the SPSR Register is set
and the if the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is set.s
• Bit 6 – SPE - SPI Enable
When the SPE bit is set (one), the SPI is enabled. This bit must be set to enable any
SPI operations.
• Bit 5 – DORD - Data Order
When the DORD bit is written to one, the LSB of the data word is transmitted first.
When the DORD bit is written to zero, the MSB of the data word is transmitted first.
• Bit 4 – MSTR - Master/Slave Select
This bit selects Master SPI mode when written to one, and Slave SPI mode when
written logic zero. If the Slave Select pin is configured as an input and is driven low
while MSTR is set, MSTR will be cleared and SPIF in SPSR are set. The user will then
have to set MSTR to re-enable SPI Master mode.
• Bit 3 – CPOL - Clock polarity
When this bit is written to one, SCK is high when idle. When CPOL is written to zero,
SCK is low when idle. Refer to the "Data Modes" section for an example. The CPOL
functionality is summarized below.
Table 22-3 CPOL Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CPOL 0 Rising (Leading Edge), Falling (Trailing
Edge)
1 Falling (Leading Egde), Rising (Trailing
Edge)
• Bit 2 – CPHA - Clock Phase
The settings of the Clock Phase bit (CPHA) determine if data is sampled on the leading
(first) or trailing (last) edge of SCK. Refer to the "Data Modes" section for an example.
The CPOL functionality is summarized below.
Table 22-4 CPHA Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
CPHA 0 Sample (Leading Edge), Setup (Trailing
Edge)
1 Setup (Leading Edge), Sample (Trailing
Edge)
• Bit 1:0 – SPR1:0 - SPI Clock Rate Select 1 and 0
368
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
These two bits control the SCK rate of the device configured as a Master. SPR1 and
SPR0 have no effect on the Slave. The relationship between SCK and the Oscillator
Clock frequency fosc is shown in the following table.
Table 22-5 SPR Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
SPR1:0 0x00 fosc/4 / fosc/2 (SPI2X=0/1)
0x01 fosc/16 / fosc/8 (SPI2X=0/1)
0x02 fosc/64 / fosc/32 (SPI2X=0/1)
0x03 fosc/128 / fosc/64 (SPI2X=0/1)
22.4.2 SPSR – SPI Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$2D ($4D) SPIF WCOL Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 SPI2X SPSR
Read/Write R R R R R R R RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – SPIF - SPI Interrupt Flag
When a serial transfer is complete, the SPIF Flag is set. An interrupt is generated if
SPIE in SPCR is set and global interrupts are enabled. The SPIF Flag is also set if the
Slave Select pin is an input and is driven low when the SPI is in Master mode. SPIF is
cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector.
Alternatively, the SPIF bit is cleared by first reading the SPI Status Register with SPIF
set and then accessing the SPI Data Register (SPDR).
• Bit 6 – WCOL - Write Collision Flag
The WCOL bit is set if the SPI Data Register (SPDR) is written during a data transfer.
The WCOL bit (and the SPIF bit) are cleared by first reading the SPI Status Register
with WCOL set and then accessing the SPI Data Register.
• Bit 5:1 – Res4:0 - Reserved
• Bit 0 – SPI2X - Double SPI Speed Bit
When this bit is written logic one the SPI speed (SCK Frequency) will be doubled when
the SPI is in Master mode. This means that the minimum SCK period will be two CPU
clock periods. When the SPI is configured as Slave, the SPI is only guaranteed to work
at fosc/4 or lower. The SPI interface is also used for program memory and EEPROM
downloading or uploading. See section "Serial Downloading" for serial programming
and verification.
22.4.3 SPDR – SPI Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$2E ($4E) SPDR7:0 SPDR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW R R
Initial Value X X X X X X 0 0
369
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The SPI Data Register is a read/write register used for data transfer between the
Register File and the SPI Shift Register. Writing to the register initiates data
transmission. Reading the register causes the Shift Register Receive buffer to be read.
• Bit 7:0 – SPDR7:0 - SPI Data Register
370
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
23 USART
23.1 Features
• Full duplex operation (independent serial receive and transmit registers)
• Asynchronous or synchronous operation
• Master or slave clocked synchronous operation
• High resolution baud rate generator
• Supports serial frames with 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 data bits and 1 or 2 stop bits
• Odd or even parity generation and parity check supported by hardware
• Data overrun detection
• Framing error detection
• Noise filtering includes false start bit detection and digital low pass filter
• 3 separate interrupts on TX complete, TX data register empty and RX complete
• Multi-processor communication mode
• Double speed, asynchronous communication mode
23.2 Overview
The Universal Synchronous and Asynchronous Serial Receiver and Transmitter
(USART) is a highly flexible serial communication device.
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 has two USART’s, USART0 and USART1. The
functionality for all two USART’s is described below. USART0 and USART1 have
different I/O registers as shown in "Register Summary" on page 540.
A simplified block diagram of the USART transmitter is shown in Figure 23-1 on page
371 on page 371. CPU accessible I/O registers and I/O pins are shown in bold.
The Power Reduction USART0 bit, PRUSART0, in "PRR0 – Power Reduction
Register0" on page 195 must be disabled by writing a logical zero to it. The Power
Reduction USART1 bit, PRUSART1, in "PRR1 – Power Reduction Register 1" on page
196 must be disabled by writing a logical zero to it.
The dashed boxes in the block diagram Figure 23-1 on page 371 separate the three
main parts of the USART (listed from the top): clock generator, transmitter and receiver.
Control registers are shared by all units. The clock generation logic consists of
synchronization logic for external clock input used by synchronous slave operation, and
the baud rate generator. The XCKn (transfer clock) pin is only used by synchronous
transfer mode. The transmitter consists of a single write buffer, a serial shift register,
Parity generator and control logic for handling different serial frame formats. The write
buffer allows a continuous transfer of data without any delay between frames. The
receiver is the most complex part of the USART module due to its clock and data
recovery units. The recovery units are used for asynchronous data reception. In
addition to the recovery units, the receiver includes a parity checker, control logic, a
shift register and a two level receive buffer (UDRn). The receiver supports the same
frame formats as the transmitter, and can detect frame, data overrun and parity errors.
371
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 23-1. USART Block Diagram(1)
PARITY
GENERATOR
UBRR[H:L]
UDR
(Transmit)
UCSRA UCSRB UCSRC
BAUD RATE GENERATOR
TRANSMIT SHIFT REGISTER
RECEIVE SHIFT REGISTER
RxD
TxD
PIN
CONTROL
UDR
(Receive)
PIN
CONTROL
XCK
DATA
RECOVERY
CLOCK
RECOVERY
PIN
CONTROL
TX
CONTROL
RX
CONTROL
PARITY
CHECKER
DATA BUS
OSC
SYNC LOGIC
Clock Generator
Transmitter
Receiver
Note: 1. See Figure 1-1 on page 2, Table 14-6 on page 226 and Table 14-9 on page
228Table 14-9 on page 228for USART pin placement.
23.3 Clock Generation
The clock generation logic generates the base clock for the transmitter and receiver.
The USART supports four modes of clock operation: Normal asynchronous, double
speed asynchronous, master synchronous and slave synchronous mode. The UMSELn
bit in USART Control and Status Register C (UCSRnC) selects between asynchronous
and synchronous operation. Double speed (asynchronous mode only) is controlled by
the U2Xn found in the UCSRnA register. When using synchronous mode (UMSELn =
1), the data direction register for the XCKn pin (DDR_XCKn) controls whether the clock
source is internal (master mode) or external (slave mode). The XCKn pin is only active
when using synchronous mode.
372
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 22-2 on page 362 shows a block diagram of the clock generation logic.
Figure 23-2. Clock Generation Logic, Block Diagram
Prescaling
Down-Counter
/2
UBRR
/4 /2
fosc
UBRR+1
Sync
Register
OSC
XCK
Pin
txclk
U2X
UMSEL
DDR_XCK
0
1
0
1
xcki
xcko
DDR_XCK
rxclk
0
1
1
0
Edge
Detector
UCPOL
Signal description:
txclk Transmitter clock (internal signal).
rxclk Receiver base clock (internal signal).
xcki Input from XCK pin (internal signal). Used for synchronous slave operation.
xcko Clock output to XCK pin (internal signal). Used for synchronous master
operation.
fOSC System clock frequency.
23.3.1 Internal Clock Generation – The Baud Rate Generator
Internal clock generation is used for the asynchronous and the synchronous master
modes of operation. The description in this section refers to Figure 22-2 on page 362.
The USART Baud Rate Register (UBRRn) and the down-counter connected to it
function as a programmable prescaler or baud rate generator. The down-counter,
running at system clock (fOSC), is loaded with the UBRRn value each time the counter
has counted down to zero or when the UBRRLn register is written. A clock is generated
each time the counter reaches zero. This clock is the baud rate generator clock output
(= fOSC/(UBRRn+1)). The transmitter divides the baud rate generator clock output by 2,
8 or 16 depending on mode. The baud rate generator output is used directly by the
receiver’s clock and data recovery units. However, the recovery units use a state
machine that uses 2, 8 or 16 states depending on mode set by the state of the
UMSELn, U2Xn and DDR_XCKn bits.
Table 23-1 below contains equations for calculating the baud rate (in bits per second)
and for calculating the UBRRn value for each mode of operation using an internally
generated clock source.
Table 23-1. Equations for Calculating Baud Rate Register Setting
Operating Mode Equation for Calculating
Baud Rate(1)
Equation for Calculating
UBRR Value
Asynchronous Normal Mode
(U2Xn = 0) )1(16 +
=UBRRn
f
BAUD OSC
1
16 −= BAUD
f
UBRRn OSC
Asynchronous Double Speed
Mode (U2Xn = 1) )1(8 +
=UBRRn
f
BAUD OSC 1
8−= BAUD
f
UBRRn OSC
373
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Operating Mode Equation for Calculating
Baud Rate(1)
Equation for Calculating
UBRR Value
Synchronous Master Mode
)1(2 +
=UBRRn
f
BAUD OSC 1
2−= BAUD
f
UBRRn OSC
Note: 1. The baud rate is defined to be the transfer rate in bit per second (bps).
BAUD Baud rate (in bits per second, bps)
fOSC System oscillator clock frequency
UBRRn Contents of the UBRRHn and UBRRLn registers, (0-4095)
Some examples of UBRRn values for some system clock frequencies are found in
Table 23-14 on page 396.
23.3.2 Double Speed Operation (U2Xn)
The transfer rate can be doubled by setting the U2Xn bit in UCSRnA. Setting this bit
only has effect for the asynchronous operation. Set this bit to zero when using
synchronous operation.
Setting this bit will reduce the divisor of the baud rate divider from 16 to 8, effectively
doubling the transfer rate for asynchronous communication. Note however that the
receiver will in this case only use half the number of samples (reduced from 16 to 8) for
data sampling and clock recovery, and therefore a more accurate baud rate setting and
system clock are required when this mode is used. For the transmitter, there are no
downsides.
23.3.3 External Clock
External clocking is used by the synchronous slave modes of operation. The description
in this section refers to Figure 22-2 on page 362 for details.
External clock input from the XCKn pin is sampled by a synchronization register to
minimize the chance of meta-stability. The output from the synchronization register
must then pass through an edge detector before it can be used by the transmitter and
receiver. This process introduces a two CPU clock period delay and therefore the
maximum external XCKn clock frequency is limited by the following equation:
4
OSC
XCK
f
f<
Note that fOSC depends on the stability of the system clock source. It is therefore
recommended to add some margin to avoid possible loss of data due to frequency
variations.
23.3.4 Synchronous Clock Operation
When synchronous mode is used (UMSELn = 1), the XCKn pin will be used as either
clock input (slave) or clock output (master). The dependency between the clock edges
and data sampling or data change is the same. The basic principle is that data input (on
RxDn) is sampled at the opposite XCKn clock edge of the edge the data output (TxDn)
is changed.
374
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 23-3. Synchronous Mode XCKn Timing
RxD / TxD
XCK
RxD / TxD
XCK
UCPOL = 0
UCPOL = 1
Sample
Sample
The UCPOLn bit UCRSC selects which XCKn clock edge is used for data sampling and
which is used for data change. As Figure 22-3 on page 366 shows, when UCPOLn is
zero the data will be changed at rising XCKn edge and sampled at falling XCKn edge. If
UCPOLn is set, the data will be changed at falling XCKn edge and sampled at rising
XCKn edge.
23.4 Frame Formats
A serial frame is defined to be one character of data bits with synchronization bits (start
and stop bits), and optionally a parity bit for error checking. The USART accepts all 30
combinations of the following as valid frame formats:
• 1 start bit
• 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 data bits
• no, even or odd parity bit
• 1 or 2 stop bits
A frame starts with the start bit followed by the least significant data bit. Then the next
data bits, up to a total of nine, are succeeding, ending with the most significant bit. If
enabled, the parity bit is inserted after the data bits, before the stop bits. When a
complete frame is transmitted, it can be directly followed by a new frame, or the
communication line can be set to an idle (high) state. Figure 23-4 below illustrates the
possible combinations of the frame formats. Bits inside brackets are optional.
Figure 23-4. Frame Formats
10 2 3 4 [5] [6] [7] [8] [P]St Sp1 [Sp2] (St / IDLE)(IDLE)
FRAME
St Start bit, always low
(n) Data bits (0 to 8)
P Parity bit - can be odd or even
Sp Stop bit, always high
IDLE No transfers on the communication line (RxDn or TxDn). An IDLE line must be
high
The frame format used by the USART is set by the UCSZn2:0, UPMn1:0 and USBSn
bits in UCSRnB and UCSRnC. The receiver and transmitter use the same setting. Note
that changing the setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing communication for
both the receiver and transmitter.
375
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The USART Character Size (UCSZn2:0) bits select the number of data bits in the
frame. The USART Parity Mode (UPMn1:0) bits enable and set the type of parity bit.
The selection between one or two stop bits is done by the USART Stop Bit Select
(USBSn) bit. The receiver ignores the second stop bit. A frame error will therefore only
be detected in cases where the first stop bit is zero.
23.4.1 Parity Bit Calculation
The parity bit is calculated by doing an exclusive-or of all the data bits. If odd parity is
used, the result of the exclusive or is inverted. The parity bit is located between the last
data bit and first stop bit of a serial frame. The relation between the parity bit and data
bits is as follows:
1
0
01231
01231
⊕⊕⊕⊕⊕⊕=
⊕
⊕
⊕
⊕
⊕
⊕
=
−
−
dddddP
dddddP
nodd
neven
K
K
Peven Parity bit using even parity
Podd Parity bit using odd parity
dn Data bit n of the character
23.5 USART Initialization
The USART has to be initialized before any communication can take place. The
initialization process normally consists of setting the baud rate, setting frame format and
enabling the transmitter or the receiver depending on the usage. For interrupt driven
USART operation, the global interrupt flag should be cleared (and interrupts globally
disabled) when doing the initialization.
Before doing a re-initialization with changed baud rate or frame format, be sure that
there are no ongoing transmissions during the period the registers are changed. The
TXCn flag can be used to check that the transmitter has completed all transfers, and
the RXC flag can be used to check that there are no unread data in the receive buffer.
Note that the TXCn flag must be cleared before each transmission (before UDRn is
written) if it is used for this purpose.
The following simple USART initialization code examples show one assembly and one
C function that are equal in functionality. The examples assume asynchronous
operation using polling (no interrupts enabled) and a fixed frame format. The baud rate
is given as a function parameter. For the assembly code, the baud rate parameter is
assumed to be stored in the r17:r16 Registers.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Init:
; Set baud rate
out UBRRnH, r17
out UBRRnL, r16
; Enable receiver and transmitter
ldi r16, (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn)
out UCSRnB,r16
; Set frame format: 8data, 2stop bit
ldi r16, (1<<USBSn)|(3<<UCSZn0)
out UCSRnC,r16
ret
376
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Example(1)
#define FOSC 8000000// Clock Speed
#define BAUD 9600
#define (MYUBRR FOSC/16/BAUD-1)
void main( void )
{...
USART_Init ( MYUBRR );
...} // main
void USART_Init( unsigned int ubrr){
/* Set baud rate */
UBRRnH = (unsigned char)(ubrr>>8);
UBRRnL = (unsigned char) ubrr;
/* Enable receiver and transmitter */
UCSRnB = (1<<RXEN)|(1<<TXEN);
/* Set frame format: 8data, 2stop bit */
UCSRnC = (1<<USBS)|(3<<UCSZ0);
} // USART_Init
Note: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8
More advanced initialization routines can be made that include frame format as
parameters, disable interrupts and so on. However, many applications use a fixed
setting of the baud and control registers, and for these types of applications the
initialization code can be placed directly in the main routine, or be combined with
initialization code for other I/O modules.
23.6 Data Transmission – The USART Transmitter
The USART transmitter is enabled by setting the Transmit Enable (TXEN) bit in the
UCSRnB register. When the transmitter is enabled, the normal port operation of the
TxDn pin is overridden by the USART and gives the function as the transmitter’s serial
output. The baud rate, mode of operation and frame format must be set up once before
doing any transmissions. If synchronous operation is used, the clock on the XCKn pin
will be overridden and used as transmission clock.
23.6.1 Sending Frames with 5 to 8 Data Bit
A data transmission is initiated by loading the transmit buffer with the data to be
transmitted. The CPU can load the transmit buffer by writing to the UDRn I/O location.
The buffered data in the transmit buffer will be moved to the shift register when the shift
register is ready to send a new frame. The shift register is loaded with new data if it is in
idle state (no ongoing transmission) or immediately after the last stop bit of the previous
frame is transmitted. When the shift register is loaded with new data, it will transfer one
complete frame at the rate given by the baud rate register, U2Xn bit or by XCKn
depending on mode of operation.
The following code examples show a simple USART transmit function based on polling
of the Data Register Empty Flag (UDREn). When using frames with less than eight bits,
the most significant bits written to the UDRn are ignored. The USART has to be
initialized before the function can be used. For the assembly code, the data to be sent
is assumed to be stored in register r16.
377
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Transmit:
; Wait for empty transmit buffer
sbis UCSRnA,UDREn rjmp USART_Transmit
; Put data (r16) into buffer, sends the data
out UDRn,r16
ret
C Code Example(1)
void USART_Transmit( unsigned char data )
{
/* Wait for empty transmit buffer */
while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn)) );
/* Put data into buffer, sends the data */
UDRn = data;
}
Note: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8
The function simply waits for the transmit buffer to be empty by checking the UDREn
flag, before loading it with new data to be transmitted. If the data register empty
interrupt is utilized, the interrupt routine writes the data into the buffer.
23.6.2 Sending Frames with 9 Data Bit
If 9 bit characters are used (UCSZn2:0 = 7), the ninth bit must be written to the TXB8 bit
in UCSRnB before the low byte of the character is written to UDRn. The following code
examples show a transmit function that handles 9 bit characters. For the assembly
code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in registers r17:r16.
Assembly Code Example(1)(2)
USART_Transmit:
; Wait for empty transmit buffer
sbis UCSRnA,UDREn
rjmp USART_Transmit
; Copy 9th bit from r17 to TXB8
cbi UCSRnB,TXB8
sbrc r17,0
sbi UCSRnB,TXB8
; Put LSB data (r16) into buffer, sends the data
out UDRn,r16
ret
378
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Example(1)(2)
void USART_Transmit( unsigned int data )
{
/* Wait for empty transmit buffer */
while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn))) );
/* Copy 9th bit to TXB8 */
UCSRnB &= ~(1<<TXB8);
if ( data & 0x0100 )
UCSRnB |= (1<<TXB8);
/* Put data into buffer, sends the data */
UDRn = data;
}
Note: 1. These transmit functions are written to be general functions. They can be
optimized if the content of the UCSRnB is static. For example, only the TXB8 bit
of the UCSRnB register is used after initialization.
2. See "About Code Examples" on page 8
The 9th bit can be used for indicating an address frame when using multi processor
communication mode or for other protocol handling as for example synchronization.
23.6.3 Transmitter Flags and Interrupts
The USART transmitter has two flags that indicate its state: USART Data Register
Empty (UDREn) and Transmit Complete (TXCn). Both flags can be used for generating
interrupts.
The Data Register Empty Flag (UDREn) indicates whether the transmit buffer is ready
to receive new data. This bit is set when the transmit buffer is empty, and cleared when
the transmit buffer contains data to be transmitted that has not yet been moved into the
shift register. For compatibility with future devices, always write this bit to zero when
writing the UCSRnA register.
When the USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable (UDRIEn) bit in UCSRnB is
written to one, the USART data register empty interrupt will be executed as long as
UDREn is set (provided that global interrupts are enabled). UDREn is cleared by writing
UDRn. When interrupt-driven data transmission is used, the data register empty
interrupt routine must either write new data to UDRn in order to clear UDREn or disable
the data register empty interrupt, otherwise a new interrupt will occur once the interrupt
routine terminates.
The Transmit Complete Flag (TXCn) bit is set one when the entire frame in the transmit
shift register has been shifted out and there are no new data currently present in the
transmit buffer. The TXCn flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmission
complete interrupt is executed, or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location.
The TXCn flag is useful in half-duplex communication interfaces (like the RS-485
standard), where a transmitting application must enter receive mode and free the
communication bus immediately after completing the transmission.
When the Transmission Complete Interrupt Enable (TXCIEn) bit in UCSRnB is set, the
USART transmission complete interrupt will be executed when the TXCn flag becomes
set (provided that global interrupts are enabled). When the transmission complete
interrupt is used, the interrupt handling routine does not have to clear the TXCn flag.
This is done automatically when the interrupt is executed.
379
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
23.6.4 Parity Generator
The parity generator calculates the parity bit for the serial frame data. When parity bit is
enabled (UPMn1 = 1), the transmitter control logic inserts the parity bit between the last
data bit and the first stop bit of the frame that is sent.
23.6.5 Disabling the Transmitter
The disabling of the transmitter (setting the TXEN to zero) will not become effective until
ongoing and pending transmissions are completed, i.e., when the transmit shift register
and transmit buffer register do not contain data to be transmitted. The transmitter will no
longer override the TxDn pin when disabled.
23.7 Data Reception – The USART Receiver
The USART receiver is enabled by writing the Receive Enable (RXENn) bit in the
UCSRnB register to one. When the receiver is enabled, the normal pin operation of the
RxDn pin is overridden by the USART and given the function as the receiver’s serial
input. The baud rate, mode of operation and frame format must be set up once before
any serial reception can be done. If synchronous operation is used, the clock on the
XCKn pin will be used as transfer clock.
23.7.1 Receiving Frames with 5 to 8 Data Bits
The receiver starts data reception when it detects a valid start bit. Each bit that follows
the start bit will be sampled at the baud rate or XCKn clock, and shifted into the receive
shift register until the first stop bit of a frame is received. A second stop bit will be
ignored by the receiver. When the first stop bit is received, i.e., a complete serial frame
is present in the receive shift register, the contents of the shift register will be moved
into the receive buffer. The receive buffer can then be read by reading the UDRn I/O
location.
The following code example shows a simple USART receive function based on polling
of the Receive Complete Flag (RXCn). When using frames with less than eight bits the
most significant bits of the data read from the UDRn will be masked to zero. The
USART has to be initialized before the function can be used. The function simply waits
for data to be present in the receive buffer by checking the RXCn flag before reading
the buffer and returning the value.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Receive:
; Wait for data to be received
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
rjmp USART_Receive
; Get and return received data from buffer
in r16, UDRn
ret
380
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Example(1)
unsigned char USART_Receive( void )
{
/* Wait for data to be received */
while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) );
/* Get and return received data from buffer */
return UDRn;
}
Note: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8
23.7.2 Receiving Frames with 9 Data Bits
If 9 bit characters are used (UCSZn2:0=7) the 9th bit must be read from the RXB8n bit in
UCSRnB before reading the low bits from the UDRn register. This rule applies to the
FEn, DORn and UPEn status flags as well. Read status from UCSRnA, then data from
UDRn. Reading the UDRn I/O location will change the state of the receive buffer FIFO
and consequently the TXB8n, FEn, DORn and UPEn bits, which all are stored in the
FIFO, will change.
The following code example shows a simple USART receive function that handles both
nine bit characters and the status bits.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Receive:
; Wait for data to be received
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
rjmp USART_Receive
; Get status and 9th bit, then data from buffer
in r18, UCSRnA
in r17, UCSRnB
in r16, UDRn
; If error, return -1
andi r18,(1<<FEn)|(1<<DORn)|(1<<UPEn)
breq USART_ReceiveNoError
ldi r17, HIGH(-1)
ldi r16, LOW(-1)
USART_ReceiveNoError:
; Filter the 9th bit, then return
lsr r17
andi r17, 0x01
ret
381
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Example(1)
unsigned int USART_Receive( void )
{
unsigned char status, resh, resl;
/* Wait for data to be received */
while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) );
/* Get status and 9th bit, then data */
/* from buffer */
status = UCSRnA;
resh = UCSRnB;
resl = UDRn;
/* If error, return -1 */
if ( status & (1<<FEn)|(1<<DORn)|(1<<UPEn) )
return -1;
/* Filter the 9th bit, then return */
resh = (resh >> 1) & 0x01;
return ((resh << 8) | resl);
}
Note: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8
The receive function example reads all the I/O registers into the register file before any
computation is done. This gives an optimal receive buffer utilization since the buffer
location read will be free to accept new data as early as possible.
23.7.3 Receive Complete Flag and Interrupt
The USART receiver has one flag that indicates the receiver state.
The Receive Complete Flag (RXCn) indicates if there are unread data present in the
receive buffer. This flag is one when unread data exist in the receive buffer, and zero
when the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the receiver
is disabled (RXENn = 0), the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXCn
bit will become zero.
When the Receive Complete Interrupt Enable (RXCIEn) in UCSRnB is set, the USART
receive complete interrupt will be executed as long as the RXCn flag is set (provided
that global interrupts are enabled). When interrupt-driven data reception is used, the
receive complete routine must read the received data from UDRn in order to clear the
RXCn flag, otherwise a new interrupt will occur once the interrupt routine terminates.
23.7.4 Receiver Error Flags
The USART receiver has three error flags: Frame Error (FEn), Data OverRun (DORn)
and Parity Error (UPEn). All can be accessed by reading UCSRnA. Common for the
error flags is that they are located in the receive buffer together with the frame for which
they indicate the error status. Due to the buffering of the error flags, the UCSRnA must
be read before the receive buffer (UDRn), since reading the UDRn I/O location changes
the buffer read location. The error flags cannot be altered by the application software
doing a write to the flag location. However, all flags must be set to zero when the
UCSRnA is written for upward compatibility of future USART implementations. None of
the error flags can generate interrupts.
The Frame Error Flag (FEn) indicates the state of the first stop bit of the next readable
frame stored in the receive buffer. The FEn flag is zero when the stop bit was correctly
382
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
read (as one), and the FEn flag will be one when the stop bit was incorrect (zero). This
flag can be used for detecting out-of-sync conditions, detecting break conditions and
protocol handling. The FEn flag is not affected by the setting of the USBSn bit in
UCSRnC since the receiver ignores all, except for the first, stop bits. For compatibility
with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA.
The Data OverRun Flag (DORn) indicates data loss due to a receiver buffer full
condition. A data overrun occurs when the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a
new character waiting in the receive shift register, and a new start bit is detected. If the
DORn flag is set there was one or more serial frame lost between the frame last read
from UDRn, and the next frame read from UDRn. For compatibility with future devices,
always write this bit to zero when writing to UCSRnA. The DORn flag is cleared when
the frame received was successfully moved from the shift register to the receive buffer.
The Parity Error Flag (UPEn) indicates that the next frame in the receive buffer had a
parity error when received. If parity check is not enabled the UPEn bit will always be
read zero. For compatibility with future devices, always set this bit to zero when writing
to UCSRnA. For more details see "Parity Bit Calculation" on page 375 and "Parity
Checker" below.
23.7.5 Parity Checker
The parity checker is active when the high USART parity mode (UPMn1) bit is set. Type
of parity check to be performed (odd or even) is selected by the UPMn0 bit. When
enabled, the parity checker calculates the parity of the data bits in incoming frames and
compares the result with the parity bit from the serial frame. The result of the check is
stored in the receive buffer together with the received data and stop bits. The Parity
Error Flag (UPEn) can then be read by software to check if the frame had a parity error.
The UPEn bit is set if the next character that can be read from the receive buffer had a
parity error when received .The parity checking was enabled at that point (UPMn1 = 1).
This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDRn) is read.
23.7.6 Disabling the Receiver
In contrast to the transmitter, disabling of the receiver will be immediate. Data from
ongoing receptions will therefore be lost. When disabled (i.e., the RXENn is set to zero)
the receiver will no longer override the normal function of the RxDn port pin. The
receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the receiver is disabled. Remaining data in
the buffer will be lost
23.7.7 Flushing the Receive Buffer
The receiver buffer FIFO will be flushed when the receiver is disabled, i.e., the buffer
will be emptied of its contents. Unread data will be lost. If the buffer has to be flushed
during normal operation, due to for instance an error condition, read the UDRn I/O
location until the RXCn flag is cleared. The following code example shows how to flush
the receive buffer.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Flush:
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
ret
in r16, UDRn
rjmp USART_Flush
383
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
C Code Example(1)
void USART_Flush( void )
{
unsigned char dummy;
while ( UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn) ) dummy = UDRn;
}
Note: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8
23.8 Asynchronous Data Reception
The USART includes a clock recovery and a data recovery unit for handling
asynchronous data reception. The clock recovery logic is used for synchronizing the
internally generated baud rate clock to the incoming asynchronous serial frames at the
RxDn pin. The data recovery logic samples and low pass filters each incoming bit,
thereby improving the noise immunity of the receiver. The asynchronous reception
operational range depends on the accuracy of the internal baud rate clock, the rate of
the incoming frames, and the frame size in number of bits.
23.8.1 Asynchronous Clock Recovery
The clock recovery logic synchronizes internal clock to the incoming serial frames.
Figure 23-5 below illustrates the sampling process of the start bit of an incoming frame.
The sample rate is 16 times the baud rate for Normal mode, and eight times the baud
rate for double speed mode. The horizontal arrows illustrate the synchronization
variation due to the sampling process. Note the larger time variation when using the
double speed mode (U2Xn = 1) of operation. Samples denoted zero are samples done
when the RxDn line is idle (i.e., no communication activity).
Figure 23-5. Start Bit Sampling
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2
STARTIDLE
00
BIT 0
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 20
RxD
Sample
(U2X = 0)
Sample
(U2X = 1)
When the clock recovery logic detects a high (idle) to low (start) transition on the RxDn
line, the start bit detection sequence is initiated. Let sample 1 denote the first zero-
sample as shown in the figure. The clock recovery logic then uses samples 8, 9 and 10
for Normal mode, and samples 4, 5 and 6 for double speed mode (indicated with
sample numbers inside boxes on the figure), to decide if a valid start bit is received. If
two or more of these three samples have logical high levels (the majority wins), the start
bit is rejected as a noise spike and the receiver starts looking for the next high to low-
transition. If however, a valid start bit is detected, the clock recovery logic is
synchronized and the data recovery can begin. The synchronization process is
repeated for each start bit.
23.8.2 Asynchronous Data Recovery
When the receiver clock is synchronized to the start bit, the data recovery can begin.
The data recovery unit uses a state machine that has 16 states for each bit in Normal
mode and eight states for each bit in double speed mode. Figure 23-6 on page 384
384
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
shows the sampling of the data bits and the parity bit. Each of the samples is given a
number that is equal to the state of the recovery unit.
Figure 23-6. Sampling of Data and Parity Bit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1
BIT n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1
RxD
Sample
(U2X = 0)
Sample
(U2X = 1)
The decision of the logic level of the received bit is taken by doing a majority voting of
the logic value to the three samples in the centre of the received bit. The centre
samples are emphasized on the figure by having the sample number inside boxes. The
majority voting process is done as follows:
If two or all three samples have high levels, the received bit is registered to be logic 1. If
two or all three samples have low levels, the received bit is registered to be logic 0. This
majority voting process acts as a low pass filter for the incoming signal on the RxDn pin.
The recovery process is then repeated until a complete frame is received including the
first stop bit. Note that the receiver only uses the first stop bit of a frame.
Figure 23-7 below shows the sampling of the stop bit and the earliest possible
beginning of the start bit of the next frame.
Figure 23-7. Stop Bit Sampling and Next Start Bit Sampling
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0/1 0/1 0/1
STOP 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 0/1
RxD
Sample
(U2X = 0)
Sample
(U2X = 1)
(A) (B) (C)
The same majority voting is done to the stop bit as done for the other bits in the frame.
If the stop bit is registered to have a logic 0 value, the Frame Error Flag (FEn) will be
set.
A new high to low transition indicating the start bit of a new frame can come right after
the last of the bits used for majority voting. For normal speed mode, the first low level
sample can be at point marked (A) in Figure 23-7 above. For double speed mode the
first low level must be delayed to (B). (C) marks a stop bit of full length. The early start
bit detection influences the operational range of the receiver.
23.8.3 Asynchronous Operational Range
The operational range of the receiver is dependent on the mismatch between the
received bit rate and the internally generated baud rate. If the transmitter is sending
frames at too fast or too slow bit rates, or the internally generated baud rate of the
receiver does not have a similar (see Table 23-2 on page 385) base frequency, the
receiver will not be able to synchronize the frames to the start bit.
385
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The following equations can be used to calculate the ratio of the incoming data rate and
internal receiver baud rate.
MF
fast
F
slow SSD
SD
R
SSDS
SD
R++
+
=
+⋅+−
+
=)1(
)2(
1
)1(
D Sum of character size and parity size (D = 5 to 10 bit)
S Samples per bit. S = 16 for normal speed mode and S = 8 for double speed
mode.
SF First sample number used for majority voting. SF = 8 for normal speed and
SF = 4 for double speed mode.
SM Middle sample number used for majority voting. SM = 9 for normal speed and
SM = 5 for double speed mode.
Rslow is the ratio of the slowest incoming data rate that can be accepted in relation to
the receiver baud rate.
Rfast is the ratio of the fastest incoming data rate that can be accepted in relation to
the receiver baud rate.
Table 23-2 below and Table 23-3 below list the maximum receiver baud rate error that
can be tolerated. Note that normal speed mode has higher tolerance of baud rate
variations.
Table 23-2. Recommended Maximum Receiver Baud Rate Error for Normal Speed Mode
(U2Xn = 0)
D
# (Data+Parity Bit)
Rslow (%)
Rfast (%)
Max Total Error (%)
Recommended Max
Receiver Error (%)
5 93.20 106.67 +6.67/-6.8 ± 3.0
6 94.12 105.79 +5.79/-5.88 ± 2.5
7 94.81 105.11 +5.11/-5.19 ± 2.0
8 95.36 104.58 +4.58/-4.54 ± 2.0
9 95.81 104.14 +4.14/-4.19 ± 1.5
10 96.17 103.78 +3.78/-3.83 ± 1.5
Table 23-3. Recommended Maximum Receiver Baud Rate Error for Double Speed
Mode (U2Xn = 1)
D
# (Data+Parity Bit)
Rslow (%)
Rfast (%)
Max Total Error (%)
Recommended Max
Receiver Error (%)
5 94.12 105.66 +5.66/-5.88 ± 2.5
6 94.92 104.92 +4.92/-5.08 ± 2.0
7 95.52 104,35 +4.35/-4.48 ± 1.5
8 96.00 103.90 +3.90/-4.00 ± 1.5
9 96.39 103.53 +3.53/-3.61 ± 1.5
10 96.70 103.23 +3.23/-3.30 ± 1.0
The recommendations of the maximum receiver baud rate error were made under the
assumption that the receiver and transmitter equally divides the maximum total error.
There are two possible sources for the receiver baud rate error. The receiver’s system
clock will always have some minor instability over the supply voltage range and the
temperature range. When using the radio transceiver crystal oscillator (XOSC) to
generate the system clock, this is rarely a problem, but for the internal RC oscillator the
system clock may differ more than 2% over the temperature range. The second source
for the error is more controllable. The baud rate generator can not always do an exact
386
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
division of the system frequency to get the baud rate wanted. In this case an UBRR
value that gives an acceptable low error can be used if possible.
23.9 Multi-processor Communication Mode
Setting the Multi-processor Communication Mode (MPCMn) bit in UCSRnA enables a
filtering function of incoming frames received by the USART receiver. Frames that do
not contain address information will be ignored and not put into the receive buffer. This
effectively reduces the number of incoming frames that has to be handled by the MCU,
in a system with multiple MCUs that communicate via the same serial bus. The
transmitter is unaffected by the MPCMn setting, but has to be used differently when it is
a part of a system utilizing the multi-processor communication mode.
If the receiver is set up to receive frames that contain 5 to 8 data bits, then the first stop
bit indicates if the frame contains data or address information. If the receiver is set up
for frames with nine data bits, then the ninth bit (RXB8n) is used for identifying address
and data frames. When the frame type bit (the first stop or the ninth bit) is one, the
frame contains an address. When the frame type bit is zero the frame is a data frame.
The multi-processor communication mode enables several slave MCUs to receive data
from a master MCU. This is done by first decoding an address frame to find out which
MCU has been addressed. If a particular slave MCU has been addressed, it will receive
the following data frames as normal, while the other slave MCUs will ignore the
received frames until another address frame is received.
23.9.1 Using MPCMn
For an MCU to act as a master MCU, it can use a 9 bit character frame format
(UCSZn2:0 = 7). The 9th bit (TXB8n) must be set when an address frame (TXB8n = 1)
or cleared when a data frame (TXB = 0) is being transmitted. The slave MCUs must in
this case be set to use a 9 bit character frame format.
The following procedure should be used to exchange data in multi-processor
communication mode:
1. All slave MCUs are in multi-processor communication mode (MPCMn in UCSRnA is
set).
2. The master MCU sends an address frame, and all slaves receive and read this
frame. In the slave MCUs, the RXCn flag in UCSRnA will be set as normal.
3. Each slave MCU reads the UDRn register and determines if it has been selected. If
so, it clears the MPCMn bit in UCSRnA, otherwise it waits for the next address byte
and keeps the MPCMn setting.
4. The addressed MCU will receive all data frames until a new address frame is
received. The other slave MCUs, which still have the MPCMn bit set, will ignore the
data frames.
5. When the last data frame is received by the addressed MCU, the addressed MCU
sets the MPCMn bit and waits for a new address frame from master. The process
then repeats from 2.
Using any of the 5 to 8 bit character frame formats is possible, but impractical since the
receiver must change between using n and n+1 character frame formats. This makes
full-duplex operation difficult since the transmitter and receiver uses the same character
size setting. If 5 to 8 bit character frames are used, the transmitter must be set to use
two stop bit (USBSn = 1) since the first stop bit is used for indicating the frame type.
387
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Do not use read-modify-write instructions (SBI and CBI) to set or clear the MPCMn bit.
The MPCMn bit shares the same I/O location as the TXCn flag and this might
accidentally be cleared when using SBI or CBI instructions.
23.10 Register Description
23.10.1 UDR0 – USART0 I/O Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C6) UDR07:00 UDR0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The USART Transmit Data Buffer Register and USART Receive Data Buffer Registers
share the same I/O address referred to as USART Data Register or UDR0. The
Transmit Data Buffer Register (TXB) will be the destination for data written to the UDR0
Register location. Reading the UDR0 Register location will return the contents of the
Receive Data Buffer Register (RXB). For 5-, 6-, or 7-bit characters the upper unused
bits will be ignored by the Transmitter and set to zero by the Receiver. The transmit
buffer can only be written when the UDRE0 Flag in the UCSR0A Register is set. Data
written to UDR0 when the UDRE0 Flag is not set, will be ignored by the USART
Transmitter. When data is written to the transmit buffer and the Transmitter is enabled,
the Transmitter will load the data into the Transmit Shift Register when the Shift
Register is empty. Then the data will be serially transmitted on the TxD0 pin. The
receive buffer consists of a two level FIFO. The FIFO will change its state whenever the
receive buffer is accessed. Due to this behavior of the receive buffer, do not use Read-
Modify-Write instructions (SBI and CBI) on this location. Be careful when using bit test
instructions (SBIC and SBIS), since these also will change the state of the FIFO.
• Bit 7:0 – UDR07:00 - USART I/O Data Register
23.10.2 UCSR0A – USART0 Control and Status Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C0) RXC0 TXC0 UDRE0 FE0 DOR0 UPE0 U2X0 MPCM0 UCSR0A
Read/Write R RW R R R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – RXC0 - USART Receive Complete
This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when
the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is
disabled, the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXC0 bit will become
zero. The RXC0 Flag can be used to generate a Receive Complete interrupt (see
description of the RXCIE0 bit).
• Bit 6 – TXC0 - USART Transmit Complete
This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted
out and there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer (UDR0). The
TXC0 Flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed,
or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXC0 Flag can generate a
Transmit Complete interrupt (see description of the TXCIE0 bit).
388
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 5 – UDRE0 - USART Data Register Empty
The UDRE0 Flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDR0) is ready to receive new data. If
UDRE0 is one, the buffer is empty, and therefore ready to be written. The UDRE0 Flag
can generate a Data Register Empty interrupt (see description of the UDRIE0 bit).
UDRE0 is set after a reset to indicate that the Transmitter is ready.
• Bit 4 – FE0 - Frame Error
This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a Frame Error when
received. I.e., when the first stop bit of the next character in the receive buffer is zero.
This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDR0) is read. The FE0 bit is zero when the
stop bit of received data is one. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSR0A.
• Bit 3 – DOR0 - Data OverRun
This bit is set if a Data OverRun condition is detected. A Data OverRun occurs when
the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character waiting in the Receive
Shift Register and a new start bit is detected. This bit is valid until the receive buffer
(UDR0) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSR0A.
• Bit 2 – UPE0 - USART Parity Error
This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a Parity Error when received
and the Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPM01 = 1). This bit is valid until the
receive buffer (UDR0) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSR0A.
• Bit 1 – U2X0 - Double the USART Transmission Speed
This bit only has effect for the asynchronous operation. Write this bit to zero when using
synchronous operation. Writing this bit to one will reduce the divisor of the baud rate
divider from 16 to 8 effectively doubling the transfer rate for asynchronous
communication.
• Bit 0 – MPCM0 - Multi-processor Communication Mode
This bit enables the Multi-processor Communication mode. When the MPCM0 bit is
written to one, all the incoming frames received by the USART Receiver that do not
contain address information will be ignored. The Transmitter is unaffected by the
MPCM0 setting. For more detailed information see section "Multi-processor
Communication Mode".
23.10.3 UCSR0B – USART0 Control and Status Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C1) RXCIE0 TXCIE0 UDRIE0 RXEN0 TXEN0 UCSZ02 RXB80 TXB80 UCSR0B
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW R W
Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – RXCIE0 - RX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXC0 Flag. A USART Receive Complete
interrupt will be generated only if the RXCIE0 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the RXC0 bit in UCSR0A is set.
• Bit 6 – TXCIE0 - TX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXC0 Flag. A USART Transmit Complete
interrupt will be generated only if the TXCIE0 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the TXC0 bit in UCSR0A is set.
• Bit 5 – UDRIE0 - USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable
389
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDRE0 Flag. A Data Register Empty
interrupt will be generated only if the UDRIE0 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the UDRE0 bit in UCSR0A is set.
• Bit 4 – RXEN0 - Receiver Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Receiver. The Receiver will override normal
port operation for the RxD0 pin when enabled. Disabling the Receiver will flush the
receive buffer invalidating the FE0, DOR0 and UPE0 Flags.
• Bit 3 – TXEN0 - Transmitter Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Transmitter. The Transmitter will override
normal port operation for the TxD0 pin when enabled. The disabling of the Transmitter
(writing TXEN0 to zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending
transmissions are completed, i.e., when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer
Register do not contain data to be transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no
longer override the TxD0 port.
• Bit 2 – UCSZ02 - Character Size
The UCSZ02 bits combined with the UCSZ01:0 bit in UCSR0C sets the number of data
bits (Character Size) in the frame that the Receiver and Transmitter use.
• Bit 1 – RXB80 - Receive Data Bit 8
RXB80 is the 9th data bit of the received character when operating with serial frames
with nine data bits. The bit must be read before reading the lower 8 bits from UDR0.
• Bit 0 – TXB80 - Transmit Data Bit 8
TXB80 is the 9th data bit in the character to be transmitted when operating with serial
frames with nine data bits. The bit must be written before writing the lower 8 bits to
UDR0.
23.10.4 UCSR0C – USART0 Control and Status Register C
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C2) UMSEL01
UMSEL00
UPM01 UPM00 USBS0 UCSZ01
UCSZ00
UCPOL0
UCSR0C
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
• Bit 7:6 – UMSEL1:0 - USART Mode Select
These bits select the mode of operation of the USART0 as shown in the following table.
See section "USART in SPI Mode" for a full description of the Master SPI Mode
(MSPIM) operation.
Table 23-4 UMSEL0 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
UMSEL1:0 0x00 Asynchronous USART
0x01 Synchronous USART
0x02 Reserved
0x03 Master SPI (MSPIM)
• Bit 5:4 – UPM1:0 - Parity Mode
These bits enable and set type of parity generation and check. If enabled, the
Transmitter will automatically generate and send the parity of the transmitted data bits
within each frame. The Receiver will generate a parity value for the incoming data and
390
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
compare it to the UPM0 setting. If a mismatch is detected, the UPE0 Flag in UCSR0A
will be set.
Table 23-5 UPM0 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
UPM1:0 0x00 Disabled
0x01 Reserved
0x02 Enabled, Even Parity
0x03 Enabled, Odd Parity
• Bit 3 – USBS0 - Stop Bit Select
This bit selects the number of stop bits to be inserted by the Transmitter. The Receiver
ignores this setting.
Table 23-6 USBS0 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
USBS0 0x00 1-bit
0x01 2-bit
• Bit 2:1 – UCSZ1:0 - Character Size
The UCSZ01:0 bits combined with the UCSZ02 bit in UCSR0B sets the number of data
bits (Character Size) in the frame that the Receiver and Transmitter use.
Table 23-7 UCSZ0 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
UCSZ1:0 0 5-bit
1 6-bit
2 7-bit
3 8-bit
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 9-bit
• Bit 0 – UCPOL0 - Clock Polarity
This bit is used for synchronous mode only. Write this bit to zero when asynchronous
mode is used. The UCPOL0 bit sets the relationship between data output change and
data input sample, and the synchronous clock (XCK0).
Table 23-8 UCPOL0 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
UCPOL0 0 Rising XCKn Edge (Transmitted Data
Changed), Falling XCKn Edge (Received
Data Sampled)
1 Falling XCKn Edge (Transmitted Data
Changed), Rising XCKn Edge (Received
Data Sampled)
391
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
23.10.5 UBRR0H – USART0 Baud Rate Register High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C5) Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 UBRR11
UBRR10
UBRR9 UBRR8 UBRR0H
Read/Write R R R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
UBRR0 is a 12-bit register which contains the USART baud rate. The UBRR0H
contains the four most significant bits, and the UBRR0L contains the eight least
significant bits of the USART baud rate. Ongoing transmissions by the Transmitter and
Receiver will be corrupted if the baud rate is changed. Writing UBRR0L will trigger an
immediate update of the baud rate prescaler.
• Bit 7:4 – Res3:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 3:0 – UBRR11:8 - USART Baud Rate Register
These bits represent bits [11:8] of the Baud Rate Register. Sample values for
commonly used clock frequencies can be found in section "Examples of Baud Rate
Setting".
23.10.6 UBRR0L – USART0 Baud Rate Register Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C4) UBRR7 UBRR6 UBRR5 UBRR4 UBRR3 UBRR2 UBRR1 UBRR0 UBRR0L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
UBRR0 is a 12-bit register which contains the USART baud rate. The UBRR0H
contains the four most significant bits, and the UBRR0L contains the eight least
significant bits of the USART baud rate. Ongoing transmissions by the Transmitter and
Receiver will be corrupted if the baud rate is changed. Writing UBRR0L will trigger an
immediate update of the baud rate prescaler.
• Bit 7:0 – UBRR7:0 - USART Baud Rate Register
These bits represent bits [7:0] of the Baud Rate Register. Sample values for commonly
used clock frequencies can be found in section "Examples of Baud Rate Setting".
23.10.7 UDR1 – USART1 I/O Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($CE) UDR17:10 UDR1
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The USART Transmit Data Buffer Register and USART Receive Data Buffer Registers
share the same I/O address referred to as USART Data Register or UDR1. The
Transmit Data Buffer Register (TXB) will be the destination for data written to the UDR1
Register location. Reading the UDR1 Register location will return the contents of the
392
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Receive Data Buffer Register (RXB). For 5-, 6-, or 7-bit characters the upper unused
bits will be ignored by the Transmitter and set to zero by the Receiver. The transmit
buffer can only be written when the UDRE1 Flag in the UCSR1A Register is set. Data
written to UDR1 when the UDRE1 Flag is not set, will be ignored by the USART
Transmitter. When data is written to the transmit buffer and the Transmitter is enabled,
the Transmitter will load the data into the Transmit Shift Register when the Shift
Register is empty. Then the data will be serially transmitted on the TxD1 pin. The
receive buffer consists of a two level FIFO. The FIFO will change its state whenever the
receive buffer is accessed. Due to this behavior of the receive buffer, do not use Read-
Modify-Write instructions (SBI and CBI) on this location. Be careful when using bit test
instructions (SBIC and SBIS), since these also will change the state of the FIFO.
• Bit 7:0 – UDR17:10 - USART I/O Data Register
23.10.8 UCSR1A – USART1 Control and Status Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C8) RXC1 TXC1 UDRE1 FE1 DOR1 UPE1 U2X1 MPCM1 UCSR1A
Read/Write R RW R R R R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – RXC1 - USART Receive Complete
This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when
the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is
disabled, the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXC1 bit will become
zero. The RXC1 Flag can be used to generate a Receive Complete interrupt (see
description of the RXCIE1 bit).
• Bit 6 – TXC1 - USART Transmit Complete
This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted
out and there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer (UDR1). The
TXC1 Flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed,
or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXC1 Flag can generate a
Transmit Complete interrupt (see description of the TXCIE1 bit).
• Bit 5 – UDRE1 - USART Data Register Empty
The UDRE1 Flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDR1) is ready to receive new data. If
UDRE1 is one, the buffer is empty, and therefore ready to be written. The UDRE1 Flag
can generate a Data Register Empty interrupt (see description of the UDRIE1 bit).
UDRE1 is set after a reset to indicate that the Transmitter is ready.
• Bit 4 – FE1 - Frame Error
This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a Frame Error when
received. I.e., when the first stop bit of the next character in the receive buffer is zero.
This bit is valid until the receive buffer (UDR1) is read. The FE1 bit is zero when the
stop bit of received data is one. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSR1A.
• Bit 3 – DOR1 - Data OverRun
This bit is set if a Data OverRun condition is detected. A Data OverRun occurs when
the receive buffer is full (two characters), it is a new character waiting in the Receive
Shift Register and a new start bit is detected. This bit is valid until the receive buffer
(UDR1) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSR1A.
• Bit 2 – UPE1 - USART Parity Error
393
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
This bit is set if the next character in the receive buffer had a Parity Error when received
and the Parity Checking was enabled at that point (UPM11 = 1). This bit is valid until the
receive buffer (UDR1) is read. Always set this bit to zero when writing to UCSR1A.
• Bit 1 – U2X1 - Double the USART Transmission Speed
This bit only has effect for the asynchronous operation. Write this bit to zero when using
synchronous operation. Writing this bit to one will reduce the divisor of the baud rate
divider from 16 to 8 effectively doubling the transfer rate for asynchronous
communication.
• Bit 0 – MPCM1 - Multi-processor Communication Mode
This bit enables the Multi-processor Communication mode. When the MPCM1 bit is
written to one, all the incoming frames received by the USART Receiver that do not
contain address information will be ignored. The Transmitter is unaffected by the
MPCM1 setting. For more detailed information see section "Multi-processor
Communication Mode".
23.10.9 UCSR1B – USART1 Control and Status Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C9) RXCIE1 TXCIE1 UDRIE1 RXEN1 TXEN1 UCSZ12 RXB81 TXB81 UCSR1B
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW R W
Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – RXCIE1 - RX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXC1 Flag. A USART Receive Complete
interrupt will be generated only if the RXCIE1 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the RXC1 bit in UCSR1A is set.
• Bit 6 – TXCIE1 - TX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXC1 Flag. A USART Transmit Complete
interrupt will be generated only if the TXCIE1 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the TXC1 bit in UCSR1A is set.
• Bit 5 – UDRIE1 - USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDRE1 Flag. A Data Register Empty
interrupt will be generated only if the UDRIE1 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the UDRE1 bit in UCSR1A is set.
• Bit 4 – RXEN1 - Receiver Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Receiver. The Receiver will override normal
port operation for the RxD1 pin when enabled. Disabling the Receiver will flush the
receive buffer invalidating the FE1, DOR1 and UPE1 Flags.
• Bit 3 – TXEN1 - Transmitter Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Transmitter. The Transmitter will override
normal port operation for the TxD1 pin when enabled. The disabling of the Transmitter
(writing TXEN1 to zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending
transmissions are completed, i.e., when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer
Register do not contain data to be transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no
longer override the TxD1 port.
• Bit 2 – UCSZ12 - Character Size
394
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The UCSZ12 bits combined with the UCSZ11:0 bit in UCSR1C sets the number of data
bits (Character Size) in the frame that the Receiver and Transmitter use.
• Bit 1 – RXB81 - Receive Data Bit 8
RXB81 is the 9th data bit of the received character when operating with serial frames
with nine data bits. The bit must be read before reading the lower 8 bits from UDR1.
• Bit 0 – TXB81 - Transmit Data Bit 8
TXB81 is the 9th data bit in the character to be transmitted when operating with serial
frames with nine data bits. The bit must be written before writing the lower 8 bits to
UDR1.
23.10.10 UCSR1C – USART1 Control and Status Register C
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($CA) UMSEL11
UMSEL10
UPM11 UPM10 USBS1 UCSZ11
UCSZ10
UCPOL1
UCSR1C
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
• Bit 7:6 – UMSEL11:10 - USART Mode Select
These bits select the mode of operation of the USART1 as shown in the following table.
See section "USART in SPI Mode" for a full description of the Master SPI Mode
(MSPIM) operation.
Table 23-9 UMSEL1 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
UMSEL11:10 0x00 Asynchronous USART
0x01 Synchronous USART
0x02 Reserved
0x03 Master SPI (MSPIM)
• Bit 5:4 – UPM11:10 - Parity Mode
These bits enable and set type of parity generation and check. If enabled, the
Transmitter will automatically generate and send the parity of the transmitted data bits
within each frame. The Receiver will generate a parity value for the incoming data and
compare it to the UPM1 setting. If a mismatch is detected, the UPE1 Flag in UCSR1A
will be set.
Table 23-10 UPM1 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
UPM11:10 0x00 Disabled
0x01 Reserved
0x02 Enabled, Even Parity
0x03 Enabled, Odd Parity
• Bit 3 – USBS1 - Stop Bit Select
This bit selects the number of stop bits to be inserted by the Transmitter. The Receiver
ignores this setting.
395
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 23-11 USBS1 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
USBS1 0x00 1-bit
0x01 2-bit
• Bit 2:1 – UCSZ11:10 - Character Size
The UCSZ11:0 bits combined with the UCSZ12 bit in UCSR1B sets the number of data
bits (Character Size) in the frame that the Receiver and Transmitter use.
Table 23-12 UCSZ1 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
UCSZ11:10 0 5-bit
1 6-bit
2 7-bit
3 8-bit
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 9-bit
• Bit 0 – UCPOL1 - Clock Polarity
This bit is used for synchronous mode only. Write this bit to zero when asynchronous
mode is used. The UCPOL1 bit sets the relationship between data output change and
data input sample, and the synchronous clock (XCK1).
Table 23-13 UCPOL1 Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
UCPOL1 0 Rising XCKn Edge (Transmitted Data
Changed), Falling XCKn Edge (Received
Data Sampled)
1 Falling XCKn Edge (Transmitted Data
Changed), Rising XCKn Edge (Received
Data Sampled)
23.10.11 UBRR1H – USART1 Baud Rate Register High Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($CD) Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 UBRR11
UBRR10
UBRR9 UBRR8 UBRR1H
Read/Write R R R R RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
UBRR1 is a 12-bit register which contains the USART baud rate. The UBRR1H
contains the four most significant bits, and the UBRR1L contains the eight least
significant bits of the USART baud rate. Ongoing transmissions by the Transmitter and
Receiver will be corrupted if the baud rate is changed. Writing UBRR1L will trigger an
immediate update of the baud rate prescaler.
• Bit 7:4 – Res3:0 - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
396
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 3:0 – UBRR11:8 - USART Baud Rate Register
These bits represent bits [11:8] of the Baud Rate Register. Sample values for
commonly used clock frequencies can be found in section "Examples of Baud Rate
Setting".
23.10.12 UBRR1L – USART1 Baud Rate Register Low Byte
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($CC) UBRR7 UBRR6 UBRR5 UBRR4 UBRR3 UBRR2 UBRR1 UBRR0 UBRR1L
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
UBRR1 is a 12-bit register which contains the USART baud rate. The UBRR1H
contains the four most significant bits, and the UBRR1L contains the eight least
significant bits of the USART baud rate. Ongoing transmissions by the Transmitter and
Receiver will be corrupted if the baud rate is changed. Writing UBRR1L will trigger an
immediate update of the baud rate prescaler.
• Bit 7:0 – UBRR7:0 - USART Baud Rate Register
These bits represent bits [7:0] of the Baud Rate Register. Sample values for commonly
used clock frequencies can be found in section "Examples of Baud Rate Setting".
23.11 Examples of Baud Rate Setting
For standard crystal and resonator frequencies, the most commonly used baud rates for
asynchronous operation can be generated by using the UBRR settings in Table 23-14
below to Table 23-16 on page 398. UBRR values which yield an actual baud rate
differing less than 0.5% from the target baud rate, are bold in the table. Higher error
ratings are acceptable, but the Receiver will have less noise resistance when the error
ratings are high, especially for large serial frames (see "Asynchronous Operational
Range" on page 384). The error values are calculated using the following equation:
[ ]
%1001% ⋅
−= BaudRate
BaudRate
Error MatchClosest
Table 23-14. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies
Baud
Rate
(bps)
fOSC = 1.8432 MHz fOSC = 2.0000 MHz fOSC = 3.6864 MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error
2400 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 95 0.0% 191 0.0%
4800 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 47 0.0% 95 0.0%
9600 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 23 0.0% 47 0.0%
14.4k 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 15 0.0% 31 0.0%
19.2k 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 11 0.0% 23 0.0%
28.8k 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 7 0.0% 15 0.0%
38.4k 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 2 8.5% 6 -7.0% 5 0.0% 11 0.0%
397
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Baud
Rate
(bps)
fOSC = 1.8432 MHz fOSC = 2.0000 MHz fOSC = 3.6864 MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error
57.6k 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 3 0.0% 7 0.0%
76.8k 1 -25.0% 2 0.0% 1 -18.6% 2 8.5% 2 0.0% 5 0.0%
115.2k 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 0 8.5% 1 8.5% 1 0.0% 3 0.0%
230.4k - - 0 0.0% - - - - 0 0.0% 1 0.0%
250k - - - - - - 0 0.0%% 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8%
Max. (1)
115.2 kbps 230.4 kbps 125 kbps 250 kbps 230.4 kbps 460.8 kbps
Notes: 1. UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0%
Table 23-15. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued)
Baud
Rate
(bps)
fOSC = 4.0000 MHz fOSC = 7.3728 MHz fOSC = 8.0000 MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error
2400 103 0.2% 207 0.2% 191 0.0% 383 0.0% 207 0.2% 416 -0.1%
4800 51 0.2% 103 0.2% 95 0.0% 191 0.0% 103 0.2% 207 0.2%
9600 25 0.2% 51 0.2% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 51 0.2% 103 0.2%
14.4k 16 2.1% 34 -0.8% 31 0.0% 63 0.0% 34 -0.8% 68 0.6%
19.2k 12 0.2% 25 0.2% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 25 0.2% 51 0.2%
28.8k 8 -3.5% 16 2.1% 15 0.0% 31 0.0% 16 2.1% 34 -0.8%
38.4k 6 -7.0% 12 0.2% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 12 0.2% 25 0.2%
57.6k 3 8.5% 8 -3.5% 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 8 -3.5% 16 2.1%
76.8k 2 8.5% 6 -7.0% 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 6 -7.0% 12 0.2%
115.2k 1 8.5% 3 8.5% 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 3 8.5% 8 -3.5%
230.4k 0 8.5% 1 8.5% 1 0.0% 3 0.0% 1 8.5% 3 8.5%
250k 0 0.0% 1 0.0% 1 -7.8% 3 -7.8% 1 0.0% 3 0.0%
0.5M - - 0 0.0% 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8% 0 0.0% 1 0.0%
1M - - - - - - 0 -7.8% - - 0 0.0%
Max. (1)
250 kbps 0.5 Mbps 460.8 kbps 921.6 kbps 0.5 Mbps 1 Mbps
Notes: 1. UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0%
398
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 23-16. Examples of UBRRn Settings for Commonly Used Oscillator Frequencies (Continued)
Baud
Rate
(bps)
fOSC = 11.0592 MHz fOSC = 14.7456 MHz fOSC = 16.0000 MHz
U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1 U2Xn = 0 U2Xn = 1
UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error UBRR Error
2400 287 0.0% 575 0.0% 383 0.0% 767 0.0% 416 -0.1% 832 0.0%
4800 143 0.0% 287 0.0% 191 0.0% 383 0.0% 207 0.2% 416 -0.1%
9600 71 0.0% 143 0.0% 95 0.0% 191 0.0% 103 0.2% 207 0.2%
14.4k 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 63 0.0% 127 0.0% 68 0.6% 138 -0.1%
19.2k 35 0.0% 71 0.0% 47 0.0% 95 0.0% 51 0.2% 103 0.2%
28.8k 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 31 0.0% 63 0.0% 34 -0.8% 68 0.6%
38.4k 17 0.0% 35 0.0% 23 0.0% 47 0.0% 25 0.2% 51 0.2%
57.6k 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 15 0.0% 31 0.0% 16 2.1% 34 -0.8%
76.8k 8 0.0% 17 0.0% 11 0.0% 23 0.0% 12 0.2% 25 0.2%
115.2k 5 0.0% 11 0.0% 7 0.0% 15 0.0% 8 -3.5% 16 2.1%
230.4k 2 0.0% 5 0.0% 3 0.0% 7 0.0% 3 8.5% 8 -3.5%
250k 2 -7.8% 5 -7.8% 3 -7.8% 6 5.3% 3 0.0% 7 0.0%
0.5M - - 2 -7.8% 1 -7.8% 3 -7.8% 1 0.0% 3 0.0%
1M - - - - 0 -7.8% 1 -7.8% 0 0.0% 1 0.0%
Max. (1)
691.2 kbps 1.3824 Mbps 921.6 kbps 1.8432 Mbps 1 Mbps 2 Mbps
Notes: 1. UBRR = 0, Error = 0.0%
399
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
24 USART in SPI Mode
The Universal Synchronous and Asynchronous Serial Receiver and Transmitter
(USART) can be set to a master SPI compliant mode of operation. The Master SPI
Mode (MSPIM) has the following features:
• Full duplex, three-wire synchronous data transfer
• Master operation
• Supports all four SPI modes of operation (mode 0, 1, 2, and 3)
• LSB first or MSB first data transfer (configurable data order)
• Queued operation (double buffered)
• High resolution baud rate generator
• High speed operation (fXCK,MAX = fCK/2)
• Flexible interrupt generation
24.1 Overview
Setting both UMSELn1:0 bits to one enables the USART in MSPIM logic. In this mode
of operation the SPI master control logic takes direct control over the USART
resources. These resources include the transmitter and receiver shift register and
buffers, and the baud rate generator. The parity generator and checker, the data and
clock recovery logic, and the RX and TX control logic is disabled. The USART RX and
TX control logic is replaced by a common SPI transfer control logic. However, the pin
control logic and interrupt generation logic is identical in both modes of operation.
The I/O register locations are the same in both modes. However, some of the
functionality of the control registers changes when using MSPIM.
24.2 USART MSPIM vs. SPI
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 USART in MSPIM mode is fully compatible with the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 SPI regarding:
• Master mode timing diagram.
• The UCPOLn bit functionality is identical to the SPI CPOL bit.
• The UCPHAn bit functionality is identical to the SPI CPHA bit.
• The UDORDn bit functionality is identical to the SPI DORD bit.
However, since the USART in MSPIM mode reuses the USART resources, the use of
the USART in MSPIM mode is somewhat different compared to the SPI. In addition to
differences of the control register bits, and that only master operation is supported by
the USART in MSPIM mode, the following features differ between the two modules:
• The USART in MSPIM mode includes (double) buffering of the transmitter. The SPI
has no buffer.
• The USART in MSPIM mode receiver includes an additional buffer level.
• The SPI WCOL (Write Collision) bit is not included in USART in MSPIM mode.
• The SPI double speed mode (SPI2X) bit is not included. However, the same effect is
achieved by setting UBRRn accordingly.
• Interrupt timing is not compatible.
• Pin control differs due to the master only operation of the USART in MSPIM mode.
A comparison of the USART in MSPIM mode and the SPI pins is shown in Table 24–3
on page 404.
400
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
24.2.1 Clock Generation
The Clock Generation logic generates the base clock for the Transmitter and Receiver.
For USART MSPIM mode of operation only internal clock generation (i.e. master
operation) is supported. The Data Direction Register for the XCKn pin (DDR_XCKn)
must therefore be set to one (i.e. as output) for the USART in MSPIM to operate
correctly. Preferably the DDR_XCKn should be set up before the USART in MSPIM is
enabled (i.e. TXENn and RXENn bit set to one).
The internal clock generation used in MSPIM mode is identical to the USART
synchronous master mode. The baud rate or UBRRn setting can therefore be
calculated using the same equations, see Table 24-1 below:
Table 24-1. Equations for Calculating Baud Rate Register Setting
Operating Mode Equation for Calculating
Baud Rate(1)
Equation for Calculating
UBRR Value
Synchronous Master mode
)1(2 +
=UBRRn
f
BAUD OSC 1
2−= BAUD
f
UBRRn OSC
Note: The Baud rate is defined to be the transfer rate in bit per second (bps)
BAUD Baud rate (in bits per second, bps)
fOSC System Oscillator clock frequency
UBRRn Contents of the UBRRHn and UBRRLn Registers, (0-4095)
24.3 SPI Data Modes and Timing
There are four combinations of XCKn (SCK) phase and polarity with respect to serial
data, which are determined by control bits UCPHAn and UCPOLn. The data transfer
timing diagrams are shown in Figure 24-1 below. Data bits are shifted out and latched
in on opposite edges of the XCKn signal, ensuring sufficient time for data signals to
stabilize. The UCPOLn and UCPHAn functionality is summarized in Table 24-2 below.
Note that changing the setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing
communication for both the receiver and transmitter.
Figure 24-1. UCPHAn and UCPOLn data transfer timing diagrams
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
XCK
Data setup (TXD)
Data sample (RXD)
UCPOL=0 UCPOL=1
UCPHA=0 UCPHA=1
Table 24-2. UCPOLn and UCPHAn Functionality
UCPOLn UCPHAn SPI Mode Leading Edge Trailing Edge
0 0 0 Sample (Rising) Setup (Falling)
0 1 1 Setup (Rising) Sample (Falling)
1 0 2 Sample (Falling) Setup (Rising)
401
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
UCPOLn UCPHAn SPI Mode Leading Edge Trailing Edge
1 1 3 Setup (Falling) Sample (Rising)
24.4 Frame Formats
A serial frame for the MSPIM is defined to be one character of 8 data bits. The USART
in MSPIM mode has two valid frame formats:
• 8-bit data with MSB first
• 8-bit data with LSB first
A frame starts with the least or most significant data bit. Then the next data bits, up to a
total of eight, are succeeding, ending with the most or least significant bit accordingly.
When a complete frame is transmitted, a new frame can directly follow it, or the
communication line can be set to an idle (high) state.
The UDORDn bit in UCSRnC sets the frame format used by the USART in MSPIM
mode. The Receiver and Transmitter use the same setting. Note that changing the
setting of any of these bits will corrupt all ongoing communication for both the Receiver
and Transmitter.
16-bit data transfer can be achieved by writing two data bytes to UDRn. A UART
transmit complete interrupt will then signal that the 16-bit value has been shifted out.
24.4.1 USART MSPIM Initialization
The USART in MSPIM mode has to be initialized before any communication can take
place. The initialization process normally consists of setting the baud rate, setting
master mode of operation (by setting DDR_XCKn to one), setting frame format and
enabling the Transmitter and the Receiver. Only the transmitter can operate
independently. For interrupt driven USART operation, the Global Interrupt Flag should
be cleared (and thus interrupts globally disabled) when doing the initialization.
Note: To ensure immediate initialization of the XCKn output the baud-rate register
(UBRRn) must be zero at the time the transmitter is enabled. Contrary to the
normal mode USART operation the UBRRn must then be written to the desired
value after the transmitter is enabled, but before the first transmission is
started. Setting UBRRn to zero before enabling the transmitter is not necessary
if the initialization is done immediately after a reset since UBRRn is reset to
zero.
Before doing a re-initialization with changed baud rate, data mode, or frame format, be
sure that there is no ongoing transmissions during the period the registers are changed.
The TXCn Flag can be used to check that the Transmitter has completed all transfers,
and the RXCn Flag can be used to check that there are no unread data in the receive
buffer. Note that the TXCn Flag must be cleared before each transmission (before
UDRn is written) if it is used for this purpose.
The following simple USART initialization code examples show one assembly and one
C function that are equal in functionality. The examples assume polling (no interrupts
enabled). The baud rate is given as a function parameter. For the assembly code, the
baud rate parameter is assumed to be stored in the r17:r16 registers.
402
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_Init:
clr r18
out UBRRnH,r18
out UBRRnL,r18
; Setting the XCKn port pin as output, enables master mode.
sbi XCKn_DDR, XCKn
; Set MSPI mode of operation and SPI data mode 0.
ldi r18, (1<<UMSELn1)|(1<<UMSELn0)|(0<<UCPHAn)|(0<<UCPOLn)
out UCSRnC,r18
; Enable receiver and transmitter.
ldi r18, (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn)
out UCSRnB,r18 ; Set baud rate.
; IMPORTANT:
; The Baud Rate must be set after the transmitter is enabled!
out UBRRnH, r17
out UBRRnL, r18
ret
C Code Example(1)
void USART_Init( unsigned int baud )
{
UBRRn = 0;
/* Setting the XCKn port pin as output, enables master mode. */
XCKn_DDR |= (1<<XCKn);
/* Set MSPI mode of operation and SPI data mode 0. */
UCSRnC = (1<<UMSELn1)|(1<<UMSELn0)|(0<<UCPHAn)|(0<<UCPOLn);
/* Enable receiver and transmitter. */
UCSRnB = (1<<RXENn)|(1<<TXENn);
/* Set baud rate. */
/* IMPORTANT: */
/* The Baud Rate must be set after the transmitter is enabled */
UBRRn = baud;
}
Note: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8
24.5 Data Transfer
Using the USART in MSPI mode requires the Transmitter to be enabled, i.e. the TXENn
bit in the UCSRnB register is set to one. When the Transmitter is enabled, the normal
port operation of the TxDn pin is overridden and given the function as the Transmitter's
serial output. Enabling the receiver is optional and is done by setting the RXENn bit in
the UCSRnB register to one. When the receiver is enabled, the normal pin operation of
the RxDn pin is overridden and given the function as the Receiver's serial input. The
XCKn will in both cases be used as the transfer clock.
After initialization the USART is ready for doing data transfers. A data transfer is
initiated by writing to the UDRn I/O location. This is the case for both sending and
receiving data since the transmitter controls the transfer clock. The data written to
403
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
UDRn is moved from the transmit buffer to the shift register when the shift register is
ready to send a new frame.
Note: To keep the input buffer in sync with the number of data bytes transmitted, the
UDRn register must be read once for each byte transmitted. The input buffer
operation is identical to normal USART mode, i.e. if an overflow occurs the
character last received will be lost, not the first data in the buffer. This means
that if four bytes are transferred, byte 1 first, then byte 2, 3, and 4, and the
UDRn is not read before all transfers are completed, then byte 3 to be received
will be lost, and not byte 1.
The following code examples show a simple USART in MSPIM mode transfer function
based on polling of the Data Register Empty (UDREn) Flag and the Receive Complete
(RXCn) Flag. The USART has to be initialized before the function can be used. For the
assembly code, the data to be sent is assumed to be stored in Register r16 and the
data received will be available in the same register (r16) after the function returns.
The function simply waits for the transmit buffer to be empty by checking the UDREn
Flag, before loading it with new data to be transmitted. The function then waits for data
to be present in the receive buffer by checking the RXCn Flag, before reading the buffer
and returning the value.
Assembly Code Example(1)
USART_MSPIM_Transfer:
; Wait for empty transmit buffer
sbis UCSRnA, UDREn
rjmp USART_MSPIM_Transfer
; Put data (r16) into buffer, sends the data
out UDRn,r16
; Wait for data to be received
USART_MSPIM_Wait_RXCn:
sbis UCSRnA, RXCn
rjmp USART_MSPIM_Wait_RXCn
; Get and return received data from buffer
in r16, UDRn
ret
C Code Example(1)
unsigned char USART_Receive( void )
{
/* Wait for empty transmit buffer */
while ( !( UCSRnA & (1<<UDREn)) );
/* Put data into buffer, sends the data */
UDRn = data;
/* Wait for data to be received */
while ( !(UCSRnA & (1<<RXCn)) );
/* Get and return received data from buffer */
return UDRn;
}
Notes: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8
404
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
24.5.1 Transmitter and Receiver Flags and Interrupts
The RXCn, TXCn, and UDREn flags and corresponding interrupts in USART in MSPIM
mode are identical in function to the normal USART operation. However, the receiver
error status flags (FE, DOR, and PE) are not in use and are always read as zero.
24.5.2 Disabling the Transmitter or Receiver
The disabling of the transmitter or receiver in USART in MSPIM mode is identical in
function to the normal USART operation.
24.6 USART MSPIM Register Description
The following section describes the registers used for SPI operation using the USART.
24.6.1 UDRn – USART MSPIM I/O Data Register
The function and bit description of the USART data register (UDRn) in MSPI mode is
identical to normal USART operation. See "UDR0 – USART0 I/O Data Register" on
page 387.
24.6.2 UBRRnL and UBRRnH – USART MSPIM Baud Rate Registers
The function and bit description of the baud rate registers in MSPI mode is identical to
normal USART operation. See "UBRR0L – USART0 Baud Rate Register Low Byte" on
page 391 and "UBRR0H – USART0 Baud Rate Register High Byte" on page 391.
Table 24–3. Comparison of USART in MSPIM mode and SPI pins
USART_MSPIM SPI Comment
TxDn MOSI Master Out only
RxDn MISO Master In only
XCKn SCK (Functional identical)
(N/A) SS¯ ¯ Not supported by USART in MSPIM
24.6.3 UCSR0A – USART0 MSPIM Control and Status Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C0) RXC0 TXC0 UDRE0 UCSR0A
Read/Write R RW R
Initial Value 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – RXC0 - USART Receive Complete
This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when
the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is
disabled, the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXC0 bit will become
zero. The RXC0 Flag can be used to generate a Receive Complete interrupt (see
description of the RXCIE0 bit).
• Bit 6 – TXC0 - USART Transmit Complete
This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted
out and there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer (UDR0). The
TXC0 Flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed,
or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXC0 Flag can generate a
Transmit Complete interrupt (see description of the TXCIE0 bit).
405
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 5 – UDRE0 - USART Data Register Empty
The UDRE0 Flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDR0) is ready to receive new data. If
UDRE0 is one, the buffer is empty, and therefore ready to be written. The UDRE0 Flag
can generate a Data Register Empty interrupt (see description of the UDRIE0 bit).
UDRE0 is set after a reset to indicate that the Transmitter is ready.
24.6.4 UCSR0B – USART0 MSPIM Control and Status Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C1) RXCIE0 TXCIE0 UDRIE0 RXEN0 TXEN0 UCSR0B
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0
• Bit 7 – RXCIE0 - RX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXC0 Flag. A USART Receive Complete
interrupt will be generated only if the RXCIE0 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the RXC0 bit in UCSR0A is set.
• Bit 6 – TXCIE0 - TX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXC0 Flag. A USART Transmit Complete
interrupt will be generated only if the TXCIE0 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the TXC0 bit in UCSR0A is set.
• Bit 5 – UDRIE0 - USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDRE0 Flag. A Data Register Empty
interrupt will be generated only if the UDRIE0 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the UDRE0 bit in UCSR0A is set.
• Bit 4 – RXEN0 - Receiver Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Receiver in MSPIM mode. The Receiver will
override normal port operation for the RxD0 pin when enabled. Disabling the Receiver
will flush the receive buffer. Only enabling the receiver in MSPI mode (i.e. setting
RXEN0=1 and TXEN0=0) has no meaning since it is the transmitter that controls the
transfer clock and since only master mode is supported.
• Bit 3 – TXEN0 - Transmitter Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Transmitter. The Transmitter will override
normal port operation for the TxD0 pin when enabled. The disabling of the Transmitter
(writing TXEN0 to zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending
transmissions are completed, i.e., when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer
Register do not contain data to be transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no
longer override the TxD0 port.
24.6.5 UCSR0C – USART0 MSPIM Control and Status Register C
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C2) UDORD0
UCPHA0
UCPOL0
UCSR0C
Read/Write RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 0
• Bit 2 – UDORD0 - Data Order
406
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
When set to one the LSB of the data word is transmitted first. When set to zero the
MSB of the data word is transmitted first. Refer to section "Frame Formats" for details.
• Bit 1 – UCPHA0 - Clock Phase
The UCPHA0 bit setting determines if data is sampled on the leading (first) or tailing
(last) edge of XCK0. Refer to the section "SPI Data Modes and Timing" for details.
• Bit 0 – UCPOL0 - Clock Polarity
The UCPOL0 bit sets the polarity of the XCK0 clock. The combination of the UCPOL0
and UCPHA0 bit settings determine the timing of the data transfer. Refer to the section
"SPI Data Modes and Timing" for details.
24.6.6 UCSR1A – USART1 MSPIM Control and Status Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C8) RXC1 TXC1 UDRE1 UCSR1A
Read/Write R RW R
Initial Value 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – RXC1 - USART Receive Complete
This flag bit is set when there are unread data in the receive buffer and cleared when
the receive buffer is empty (i.e., does not contain any unread data). If the Receiver is
disabled, the receive buffer will be flushed and consequently the RXC1 bit will become
zero. The RXC1 Flag can be used to generate a Receive Complete interrupt (see
description of the RXCIE1 bit).
• Bit 6 – TXC1 - USART Transmit Complete
This flag bit is set when the entire frame in the Transmit Shift Register has been shifted
out and there are no new data currently present in the transmit buffer (UDR1). The
TXC1 Flag bit is automatically cleared when a transmit complete interrupt is executed,
or it can be cleared by writing a one to its bit location. The TXC1 Flag can generate a
Transmit Complete interrupt (see description of the TXCIE1 bit).
• Bit 5 – UDRE1 - USART Data Register Empty
The UDRE1 Flag indicates if the transmit buffer (UDR1) is ready to receive new data. If
UDRE1 is one, the buffer is empty, and therefore ready to be written. The UDRE1 Flag
can generate a Data Register Empty interrupt (see description of the UDRIE1 bit).
UDRE1 is set after a reset to indicate that the Transmitter is ready.
24.6.7 UCSR1B – USART1 MSPIM Control and Status Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($C9) RXCIE1 TXCIE1 UDRIE1 RXEN1 TXEN1 UCSR1B
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 1 0 0
• Bit 7 – RXCIE1 - RX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the RXC1 Flag. A USART Receive Complete
interrupt will be generated only if the RXCIE1 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the RXC1 bit in UCSR1A is set.
407
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 6 – TXCIE1 - TX Complete Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the TXC1 Flag. A USART Transmit Complete
interrupt will be generated only if the TXCIE1 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the TXC1 bit in UCSR1A is set.
• Bit 5 – UDRIE1 - USART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable
Writing this bit to one enables interrupt on the UDRE1 Flag. A Data Register Empty
interrupt will be generated only if the UDRIE1 bit is written to one, the Global Interrupt
Flag in SREG is written to one and the UDRE1 bit in UCSR1A is set.
• Bit 4 – RXEN1 - Receiver Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Receiver in MSPIM mode. The Receiver will
override normal port operation for the RxD1 pin when enabled. Disabling the Receiver
will flush the receive buffer. Only enabling the receiver in MSPI mode (i.e. setting
RXEN1=1 and TXEN1=0) has no meaning since it is the transmitter that controls the
transfer clock and since only master mode is supported.
• Bit 3 – TXEN1 - Transmitter Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the USART Transmitter. The Transmitter will override
normal port operation for the TxD1 pin when enabled. The disabling of the Transmitter
(writing TXEN1 to zero) will not become effective until ongoing and pending
transmissions are completed, i.e., when the Transmit Shift Register and Transmit Buffer
Register do not contain data to be transmitted. When disabled, the Transmitter will no
longer override the TxD1 port.
24.6.8 UCSR1C – USART1 MSPIM Control and Status Register C
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($CA) UDORD1
UCPHA1
UCPOL1
UCSR1C
Read/Write RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 0
• Bit 2 – UDORD1 - Data Order
When set to one the LSB of the data word is transmitted first. When set to zero the
MSB of the data word is transmitted first. Refer to section "Frame Formats" for details.
• Bit 1 – UCPHA1 - Clock Phase
The UCPHA1 bit setting determines if data is sampled on the leading (first) or tailing
(last) edge of XCK1. Refer to the section "SPI Data Modes and Timing" for details.
• Bit 0 – UCPOL1 - Clock Polarity
The UCPOL1 bit sets the polarity of the XCK1 clock. The combination of the UCPOL1
and UCPHA1 bit settings determine the timing of the data transfer. Refer to the section
"SPI Data Modes and Timing" for details.
408
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
25 2-wire Serial Interface
25.1 Features
• Simple yet powerful and flexible communication interface, only two bus lines
needed
• Both master and slave operation supported
• Device can operate as transmitter or receiver
• 7-bit address space allows up to 128 different slave addresses
• Multi-master arbitration support
• Up to 400 kHz data transfer speed
• Slew-rate limited output drivers
• Noise suppression circuitry rejects spikes on bus lines
• Fully programmable slave address with general call support
• Address recognition causes wake-up when microcontroller is in sleep mode
25.2 2-wire Serial Interface Bus Definition
The 2-wire Serial Interface (TWI) is ideally suited for typical microcontroller applications.
The TWI protocol allows the systems designer to interconnect up to 128 different
devices using only two bi-directional bus lines, one for clock (SCL) and one for data
(SDA). The only external hardware needed to implement the bus is a single pull-up
resistor for each of the TWI bus lines. All devices connected to the bus have individual
addresses, and mechanisms for resolving bus contention are inherent in the TWI
protocol.
Figure 25-1. TWI Bus Interconnection
Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 Device n
SDA
SCL
........ R1 R2
DEVDD
25.2.1 TWI Terminology
The following definitions are frequently encountered in this section.
Table 25-1. TWI Terminology
Term Description
Master The device that initiates and terminates a transmission. The Master also
generates the SCL clock.
Slave The device addressed by a Master.
Transmitter The device placing data on the bus.
Receiver The device reading data from the bus.
409
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The Power Reduction TWI bit, PRTWI bit in "PRR0 – Power Reduction Register0" on
page 195 must be written to zero to enable the 2-wire Serial Interface.
25.2.2 Electrical Interconnection
As depicted in Figure 25-1 on page 408, both bus lines are connected to the positive
supply voltage through pull-up resistors. The bus drivers of all TWI-compliant devices
are open-drain or open-collector. This implements a wired-AND function which is
essential to the operation of the interface. A low level on a TWI bus line is generated
when one or more TWI devices output a zero. A high level is output when all TWI
devices trim-state their outputs, allowing the pull-up resistors to pull the line high. Note
that all AVR devices connected to the TWI bus must be powered in order to allow any
bus operation.
The number of devices that can be connected to the bus is only limited by the bus
capacitance limit of 400 pF and the 7-bit slave address space. A detailed specification
of the electrical characteristics of the TWI is given in "2-wire Serial Interface
Characteristics" on page 556. Two different sets of specifications are presented there,
one relevant for bus speeds below 100 kHz, and one valid for bus speeds up to 400
kHz.
25.3 Data Transfer and Frame Format
25.3.1 Transferring Bits
Each data bit transferred on the TWI bus is accompanied by a pulse on the clock line.
The level of the data line must be stable when the clock line is high. The only exception
to this rule is for generating start and stop conditions.
Figure 25-2. Data Validity
SDA
SCL
Data Stable Data Stable
Data Change
25.3.2 START and STOP Conditions
The Master initiates and terminates a data transmission. The transmission is initiated
when the Master issues a START condition on the bus, and it is terminated when the
Master issues a STOP condition. Between a START and a STOP condition, the bus is
considered busy, and no other master should try to seize control of the bus. A special
case occurs when a new START condition is issued between a START and STOP
condition. This is referred to as a REPEATED START condition, and is used when the
Master wishes to initiate a new transfer without relinquishing control of the bus. After a
REPEATED START, the bus is considered busy until the next STOP. This is identical to
the START behavior, and therefore START is used to describe both START and
REPEATED START for the remainder of this datasheet, unless otherwise noted. As
depicted below, START and STOP conditions are signaled by changing the level of the
SDA line when the SCL line is high.
410
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 25-3. START, REPEATED START and STOP conditions
SDA
SCL
START STOPREPEATED STARTSTOP START
25.3.3 Address Packet Format
All address packets transmitted on the TWI bus are 9 bits long, consisting of 7 address
bits, one READ/WRITE control bit and an acknowledge bit. If the READ/WRITE bit is
set, a read operation is to be performed, otherwise a write operation should be
performed. When a Slave recognizes that it is being addressed, it should acknowledge
by pulling SDA low in the ninth SCL (ACK) cycle. If the addressed Slave is busy, or for
some other reason can not service the Master’s request, the SDA line should be left
high in the ACK clock cycle. The Master can then transmit a STOP condition, or a
REPEATED START condition to initiate a new transmission. An address packet
consisting of a slave address and a READ or a WRITE bit is called SLA+R or SLA+W,
respectively.
The MSB of the address byte is transmitted first. Slave addresses can freely be
allocated by the designer, but the address 0000 000 is reserved for a general call.
When a general call is issued, all slaves should respond by pulling the SDA line low in
the ACK cycle. A general call is used when a Master wishes to transmit the same
message to several slaves in the system. When the general call address followed by a
Write bit is transmitted on the bus, all slaves set up to acknowledge the general call will
pull the SDA line low in the ack cycle. The following data packets will then be received
by all the slaves that acknowledged the general call. Note that transmitting the general
call address followed by a Read bit is meaningless, as this would cause contention if
several slaves started transmitting different data.
All addresses of the format 1111 xxx should be reserved for future purposes.
Figure 25-4. Address Packet Format
SDA
SCL
START
1 2 7 8 9
Addr MSB Addr LSB R/W ACK
25.3.4 Data Packet Format
All data packets transmitted on the TWI bus are nine bits long, consisting of one data
byte and an acknowledge bit. During a data transfer, the Master generates the clock
and the START and STOP conditions, while the Receiver is responsible for
acknowledging the reception. An Acknowledge (ACK) is signaled by the Receiver
411
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
pulling the SDA line low during the ninth SCL cycle. If the Receiver leaves the SDA line
high, a NACK is signaled. When the Receiver has received the last byte, or for some
reason cannot receive any more bytes, it should inform the Transmitter by sending a
NACK after the final byte. The MSB of the data byte is transmitted first.
Figure 25-5. Data Packet Format
1 2 7 8 9
Data MSB Data LSB ACK
Aggregate
SDA
SDA from
Transmitter
SDA from
Receiver
SCL from
Master
SLA+R/W Data Byte
STOP, REPEATED
START or Next
Data Byte
25.3.5 Combining Address and Data Packets into a Transmission
A transmission basically consists of a START condition, a SLA+R/W, one or more data
packets and a STOP condition. An empty message, consisting of a START followed by
a STOP condition, is illegal. Note that the Wired-ANDing of the SCL line can be used to
implement handshaking between the Master and the Slave. The Slave can extend the
SCL low period by pulling the SCL line low. This is useful if the clock speed set up by
the Master is too fast for the Slave, or the Slave needs extra time for processing
between the data transmissions. The Slave extending the SCL low period will not affect
the SCL high period, which is determined by the Master. As a consequence, the Slave
can reduce the TWI data transfer speed by prolonging the SCL duty cycle.
Figure 25-6 below shows a typical data transmission. Note that several data bytes can
be transmitted between the SLA+R/W and the STOP condition, depending on the
software protocol implemented by the application software.
Figure 25-6. Typical Data Transmission
1 2 7 8 9
Data Byte
Data MSB Data LSB ACK
SDA
SCL
START
12 789
Addr MSB Addr LSB R/W ACK
SLA+R/W STOP
25.4 Multi-master Bus Systems, Arbitration and Synchronization
The TWI protocol allows bus systems with several masters. Special concerns have
been taken in order to ensure that transmissions will proceed as normal, even if two or
more masters initiate a transmission at the same time. Two problems arise in multi-
master systems:
412
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• An algorithm must be implemented allowing only one of the masters to complete the
transmission. All other masters should cease transmission when they discover that
they have lost the selection process. This selection process is called arbitration.
When a contending master discovers that it has lost the arbitration process, it should
immediately switch to Slave mode to check whether it is being addressed by the
winning master. The fact that multiple masters have started transmission at the
same time should not be detectable to the slaves, i.e. the data being transferred on
the bus must not be corrupted.
• Different masters may use different SCL frequencies. A scheme must be devised to
synchronize the serial clocks from all masters, in order to let the transmission
proceed in a lockstep fashion. This will facilitate the arbitration process.
The wired-ANDing of the bus lines is used to solve both these problems. The serial
clocks from all masters will be wired-ANDed, yielding a combined clock with a high
period equal to the one from the Master with the shortest high period. The low period of
the combined clock is equal to the low period of the Master with the longest low period.
Note that all masters listen to the SCL line, effectively starting to count their SCL high
and low time-out periods when the combined SCL line goes high or low, respectively.
Figure 25-7. SCL Synchronization Between Multiple Masters
TA low TA high
SCL from
Master A
SCL from
Master B
SCL Bus
Line
TBlow TBhigh
Masters Start
Counting Low Period
Masters Start
Counting High Period
Arbitration is carried out by all masters continuously monitoring the SDA line after
outputting data. If the value read from the SDA line does not match the value the
Master had output, it has lost the arbitration. Note that a Master can only lose arbitration
when it outputs a high SDA value while another Master outputs a low value. The losing
Master should immediately go to Slave mode, checking if it is being addressed by the
winning Master. The SDA line should be left high, but losing masters are allowed to
generate a clock signal until the end of the current data or address packet. Arbitration
will continue until only one Master remains, and this may take many bits. If several
masters are trying to address the same Slave, arbitration will continue into the data
packet.
Note that arbitration is not allowed between:
• A REPEATED START condition and a data bit.
• A STOP condition and a data bit.
• A REPEATED START and a STOP condition.
It is the user software’s responsibility to ensure that these illegal arbitration conditions
never occur. This implies that in multi-master systems, all data transfers must use the
same composition of SLA+R/W and data packets. In other words: All transmissions
413
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
must contain the same number of data packets, otherwise the result of the arbitration is
undefined.
Figure 25-8. Arbitration Between Two Masters
SDA from
Master A
SDA from
Master B
SDA Line
Synchronized
SCL Line
START Master A Loses
Arbitration, SDAA SDA
25.5 Overview of the TWI Module
The TWI module is comprised of several sub-modules, as shown in Figure 25-9 below.
All registers drawn in a thick line are accessible through the AVR data bus.
Figure 25-9. Overview of the TWI Module
TWI Unit
Address Register
(TWAR)
Address Match Unit
Address Comparator
Control Unit
Control Register
(TWCR)
Status Register
(TWSR)
State Machine and
Status control
SCL
Slew-rate
Control
Spike
Filter
SDA
Slew-rate
Control
Spike
Filter
Bit Rate Generator
Bit Rate Register
(TWBR)
Prescaler
Bus Interface Unit
START / STOP
Control
Arbitration detection Ack
Spike Suppression
Address/Data Shift
Register (TWDR)
414
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
25.5.1 SCL and SDA Pins
These pins interface the AVR TWI with the rest of the MCU system. The output drivers
contain a slew-rate limiter in order to conform to the TWI specification. The input stages
contain a spike suppression unit removing spikes shorter than 50 ns. Note that the
internal pull-ups in the AVR pads can be enabled by setting the PORT bits
corresponding to the SCL and SDA pins, as explained in the I/O Port section. The
internal pull-ups can in some systems eliminate the need for external ones.
25.5.2 Bit Rate Generator Unit
This unit controls the period of SCL when operating in a Master mode. The SCL period
is controlled by settings in the TWI Bit Rate Register (TWBR) and the Prescaler bits in
the TWI Status Register (TWSR). Slave operation does not depend on Bit Rate or
Prescaler settings, but the CPU clock frequency in the Slave must be at least 16 times
higher than the SCL frequency. Note that slaves may prolong the SCL low period,
thereby reducing the average TWI bus clock period. The SCL frequency is generated
according to the following equation:
( )
TWPS
TWBR
frequencyClockCPU
frequencySCL 4216 ⋅+
=
• TWBR = Value of the TWI Bit Rate Register.
• TWPS = Value of the prescaler bits in the TWI Status Register.
Note that pull-up resistor values should be selected according to the SCL frequency
and the capacitive bus line load. See in "2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics" on page
556 for value of pull-up resistor.
25.5.3 Bus Interface Unit
This unit contains the Data and Address Shift Register (TWDR), a START/STOP
Controller and Arbitration detection hardware. The TWDR contains the address or data
bytes to be transmitted, or the address or data bytes received. In addition to the 8-bit
TWDR, the Bus Interface Unit also contains a register containing the (N)ACK bit to be
transmitted or received. This (N)ACK Register is not directly accessible by the
application software. However, when receiving, it can be set or cleared by manipulating
the TWI Control Register (TWCR). When in Transmitter mode, the value of the received
(N)ACK bit can be determined by the value in the TWSR.
The START/STOP Controller is responsible for generation and detection of START,
REPEATED START, and STOP conditions. The START/STOP controller is able to
detect START and STOP conditions even when the AVR MCU is in one of the sleep
modes, enabling the MCU to wake up if addressed by a Master.
If the TWI has initiated a transmission as Master, the Arbitration Detection hardware
continuously monitors the transmission trying to determine if arbitration is in process. If
the TWI has lost an arbitration, the Control Unit is informed. Correct action can then be
taken and appropriate status codes generated.
25.5.4 Address Match Unit
The Address Match unit checks if received address bytes match the seven-bit address
in the TWI Address Register (TWAR). If the TWI General Call Recognition Enable
(TWGCE) bit in the TWAR is written to one, all incoming address bits will also be
compared against the General Call address. Upon an address match, the Control Unit
is informed, allowing correct action to be taken. The TWI may or may not acknowledge
its address, depending on settings in the TWCR. The Address Match unit is able to
415
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
compare addresses even if the AVR MCU is in sleep mode, enabling the MCU to wake
up if addressed by a Master. If another interrupt (e.g., INT0) occurs during TWI Power-
down address match and wakes up the CPU, the TWI aborts operation and return to it’s
idle state. If this cause any problems, ensure that TWI Address Match is the only
enabled interrupt when entering Power-down.
25.5.5 Control Unit
The Control unit monitors the TWI bus and generates responses corresponding to
settings in the TWI Control Register (TWCR). When an event requiring the attention of
the application occurs on the TWI bus, the TWI Interrupt Flag (TWINT) is asserted. In
the next clock cycle, the TWI Status Register (TWSR) is updated with a status code
identifying the event. The TWSR only contains relevant status information when the
TWI Interrupt Flag is asserted. At all other times, the TWSR contains a special status
code indicating that no relevant status information is available. As long as the TWINT
Flag is set, the SCL line is held low. This allows the application software to complete its
tasks before allowing the TWI transmission to continue.
The TWINT Flag is set in the following situations:
• After the TWI has transmitted a START/REPEATED START condition.
• After the TWI has transmitted SLA+R/W.
• After the TWI has transmitted an address byte.
• After the TWI has lost arbitration.
• After the TWI has been addressed by own slave address or general call.
• After the TWI has received a data byte.
• After a STOP or REPEATED START has been received while still addressed as a
Slave.
• When a bus error has occurred due to an illegal START or STOP condition.
25.6 Using the TWI
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 TWI is byte-oriented and interrupt based. Interrupts
are issued after all bus events, like reception of a byte or transmission of a START
condition. Because the TWI is interrupt-based, the application software is free to carry
on other operations during a TWI byte transfer. Note that the TWI Interrupt Enable
(TWIE) bit in TWCR together with the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG allow the
application to decide whether or not assertion of the TWINT Flag should generate an
interrupt request. If the TWIE bit is cleared, the application must poll the TWINT Flag in
order to detect actions on the TWI bus.
When the TWINT Flag is asserted, the TWI has finished an operation and awaits
application response. In this case, the TWI Status Register (TWSR) contains a value
indicating the current state of the TWI bus. The application software can then decide
how the TWI should behave in the next TWI bus cycle by manipulating the TWCR and
TWDR Registers.
Figure 25-10 on page 416 is a simple example of how the application can interface to
the TWI hardware. In this example, a Master wishes to transmit a single data byte to a
Slave. This description is quite abstract, a more detailed explanation follows later in this
section. A simple code example implementing the desired behavior is also presented.
416
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 25-10. Interfacing the Application to the TWI in a Typical Transmission
START SLA+W A Data A STOP
1. Application
writes to TWCR to
initiate
transmission of
START
2. TWINT set.
Status code indicates
START condition sent
4. TWINT set.
Status code indicates
SLA+W sent, ACK
received
6. TWINT set.
Status code indicates
data sent, ACK received
3. Check TWSR to see if START was
sent. Application loads SLA+W into
TWDR, and loads appropriate control
signals into TWCR, makin sure that
TWINT is written to one,
and TWSTA is written to zero.
5. Check TWSR to see if SLA+W was
sent and ACK received.
Application loads data into TWDR, and
loads appropriate control signals into
TWCR, making sure that TWINT is
written to one
7. Check TWSR to see if data was sent
and ACK received.
Application loads appropriate control
signals to send STOP into TWCR,
making sure that TWINT is written to one
TWI bus
Indicates
TWINT set
Application
Action
TWI
Hardware
Action
1. The first step in a TWI transmission is to transmit a START condition. This is done by
writing a specific value into TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit a
START condition. Which value to write is described later on. However, it is important
that the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag.
The TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set.
Immediately after the application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate
transmission of the START condition.
2. When the START condition has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag in TWCR is set,
and TWSR is updated with a status code indicating that the START condition has
successfully been sent.
3. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that
the START condition was successfully transmitted. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the
application software might take some special action, like calling an error routine.
Assuming that the status code is as expected, the application must load SLA+W into
TWDR. Remember that TWDR is used both for address and data. After TWDR has
been loaded with the desired SLA+W, a specific value must be written to TWCR,
instructing the TWI hardware to transmit the SLA+W present in TWDR. Which value
to write is described later on. However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the
value written. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will not start any
operation as long as the TWINT bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the application
has cleared TWINT, the TWI will initiate transmission of the address packet.
4. When the address packet has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag in TWCR is set,
and TWSR is updated with a status code indicating that the address packet has
successfully been sent. The status code will also reflect whether a Slave
acknowledged the packet or not.
5. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that
the address packet was successfully transmitted, and that the value of the ACK bit
was as expected. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the application software might take
some special action, like calling an error routine. Assuming that the status code is as
expected, the application must load a data packet into TWDR. Subsequently, a
specific value must be written to TWCR, instructing the TWI hardware to transmit the
data packet present in TWDR. Which value to write is described later on. However, it
is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one to TWINT
417
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
clears the flag. The TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT bit in
TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has cleared TWINT, the TWI will
initiate transmission of the data packet.
6. When the data packet has been transmitted, the TWINT Flag in TWCR is set, and
TWSR is updated with a status code indicating that the data packet has successfully
been sent. The status code will also reflect whether a Slave acknowledged the
packet or not.
7. The application software should now examine the value of TWSR, to make sure that
the data packet was successfully transmitted, and that the value of the ACK bit was
as expected. If TWSR indicates otherwise, the application software might take some
special action, like calling an error routine. Assuming that the status code is as
expected, the application must write a specific value to TWCR, instructing the TWI
hardware to transmit a STOP condition. Which value to write is described later on.
However, it is important that the TWINT bit is set in the value written. Writing a one
to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will not start any operation as long as the TWINT
bit in TWCR is set. Immediately after the application has cleared TWINT, the TWI
will initiate transmission of the STOP condition. Note that TWINT is NOT set after a
STOP condition has been sent.
Even though this example is simple, it shows the principles involved in all TWI
transmissions. These can be summarized as follows:
• When the TWI has finished an operation and expects application response, the
TWINT Flag is set. The SCL line is pulled low until TWINT is cleared.
• When the TWINT Flag is set, the user must update all TWI Registers with the value
relevant for the next TWI bus cycle. As an example, TWDR must be loaded with the
value to be transmitted in the next bus cycle.
• After all TWI Register updates and other pending application software tasks have
been completed, TWCR is written. When writing TWCR, the TWINT bit should be
set. Writing a one to TWINT clears the flag. The TWI will then commence executing
whatever operation was specified by the TWCR setting.
In the following an assembly and C implementation of the example is given. Note that
the code below assumes that several definitions have been made, for example by using
include-files.
Table 25-2. Code example
Assembly Code Example C Example Comments
1
ldi
r16,(1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWSTA)|
(1<<TWEN)
out TWCR, r16
TWCR = (1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWSTA)|
(1<<TWEN)
Send START condition
2
wait1:
in r16,TWCR
sbrs r16,TWINT
rjmp wait1
while (!(TWCR & (1<<TWINT))); Wait for TWINT Flag set. This
indicates that the START condition
has been transmitted
3
in r16,TWSR
andi r16, 0xF8
cpi r16, START
brne ERROR
if ((TWSR & 0xF8) != START)
ERROR();
Check value of TWI Status Register.
Mask prescaler bits. If status different
from START go to ERROR
ldi r16, SLA_W
out TWDR, r16
ldi r16, (1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN)
out TWCR, r16
TWDR = SLA_W;
TWCR = (1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN);
Load SLA_W into TWDR Register.
Clear TWINT bit in TWCR to start
transmission of address
418
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Assembly Code Example C Example Comments
4
wait2:
in r16,TWCR
sbrs r16,TWINT
rjmp wait2
while (!(TWCR & (1<<TWINT))); Wait for TWINT Flag set. This
indicates that the SLA+W has been
transmitted, and ACK/NACK has
been received.
5
in r16,TWSR
andi r16, 0xF8
cpi r16, MT_SLA_ACK
brne ERROR
if ((TWSR & 0xF8) != MT_SLA_ACK)
ERROR();
Check value of TWI Status Register.
Mask prescaler bits. If status different
from MT_SLA_ACK go to ERROR
ldi r16, DATA
out TWDR, r16
ldi r16, (1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN)
out TWCR, r16
TWDR = DATA;
TWCR = (1<<TWINT) | (1<<TWEN);
Load DATA into TWDR Register.
Clear TWINT bit in TWCR to start
transmission of data
6
wait3:
in r16,TWCR
sbrs r16,TWINT
rjmp wait3
while (!(TWCR & (1<<TWINT))); Wait for TWINT Flag set. This
indicates that the DATA has been
transmitted, and ACK/NACK has
been received.
7
in r16,TWSR
andi r16, 0xF8
cpi r16, MT_DATA_ACK
brne ERROR
if ((TWSR & 0xF8) != MT_DATA_ACK)
ERROR();
Check value of TWI Status Register.
Mask prescaler bits. If status different
from MT_DATA_ACK go to ERROR
ldi r16,(1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN)|
(1<<TWSTO)
out TWCR, r16
TWCR = (1<<TWINT)|(1<<TWEN)|
(1<<TWSTO);
Transmit STOP condition
25.7 Transmission Modes
The TWI can operate in one of four major modes. These are named Master Transmitter
(MT), Master Receiver (MR), Slave Transmitter (ST) and Slave Receiver (SR). Several
of these modes can be used in the same application. As an example, the TWI can use
MT mode to write data into a TWI EEPROM, MR mode to read the data back from the
EEPROM. If other masters are present in the system, some of these might transmit
data to the TWI, and then SR mode would be used. It is the application software that
decides which modes are legal.
The following sections describe each of these modes. Possible status codes are
described along with figures detailing data transmission in each of the modes. These
figures contain the following abbreviations:
S: START condition Rs: REPEATED START condition
R: Read bit (high level at SDA) W: Write bit (low level at SDA)
Data: 8-bit data byte P: STOP condition
SLA: Slave Address A: Acknowledge bit (low level at SDA)
A
_
: Not acknowledge bit (high level at SDA)
In Figure 25-12 on page 420 to Figure 25-18 on page 430 circles are used to indicate
that the TWINT Flag is set. The numbers in the circles show the status code held in
TWSR, with the prescaler bits masked to zero. At these points, actions must be taken
by the application to continue or complete the TWI transfer. The TWI transfer is
suspended until the TWINT Flag is cleared by software.
When the TWINT Flag is set, the status code in TWSR is used to determine the
appropriate software action. For each status code, the required software action and
419
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
details of the following serial transfer are given in Table 25-3 on page 421 to Table 25-6
on page 429. Note that the prescaler bits are masked to zero in these tables.
25.7.1 Master Transmitter Mode
In the Master Transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a Slave
Receiver (see Figure 25-11 below). In order to enter a Master mode, a START
condition must be transmitted. The format of the following address packet determines
whether Master Transmitter or Master Receiver mode is to be entered. If SLA+W is
transmitted, MT mode is entered, if SLA+R is transmitted, MR mode is entered. All
status codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits are zero or are
masked to zero.
Figure 25-11. Data Transfer in Master Transmitter Mode
Device 1
MASTER
TRANSMITTER
Device 2
SLAVE
RECEIVER
Device 3 Device n
SDA
SCL
........ R1 R2
DEVDD
A START condition is sent by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
Value 1 X 1 0 X 1 0 X
TWEN must be set to enable the 2-wire Serial Interface, TWSTA must be written to one
to transmit a START condition and TWINT must be written to one to clear the TWINT
Flag. The TWI will then test the 2-wire Serial Bus and generate a START condition as
soon as the bus becomes free. After a START condition has been transmitted, the
TWINT Flag is set by hardware, and the status code in TWSR will be 0x08 (see Table
25-3 on page 421). In order to enter MT mode, SLA+W must be transmitted. This is
done by writing SLA+W to TWDR. Thereafter the TWINT bit should be cleared (by
writing it to one) to continue the transfer. This is accomplished by writing the following
value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
Value 1 X 0 0 X 1 0 X
When SLA+W have been transmitted and an acknowledgement bit has been received,
TWINT is set again and a number of status codes in TWSR are possible. Possible
status codes in Master mode are 0x18, 0x20, or 0x38. The appropriate action to be
taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 25-3 on page 421.
When SLA+W has been successfully transmitted, a data packet should be transmitted.
This is done by writing the data byte to TWDR. TWDR must only be written when
TWINT is high. If not, the access will be discarded, and the Write Collision bit (TWWC)
will be set in the TWCR Register. After updating TWDR, the TWINT bit should be
cleared (by writing it to one) to continue the transfer. This is accomplished by writing the
following value to TWCR:
420
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
TWCR
TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
Value 1 X 0 0 X 1 0 X
This scheme is repeated until the last byte has been sent and the transfer is ended by
generating a STOP condition or a repeated START condition. A STOP condition is
generated by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
Value 1 X 0 1 X 1 0 X
A REPEATED START condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
Value X 1 0 X 1 0 X
After a REPEATED START condition (state 0x10) the 2-wire Serial Interface can
access the same Slave again, or a new Slave without transmitting a STOP condition.
Repeated START enables the Master to switch between Slaves, Master Transmitter
mode and Master Receiver mode without losing control of the bus.
Figure 25-12. Formats and States in the Master Transmitter Mode
S SLA W A DATA A P
$08 $18 $28
R SLA W
$10
A P
$20
P
$30
A or A
$38
A
Other master
continues
A or A
$38
Other master
continues
R
A
$68
Other master
continues
$78 $B0
To corresponding
states in slave mode
MT
MR
Successful
transmission
to a slave
receiver
Next transfer
started with a
repeated start
condition
Not acknowledge
received after the
slave address
Not acknowledge
received after a data
byte
Arbitration lost in slave
address or data byte
Arbitration lost and
addressed as slave
DATA A
n
From master to slave
From slave to master
Any number of data bytes
and their associated acknowledge bits
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus. The
prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
S
421
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 25-3. Status codes for Master Transmitter Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Prescaler
Bits are 0
Status of the 2-wire
Serial Bus and 2-wire
Serial Interface
Hardware
Application Software Response
Next Action Taken by TWI
Hardware
To/from TWDR
To TWCR
STA STO TWINT TWEA
0x08 A START condition has
been transmitted
Load SLA+W 0 0 1 X SLA+W will be transmitted; ACK or
NOT ACK will be received
0x10 A repeated START
condition has been
transmitted
Load SLA+W or
Load SLA+R
0
0
0
0
1
1
X
X
SLA+W will be transmitted; ACK or
NOT ACK will be received
SLA+R will be transmitted; Logic will
switch to Master Receiver mode
0x18 SLA+W has been
transmitted; ACK has
been received
Load data byte o
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
Data byte will be transmitted and
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted
and TWSTO Flag will be reset
STOP condition followed by a START
condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
0x20 SLA+W has been
transmitted; NOT ACK
has been received
Load data byte or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
Data byte will be transmitted and
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted
and TWSTO Flag will be rese
STOP condition followed by a START
condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
0x28 Data byte has been
transmitted; ACK has
been received
Load data byte or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
Data byte will be transmitted and
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted
and TWSTO Flag will be reset
STOP condition followed by a START
condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
0x30 Data byte has been
transmitted; NOT ACK
has been received
Load data byte or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
Data byte will be transmitted and
ACK or NOT ACK will be received
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted
and TWSTO Flag will be reset
STOP condition followed by a START
condition will be transmitted and
TWSTO Flag will be reset
0x38 Arbitration lost in SLA+W
or data bytes
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
0
1
1
X
X
2-wire Serial Bus will be released and
not addressed Slave mode entered
A START condition will be
transmitted when the bus be-comes
free
25.7.2 Master Receiver Mode
In the Master Receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a Slave
Transmitter (for Slave see Figure 25-13 on page 422). In order to enter a Master mode,
a START condition must be transmitted. The format of the following address packet
determines whether Master Transmitter or Master Receiver mode is to be entered. If
SLA+W is transmitted, MT mode is entered, if SLA+R is transmitted, MR mode is
entered. All the status codes mentioned in this section assume that the prescaler bits
are zero or are masked to zero.
422
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 25-13. Data Transfer in Master Receiver Mode
Device 1
MASTER
RECEIVER
Device 2
SLAVE
TRANSMITTER
Device 3 Device n
SDA
SCL
........ R1 R2
DEVDD
A START condition is sent by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
Value 1 X 1 0 X 1 0 X
TWEN must be written to one to enable the 2-wire Serial Interface, TWSTA must be
written to one to transmit a START condition and TWINT must be set to clear the
TWINT Flag. The TWI will then test the 2-wire Serial Bus and generate a START
condition as soon as the bus becomes free. After a START condition has been
transmitted, the TWINT Flag is set by hardware, and the status code in TWSR will be
0x08 (see Table 25-4 on page 423). In order to enter MR mode, SLA+R must be
transmitted. This is done by writing SLA+R to TWDR. Thereafter the TWINT bit should
be cleared (by writing it to one) to continue the transfer. This is accomplished by writing
the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
Value 1 X 0 0 X 1 0 X
When SLA+R have been transmitted and an acknowledgement bit has been received,
TWINT is set again and a number of status codes in TWSR are possible. Possible
status codes in Master mode are 0x38, 0x40, or 0x48. The appropriate action to be
taken for each of these status codes is detailed in Table 25-4 on page 423. Received
data can be read from the TWDR Register when the TWINT Flag is set high by
hardware. This scheme is repeated until the last byte has been received. After the last
byte has been received, the MR should inform the ST by sending a NACK after the last
received data byte. The transfer is ended by generating a STOP condition or a repeated
START condition. A STOP condition is generated by writing the following value to
TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
value 1 X 0 1 X 1 0 X
A REPEATED START condition is generated by writing the following value to TWCR:
TWCR
TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
Value 1 X 1 0 X 1 0 X
After a repeated START condition (state 0x10) the 2-wire Serial Interface can access
the same Slave again, or a new Slave without transmitting a STOP condition. Repeated
423
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
START enables the Master to switch between Slaves, Master Transmitter mode and
Master Receiver mode without losing control over the bus.
Table 25-4. Status codes for Master Receiver Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Prescaler
Bits are 0
Status of the 2-wire
Serial Bus and 2-wire
Serial Interface Hard-
ware
Application Software Response
Next Action Taken by TWI
Hardware
To/from TWDR
To TWCR
STA STD TWINT TWEA
0x08 A START condition has
been transmitted
Load SLA+R 0 0 1 X SLA+R will be transmitted ACK or
NOT ACK will be received
0x10 A repeated START
condition has been
transmitted
Load SLA+R or
Load SLA+W
0
0
0
0
1
1
X
X
SLA+R will be transmitted ACK or
NOTACK will be received
SLA+W will be transmitted Logic will
switch to Master Transmitter mode
0x38 Arbitration lost in SLA+R
or NOT ACK bit
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
1
0
0
1
1
X
X
2-wire Serial Bus will be released
and not addressed Slave mode will
be entered
A START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
0x40 SLA+R has been
transmitted; ACK has
been received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT
ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK
will be returned
0x48 SLA+R has been
transmitted; NOT ACK
has been received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted
and TWSTO Flag will be reset
STOP condition followed by a
START condition will be transmitted
and TWSTO Flag will be reset
0x50 Data byte has been
received; ACK has been
returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT
ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK
will be returned
0x58 Data byte has been
received; NOT ACK has
been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
Read data byte
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
Repeated START will be transmitted
STOP condition will be transmitted
and TWSTO Flag will be reset
STOP condition followed by a
START condition will be transmitted
and TWSTO Flag will be reset
424
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 25-14. Formats and States in the Master Receiver Mode
S SLA R A DATA A
$08 $40 $50
SLA R
$10
A P
$48
A or A
$38
Other master
continues
$38
Other master
continues
W
A
$68
Other master
continues
$78 $B0
To corresponding
states in slave mode
MR
MT
Successful
reception
from a slave
receiver
Next transfer
started with a
repeated start
condition
Not acknowledge
received after the
slave address
Arbitration lost in slave
address or data byte
Arbitration lost and
addressed as slave
DATA A
n
From master to slave
From slave to master
Any number of data bytes
and their associated acknowledge bits
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus. The
prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
PDATA A
$58
A
RS
25.7.3 Slave Receiver Mode
In the Slave Receiver mode, a number of data bytes are received from a Master
Transmitter (see Figure 25-15 below). All the status codes mentioned in this section
assume that the prescaler bits are zero or are masked to zero.
Figure 25-15. Data transfer in Slave Receiver mode
Device 3 Device n
SDA
SCL
........ R1 R2
DEVDD
Device 2
MASTER
TRANSMITTER
Device 1
SLAVE
RECEIVER
To initiate the Slave Receiver mode, TWAR and TWCR must be initialized as follows:
TWAR TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE
Value Device’s Own Slave Address
425
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The upper 7 bits are the address to which the 2-wire Serial Interface will respond when
addressed by a Master. If the LSB is set, the TWI will respond to the general call
address (0x00), otherwise it will ignore the general call address.
TWCR
TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
Value 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 X
TWEN must be written to one to enable the TWI. The TWEA bit must be written to one
to enable the acknowledgement of the device’s own slave address or the general call
address. TWSTA and TWSTO must be written to zero.
When TWAR and TWCR have been initialized, the TWI waits until it is addressed by its
own slave address (or the general call address if enabled) followed by the data direction
bit. If the direction bit is “0” (write), the TWI will operate in SR mode, otherwise ST mode
is entered. After its own slave address and the write bit have been received, the TWINT
Flag is set and a valid status code can be read from TWSR. The status code is used to
determine the appropriate software action. The appropriate action to be taken for each
status code is detailed in Table 25-5 below. The Slave Receiver mode may also be
entered if arbitration is lost while the TWI is in the Master mode (see states 0x68 and
0x78).
If the TWEA bit is reset during a transfer, the TWI will return a “Not Acknowledge” (“1”)
to SDA after the next received data byte. This can be used to indicate that the Slave is
not able to receive any more bytes. While TWEA is zero, the TWI does not
acknowledge its own slave address. However, the 2-wire Serial Bus is still monitored
and address recognition may resume at any time by setting TWEA. This implies that the
TWEA bit may be used to temporarily isolate the TWI from the 2-wire Serial Bus.
In all sleep modes other than Idle mode, the clock system to the TWI is turned off. If the
TWEA bit is set, the interface can still acknowledge its own slave address or the
general call address by using the 2-wire Serial Bus clock as a clock source. The part
will then wake up from sleep and the TWI will hold the SCL clock low during the wake
up and until the TWINT Flag is cleared (by writing it to one). Further data reception will
be carried out as normal, with the AVR clocks running as normal. Observe that if the
AVR is set up with a long start-up time, the SCL line may be held low for a long time,
blocking other data transmissions.
Note that the 2-wire Serial Interface Data Register – TWDR does not reflect the last
byte present on the bus when waking up from these Sleep modes.
Table 25-5. Status Codes for Slave Receiver Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Prescaler
Bits are 0
Status of the 2-wire
Serial Bus and 2-wire
Serial Interface
Hardware
Application Software Response
Next Action Taken by TWI
Hardware To/from TWDR
To TWCR
STA STO TWINT TWEA
0x60 Own SLA+W has been
received; ACK has been
returned
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT
ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK
will be returned
0x68 Arbitration lost in
SLA+R/W as Master;
own SLA+W has been
received; ACK has been
returned
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT
ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK
will be returned
0x70 General call address has
been received; ACK has
been returned
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT
ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK
will be returned
426
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
0x78 Arbitration lost in
SLA+R/W as Master;
General call address has
been received; ACK has
been returned
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT
ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK
will be returned
0x80 Previously addressed
with own SLA+W; data
has been received; ACK
has been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT
ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK
will be returned
0x88 Previously addressed
with own SLA+W; data
has been received; NOT
ACK has been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
Read data byte
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; no recognition of own SLA or
GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE =
“1”
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; no recognition of own SLA or
GCA; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE =
“1”; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
0x90 Previously addressed
with general call; data
has been received; ACK
has been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Data byte will be received and NOT
ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK
will be returned
0x98 Previously addressed
with general call; data
has been received; NOT
ACK has been returned
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
Read data byte or
Read data byte
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; no recognition of own SLA or
GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE =
“1”
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; no recognition of own SLA or
GCA; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE =
“1”; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
427
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
0xA0 A STOP condition or
repeated START
condition has been
received while still
addressed as Slave
No action 0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; no recognition of own SLA or
GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE =
“1”
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; no recognition of own SLA or
GCA; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE =
“1”; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
Figure 25-16. Formats and States in the Slave Receiver Mode
S SLA W A DATA A
$60 $80
$88
A
$68
Reception of the own
slave address and one or
more data bytes. All are
acknowledged
Last data byte received
is not acknowledged
Arbitration lost as master
and addressed as slave
Reception of the general call
address and one or more data
bytes
Last data byte received is
not acknowledged
n
From master to slave
From slave to master
Any number of data bytes
and their associated acknowledge bits
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus. The
prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
P or SDATA A
$80 $A0
P or SA
A DATA A
$70 $90
$98
A
$78
P or SDATA A
$90 $A0
P or SA
General Call
Arbitration lost as master and
addressed as slave by general call
DATA A
25.7.4 Slave Transmitter Mode
In the Slave Transmitter mode, a number of data bytes are transmitted to a Master
Receiver (see Figure 25-17 on page 428). All the status codes mentioned in this section
assume that the prescaler bits are zero or are masked to zero.
428
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 25-17. Data Transfer in Slave Transmitter Mode
Device 3 Device n
SDA
SCL
........ R1 R2
DEVDD
Device 2
MASTER
RECEIVER
Device 1
SLAVE
TRANSMITTER
To initiate the Slave Transmitter mode, TWAR and TWCR must be initialized as follows:
TWAR TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE
Value Device’s Own Slave Address
The upper seven bits are the address to which the 2-wire Serial Interface will respond
when addressed by a Master. If the LSB is set, the TWI will respond to the general call
address (0x00), otherwise it will ignore the general call address.
TWCR
TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN – TWIE
Value 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 X
TWEN must be written to one to enable the TWI. The TWEA bit must be written to one
to enable the acknowledgement of the device’s own slave address or the general call
address. TWSTA and TWSTO must be written to zero.
When TWAR and TWCR have been initialized, the TWI waits until it is addressed by its
own slave address (or the general call address if enabled) followed by the data direction
bit. If the direction bit is “1” (read), the TWI will operate in ST mode, otherwise SR mode
is entered. After its own slave address and the write bit have been received, the TWINT
Flag is set and a valid status code can be read from TWSR. The status code is used to
determine the appropriate software action. The appropriate action to be taken for each
status code is detailed in Table 25-6 on page 429. The Slave Transmitter mode may
also be entered if arbitration is lost while the TWI is in the Master mode (see state
0xB0).
If the TWEA bit is written to zero during a transfer, the TWI will transmit the last byte of
the transfer. State 0xC0 or state 0xC8 will be entered, depending on whether the
Master Receiver transmits a NACK or ACK after the final byte. The TWI is switched to
the not addressed Slave mode, and will ignore the Master if it continues the transfer.
Thus the Master Receiver receives all “1” as serial data. State 0xC8 is entered if the
Master demands additional data bytes (by transmitting ACK), even though the Slave
has transmitted the last byte (TWEA zero and expecting NACK from the Master).
While TWEA is zero, the TWI does not respond to its own slave address. However, the
2-wire Serial Bus is still monitored and address recognition may resume at any time by
setting TWEA. This implies that the TWEA bit may be used to temporarily isolate the
TWI from the 2-wire Serial Bus.
In all sleep modes other than Idle mode, the clock system to the TWI is turned off. If the
TWEA bit is set, the interface can still acknowledge its own slave address or the
general call address by using the 2-wire Serial Bus clock as a clock source. The part
429
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
will then wake up from sleep and the TWI will hold the SCL clock will low during the
wake up and until the TWINT Flag is cleared (by writing it to one). Further data
transmission will be carried out as normal, with the AVR clocks running as normal.
Observe that if the AVR is set up with a long start-up time, the SCL line may be held
low for a long time, blocking other data transmissions.
Note that the 2-wire Serial Interface Data Register – TWDR does not reflect the last
byte present on the bus when waking up from these sleep modes.
Table 25-6. Status Code for Slave Transmitter Mode
Status Code
(TWSR)
Prescaler
Bits are 0
Status of the 2-wire
Serial Bus and 2-wire
Serial Interface
Hardware
Application Software Response
Next Action Taken by TWI
Hardware
To/from TWDR
To TWCR
STA STD TWINT TWEA
0xA8 Own SLA+R has been
received; ACK has been
returned
Load data byte or
Load data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Last data byte will be transmitted and
NOT ACK should be received Data
byte will be transmitted and ACK
should be received
0xB0 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W
as Master; own SLA+R has
been received; ACK has
been returned
Load data byte or
Load data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Last data byte will be transmitted and
NOT ACK should be received Data
byte will be transmitted and ACK
should be received
0xB8 Data byte in TWDR has
been transmitted; ACK has
been received
Load data byte or
Load data byte
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
1
Last data byte will be transmitted and
NOT ACK should be received
Data byte will be transmitted and
ACK should be received
0xC0 Data byte in TWDR has
been transmitted; NOT
ACK has been received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; no recognition of own SLA or
GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE =
“1”
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; no recognition of own SLA or
GCA; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE =
“1”; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
0xC8 Last data byte in TWDR
has been transmitted
(TWEA = “0”); ACK has
been received
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action or
No TWDR action
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; no recognition of own SLA or
GCA
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE =
“1”
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; no recognition of own SLA or
GCA; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
Switched to the not addressed Slave
mode; own SLA will be recognized;
GCA will be recognized if TWGCE =
“1”; a START condition will be
transmitted when the bus becomes
free
430
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 25-18. Formats and States in the Slave Transmitter Mode
S SLA R A DATA A
$A8 $B8
A
$B0
Reception of the own
slave address and one or
more data bytes
Last data byte transmitted.
Switched to not addressed
slave (TWEA = ’0’)
Arbitration lost as master
and addressed as slave
n
From master to slave
From slave to master
Any number of data bytes
and their associated acknowledge bits
This number (contained in TWSR) corresponds
to a defined state of the Two-Wire Serial Bus. The
prescaler bits are zero or masked to zero
P or SDATA
$C0
DATA A
A
$C8
P or SAll 1’s
A
25.7.5 Miscellaneous States
There are two status codes that do not correspond to a defined TWI state, see Table
25-7 below.
Status 0xF8 indicates that no relevant information is available because the TWINT Flag
is not set. This occurs between other states, and when the TWI is not involved in a
serial transfer.
Status 0x00 indicates that a bus error has occurred during a 2-wire Serial Bus transfer.
A bus error occurs when a START or STOP condition occurs at an illegal position in the
format frame. Examples of such illegal positions are during the serial transfer of an
address byte, a data byte, or an acknowledge bit. When a bus error occurs, TWINT is
set. To recover from a bus error, the TWSTO Flag must set and TWINT must be
cleared by writing a logic one to it. This causes the TWI to enter the not addressed
Slave mode and to clear the TWSTO Flag (no other bits in TWCR are affected). The
SDA and SCL lines are released, and no STOP condition is transmitted.
Table 25-7. Miscellaneous States
Status Code
(TWSR)
Prescaler
Bits are 0
Status of the 2-wire
Serial Bus and 2-wire
Serial Interface Hard-
ware
Application Software Response
Next Action Taken by TWI
Hardware
To/from TWDR
To TWCR
STA STO TWINT TWEA
0xF8 No relevant state
information available
TWDR action No TWCR action Wait or proceed current transfer
0x00 Bus error due to an illegal
START or STOP condition
No TWDR action 0 1 1 X Only the internal hardware is
affected, no STOP condition is sent
on the bus. In all cases, the bus is
released and TWSTO is cleared.
25.7.6 Combining Several TWI Modes
In some cases, several TWI modes must be combined in order to complete the desired
action. Consider for example reading data from a serial EEPROM. Typically, such a
transfer involves the following steps:
1. The transfer must be initiated.
2. The EEPROM must be instructed what location should be read.
431
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
3. The reading must be performed.
4. The transfer must be finished.
Note that data is transmitted both from Master to Slave and vice versa. The Master
must instruct the Slave what location it wants to read, requiring the use of the MT mode.
Subsequently, data must be read from the Slave, implying the use of the MR mode.
Thus, the transfer direction must be changed. The Master must keep control of the bus
during all these steps, and the steps should be carried out as an atomic operation. If
this principle is violated in a multi-master system, another Master can alter the data
pointer in the EEPROM between steps 2 and 3, and the Master will read the wrong data
location. Such a change in transfer direction is accomplished by transmitting a
REPEATED START between the transmission of the address byte and reception of the
data. After a REPEATED START, the Master keeps ownership of the bus. The following
figure shows the flow in this transfer.
Figure 25-19. Combining Several TWI Modes to Access a Serial EEPROM
Master Transmitter Master Receiver
S = START Rs = REPEATED START P = STOP
Transmitted from master to slave Transmitted from slave to master
S SLA+W A ADDRESS A Rs SLA+R A DATA A P
25.8 Multi-master Systems and Arbitration
If multiple masters are connected to the same bus, transmissions may be initiated
simultaneously by one or more of them. The TWI standard ensures that such situations
are handled in such a way that one of the masters will be allowed to proceed with the
transfer, and that no data will be lost in the process. An example of an arbitration
situation is depicted below, where two masters are trying to transmit data to a Slave
Receiver.
Figure 25-20. An Arbitration Example
Device 1
MASTER
TRANSMITTER
Device 2
MASTER
TRANSMITTER
Device 3
SLAVE
RECEIVER
Device n
SDA
SCL
........ R1 R2
DEVDD
Several different scenarios may arise during arbitration, as described below:
• Two or more masters are performing identical communication with the same Slave.
In this case, neither the Slave nor any of the masters will know about the bus
contention.
• Two or more masters are accessing the same Slave with different data or direction
bit. In this case, arbitration will occur, either in the READ/WRITE bit or in the data
bits. The masters trying to output a one on SDA while another Master outputs a zero
432
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
will lose the arbitration. Losing masters will switch to not addressed Slave mode or
wait until the bus is free and transmit a new START condition, depending on
application software action.
• Two or more masters are accessing different slaves. In this case, arbitration will
occur in the SLA bits. Masters trying to output a one on SDA while another Master
outputs a zero will lose the arbitration. Masters losing arbitration in SLA will switch to
Slave mode to check if they are being addressed by the winning Master. If
addressed, they will switch to SR or ST mode, depending on the value of the
READ/WRITE bit. If they are not being addressed, they will switch to not addressed
Slave mode or wait until the bus is free and transmit a new START condition,
depending on application software action.
This is summarized in Figure 25-21 below. Possible status values are given in circles.
Figure 25-21. Possible Status Codes Caused by Arbitration
Own
Address / General Call
received
Arbitration lost in SLA
TWI bus will be released and not addressed slave mode will be entered
A START condition will be transmitted when the bus becomes free
No
Arbitration lost in Data
Direction
Yes
Write Data byte will be received and NOT ACK will be returned
Data byte will be received and ACK will be returned
Last data byte will be transmitted and NOT ACK should be received
Data byte will be transmitted and ACK should be received
Read
B0
68/78
38
SLASTART Data STOP
25.9 Register Description
25.9.1 TWBR – TWI Bit Rate Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($B8) TWBR7:0 TWBR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The SCL period is controlled by settings in the TWI Bit Rate Register (TWBR) and the
Prescaler bits in the TWI Status Register (TWSR). Slave operation does not depend on
Bit Rate or Prescaler settings, but the CPU clock frequency in the Slave must be at
least 16 times higher than the SCL frequency.
• Bit 7:0 – TWBR7:0 - TWI Bit Rate Register Value
The TWBR register selects the division factor for the bit rate generator. The bit rate
generator is a frequency divider which generates the SCL clock frequency in the Master
modes. See section "Bit Rate Generator Unit" for calculating bit rates.
433
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
25.9.2 TWCR – TWI Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($BC) TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN Res TWIE TWCR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW R RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The TWCR is used to control the operation of the TWI. It is used to enable the TWI, to
initiate a Master access by applying a START condition to the bus, to generate a
Receiver acknowledge, to generate a stop condition, and to control halting of the bus
while the data to be written to the bus are put into the TWDR. It also indicates a write
collision if data writing to TWDR is attempted while the register is inaccessible.
• Bit 7 – TWINT - TWI Interrupt Flag
This bit is set by hardware when the TWI has finished its current job and expects
application software response. If the I-bit in SREG and TWIE in TWCR are set, the
MCU will jump to the TWI Interrupt Vector. While the TWINT Flag is set, the SCL low
period is stretched. The TWINT Flag must be cleared by software by writing a logic one
to it. Note that this flag is not automatically cleared by hardware when executing the
interrupt routine. Also note that clearing this flag starts the operation of the TWI. So all
accesses to the TWI Address Register (TWAR), TWI Status Register (TWSR) and TWI
Data Register (TWDR) must be complete before clearing this flag.
• Bit 6 – TWEA - TWI Enable Acknowledge Bit
The TWEA bit controls the generation of the acknowledge pulse. If the TWEA bit is
written to one, the ACK pulse is generated on the TWI bus if the following conditions
are met: 1. The devices own slave address has been received; 2. A general call has
been received, while the TWGCE bit in the TWAR is set. 3. A data byte has been
received in Master Receiver or Slave Receiver mode. By writing the TWEA bit to zero,
the device can be virtually disconnected from the 2-wire Serial Bus temporarily.
Address recognition can then be resumed by writing the TWEA bit to one again.
• Bit 5 – TWSTA - TWI START Condition Bit
The application writes the TWSTA bit to one when it desires to become a Master on the
2-wire Serial Bus. The TWI hardware checks if the bus is available and generates a
START condition on the bus if it is free. However, if the bus is not free, the TWI waits
until a STOP condition is detected and then generates a new START condition to claim
the bus Master status. TWSTA must be cleared by software when the START condition
has been transmitted.
• Bit 4 – TWSTO - TWI STOP Condition Bit
Writing the TWSTO bit to one in Master mode will generate a STOP condition on the 2-
wire Serial Bus. When the STOP condition is executed on the bus, the TWSTO bit is
cleared automatically. In Slave mode, setting the TWSTO bit can be used to recover
from an error condition. This will not generate a STOP condition, but the TWI returns to
a well-defined not-addressed Slave mode and releases the SCL and SDA lines to a
high impedance state.
• Bit 3 – TWWC - TWI Write Collision Flag
The TWWC bit is set when attempting to write to the TWI Data Register TWDR when
TWINT is low. This flag is cleared by writing the TWDR Register when TWINT is high.
• Bit 2 – TWEN - TWI Enable Bit
The TWEN bit enables TWI operation and activates the TWI interface. When TWEN is
written to one, the TWI takes control over the I/O ports connected to the SCL and SDA
434
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
pins enabling the slew-rate limiters and spike filters. If this bit is written to zero, the TWI
is switched off and all TWI transmissions are terminated regardless of any ongoing
operation.
• Bit 1 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 0 – TWIE - TWI Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the TWI interrupt request will
be activated for as long as the TWINT Flag is high.
25.9.3 TWSR – TWI Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($B9) TWS7 TWS6 TWS5 TWS4 TWS3 Res TWPS1 TWPS0 TWSR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW R RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:3 – TWS4:0 - TWI Status
These 5 bits reflect the status of the TWI logic and the 2-wire Serial Bus. The different
status codes for both transmitter and receiver mode are described in the following table.
Note that the value read from TWSR contains both the 5-bit status value and the 2-bit
prescaler value. The application designer should mask the prescaler bits to zero when
checking the Status bits. This makes status checking independent of prescaler setting.
This approach is used in this datasheet, unless otherwise noted.
Table 25-8 TWS Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
TWS4:0 0x00 Bus error due to illegal START or STOP
condition.
0x08 A START condition has been transmitted.
0x10 A repeated START condition has been
transmitted.
0x18 SLA+W has been transmitted; ACK has
been received.
0x20 SLA+W has been transmitted; NOT ACK has
been received.
0x28 Data byte has been transmitted; ACK has
been received.
0x30 Data byte has been transmitted; NOT ACK
has been received.
0x38 Arbitration lost in SLA+W or data bytes
(Transmitter); Arbitration lost in SLA+R or
NOT ACK bit (Receiver).
0x40 SLA+R has been transmitted; ACK has been
received.
0x48 SLA+R has been transmitted; NOT ACK has
been received.
0x50 Data byte has been received; ACK has been
435
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
returned.
0x58 Data byte has been received; NOT ACK has
been returned.
0x60 Own SLA+W has been received; ACK has
been returned.
0x68 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as Master; own
SLA+W has been received; ACK has been
returned.
0x70 General call address has been received;
ACK has been returned.
0x78 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as Master;
general call address has been received;
ACK has been returned.
0x80 Previously addressed with own SLA+W; data
has been received; ACK has been returned.
0x88 Previously addressed with own SLA+W; data
has been received; NOT ACK has been
returned.
0x90 Previously addressed with general call; data
has been received; ACK has been returned.
0x98 Previously addressed with general call; data
has been received; NOT ACK has been
returned.
0xA0 A STOP condition or repeated START
condition has been received while still
addressed as Slave.
0xA8 Own SLA+R has been received; ACK has
been returned.
0xB0 Arbitration lost in SLA+R/W as Master; own
SLA+R has been received; ACK has been
returned.
0xB8 Data byte in TWDR has been transmitted;
ACK has been received.
0xC0 Data byte in TWDR has been transmitted;
NO ACK has been received.
0xC8 Last data byte in TWDR has been
transmitted (TWEA = 0); ACK has been
received.
0xF8 No relevant state information available;
TWINT = 0.
• Bit 2 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 1:0 – TWPS1:0 - TWI Prescaler Bits
These bits can be read and written and control the bit rate of the prescaler.
Table 25-9 TWPS Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
TWPS1:0 0x00 1
436
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
0x01 4
0x02 16
0x03 64
25.9.4 TWDR – TWI Data Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($BB) TWD7 TWD6 TWD5 TWD4 TWD3 TWD2 TWD1 TWD0 TWDR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
In Transmit mode, TWDR contains the next byte to be transmitted. In Receive mode,
the TWDR contains the last byte received. It is writable while the TWI is not in the
process of shifting a byte. This occurs when the TWI Interrupt Flag (TWINT) is set by
hardware. Note that the Data Register cannot be initialized by the user before the first
interrupt occurs. The data in TWDR remains stable as long as TWINT is set. While data
is shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously shifted in. TWDR always contains the
last byte present on the bus, except after a wake up from a sleep mode by the TWI
interrupt. In this case, the contents of TWDR is undefined. In the case of a lost bus
arbitration, no data is lost in the transition from Master to Slave. Handling of the ACK bit
is automatically controlled by the TWI logic. The CPU cannot access the ACK bit
directly.
• Bit 7:0 – TWD7:0 - TWI Data Register Byte
25.9.5 TWAR – TWI (Slave) Address Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($BA) TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE
TWAR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The TWAR should be loaded with the 7-bit Slave address (in the seven most significant
bits of TWAR) to which the TWI will respond when programmed as a Slave Transmitter
or Receiver. This register is not needed in the Master modes. In multi-master systems
TWAR must be set in Masters which can be addressed as Slaves by other Masters.
The LSB of TWAR is used to enable the recognition of the general call address (0x00).
There is an associated address comparator that looks for the slave address (or general
call address if enabled) in the received serial address. If a match is found, an interrupt
request is generated.
• Bit 7:1 – TWA6:0 - TWI (Slave) Address
These bits contain the TWI address operated as a Slave device.
• Bit 0 – TWGCE - TWI General Call Recognition Enable Bit
If set, this bit enables the recognition of a General Call given over the 2-wire Serial Bus.
437
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
25.9.6 TWAMR – TWI (Slave) Address Mask Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($BD) TWAM6 TWAM5 TWAM4 TWAM3 TWAM2 TWAM1 TWAM0 Res TWAMR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:1 – TWAM6:0 - TWI Address Mask
The TWAMR can be loaded with a 7-bit Slave Address mask. Each of the bits in
TWAMR can mask (disable) the corresponding address bit in the TWI Address Register
(TWAR). If the mask bit is set to one then the address match logic ignores the compare
between the incoming address bit and the corresponding bit in TWAR.
• Bit 0 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
438
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
26 AC – Analog Comparator
The Analog Comparator compares the input values on the positive pin AIN0 and
negative pin AIN1. When the voltage on the positive pin AIN0 is higher than the voltage
on the negative pin AIN1, the Analog Comparator output, ACO, is set. The comparator’s
output can be set to trigger the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture function. In addition, the
comparator can trigger a separate interrupt, exclusive to the Analog Comparator. The
user can select Interrupt triggering on comparator output rise, fall or toggle. A block
diagram of the comparator and its surrounding logic is shown in Figure 26-1 below.
The Power Reduction ADC bit PRADC in PRR0 (see "PRR0 – Power Reduction
Register0" on page 195) must be disabled by writing a logical zero to be able to use the
ADC input multiplexer.
Figure 26-1. Analog Comparator Block Diagram
Note: 1. See Table 26-1 below.
2. Refer to Figure 1-1 on page 2 and Table 14-9 en page 228 for Analog Comparator
pin placement.
26.1 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input
It is possible to select any of the ADC7:0 pins as the negative input of the Analog
Comparator. The ADC multiplexer is used to select this input and consequently the
ADC must be switched off to utilize this feature. If the Analog Comparator Multiplexer
Enable bit (ACME in ADCSRB) is set and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is
zero), MUX5 and MUX2:0 in ADMUX select the input pin to replace the negative input
to the Analog Comparator, as shown in Table 26-1 below. If ACME is cleared or ADEN
is set, AIN1 is applied to the negative input to the Analog Comparator.
Table 26-1. Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input
ACME ADEN MUX5 MUX2:0 Analog Comparator Negative Input
0 x x xxx AIN1
1 1 x xxx AIN1
1 0 0 000 ADC0
1 0 0 001 ADC1
1 0 0 010 ADC2
1 0 0 011 ADC3
1 0 0 100 ADC4
439
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
ACME ADEN MUX5 MUX2:0 Analog Comparator Negative Input
1 0 0 101 ADC5
1 0 0 110 ADC6
1 0 0 111 ADC7
26.2 Register Description
26.2.1 ACSR – Analog Comparator Control And Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$30 ($50) ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 ACSR
Read/Write RW RW R RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 NA 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – ACD - Analog Comparator Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the power to the Analog Comparator is switched off.
This bit can be set at any time to turn off the Analog Comparator. This will reduce power
consumption in Active and Idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the Analog
Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an
interrupt can occur when the bit is changed.
• Bit 6 – ACBG - Analog Comparator Bandgap Select
When this bit is set, a fixed bandgap reference voltage connects to the positive input of
the Analog Comparator. When this bit is cleared, AIN0 is applied to the positive input of
the Analog Comparator. When the bandgap reference is used as the input of the
Analog Comparator, it will take a certain time for the voltage to stabilize. If not
stabilized, the first comparison may give a wrong value. See section "Internal Voltage
Reference" for details.
• Bit 5 – ACO - Analog Compare Output
The output of the analog comparator is synchronized and then directly connected to
ACO. The synchronization introduces a delay of 1-2 clock cycles.
• Bit 4 – ACI - Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag
This bit is set by hardware when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode
defined by ACIS1 and ACIS0. The Analog Comparator Interrupt routine is executed if
the ACIE bit is set and the I-bit in SREG is set. ACI is cleared by hard-ware when
executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by
writing a logic one to the flag.
• Bit 3 – ACIE - Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable
When the ACIE bit is written logic one and the I-bit in the Status Register is set, the
analog comparator interrupt is activated. When written logic zero, the interrupt is
disabled.
• Bit 2 – ACIC - Analog Comparator Input Capture Enable
When written logic one, this bit enables the input capture function in Timer/Counter1 to
be triggered by the Analog Comparator. The comparator output is in this case directly
connected to the input capture front-end logic, making the comparator utilize the noise
canceler and edge select features of the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture interrupt. When
written logic zero, no connection between the Analog Comparator and the input capture
function exists. To make the comparator trigger the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture
interrupt, the ICIE1 bit in the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK1) must be set.
440
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 1:0 – ACIS1:0 - Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select
These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the Analog Comparator
interrupt. The different settings are shown in the following table. When changing the
ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing its
Interrupt Enable bit in the ACSR Register. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when the
bits are changed.
Table 26-2 ACIS Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
ACIS1:0 0x00 Interrupt on Toggle
0x01 Reserved
0x02 Interrupt on Falling Edge
0x03 Interrupt on Rising Edge
26.2.2 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($7B) ACME ADCSRB
Read/Write RW
Initial Value 0
• Bit 6 – ACME - Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable
When this bit is written logic one and the ADC is switched off (ADEN in ADCSRA is
zero), the ADC multiplexer defines the negative input of the Analog Comparator. When
this bit is written logic zero, AIN1 is applied to the negative input of the Analog
Comparator. For a detailed description of this bit, see section "Analog Comparator
Multiplexed Input".
26.2.3 DIDR1 – Digital Input Disable Register 1
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($7F) AIN1D AIN0D DIDR1
Read/Write RW RW
Initial Value 0 0
• Bit 1 – AIN1D - AIN1 Digital Input Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the AIN1 pin is disabled. The
corresponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an
analog signal is applied to the AIN1 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed,
this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input
buffer.
• Bit 0 – AIN0D - AIN0 Digital Input Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the AIN0 pin is disabled. The
corresponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an
analog signal is applied to the AIN0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed,
this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in the digital input
buffer.
441
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
442
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
27 ADC – Analog to Digital Converter
27.1 Features
• 10-bit Resolution
• Differential Non-Linearity is less than ± 0.5 LSB
• 2 LSB Integral Non-Linearity
• 3 - 240 µs Conversion Time
• Up to 330 kSPS (Up to 570 kSPS with 8-bit Resolution)
• 8 Multiplexed Single Ended Input Channels
• 11 Differential Input Channels
• 2 Differential Input Channels with an Optional Gain of 10x and 200x
• Internal Linear Temperature Sensor
• Supply Voltage (VEVDD) Measurement
• Optional Left Adjustment for ADC Result Readout
• 0 - VAVDD ADC Input Voltage Range
• 0 - VEVDD Differential ADC Input Voltage Range
• Selectable 1.5V, 1.6V or VAVDD ADC Reference Voltage
• Free Running or Single Conversion Mode
• Interrupt on ADC Conversion Complete
• Sleep Mode Noise Canceller
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 features a 10-bit successive approximation ADC.
The ADC is connected to an 8-channel Analog Multiplexer which allows eight single-
ended voltage inputs constructed from the pins of Port F. The single-ended voltage
inputs refer to 0V (AVSS).
The device also supports multiple differential voltage input combinations. Two of the
differential inputs (ADC1 & ADC0 and ADC3 & ADC2) are equipped with a
programmable gain stage, providing amplification steps of 0 dB (1x), 20 dB (10x) or 46
dB (200x) on the differential input voltage before the A/D conversion. The differential
input channels are constructed of pairs out of the 8 single-ended inputs. They share a
common negative terminal (ADC0, ADC1 or ADC2), while most of the other ADC inputs
can be selected as the positive input terminal. If 1x or 10x gain is used, 8 bit resolution
can be expected. If 200x gain is used, 6 bit resolution can be expected.
The ADC contains a Sample and Hold circuit which ensures that the input voltage to the
ADC is held at a constant level during conversion. A block diagram of the ADC is shown
in Figure 27-1 on page 443.
The analog components of the ADC are supplied from the analog supply voltage AVDD.
AVDD is generated from EVDD by an internal voltage generator. The logic part of the
ADC is supplied from the digital supply voltage DVDD. DVDD is generated from
DEVDD also by an internal voltage generator.
Internal reference voltages of nominally 1.5V, 1.6V or AVDD (1.8V) are provided on-
chip. The 1.6V reference is calibrated to ± 1 LSB during manufacturing. The reference
voltage can be monitored at the AREF pin. Additional de-coupling capacitance at AREF
is not required. A high capacitive loading of AREF will de-stabilize the internal reference
voltage generation. An external reference voltage in the range of 0 < VAREF,EXT ≤ VAVDD
may be used but must be supplied with a very low impedance.
443
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The Power Reduction ADC bit, PRADC (see "PRR0 – Power Reduction Register0" on
page 195) must be disabled by writing a logical zero to enable the ADC.
Figure 27-1. Analog to Digital Converter Block Schematic
ADFR
ADSC
ADIF
ADIE
ADPS[2:0]
ADIF
ADEN
ADC[9:0]
ADSUT[4:0]
ADTHT[1:0]
ADLAR
MUX[4:0]
MUX[5]
REFS[1:0]
CHANNEL SELECTION
DIFF / GAIN SELECT
ACCH
27.2 Operation
The ADC converts an analog input voltage to a 10-bit digital value through successive
approximation. The minimum value represents 0V (conversion result 0x000) and the
maximum value in single ended mode represents the reference voltage minus 1 LSB
(conversion result 0x3FF). The reference voltage can be measured at the AREF pin.
The internal, generated reference voltage can have the values 1.5V, 1.6V or AVDD
where the 1.6V has the highest absolute accuracy. The reference voltage is selected by
writing to the REFSn bits in the ADMUX Register. An external reference voltage can
also be selected. Such an external voltage must be supplied with a very low impedance
RAREF,EXT (see "ADC Characteristics" on page 558). The load current IL,AREF (see "ADC
Characteristics" on page 558) seen by the external source is code dependent and
444
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
changes in the course of the successive approximation process (load current steps).
The internal voltage reference (except AVDD) must not be decoupled by an external
capacitor. Adding unnecessary external capacitance at the AREF pin will cause instable
operation of the internal reference voltage buffer and will not improve noise immunity.
The analog input channel is selected by writing to the MUX bits in ADMUX and
ADCSRB. Any of the ADC input pins, as well as AVSS and a fixed bandgap voltage
reference can be selected as single ended inputs to the ADC. A choice of ADC input
pins can be selected as positive and negative inputs to the differential amplifier.
Furthermore the temperature sensor and the DRT voltages of SRAM2 can also be
processed with the ADC.
If differential channels are selected, the amplified voltage difference between the
selected input channel pair then becomes the input of the ADC. The respective pin
voltages for a differential measurement can be in the range from 0V to EVDD. In this
way it is possible to handle differential input voltages with a common mode value higher
than AVDD e.g. process a 50mV differential signal with a 2.5V common mode voltage.
If single ended channels are used, the gain amplifier is bypassed altogether. Any ADC
input voltage (single-ended or amplified-differential) exceeding AVDD will be internally
clamped to AVDD to avoid damaging the ADC circuitry. Note that the pin input current
will not increase if the clamp circuit is active.
The ADC is enabled by setting ADEN bit in ADCSRA. Voltage reference and input
channel selections will not go into effect until ADEN is set. The ADC does not consume
power when ADEN is cleared. It is required to disable the ADC before entering power
saving sleep modes.
The ADC generates a 10-bit result which is presented in the ADC Data Registers,
ADCH and ADCL. By default, the result is presented right adjusted, but can optionally
be presented left adjusted by setting the ADLAR bit in ADMUX.
If the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision is required, it is sufficient to
read ADCH. Otherwise, ADCL must be read first, then ADCH, to ensure that the
content of the Data Registers belongs to the same conversion. Once ADCL is read,
ADC access to Data Registers is blocked. This means that if ADCL has been read, and
a conversion completes before ADCH is read, neither register is updated and the result
from the conversion is lost. When ADCH is read, ADC access to the ADCH and ADCL
Registers is re-enabled.
The ADC has its own interrupt which can be triggered when a conversion completes.
When ADC access to the Data Registers is prohibited between reading of ADCH and
ADCL, the interrupt will trigger even if the result is lost.
27.3 ADC Start-Up
After the ADC is enabled by setting ADEN, it will go through a start-up phase. The
analog supply voltage AVDD is turned on. It takes time tAVREG (see "Power Management
Electrical Characteristics" on page 554) µs for AVDD to stabilize. A stable AVDD
voltage is indicated by the AVDDOK bit in ADCSRB. After this the ADC and, for
differential input channels also the gain amplifier, is powered up. The duration of this
phase depends on the ADC clock period and the configuration of the Start-Up and
Track-And–Hold Time bits, ADSUT and ADTHT in ADCSRC. For details about the start-
up timing refer to section "Pre-scaling and Conversion Timing" on page 446.
During the ADC start-up phase a conversion start can already be requested by writing a
logical one to the ADC Start Conversion bit, ADSC in ADCSRA. In this case a
conversion is started directly after the start-up phase. During the start-up phase it is still
445
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
possible to change the analog input channel until the AVDDOK bit changes to logic one
or, if the AVDDOK bit is one, until the ADSC bit is set.
27.4 Starting a Conversion
A single conversion is started by writing a logical one to the ADC Start Conversion bit,
ADSC. This bit stays high as long as the conversion is in progress and will be cleared
by hardware when the conversion is completed. If a different data channel is selected
while a conversion is in progress, the ADC will finish the current conversion before
performing the channel change.
Alternatively, a conversion can be triggered automatically by various sources. Auto
Triggering is enabled by setting the ADC Auto Trigger Enable bit, ADATE in ADCSRA.
The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB
(See description of the ADTS bits for a list of the trigger sources). When a positive edge
occurs on the selected trigger signal, the ADC prescaler is reset and a conversion is
started. This provides a method of starting conversions at fixed intervals. If the trigger
signal still is set when the conversion completes, a new conversion will not be started. If
another positive edge occurs on the trigger signal during conversion, the edge will be
ignored. Note that an Interrupt Flag will be set even if the specific interrupt is disabled or
the Global Interrupt Enable bit in SREG is cleared. A conversion can thus be triggered
without causing an interrupt. However, the Interrupt Flag must be cleared in order to
trigger a new conversion at the next interrupt event.
Figure 27-2. ADC Auto Trigger Logic
ADSC
ADIF
SOURCE 1
SOURCE n
ADTS[2:0]
CONVERSION
LOGIC
PRESCALER
START CLKADC
.
.
.
.EDGE
DETECTOR
ADATE
Using the ADC Interrupt Flag as a trigger source makes the ADC start a new
conversion as soon as the ongoing conversion has finished. The ADC then operates in
Free Running mode, constantly sampling and updating the ADC Data Register. The first
conversion must be started by writing a logical one to the ADSC bit in ADCSRA. In this
mode the ADC will perform successive conversions independently of whether the ADC
Interrupt Flag, ADIF is cleared or not.
If Auto Triggering is enabled, single conversions can be started by writing ADSC in
ADCSRA to one. ADSC can also be used to determine if a conversion is in progress.
The ADSC bit will be read as one during a conversion, independently of how the
conversion was started.
446
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
27.5 Pre-scaling and Conversion Timing
27.5.1 Prescaler
By default, the successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency
between 50 kHz and 4 MHz. If a lower resolution than 10 bits is needed, the input clock
frequency to the ADC can be as high as 8 MHz to get a higher sample rate. For
differential input channels the ADC clock speed is restricted to a maximum of 2 MHz.
Figure 27-3. ADC Prescaler
7-BIT ADC PRESCALER
ADC CLOCK SOURCE
CK
ADPS0
ADPS1
ADPS2
CK/128
CK/2
CK/4
CK/8
CK/16
CK/32
CK/64
Reset
ADEN
START
The ADC module contains a prescaler, which generates an acceptable ADC clock
frequency from any CPU frequency above 100 kHz. The pre-scaling is set by the ADPS
bits in ADCSRA. The prescaler starts counting from the moment when the ADC is
enabled. The prescaler keeps running for as long as the ADEN bit is set, and is
continuously reset when ADEN is low.
Note: 1. If the ADC prescaler value is changed while ADCEN is high then the resulting
start-up and track-and-hold times may be incorrect. These timings are set defined
by the ADSUT and ADTHT bits in register ADCSRC. Change ADC prescaler only
when ADC is disabled (ADEN=0).
27.5.2 Start-Up Timing
The ADC is enabled by setting the ADEN bit in ADCSRA. First the analog voltage
regulator is powered up which takes tAVREG (see "Power Management Electrical
Characteristics" on page 554). A stable AVDD is indicated by the AVDDOK bit in
ADCSRB.
After AVDD has stabilized, the ADC is started. The ADC start-up time has a length of
tADSU and can be adjusted by the Start-Up time bits ADSUT5:0 in ADCSRC. If
differential input channels are used, then an additional initialization period tAINIT is
required by the gain amplifier. This period is configured by the Track-And-Hold Time
bits, ADTHT1:0 in ADCSRC. ADSUT5:0 and ADTHT1:0 are fixed numbers of ADC
clock cycles and can be setup for different ADC clock speeds.
The minimum required ADC start-up time is 20 µs.
For a summary of start-up times and sequences see Table 27-1 on page 447, Table
27-2 on page 447, Figure 27-4 on page 447 and Figure 27-5 on page 447.
447
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 27-1. Start-Up Time, Single Ended Channels
Parameter
Duration in ADC Clock Cycles
ADC Start-Up Time tADSU 4(ADSUT+1), minimum 20 µs
Table 27-2. Start-Up Time, Differential Channels
Parameter
Duration in ADC Clock Cycles
ADC Start-Up Time tADSU 4(ADSUT+1), minimum 20 µs
Gain Amplifier Initialization Time tAINIT (1) 2(ADTHT+3)
Note: 1. Time tAINIT is 2(ADTHT+2) for ATmega128RFA1.
Figure 27-4. ADC Timing Diagram, Start-Up for Single Ended Channels
A D C C lo c k
A D E N
A D S C
A V D D O K
A D IF
A D C H
A D C L
A D C
S ta rt-U p
tA V P U tA D S U
M U X a nd R E F S U pd a te
1 1 T A D C _ C L K
C o n v e rs io n
A V D D
P o w e r - U p
S i g n a n d M S B o f R es u lt
L S B o f R e s u lt
S a m p le
& H o ld
C o n v e r s io n
C o m p le te
Figure 27-5. ADC Timing Diagram, Start-Up for Differential Channels
A D C C lo c k
A D E N
A D S C
A V D D O K
A D IF
A D C H
A D C L
A D C
S t a r t-U p
tA V P U tA D S U
M U X a n d R E F S U p d a te
1 1 T A D C _ C L K
C o n v e r s io n
A V D D
P o w e r - U p
S ig n a n d M S B
L S B o f R e s u lt
S a m p le
& H o ld
C o n v e r s io n
C o m p l e te
A m p l if ie r
In it
tA IN I T
All bits of register ADCSRC are single buffered (2) through a temporary register to
which the CPU has random access. This ensures that start-up time and track-and-hold
time changes only take place at a safe point during the conversion. This mechanism is
identical to changing an ADC channel of reference voltage, see section "Changing
Channel or Reference Selection" on page 449 for details.
Note: 2. ADCSRC is not buffered in ATmega128RFA1. Therefore with these devices the
start-up time and the track-and-hold time must not change while a conversion is in
progress.
27.5.3 Conversion Timing
The delay from requesting a conversion start by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSRA to the
moment where the sample-and-hold takes place is fixed. The same fixed delay also
applies for auto triggered conversions. In this case three additional CPU clock cycles
are used for the trigger event synchronization logic. The delay is different for single-
448
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
ended and differential channels. A summary is given in Table 27-3 below. All
conversions take 11 ADC clock cycles.
When a conversion is complete, the result is written to the ADC Data Registers, and
ADIF is set. In Single Conversion mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The software
may then set ADSC again, and a new conversion will be initiated at the earliest after the
following tracking phase. The tracking phase is required after each conversion. Its
duration can be adjusted according to the ADC clock speed by the ADTHT bits in
ADCSRC and is different for single-ended and differential channels. For details see
Table 27-4 below.
In Free Running mode, a new conversion will be started immediately after the tracking
phase of the previous conversion while ADSC remains high. The calculation of the
resulting sample rate is given in Table 27-5 below.
For timing diagrams of single and auto triggered and free running conversions see
Figure 27-6 below to Figure 27-8 on page 449.
Table 27-3. Conversion Start Delay
Channel Delay from Conversion Start Request to Sample & Hold tSCSMP
Single-Ended (1) 2 CPU clock cycles
Differential 2 ADC clock cycles
Note: 1. The time tCSMP is between 0…4 CPU clock cycles depending on the ADPS
configuration of register ADCSRA for the ATmega128RFA1
Table 27-4. Tracking Time
Channel
Tracking Phase Duration tTRCK in ADC Clock Cycles
Single-Ended ADTHT+1, minimum 500 ns
Differential 2ADTHT+3
Table 27-5. Sample Rate in Free Running Mode
Channel
Sample Rate in ADC Clock Cycles
Single-Ended ADTHT+12
Differential 2ADTHT+14
Figure 27-6. ADC Timing Diagram, Single Conversion
A D C C lock
A D E N
A D S C
A D IF
A D C H
A D C L
M U X an d RE F S U p da te
11 T A D C _ C L K tT R C K
T rac kin gC o nv ersio n
tS C S M P
S ign an d M S B o f R e s ult
LS B o f R e s u lt
M U X a n d R E F S U p da te
C on versio n
C o m p le te
tS C S M P
C on versio n
P re s ca le r Re se t
and
S a m ple & H o ld
P res cale r
R e s e t
and
S am p le
& H o ld
449
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 27-7. ADC Timing Diagram, Auto Triggered Conversion
A D C C lock
A D E N
T rigger S o u rce
A D IF
A D C H
A D C L
M U X and R EF S U pda te
11 TA D C _ C L K tT R C K
T r ac ki n gC o n ve r s io n
tS C S M P
Sign and M S B of R esult
LS B of R es u lt
M U X and RE F S U p d a te
C on ve rsio n
C om p le te
tS C S M P
C o nv ers ion
Pres c a le r R e se t
and
Sa m ple & H old
A D A T E
P re sca le r
R ese t
and
S a m p le
& H o ld
Figure 27-8. ADC Timing Diagram, Free Running Conversion
A D C C loc k
A D T S [ 2:0 ]
A D S C
A D IF
A D C H
A D C L
11 TA D C _ C L K tT R C K
T ra c k in gC o n v e rs io n
S ig n a n d M S B o f R e s u lt
L S B o f R es u lt
M U X a n d R E F S U p d a te
C o n v e rs io n
C om p le te S a m p le & H o ld
C on vers io n
0
11 TA D C _C LK
27.6 Changing Channel or Reference Selection
The MUXn and REFSn bits in the ADMUX and ADCSRB Register are single buffered
through a temporary register to which the CPU has random access. This ensures that
the channels and reference selection only takes place at a safe point during the
conversion. The channel and reference selection is continuously updated either during
the AVDD power-up phase or until a conversion is started by setting ADSC. After this
the channel and reference selection is locked to ensure a sufficient initialization and
sampling time for the ADC. Continuous updating of the channel selection resumes after
the conversion has completed (ADIF in ADCSRA is set).
If Auto Triggering is used, the exact time of the triggering event can be undetermined.
Special care must be taken when updating the ADMUX Register, in order to control
which conversion will be affected by the new settings.
If both ADATE and ADEN in the ADSCRA Register are written to one, an interrupt
event can occur at any time. If the ADMUX Register is changed in this period, the user
cannot tell if the next conversion is based on the old or the new settings. ADMUX can
be safely updated in the following ways:
1. When ADATE or ADEN is cleared.
2. During a conversion
3. After a conversion, before the Interrupt Flag used as trigger source is cleared.
When updating ADMUX in one of these conditions, the new settings will affect the next
A/D conversion.
450
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
After the channel or reference voltage selection is updated a settling time is required for
the ADC and the gain amplifier or the reference voltage to stabilize. When changing
the channel selection while the ADC is enabled the required settling phase is
automatically inserted by the ADC interface, see section "ADC Input Channels" below.
For consideration on changing the reference voltage selection please refer to section
"ADC Voltage Reference" on page 451.
27.6.1 Accessing the ADMUX Register
The channel selection bits MUX4:0 and MUX5 are located in two different register, the
ADMUX and the ADCSRB register. To ensure that changes go only into effect after
both register have been changed they are internally buffered (see Figure 27-9 below
and Figure 27-10 on page 451). The MUX5 bit has to written first followed by a write
access to the MUX4:0 bits which triggers the update of the internal buffer. If only the
MUX4:0 bits need to be modified then a write access to the MUX4:0 bits is sufficient.
27.6.2 ADC Input Channels
The ADC input channels can be changed while the ADC is running under the condition
that the previous channel was a single-ended one. Changing between differential
channels however requires that the ADC is disabled and enabled again to make the
ADC go through the initial start-up phase.
If changing from single-ended to single-ended or from single-ended to differential input
channels a settling phase is automatically inserted by the ADC interface logic after the
input channel is modified. The settling phase is required by the ADC and the gain
amplifier to stabilize. If a conversions start is requested during this settling phase, by
setting ADSC or by a trigger event in Auto Triggered mode then the conversion is
started only after the settling phase has completed.
Figure 27-9. ADC Timing Diagram, Changing MUXn after a Conversion
A D C C lo ck
A D IF
A D C H
A D C L
tA S E T
A D C S e ttlingC o n v e rsio n
S ign a nd M S B of R e s u lt
LS B o f R e s u lt
C o n v er sio n
C o m p le te
M U X 5 : 0
M U X 5 : 0 in te rnal
O ld C h a n n el N e w C h an n e l
N e w C h a n n elO ld C h a n n el
A D C In pu t
C h a n n el is
changed
tCHDLY N e w C o nv e rs ion
c an be s tarted
from h e re
In case the MUXn bits are altered during an ongoing conversion, the ADC input channel
is changed after the conversion has completed. MUXn changes occurring during the
tracking phase, which follows a conversion, will stop the tracking phase and the ADC
settling phase will be entered.
451
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 27-10. ADC Timing Diagram, Changing MUXn during a Conversion
A D C Cloc k
A D IF
A D C H
A D C L
11 TA D C _ C LK tA S E T
A D C Se ttlingC on ve rsion
S ign and M S B of R esu lt
LS B of R e su lt
C o nv ersio n
C om p lete
M U X 5 :0
M U X 5 :0 i nt e rn a l
O ld C hann el N ew C ha nn el
N ew C ha nn elO ld C hann el
AD C Inpu t
C ha nnel is
changed
tC H D LY N ew C on ve rsion
can be started
fro m here
In Free Running mode MUXn can also be modified. In this case the ADC input channel
is changed after the conversion end or from the subsequent tracking phase. As a
consequence the time from one conversion to the next is extended by the duration of
the ADC settling phase.
The ADC settling time tASET depends on the previous and the new channel and on the
configuration of the ADSUT and ADTHT bits as shown in Table 27-6 below. Additionally
a synchronization delay tCHDLY from 0.5 to 2 ADC Clock cycles is required between
changing the ADC input channel selection and the beginning of the settling phase. For
details see the timing diagrams Figure 27-9 on page 450 and Figure 27-10 above.
If the analog input signal encounters large variations it can be useful to manually reset
the ADC and the gain amplifier before starting a new conversion. To achieve this, the
settling phase can be forced without modifying MUXn by writing a logic one to the
Analog Channel Change bit ACCH in ADCSRB (2).
Table 27-6. Settling Time after Channel Changes
Channel Transition
Settling Time tASET in ADC Clock Cycles
To Single-Ended ADTHT+2
To Differential (1) 4(ADSUT+1) + 2(ADTHT+2)
Note: 1. Not allowed for ATmegaRF128RFA1 - changing to/between differential channels
requires the ADC to be disabled and enabled again.
2. The function of the ACCH bit is not available for ATmegaRF128RFA1.
27.6.3 ADC Voltage Reference
The reference voltage for the ADC (VREF) indicates the conversion range for the ADC.
Single ended channels that exceed VREF will result 0x3FF. VREF can be selected by the
REFSn bits in the ADMUX register as either AVDD (1.8V), internal 1.5V or 1.6V
reference or an external voltage at the AREF pin.
AVDD is connected to the ADC through a passive switch. The internal 1.5V and 1.6V
references are generated from a bandgap reference (VBG) through an amplifier. In
either case, the external AREF pin is directly connected to the ADC and the reference
voltage can be measured at the AREF pin with a high impedance voltmeter. When
using the internal 1.5V or 1.6V references no external de-coupling capacitor must be
connected to AREF. High capacitive loading will de-stabilize the internal voltage
amplifier. The 1.6V reference voltage is calibrated to an absolute accuracy of 1 LSB
during the manufacturing process.
452
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
If the user has a fixed voltage source connected to the AREF pin, the user may not use
the other reference voltage options in the application, as they will be shorted to the
external voltage. An external reference voltage must be supplied with a very low
impedance RAREF,EXT (see "ADC Characteristics" on page 558). The load current IL,AREF
(see "ADC Characteristics" on page 558) seen by the external source is code
dependent and changes (current steps) in the course of the successive approximation
process. If no external voltage is applied to the AREF pin, the user may switch between
AVDD, 1.5V and 1.6V as reference selection. For internal references a stable voltage is
indicated by the REFOK bit in ADCSRB.
Changes of the reference selection bits REFSn will take effect until a conversion start is
requested by setting ADSC in ADCSRA. After the reference voltage selection is
updated a settling time is required for the reference voltage to stabilize. This settling
phase is automatically inserted by the ADC interface when changing the reference
selection while the ADC is enabled.
Notes: 1. The ADC has to be disabled and enabled again for new reference selections in
ATmegaRF128RFA1.
2. Changing the reference voltage in Free Running mode will abort Free Running
mode. The newly selected reference voltage is available after the automatically
inserted settling phase, yet no new conversion will be started.
27.7 ADC Noise Canceller
The ADC features a noise canceller that enables conversion during sleep mode to
reduce noise induced from the CPU core and other I/O peripherals. The noise canceller
can be used with ADC Noise Reduction and Idle mode. To make use of this feature, the
following procedure should be used:
1. Make sure that the ADC is enabled and is not busy converting. Single Conversion
mode must be selected and the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt must be
enabled.
2. Enter ADC Noise Reduction mode (or Idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion
once the CPU has been halted.
3. If no other interrupts occur before the A/D conversion completes, the ADC interrupt
will wake up the CPU and execute the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt routine.
If another interrupt wakes up the CPU before the A/D conversion is complete, that
interrupt will be executed, and an ADC Conversion Complete interrupt request will
be generated when the A/D conversion completes. The CPU will remain in active
mode until a new sleep command is executed.
Note that the ADC will not be automatically turned off when entering other sleep modes
than Idle mode and ADC Noise Reduction mode. The user is advised to write zero to
ADEN before entering such sleep modes to avoid excessive power consumption.
27.7.1 Analog Input Circuitry
The analog input circuitry for single ended channels is illustrated in Figure 27-11 on
page 453. An analog source applied to ADCn is subjected to the pin capacitance and
input leakage of that pin, regardless of whether that channel is selected as input for the
ADC. When the channel is selected, the source must drive the S/H capacitor through
the series resistance (combined resistance in the input path).
The ADC is optimized for analog signals having output impedance ZOUT of
approximately 3 kΩ or less. If such a source is used, the sampling time will be
negligible. If a source with higher impedance is used, the correct sampling time will
453
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
depend on how much time is needed to charge the S/H capacitor, which can vary
widely. The user is recommended to only use low impedance sources with slowly
varying signals, since this minimizes the required charge transfer to the S/H capacitor.
The required tracking time (input sampling switch closed) tDTRCK to settle to within 1 LSB
can be estimated to
nskZt OUTDTRCK 097.0)2000/( ⋅+Ω=
for ZOUT > 3kΩ (worst case: maximum input step). A minimum tracking time of 500ns is
guaranteed by the conversion logic. Based on the ADC clock frequency the bits
ADTHT[1:0] of register ADCSRC allow the adjustment of the tracking time to the user’s
requirements.
Tracking time requirements should also be considered for the differential mode. The
input signal is sampled by the gain amplifier. The value of the input capacitance CS/H
depends on the selected gain (~7pF for 200x gain, <1pF otherwise). The tracking is
equal to 50% of the clock period of CKADC2. Hence in differential mode a slower clock
frequency is required for input sources with high impedance.
Figure 27-11. Analog Input Circuitry
A D C n
IIL
IIH
CS /H = 1 4 p F
VA V D D /2
2 k
Signal components higher than the Nyquist frequency (fADC/2) should not be present for
either kind of channels, to avoid distortion from unpredictable signal convolution. The
user is advised to remove high frequency components with a low-pass filter before
applying the signals as inputs to the ADC.
27.7.2 Analog Noise Canceling Techniques
Digital circuitry inside and outside the device generates EMI which might affect the
accuracy of analog measurements. If conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can
be reduced by applying the following techniques:
1. Keep analog signal paths as short as possible. Make sure analog tracks run over the
ground plane, and keep them well away from high-speed switching digital tracks.
2. Use the ADC noise canceller function to reduce induced noise from the CPU.
3. If any ADC port pins are used as digital outputs, it is essential that these do not
switch while a conversion is in progress.
27.7.3 Offset Compensation Schemes
The differential amplifier has a built-in offset cancellation circuitry that nulls the offset of
differential measurements as much as possible. The remaining offset in the analog path
can be measured directly by selecting the same channel for both differential inputs. This
offset residue can then be subtracted in software from the measurement results. The
offset on any channel can be reduced below one LSB using this kind of software based
offset correction.
454
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
27.7.4 Differential Amplifier Limitations
The programmable gain, differential amplifier (PGA) converts a differential input voltage
to a single-ended output voltage that is further processed with the 10 bit ADC. The
performance of the PGA is determined by the physical properties of its operational
amplifier:
• The noise of PGA adds to the random error of the ADC conversation result.
However the PGA noise enables the application of oversampling techniques to
recover or even increase the ADC resolution.
• The gain of the PGA falls if the output voltage of the operational amplifier
approaches the supply rails (AVSS) resulting in an increased non-linearity. Hence
for reasonable INL and DNL performance the input voltage range must be limited.
27.7.5 ADC Accuracy Definitions
An n-bit single-ended ADC converts a voltage linearly between 0V and VREF in 2n steps
(LSB’s). The lowest code is read as 0, and the highest code is read as 2n-1.
Several parameters describe the deviation from the ideal behavior:
• Offset: The deviation of the first transition (0x000 to 0x001) compared to the ideal
transition (at 0.5 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB.
Figure 27-12. Offset Error
Output Code
VREF Input Voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
Offset
Error
• Gain Error: After adjusting for offset, the Gain Error is found as the deviation of the
last transition (0x3FE to 0x3FF) compared to the ideal transition (at 1.5 LSB below
maximum). Ideal value: 0 LSB.
455
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 27-13. Gain Error
Output Code
VREF Input Voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
Gain
Error
• Integral Non-linearity (INL): After adjusting for offset and gain error, the INL is the
maximum deviation of an actual transition compared to an ideal transition for any
code. Ideal value: 0 LSB.
Figure 27-14. Integral Non-linearity (INL)
Output Code
VREF Input Voltage
Ideal ADC
Actual ADC
INL
• Differential Non-linearity (DNL): The maximum deviation of the actual code width
(the interval between two adjacent transitions) from the ideal code width (1 LSB).
Ideal value: 0 LSB.
456
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 27-15. Differential Non-linearity (DNL)
Output Code
0x3FF
0x000
0VREF Input Voltage
DNL
1 LSB
• Quantization Error: Due to the quantization of the input voltage into a finite number
of codes, a range of input voltages (1 LSB wide) will code to the same value. It is
always ±0.5 LSB.
• Absolute Accuracy: The maximum deviation of an actual (unadjusted) transition
compared to an ideal transition for any code. This is the compound effect of offset,
gain error, differential error, non-linearity, and quantization error. Ideal value: ±0.5
LSB.
27.8 ADC Conversion Result
After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in
the ADC Result Registers (ADCL, ADCH).
For single ended conversion, the result is
REF
IN
V
V
ADC 1024
⋅
=
where VIN is the voltage on the selected input pin and VREF the selected voltage
reference (see "Table 27-11" on page 462 and "Table 27-12" on page 463). 0x000
represents analog ground, and 0x3FF represents the selected reference voltage minus
one LSB.
If differential channels are used, the result is
(
)
REF
NEGPOS
V
GAINVV
ADC 512
⋅
⋅
−
=
where VPOS is the voltage on the positive input pin, VNEG the voltage on the negative
input pin, and VREF the selected voltage reference. The result is presented in two’s
complement form, from 0x200 (-512d) through 0x1FF (+511d). Note that if the user
wants to perform a quick polarity check of the result, it is sufficient to read the MSB of
the result (ADC9 in ADCH). If the bit is one, the result is negative, and if this bit is zero,
the result is positive. Figure 27-16 on page 457 shows the decoding of the differential
input range.
Table 27-7 below shows the resulting output codes if the differential input channel pair
(ADCn - ADCm) is selected with a gain of GAIN and a reference voltage of VREF.
457
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 27-16. Differential Measurement Range
0
Output code
0x1FF
0x000
VREF/GAIN Differential Input
voltage (Volts)
0x3FF
0x200
- VREF/GAIN
Table 27-7. Correlation Between Input Voltage and Output Codes
VADCn Read Code Corresponding Decimal Value
VADCm + VREF / GAIN 0x1FF 511
VADCm + 0.999 VREF / GAIN 0x1FF 511
VADCm + 0.998 VREF / GAIN 0x1FE 510
… … …
VADCm + 0.001 VREF / GAIN 0x001 1
VADCm 0x000 0
VADCm - 0.001 VREF / GAIN 0x3FF -1
… … …
VADCm - 0.999 VREF / GAIN 0x201 -511
VADCm - VREF / GAIN 0x200 -512
Example:
ADMUX = 0xED (ADC3 - ADC2, 10x gain, 1.6V reference, left adjusted result)
The voltage on ADC3 is 300 mV; the voltage on ADC2 is 425 mV.
ADCR = 512 * 10 * (300 - 425) / 1600 = -400 = 0x270.
ADCL will thus read 0x00, and ADCH will read 0x9C. Writing zero to ADLAR right
adjusts the result: ADCL = 0x70, ADCH = 0x02.
458
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
27.9 Internal Temperature Measurement
The on-chip temperature can be measured using a special setup of the A/D converter
inputs. The integrated temperature sensor provides a linear, medium-accurate voltage
proportional to the absolute temperature (in Kelvin). This voltage is first amplified with
the programmable gain amplifier and then processed with the A/D converter. A low
frequency of the conversion clock must be selected due to the nature of the input
signal.
The absolute accuracy of the temperature measurement is limited by manufacturing
tolerances, noise from supply and ground voltages and the exactness of the reference
voltage. One time calibration at room temperature can easily compensate this
distribution.
The resolution of the temperature reading can be improved (<1K) by averaging (using
float numbers) or decimation (based on integer numbers) of multiple A/D conversion
results. In this way the impact of noise is reduced (see measurement results
"Temperature Sensor" on page 585 and "Differential Amplifier Limitations" on page
454).
The following table summarizes the preferred setup of the temperature measurement:
Table 27-8. Recommended ADC Setup for Temperature Measurement
Parameter Register Recommended Setup
ADC Channel ADMUX,
ADCSRB
Select the Temperature Sensor, MUX4:0 = 01001;
MUX5 = 1;
ADC Clock ADCSRA Select a clock frequency of 500 kHz or lower;
VREF ADMUX Select the internal 1.6V reference voltage;
Start-up time ADCSRC Standard requirement of 20 µs is sufficient;
Tracking time ADCSRC Setting ADTHT = 0 is sufficient;
Assembly Code Example(1)
…
ldi r17,(1<<ADEN)+(4<<ADPS0) ; enable the ADC, prescaler = 16
sts ADCSRA, temp
wait_avdd_ok: ; wait for AVDD to come up
lds r17, ADCSRB
sbrs r17, AVDDOK
rjmp wait_avdd_ok
; set start-up time to 80us (500kHz ADC clock)
ldi r17, 10<<ADSUT0
sts ADCSRC, temp
ldi r17, 1<<MUX5
sts ADCSRB, temp ; set MUX5 before MUX4:1
; 1.6V reference voltage + temperature sensor channel
ldi r17, (3<<REFS0)+(9<<MUX0)
sts ADMUX, temp
wait_vref_ok:
lds r17, ADCSRB ; wait for reference voltage
sbrs r17, REFOK
rjmp wait_vref_ok
459
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
ldi run_cmd, (1<<ADEN)+(1<<ADSC)+(4<<ADPS0)
run_conversion:
sts ADCSRA, run_cmd
wait_adsc:
lds r17, ADCSRA
sbrc r17, ADSC ; flag cleared at conversion complete
rjmp wait_adsc
lds r18, ADCL ; measured temperature in ADCL and ADCH
lds r19, ADCH
…
The above Assembly code example enables the temperature measurement step by
step. Waiting for AVDDOK and REFOK is optional. The conversion will not start before
the two bits are set. The wait time can be extended if necessary or choose a longer
start-up time. An 8 MHz CPU clock is assumed.
C Code Example(1)
uint16_t adc_meastemp (void)
{
ADCSRC = 10<<ADSUT0; // set start-up time
ADCSRB = 1<<MUX5; // set MUX5 first
ADMUX = (3<<REFS0) + (9<<MUX0); // store new ADMUX, 1.6V AREF
// switch ADC on, set prescaler, start conversion
ADCSRA = (1<<ADEN) + (1<<ADSC) + (4<<ADPS0);
do
{} while( (ADCSRA & (1<<ADSC))); // wait for conversion end
ADCSRA = 0; // disable the ADC
return (ADC);
}
Notes: 1. See section "About Code Examples" on page 8.
The C Code Example fully relies on the integrated start-up mechanism of the A/D
converter. The accuracy can be increased by averaging and/or oversampling. In
addition a dummy conversion can be inserted before the first temperature measurement
is assessed.
The A/D conversion result ADCTEMP will always be a positive number. The ideal result
can be calculated when using the internal 1.6V reference voltage according to the
following equation:
CADCTEMP
°
⋅
+
=
/885.04.241
θ
Similar the Celsius-temperature θ can be extracted from the A/D conversion result with
this formula:
8.27213.1/
−
⋅
=
°
TEMP
ADCC
θ
Note that the above equations are only valid in the allowed operating temperature
range. The translation of the A/D measurement result to a Celsius-temperature value
can be easily achieved with a look-up table in software. The temperature sensor is
460
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
connected to a differential input channel with a gain of 10. The voltage offset error of
the differential signal processing can be corrected to the first order by using an
appropriate similar channel (e.g. MUX4:0=01000, MUX5=0, see Table 27-12 on page
463). The ADC result of this channel is then subtracted from the ADC result of the
temperature sensor. Offset errors are typically only +1 bit (ADC = 0x001) or -1 bit (ADC
= 0x3ff).
Note: 1. For the ATmega128RFA1 changing between the temperature sensor channel and
the channel for the offset error correction requires to disable the ADC, select the
new channel and then enable the ADC again, or to discard the first conversion
result from the new input channel.
27.10 SRAM DRT Voltage Measurement
The decrease of the supply voltage of SRAM block 2 for the leakage current reduction
can also be measured using a special setup of the A/D converter inputs. The details of
the SRAM leakage current reduction are described in section "SRAM with Data
Retention" on page 191. The supply voltage of a disabled SRAM block can be reduced
to save leakage power while maintaining data retention. This feature applies to all four
SRAM blocks however only the voltage of SRAM block 2 can be verified using the A/D
converter.
The default factory setting for the data retention (DRT) voltage normally guarantees the
best leakage performances. Other values are nevertheless possible and can be
selected by the application software. The true value of the supply voltage reduction is
depending on the manufacturing process and environmental conditions like
temperature. The A/D converter allows determining the value of the DRT voltage of
SRAM block 2. The same voltage setting results for all practical purposes in the same
supply voltage for all other SRAM blocks.
Care must be taken when verifying the DRT voltage of SRAM block 2 with the A/D
converter because it will be put into sleep mode and hence it is not available for the
application program. Addressing the disabled SRAM will return invalid data (all data
read zero). The voltage measurement is split into two parts. One setting allows
measuring the voltage drop from DVDD. The other setting allows verifying the voltage
shift from DVSS. Both measurements are differential and use the programmable gain
amplifier. A low frequency of the conversion clock must be selected due to the high-
impedance nature of the input signal. Accurate and stable voltage readings may just be
available after a long waiting time of up to 100 ms. This limitation is the consequence of
the small leakage currents that discharge the internal de-coupling capacitances before
the supply voltage settles to the DRT value. The following table summarizes the
preferred setup of the DRT voltage measurement:
Table 27-9. Recommended ADC Setup for DRT Voltage Measurements
Parameter Register Recommended Setup
SRAM DRT on DRTRAM2 Set bits DISPC and ENDRT to 1;
ADC Channel ADMUX,
ADCSRB
Select MUX4:0 = 10100 to measure VDRTBBP;
Select MUX4:0 = 11101 to measure VDRTBBN;
MUX5 = 1;
ADC Clock ADCSRA Select a clock frequency of 500kHz or lower;
VREF ADMUX Select the internal 1.6V reference voltage;
Start-up time ADCSRC Standard requirement of 20µs is sufficient;
Tracking time ADCSRC Setting ADTHT = 0 is sufficient;
461
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The A/D conversion result will always be a positive number for both VDRTBBP and
VDRTBBN. The SRAM supply voltage is easily calculated according to the following
equation (see chapter "SRAM with Data Retention" on page 191):
)(
,, DRTBBNDRTBBPDDDRTSRAMDD VVVV
+
−
=
The conversion result is coded as described in "ADC Conversion Result" on page 456
with a GAIN of 0.5. It is not possible to read both VDRTBBP and VDRTBBN at the same time.
However the time required for the A/D conversion is short compared to the time
constant of a DRT voltage change.
27.11 EVDD Voltage Measurement
A dedicated, internal, single-ended input channel is available (1) to measure the EVDD
supply voltage directly with the A/D converter. This feature is a supplement to observing
EVDD with the battery monitor (see "Battery Monitor (BATMON)" on page 85).
The EVDD supply voltage is internally divided by three with a resistor. The typical, total
resistor value is 120 kΩ. Hence when activating the EVDD measurement channel,
EVDD is loaded with an additional current. Deselect the EVDD measurement channel
after completion of the A/D conversion. It is important to allow a sufficient high tracking
time for full settling of the ADC input voltage due to the attached RC time constant of
this input channel. The following table summarizes the preferred setup of the EVDD
voltage measurement:
Table 27-10. Recommended ADC Setup for EVDD Voltage Measurements
Parameter Register Recommended Setup
ADC Channel ADMUX,
ADCSRB
Select MUX4:0 = 00110 to measure VDRTBBP;
MUX5 = 1;
ADC Clock ADCSRA Select a clock frequency of 1 MHz or lower;
VREF ADMUX Select the internal 1.6V reference voltage;
Start-up time ADCSRC Standard requirement of 20 µs is sufficient;
Tracking time ADCSRC Value depends on ADC Clock, a minimum of 4 µs is required;
The A/D conversion result ADCEVDD will always be a positive number (single-ended
conversion). The input voltage VIN of the converter is easily derived by:
VIN = 1/3 VEVDD
Refer to section "ADC Conversion Result" on page 456 for details about deriving A/D
conversion result.
ADC and Analog Comparator share the same Analog Multiplexer. It allows routing the
divided voltage to the negative input of the Analog Comparator if the Analog
Comparator Multiplexer Enable bit (ACME in ADCSRB) is set.
462
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
27.12 Register Description
27.12.1 ADMUX – ADC Multiplexer Selection Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($7C) REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 ADMUX
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7:6 – REFS1:0: Reference Selection Bits
These bits select the voltage reference for the ADC, as shown in the following table.
Changes of these bits will take effect until a conversion start is requested by setting
ADSC. The internal voltage reference options may not be used if an external reference
voltage is being applied to the AREF pin.
Table 27-11. Reference Voltage Selections for ADC
REFS1 REFS0 Reference Voltage Selection
0 0 AREF, Internal VREF turned off
0 1 AVDD (1.8V)
1 0 Internal 1.5V Voltage Reference (no external capacitor at AREF pin)
1 1 Internal 1.6V Voltage Reference (no external capacitor at AREF pin)
Note: 1. ATmega128RFA1: Changes of the REFS bits will only take effect until the first
conversion start is requested. After this the ADC has to be disabled and enabled
again for new reference selections.
• Bit 5 – ADLAR: ADC Left Adjust Result
The ADLAR bit affects the presentation of the A/D conversion result in the ADC Data
Register. Write one to ADLAR to left adjust the result. Otherwise, the result is right
adjusted. Changing the ADLAR bit will affect the ADC Data Register immediately,
regardless of any ongoing conversions. For a complete description of this bit, see
"ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data Register" on page 467.
• Bits 4:0 – MUX4:0: Analog Channel and Gain Selection Bits
The value of these bits selects which combination of analog inputs is connected to the
ADC. See Table 27-12 on page 463 for details. If these bits are changed during a
conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete (ADIF in
ADCSRA is set). Note that the MUX5 bit is located in the ADCSRB register. A write
access to the MUX4:0 bits triggers the update of the internally buffered MUX5 bit, see
"Accessing the ADMUX Register" on page 450 .
27.12.2 ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($7B) AVDDOK
ACME REFOK ACCH MUX5 ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 ADCSRB
Read/Write R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – AVDDOK: AVDD Supply Voltage OK
The analog functions of the ADC are powered from the AVDD domain. AVDD is
supplied from an internal voltage regulator. Setting the ADEN bit in register ADCSRA
will power-up the AVDD domain if not already requested by another functional group of
the device. The bit allows the user to monitor (poll) the status of the AVDD domain. A
status of 1 indicates that AVDD has been powered-up.
463
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 6 – ACME: Analog Comparator Multiplexer Enable
This bit is used for the Analog Comparator only. See "ADCSRB – ADC Control and
Status Register B" on page 440 for details.
• Bit 5 – REFOK: Reference Voltage OK
The status of the internal generated reference voltage can be monitored through this
bit. Setting the ADEN bit in register ADCSRA will enable the reference voltage for the
ADC according to the REFSn bits in the ADMUX register. The reference voltage will be
available after a start-up delay. A REFOK value of 1 indicates that the internal
generated reference voltage is approaching final levels.
• Bit 4 – ACCH: Analog Channel Change
The user can force a reset of the analog blocks by setting this bit to 1 without
requesting a different channel. The analog blocks of the ADC will be reset to handle
possible new voltage ranges. Such a reset phase is especially important for the gain
amplifier. It could be temporarily disabled by a large step of its input common voltage
leading to erroneous A/D conversion results. ACCH will read as one until the reset
phase of the analog blocks can be entered.
• Bit 3 – MUX5: Analog Channel and Gain Selection Bit
This bit is used together with MUX4:0 in ADMUX to select the analog input signals
connected to the ADC. See the following table for details. If this bit is changed during a
conversion, the change will not go in effect until this conversion is complete. Note that
the MUX5 bit is internally buffered and a write access to the MUX4:0 bits is required to
trigger the update of the MUX5 bit, see "Accessing the ADMUX Register" on page 450 .
Table 27-12. Input Channel Selections
MUX5:0
Single Ended
Input
Positive Differential
Input
Negative Differential
Input Gain
000000 ADC0
N/A
000001 ADC1
000010 ADC2
000011 ADC3
000100 ADC4
000101 ADC5
000110 ADC6
000111 ADC7
001000
N/A
ADC0 ADC0 10x
001001 ADC1 ADC0 10x
001010 ADC0 ADC0 200x
001011 ADC1 ADC0 200x
001100 ADC2 ADC2 10x
001101 ADC3 ADC2 10x
001110 ADC2 ADC2 200x
001111 ADC3 ADC2 200x
010000
N/A
ADC0 ADC1 1x
010001 ADC1 ADC1 1x
010010 ADC2 ADC1 1x
010011 ADC3 ADC1 1x
464
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
MUX5:0
Single Ended
Input
Positive Differential
Input
Negative Differential
Input Gain
010100 ADC4 ADC1 1x
010101 ADC5 ADC1 1x
010110 ADC6 ADC1 1x
010111 ADC7 ADC1 1x
011000
N/A
ADC0 ADC2 1x
011001 ADC1 ADC2 1x
011010 ADC2 ADC2 1x
011011 ADC3 ADC2 1x
011100 ADC4 ADC2 1x
011101 ADC5 ADC2 1x
011110 1.2V (VBG) N/A
011111 0V (AVSS)
100000 Reserved
N/A
100001 Reserved
100010 Reserved
100011 Reserved
100100 Reserved
100101 Reserved
100110 EVDD(1)
100111 Reserved
101000
N/A
Reserved
101001 Temperature Sensor
101010 Reserved
101011 Reserved
101100 Reserved
101101 Reserved
101110 Reserved
101111 Reserved
110000
N/A
Reserved
110001 Reserved
110010 Reserved
110011 Reserved
110100 SRAM Back-bias Voltage VDRTBBP
110101 Reserved
110110 Reserved
110111 Reserved
111000
N/A
Reserved
111001 Reserved
111010 Reserved
111011 Reserved
111100 Reserved
465
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
MUX5:0
Single Ended
Input
Positive Differential
Input
Negative Differential
Input Gain
111101 SRAM Back-bias Voltage VDRTBBN
111110 Reserved N/A
111111 Reserved
Note: 1. EVDD measurement is not available in ATmega128RFA1.
• Bits 2:0 – ADTS2:0: ADC Auto Trigger Source
If ADATE in ADCSRA is written to one, the value of these bits selects which source will
trigger an A/D conversion. If ADATE is cleared, the ADTS2:0 settings will have no
effect. A conversion will be triggered by the rising edge of the selected Interrupt Flag.
Note that switching from a trigger source that is cleared, to a trigger source that is set,
will generate a positive edge on the trigger signal. If ADEN in ADCSRA is set, this will
start a conversion. Switching to Free Running mode (ADTS2:0=0) will not cause a
trigger event, even if the ADC Interrupt Flag is set.
Table 27-13. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections
ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 Trigger Source
0 0 0 Free Running mode
0 0 1 Analog Comparator
0 1 0 External Interrupt Request 0
0 1 1 Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A
1 0 0 Timer/Counter0 Overflow
1 0 1 Timer/Counter1 Compare Match B
1 1 0 Timer/Counter1 Overflow
1 1 1 Timer/Counter1 Capture Event
27.12.3 ADCSRA – ADC Control and Status Register A
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($7A) ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 ADCSRA
Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
• Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable
Writing this bit to one enables the ADC. The AVDD supply voltage will also be enabled
if not already available. By writing it to zero, the ADC is turned off. Turning the ADC off
while a conversion is in progress will terminate this conversion.
• Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conversion
In Single Conversion mode, write this bit to one to start each conversion. In Free
Running mode, write this bit to one to start the first conversion. The first conversion
after ADSC has been written after the ADC has been enabled, or if ADSC is written at
the same time as the ADC is enabled, will include a start-up time to initialize the analog
blocks of the ADC. The start-up time is defined by the ADSUT bits of register ADCSRC.
ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is
complete, it returns to zero. Writing zero to this bit has no effect.
466
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 5 – ADATE: ADC Auto Trigger Enable
When this bit is written to one, Auto Triggering of the ADC is enabled. The ADC will
start a conversion on a positive edge of the selected trigger signal. The trigger source is
selected by setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in ADCSRB.
• Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag
This bit is set when an A/D conversion is completed and the Data Register are updated.
The ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt is executed if the ADIE bit and the I-bit in
SREG are set. ADIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt
handling vector. Alternatively, ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag.
Beware that if doing a Read-Modify-Write on ADCSRA, a pending interrupt can be
disabled. This also applies if the SBI and CBI instructions are used.
• Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable
When this bit is written to one and the I-bit in SREG is set, the ADC Conversion
Complete Interrupt is activated.
• Bits 2:0 – ADPS2:0: ADC Prescaler Select Bits
These bits determine the division factor between the CPU frequency and the input clock
to the ADC.
Table 27-14. ADC Prescaler Selections
ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 Division Factor
0 0 0 2
0 0 1 2
0 1 0 4
0 1 1 8
1 0 0 16
1 0 1 32
1 1 0 64
1 1 1 128
27.12.4 ADCSRC – ADC Control and Status Register C
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($77) ADTHT1
ADTHT0
ADSUT5(1)
ADSUT4
ADSUT3
ADSUT2
ADSUT1
ADSUT0
ADCSRC
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
This register defines the track-and-hold time for sampling the analog input voltage of
the ADC and it defines the start-up time for the analog blocks based on a number of
ADC clock cycles. The ADC clock is generated from the system clock with the ADC
prescaler. The bits ADPS2:0 of register ADCSRA set the prescaler ratio. Correct start-
up and track-and-hold times are important for precise conversion results.
• Bits 7:6 – ADTHT1:0: ADC Track-and-Hold Time
These bits define the number of ADC clock cycles for the sampling time of the analog
input voltage. For a complete description of this bit, see "Pre-scaling and Conversion
Timing" on page 446.
467
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bits 5:0 – ADSUT5:0: ADC Start-up Time
These bits define the number of ADC clock cycles for the start-up time of the analog
blocks. For a complete description of this bit, see "Pre-scaling and Conversion Timing"
on page 446.
Note: 1. ADSUT5 is not available in ATmega128RFA1.
27.12.5 ADCL and ADCH – The ADC Data Register
27.12.5.1 ADLAR = 0
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
NA ($79) – – – – – – ADC9 ADC8 ADCH
NA ($78) ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADC1 ADC0 ADCL
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
27.12.5.2 ADLAR = 1
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
NA ($79) ADC9 ADC8 ADC7 ADC6 ADC5 ADC4 ADC3 ADC2 ADCH
NA ($78) ADC1 ADC0 – – – – – – ADCL
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Read/Write R R R R R R R R
R R R R R R R R
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
When an A/D conversion is complete, the result is found in these two registers. If
differential channels are used, the result is presented in two’s complement form.
When ADCL is read, the ADC Data Register is not updated until ADCH is read.
Consequently, if the result is left adjusted and no more than 8-bit precision (7 bit + sign
bit for differential input channels) is required, it is sufficient to read ADCH. Otherwise,
ADCL must be read first, then ADCH.
The ADLAR bit in ADMUX, and the MUXn bits in ADMUX affect the way the result is
read from the registers. If ADLAR is set, the result is left adjusted. If ADLAR is cleared
(default), the result is right adjusted.
• ADC9:0: A/D Conversion Result
These bits represent the result from the conversion as detailed in "ADC Conversion
Result" on page 456.
27.12.6 DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($7E) ADC7D ADC6D ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D DIDR0
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
468
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bits 7:0 – ADC7D:ADC0D: Digital Input Disable
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the corresponding ADC pin
is disabled. The corresponding PIN Register bit will always read as zero when this bit is
set. When an analog signal is applied to the ADC7:0 pin and the digital input from this
pin is not needed, this bit should be written logic one to reduce power consumption in
the digital input buffer.
27.12.7 DIDR2 – Digital Input Disable Register 2
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($7D) ADC15D
ADC14D
ADC13D
ADC12D
ADC11D
ADC10D
ADC9D ADC8D DIDR2
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Reserved for future use.
• Bit 7:0 – ADC15D:ADC8D - Reserved Bits
This bit is reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit
must be written to zero.
27.12.8 BGCR – Reference Voltage Calibration Register
Bit 7 6 5 4
NA ($67) Res BGCAL_FINE3 BGCAL_FINE2 BGCAL_FINE1 BGCR
Read/Write R RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 2 1 0
NA ($67) BGCAL_FINE0 BGCAL2 BGCAL1 BGCAL0 BGCR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0
This register contains the calibration values of the reference voltage of the ADC. The
values are loaded from the fuse memory after power-up. They can be corrected by the
application software e.g. to compensate for temperature changes. The internal 1.6V
reference voltage is calibrated and has therefore the highest accuracy compared to the
1.5V or AVDD reference.
• Bit 7 – Res - Reserved Bit
This bit is reserved for future use. A read access always will return zero. A write access
does not modify the content.
• Bit 6:3 – BGCAL_FINE3:0 - Fine Calibration Bits
These bits allow the calibration of the AREF voltage with a resolution of 2mV.
Table 27-15 BGCAL_FINE Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
BGCAL_FINE3:0 0 Center value
1 Voltage step up
8 Voltage step down
469
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Register Bits Value Description
7 Setting for highest voltage
15 Setting for lowest voltage
• Bit 2:0 – BGCAL2:0 - Coarse Calibration Bits
These bits allow the calibration of the AREF voltage with a resolution of 10mV.
Table 27-16 BGCAL Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
BGCAL2:0 4 Center value
3 Voltage step up
5 Voltage step down
0 Setting for highest voltage
7 Setting for lowest voltage
470
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
28 JTAG Interface and On-chip Debug System
28.1 Features
• JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 Compliant) Interface
• Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the IEEE std. 1149.1 (JTAG)
Standard
• Debugger Access to:
o All Internal Peripheral Units
o Internal and External RAM
o The Internal Register File–Program Counter
o EEPROM and Flash Memories
• Extensive on-chip debug Support for Break Conditions, Including
o AVR Break Instruction
o Break on Change of Program Memory Flow
o Single Step Break
o Program Memory Breakpoints on Single Address or Address Range
o Data Memory Breakpoints on Single Address or Address Range
• Programming of Flash, EEPROM, Fuses, and Lock Bits through the JTAG
Interface
• On-chip debugging Supported by AVR Studio®
28.2 Overview
The AVR IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant JTAG interface can be used for
• Testing PCBs by using the JTAG Boundary-scan capability
• Programming the non-volatile memories, Fuses and Lock bits
• On-chip debugging
A brief description is given in the following sections. Detailed descriptions for
Programming via the JTAG interface, and using the Boundary-scan Chain can be found
in the sections "Programming via the JTAG Interface" on page 523 and "Programming
via the JTAG Interface" on page 523, respectively. The on-chip debug support is
considered being private JTAG instructions, and distributed within ATMEL and to
selected third party vendors only.
Figure 28-1 on page 471 shows a block diagram of the JTAG interface and the on-chip
debug system. The TAP Controller is a state machine controlled by the TCK and TMS
signals. The TAP Controller selects either the JTAG Instruction Register or one of
several Data Registers as the scan chain (Shift Register) between the TDI – input and
TDO – output. The Instruction Register holds JTAG instructions controlling the behavior
of a Data Register.
The ID-Register, Bypass Register, and the Boundary-scan Chain are the Data
Registers used for board-level testing. The JTAG Programming Interface (actually
consisting of several physical and virtual Data Registers) is used for serial programming
via the JTAG interface. The internal scan-chain and breakpoint scan-chain are used for
on-chip debugging only.
471
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 28-1. Block Diagram
TAP
CONTROLLER
TDI
TDO
TCK
TMS
FLASH
MEMORY
AVR CPU
DIGITAL
PERIPHERAL
UNITS
JTAG / AVR CORE
COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE
BREAKPOINT
UNIT FLOW CONTROL
UNIT
OCD STATUS
AND CONTROL
INTERNAL
SCAN
CHAIN
M
U
X
INSTRUCTION
REGISTER
ID
REGISTER
BYPASS
REGISTER
JTAG PROGRAMMING
INTERFACE
PC
Instruction
Address
Data
BREAKPOINT
SCAN CHAIN
ADDRESS
DECODER
ANALOG
PERIPHERAL
UNITS
I/O PORT 0
I/O PORT n
BOUNDARY SCAN CHAIN
Analog inputs
Control & Clock lines
DEVICE BOUNDARY
28.3 TAP - Test Access Port
The JTAG interface is accessed through four of the AVR’s pins. In JTAG terminology,
these pins constitute the Test Access Port – TAP. These pins are:
• TMS: Test mode select. This pin is used for navigating through the TAP-controller
state machine.
• TCK: Test Clock. JTAG operation is synchronous to TCK.
• TDI: Test Data In. Serial input data to be shifted in to the Instruction Register or Data
Register (Scan Chains).
• TDO: Test Data Out. Serial output data from Instruction Register or Data Register.
The IEEE std. 1149.1 also specifies an optional TAP signal; TRST – Test ReSeT –
which is not provided.
When the JTAGEN Fuse is un-programmed, these four TAP pins are normal port pins,
and the TAP controller is in reset. When programmed the input TAP signals are
internally pulled high and the JTAG is enabled for Boundary-scan and programming.
The device is shipped with this fuse programmed.
For the on-chip debug system, in addition to the JTAG interface pins, the RESET pin is
monitored by the debugger to be able to detect external reset sources. The debugger
can also pull the RESET pin low to reset the whole system, assuming only open
collectors on the reset line are used in the application.
472
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 28-2. TAP Controller State Diagram
Test-Logic-Reset
Run-Test/Idle
Shift-DR
Exit1-DR
Pause-DR
Exit2-DR
Update-DR
Select-IR Scan
Capture-IR
Shift-IR
Exit1-IR
Pause-IR
Exit2-IR
Update-IR
Select-DR Scan
Capture-DR
0
1
01 1 1
0 0
0 0
1 1
10
1
1
0
1
0
0
10
1
1
0
1
0
0
00
11
28.4 TAP Controller
The TAP controller is a 16-state finite state machine that controls the operation of the
Boundary-scan circuitry, JTAG programming circuitry, or on-chip debug system. The
state transitions depicted in Figure 28-2 above depend on the signal present on TMS
(shown adjacent to each state transition) at the time of the rising edge at TCK. The
initial state after a Power-on Reset is Test-Logic-Reset.
As a definition in this document, the LSB is shifted in and out first for all Shift Registers.
Assuming Run-Test/Idle is the present state, a typical scenario for using the JTAG
interface is:
• At the TMS input, apply the sequence 1, 1, 0, 0 at the rising edges of TCK to enter
the Shift Instruction Register – Shift-IR state. While in this state, shift the four bits of
the JTAG instructions into the JTAG Instruction Register from the TDI input at the
rising edge of TCK. The TMS input must be held low during input of the 3 LSBs in
order to remain in the Shift-IR state. The MSB of the instruction is shifted in when
this state is left by setting TMS high. While the instruction is shifted in from the TDI
pin, the captured IR-state 0x01 is shifted out on the TDO pin. The JTAG Instruction
473
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
selects a particular Data Register as path between TDI and TDO and controls the
circuitry surrounding the selected Data Register.
• Apply the TMS sequence 1, 1, 0 to re-enter the Run-Test/Idle state. The instruction
is latched onto the parallel output from the Shift Register path in the Update-IR state.
The Exit-IR, Pause-IR, and Exit2-IR states are only used for navigating the state
machine.
• At the TMS input, apply the sequence 1, 0, 0 at the rising edges of TCK to enter the
Shift Data Register – Shift-DR state. While in this state, upload the selected Data
Register (selected by the present JTAG instruction in the JTAG Instruction Register)
from the TDI input at the rising edge of TCK. In order to remain in the Shift-DR state,
the TMS input must be held low during input of all bits except the MSB. The MSB of
the data is shifted in when this state is left by setting TMS high. While the Data
Register is shifted in from the TDI pin, the parallel inputs to the Data Register
captured in the Capture-DR state is shifted out on the TDO pin.
• Apply the TMS sequence 1, 1, 0 to re-enter the Run-Test/Idle state. If the selected
Data Register has a latched parallel-output, the latching takes place in the Update-
DR state. The Exit-DR, Pause-DR, and Exit2-DR states are only used for navigating
the state machine.
As shown in the state diagram, the Run-Test/Idle state need not be entered between
selecting JTAG instruction and using Data Registers, and some JTAG instructions may
select certain functions to be performed in the Run-Test/Idle, making it unsuitable as an
Idle state.
Note that independent of the initial state of the TAP Controller, the Test-Logic-Reset
state can always be entered by holding TMS high for five TCK clock periods. For
detailed information on the JTAG specification, refer to the literature listed in
"Bibliography" on page 475.
28.5 Using the Boundary-scan Chain
A complete description of the Boundary-scan capabilities are given in the section "IEEE
1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan" on page 476.
28.6 Using the On-chip Debug System
The on-chip debug system must be disabled for the best RF performance of the radio
transceiver. As shown in Figure 28-1, the hardware support for on-chip debugging
consists mainly of
• A scan chain on the interface between the internal AVR CPU and the internal
peripheral units.
• Breakpoint unit.
• Communication interface between the CPU and JTAG system.
All read or modify/write operations needed for implementing the debugger are done by
applying AVR instructions via the internal AVR CPU Scan Chain. The CPU sends the
result to an I/O memory mapped location which is part of the communication interface
between the CPU and the JTAG system.
The Breakpoint Unit implements Break on Change of Program Flow, Single Step Break,
two program memory breakpoints and two combined breakpoints. Together, the four
breakpoints can be configured as either:
• 4 single program memory breakpoints;
• 3 single program memory breakpoint + 1 single data memory breakpoint;
• 2 single program memory breakpoints + 2 single data memory breakpoints;
474
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• 2 single program memory breakpoints + 1 program memory breakpoint with mask
(“range breakpoint”).
• 2 single program memory breakpoints + 1 data memory breakpoint with mask
(“range breakpoint”).
A debugger, like the AVR Studio, may however use one or more of these resources for
its internal purpose, leaving less flexibility to the end-user.
A list of the on-chip debug specific JTAG instructions is given in "On-chip Debug
Specific JTAG Instructions" below.
The JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed to enable the JTAG Test Access Port. In
addition, the OCDEN Fuse must be programmed and no Lock bits must be set for the
on-chip debug system to work. As a security feature, the on-chip debug system is
disabled when either of the LB1 or LB2 Lock-bits are set. Otherwise, the on-chip debug
system would have provided a back-door into a secured device.
The AVR Studio enables the user to fully control execution of programs on an AVR
device with on-chip debug capability, AVR In-Circuit Emulator, or the built-in AVR
Instruction Set Simulator. AVR Studio supports source level execution of Assembly
programs assembled with Atmel Corporation’s AVR Assembler and C programs
compiled with third party vendors’ compilers. For a full description of the AVR Studio,
please refer to the AVR Studio User Guide. Only highlights are presented in this
document.
All necessary execution commands are available in AVR Studio, both on source level
and on disassembly level. The user can execute the program, single step through the
code either by tracing into or stepping over functions, step out of functions, place the
cursor on a statement and execute until the statement is reached, stop the execution,
and reset the execution target. In addition, the user can have an unlimited number of
code breakpoints (using the BREAK instruction) and up to two data memory
Breakpoints, alternatively combined as a mask (range) breakpoint.
28.7 On-chip Debug Specific JTAG Instructions
The on-chip debug support is considered being private JTAG instructions, and
distributed within ATMEL and to selected third party vendors only. Instruction operation
codes are listed for reference.
28.7.1 PRIVATE0; 0x8
Private JTAG instruction for accessing on-chip debug system;
28.7.2 PRIVATE1; 0x9
Private JTAG instruction for accessing on-chip debug system;
28.7.3 PRIVATE2; 0xA
Private JTAG instruction for accessing on-chip debug system;
28.7.4 PRIVATE3; 0xB
Private JTAG instruction for accessing on-chip debug system;
28.8 Using the JTAG Programming Capabilities
Programming of the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 via JTAG is performed via the 4-pin
JTAG port, TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. These are the only pins that need to be
controlled and observed to perform JTAG programming (in addition to power pins). The
JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed and the JTD bit in the MCUCR Register must be
cleared to enable the JTAG Test Access Port.
475
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The JTAG programming capability supports:
• Flash programming and verifying.
• EEPROM programming and verifying.
• Fuse programming and verifying.
• Lock bit programming and verifying.
The Lock bit security is exactly as in parallel programming mode. If the Lock bits LB1 or
LB2 are programmed, the OCDEN Fuse cannot be programmed unless first doing a
chip erase. This is a security feature that ensures no back-door exists for reading out
the content of a secured device.
The details on programming through the JTAG interface and programming specific
JTAG instructions are given in the section "Programming via the JTAG Interface" on
page 523.
28.9 Bibliography
For more information about general Boundary-scan, the following literature can be
consulted:
• IEEE: IEEE Std. 1149.1-1990. IEEE Standard Test Access Port and Boundary-scan
Architecture, IEEE, 1993.
• Colin Maunder: The Board Designers Guide to Testable Logic Circuits, Addison-
Wesley, 1992.
28.10 On-chip Debug Related Register in I/O Memory
28.10.1 OCDR – On-Chip Debug Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$31 ($51) OCDR7:0 OCDR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The OCDR Register provides a communication channel from the running program in
the microcontroller to the debugger. The CPU can transfer a byte to the debugger by
writing to this location. At the same time, an internal flag; I/O Debug Register Dirty
IDRD is set to indicate to the debugger that the register has been written. When the
CPU reads the OCDR Register the 7 LSB will be from the OCDR Register, while the
MSB is the IDRD bit. The debugger clears the IDRD bit when it has read the
information. In some AVR devices, this register is shared with a standard I/O location.
In this case, the OCDR Register can only be accessed if the OCDEN Fuse is
programmed, and the debugger enables access to the OCDR Register. In all other
cases, the standard I/O location is accessed.
• Bit 7:0 – OCDR7:0 - On-Chip Debug Register Data
Table 28-17 OCDR Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
OCDR7:0 0 Refer to the debugger documentation for
further information on how to use this
register.
476
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
29 IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan
29.1 Features
• JTAG (IEEE std. 1149.1 compliant) Interface
• Boundary-scan Capabilities According to the JTAG Standard
• Full Scan of all Port Functions as well as Analog Circuitry having Off-chip
Connections
• Supports the Optional IDCODE Instruction
• Additional Public AVR_RESET Instruction to Reset the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
29.2 System Overview
The Boundary-scan chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on
the digital I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog
circuitry having off-chip connections. At system level, all ICs having JTAG capabilities
are connected serially by the TDI/TDO signals to form a long Shift Register. An external
controller sets up the devices to drive values at their output pins, and observe the input
values received from other devices. The controller compares the received data with the
expected result. In this way, Boundary-scan provides a mechanism for testing
interconnections and integrity of components on Printed Circuits Boards by using the
four TAP signals only.
The four IEEE 1149.1 defined mandatory JTAG instructions IDCODE, BYPASS,
SAMPLE/PRELOAD, and EXTEST, as well as the AVR specific public JTAG instruction
AVR_RESET can be used for testing the Printed Circuit Board. Initial scanning of the
Data Register path will show the ID-Code of the device, since IDCODE is the default
JTAG instruction. It may be desirable to have the AVR device in reset during test mode.
If not reset, inputs to the device may be determined by the scan operations, and the
internal software may be in an undetermined state when exiting the test mode. Entering
reset, the outputs of any port pin will instantly enter the high impedance state, making
the HIGHZ instruction redundant. If needed, the BYPASS instruction can be issued to
make the shortest possible scan chain through the device. The device can be set in the
reset state either by pulling the external RESET pin low, or issuing the AVR_RESET
instruction with appropriate setting of the Reset Data Register.
The EXTEST instruction is used for sampling external pins and loading output pins with
data. The data from the output latch will be driven out on the pins as soon as the
EXTEST instruction is loaded into the JTAG IR-Register. Therefore, the
SAMPLE/PRELOAD should also be used for setting initial values to the scan ring, to
avoid damaging the board when issuing the EXTEST instruction for the first time.
SAMPLE/PRELOAD can also be used for taking a snapshot of the external pins during
normal operation of the part.
The JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed and the JTD bit in the I/O Register MCUCR
must be cleared to enable the JTAG Test Access Port.
When using the JTAG interface for Boundary-scan, using a JTAG TCK clock frequency
higher than the internal chip frequency is possible. The chip clock is not required to run.
29.3 Data Registers
The Data Registers relevant for Boundary-scan operations are:
• Bypass Register
477
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Device Identification Register
• Reset Register
• Boundary-scan Chain
29.3.1 Bypass Register
The Bypass Register consists of a single Shift Register stage. When the Bypass
Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO, the register is reset to 0 when
leaving the Capture-DR controller state. The Bypass Register can be used to shorten
the scan chain on a system when the other devices are to be tested.
29.3.2 Device Identification Register
Figure 29-1. The Format of the Device Identification Register
MSB LSB
Bit 31 28 27 12 11 1 0
Device ID Version Part Number Manufacturer ID 1
4 bits 16 bits 11 bits 1 bit
29.3.2.1 Version
Version is a 4-bit number identifying the revision of the component. The JTAG version
number follows the revision of the device. Revision A is 0x0, revision B is 0x1 and so
on.
29.3.2.2 Part Number
The part number is a 16-bit code identifying the component. The JTAG Part Number for
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 is listed in Table 31-6 on page 505.
29.3.2.3 Manufacturer ID
The Manufacturer ID is a 11-bit code identifying the manufacturer. The JTAG
manufacturer ID for ATMEL is listed in Table 31-6 on page 505.
29.3.3 Reset Register
The Reset Register is a test Data Register used to reset the part. Since the AVR tri-
states Port Pins when reset, the Reset Register can also replace the function of the
unimplemented optional JTAG instruction HIGHZ.
A high value in the Reset Register corresponds to pulling the external Reset low. The
part is reset as long as there is a high value present in the Reset Register. Depending
on the fuse settings for the clock options, the part will remain reset for a reset time-out
period (see "Clock Sources" on page 175) after releasing the Reset Register. The
output from this Data Register is not latched, so the reset will take place immediately,
as shown in Figure 29-2 on page 478.
478
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 29-2. Reset Register
D Q
From
TDI
ClockDR · AVR_RESET
To
TDO
From Other Internal and
External Reset Sources
Internal reset
29.3.4 Boundary-scan Chain
The Boundary-scan Chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on
the digital I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog
circuitry having off-chip connections.
See "Boundary-scan Chain" on page 479 for a complete description.
29.4 Boundary-scan Specific JTAG Instructions
The Instruction Register is 4-bit wide, supporting up to 16 instructions. Listed below are
the JTAG instructions useful for Boundary-scan operation. Note that the optional HIGHZ
instruction is not implemented, but all outputs with tri-state capability can be set in high-
impedance state by using the AVR_RESET instruction, since the initial state for all port
pins is tri-state.
As a definition in this datasheet, the LSB is shifted in and out first for all Shift Registers.
The OPCODE for each instruction is shown behind the instruction name in hex format.
The text describes which Data Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO for
each instruction.
29.4.1 EXTEST; 0x0
Mandatory JTAG instruction for selecting the Boundary-scan Chain as Data Register for
testing circuitry external to the AVR package. For port-pins, Pull-up Disable, Output
Control, Output Data, and Input Data are all accessible in the scan chain. For Analog
circuits having off-chip connections, the interface between the analog and the digital
logic is in the scan chain. The contents of the latched outputs of the Boundary-scan
chain is driven out as soon as the JTAG IR-Register is loaded with the EXTEST
instruction.
The active states are:
• Capture-DR: Data on the external pins are sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain.
• Shift-DR: The Internal Scan Chain is shifted by the TCK input.
• Update-DR: Data from the scan chain is applied to output pins.
29.4.2 IDCODE; 0x1
Optional JTAG instruction selecting the 32 bit ID-Register as Data Register. The ID-
Register consists of a version number, a device number and the manufacturer code
chosen by JEDEC. This is the default instruction after power-up.
479
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The active states are:
• Capture-DR: Data in the IDCODE Register is sampled into the Boundary-scan
Chain.
• Shift-DR: The IDCODE scan chain is shifted by the TCK input.
29.4.3 SAMPLE_PRELOAD; 0x2
Mandatory JTAG instruction for pre-loading the output latches and taking a snap-shot of
the input/output pins without affecting the system operation. However, the output
latches are not connected to the pins. The Boundary-scan Chain is selected as Data
Register.
The active states are:
• Capture-DR: Data on the external pins are sampled into the Boundary-scan Chain.
• Shift-DR: The Boundary-scan Chain is shifted by the TCK input.
• Update-DR: Data from the Boundary-scan chain is applied to the output latches.
However, the output latches are not connected to the pins.
29.4.4 AVR_RESET; 0xC
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction for forcing the AVR device into the Reset
mode or releasing the JTAG reset source. The TAP controller is not reset by this
instruction. The one bit Reset Register is selected as Data Register. Note that the reset
will be active as long as there is a logic “one” in the Reset Chain. The output from this
chain is not latched.
The active states are:
• Shift-DR: The Reset Register is shifted by the TCK input.
29.4.5 BYPASS; 0xF
Mandatory JTAG instruction selecting the Bypass Register for Data Register.
The active states are:
• Capture-DR: Loads a logic “0” into the Bypass Register.
• Shift-DR: The Bypass Register cell between TDI and TDO is shifted.
29.5 Boundary-scan Chain
The Boundary-scan chain has the capability of driving and observing the logic levels on
the digital I/O pins, as well as the boundary between digital and analog logic for analog
circuitry having off-chip connection.
29.5.1 Scanning the Digital Port Pins
Figure 29-3 on page 480 shows the Boundary-scan Cell for a bi-directional port pin. The
pull-up function is disabled during Boundary-scan when the JTAG IC contains EXTEST
or SAMPLE_PRELOAD. The cell consists of a bi-directional pin cell that combines the
three signals Output Control - OCxn, Output Data - ODxn, and Input Data - IDxn, into
only a two-stage Shift Register. The port and pin indexes are not used in the following
description.
The Boundary-scan logic is not included in the figures in the datasheet. Figure 29-4 on
page 481 shows a simple digital port pin as described in the section "I/O-Ports" on page
217. The Boundary-scan details from Figure 29-3 on page 480 replaces the dashed box
in Figure 29-4 on page 481.
480
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
When no alternate port function is present, the Input Data - ID - corresponds to the
PINxn Register value (but ID has no synchronizer), Output Data corresponds to the
PORT Register, Output Control corresponds to the Data Direction - DD Register, and
the Pull-up Enable - PUExn – corresponds to logic expression:
PORTxnDDxnPUD ⋅⋅
Digital alternate port functions are connected outside the dotted box Figure 29-4 on
page 481 to make the scan chain read the actual pin value. For analog function, there is
a direct connection from the external pin to the analog circuit. There is no scan chain on
the interface between the digital and the analog circuitry, but some digital control signal
to analog circuitry are turned off to avoid driving contention on the pads.
When JTAG IR contains EXTEST or SAMPLE_PRELOAD the clock is not sent out on
the port pins even if the CKOUT fuse is programmed. Even though the clock is output
when the JTAG IR contains SAMPLE_PRELOAD, the clock is not sampled by the
boundary scan.
Figure 29-3. Boundary-scan Cell for Bi-directional Port Pin with Pull-up Function
481
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 29-4. General Port Pin Schematic Diagram
CLK
RPx
RRx
WRx
RDx
WDx
PUD
SYNCHRONIZER
WDx: WRITE DDRx
WRx: WRITE PORTx
RRx: READ PORTx REGISTER
RPx: READ PORTx PIN
PUD: PULLUP DISABLE
CLK : I/O CLOCK
RDx: READ DDRx
D
L
Q
Q
RESET
RESET
Q
Q
D
Q
QD
CLR
PORTxn
Q
QD
CLR
DDxn
PINxn
DATA BUS
SLEEP
SLEEP: SLEEP CONTROL
Pxn
I/O
I/O
See Boundary-scan
Description for Details!
PUExn
OCxn
ODxn
IDxn
PUExn: PULLUP ENABLE for pin Pxn
OCxn: OUTPUT CONTROL for pin Pxn
ODxn: OUTPUT DATA to pin Pxn
IDxn: INPUT DATA from pin Pxn
29.5.2 Scanning the RSTN, CLKI and TST Pin
An observe-only cell as shown in Figure 29-5 below is inserted for the active low reset
signal RSTN, for the active high programming and test mode enable signal TST and for
the clock input CLKI.
Figure 29-5. Observe-only Cell
0
1
D Q
From
Previous
Cell
ClockDR
ShiftDR
To
Next
Cell
From System Pin To System Logic
FF1
482
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
29.5.3 Scanning the RSTON Pin
For the low-active reset output pin RSTON a boundary-scan cell as shown in Figure
29-6 below is inserted.
Figure 29-6. Boundary-scan Cell for Output Pins without Pull-up Function
29.6 Boundary-scan Related Register in I/O Memory
For detailed register description see chapter "MCUCR – MCU Control Register" on
page 247 and "MCUSR – MCU Status Register" on page 214.
29.6.1 MCUCR – MCU Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$35 ($55) JTD MCUCR
Read/Write RW
Initial Value 0
The MCU Control Register contains control bits for general Microcontroller Unit
functions.
• Bit 7 – JTD - JTAG Interface Disable
When this bit is zero, the JTAG interface is enabled if the JTAGEN Fuse is
programmed. If this bit is one, the JTAG interface is disabled. In order to avoid
unintentional disabling or enabling of the JTAG interface, a timed sequence must be
followed when changing this bit: The application software must write this bit to the
desired value twice within four cycles to change its value. Note that this bit must not be
altered when using the On-chip Debug system.
29.6.2 MCUSR – MCU Status Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$34 ($54) JTRF MCUSR
Read/Write RW
Initial Value 0
483
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU
reset.
• Bit 4 – JTRF - JTAG Reset Flag
This bit is set if a reset is being caused by a logic one in the JTAG Reset Register
selected by the JTAG instruction AVR_RESET. This bit is reset by a Power-on Reset,
or by writing a logic zero to the flag.
29.7 Boundary-scan Description Language Files
Boundary-scan Description Language (BSDL) files describe Boundary-scan capable
devices in a standard format used by automated test-generation software. The order
and function of bits in the Boundary-scan Data Register are included in this description.
BSDL files are available for ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
29.8 ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 Boundary-scan Order
Table 29-1 on page 484 shows the Scan order between TDI and TDO when the
Boundary-scan chain is selected as data path. Bit 0 is the LSB; the first bit scanned in,
and the first bit scanned out. The scan order follows the pin-out order. In Figure 29-3 on
page 480, PXn. Data corresponds to FF0, PXn. Control corresponds to FF1, PXn. Bit 4,
5, 6 and 7 of Port F is not in the scan chain, since these pins constitute the TAP pins
when the JTAG is enabled.
484
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 29-1. ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 Boundary-Scan Order
Bit
Number Signal Name Module
Bit
Number Signal Name Module
0 PF1.Control
Port F
36 CLKI.Data Clock Input (Input Only)
1 PF1.Data 37
PD7.Control
Port D
2 PF0.Control
38 PD7.Data
3 PF0.Data 39 PD6.Control
4
PE7.Control
Port E
40 PD6.Data
5 PE7.Data 41 PD5.Control
6 PE6.Control
42 PD5.Data
7 PE6.Data 43 PD4.Control
8 PE5.Control
44 PD4.Data
9 PE5.Data 45 PD3.Control
10 PE4.Control
46 PD3.Data
11 PE4.Data 47 PD2.Control
12 PE3.Control
48
PD2.Data
13 PE3.Data 49 PD1.Control
14 PE2.Control
50 PD1.Data
15 PE2.Data 51 PD0.Control
16 PE1.Control
52 PD0.Data
17 PE1.Data 53
PG5.Control
Port G
18 PE0.Control
54 PG5.Data
19 PE0.Data 55 PG4.Control
20
PB7.Control
Port B
56 PG4.Data
21 PB7.Data 57 PG3.Control
22 PB6.Control
58 PG3.Data
23 PB6.Data 59 PG2.Control
24 PB5.Control
60 PG2.Data
25 PB5.Data 61 PG1.Control
26 PB4.Control
62 PG1.Data
27 PB4.Data 63 PG0.Control
28 PB3.Control
64 PG0.Data
29 PB3.Data 65
RSTON.Data
Reset Logic Output (Output Only
without Pull-up)
30 PB2.Control
66 RSTT.Data
Reset Logic (Observe Only)
31 PB2.Data 67 TST.Data Test and Programming Mode
Enable (Observe Only)
32 PB1.Control
68
PF3.Control
Port F
33 PB1.Data 69 PF3.Data
34 PB0.Control
70 PF2.Control
35 PB0.Data 71 PF2.Data
485
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
30 Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming
The Boot Loader Support provides a real Read-While-Write Self-Programming
mechanism for downloading and uploading program code by the MCU itself. This
feature allows flexible application software updates controlled by the MCU using a
Flash-resident Boot Loader program. The Boot Loader program can use any available
data interface and associated protocol to read code and write that (program) code into
the Flash memory, or read the code from the program memory. The program code
within the Boot Loader section has the capability to write into the entire Flash, including
the Boot Loader memory. The Boot Loader can thus even modify itself (including
erasing) from the code if the feature is not needed anymore. The size of the Boot
Loader memory is configurable with fuses and the Boot Loader has two separate sets
of Boot Lock bits which can be set independently. This gives the user a unique flexibility
to select different levels of protection.
30.1 Features
• Read-While-Write Self-Programming
• Flexible Boot Memory Size
• High Security (Separate Boot Lock Bits for a Flexible Protection)
• Separate Fuse to Select Reset Vector
• Optimized Page(1) Size
• Code Efficient Algorithm
• Efficient Read-Modify-Write Support
Note: 1. A page is a section in the Flash consisting of several bytes (see "Table 31-7" on
page 505) used during programming. The page organization does not affect normal
operation.
30.2 Application and Boot Loader Flash Sections
The Flash memory is organized in two main sections: the Application section and the
Boot Loader section (see Figure 30-2 on page 487). The size of the different sections is
configured by the BOOTSZ Fuses as shown in Table 30-7 on page 497 and Figure 30-2
on page 487. These two sections can have different level of protection since they have
different sets of Lock bits.
30.2.1 Application Section
The Application section is the region of the Flash that is used for storing the application
code. The protection level for the Application section can be selected by the application
Boot Lock bits (Boot Lock bits 0, BLB0), see Table 31-2 on page 502. The Application
section can never store any Boot Loader code since the SPM instruction is disabled
when executed from the Application section.
30.2.2 BLS – Boot Loader Section
While the Application section is used for storing the application code, the Boot Loader
software must be located in the BLS. The SPM instruction can only initiate
programming when executed from the BLS. The SPM instruction can access the entire
Flash, including the BLS itself. The protection level for the Boot Loader section can be
selected by the Boot Loader Lock bits (Boot Lock bits 1, BLB1), see Table 31-2 on page
502.
486
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
30.3 Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections
Whether the CPU supports Read-While-Write or if the CPU is halted during a Boot
Loader software update is dependent on the address that is being programmed. In
addition to the two sections that are configurable by the BOOTSZ Fuses as described
above, the Flash is also divided into two fixed sections, the Read-While-Write (RWW)
section and the No Read-While-Write (NRWW) section. The limit between the RWW-
and NRWW sections is given in Table 30-1 on page 487 and Figure 30-1 below. The
main differences between the two sections are:
• When erasing or writing a page located inside the RWW section, the NRWW section
can be read during the operation.
• When erasing or writing a page located inside the NRWW section, the CPU is halted
during the entire operation.
Note that the user software can never read any code that is located inside the RWW
section during a Boot Loader software operation. The syntax “Read-While-Write
section” refers to the section that is being programmed (erased or written) and not to
the section that actually is being read during a Boot Loader software update.
Figure 30-1. Read-While-Write vs. No Read-While-Write
Read-While-Write
(RWW) Section
No Read-While-Write
(NRWW) Section
Z-pointer
Addresses RWW
Section
Z-pointer
Addresses NRWW
Section
CPU is Halted
During the Operation
Code Located in
NRWW Section
Can be Read During
the Operation
30.3.1 RWW – Read-While-Write Section
If a Boot Loader software update is programming a page inside the RWW section, it is
possible to read code from the Flash, but only code that is located in the NRWW
section. During an ongoing programming, the software must ensure that the RWW
section never is being read. If the user software is trying to read code that is located
inside the RWW section (i.e., by load program memory, call, or jump instructions or an
interrupt) during programming, the software might end up in an unknown state. To avoid
this, the interrupts should either be disabled or moved to the Boot Loader section. The
Boot Loader section is always located in the NRWW section. The RWW Section Busy
bit (RWWSB) in the Store Program Memory Control and Status Register (SPMCSR) will
be read as logical one as long as the RWW section is blocked for reading. After a
487
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
programming is completed, the RWWSB must be cleared by software before reading
code located in the RWW section. See "SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control
Register" on page 499 for details on how to clear RWWSB.
30.3.2 NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section
The code located in the NRWW section can be read when the Boot Loader software is
updating a page in the RWW section. When the Boot Loader code updates the NRWW
section, the CPU is halted during the entire Page Erase or Page Write operation.
Table 30-1. Read-While-Write Features
Which Section does the Z-pointer
Address during the Programming?
Which Section can be Read
during Programming? CPU Halted?
Read-While-Write
Supported?
RWW Section NRWW Section No Yes
NRWW Section None Yes No
Figure 30-2. Memory Sections
0x0000
Flashend
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = '11'
Application Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section
Flashend
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = '10'
0x0000
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = '01'
Program Memory
BOOTSZ = '00'
Application Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section
0x0000
Flashend
Application Flash Section
Flashend
End RWW
Start NRWW
Application Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section
Boot Loader Flash Section
End RWW
Start NRWW
End RWW
Start NRWW
0x0000
End RWW, End Application
Start NRWW, Start Boot Loader
Application Flash SectionApplication Flash Section
Application Flash Section
Read-While-Write SectionNo Read-While-Write Section Read-While-Write SectionNo Read-While-Write Section
Read-While-Write SectionNo Read-While-Write SectionRead-While-Write SectionNo Read-While-Write Section
End Application
Start Boot Loader
End Application
Start Boot Loader
End Application
Start Boot Loader
Note: 1. The parameters in the figure above are given in Table 30-7 on page 497.
488
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
30.4 Boot Loader Lock Bits
If no Boot Loader capability is needed, the entire Flash is available for application code.
The Boot Loader has two separate sets of Boot Lock bits which can be set
independently. This gives the user a unique flexibility to select different levels of
protection.
The user can select:
• To protect the entire Flash from a software update by the MCU.
• To protect only the Boot Loader Flash section from a software update by the MCU.
• To protect only the Application Flash section from a software update by the MCU.
• Allow software update in the entire Flash.
See Table 31-2 on page 502 for further details. The Boot Lock bits can be set in
software and in Serial or Parallel Programming mode, but they can be cleared by a
Chip Erase command only. The general Write Lock (Lock Bit mode 2) does not control
the programming of the Flash memory by SPM instruction. Similarly, the general
Read/Write Lock (Lock Bit mode 1) does not control reading nor writing by
(E)LPM/SPM, if it is attempted.
30.4.1 Entering the Boot Loader Program
Entering the Boot Loader takes place by a jump or call from the application program.
This may be initiated by a trigger such as a command received via USART, or SPI
interface. Alternatively, the Boot Reset Fuse can be programmed so that the Reset
Vector is pointing to the Boot Flash start address after a reset. In this case, the Boot
Loader is started after a reset. After the application code is loaded, the program can
start executing the application code. Note that the fuses cannot be changed by the
MCU itself. This means that once the Boot Reset Fuse is programmed, the Reset
Vector will always point to the Boot Loader Reset and the fuse can only be changed
through the serial or parallel programming interface.
Table 30-2. Boot Reset Fuse(1)
BOOTRST Reset Address
1 Reset Vector = Application Reset (address 0x0000)
0 Reset Vector = Boot Loader Reset (see Table 30-7 on page 497)
Note: 1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed
30.5 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming
The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands. The Z pointer consists of the Z-
registers ZL and ZH in the register file, and RAMPZ in the I/O space. The number of
bits actually used is implementation dependent. Note that the RAMPZ register is only
implemented when the program space is larger than 64K bytes.
Bit 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
RAMPZ RAMPZ1 RAMPZ0
ZH (R31) Z15 Z14 Z13 Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 Z8
ZL (R30) Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
489
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Since the Flash is organized in pages (see "Table 31-7" on page 505), the Program
Counter can be treated as having two different sections. One section, consisting of the
least significant bits, is addressing the words within a page, while the most significant
bits are addressing the pages. This is shown in Figure 30-3 below. Note that the Page
Erase and Page Write operations are addressed independently. Therefore it is of major
importance that the Boot Loader software addresses the same page in both the Page
Erase and Page Write operation. Once a programming operation is initiated, the
address is latched and the Z-pointer can be used for other operations.
The (E)LPM instruction uses the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction
addresses the Flash byte-by-byte, also bit Z0 of the Z-pointer is used.
Figure 30-3. Addressing the Flash during SPM
PROGRAM MEMORY
0115
Z - REGISTER
BIT
0
ZPAGEMSB
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN A PAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
ZPCMSB
INSTRUCTION WORD
PAGE PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:
00
01
02
PAGEEND
PAGE
PCWORDPCPAGE
PCMSB PAGEMSB
PROGRAM
COUNTER
Note: 1. The different variables used in Figure 30-3 above are listed in Table 30-6 on
page 496.
30.6 Self-Programming the Flash
The program memory is updated in a page by page fashion. Before programming a
page with the data stored in the temporary page buffer, the page must be erased. The
temporary page buffer is filled one word at a time using SPM. The buffer must be filled
before the Page Write command.
Required sequence for self-programming the Flash:
• Perform a Page Erase,
• Fill temporary page buffer,
• Perform a Page Write;
If only a part of the page needs to be changed, the rest of the page must be stored
before the erase, and then be rewritten. The temporary page buffer can be accessed in
a random sequence. It is essential that the page address used in both the Page Erase
490
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
and Page Write operation is addressing the same page. For an assembly code example
see "Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader" on page 494.
30.6.1 Performing Page Erase by SPM
To execute Page Erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000011” to
SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in
R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE in the Z-register.
Other bits in the Z-pointer will be ignored during this operation.
• Page Erase to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the Page
Erase.
• Page Erase to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation.
30.6.2 Filling the Temporary Buffer (Page Loading)
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0,
write “00000001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing
SPMCSR. The content of PCWORD in the Z-register is used to address the data in the
temporary buffer. The temporary buffer will be auto-erased after a Page Write operation
or by writing the RWWSRE bit in SPMCSR. It is also erased after a system reset. Note
that it is not possible to write more than one time to each address without erasing the
temporary buffer.
If the EEPROM is written in the middle of an SPM Page Load operation, all data loaded
is still buffered.
30.6.3 Performing a Page Write
To execute Page Write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “X0000101” to
SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCSR. The data in
R1 and R0 is ignored. The page address must be written to PCPAGE. Other bits in the
Z-pointer must be written to zero during this operation.
• Page Write to the RWW section: The NRWW section can be read during the Page
Write.
• Page Write to the NRWW section: The CPU is halted during the operation.
30.6.4 Using the SPM Interrupt
If the SPM interrupt is enabled, the SPM interrupt will generate a constant interrupt
when the SPMEN bit in SPMCSR is cleared. This means that the interrupt can be used
instead of polling the SPMCSR Register in software. When using the SPM interrupt, the
Interrupt Vectors should be moved to the BLS section to avoid that an interrupt is
accessing the RWW section when it is blocked for reading. How to move the interrupts
is described in "Interrupts" on page 241.
30.6.5 Consideration While Updating BLS
Special care must be taken if the user allows the Boot Loader section to be updated by
leaving Boot Lock bit11 un-programmed. An accidental write to the Boot Loader itself
can corrupt the entire Boot Loader, and further software updates might be impossible. If
it is not necessary to change the Boot Loader software itself, it is recommended to
program the Boot Lock bit11 to protect the Boot Loader software from any internal
software changes.
491
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
30.6.6 Prevent Reading the RWW Section During Self-Programming
During Self-Programming (either Page Erase or Page Write), the RWW section is
always blocked for reading. The user software itself must prevent that this section is
addressed during the self programming operation. The RWWSB in the SPMCSR will be
set as long as the RWW section is busy. During Self-Programming the Interrupt Vector
table should be moved to the BLS as described in "Interrupts" on page 241, or the
interrupts must be disabled. Before addressing the RWW section after the programming
is completed, the user software must clear the RWWSB by writing the RWWSRE. See
"Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader" on page 494 for an example.
30.6.7 Setting the Boot Loader Lock Bits by SPM
To set the Boot Loader Lock bits and general Lock bits, write the desired data to R0,
write “X0001001” to SPMCSR and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing
SPMCSR.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R0 1 1 BLB12 BLB11 BLB02 BLB01 LB2 LB1
See Table 31-2 on page 502 for how the different settings of the Boot Loader bits affect
the Flash access.
If bits 5:0 in R0 are cleared (zero), the corresponding Lock bit will be programmed if an
SPM instruction is executed within four cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in
SPMCSR. The Z-pointer is don’t care during this operation, but for future compatibility it
is recommended to load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 (same as used for reading the Lock
bits). For future compatibility it is also recommended to set bits 7 and 6 in R0 to “1”
when writing the Lock bits. When programming the Lock bits the entire Flash can be
read during the operation.
30.6.8 EEPROM Write Prevents Writing to SPMCSR
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to Flash.
Reading the Signature Row, Fuses and Lock bits from software will also be prevented
during the EEPROM write operation. It is recommended that the user checks the status
bit (EEPE) in the EECR Register and verifies that the bit is cleared before writing to the
SPMCSR Register.
30.6.9 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits from Software
It is possible to read both the Fuse and Lock bits from software. To read the Lock bits,
load the Z-pointer with 0x0001 and set the BLBSET and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR.
When an (E)LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the BLBSET and
SPMEN bits are set in SPMCSR, the value of the Lock bits will be loaded in the
destination register. The BLBSET and SPMEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of
reading the Lock bits or if no (E)LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles or
no SPM instruction is executed within four CPU cycles. When BLBSET and SPMEN are
cleared, (E)LPM will work as described in the Instruction Set Manual.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rd - - BLB12 BLB11 BLB02 BLB01 LB2 LB1
The algorithm for reading the Fuse Low byte is similar to the one described above for
reading the Lock bits. To read the Fuse Low byte, load the Z-pointer with 0x0000 and
set the BLBSET and SPMEN bits in SPMCSR. When an (E)LPM instruction is executed
within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in the SPMCSR, the
value of the Fuse Low byte (FLB) will be loaded in the destination register as shown on
492
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
the next page. Refer to (see "Table 31-5" on page 504) for a detailed description and
mapping of the Fuse Low byte.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rd FLB7 FLB6 FLB5 FLB4 FLB3 FLB2 FLB1 FLB0
Similarly, load 0x0003 in the Z-pointer for reading the Fuse High byte. When an (E)LPM
instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in
the SPMCSR, the value of the Fuse High byte (FHB) will be loaded in the destination
register as shown below. Refer to "Table 31-4" on page 503 for detailed description and
mapping of the Fuse High byte.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rd FHB7 FHB6 FHB5 FHB4 FHB3 FHB2 FHB1 FHB0
Load 0x0002 in the Z-pointer for reading the Extended Fuse byte. When an (E)LPM
instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are set in
the SPMCSR, the value of the Extended Fuse byte (EFB) will be loaded in the
destination register as shown below. Refer to Table 31-3 on page 503 for detailed
description and mapping of the Extended Fuse byte.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Rd - - - - - EFB2 EFB1 EFB0
Fuse and Lock bits that are programmed will be read as zero. Fuse and Lock bits that
are un-programmed will be read as one.
30.6.10 Reading the Signature Row from Software
To read the Signature Row from software, load the Z-pointer with the signature byte
address given in Table 30-3 on page 493 and set the SIGRD and SPMEN bits in
SPMCSR. When a LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the
SIGRD and SPMEN bits are set in SPMCSR, the signature byte value will be loaded in
the destination register. The SIGRD and SPMEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of
reading the Signature Row or if no LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles.
Write access to the register SPMCSR is blocked during the three CPU cycles.
When SIGRD and SPMEN are cleared, LPM will work as described in the Instruction
Set Manual. The Signature Row cannot be read during an EEPROM write/erase
operation.
Assembly Code Example
; - The routine reads the three device signature bytes.
; - At the end the device signature bytes are stored in the CPU
; register r3, r4 and r5.
; - the nop statements can be replaced by any other statements as
; long as the blocking condition (respective time) of SPMCSR is
; respected.
ldi r16, (1<<SIGRD)|(1<<SPMEN)
out SPMCSR, r16
lpm r3, Z+ ; read Signature
nop
nop
nop
493
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Assembly Code Example
out SPMCSR, r16 ; write SPMCSR
lpm r4, Z+
nop
nop
nop
out SPMCSR, r16 ; write SPMCSR
lpm r5, Z+
Table 30-3. Signature Row Addressing
Signature Byte Z-Pointer Address(1)
Device Signature Byte 1 0x0000
Device Signature Byte 2 0x0002
Device Signature Byte 3 0x0004
RC Oscillator Calibration Byte 0x0001
User Signature Data – Page 1 0x0100 – 0x01FF
User Signature Data – Page 2 0x0200 – 0x02FF
User Signature Data – Page 3 0x0300 – 0x03FF
Note: 1. All other addresses are reserved for future use.
30.6.11 Preventing Flash Corruption
During periods of VDEVDD<1.8V, the Flash program can be corrupted because the supply
voltage is too low for the CPU and the Flash to operate properly. These issues are the
same as for board level systems using Flash, and the same design solutions should be
applied.
A Flash program corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too
low. First, a regular write sequence to the Flash requires a minimum voltage to operate
correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly, if the supply
voltage for executing instructions is too low.
Flash corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommendations
(one is sufficient):
1. If there is no need for a Boot Loader update in the system, program the Boot Loader
Lock bits to prevent any Boot Loader software updates.
2. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply
voltage. This can be done by enabling the internal Brown-out Detector (BOD) if the
operating voltage matches the detection level. If not, an external low VDEVDD reset
protection circuit can be used. If a reset occurs while a write operation is in progress,
the write operation will be completed under the condition that the power supply
voltage is sufficient.
3. Keep the AVR core in Power-down sleep mode during periods of low VDEVDD. This
will prevent the CPU from attempting to decode and execute instructions, effectively
protecting the SPMCSR Register and thus the Flash from unintentional writes.
494
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
30.6.12 Programming Time for Flash when Using SPM
The calibrated RC Oscillator is used to time Flash accesses. Table 30-4 below shows
the typical programming time for Flash accesses from the CPU.
Table 30-4. SPM Programming Time
Symbol Min Programming Time Max Programming Time
Flash write (Page Write, and write
Lock bits by SPM) 3.7 ms 4.5 ms
Flash write (Page Erase) 7.3 ms 8.9 ms
30.6.13 Simple Assembly Code Example for a Boot Loader
Assembly Code Example(1)
;-the routine writes one page of data from RAM to Flash
; the first data location in RAM is pointed to by the Y pointer
; the first data location in Flash is pointed to by the Z-pointer
;-error handling is not included
;-the routine must be placed inside the Boot space
; (at least the Do_spm sub routine). Only code inside NRWW section
; can be read during Self-Programming (Page Erase and Page Write).
;-registers used: r0, r1, temp1 (r16), temp2 (r17), looplo (r24),
; loophi (r25), spmcrval (r20)
; storing and restoring of registers is not included in the routine
; register usage can be optimized at the expense of code size
;-It is assumed that either the interrupt table is moved to the
; Boot loader section or that the interrupts are disabled.
.equ PAGESIZEB=PAGESIZE*2 ;PAGESIZEB is page in BYTES, not words
.org SMALLBOOTSTART
Write_page:
; Page Erase
ldi spmcrval, (1<<PGERS) | (1<<SPMEN)
call Do_spm
; re-enable the RWW section
ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SPMEN)
call Do_spm
; transfer data from RAM to Flash page buffer
ldi looplo, low(PAGESIZEB) ;init loop variable
ldi loophi, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256
Wrloop:
ld r0, Y+
ld r1, Y+
ldi spmcrval, (1<<SPMEN)
call Do_spm
adiw ZH:ZL, 2
sbiw loophi:looplo, 2 ;use subi for PAGESIZEB<=256
brne Wrloop
; execute Page Write
495
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Assembly Code Example(1)
subi ZL, low(PAGESIZEB) ;restore pointer
sbci ZH, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256
ldi spmcrval, (1<<PGWRT) | (1<<SPMEN)
call Do_spm
; re-enable the RWW section
ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SPMEN)
call Do_spm
; read back and check, optional
ldi looplo, low(PAGESIZEB) ;init loop variable
ldi loophi, high(PAGESIZEB) ;not required for PAGESIZEB<=256
subi YL, low(PAGESIZEB) ;restore pointer
sbci YH, high(PAGESIZEB)
Rdloop:
elpm r0, Z+
ld r1, Y+
cpse r0, r1
jmp Error
sbiw loophi:looplo, 1 ;use subi for PAGESIZEB<=256
brne Rdloop
; return to RWW section
; verify that RWW section is safe to read
Return:
in temp1, SPMCSR
; If RWWSB is set, the RWW section is not ready yet
sbrs temp1, RWWSB
ret
; re-enable the RWW section
ldi spmcrval, (1<<RWWSRE) | (1<<SPMEN)
call Do_spm
rjmp Return
Do_spm:
; check for previous SPM complete
Wait_spm:
in temp1, SPMCSR
sbrc temp1, SPMEN
rjmp Wait_spm
; input: spmcrval determines SPM action
; disable interrupts if enabled, store status
in temp2, SREG
cli
; check that no EEPROM write access is present
Wait_ee:
sbic EECR, EEPE
rjmp Wait_ee
496
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Assembly Code Example(1)
; SPM timed sequence
out SPMCSR, spmcrval
spm
; restore SREG (to enable interrupts if originally enabled)
out SREG, temp2
ret
Notes: 1. See "About Code Examples" on page 8.
30.6.14 Boot Loader Parameters for 64 kByte of Flash Memory
In Table 30-5 below through Table 30-7 on page 497, the parameters used in the
description of the Self-Programming are given.
Table 30-5. Read-While-Write Limit with 64 kByte of Flash Memory
Section(1) Pages Address
Read-While-Write section (RWW) 224 0x0000 – 0x6FFF
No Read-While-Write section (NRWW) 32 0x7000 – 0x7FFF
Note: 1. For details about these two sections see "NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section"
on page 487.
Table 30-6. Explanation of different variables used in Figure 30-3 on page 489 and
the mapping to the Z-pointer for 64 kByte of Flash Memory
Variable Value
Corresponding
Z-value(2) Description(1)
PCMSB 14 Most significant bit in the Program Counter.
(The Program Counter is 16 bits PC[15:0])
PAGEMSB 6
Most significant bit which is used to address
the words within one page (128 words in a
page requires seven bits PC [6:0]).
ZPCMSB Z15
Bit in Z-pointer that is mapped to PCMSB.
Because Z0 is not used, the ZPCMSB
equals PCMSB + 1.
ZPAGEMSB Z7
Bit in Z-pointer that is mapped to PCMSB.
Because Z0 is not used; the ZPAGEMSB
equals PAGEMSB + 1.
PCPAGE PC[14:7] Z15:Z8 Program Counter page address: Page
select, for Page Erase and Page Write.
PCWORD PC[6:0] Z7:Z1
Program Counter word address: Word
select, for filling temporary buffer (must be
zero during Page Write operation)
Notes: 1. Z0: should be zero for all SPM commands, byte select for the (E)LPM instruction.
2. See "Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming" on page 488 for details
about the use of Z-pointer during Self-Programming.
497
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 30-7. Boot Size Configuration with 64 kByte of Flash Memory(1)
BOOTSZ1
BOOTSZ0
Boot Size
Pages
Application Flash
Section
Boot Loader Flash
Section
End Application
Section
Boot Reset Address
(Start Boot Loader
Section)
1 1 512
words 4 0x0000 –
0x7DFF
0x7E00 –
0x7FFF 0x7DFF 0x7E00
1 0 1024
words 8 0x0000 –
0x7BFF
0x7C00 –
0x7FFF 0x7BFF 0x7C00
0 1 2048
words 16 0x0000 –
0x77FF
0x7800 –
0x7FFF 0x77FF 0x7800
0 0 4096
words 32 0x0000 –
0x6FFF
0x7000 –
0x7FFF 0x6FFF 0x7000
Note: 1. The different BOOTSZ Fuse configurations are shown in Figure 30-2 on page 487.
30.6.15 Boot Loader Parameters for 128 kByte of Flash Memory
In Table 30-8 below through Table 30-10 on page 498, the parameters used in the
description of the Self-Programming are given.
Table 30-8. Read-While-Write Limit with 128 kByte of Flash Memory
Section(1) Pages Address
Read-While-Write section (RWW) 480 0x0000 – 0xEFFF
No Read-While-Write section (NRWW) 32 0xF000 – 0xFFFF
Note: 1. For details about these two sections see "NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section"
on page 487 .
Table 30-9. Explanation of different variables used in Figure 30-3 on page 489 and
the mapping to the Z-pointer for 128 kByte of Flash Memory
Variable Value
Corresponding
Z-value(2) Description(1)
PCMSB 15 Most significant bit in the Program Counter.
(The Program Counter is 16 bits PC[15:0])
PAGEMSB 6
Most significant bit which is used to address
the words within one page (128 words in a
page requires seven bits PC [6:0]).
ZPCMSB Z16(3)
Bit in Z-pointer that is mapped to PCMSB.
Because Z0 is not used, the ZPCMSB
equals PCMSB + 1.
ZPAGEMSB Z7
Bit in Z-pointer that is mapped to PCMSB.
Because Z0 is not used; the ZPAGEMSB
equals PAGEMSB + 1.
PCPAGE PC[15:7] Z16(3):Z8 Program Counter page address: Page
select, for Page Erase and Page Write.
498
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Variable Value
Corresponding
Z-value(2) Description(1)
PCWORD PC[6:0] Z7:Z1
Program Counter word address: Word
select, for filling temporary buffer (must be
zero during Page Write operation)
Notes: 1. Z0: should be zero for all SPM commands, byte select for the (E)LPM instruction.
2. See "Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming" on page 488 for details
about the use of Z-pointer during Self-Programming.
3. The Z-register is only 16 bits wide. Bit 16 is located in the RAMPZ register in the
I/O map.
Table 30-10. Boot Size Configuration with 128 kByte of Flash Memory(1)
BOOTSZ1
BOOTSZ0
Boot Size
Pages
Application Flash
Section
Boot Loader Flash
Section
End Application
Section
Boot Reset Address
(Start Boot Loader
Section)
1 1 512
words 4 0x0000 –
0xFDFF
0xFE00 –
0xFFFF 0xFDFF 0xFE00
1 0 1024
words 8 0x0000 –
0xFBFF
0xFC00 –
0xFFFF 0xFBFF 0xFC00
0 1 2048
words 16 0x0000 –
0xF7FF
0xF800 –
0xFFFF 0xF7FF 0xF800
0 0 4096
words 32 0x0000 –
0xEFFF
0xF000 –
0xFFFF 0xEFFF 0xF000
Note: 1. The different BOOTSZ Fuse configurations are shown in Figure 30-2 on page 487.
30.6.16 Boot Loader Parameters for 256 kByte of Flash Memory
In Table 30-11 below through Table 30-13 on page 499, the parameters used in the
description of the Self-Programming are given.
Table 30-11. Read-While-Write Limit with 256 kByte of Flash Memory
Section(1) Pages Address
Read-While-Write section (RWW) 992 0x00000 – 0x1EFFF
No Read-While-Write section (NRWW) 32 0x1F000 – 0x1FFFF
Note: 1. For details about these two sections see "NRWW – No Read-While-Write Section"
on page 487.
Table 30-12. Explanation of different variables used in Figure 30-3 on page 489 and
the mapping to the Z-pointer for 256 kByte of Flash Memory
Variable Value
Corresponding
Z-value(2) Description(1)
PCMSB 16 Most significant bit in the Program Counter.
(The Program Counter is 16 bits PC[15:0])
PAGEMSB 6
Most significant bit which is used to address
the words within one page (128 words in a
page requires seven bits PC [6:0]).
499
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Variable Value
Corresponding
Z-value(2) Description(1)
ZPCMSB Z17:Z16(3)
Bit in Z-pointer that is mapped to PCMSB.
Because Z0 is not used, the ZPCMSB
equals PCMSB + 1.
ZPAGEMSB Z7
Bit in Z-pointer that is mapped to PCMSB.
Because Z0 is not used; the ZPAGEMSB
equals PAGEMSB + 1.
PCPAGE PC[16:7] Z17(3):Z8 Program Counter page address: Page
select, for Page Erase and Page Write.
PCWORD PC[6:0] Z7:Z1
Program Counter word address: Word
select, for filling temporary buffer (must be
zero during Page Write operation)
Notes: 1. Z0: should be zero for all SPM commands, byte select for the (E)LPM instruction.
2. See "Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming" on page 488 for details
about the use of Z-pointer during Self-Programming.
3. The Z-register is only 16 bits wide. Bit [17:16] are located in the RAMPZ register
in the I/O map.
Table 30-13. Boot Size Configuration with 256 kByte of Flash Memory(1)
BOOTSZ1
BOOTSZ0
Boot Size
Pages
Application Flash
Section
Boot Loader Flash
Section
End Application
Section
Boot Reset Address
(Start Boot Loader
Section)
1 1 512
words 4 0x00000 –
0x1FDFF
0x1FE00 –
0x1FFFF 0x1FDFF 0x1FE00
1 0 1024
words 8 0x00000 –
0x1FBFF
0x1FC00 –
0x1FFFF 0x1FBFF 0x1FC00
0 1 2048
words 16 0x00000 –
0x1F7FF
0x1F800 –
0x1FFFF 0x1F7FF 0x1F800
0 0 4096
words 32 0x00000 –
0x1EFFF
0x1F000 –
0x1FFFF 0x1EFFF 0x1F000
Note: 1. The different BOOTSZ Fuse configurations are shown in Figure 30-2 on page 487.
30.7 Register Description
30.7.1 SPMCSR – Store Program Memory Control Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$37 ($57) SPMIE RWWSB
SIGRD RWWSRE
BLBSET
PGWRT PGERS SPMEN SPMCSR
Read/Write RW R RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The Store Program Memory Control Register contains the control bits needed to control
the Boot Loader operations. Note: Only one SPM instruction should be active at any
time.
500
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Bit 7 – SPMIE - SPM Interrupt Enable
When the SPMIE bit is written to one, and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one),
the SPM ready interrupt will be enabled. The SPM ready Interrupt will be executed as
long as the SPMEN bit in the SPMCR register is cleared.
• Bit 6 – RWWSB - Read While Write Section Busy
When a self-programming (page erase or page write) operation to the RWW section is
initiated, the RWWSB will be set (one) by hardware. When the RWWSB bit is set, the
RWW section cannot be accessed. The RWWSB bit will be cleared if the RWWSRE bit
is written to one after a self-programming operation is completed. Alternatively the
RWWSB bit will automatically be cleared if a page load operation is initiated.
• Bit 5 – SIGRD - Signature Row Read
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next LPM instruction within
three clock cycles will read a byte from the signature row into the destination register. A
SPM instruction within four cycles after SIGRD and SPMEN are set, will have no effect.
This operation is reserved for future use and should not be used.
• Bit 4 – RWWSRE - Read While Write Section Read Enable
When programming (page erase or page write) to the RWW section, the RWW section
is blocked for reading (the RWWSB will be set by hardware). To re-enable the RWW
section, the user software must wait until the programming is completed (SPMEN will
be cleared). Then, if the RWWSRE bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN,
the next SPM instruction within four clock cycles re-enables the RWW section. The
RWW section cannot be re-enabled while the Flash is busy with a page erase or a page
write (SPMEN is set). If the RWWSRE bit is written while the Flash is being loaded, the
Flash load operation will abort and the data loaded will be lost.
• Bit 3 – BLBSET - Boot Lock Bit Set
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within
four clock cycles sets Boot Lock bits, according to the data in R0. The data in R1 and
the address in the Z pointer are ignored. The BLBSET bit will automatically be cleared
upon completion of the lock bit set, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock
cycles. A LPM instruction within three cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in the
SPMCR register, will read either the Lock-bits or the Fuse bits (depending on Z0 in the
Z pointer) into the destination register.
• Bit 2 – PGWRT - Page Write
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within
four clock cycles executes page write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The
page address is taken from the high part of the Z pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are
ignored. The PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a page write, or if no SPM
instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire
page write operation if the NRWW section is addressed.
• Bit 1 – PGERS - Page Erase
If this bit is written to one at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within
four clock cycles executes page erase. The page address is taken from the high part of
the Z pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will auto-clear upon
completion of a page erase, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock
cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire page write operation if the NRWW section is
addressed.
• Bit 0 – SPMEN - Store Program Memory Enable
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If written to one
together with either RWWSRE, BLB-SET, PGWRT or PGERS, the following SPM
501
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
instruction will have a special meaning, see description above. If only SPMEN is written,
the following SPM instruction will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer
addressed by the Z pointer. The LSB of the Z pointer is ignored. The SPMEN bit will
auto-clear upon completion of an SPM instruction, or if no SPM instruction is executed
within four clock cycles. During page erase and page write, the SPMEN bit remain high
until the operation is completed. Writing any other combination than "10001", "01001",
"00101", "00011" or "00001" in the lower five bits will have no effect.
30.7.2 NEMCR – Flash Extended-Mode Control-Register
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
NA ($75) Resx7 ENEAM AEAM1 AEAM0 Resx3 Resx2 Resx1 Resx0 NEMCR
Read/Write RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW
Initial Value 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
The Flash Extended-Mode Control-Register handles the extended address-mode of the
extra rows.
• Bit 7 – Resx7 - Reserved
• Bit 6 – ENEAM - Enable Extended Address Mode for Extra Rows
When active high, the extended address mode of the extra rows is enabled. The
address is decoded from bits AEAM1:0 of this register.
• Bit 5:4 – AEAM1:0 - Address for Extended Address Mode of Extra Rows
These bits are only used when bit ENEAM of this register is set high. Then AEAM1:0
are used to decode the addresses of the extra rows. A value of 0 decodes the default
Signature Row that is also accessible when the extended address mode is deactivated.
Table 30-14 AEAM Register Bits
Register Bits Value Description
AEAM1:0 0 Signature Row
1 User Row 1
2 User Row 2
3 User Row 3
• Bit 3:0 – Resx3:0 - Reserved
502
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
31 Memory Programming
31.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 provides six Lock bits which can be left un-
programmed (“1”) or can be programmed (“0”) to obtain the additional features listed in
Table 31-2 below. The Lock bits can only be erased to “1” with the Chip Erase
command.
Table 31-1. Lock Bit Byte (1)
Lock Bit Byte Bit No Description Default Value
− 7 − 1 (un-programmed)
− 6 − 1 (un-programmed)
BLB12 5 Boot Lock bit 1 (un-programmed)
BLB11 4 Boot Lock bit 1 (un-programmed)
BLB02 3 Boot Lock bit 1 (un-programmed)
BLB01 2 Boot Lock bit 1 (un-programmed)
LB2 1 Lock bit 1 (un-programmed)
LB1 0 Lock bit 1 (un-programmed)
Note: 1. “1” means un-programmed, “0” means programmed.
Table 31-2. Lock Bit Protection Modes (1)(2)
Memory Lock Bits Protection Type
LB Mode LB2 LB1
1 1 1 No memory lock features enabled.
2 1 0
Further programming of the Flash and EEPROM is
disabled in Parallel, JTAG and Serial Programming
mode. The Fuse bits are locked in Parallel, JTAG and
Serial Programming mode.(1)
3 0 0
Further programming and verification of the Flash and
EEPROM is disabled in Parallel, JTAG and Serial
Programming mode. The Boot Lock bits and Fuse bits
are locked in Parallel, JTAG and Serial Programming
mode.(1)
BLB0 Mode BL02 BL01
1 1 1 No restrictions for SPM or (E)LPM accessing the
Application section.
2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section.
3 0 0
SPM is not allowed to write to the Application section,
and (E)LPM executing from the Boot Loader section
is not allowed to read from the Application section. If
Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader
section, interrupts are disabled while executing from
the Application section.
4 0 1
(E)LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not
allowed to read from the Application section. If
Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Boot Loader
section, interrupts are disabled while executing from
the Application section.
503
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Memory Lock Bits Protection Type
BLB1 Mode BL12 BL11
1 1 1 No restrictions for SPM or (E)LPM accessing the Boot
Loader section.
2 1 0 SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader
section.
3 0 0
SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader
section, and (E)LPM executing from the Application
section is not allowed to read from the Boot Loader
section. If Interrupt Vectors are placed in the
Application section, interrupts are disabled while
executing from the Boot Loader section.
4 0 1
(E)LPM executing from the Application section is not
allowed to read from the Boot Loader section. If
Interrupt Vectors are placed in the Application
section, interrupts are disabled while executing from
the Boot Loader section.
Notes: 1. Program the Fuse bits and Boot Lock bits before programming the LB1 and LB2.
2. “1” means un-programmed, “0” means programmed.
31.2 Fuse Bits
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 has three Fuse bytes. Table 31-3 below – Table 31-5
on page 504 describe briefly the functionality of all the fuses and how they are mapped
into the Fuse bytes. Note that the fuses are read as logical zero, “0”, if they are
programmed.
Table 31-3. Extended Fuse Byte
Ext. Fuse Byte Bit No Description Default Value
− 7 − 1
− 6 − 1
− 5 − 1
− 4 − 1
Reserved 3 Do not modify 1 (un-programmed)
BODLEVEL2(1) 2 Brown-out Detector trigger level 1 (un-programmed)
BODLEVEL1(1) 1 Brown-out Detector trigger level 1 (un-programmed)
BODLEVEL0(1) 0 Brown-out Detector trigger level 0 (programmed)
Notes: 1. See Table 35-23 on page 553 for BODLEVEL Fuse decoding.
Table 31-4. Fuse High Byte
Fuse High Byte Bit No Description Default Value
OCDEN(4) 7 Enable On-chip debugging
(OCD)
1 (un-programmed, OCD
disabled)
JTAGEN 6 Enable JTAG interface 0 (programmed, JTAG
enabled)
SPIEN(1) 5 Enable Serial Program and Data
Downloading (SPI)
0 (programmed, SPI
programming enabled)
WDTON(3) 4 Watchdog Timer always on 1 (un-programmed)
504
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Fuse High Byte Bit No Description Default Value
EESAVE 3 EEPROM memory is preserved
through the Chip Erase
1 (un-programmed,
EEPROM not preserved)
BOOTSZ1 2 Select Boot Size (see Table 30-
10 on page 498 for details)
0 (programmed)(2)
BOOTSZ0 1 Select Boot Size (see Table 30-
10 on page 498for details)
0 (programmed) (2)
BOOTRST 0 Select Reset Vector 1 (un-programmed)
Notes: 1. The SPIEN Fuse is not accessible in serial programming mode.
2. The default value of BOOTSZ1:0 results in maximum Boot Size. See Table 30-10
on page 498 for details.
3. See "WDTCSR – Watchdog Timer Control Register" on page 215 for details.
4. Never ship a product with the OCDEN Fuse programmed regardless of the setting
of Lock bits and JTAGEN Fuse. A programmed OCDEN Fuse enables some
parts of the clock system to be running in all sleep modes. This may increase the
power consumption.
Table 31-5. Fuse Low Byte
Fuse Low Byte Bit No Description Default Value
CKDIV8(4) 7 Divide clock by 8 0 (programmed)
CKOUT(3) 6 Clock output 1 (un-programmed)
SUT1 5 Select start-up time 1 (un-programmed)(1)
SUT0 4 Select start-up time 0 (programmed) (1)
CKSEL3 3 Select Clock source 0 (programmed)(2)
CKSEL2 2 Select Clock source 0 (programmed) (2)
CKSEL1 1 Select Clock source 1 (un-programmed) (2)
CKSEL0 0 Select Clock source 0 (programmed) (2)
Notes: 1. The default value of SUT1:0 results in maximum start-up time for the default clock
source. See "System Control and Reset" on page 207 for details.
2. The default setting of CKSEL3:0 results in internal RC Oscillator @ 8 MHz. See
"Table 11-1" on page 175 for details.
3. The CKOUT Fuse allows the system clock to be output on PORTE7. See "Clock
Output Buffer" on page 179 for details.
4. See "System Clock Prescaler" on page 179 for details.
The status of the Fuse bits is not affected by Chip Erase. Note that the Fuse bits are
locked if Lock bit1 (LB1) is programmed. Program the Fuse bits before programming
the Lock bits.
31.2.1 Latching of Fuses
The fuse values are latched when the device enters programming mode and changes
of the fuse values will have no effect until the part leaves Programming mode. This
does not apply to the EESAVE Fuse which will take effect once it is programmed. The
fuses are also latched on Power-up in Normal mode.
505
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
31.3 Signature Bytes
All Atmel microcontrollers have a three-byte signature code which identifies the device.
This code can be read in both serial and parallel mode, also when the device is locked.
The three bytes reside in a separate address space. For the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 the signature bytes are given in Table 31-6 below.
Accessing the signature bytes from software is described in section "Reading the
Signature Row from Software" on page 492.
Table 31-6. Device and JTAG ID (48-pin package)
Part
Signature Byte Number JTAG
0 1 2 Part Number Manufacturer ID
ATmega2564RFR2 0x1E 0xA8 0x03 (1 0xA803 (1 0x1F
ATmega1284RFR2 0x1E 0xA7 0x03 0xA703 0x1F
ATmega644RFR2 0x1E 0xA6 0x03 0xA603 0x1F
Notes: 1. ATmega2564RFR2 revision A implements Signature Byte Number 2 = 0x02
31.4 User Signature Data
Three Flash pages are dedicated for user signature data. These signature pages are
isolated from the main Flash and will not be cleared by a Chip Erase command. Special
commands are available to erase and write data to user signature pages via the Parallel
and JTAG interface (see "Parallel Programming" on page 508 and "Programming via
the JTAG Interface" on page 523 for details). User signature rows can be read from
software in the same way as the device and JTAG identifiers (see section "Reading the
Signature Row from Software" on page 492).
31.5 Calibration Byte
The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 has a byte calibration value for the internal RC
Oscillator. This byte resides in the high byte of address 0x000 in the signature address
space. During reset, this byte is automatically written into the OSCCAL Register to
ensure correct frequency of the calibrated RC Oscillator.
31.6 Page Size
Table 31-7. Number of Words in a Page and Number of Pages in the Flash
Flash Size Page Size PCWORD No. of
Pages
PCPAGE PCMSB
128k words (256k bytes) 128 words PC[6:0] 1024 PC[16:7] 16
64k words (128k bytes) 128 words PC[6:0] 512 PC[15:7] 15
32k words (64k bytes) 128 words PC[6:0] 256 PC[14:7] 14
Notes: 1. The page size for user signature data in all devices is also 128 words.
Table 31-8. Number of Bytes in a Page and Number of Pages in the EEPROM
EEPROM Size Page Size PCWORD No. of
Pages
PCPAGE EEAMSB
8k bytes 8 bytes EEA[2:0] 1024 EEA[12:3] 12
4k bytes 8 bytes EEA[2:0] 512 EEA[11:3] 11
2k bytes 8 bytes EEA[2:0] 256 EEA[10:3] 10
506
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
31.7 Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands
This section describes how to parallel program and verify Flash Program memory,
EEPROM Data memory, Memory Lock bits, and Fuse bits in the
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
31.7.1 Signal Names
In this section, some pins of the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 are referenced by signal
names describing their functionality during parallel programming; see Figure 31-1 below
and Table 31-9 below. Pins not described in this table are referenced by their default
pin names.
The XA1/XA0 pins determine the action executed when the CLKI pin is given a positive
pulse. The bit coding is shown in Table 31-12 on page 507.
When pulsing WR
___
or OE
__
or, the command loaded determines the action executed. The
different commands are shown in Table 31-13 on page 507.
Figure 31-1. Parallel Programming (1)
Note: 1. Unused Pins should be left floating.
Table 31-9. Pin Name Mapping
Signal Name in
Programming Mode Pin Name I/O Function
RDY/BSY
___
PD1 O 0: Device is busy programming, 1: Device is
ready for new command.
OE
__
PD2 I Output Enable (Active low).
WR
___
PD3 I Write Pulse (Active low).
BS1 PD4 I Byte Select 1.
XA0 PD5 I XTAL Action Bit 0.
XA1 PD6 I XTAL Action Bit 1.
507
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Signal Name in
Programming Mode Pin Name I/O Function
PAGEL PD7 I Program Memory and EEPROM data Page
Load.
BS2 PE2 I Byte Select 2.
DATA PB7-0 I/O Bi-directional Data bus (Output when OE¯ ¯ ¯ is
low).
Table 31-10. BS2 and BS1 Encoding
BS2 BS1
Flash / EEPROM
Address
Flash Data
Loading / Reading
Fuse
Programming
Reading Fuse
and Lock Bits
0 0 Low Byte Low Byte Low Byte Fuse Low Byte
0 1 High Byte High Byte High Byte Lock Bits
1 0 Extended High
Byte Reserved Extended Byte Extended Fuse
Byte
1 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Fuse High Byte
Table 31-11. Pin Values Used to Enter Programming Mode
Pin Symbol Value
PAGEL Prog_enable[3] 0
XA1 Prog_enable[2] 0
XA0 Prog_enable[1] 0
BS1 Prog_enable[0] 0
Table 31-12. XA1 and XA0 Encoding
XA1 XA0 Action when CLKI is Pulsed
0 0 Load Flash or EEPROM Address (High or low address byte
determined by BS2 and BS1).
0 1 Load Data (High or Low data byte for Flash determined by
BS1).
1 0 Load Command.
1 1 No Action, Idle.
Table 31-13. Command Byte Bit Encoding
Command Byte Command Executed
1000 0000 Chip Erase
0100 0000 Write Fuse bits
0010 0000 Write Lock bits
0001 0000 Write Flash
0001 0001 Write EEPROM
0000 1000 Read Signature bytes and Calibration byte
0000 0100 Read Fuse and Lock bits
0000 0010 Read Flash
0000 0011 Read EEPROM
508
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 31-14. Command Byte Bit Encoding (EEPROM Erase, User Signature Data)
Command Byte Command Executed
1000 0010 Chip Erase EEPROM only
1000 0011 Erase EEPROM Page
0001 0010 Write User Signature Page(1)
1000 0100 Erase User Signature Page(1)
0000 1000 Read User Signature Page(1)
Note: 1. See section "User Signature Data" on page 505.
31.8 Parallel Programming
Pulses of CLKI and in the following command sequences are assumed to be at least
250 ns wide unless otherwise noted.
31.8.1 Enter Programming Mode
The following algorithm puts the device in parallel programming mode:
1. Apply 3.3V between DEVDD and DVSS.
2. Set RSTN to 0 and TST to 0.
3. Set the Prog_enable pins listed in Table 31-11 on page 507 to “0000” and wait at
least 100ns.
4. Set TST to 1. TST can be set high any time before but not after the rising edge of
RSTN (tTSTRNH).
5. Set RSTN to 1. Any activity on Prog_enable pins within 100 ns after RSTN is set to 1
will cause the device to fail entering programming mode.
6. Wait at least 50 µs before sending a command.
31.8.2 Considerations for Efficient Programming
The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For
efficient programming, the following should be considered.
• The command needs only be loaded once when writing or reading multiple memory
locations.
• Skip writing the data value 0xFF, that is the contents of the entire EEPROM (unless
the EESAVE Fuse is programmed) and Flash after a Chip Erase.
• Address high byte needs only be loaded before programming or reading a new 256
word window in Flash or 256 byte EEPROM. This consideration also applies to
Signature bytes reading.
31.8.3 Chip Erase
The Chip Erase will erase the Flash and EEPROM (1) memories plus Lock bits. The
Lock bits are not reset until the program memory has been completely erased. The
Fuse bits are not changed. A Chip Erase must be performed before the Flash and/or
EEPROM are reprogrammed.
Note: 1. The EEPROM memory is preserved during Chip Erase if the EESAVE Fuse is
programmed.
509
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Load Command “Chip Erase”
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.
2. Set BS1 to “0”.
3. Set DATA to “1000 0000”. This is the command for Chip Erase.
4. Give CLKI a positive pulse. This loads the command.
5. Give WR
___
a negative pulse. This starts the Chip Erase. RDY/ BSY
___
goes low.
6. Wait until RDY/BSY
___
goes high before loading a new command.
31.8.4 Programming the Flash
The Flash is organized in pages; see Table 31-7 on page 505. When programming the
Flash, the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of program
data to be programmed simultaneously. The following procedure describes how to
program the entire Flash memory:
A. Load Command “Write Flash”
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.
2. Set BS1 to “0”.
3. Set DATA to “0001 0000”. This is the command for Write Flash.
4. Give CLKI a positive pulse. This loads the command.
B. Load Address Low byte (Address bits 7:0)
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.
2. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”. This selects the address low byte.
3. Set DATA = Address low byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Give CLKI a positive pulse. This loads the address low byte.
C. Load Data Low Byte
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading.
2. Set DATA = Data low byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. Give CLKI a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.
D. Load Data High Byte
1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte.
2. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading.
3. Set DATA = Data high byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Give CLKI a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.
E. Latch Data
1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte.
2. Give PAGEL a positive pulse. This latches the data bytes. (see Figure 31-3 on page
511 for signal waveforms).
F. Repeat B through E until the entire buffer is filled or until all data within the page is
loaded.
510
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
While the lower bits in the address are mapped to words within the page, the higher bits
address the pages within the Flash. This is illustrated in Figure 31-5 on page 511. Note
that if less than eight bits are required to address words in the page (page size < 256),
the most significant bit(s) in the address low byte are used to address the page when
performing a Page Write.
G. Load Address High byte (Address bits15:8)
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.
2. Set BS2, BS1 to “01”. This selects the address high byte.
3. Set DATA = Address high byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Give CLKI a positive pulse. This loads the address high byte.
H. Load Address Extended High byte (Address bits 23:16)
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.
2. Set BS2, BS1 to “10”. This selects the address high byte.
3. Set DATA = Address extended high byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Give CLKI a positive pulse. This loads the address extended high byte.
I. Program Page
1. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”
2. Give WR
___
a negative pulse. This starts programming of the entire page of data.
RDY/BSY
___
goes low.
3. Wait until RDY/BSY
___
goes high (See Figure 31-3 on page 511 for signal waveforms).
J. Repeat B through I until the entire Flash is programmed or until all data has been
programmed.
K. End Page Programming
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.
2. Set DATA to “0000 0000”. This is the command for No Operation.
3. Give CLKI a positive pulse. This loads the command, and the internal write signals
are reset.
511
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 31-5. Addressing the Flash which is Organized in Pages (1)
PROGRAM MEMORY
WORD ADDRESS
WITHIN A PAGE
PAGE ADDRESS
WITHIN THE FLASH
INSTRUCTION WORD
PAGE PCWORD[PAGEMSB:0]:
00
01
02
PAGEEND
PAGE
PCWORDPCPAGE
PCMSB PAGEMSB
PROGRAM
COUNTER
Note: 1. PCPAGE and PCWORD are listed in Table 31-7 on page 505.
Figure 31-3. Programming the Flash Waveforms (1)
Note: 1. “XX” is don’t care. The letters refer to the programming description above.
31.8.5 Programming the EEPROM
The EEPROM is organized in pages; see Table 31-8 on page 505. When programming
the EEPROM, the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of
data to be programmed simultaneously. The programming algorithm for the EEPROM
data memory is as follows (refer to "Programming the Flash" on page 509 for details on
Command, Address and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0001 0001”.
2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. C: Load Data (0x00 - 0xFF).
5. E: Latch data (give PAGEL a positive pulse).
512
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
K: Repeat 3 through 5 until the entire buffer is filled.
L: Program EEPROM page
1. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”.
2. Give WR
___
a negative pulse. This starts programming of the EEPROM page. RDY/BSY
___
goes low.
3. Wait until to RDY/BSY
___
goes high before programming the next page (See Figure 31-
7 below for signal waveforms).
Figure 31-7. Programming the EEPROM Waveforms
DATA
XA1
XA0
BS1
BS2
CLKI
WR
RDY/BSY
RSTN
OE
PAGEL
0x11 ADDR. LOW DATA XX ADDR. LOW DATA XXADDR. HIGH
A G B C E B C E L
K
31.8.6 Reading the Flash
The algorithm for reading the Flash memory is as follows (refer to "Programming the
Flash" on page 509 for details on Command and Address loading):
1. A: Load Command “0000 0010”.
2. H: Load Address Extended High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Set OE
__
to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The Flash word low byte can now be read at DATA.
5. Set BS1 to “1”. The Flash word high byte can now be read at DATA.
6. Set OE
__
to “1”.
31.8.7 Reading the EEPROM
The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to "Programming
the Flash" on page 509 for details on Command and Address loading):
1. A: Load Command “0000 0011”.
2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. Set OE
__
to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The EEPROM Data byte can now be read at DATA.
5. Set OE
__
to “1”.
31.8.8 Programming the Fuse Low Bits
The algorithm for programming the Fuse Low bits is as follows (refer to "Programming
the Flash" on page 509 for details on Command and Data loading):
513
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”.
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit.
3. Give WR
___
a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY
___
to go high.
31.8.9 Programming the Fuse High Bits
The algorithm for programming the Fuse High bits is as follows (refer to "Programming
the Flash" on page 509 for details on Command and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”.
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit.
3. Set BS2, BS1 to “01”. This selects high data byte.
4. Give WR
___
a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY
___
to go high.
5. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”. This selects low data byte.
31.8.10 Programming the Extended Fuse Bits
The algorithm for programming the Extended Fuse bits is as follows (refer to
"Programming the Flash" on page 509 for details on Command and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”.
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit.
3. Set BS2, BS1 to “10”. This selects extended data byte.
4. Give WR
___
a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY
___
to go high.
5. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”. This selects low data byte.
Figure 31-8. Programming the Fuses Waveforms
31.8.11 Programming the Lock Bits
The algorithm for programming the Lock bits is as follows (refer to "Programming the
Flash" on page 509 for details on Command and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0010 0000”.
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs the Lock bit. If LB mode 3 is active
(LB1 and LB2 are programmed), it is not possible to program the Boot Lock bits by
any External Programming mode.
3. Give WR
___
a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY
___
to go high.
The Lock bits can only be cleared by executing Chip Erase.
514
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
31.8.12 Reading the Fuse and Lock Bits
The algorithm for reading the Fuse and Lock bits is as follows (refer to "Programming
the Flash" on page 509 for details on Command and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0000 0100”.
2. Set OE
__
to “0”, and BS2, BS1 to “00”. The status of the Fuse Low bits can now be
read at DATA (“0” means programmed).
3. Set OE
__
to “0”, and BS2, BS1 to “11”. The status of the Fuse High bits can now be
read at DATA (“0” means programmed).
4. Set OE
__
to “0”, and BS2, BS1 to “10”. The status of the Extended Fuse bits can now
be read at DATA (“0” means programmed).
5. Set OE
__
to “0”, and BS2, BS1 to “01”. The status of the Lock bits can now be read at
DATA (“0” means programmed).
6. Set OE
__
to “1”.
Figure 31-9. Mapping between BS1, BS2 and the Fuse and Lock Bits during Read
Lock Bits 0
1
BS2
Fuse High Byte
0
1
BS1
DATA
Fuse Low Byte 0
1
BS2
Extended Fuse Byte
31.8.13 Reading the Signature Bytes
The algorithm for reading the Signature bytes is as follows (refer to "Programming the
Flash" on page 509 for details on Command and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”.
2. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0x02).
3. Set OE
__
to “0” and BS to “0”. The selected Signature byte can now be read at DATA.
4. Set OE
__
to “1”.
31.8.14 Reading the Calibration Byte
The algorithm for reading the Calibration byte is as follows (refer to "Programming the
Flash" on page 509 for details on Command and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”.
2. B: Load Address Low Byte, 0x00.
3. Set OE
__
to “0” and BS1 to “1”. The Calibration byte can now be read at DATA.
4. Set OE
__
to “1”.
515
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
31.8.15 Chip Erase of EEPROM only
This special Chip Erase command will erase only the EEPROM (1) memory. The Flash,
Lock and Fuse bits are not changed. The EEPROM must be erased before it can be
reprogrammed.
Note: 1. The EEPROM memory is also preserved during this special Chip Erase if the
EESAVE Fuse is programmed.
Load Command “Chip Erase EEPROM only”
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.
2. Set BS1 to “0”.
3. Set DATA to “1000 0010”. This is the command for Chip Erase EEPROM only.
4. Give CLKI a positive pulse. This loads the command.
5. Give WR
___
a negative pulse. This starts the Chip Erase of the EEPROM. RDY/ BSY
___
goes low.
6. Wait until RDY/BSY
___
goes high before loading a new command.
31.8.16 Erase EEPROM Page
The EEPROM is organized in pages; see Table 31-8 on page 505. When programming
the EEPROM, the program data is latched into a page buffer. In contrast when erasing
the EEPROM, only the byte address is required and latched into the page buffer. The
program data are ignored. This allows erasing only selected bytes of an EEPROM
page. The algorithm for erasing EEPROM data is as follows (refer to "Programming the
Flash" on page 509 for details on Command, Address and Data loading):
1. A: Load Command “1000 0011”.
2. G: Load Address High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
3. B: Load Address Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. E: Latch address (give PAGEL a positive pulse).
K: Repeat 3 through 5 until all addresses of bytes to be erased have been latched. If all
byte locations in the EEPROM page have been latched, then the entire page is erased.
L: Erase EEPROM page
1. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”.
2. Give WR
___
a negative pulse. This starts erasing of the EEPROM page. RDY/BSY
___
goes
low.
3. Wait until to RDY/BSY
___
goes high before a new program or erase operation.
Note: 1. The EEPROM memory is not preserved during the EEPROM page erase if the
EESAVE Fuse is programmed.
31.8.17 Writing User Signature Data
Three Flash pages are dedicated for user signature data (see "User Signature Data" on
page 505 for details). Writing the user signature pages is similar to programming any
other page of the Flash. For programming signature pages, the user data is latched into
a page buffer. This allows one page of user signature data to be programmed at a time.
The following procedure describes how to write all user signature pages (refer to
"Programming the Flash" on page 509 for details on Command, Address and Data
loading):
1. A. Load Command “0001 0010” (Write User Signature Page).
516
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
2. B. Load Address Low byte (Address bits 7:0).
3. C. Load Data Low Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
4. D. Load Data High Byte (0x00 - 0xFF).
5. E. Latch Data (give PAGEL a positive pulse).
F. Repeat B through E until the entire buffer is filled or until all data within the page is
loaded.
While the lower bits in the address are mapped to words within the page, the higher bits
address one of the three signature pages.
G. Load Address High byte (Address bits15:8): 0x01, 0x02 or 0x03I. Program Page
1. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”
2. Give WR
___
a negative pulse. This starts programming of the entire signature page of
data. RDY/BSY
___
goes low.
3. Wait until RDY/BSY
___
goes high (See Figure 31-3 on page 511 for signal waveforms).
J. Repeat B through I until all user signature pages or all data has been programmed.
K. End Page Programming.
Note: 1. User Signature Pages must be erased before being written. See "Erasing User
Signature Data" below.
31.8.18 Erasing User Signature Data
Three Flash pages are dedicated for user signature data (see "User Signature Data" on
page 505 for details). A user signature page must be erased before being written. A
Chip Erase does not modify the signature pages. Erasing user signature data follows a
similar procedure as shown in section "Writing User Signature Data" on page 515. The
data of one signature page at a time can be erased. The following procedure describes
how to write all user signature pages (refer to "Programming the Flash" on page 509 for
details on Command, Address and Data loading):
1. A. Load Command “1000 0100” (Erase User Signature Page).
While the lower bits in the address are mapped to words within the page, the higher bits
address one of the three signature pages.
2. B. Load Address Low byte (Address bits 7:0): 0x00
3. G. Load Address High byte (Address bits15:8): 0x01, 0x02 or 0x03
I. Program Page (Erase)
4. Set BS2, BS1 to “00”
5. Give WR
___
a negative pulse. This starts erasing the data of the entire user signature
page. RDY/BSY
___
goes low.
6. Wait until RDY/BSY
___
goes high (See Figure 31-3 on page 511 for signal waveforms).
J. Repeat B through I until all user signature pages are erased.
K. End Page Programming.
31.8.19 Reading User Signature Data
The algorithm for reading User Signature Data is similar to reading from Flash (refer to
"Programming the Flash" on page 509 for details on Command and Data loading). The
algorithm for reading User Signature Data is similar to read from Flash.
517
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”.
2. G: Load Address High Byte.
2. B: Load Address Low Byte.
3. Set OE
__
to “0” and BS to “0”. The Signature word low byte can now be read at DATA.
4. Set OE
__
to “1”.
5. Set BS1 to “1”. The Signature word high byte can now be read at DATA.
6. Set OE
__
to “1”.
Repeat steps 2 to 6 until all data have been read.
31.8.20 Parallel Programming Characteristics
Figure 31-10. Parallel programming timing including some general timing requirements
Data & Control
(DATA, XA0/1, BS1, BS2)
CLKI
tXHXL
tWLWH
tDVXH tXLDX
tPLWL
tWLRH
WR
RDY/BSY
PAGEL
tPHPL
tPLBX
tBVPH
tXLWL
tWLBX
tBVWL
WLRL
Figure 31-11. Parallel programming loading sequence with timing requirements (2)
CLKI
PAGEL
tPLXH
XLXH
ttXLPH
ADDR0 (Low Byte) DATA (Low Byte) DATA (High Byte) ADDR1 (Low Byte)
DATA
BS1
XA0
XA1
LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE)
LOAD DATA
(LOW BYTE)
LOAD DATA
(HIGH BYTE)
LOAD DATA
LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE)
Note: 2. The timing requirements shown in Figure 31-10 above (i.e., tDVXH, tXHXL, and tXLDX)
also apply to loading operation.
518
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 31-12. Parallel programming reading sequence (within the same page) with
timing requirements (1)
CLKI
OE
ADDR0 (Low Byte) DATA (Low Byte) DATA (High Byte) ADDR1 (Low Byte)
DATA
BS1
XA0
XA1
LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE)
READ DATA
(LOW BYTE)
READ DATA
(HIGH BYTE)
LOAD ADDRESS
(LOW BYTE)
tBVDV
tOLDV
tXLOL
tOHDZ
Note: 1. The timing requirements shown in Figure 31-10 on page 517 (i.e., tDVXH, tXHXL, and
tXLDX) also apply to reading operation.
Table 31-15. Parallel Programming Characteristics, VDEVDD = 3.3V ± 10%
Symbol Parameter Min Typ Max Units
tTSTRNH Delay TST High before RSTN High 0 ns
tDVXH Data and Control Valid before CLKI High 67 ns
tXLXH CLKI Low to CLKI High 200 ns
tXHXL CLKI Pulse Width High 150 ns
tXLDX Data and Control Hold after CLKI Low 67 ns
tXLWL CLKI Low to WR
___
Low 0 ns
tXLPH CLKI Low to PAGEL high 0 ns
tPLXH PAGEL low to CLKI high 150 ns
tBVPH BS1 Valid before PAGEL High 67 ns
tPHPL PAGEL Pulse Width High 150 ns
tPLBX BS1 Hold after PAGEL Low 67 ns
tWLBX BS2/1 Hold after WR
___
Low 67 ns
tPLWL PAGEL Low to WR
___
Low 67 ns
tBVWL BS2/1 Valid to WR
___
Low 67 ns
tWLWH WR
___
Pulse Width Low 150 ns
tWLRL WR
___
Low to RDY/BSY
___
Low 0 1 µs
tWLRH WR
___
Low to RDY/BSY
___
High(1) 3.7 4.5 ms
tWLRH_CE WR
___
Low to RDY/BSY
___
High for Chip Erase(2) 16 18.5 ms
tXLOL CLKI Low to OE
__
Low 0 ns
tBVDV BS1 Valid to DATA valid 0 250 ns
tOLDV OE
__
Low to DATA Valid 250 ns
tOHDZ OE
__
High to DATA Tri-stated 250 ns
519
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Notes: 1. tWLRH is valid for the Write Flash, Write EEPROM, Write Fuse bits and Write Lock
bits commands.
2. tWLRH_CE is valid for the Chip Erase command.
31.9 Serial Downloading
Both the Flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using a serial
programming bus while RSTN is pulled to DVSS. The serial programming interface
consists of pins SCK, PDI (input) and PDO (output). After RSTN is set low, the
Programming Enable instruction needs to be executed first before program/erase
operations can be executed. NOTE, in Table 31-16 below, the pin mapping for serial
programming is listed.
31.9.1 Serial Programming Pin Mapping
Table 31-16. Pin Mapping Serial Programming
Symbol Pins I/O Description
PDI PB2 I Serial Data In
PDO PB3 O Serial Data Out
SCK PB1 I Serial Clock
Figure 31-13. Serial Programming and Verify (1)(2)
Notes: 1. If the device is clocked by the internal Oscillator, it is not required to connect a
clock source to the CLKI pin.
2. VDEVDD-0.3V < VEVDD < VDEVDD+0.3V, both VEVDD and VDEVDD must stay in valid
supply voltage limits.
When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed
programming operation (in the Serial mode ONLY) and there is no need to first execute
the Chip Erase instruction. The Chip Erase operation turns the content of every memory
location in both the Program and EEPROM arrays into 0xFF.
Depending on CKSEL Fuses, a valid clock must be present. The minimum low and high
periods for the serial clock (SCK) input are defined as follows:
520
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Low: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz;
High: > 2 CPU clock cycles for fck < 12 MHz, 3 CPU clock cycles for fck >= 12 MHz;
31.9.2 Serial Programming Algorithm
When writing serial data to the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2, data is clocked on the
rising edge of SCK.
When reading data from the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2, data is clocked on the falling
edge of SCK. See Figure 31-15 on page 522 for timing details.
To program and verify the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 in the serial programming
mode, the following sequence is recommended (See four byte instruction formats in
Table 31-18 on page 521):
1. Power-up sequence: Apply power between DEVDD and DVSS while RSTN and SCK
are set to “0”. In some systems, the programmer can not guarantee that SCK is held
low during power-up. In this case, RSTN must be given a positive pulse of at least
two CPU clock cycles duration after SCK has been set to “0”.
2. Wait for at least 20 ms and enable serial programming by sending the Programming
Enable serial instruction to pin PDI.
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of
synchronization. When in sync. the second byte (0x53), will echo back when issuing
the third byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether the echo is correct or
not, all four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the 0x53 did not echo
back, give RSTN a positive pulse and issue a new Programming Enable command.
4. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one byte
at a time by supplying the 7 LSB of the address and data together with the Load
Program Memory Page instruction. To ensure correct loading of the page, the data
low byte must be loaded before data high byte is applied for a given address. The
Program Memory Page is stored by loading the Write Program Memory Page
instruction with the address lines 15:8. Before issuing this command, make sure the
instruction Load Address Extended High Byte has been used to define the MSB of
the address. The address extended high byte with the address lines 23:16 is stored
until the command is re-issued, i.e., the command needs only be issued for the first
page, and when crossing the 64k word boundary. If polling (RDY/BSY¯ ¯ ¯ ) is not used,
the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before issuing the next page (see Table 31-17
on page 521). Accessing the serial programming interface before the Flash write
operation completes can result in incorrect programming.
5. The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address and
data together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory location is
first automatically erased before new data is written. If polling is not used, the user
must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte (see Table 31-17 on page
521). In a chip erased device, no 0xFFs in the data file(s) need to be programmed.
6. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction which returns the
content at the selected address at serial output PDO. When reading the Flash
memory, use the instruction Load Address Extended High Byte to define the upper
address byte, which is not included in the Read Program Memory instruction. The
address extended high byte with the address lines 23:16 is stored until the command
is re-issued, i.e., the command needs only be issued for the first page, and when
crossing the 64k word boundary.
7. At the end of the programming session, RSTN can be set high to commence normal
operation.
521
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
8. Power-off sequence (if needed): Set RESET to “1”. Turn DEVDD power off.
Table 31-17. Minimum Wait Delay before writing the next Fuse/Flash/EEPROM location
Symbol Minimum Wait Delay
tWD_FUSE 4.5 ms
tWD_FLASH 4.5 ms
tWD_EEPROM 13 ms
tWD_CHIPERASE 18.5 ms
31.9.3 Serial Programming Instruction Set
Table 31-18 below and Figure 31-14 on page 522 describe the Instruction set.
Table 31-18. Serial Programming Instruction Set (5)(6)
Instruction/Operation
Instruction Format (2)
Byte1 Byte2 Byte3 Byte4
Programming Enable $AC $53 $00 $00
Chip Erase (Program Memory/EEPROM) $AC $80 $00 $00
Poll RDY/BSY¯ ¯ ¯ $F0 $00 $00 data byte out
Load Instruction
Load Address Extended High Byte(1) $4D $00 Extended addr. $00
Load Program Memory Page, High Byte $48 $00 addr. LSB high data byte in
Load Program Memory Page, Low Byte $40 $00 addr. LSB low data byte in
Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access) $C1 $00 0000 000aa data byte in
Read Instruction
Read Program Memory, High byte $28 addr. MSB addr. LSB high data byte out
Read Program Memory, Low byte $20 addr. MSB addr. LSB low data byte out
Read EEPROM Memory $A0 0000 aaaa aaaa aaaa data byte out
Read Lock Bits $58 $00 $00 data byte out
Read Signature Byte $30 $00 0000 000aa data byte out
Read Fuse Bits $50 $00 $00 data byte out
Read Fuse High Bits $58 $08 $00 data byte out
Read Extended Fuse Bits $50 $08 $00 data byte out
Read Calibration Byte $38 $00 $00 data byte out
Write Instructions (3)(4)
Write Program Memory Page $4C addr. MSB addr. LSB $00
Write EEPROM Memory $C0 0000 aaaa aaaa aaaa data byte in
Write EEPROM Memory Page (page access) $C2 0000 aaaa aaaa 00 $00
Write Lock Bits $AC $E0 $00 data byte in
Write Fuse Bits $AC $A0 $00 data byte in
Write Fuse High Bits $AC $A8 $00 data byte in
Write Extended Fuse Bits $AC $A4 $00 data byte in
Notes: 1. Not all instructions are applicable for all parts.
2. a = address.
3. Bits are programmed ‘0’, un-programmed ‘1’.
522
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
4. To ensure future compatibility, unused Fuses and Lock bits should be un-programmed (‘1’).
5. Refer to the corresponding section for Fuse and Lock bits, Calibration and Signature bytes and Page size.
6. See http://www.atmel.com/avr for Application Notes regarding programming and programmers.
If the LSB in RDY/BSY¯ ¯ ¯ data byte out is ‘1’, a programming operation is still pending.
Wait until this bit returns ‘0’ before the next instruction is carried out. Within the same
page, the low data byte must be loaded prior to the high data byte. After data is loaded
to the page buffer, program the EEPROM page; see Figure 31-14 below.
Figure 31-14. Serial Programming Instruction Example
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Adr LSB
Bit 15 B 0
Serial Programming Instruction
Program Memory/
EEPROM Memory
Page 0
Page 1
Page 2
Page N-1
Page Buffer
Write Program Memory Page/
Write EEPROM Memory Page
Load Program Memory Page (High/Low Byte)/
Load EEPROM Memory Page (page access)
Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4
Bit 15 B 0
Adr MSB
Page Offset
Page Number
Adr MSB
Adr MSB
Adr MSB
Adr MSB
Adr MSB
Adr LSB
Adr LSB
Adr LSB
Adr LSB
Adr LSB
31.9.4 Serial Programming Characteristics
For characteristics of the Serial Programming module see "SPI Timing Characteristics"
on page 557.
Figure 31-15. Serial Programming Waveforms
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT
(SCK)
SERIAL DATA INPUT
(MOSI)
(MISO)
SAMPLE
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT
5
23
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
31.10 Programming via the JTAG Interface
Programming through the JTAG interface requires control of the four JTAG specific
pins: TCK, TMS, TDI, and TDO. Control of the reset and clock pins is not required.
To be able to use the JTAG interface, the JTAGEN Fuse must be programmed. The
device is default shipped with the fuse programmed. In addition, the JTD bit in MCUCR
must be cleared. Alternatively, if the JTD bit is set, the external reset can be forced low.
Then, the JTD bit will be cleared after two chip clocks, and the JTAG pins are available
for programming. This provides a means of using the JTAG pins as normal port pins in
running mode while still allowing In-System Programming via the JTAG interface. Note
that this technique can not be used when using the JTAG pins for Boundary-scan or
On-chip Debug. In these cases the JTAG pins must be dedicated for this purpose.
During programming the clock frequency of the TCK Input must be less than the
maximum frequency of the chip. The System Clock Prescaler can not be used to divide
the TCK Clock Input into a sufficiently low frequency.
As a definition in this datasheet, the LSB is shifted in and out first of all Shift Registers.
31.10.1 Programming Specific JTAG Instructions
The Instruction Register is 4-bit wide, supporting up to 16 instructions. The JTAG
instructions useful for programming are listed below.
The OPCODE for each instruction is shown behind the instruction name in hex format.
The text describes which Data Register is selected as path between TDI and TDO for
each instruction.
The Run-Test/Idle state of the TAP-controller is used to generate internal clocks. It can
also be used as an idle state between JTAG sequences. The state machine sequence
for changing the instruction word is shown in Figure 31-16 on page 524.
524
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 31-16. State Machine Sequence for Changing the Instruction Word
Test-Logic-Reset
Run-Test/Idle
Shift-DR
Exit1-DR
Pause-DR
Exit2-DR
Update-DR
Select-IR Scan
Capture-IR
Shift-IR
Exit1-IR
Pause-IR
Exit2-IR
Update-IR
Select-DR Scan
Capture-DR
0
1
01 1 1
0 0
0 0
1 1
10
1
1
0
1
0
0
10
1
1
0
1
0
0
00
11
31.10.2 AVR_RESET (0xC)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction is used for setting the AVR device in the
Reset mode or taking the device out from the Reset mode. The TAP-controller is not
reset by this instruction. The one bit Reset Register is selected as Data Register. Note
that the reset will be active as long as there is a logic “one” in the Reset Chain. The
output from this chain is not latched.
The active states are:
• Shift-DR: The Reset Register is shifted by the TCK input.
31.10.3 PROG_ENABLE (0x4)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction enables programming via the JTAG port. The
16-bit Programming Enable Register is selected as Data Register. The active states are
the following:
• Shift-DR: The programming enable signature is shifted into the Data Register.
525
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Update-DR: The programming enable signature is compared to the correct value,
and Programming mode is entered if the signature is valid.
31.10.4 PROG_COMMANDS (0x5)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction is used for entering programming commands
via the JTAG port. The 15-bit Programming Command Register is selected as Data
Register. The active states are the following:
• Capture-DR: The result of the previous command is loaded into the Data Register.
• Shift-DR: The Data Register is shifted by the TCK input, shifting out the result of the
previous command and shifting in the new command.
• Update-DR: The programming command is applied to the Flash inputs.
• Run-Test/Idle: One clock cycle is generated, executing the applied command.
31.10.5 PROG_PAGELOAD (0x6)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction directly loads the Flash data page via the
JTAG port. An 8-bit Flash Data Byte Register is selected as the Data Register. This is
physically the 8 LSB’s of the Programming Command Register. The active states are
the following:
• Shift-DR: The Flash Data Byte Register is shifted by the TCK input.
• Update-DR: The content of the Flash Data Byte Register is copied into a temporary
register. A write sequence is initiated that within 11 TCK cycles loads the content of
the temporary register into the Flash page buffer. The AVR automatically alternates
between writing the low and the high byte for each new Update-DR state, starting
with the low byte for the first Update-DR encountered after entering the
PROG_PAGELOAD command. The Program Counter is pre-incremented before
writing the low byte, except for the first written byte. This ensures that the first data is
written to the address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and loading the last location
in the page buffer does not make the program counter increment into the next page.
31.10.6 PROG_PAGEREAD (0x7)
The AVR specific public JTAG instruction directly captures the Flash content via the
JTAG port. An 8-bit Flash Data Byte Register is selected as the Data Register. This is
physically the 8 LSB’s of the Programming Command Register. The active states are
the following:
• Capture-DR: The content of the selected Flash byte is captured into the Flash Data
Byte Register. The AVR automatically alternates between reading the low and the
high byte for each new Capture-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first
Capture-DR encountered after entering the PROG_PAGEREAD command. The
Program Counter is post-incremented after reading each high byte, including the first
read byte. This ensures that the first data is captured from the first address set up by
PROG_COMMANDS, and reading the last location in the page makes the program
counter increment into the next page.
• Shift-DR: The Flash Data Byte Register is shifted by the TCK input.
31.10.7 Data Registers
The Data Registers are selected by the JTAG instruction registers described in section
"Programming Specific JTAG Instructions" on page 523. The Data Registers relevant
for programming operations are:
• Reset Register
526
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
• Programming Enable Register
• Programming Command Register
• Flash Data Byte Register
31.10.8 Reset Register
The Reset Register is a Test Data Register used to reset the part during programming.
It is required to reset the part before entering Programming mode.
A high value in the Reset Register corresponds to pulling the external reset low. The
part is reset as long as there is a high value present in the Reset Register. Depending
on the Fuse settings for the clock options, the part will remain reset for a Reset Time-
out period (refer to "Clock Sources" on page 175) after releasing the Reset Register.
The output from this Data Register is not latched, so the reset will take place
immediately, as shown in "Figure 29-2" on page 478.
31.10.9 Programming Enable Register
The Programming Enable Register is a 16-bit register. The content of this register is
compared to the programming enable signature, binary code 1010_0011_0111_0000.
When the content of the register is equal to the programming enable signature,
programming via the JTAG port is enabled. The register is reset to 0 on Power-on
Reset, and should always be reset when leaving Programming mode.
Figure 31-17. Programming Enable Register
TDI
TDO
D
A
T
A
=D Q
ClockDR & PROG_ENABLE
Programming Enable
0xA370
31.10.10 Programming Command Register
The Programming Command Register is a 15-bit register. This register is used to
serially shift in programming commands, and to serially shift out the result of the
previous command, if any. The JTAG Programming Instruction Set is shown in Table
31-19 on page 527. The state sequence when shifting in the programming commands
is illustrated in Figure 31-19 on page 530.
527
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 31-18. Programming Command Register
TDI
TDO
S
T
R
O
B
E
S
A
D
D
R
E
S
S
/
D
A
T
A
Flash
EEPROM
Fuses
Lock Bits
Table 31-19. JTAG Programming Instruction (set a = address high bits, b = address low bits, c = address extended bits,
H = 0 - Low byte, 1 - High Byte, o = data out, i = data in, x = don’t care)
Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence Notes
1a. Chip Erase
0100011_10000000
0110001_10000000
0110011_10000000
0110011_10000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
1b. Poll for Chip Erase Complete 0110011_10000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
1c. Chip Erase EEPROM only
0100011_10000010
0110001_10000010
0110011_10000010
0110011_10000010
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2a. Enter Flash Write 0100011_00010000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2b. Load Address Extended High Byte 0001011_cccccccc xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
2c. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2d. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2e. Load Data Low Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2f. Load Data High Byte 0010111_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
2g. Latch Data
0110111_00000000
1110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
2h. Write Flash Page
0110111_00000000
0110101_00000000
0110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
2i. Poll for Page Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
3a. Enter Flash Read 0100011_00000010 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
3b. Load Address Extended High Byte 0001011_cccccccc xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
528
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence Notes
3c. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
3d. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
3e. Read Data Low and High Byte
0110010_00000000
0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
Low byte
High byte
4a. Enter EEPROM Write 0100011_00010001 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
4b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
4c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
4d. Load Data Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
4e. Latch Data
0110111_00000000
1110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
4f. Write EEPROM Page
0110011_00000000
0110001_00000000
0110011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
4g. Poll for Page Write Complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
4h. Enter EEPROM Erase 0100011_10000011 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
5a. Enter EEPROM Read 0100011_00000011 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
5b. Load Address High Byte 0000111_aaaaaaaa xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (10)
5c. Load Address Low Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
5d. Read Data Byte
0110011_bbbbbbbb
0110010_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
6a. Enter Fuse Write 0100011_01000000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
6b. Load Data Low Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3)(6)
6c. Write Fuse Extended Byte
0111011_00000000
0111001_00000000
0111011_00000000
0111011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
6d. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
6e. Load Data Low Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3)(7)
6f. Write Fuse High Byte
0110111_00000000
0110101_00000000
0110111_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
6g. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110111_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
6h. Load Data Low Byte 0010011_iiiiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (3)(8)
6i. Write Fuse Low Byte
0110011_00000000
0110001_00000000
0110011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
6j. Poll for Fuse Write Complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
7a. Enter Lock Bit Write 0100011_00100000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
529
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Instruction TDI Sequence TDO Sequence Notes
7b. Load Data Byte 0010011_11iiiiii xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (4)(9)
7c. Write Lock Bits
0110011_00000000
0110001_00000000
0110011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
(1)
7d. Poll for Lock Bit Write complete 0110011_00000000 xxxxxox_xxxxxxxx (2)
8a. Enter Fuse/Lock Bit Read 0100011_00000100 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
8b. Read Extended Fuse Byte 0111010_00000000
0111011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo (6)(5)
8c. Read Fuse High Byte 0111110_00000000
0111111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo (7)(5)
8d. Read Fuse Low Byte 0110010_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo (8)(5)
8e. Read Lock Bits 0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxoooooo (9)(5)
8f. Read Fuses and Lock Bits
0111010_00000000
0111110_00000000
0110010_00000000
0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
(5)
Fuse Ext. byte
Fuse High byte
Fuse Low byte
Lock bits
9a. Enter Signature Byte Read 0100011_00001000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
9b. Load Address Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
9c. Read Signature Byte 0110010_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
9d. Enter User Signature Page Write 0100011_00010010 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (12)
9e. Enter User Signature Page Erase 0100011_10000100 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx (12)
10a. Enter Calibration Byte Read 0100011_00001000 xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
10b. Load Address Byte 0000011_bbbbbbbb xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
10c. Read Calibration Byte 0110110_00000000
0110111_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_oooooooo
11a. Load No Operation Command 0100011_00000000
0110011_00000000
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxx_xxxxxxxx
530
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Notes: 1. This command sequence is not required if the seven MSB’s are correctly set by the previous command sequence
(which is normally the case).
2. Repeat until o = “1”.
3. Set bits to “0” to program the corresponding Fuse, “1” to un-program the Fuse.
4. Set bits to “0” to program the corresponding Lock bit, “1” to leave the Lock bit unchanged.
5. “0” = programmed, “1” = un-programmed.
6. The bit mapping for Fuses Extended byte is listed in Table 31-3 on page 503.
7. The bit mapping for Fuses High byte is listed in Table 31-4 on page 503.
8. The bit mapping for Fuses Low byte is listed in Table 31-5 on page 504.
9. The bit mapping for Lock bits byte is listed in Table 31-1 on page 502.
10. Address bits exceeding PCMSB and EEAMSB (Table 31-7 on page 505 and Table 31-8 on page 505) are don’t care.
11. All TDI and TDO sequences are represented by binary digits.
12. See "User Signature Data" on page 505.
Figure 31-19. State Machine Sequence for Changing/Reading the Data Word
Test-Logic-Reset
Run-Test/Idle
Shift-DR
Exit1-DR
Pause-DR
Exit2-DR
Update-DR
Select-IR Scan
Capture-IR
Shift-IR
Exit1-IR
Pause-IR
Exit2-IR
Update-IR
Select-DR Scan
Capture-DR
0
1
01 1 1
0 0
0 0
1 1
10
1
1
0
1
0
0
10
1
1
0
1
0
0
00
11
531
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
31.10.11 Flash Data Byte Register
The Flash Data Byte Register provides an efficient way to load the entire Flash page
buffer before executing Page Write, or to read out/verify the content of the Flash. A
state machine sets up the control signals to the Flash and senses the strobe signals
from the Flash, thus only the data words need to be shifted in/out.
The Flash Data Byte Register actually consists of the 8-bit scan chain and an 8-bit
temporary register. During page load, the Update-DR state copies the content of the
scan chain over to the temporary register and initiates a write sequence that within 11
TCK cycles loads the content of the temporary register into the Flash page buffer. The
AVR automatically alternates between writing the low and the high byte for each new
Update-DR state, starting with the low byte for the first Update-DR encountered after
entering the PROG_PAGELOAD command. The Program Counter is pre-incremented
before writing the low byte, except for the first written byte. This ensures that the first
data is written to the address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and loading the last
location in the page buffer does not make the Program Counter increment into the next
page.
During Page Read, the content of the selected Flash byte is captured into the Flash
Data Byte Register during the Capture-DR state. The AVR automatically alternates
between reading the low and the high byte for each new Capture-DR state, starting with
the low byte for the first Capture-DR encountered after entering the
PROG_PAGEREAD command. The Program Counter is post-incremented after reading
each high byte, including the first read byte. This ensures that the first data is captured
from the first address set up by PROG_COMMANDS, and reading the last location in
the page makes the program counter increment into the next page.
Figure 31-20. Flash Data Byte Register
TDI
TDO
D
A
T
A
Flash
EEPROM
Fuses
Lock Bits
STROBES
ADDRESS
State
Machine
The state machine controlling the Flash Data Byte Register is clocked by TCK. During
normal operation in which eight bits are shifted for each Flash byte, the clock cycles
needed to navigate through the TAP-controller automatically feeds the state machine
for the Flash Data Byte Register with sufficient number of clock pulses to complete its
operation transparently for the user. However, if too few bits are shifted between each
Update-DR state during page load, the TAP-controller should stay in the Run-Test/Idle
state for some TCK cycles to ensure that there are at least 11 TCK cycles between
each Update-DR state.
532
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
31.10.12 Programming Algorithm
All references below of type “1a”, “1b”, and so on, refer to Table 31-19 on page 527.
31.10.13 Entering Programming Mode
7. Enter JTAG instruction AVR_RESET and shift 1 in the Reset Register.
8. Enter instruction PROG_ENABLE and shift 0b1010_0011_0111_0000 in the
Programming Enable Register.
31.10.14 Leaving Programming Mode
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Disable all programming instructions by using no operation instruction 11a.
3. Enter instruction PROG_ENABLE and shift 0b0000_0000_0000_0000 in the
programming Enable Register.
4. Enter JTAG instruction AVR_RESET and shift 0 in the Reset Register.
31.10.15 Performing Chip Erase
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Start Chip Erase using programming instruction 1a.
3. Poll for Chip Erase complete using programming instruction 1b, or wait for tWLRH_CE
(refer to Table 31-15 on page 518).
31.10.16 Programming the Flash
Before programming the Flash a Chip Erase must be performed, see section
"Performing Chip Erase" above.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash write using programming instruction 2a.
3. Load Extended High byte of address using programming instruction 2b.
4. Load High byte of address using programming instruction 2c.
5. Load Low byte of address using programming instruction 2d.
6. Load data using programming instructions 2e, 2f and 2g.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all instruction words in the page.
8. Write the page using programming instruction 2h.
9. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer
to Table 31-15 on page 518).
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until all data have been programmed.
A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGELOAD
instruction:
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash write using programming instruction 2a.
3. Load the page address using programming instructions 2b, 2c and 2d. PCWORD
(refer to Table 31-7 on page 505) is used to address within one page and must be
written as 0.
4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGELOAD.
5. Load the entire page by shifting in all instruction words in the page byte-by-byte,
starting with the LSB of the first instruction in the page and ending with the MSB of
the last instruction in the page. Use Update-DR to copy the contents of the Flash
533
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Data Byte Register into the Flash page location and to auto-increment the Program
Counter before each new word.
6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
7. Write the page using programming instruction 2h.
8. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer
to Table 31-15 on page 518).
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been programmed.
31.10.17 Reading the Flash
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash read using programming instruction 3a.
3. Load address using programming instructions 3b, 3c and 3d.
4. Read data using programming instruction 3e.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read.
A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGEREAD
instruction:
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Flash read using programming instruction 3a.
3. Load the page address using programming instructions 3b, 3c and 3d. PCWORD
(refer to Table 31-7 on page 505) is used to address within one page and must be
written as 0.
4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGEREAD.
5. Read the entire page (or Flash) by shifting out all instruction words in the page (or
Flash), starting with the LSB of the first instruction in the page (Flash) and ending
with the MSB of the last instruction in the page (Flash). The Capture-DR state both
captures the data from the Flash, and also auto-increments the program counter
after each word is read. Note that Capture-DR comes before the shift-DR state.
Hence, the first byte which is shifted out contains valid data.
6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until all data have been read.
31.10.18 Programming the EEPROM
The EEPROM must be erased before being programmed. A Chip Erase always erases
both Flash and EEPROM memories, see "Performing Chip Erase" on page 532.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable EEPROM write using programming instruction 4a.
3. Load High byte of address using programming instruction 4b.
4. Load Low byte of address using programming instruction 4c.
5. Load data using programming instructions 4d and 4e.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all data bytes in the page.
7. Write the data using programming instruction 4f.
8. Poll for EEPROM write complete using programming instruction 4g, or wait for tWLRH
(refer to Table 31-15 on page 518).
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been programmed.
Note that the PROG_PAGELOAD instruction can not be used when programming the
EEPROM.
534
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
31.10.19 Reading the EEPROM
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable EEPROM read using programming instruction 5a.
3. Load address using programming instructions 5b and 5c.
4. Read data using programming instruction 5d.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read.
Note that the PROG_PAGEREAD instruction can not be used when reading the
EEPROM.
31.10.20 Programming the Fuses
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Fuse write using programming instruction 6a.
3. Load data high byte using programming instructions 6b. A bit value of “0” will
program the corresponding fuse; a “1” will un-program the fuse.
4. Write Fuse High byte using programming instruction 6c.
5. Poll for Fuse write complete using programming instruction 6d, or wait for tWLRH
(refer to Table 31-15 on page 518).
6. Load data low byte using programming instructions 6e. A “0” will program the fuse, a
“1” will un-program the fuse.
7. Write Fuse low byte using programming instruction 6f.
8. Poll for Fuse write complete using programming instruction 6g, or wait for tWLRH
(refer to Table 31-15 on page 518).
31.10.21 Programming the Lock Bits
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Lock bit write using programming instruction 7a.
3. Load data using programming instructions 7b. A bit value of “0” will program the
corresponding lock bit, a “1” will leave the lock bit unchanged.
4. Write Lock bits using programming instruction 7c.
5. Poll for Lock bit write complete using programming instruction 7d, or wait for tWLRH
(refer to Table 31-15 on page 518).
31.10.22 Reading the Fuses and Lock Bits
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Fuse/Lock bit read using programming instruction 8a.
3. To read all Fuses and Lock bits, use programming instruction 8e.
To only read Fuse High byte, use programming instruction 8b.
To only read Fuse Low byte, use programming instruction 8c.
To only read Lock bits, use programming instruction 8d.
31.10.23 Reading the Signature Bytes
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Signature byte read using programming instruction 9a.
3. Load address 0x00 using programming instruction 9b.
4. Read first signature byte using programming instruction 9c.
535
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 with address 0x01 and address 0x02 to read the second and
third signature bytes, respectively.
31.10.24 Reading the Calibration Byte
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Calibration byte read using programming instruction 10a.
3. Load address 0x00 using programming instruction 10b.
4. Read the calibration byte using programming instruction 10c.
31.10.25 Performing Chip Erase of only the EEPROM
The EEPROM must be erased before being programmed. A Chip Erase always erases
both Flash and EEPROM memories, see "Performing Chip Erase" on page 532. This
command allows erasing only the EEPROM contents. The Flash, Lock and Fuse bits
are not changed.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Start EEPROM Chip Erase using programming instruction 1c.
3. Poll for Chip Erase complete using programming instruction 1b, or wait for tWLRH
(refer to Table 31-15 on page 518).
Note: 13. The EEPROM memory is also preserved during this special Chip Erase if the
EESAVE Fuse is programmed.
31.10.26 Erasing an EEPROM Page
The EEPROM must be erased before being programmed. A Chip Erase always erases
the entire EEPROM memory. This command allows erasing selected bytes up to an
entire page of EEPROM memory.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable EEPROM erase using programming instruction 4h.
3. Load High byte of address using programming instruction 4b.
4. Load Low byte of address using programming instruction 4c.
5. Latch the address using programming instructions 4e.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all data bytes in the page.
7. Erase the data using programming instruction 4f.
8. Poll for EEPROM write complete using programming instruction 4g, or wait for tWLRH
(refer to Table 31-15 on page 518).
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all data have been erased.
Note that the PROG_PAGELOAD instruction can not be used when programming the
EEPROM.
Note: 1. The EEPROM memory is not preserved during the EEPROM page erase if the
EESAVE Fuse is programmed.
536
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
31.10.27 Programming User Signature Data
Three Flash pages are dedicated for user signature data (see "User Signature Data" on
page 505 for details). Before programming the user signature pages a Page Erase must
be performed, see section "Erasing User Signature Data" below.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable user signature page write using programming instruction 9d.
3. Load High byte of address using programming instruction 2c (0x01, 0x02 or 0x03).
4. Load Low byte of address using programming instruction 2d.
5. Load data using programming instructions 2e, 2f and 2g.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all instruction words in the page.
7. Write the user signature page using programming instruction 2h.
8. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer
to Table 31-15 on page 518).
9. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until all user signature data have been programmed.
A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGELOAD
instruction:
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable user signature page write using programming instruction 9d.
3. Load the page address using programming instructions 2c and 2d. PCWORD (refer
to Table 31-7 on page 505) is used to address within one page and must be written
as 0.
4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGELOAD.
5. Load the entire page by shifting in all instruction words in the page byte-by-byte,
starting with the LSB of the first instruction in the page and ending with the MSB of
the last instruction in the page. Use Update-DR to copy the contents of the Flash
Data Byte Register into the Flash page location and to auto-increment the Program
Counter before each new word.
6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
7. Write the user signature page using programming instruction 2h.
8. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer
to Table 31-15 on page 518).
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 until all user signature data have been programmed.
31.10.28 Erasing User Signature Data
Three Flash pages are dedicated for user signature data (see "User Signature Data" on
page 505 for details). User signature pages must be erased before being written. A
Flash Chip Erase (see section "Performing Chip Erase" on page 532) does not clear the
contents of signature pages. Erasing user signature data is performed with the following
command sequence.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable user signature page erase using programming instruction 9e.
3. Load High byte of address using programming instruction 2c (0x01, 0x02 or 0x03).
4. Load Low byte of address using programming instruction 2d.
5. Latch the page address using programming instructions 2g.
6. Erase the user signature page using programming instruction 2h.
537
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
7. Poll for Flash write complete using programming instruction 2i, or wait for tWLRH (refer
to Table 31-15 on page 518).
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until all user signature data have been erased.
31.10.29 Reading User Signature Data
The algorithm for reading User Signature Data is similar to read from Flash.
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Signature read using programming instruction 9a.
3. Load address using programming instructions 3c and 3d.
4. Read data using programming instruction 3e.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all data have been read.
A more efficient data transfer can be achieved using the PROG_PAGEREAD
instruction:
1. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
2. Enable Signature read using programming instruction 9a.
3. Load the page address using programming instructions 3c and 3d. PCWORD (refer
to Table 31-7 on page 505) is used to address within one page and must be written
as 0.
4. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_PAGEREAD.
5. Read the entire User Signature page (or all three pages) by shifting out all
instruction words in the page, starting with the LSB of the first instruction in the page
and ending with the MSB of the last instruction in the page (or last User Signature
page). The Capture-DR state both captures the data from the Flash, and also auto-
increments the program counter after each word is read. Note that Capture-DR
comes before the shift-DR state. Hence, the first byte which is shifted out contains
valid data.
6. Enter JTAG instruction PROG_COMMANDS.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until all data have been read.
538
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
32 Application Circuits
32.1 Basic Application Schematic
A basic application schematic of the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 with a single-ended
RF connector is shown in Figure 32-1 below and the associated Bill of Material in Table
32-1 on page 539. The 50Ω single-ended RF input is transformed to the 100Ω
differential RF port impedance using Balun B1. The capacitors C1 and C2 provide AC
coupling of the RF input to the RF port, capacitor C4 improves matching.
Figure 32-1. Basic Application schematic (48-pin package)
6
5
4
3
2
1
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
4041424344454647
PF0
AVSS
RFP
RFN
AVSS
TST
DVSS
DVDD
XTAL2
DEVDD AVDD
EVDD
AVSS
XTAL1
31
32
33
34
35
36
PE0
CB3
CB4
RSTN
VDD
XTAL
CX1 CX2
CB1
VDD
CB2
B1
RF
C4
21 22 23 24
12
11
10
9
8
7
48 3839 37
25
26
27
28
29
30
XTAL
32kHz
CX3 CX4
CLKI
PB0
PB7
PE7
PE5
PF7
PG1
PD0
Pins TST & CLKI
must be connected
PG3
PD7
PG4
PF3/4
C1
The power supply bypass capacitors (CB2, CB4) are connected to the external analog
supply pin (EVDD, pin 44) and external digital supply pin (DEVDD, pin 16). The
capacitor C1 provides the required AC coupling of RFN/RFP.
Floating pins can cause excessive power dissipation (e.g. during power on). They
should be connected to an appropriate source. GPIO shall not be connected to ground
or power supply directly.
The digital input pins TST and CLKI must be connected. If pin TST will never be used it
can be connected to AVSS while an unused pin CLKI could be connected to DVSS (see
chapter "Unused Pins" on page 7).
Capacitors CB1 and CB3 are bypass capacitors for the integrated analog and digital
voltage regulators to ensure stable operation and to improve noise immunity.
Capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the pins and should have a low-
resistance and low-inductance connection to ground to achieve the best performance.
539
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The crystal (XTAL), the two load capacitors (CX1, CX2), and the internal circuitry
connected to pins XTAL1 and XTAL2 form the 16MHz crystal oscillator for the 2.4GHz
transceiver. To achieve the best accuracy and stability of the reference frequency, large
parasitic capacitances must be avoided. Crystal lines should be routed as short as
possible and not in proximity of digital I/O signals. This is especially required for the
High Data Rate Modes.
The 32.768 kHz crystal connected to the internal low power (sub 1µA) crystal oscillator
provides a stable time reference for all low power modes including 32 Bit IEEE 802.15.4
Symbol Counter ("MAC Symbol Counter" on page 155) and real time clock application
using the asynchronous timer T/C2 ("8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and
Asynchronous Operation" on page 339). Total shunt capacitance including CX3, CX4
should not exceed 15pF across both pins. The very low supply current of the oscillator
requires careful layout of the PCB and any leakage path must be avoided.
Crosstalk and radiation from switching digital signals to the crystal pins or the RF pins
can degrade the system performance. The programming of minimum drive strength
settings for the digital output signal is recommended (see "DPDS0 – Port Driver
Strength Register 0" on page 204).
Table 32-1. Bill of Materials (BoM)
Designator Description Value Manufacturer Part Number Comment
B1 SMD balun
SMD balun / filter
2.4 GHz Wuerth
Johanson
Technology
748421245
2450FB15L0001
Filter included
CB1
CB3
LDO VREG
bypass capacitor
1 µF
(100nF minimum)
AVX
Murata
0603YD105KAT2A
GRM188R61C105KA12D
X5R
(0603)
10% 16V
CB2
CB4
Power supply bypass
capacitor
1 µF
(100nF minimum)
CX1, CX2
16MHz crystal load
capacitor
12 pF
AVX
Murata
06035A120JA
GRP1886C1H120JA01
COG
(0603)
5% 50V
CX3, CX4 32.768kHz crystal load
capacitor
12 … 25 pF
C1, C2
RF coupling capacitor
22 pF
Epcos
Epcos
AVX
B37930
B37920
06035A220JAT2A
C0G 5% 50V
(0402 or 0603)
C4 (optional)
RF matching 0.47 pF Johnstech
XTAL Crystal CX-4025 16 MHz
SX-4025 16 MHz
ACAL Taitjen
Siward
XWBBPL-F-1
A207-011
XTAL 32kHz Crystal Rs=100 kOhm
540
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
33 Register Summary
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Page
(0x1FF) TRXFBEND TRXFBEND7 TRXFBEND6 TRXFBEND5 TRXFBEND4 TRXFBEND3 TRXFBEND2 TRXFBEND1 TRXFBEND0 154
...
(0x180) TRXFBST TRXFBST7 TRXFBST6 TRXFBST5 TRXFBST4 TRXFBST3 TRXFBST2 TRXFBST1 TRXFBST0 154
(0x17F) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x17E) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x17D) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x17C) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x17B) TST_RX_LENGTH RX_LENGTH7 RX_LENGTH6 RX_LENGTH5 RX_LENGTH4 RX_LENGTH3 RX_LENGTH2 RX_LENGTH1 RX_LENGTH0 154
(0x17A) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x179) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x178) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x177) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x176) TST_CTRL_DIGI Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 TST_CTRL_DIG3 TST_CTRL_DIG2 TST_CTRL_DIG1 TST_CTRL_DIG0 153
(0x175) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
...
(0x173) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x172) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x171) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x170) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x16F) CSMA_BE MAX_BE3 MAX_BE2 MAX_BE1 MAX_BE0 MIN_BE3 MIN_BE2 MIN_BE1 MIN_BE0 145
(0x16E) CSMA_SEED_1 AACK_FVN_MODE1
AACK_FVN_MODE0
AACK_SET_PD AACK_DIS_ACK AACK_I_AM_COORD
CSMA_SEED_12
CSMA_SEED_11
CSMA_SEED_10
144
(0x16D) CSMA_SEED_0 CSMA_SEED_07
CSMA_SEED_06
CSMA_SEED_05
CSMA_SEED_04
CSMA_SEED_03
CSMA_SEED_02
CSMA_SEED_01
CSMA_SEED_00
143
(0x16C) XAH_CTRL_0 MAX_FRAME_RETRIES3
MAX_FRAME_RETRIES2
MAX_FRAME_RETRIES1 MAX_FRAME_RETRIES0
MAX_CSMA_RETRIES2
MAX_CSMA_RETRIES1
MAX_CSMA_RETRIES0
SLOTTED_OPERATION
142
(0x16B) IEEE_ADDR_7 IEEE_ADDR_77 IEEE_ADDR_76 IEEE_ADDR_75 IEEE_ADDR_74 IEEE_ADDR_73 IEEE_ADDR_72 IEEE_ADDR_71 IEEE_ADDR_70 141
(0x16A) IEEE_ADDR_6 IEEE_ADDR_67 IEEE_ADDR_66 IEEE_ADDR_65 IEEE_ADDR_64 IEEE_ADDR_63 IEEE_ADDR_62 IEEE_ADDR_61 IEEE_ADDR_60 141
(0x169) IEEE_ADDR_5 IEEE_ADDR_57 IEEE_ADDR_56 IEEE_ADDR_55 IEEE_ADDR_54 IEEE_ADDR_53 IEEE_ADDR_52 IEEE_ADDR_51 IEEE_ADDR_50 141
(0x168) IEEE_ADDR_4 IEEE_ADDR_47 IEEE_ADDR_46 IEEE_ADDR_45 IEEE_ADDR_44 IEEE_ADDR_43 IEEE_ADDR_42 IEEE_ADDR_41 IEEE_ADDR_40 141
(0x167) IEEE_ADDR_3 IEEE_ADDR_37 IEEE_ADDR_36 IEEE_ADDR_35 IEEE_ADDR_34 IEEE_ADDR_33 IEEE_ADDR_32 IEEE_ADDR_31 IEEE_ADDR_30 140
(0x166) IEEE_ADDR_2 IEEE_ADDR_27 IEEE_ADDR_26 IEEE_ADDR_25 IEEE_ADDR_24 IEEE_ADDR_23 IEEE_ADDR_22 IEEE_ADDR_21 IEEE_ADDR_20 140
(0x165) IEEE_ADDR_1 IEEE_ADDR_17 IEEE_ADDR_16 IEEE_ADDR_15 IEEE_ADDR_14 IEEE_ADDR_13 IEEE_ADDR_12 IEEE_ADDR_11 IEEE_ADDR_10 140
(0x164) IEEE_ADDR_0 IEEE_ADDR_07 IEEE_ADDR_06 IEEE_ADDR_05 IEEE_ADDR_04 IEEE_ADDR_03 IEEE_ADDR_02 IEEE_ADDR_01 IEEE_ADDR_00 139
(0x163) PAN_ID_1 PAN_ID_17 PAN_ID_16 PAN_ID_15 PAN_ID_14 PAN_ID_13 PAN_ID_12 PAN_ID_11 PAN_ID_10 139
(0x162) PAN_ID_0 PAN_ID_07 PAN_ID_06 PAN_ID_05 PAN_ID_04 PAN_ID_03 PAN_ID_02 PAN_ID_01 PAN_ID_00 139
(0x161) SHORT_ADDR_1 SHORT_ADDR_17
SHORT_ADDR_16
SHORT_ADDR_15
SHORT_ADDR_14
SHORT_ADDR_13
SHORT_ADDR_12
SHORT_ADDR_11
SHORT_ADDR_10
139
(0x160) SHORT_ADDR_0 SHORT_ADDR_07
SHORT_ADDR_06
SHORT_ADDR_05
SHORT_ADDR_04
SHORT_ADDR_03
SHORT_ADDR_02
SHORT_ADDR_01
SHORT_ADDR_00
138
(0x15F) MAN_ID_1 MAN_ID_17 MAN_ID_16 MAN_ID_15 MAN_ID_14 MAN_ID_13 MAN_ID_12 MAN_ID_11 MAN_ID_10 138
(0x15E) MAN_ID_0 MAN_ID_07 MAN_ID_06 MAN_ID_05 MAN_ID_04 MAN_ID_03 MAN_ID_02 MAN_ID_01 MAN_ID_00 138
(0x15D) VERSION_NUM VERSION_NUM7
VERSION_NUM6
VERSION_NUM5
VERSION_NUM4
VERSION_NUM3
VERSION_NUM2
VERSION_NUM1
VERSION_NUM0
137
(0x15C) PART_NUM PART_NUM7 PART_NUM6 PART_NUM5 PART_NUM4 PART_NUM3 PART_NUM2 PART_NUM1 PART_NUM0 137
(0x15B) PLL_DCU PLL_DCU_START
Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 135
(0x15A) PLL_CF PLL_CF_START Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 134
(0x159) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x158) FTN_CTRL FTN_START Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 133
(0x157) XAH_CTRL_1 Res1 Res0 AACK_FLTR_RES_FT AACK_UPLD_RES_FT
Res AACK_ACK_TIME
AACK_PROM_MODE
Res 132
(0x156) TRX_RPC RX_RPC_CTRL1
RX_RPC_CTRL0
RX_RPC_EN PDT_RPC_EN PLL_RPC_EN Res0 IPAN_RPC_EN XAH_RPC_EN 136
(0x155) RX_SYN RX_PDT_DIS Res6 Res1 Res0 RX_PDT_LEVEL3
RX_PDT_LEVEL2
RX_PDT_LEVEL1
RX_PDT_LEVEL0
131
(0x154) CC_CTRL_1 CC_BAND_3 CC_BAND_2 CC_BAND_1 CC_BAND_0 135
(0x153) CC_CTRL_0 CC_NUMBER_7 CC_NUMBER_6 CC_NUMBER_5 CC_NUMBER_4 CC_NUMBER_3 CC_NUMBER_2 CC_NUMBER_1 CC_NUMBER_0 135
(0x152) XOSC_CTRL XTAL_MODE3 XTAL_MODE2 XTAL_MODE1 XTAL_MODE0 XTAL_TRIM3 XTAL_TRIM2 XTAL_TRIM1 XTAL_TRIM0 130
(0x151) BATMON BAT_LOW BAT_LOW_EN BATMON_OK BATMON_HR BATMON_VTH3 BATMON_VTH2 BATMON_VTH1 BATMON_VTH0 129
(0x150) VREG_CTRL AVREG_EXT AVDD_OK Res5 Res4 Res3 DVDD_OK Res1 Res0 127
(0x14F) IRQ_STATUS AWAKE TX_END AMI CCA_ED_DONE RX_END RX_START PLL_UNLOCK PLL_LOCK 126
(0x14E) IRQ_MASK AWAKE_EN TX_END_EN AMI_EN CCA_ED_DONE_EN
RX_END_EN RX_START_EN PLL_UNLOCK_EN
PLL_LOCK_EN 125
(0x14D) ANT_DIV ANT_SEL Res2 Res1 Res0 ANT_DIV_EN ANT_EXT_SW_EN
ANT_CTRL1 ANT_CTRL0 124
(0x14C) TRX_CTRL_2 RX_SAFE_MODE
Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 OQPSK_DATA_RATE1
OQPSK_DATA_RATE0
123
(0x14B) SFD_VALUE SFD_VALUE7 SFD_VALUE6 SFD_VALUE5 SFD_VALUE4 SFD_VALUE3 SFD_VALUE2 SFD_VALUE1 SFD_VALUE0 123
(0x14A) RX_CTRL Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 PDT_THRES3 PDT_THRES2 PDT_THRES1 PDT_THRES0 122
(0x149) CCA_THRES CCA_CS_THRES3
CCA_CS_THRES2
CCA_CS_THRES1
CCA_CS_THRES0
CCA_ED_THRES3
CCA_ED_THRES2
CCA_ED_THRES1
CCA_ED_THRES0
121
(0x148) PHY_CC_CCA CCA_REQUEST CCA_MODE1 CCA_MODE0 CHANNEL4 CHANNEL3 CHANNEL2 CHANNEL1 CHANNEL0 120
(0x147) PHY_ED_LEVEL ED_LEVEL7 ED_LEVEL6 ED_LEVEL5 ED_LEVEL4 ED_LEVEL3 ED_LEVEL2 ED_LEVEL1 ED_LEVEL0 119
(0x146) PHY_RSSI RX_CRC_VALID RND_VALUE1 RND_VALUE0 RSSI4 RSSI3 RSSI2 RSSI1 RSSI0 118
541
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Page
(0x145) PHY_TX_PWR Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 TX_PWR3 TX_PWR2 TX_PWR1 TX_PWR0 117
(0x144) TRX_CTRL_1 PA_EXT_EN IRQ_2_EXT_EN TX_AUTO_CRC_ON
Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 116
(0x143) TRX_CTRL_0 Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x142) TRX_STATE TRAC_STATUS2
TRAC_STATUS1
TRAC_STATUS0
TRX_CMD4 TRX_CMD3 TRX_CMD2 TRX_CMD1 TRX_CMD0 114
(0x141) TRX_STATUS CCA_DONE CCA_STATUS TST_STATUS TRX_STATUS4 TRX_STATUS3 TRX_STATUS2 TRX_STATUS1 TRX_STATUS0 113
... Reserved
(0x13F) AES_KEY AES_KEY7 AES_KEY6 AES_KEY5 AES_KEY4 AES_KEY3 AES_KEY2 AES_KEY1 AES_KEY0 112
(0x13E) AES_STATE AES_STATE7 AES_STATE6 AES_STATE5 AES_STATE4 AES_STATE3 AES_STATE2 AES_STATE1 AES_STATE0 112
(0x13D) AES_STATUS AES_ER Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 AES_DONE 112
(0x13C) AES_CTRL AES_REQUEST Res AES_MODE Res AES_DIR AES_IM Res1 Res0 111
(0x13B) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
... Reserved
(0x139) TRXPR Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 Res3 Res2 SLPTR TRXRST 197
(0x138) PARCR PALTD2 PALTD1 PALTD0 PALTU2 PALTU1 PALTU0 PARDFI PARUFI 117
(0x137) DPDS1 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PGDRV1 PGDRV0 205
(0x136) DPDS0 PFDRV1 PFDRV0 PEDRV1 PEDRV0 PDDRV1 PDDRV0 PBDRV1 PBDRV0 204
(0x135) DRTRAM0 Res1 Res0 DRTSWOK ENDRT Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 198
(0x134) DRTRAM1 Res1 Res0 DRTSWOK ENDRT Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 199
(0x133) DRTRAM2 Res7 Res DRTSWOK ENDRT Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 200
(0x132) DRTRAM3 Res1 Res0 DRTSWOK ENDRT Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 201
(0x131) LLDRH Res2 Res1 Res0 LLDRH4 LLDRH3 LLDRH2 LLDRH1 LLDRH0 203
(0x130) LLDRL Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 LLDRL3 LLDRL2 LLDRL1 LLDRL0 204
(0x12F) LLCR Res1 Res0 LLDONE LLCOMP LLCAL LLTCO LLSHORT LLENCAL 202
... Reserved
(0x12D) OCR5CH OCR5CH7 OCR5CH6 OCR5CH5 OCR5CH4 OCR5CH3 OCR5CH2 OCR5CH1 OCR5CH0 330
(0x12C) OCR5CL OCR5CL7 OCR5CL6 OCR5CL5 OCR5CL4 OCR5CL3 OCR5CL2 OCR5CL1 OCR5CL0 331
(0x12B) OCR5BH OCR5BH7 OCR5BH6 OCR5BH5 OCR5BH4 OCR5BH3 OCR5BH2 OCR5BH1 OCR5BH0 329
(0x12A) OCR5BL OCR5BL7 OCR5BL6 OCR5BL5 OCR5BL4 OCR5BL3 OCR5BL2 OCR5BL1 OCR5BL0 330
(0x129) OCR5AH OCR5AH7 OCR5AH6 OCR5AH5 OCR5AH4 OCR5AH3 OCR5AH2 OCR5AH1 OCR5AH0 329
(0x128) OCR5AL OCR5AL7 OCR5AL6 OCR5AL5 OCR5AL4 OCR5AL3 OCR5AL2 OCR5AL1 OCR5AL0 329
(0x127) ICR5H ICR5H7 ICR5H6 ICR5H5 ICR5H4 ICR5H3 ICR5H2 ICR5H1 ICR5H0 331
(0x126) ICR5L ICR5L7 ICR5L6 ICR5L5 ICR5L4 ICR5L3 ICR5L2 ICR5L1 ICR5L0 331
(0x125) TCNT5H TCNT5H7 TCNT5H6 TCNT5H5 TCNT5H4 TCNT5H3 TCNT5H2 TCNT5H1 TCNT5H0 328
(0x124) TCNT5L TCNT5L7 TCNT5L6 TCNT5L5 TCNT5L4 TCNT5L3 TCNT5L2 TCNT5L1 TCNT5L0 328
... Reserved
(0x122) TCCR5C FOC5A FOC5B FOC5C Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 327
(0x121) TCCR5B ICNC5 ICES5 Res WGM53 WGM52 CS52 CS51 CS50 326
(0x120) TCCR5A COM5A1 COM5A0 COM5B1 COM5B0 COM5C1 COM5C0 WGM51 WGM50 324
... Reserved
(0x11D) MAFPA3H MAFPA3H7 MAFPA3H6 MAFPA3H5 MAFPA3H4 MAFPA3H3 MAFPA3H2 MAFPA3H1 MAFPA3H0 150
(0x11C) MAFPA3L MAFPA3L7 MAFPA3L6 MAFPA3L5 MAFPA3L4 MAFPA3L3 MAFPA3L2 MAFPA3L1 MAFPA3L0 150
(0x11B) MAFSA3H MAFSA3H7 MAFSA3H6 MAFSA3H5 MAFSA3H4 MAFSA3H3 MAFSA3H2 MAFSA3H1 MAFSA3H0 152
(0x11A) MAFSA3L MAFSA3L7 MAFSA3L6 MAFSA3L5 MAFSA3L4 MAFSA3L3 MAFSA3L2 MAFSA3L1 MAFSA3L0 152
(0x119) MAFPA2H MAFPA2H7 MAFPA2H6 MAFPA2H5 MAFPA2H4 MAFPA2H3 MAFPA2H2 MAFPA2H1 MAFPA2H0 149
(0x118) MAFPA2L MAFPA2L7 MAFPA2L6 MAFPA2L5 MAFPA2L4 MAFPA2L3 MAFPA2L2 MAFPA2L1 MAFPA2L0 150
(0x117) MAFSA2H MAFSA2H7 MAFSA2H6 MAFSA2H5 MAFSA2H4 MAFSA2H3 MAFSA2H2 MAFSA2H1 MAFSA2H0 152
(0x116) MAFSA2L MAFSA2L7 MAFSA2L6 MAFSA2L5 MAFSA2L4 MAFSA2L3 MAFSA2L2 MAFSA2L1 MAFSA2L0 152
(0x115) MAFPA1H MAFPA1H7 MAFPA1H6 MAFPA1H5 MAFPA1H4 MAFPA1H3 MAFPA1H2 MAFPA1H1 MAFPA1H0 149
(0x114) MAFPA1L MAFPA1L7 MAFPA1L6 MAFPA1L5 MAFPA1L4 MAFPA1L3 MAFPA1L2 MAFPA1L1 MAFPA1L0 149
(0x113) MAFSA1H MAFSA1H7 MAFSA1H6 MAFSA1H5 MAFSA1H4 MAFSA1H3 MAFSA1H2 MAFSA1H1 MAFSA1H0 151
(0x112) MAFSA1L MAFSA1L7 MAFSA1L6 MAFSA1L5 MAFSA1L4 MAFSA1L3 MAFSA1L2 MAFSA1L1 MAFSA1L0 151
(0x111) MAFPA0H MAFPA0H7 MAFPA0H6 MAFPA0H5 MAFPA0H4 MAFPA0H3 MAFPA0H2 MAFPA0H1 MAFPA0H0 148
(0x110) MAFPA0L MAFPA0L7 MAFPA0L6 MAFPA0L5 MAFPA0L4 MAFPA0L3 MAFPA0L2 MAFPA0L1 MAFPA0L0 148
(0x10F) MAFSA0H MAFSA0H7 MAFSA0H6 MAFSA0H5 MAFSA0H4 MAFSA0H3 MAFSA0H2 MAFSA0H1 MAFSA0H0 150
(0x10E) MAFSA0L MAFSA0L7 MAFSA0L6 MAFSA0L5 MAFSA0L4 MAFSA0L3 MAFSA0L2 MAFSA0L1 MAFSA0L0 151
(0x10D) MAFCR1 AACK_SET_PD3
AACK_I_AM_COORD3
AACK_SET_PD2
AACK_I_AM_COORD2
AACK_SET_PD1
AACK_I_AM_COORD1
AACK_SET_PD0
AACK_I_AM_COORD0
147
(0x10C) MAFCR0 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 MAF3EN MAF2EN MAF1EN MAF0EN 146
... Reserved
(0xFC) SCTSTRHH SCTSTRHH7 SCTSTRHH6 SCTSTRHH5 SCTSTRHH4 SCTSTRHH3 SCTSTRHH2 SCTSTRHH1 SCTSTRHH0 163
(0xFB) SCTSTRHL SCTSTRHL7 SCTSTRHL6 SCTSTRHL5 SCTSTRHL4 SCTSTRHL3 SCTSTRHL2 SCTSTRHL1 SCTSTRHL0 163
(0xFA) SCTSTRLH SCTSTRLH7 SCTSTRLH6 SCTSTRLH5 SCTSTRLH4 SCTSTRLH3 SCTSTRLH2 SCTSTRLH1 SCTSTRLH0 163
(0xF9) SCTSTRLL SCTSTRLL7 SCTSTRLL6 SCTSTRLL5 SCTSTRLL4 SCTSTRLL3 SCTSTRLL2 SCTSTRLL1 SCTSTRLL0 163
(0xF8) SCOCR1HH SCOCR1HH7 SCOCR1HH6 SCOCR1HH5 SCOCR1HH4 SCOCR1HH3 SCOCR1HH2 SCOCR1HH1 SCOCR1HH0 166
(0xF7) SCOCR1HL SCOCR1HL7 SCOCR1HL6 SCOCR1HL5 SCOCR1HL4 SCOCR1HL3 SCOCR1HL2 SCOCR1HL1 SCOCR1HL0 166
542
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Page
(0xF6) SCOCR1LH SCOCR1LH7 SCOCR1LH6 SCOCR1LH5 SCOCR1LH4 SCOCR1LH3 SCOCR1LH2 SCOCR1LH1 SCOCR1LH0 166
(0xF5) SCOCR1LL SCOCR1LL7 SCOCR1LL6 SCOCR1LL5 SCOCR1LL4 SCOCR1LL3 SCOCR1LL2 SCOCR1LL1 SCOCR1LL0 167
(0xF4) SCOCR2HH SCOCR2HH7 SCOCR2HH6 SCOCR2HH5 SCOCR2HH4 SCOCR2HH3 SCOCR2HH2 SCOCR2HH1 SCOCR2HH0 167
(0xF3) SCOCR2HL SCOCR2HL7 SCOCR2HL6 SCOCR2HL5 SCOCR2HL4 SCOCR2HL3 SCOCR2HL2 SCOCR2HL1 SCOCR2HL0 167
(0xF2) SCOCR2LH SCOCR2LH7 SCOCR2LH6 SCOCR2LH5 SCOCR2LH4 SCOCR2LH3 SCOCR2LH2 SCOCR2LH1 SCOCR2LH0 167
(0xF1) SCOCR2LL SCOCR2LL7 SCOCR2LL6 SCOCR2LL5 SCOCR2LL4 SCOCR2LL3 SCOCR2LL2 SCOCR2LL1 SCOCR2LL0 168
(0xF0) SCOCR3HH SCOCR3HH7 SCOCR3HH6 SCOCR3HH5 SCOCR3HH4 SCOCR3HH3 SCOCR3HH2 SCOCR3HH1 SCOCR3HH0 168
(0xEF) SCOCR3HL SCOCR3HL7 SCOCR3HL6 SCOCR3HL5 SCOCR3HL4 SCOCR3HL3 SCOCR3HL2 SCOCR3HL1 SCOCR3HL0 168
(0xEE) SCOCR3LH SCOCR3LH7 SCOCR3LH6 SCOCR3LH5 SCOCR3LH4 SCOCR3LH3 SCOCR3LH2 SCOCR3LH1 SCOCR3LH0 168
(0xED) SCOCR3LL SCOCR3LL7 SCOCR3LL6 SCOCR3LL5 SCOCR3LL4 SCOCR3LL3 SCOCR3LL2 SCOCR3LL1 SCOCR3LL0 169
(0xEC) SCTSRHH SCTSRHH7 SCTSRHH6 SCTSRHH5 SCTSRHH4 SCTSRHH3 SCTSRHH2 SCTSRHH1 SCTSRHH0 162
(0xEB) SCTSRHL SCTSRHL7 SCTSRHL6 SCTSRHL5 SCTSRHL4 SCTSRHL3 SCTSRHL2 SCTSRHL1 SCTSRHL0 162
(0xEA) SCTSRLH SCTSRLH7 SCTSRLH6 SCTSRLH5 SCTSRLH4 SCTSRLH3 SCTSRLH2 SCTSRLH1 SCTSRLH0 162
(0xE9) SCTSRLL SCTSRLL7 SCTSRLL6 SCTSRLL5 SCTSRLL4 SCTSRLL3 SCTSRLL2 SCTSRLL1 SCTSRLL0 162
(0xE8) SCBTSRHH SCBTSRHH7 SCBTSRHH6 SCBTSRHH5 SCBTSRHH4 SCBTSRHH3 SCBTSRHH2 SCBTSRHH1 SCBTSRHH0 165
(0xE7) SCBTSRHL SCBTSRHL7 SCBTSRHL6 SCBTSRHL5 SCBTSRHL4 SCBTSRHL3 SCBTSRHL2 SCBTSRHL1 SCBTSRHL0 165
(0xE6) SCBTSRLH SCBTSRLH7 SCBTSRLH6 SCBTSRLH5 SCBTSRLH4 SCBTSRLH3 SCBTSRLH2 SCBTSRLH1 SCBTSRLH0 165
(0xE5) SCBTSRLL SCBTSRLL7 SCBTSRLL6 SCBTSRLL5 SCBTSRLL4 SCBTSRLL3 SCBTSRLL2 SCBTSRLL1 SCBTSRLL0 166
(0xE4) SCCNTHH SCCNTHH7 SCCNTHH6 SCCNTHH5 SCCNTHH4 SCCNTHH3 SCCNTHH2 SCCNTHH1 SCCNTHH0 161
(0xE3) SCCNTHL SCCNTHL7 SCCNTHL6 SCCNTHL5 SCCNTHL4 SCCNTHL3 SCCNTHL2 SCCNTHL1 SCCNTHL0 161
(0xE2) SCCNTLH SCCNTLH7 SCCNTLH6 SCCNTLH5 SCCNTLH4 SCCNTLH3 SCCNTLH2 SCCNTLH1 SCCNTLH0 161
(0xE1) SCCNTLL SCCNTLL7 SCCNTLL6 SCCNTLL5 SCCNTLL4 SCCNTLL3 SCCNTLL2 SCCNTLL1 SCCNTLL0 161
(0xE0) SCIRQS Res2 Res1 Res0 IRQSBO IRQSOF IRQSCP3 IRQSCP2 IRQSCP1 171
(0xDF) SCIRQM Res2 Res1 Res0 IRQMBO IRQMOF IRQMCP3 IRQMCP2 IRQMCP1 172
(0xDE) SCSR Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 SCBSY 171
(0xDD) SCCR1 Res6 Res5 SCBTSM SCCKDIV2 SCCKDIV1 SCCKDIV0 SCEECLK SCENBO 170
(0xDC) SCCR0 SCRES SCMBTS SCEN SCCKSEL SCTSE SCCMP3 SCCMP2 SCCMP1 169
(0xDB) SCCSR Res1 Res0 SCCS31 SCCS30 SCCS21 SCCS20 SCCS11 SCCS10 159
(0xDA) SCRSTRHH SCRSTRHH7 SCRSTRHH6 SCRSTRHH5 SCRSTRHH4 SCRSTRHH3 SCRSTRHH2 SCRSTRHH1 SCRSTRHH0 164
(0xD9) SCRSTRHL SCRSTRHL7 SCRSTRHL6 SCRSTRHL5 SCRSTRHL4 SCRSTRHL3 SCRSTRHL2 SCRSTRHL1 SCRSTRHL0 164
(0xD8) SCRSTRLH SCRSTRLH7 SCRSTRLH6 SCRSTRLH5 SCRSTRLH4 SCRSTRLH3 SCRSTRLH2 SCRSTRLH1 SCRSTRLH0 164
(0xD7) SCRSTRLL SCRSTRLL7 SCRSTRLL6 SCRSTRLL5 SCRSTRLL4 SCRSTRLL3 SCRSTRLL2 SCRSTRLL1 SCRSTRLL0 165
... Reserved
(0xD1) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0xD0) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
... Reserved
(0xCE) UDR1 UDR17 UDR16 UDR15 UDR14 UDR13 UDR12 UDR11 UDR10 391
(0xCD) UBRR1H Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 UBRR11 UBRR10 UBRR9 UBRR8 395
(0xCC) UBRR1L UBRR7 UBRR6 UBRR5 UBRR4 UBRR3 UBRR2 UBRR1 UBRR0 396
... Reserved
(0xCA) UCSR1C UMSEL11 UMSEL10 UPM11 UPM10 USBS1 UDORD1 UCPHA1 UCPOL1 407
(0xC9) UCSR1B RXCIE1 TXCIE1 UDRIE1 RXEN1 TXEN1 UCSZ12 RXB81 TXB81 406
(0xC8) UCSR1A RXC1 TXC1 UDRE1 FE1 DOR1 UPE1 U2X1 MPCM1 406
... Reserved
(0xC6) UDR0 UDR07 UDR06 UDR05 UDR04 UDR03 UDR02 UDR01 UDR00 387
(0xC5) UBRR0H Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 UBRR11 UBRR10 UBRR9 UBRR8 391
(0xC4) UBRR0L UBRR7 UBRR6 UBRR5 UBRR4 UBRR3 UBRR2 UBRR1 UBRR0 391
... Reserved
(0xC2) UCSR0C UMSEL01 UMSEL00 UPM01 UPM00 USBS0 UDORD0 UCPHA0 UCPOL0 405
(0xC1) UCSR0B RXCIE0 TXCIE0 UDRIE0 RXEN0 TXEN0 UCSZ02 RXB80 TXB80 405
(0xC0) UCSR0A RXC0 TXC0 UDRE0 FE0 DOR0 UPE0 U2X0 MPCM0 404
(0xBF) IRQ_STATUS1 Res2 Res1 Res0 AMI3 AMI2 AMI1 AMI0 TX_START 127
(0xBE) IRQ_MASK1 Res2 Res1 Res0 AMI3 AMI2 AMI1 AMI0 TX_START_EN 126
(0xBD) TWAMR TWAM6 TWAM5 TWAM4 TWAM3 TWAM2 TWAM1 TWAM0 Res 437
(0xBC) TWCR TWINT TWEA TWSTA TWSTO TWWC TWEN Res TWIE 433
(0xBB) TWDR TWD7 TWD6 TWD5 TWD4 TWD3 TWD2 TWD1 TWD0 436
(0xBA) TWAR TWA6 TWA5 TWA4 TWA3 TWA2 TWA1 TWA0 TWGCE 436
(0xB9) TWSR TWS7 TWS6 TWS5 TWS4 TWS3 Res TWPS1 TWPS0 434
(0xB8) TWBR TWBR7 TWBR6 TWBR5 TWBR4 TWBR3 TWBR2 TWBR1 TWBR0 432
... Reserved
(0xB6) ASSR EXCLKAMR EXCLK AS2 TCN2UB OCR2AUB OCR2BUB TCR2AUB TCR2BUB 358
... Reserved
(0xB4) OCR2B OCR2B7 OCR2B6 OCR2B5 OCR2B4 OCR2B3 OCR2B2 OCR2B1 OCR2B0 358
(0xB3) OCR2A OCR2A7 OCR2A6 OCR2A5 OCR2A4 OCR2A3 OCR2A2 OCR2A1 OCR2A0 358
543
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Page
(0xB2) TCNT2 TCNT27 TCNT26 TCNT25 TCNT24 TCNT23 TCNT22 TCNT21 TCNT20 357
(0xB1) TCCR2B FOC2A FOC2B Res1 Res0 WGM22 CS22 CS21 CS20 356
(0xB0) TCCR2A COM2A1 COM2A0 COM2B1 COM2B0 Res1 Res0 WGM21 WGM20 355
... Reserved
(0xAD) OCR4CH OCR4CH7 OCR4CH6 OCR4CH5 OCR4CH4 OCR4CH3 OCR4CH2 OCR4CH1 OCR4CH0 321
(0xAC) OCR4CL OCR4CL7 OCR4CL6 OCR4CL5 OCR4CL4 OCR4CL3 OCR4CL2 OCR4CL1 OCR4CL0 322
(0xAB) OCR4BH OCR4BH7 OCR4BH6 OCR4BH5 OCR4BH4 OCR4BH3 OCR4BH2 OCR4BH1 OCR4BH0 321
(0xAA) OCR4BL OCR4BL7 OCR4BL6 OCR4BL5 OCR4BL4 OCR4BL3 OCR4BL2 OCR4BL1 OCR4BL0 321
(0xA9) OCR4AH OCR4AH7 OCR4AH6 OCR4AH5 OCR4AH4 OCR4AH3 OCR4AH2 OCR4AH1 OCR4AH0 320
(0xA8) OCR4AL OCR4AL7 OCR4AL6 OCR4AL5 OCR4AL4 OCR4AL3 OCR4AL2 OCR4AL1 OCR4AL0 320
(0xA7) ICR4H ICR4H7 ICR4H6 ICR4H5 ICR4H4 ICR4H3 ICR4H2 ICR4H1 ICR4H0 322
(0xA6) ICR4L ICR4L7 ICR4L6 ICR4L5 ICR4L4 ICR4L3 ICR4L2 ICR4L1 ICR4L0 322
(0xA5) TCNT4H TCNT4H7 TCNT4H6 TCNT4H5 TCNT4H4 TCNT4H3 TCNT4H2 TCNT4H1 TCNT4H0 319
(0xA4) TCNT4L TCNT4L7 TCNT4L6 TCNT4L5 TCNT4L4 TCNT4L3 TCNT4L2 TCNT4L1 TCNT4L0 319
... Reserved
(0xA2) TCCR4C FOC4A FOC4B FOC4C Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 318
(0xA1) TCCR4B ICNC4 ICES4 Res WGM43 WGM42 CS42 CS41 CS40 317
(0xA0) TCCR4A COM4A1 COM4A0 COM4B1 COM4B0 COM4C1 COM4C0 WGM41 WGM40 315
... Reserved
(0x9D) OCR3CH OCR3CH7 OCR3CH6 OCR3CH5 OCR3CH4 OCR3CH3 OCR3CH2 OCR3CH1 OCR3CH0 312
(0x9C) OCR3CL OCR3CL7 OCR3CL6 OCR3CL5 OCR3CL4 OCR3CL3 OCR3CL2 OCR3CL1 OCR3CL0 313
(0x9B) OCR3BH OCR3BH7 OCR3BH6 OCR3BH5 OCR3BH4 OCR3BH3 OCR3BH2 OCR3BH1 OCR3BH0 312
(0x9A) OCR3BL OCR3BL7 OCR3BL6 OCR3BL5 OCR3BL4 OCR3BL3 OCR3BL2 OCR3BL1 OCR3BL0 312
(0x99) OCR3AH OCR3AH7 OCR3AH6 OCR3AH5 OCR3AH4 OCR3AH3 OCR3AH2 OCR3AH1 OCR3AH0 311
(0x98) OCR3AL OCR3AL7 OCR3AL6 OCR3AL5 OCR3AL4 OCR3AL3 OCR3AL2 OCR3AL1 OCR3AL0 311
(0x97) ICR3H ICR3H7 ICR3H6 ICR3H5 ICR3H4 ICR3H3 ICR3H2 ICR3H1 ICR3H0 313
(0x96) ICR3L ICR3L7 ICR3L6 ICR3L5 ICR3L4 ICR3L3 ICR3L2 ICR3L1 ICR3L0 313
(0x95) TCNT3H TCNT3H7 TCNT3H6 TCNT3H5 TCNT3H4 TCNT3H3 TCNT3H2 TCNT3H1 TCNT3H0 310
(0x94) TCNT3L TCNT3L7 TCNT3L6 TCNT3L5 TCNT3L4 TCNT3L3 TCNT3L2 TCNT3L1 TCNT3L0 310
... Reserved
(0x92) TCCR3C FOC3A FOC3B FOC3C Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 309
(0x91) TCCR3B ICNC3 ICES3 Res WGM33 WGM32 CS32 CS31 CS30 308
(0x90) TCCR3A COM3A1 COM3A0 COM3B1 COM3B0 COM3C1 COM3C0 WGM31 WGM30 306
... Reserved
(0x8D) OCR1CH OCR1CH7 OCR1CH6 OCR1CH5 OCR1CH4 OCR1CH3 OCR1CH2 OCR1CH1 OCR1CH0 303
(0x8C) OCR1CL OCR1CL7 OCR1CL6 OCR1CL5 OCR1CL4 OCR1CL3 OCR1CL2 OCR1CL1 OCR1CL0 303
(0x8B) OCR1BH OCR1BH7 OCR1BH6 OCR1BH5 OCR1BH4 OCR1BH3 OCR1BH2 OCR1BH1 OCR1BH0 302
(0x8A) OCR1BL OCR1BL7 OCR1BL6 OCR1BL5 OCR1BL4 OCR1BL3 OCR1BL2 OCR1BL1 OCR1BL0 302
(0x89) OCR1AH OCR1AH7 OCR1AH6 OCR1AH5 OCR1AH4 OCR1AH3 OCR1AH2 OCR1AH1 OCR1AH0 301
(0x88) OCR1AL OCR1AL7 OCR1AL6 OCR1AL5 OCR1AL4 OCR1AL3 OCR1AL2 OCR1AL1 OCR1AL0 301
(0x87) ICR1H ICR1H7 ICR1H6 ICR1H5 ICR1H4 ICR1H3 ICR1H2 ICR1H1 ICR1H0 303
(0x86) ICR1L ICR1L7 ICR1L6 ICR1L5 ICR1L4 ICR1L3 ICR1L2 ICR1L1 ICR1L0 304
(0x85) TCNT1H TCNT1H7 TCNT1H6 TCNT1H5 TCNT1H4 TCNT1H3 TCNT1H2 TCNT1H1 TCNT1H0 300
(0x84) TCNT1L TCNT1L7 TCNT1L6 TCNT1L5 TCNT1L4 TCNT1L3 TCNT1L2 TCNT1L1 TCNT1L0 301
... Reserved
(0x82) TCCR1C FOC1A FOC1B FOC1C Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 300
(0x81) TCCR1B ICNC1 ICES1 Res WGM13 WGM12 CS12 CS11 CS10 298
(0x80) TCCR1A COM1A1 COM1A0 COM1B1 COM1B0 COM1C1 COM1C0 WGM11 WGM10 296
(0x7F) DIDR1 AIN1D AIN0D 440
(0x7E) DIDR0 ADC7D ADC6D ADC5D ADC4D ADC3D ADC2D ADC1D ADC0D 467
(0x7D) DIDR2 ADC15D ADC14D ADC13D ADC12D ADC11D ADC10D ADC9D ADC8D 468
(0x7C) ADMUX REFS1 REFS0 ADLAR MUX4 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX0 462
(0x7B) ADCSRB AVDDOK ACME REFOK ACCH MUX5 ADTS2 ADTS1 ADTS0 462
(0x7A) ADCSRA ADEN ADSC ADATE ADIF ADIE ADPS2 ADPS1 ADPS0 465
(0x79) ADCH ADCH7 ADCH6 ADCH5 ADCH4 ADCH3 ADCH2 ADCH1 ADCH0 467
(0x78) ADCL ADCL7 ADCL6 ADCL5 ADCL4 ADCL3 ADCL2 ADCL1 ADCL0 467
(0x77) ADCSRC ADTHT1 ADTHT0 Res0 ADSUT4 ADSUT3 ADSUT2 ADSUT1 ADSUT0 466
... Reserved
(0x75) NEMCR Res7 ENEAM AEAM1 AEAM0 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 501
(0x74) Reserved Res7 Res6 Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0
(0x73) TIMSK5 Res1 Res0 ICIE5 Res OCIE5C OCIE5B OCIE5A TOIE5 332
(0x72) TIMSK4 Res1 Res0 ICIE4 Res OCIE4C OCIE4B OCIE4A TOIE4 323
(0x71) TIMSK3 Res1 Res0 ICIE3 Res OCIE3C OCIE3B OCIE3A TOIE3 314
(0x70) TIMSK2 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 OCIE2B OCIE2A TOIE2 354
544
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Page
(0x6F) TIMSK1 Res1 Res0 ICIE1 Res OCIE1C OCIE1B OCIE1A TOIE1 304
(0x6E) TIMSK0 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 OCIE0B OCIE0A TOIE0 272
(0x6D) PCMSK2 PCINT23 PCINT22 PCINT21 PCINT20 PCINT19 PCINT18 PCINT17 PCINT16 254
(0x6C) PCMSK1 PCINT15 PCINT14 PCINT13 PCINT12 PCINT11 PCINT10 PCINT9 PCINT8 254
(0x6B) PCMSK0 PCINT7 PCINT6 PCINT5 PCINT4 PCINT3 PCINT2 PCINT1 PCINT0 255
(0x6A) EICRB ISC71 ISC70 ISC61 ISC60 ISC51 ISC50 ISC41 ISC40 250
(0x69) EICRA ISC31 ISC30 ISC21 ISC20 ISC11 ISC10 ISC01 ISC00 249
(0x68) PCICR Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PCIE2 PCIE1 PCIE0 253
(0x67) BGCR Res BGCAL_FINE3 BGCAL_FINE2 BGCAL_FINE1 BGCAL_FINE0 BGCAL2 BGCAL1 BGCAL0 468
(0x66) OSCCAL CAL7 CAL6 CAL5 CAL4 CAL3 CAL2 CAL1 CAL0 180
(0x65) PRR1 Res PRTRX24 PRTIM5 PRTIM4 PRTIM3 PRUSART1 196
(0x64) PRR0 PRTWI PRTIM2 PRTIM0 PRPGA PRTIM1 PRSPI PRUSART0 PRADC 195
(0x63) PRR2 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PRRAM3 PRRAM2 PRRAM1 PRRAM0 197
... Reserved
(0x61) CLKPR CLKPCE Res2 Res1 Res0 CLKPS3 CLKPS2 CLKPS1 CLKPS0 181
(0x60) WDTCSR WDIF WDIE WDP3 WDCE WDE WDP2 WDP1 WDP0 215
0x3F (0x5F)
SREG I T H S V N Z C 11
0x3E (0x5E)
SPH SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 13
0x3D (0x5D)
SPL SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 14
0x3C (0x5C)
EIND EIND0 15
0x3B (0x5B)
RAMPZ Res5 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 RAMPZ1 RAMPZ0 14
... Reserved
0x37 (0x57)
SPMCSR SPMIE RWWSB SIGRD RWWSRE BLBSET PGWRT PGERS SPMEN 499
... Reserved
0x35 (0x55)
MCUCR JTD Res1 Res0 PUD Res1 Res0 IVSEL IVCE 234
0x34 (0x54)
MCUSR Res2 Res1 Res0 JTRF WDRF BORF EXTRF PORF 214
0x33 (0x53)
SMCR Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 SM2 SM1 SM0 SE 194
... Reserved
0x31 (0x51)
OCDR OCDR7 OCDR6 OCDR5 OCDR4 OCDR3 OCDR2 OCDR1 OCDR0 475
0x30 (0x50)
ACSR ACD ACBG ACO ACI ACIE ACIC ACIS1 ACIS0 439
... Reserved
0x2E (0x4E)
SPDR SPDR7 SPDR6 SPDR5 SPDR4 SPDR3 SPDR2 SPDR1 SPDR0 368
0x2D (0x4D)
SPSR SPIF WCOL Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 SPI2X 368
0x2C (0x4C)
SPCR SPIE SPE DORD MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0 367
0x2B (0x4B)
GPIOR2 GPIOR27 GPIOR26 GPIOR25 GPIOR24 GPIOR23 GPIOR22 GPIOR21 GPIOR20 29
0x2A (0x4A)
GPIOR1 GPIOR17 GPIOR16 GPIOR15 GPIOR14 GPIOR13 GPIOR12 GPIOR11 GPIOR10 29
... Reserved
0x28 (0x48)
OCR0B OCR0B_7 OCR0B_6 OCR0B_5 OCR0B_4 OCR0B_3 OCR0B_2 OCR0B_1 OCR0B_0 272
0x27 (0x47)
OCR0A OCR0A_7 OCR0A_6 OCR0A_5 OCR0A_4 OCR0A_3 OCR0A_2 OCR0A_1 OCR0A_0 271
0x26 (0x46)
TCNT0 TCNT0_7 TCNT0_6 TCNT0_5 TCNT0_4 TCNT0_3 TCNT0_2 TCNT0_1 TCNT0_0 271
0x25 (0x45)
TCCR0B FOC0A FOC0B Res1 Res0 WGM02 CS02 CS01 CS00 270
0x24 (0x44)
TCCR0A COM0A1 COM0A0 COM0B1 COM0B0 Res1 Res0 WGM01 WGM00 268
0x23 (0x43)
GTCCR TSM Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PSRASY PSRSYNC 359
0x22 (0x42)
EEARH Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 EEAR11 EEAR10 EEAR9 EEAR8 26
0x21 (0x41)
EEARL EEAR7 EEAR6 EEAR5 EEAR4 EEAR3 EEAR2 EEAR1 EEAR0 26
0x20 (0x40)
EEDR EEDR7 EEDR6 EEDR5 EEDR4 EEDR3 EEDR2 EEDR1 EEDR0 27
0x1F (0x3F)
EECR Res1 Res0 EEPM1 EEPM0 EERIE EEMPE EEPE EERE 27
0x1E (0x3E)
GPIOR0 GPIOR07 GPIOR06 GPIOR05 GPIOR04 GPIOR03 GPIOR02 GPIOR01 GPIOR00 29
0x1D (0x3D)
EIMSK INT7 INT6 INT5 INT4 INT3 INT2 INT1 INT0 252
0x1C (0x3C)
EIFR INTF7 INTF6 INTF5 INTF4 INTF3 INTF2 INTF1 INTF0 252
0x1B (0x3B)
PCIFR Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 PCIF2 PCIF1 PCIF0 253
0x1A (0x3A)
TIFR5 Res1 Res0 ICF5 Res OCF5C OCF5B OCF5A TOV5 332
0x19 (0x39)
TIFR4 Res1 Res0 ICF4 Res OCF4C OCF4B OCF4A TOV4 323
0x18 (0x38)
TIFR3 Res1 Res0 ICF3 Res OCF3C OCF3B OCF3A TOV3 314
0x17 (0x37)
TIFR2 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 OCF2B OCF2A TOV2 354
0x16 (0x36)
TIFR1 Res1 Res0 ICF1 Res OCF1C OCF1B OCF1A TOV1 305
0x15 (0x35)
TIFR0 Res4 Res3 Res2 Res1 Res0 OCF0B OCF0A TOV0 273
0x14 (0x34)
PORTG Res1 Res0 PORTG5 PORTG4 PORTG3 PORTG2 PORTG1 PORTG0 239
0x13 (0x33)
DDRG Res1 Res0 DDG5 DDG4 DDG3 DDG2 DDG1 DDG0 240
0x12 (0x32)
PING Res1 Res0 PING5 PING4 PING3 PING2 PING1 PING0 240
0x11 (0x31)
PORTF PORTF7 PORTF6 PORTF5 PORTF4 PORTF3 PORTF2 PORTF1 PORTF0 238
0x10 (0x30)
DDRF DDF7 DDF6 DDF5 DDF4 DDF3 DDF2 DDF1 DDF0 239
0x0F (0x2F)
PINF PINF7 PINF6 PINF5 PINF4 PINF3 PINF2 PINF1 PINF0 239
0x0E (0x2E)
PORTE PORTE7 PORTE6 PORTE5 PORTE4 PORTE3 PORTE2 PORTE1 PORTE0 237
545
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Address
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Page
0x0D (0x2D)
DDRE DDE7 DDE6 DDE5 DDE4 DDE3 DDE2 DDE1 DDE0 238
0x0C (0x2C)
PINE PINE7 PINE6 PINE5 PINE4 PINE3 PINE2 PINE1 PINE0 238
0x0B (0x2B)
PORTD PORTD7 PORTD6 PORTD5 PORTD4 PORTD3 PORTD2 PORTD1 PORTD0 237
0x0A (0x2A)
DDRD DDD7 DDD6 DDD5 DDD4 DDD3 DDD2 DDD1 DDD0 237
0x09 (0x29)
PIND PIND7 PIND6 PIND5 PIND4 PIND3 PIND2 PIND1 PIND0 237
0x08 (0x28)
PORTC PORTC7 PORTC6 PORTC5 PORTC4 PORTC3 PORTC2 PORTC1 PORTC0 31
0x07 (0x27)
DDRC DDC7 DDC6 DDC5 DDC4 DDC3 DDC2 DDC1 DDC0 31
0x06 (0x26)
PINC PINC7 PINC6 PINC5 PINC4 PINC3 PINC2 PINC1 PINC0 31
0x05 (0x25)
PORTB PORTB7 PORTB6 PORTB5 PORTB4 PORTB3 PORTB2 PORTB1 PORTB0 236
0x04 (0x24)
DDRB DDB7 DDB6 DDB5 DDB4 DDB3 DDB2 DDB1 DDB0 236
0x03 (0x23)
PINB PINB7 PINB6 PINB5 PINB4 PINB3 PINB2 PINB1 PINB0 236
0x02 (0x22)
PORTA PORTA7 PORTA6 PORTA5 PORTA4 PORTA3 PORTA2 PORTA1 PORTA0 30
0x01 (0x21)
DDRA DDA7 DDA6 DDA5 DDA4 DDA3 DDA2 DDA1 DDA0 30
0x00 (0x20)
PINA PINA7 PINA6 PINA5 PINA4 PINA3 PINA2 PINA1 PINA0 30
Notes: 1. Reserved registers, bits and I/O memory addresses (marked as Res*) may not be modified.
2. I/O registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the
value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.
3. Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that the CBI and SBI instructions will operate on all bits in the
I/O register, writing a one back into any flag read as set, thus clearing the flag. The CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to
0x1F only.
4. When using the I/O specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 – 0x3F must be used. When addressing I/O registers as
data space using LD and ST instructions, 0x20 must be added to these addresses. The device is a complex microcontroller with more
peripheral units than can be supported within the 64 location reserved in Op-code for the IN and OUT instructions. For the Extended I/O
space from 0x60 – 0x1FF in SRAM, only the ST/STS/STD and LD/LDS/LDD instructions can be used.
34 Instruction Set Summary
Depending on the size of the Flash memory the instructions
• EICALL and EIJMP do not exist in devices with 128K/64KByte Flash memory,
• ELPM does not exist in the device with 64Kbyte Flash memory.
34.1 Arithmetic and Logic Instructions
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
ADD Rd, Rr Add two Registers Rd ← Rd + Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1
ADC Rd, Rr Add with Carry two Registers Rd ← Rd + Rr + C Z,C,N,V,H 1
ADIW Rdl,K Add Immediate to Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl + K Z,C,N,V,S 2
SUB Rd, Rr Subtract two Registers Rd ← Rd - Rr Z,C,N,V,H 1
SUBI Rd, K Subtract Constant from Register Rd ← Rd - K Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBC Rd, Rr Subtract with Carry two Registers Rd ← Rd - Rr - C Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBCI Rd, K Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg. Rd ← Rd - K - C Z,C,N,V,H 1
SBIW Rdl, K Subtract Immediate from Word Rdh:Rdl ← Rdh:Rdl - K Z,C,N,V,S 2
AND Rd, Rr Logical AND Registers Rd ← Rd • Rr Z,N,V 1
ANDI Rd, K Logical AND Register and Constant Rd ← Rd • K Z,N,V 1
OR Rd, Rr Logical OR Registers Rd ← Rd v Rr Z,N,V 1
ORI Rd, K Logical OR Register and Constant Rd ← Rd v K Z,N,V 1
EOR Rd, Rr Exclusive OR Registers Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rr Z,N,V 1
COM Rd One’s Complement Rd ← 0xFF − Rd Z,C,N,V 1
NEG Rd Two’s Complement Rd ← 0x00 − Rd Z,C,N,V,H 1
546
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
SBR Rd,K Set Bit(s) in Register Rd ← Rd v K Z,N,V 1
CBR Rd,K Clear Bit(s) in Register Rd ← Rd • (0xFF - K) Z,N,V 1
INC Rd Increment Rd ← Rd + 1 Z,N,V 1
DEC Rd Decrement Rd ← Rd − 1 Z,N,V 1
TST Rd Test for Zero or Minus Rd ← Rd • Rd Z,N,V 1
CLR Rd Clear Register Rd ← Rd ⊕ Rd Z,N,V 1
SER Rd Set Register Rd ← 0xFF None 1
MUL Rd, Rr Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2
MULS Rd, Rr Multiply Signed R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2
MULSU Rd, Rr Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 ← Rd x Rr Z,C 2
FMUL Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2
FMULS Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2
FMULSU Rd, Rr Fractional Multiply Signed with Unsigned R1:R0 ← (Rd x Rr) << 1 Z,C 2
34.2 Branch Instructions
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
RJMP k Relative Jump PC ← PC + k + 1 None 2
IJMP Indirect Jump to (Z) PC ← Z None 2
EIJMP Extended Indirect Jump to (Z) PC ←(EIND:Z) None 2
JMP k Direct Jump PC ← k None 3
RCALL k Relative Subroutine Call PC ← PC + k + 1 None 4
ICALL Indirect Call to (Z) PC ← Z None 4
EICALL Extended Indirect Call to (Z) PC ←(EIND:Z) None 4
CALL k Direct Subroutine Call PC ← k None 5
RET Subroutine Return PC ← STACK None 5
RETI Interrupt Return PC ← STACK I 5
CPSE Rd,Rr Compare, Skip if Equal if (Rd = Rr) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1 / 2 / 3
CP Rd,Rr Compare Rd − Rr Z,N,V,C,H 1
CPC Rd,Rr Compare with Carry Rd − Rr − C Z,N,V,C,H 1
CPI Rd,K Compare Register with Immediate Rd − K Z,N,V,C,H 1
SBRC Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register Cleared if (Rr(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1 / 2 / 3
SBRS Rr, b Skip if Bit in Register is Set if (Rr(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1 / 2 / 3
SBIC P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared if (P(b)=0) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1 / 2 / 3
SBIS P, b Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set if (P(b)=1) PC ← PC + 2 or 3 None 1 / 2 / 3
BRBS s, k Branch if Status Flag Set if (SREG(s) = 1) then
PC ← PC + k + 1
None 1 / 2
BRBC s, k Branch if Status Flag Cleared if (SREG(s) = 0) then
PC ← PC + k + 1
None 1 / 2
BREQ k Branch if Equal if (Z = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRNE k Branch if Not Equal if (Z = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRCS k Branch if Carry Set if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRCC k Branch if Carry Cleared if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
547
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
BRSH k Branch if Same or Higher if (C = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRLO k Branch if Lower if (C = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRMI k Branch if Minus if (N = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRPL k Branch if Plus if (N = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRGE k Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed if (N ⊕ V= 0) then
PC ← PC + k + 1
None 1 / 2
BRLT k Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed if (N ⊕ V= 1) then
PC ← PC + k + 1
None 1 / 2
BRHS k Branch if Half Carry Flag Set if (H = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRHC k Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared if (H = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRTS k Branch if T Flag Set if (T = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRTC k Branch if T Flag Cleared if (T = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRVS k Branch if Overflow Flag is Set if (V = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRVC k Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared if (V = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRIE k Branch if Interrupt Enabled if ( I = 1) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
BRID k Branch if Interrupt Disabled if ( I = 0) then PC ← PC + k + 1 None 1 / 2
34.3 Bit and Bit Test Instructions
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
SBI P,b Set Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) ← 1 None 2
CBI P,b Clear Bit in I/O Register I/O(P,b) ← 0 None 2
LSL Rd Logical Shift Left Rd(n+1) ← Rd(n), Rd(0) ← 0 Z,C,N,V 1
LSR Rd Logical Shift Right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), Rd(7) ← 0 Z,C,N,V 1
ROL Rd Rotate Left Through Carry Rd(0) ← C, Rd(n+1) ← Rd(n),
C ← Rd(7)
Z,C,N,V 1
ROR Rd Rotate Right Through Carry Rd(7) ← C, Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1),
C ← Rd(0)
Z,C,N,V 1
ASR Rd Arithmetic Shift Right Rd(n) ← Rd(n+1), n=0..6 Z,C,N,V 1
SWAP Rd Swap Nibbles Rd(3..0) ← Rd(7..4),
Rd(7..4) ← Rd(3..0)
None 1
BSET s Flag Set SREG(s) ← 1 SREG(s) 1
BCLR s Flag Clear SREG(s) ← 0 SREG(s) 1
BST Rr, b Bit Store from Register to T T ← Rr(b) T 1
BLD Rd, b Bit load from T to Register Rd(b) ← T None 1
SEC Set Carry C ← 1 C 1
CLC Clear Carry C ← 0 C 1
SEN Set Negative Flag N ← 1 N 1
CLN Clear Negative Flag N ← 0 N 1
SEZ Set Zero Flag Z ← 1 Z 1
CLZ Clear Zero Flag Z ← 0 Z 1
SEI Global Interrupt Enable I ← 1 I 1
CLI Global Interrupt Disable I ← 0 I 1
548
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
SES Set Signed Test Flag S ← 1 S 1
CLS Clear Signed Test Flag S ← 0 S 1
SEV Set Twos Complement Overflow V ← 1 V 1
CLV Clear Twos Complement Overflow V ← 0 V 1
SET Set T in SREG T ← 1 T 1
CLT Clear T in SREG T ← 0 T 1
SEH Set Half Carry Flag in SREG H ← 1 H 1
CLH Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG H ← 0 H 1
34.4 Data Transfer Instructions
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
MOV Rd, Rr Move Between Registers Rd ← Rr None 1
MOVW Rd, Rr Copy Register Word Rd+1:Rd ← Rr+1:Rr None 1
LDI Rd, K Load Immediate Rd ← K None 1
LD Rd, X Load Indirect Rd ← (X) None 2
LD Rd, X+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (X), X ← X + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - X Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. X ← X - 1, Rd ← (X) None 2
LD Rd, Y Load Indirect Rd ← (Y) None 2
LD Rd, Y+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (Y), Y ← Y + 1 None 2
LD Rd, - Y Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y ← Y - 1, Rd ← (Y) None 2
LDD Rd,Y+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd ← (Y + q) None 2
LD Rd, Z Load Indirect Rd ← (Z) None 2
LD Rd, Z+ Load Indirect and Post-Inc. Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 2
LD Rd, -Z Load Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z ← Z - 1, Rd ← (Z) None 2
LDD Rd, Z+q Load Indirect with Displacement Rd ← (Z + q) None 2
LDS Rd, k Load Direct from SRAM Rd ← (k) None 2
ST X, Rr Store Indirect (X) ← Rr None 2
ST X+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (X) ← Rr, X ← X + 1 None 2
ST - X, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. X ← X - 1, (X) ← Rr None 2
ST Y, Rr Store Indirect (Y) ← Rr None 2
ST Y+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Y) ← Rr, Y ← Y + 1 None 2
ST - Y, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Y ← Y - 1, (Y) ← Rr None 2
STD Y+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Y + q) ← Rr None 2
ST Z, Rr Store Indirect (Z) ← Rr None 2
ST Z+, Rr Store Indirect and Post-Inc. (Z) ← Rr, Z ← Z + 1 None 2
ST -Z, Rr Store Indirect and Pre-Dec. Z ← Z - 1, (Z) ← Rr None 2
STD Z+q,Rr Store Indirect with Displacement (Z + q) ← Rr None 2
STS k, Rr Store Direct to SRAM (k) ← Rr None 2
LPM Load Program Memory R0 ← (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z Load Program Memory Rd ← (Z) None 3
LPM Rd, Z+ Load Program Memory and Post-Inc Rd ← (Z), Z ← Z+1 None 3
549
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
ELPM Extended Load Program Memory R0 ← (RAMPZ:Z) None 3
ELPM Rd, Z Extended Load Program Memory Rd ← (RAMPZ:Z) None 3
ELPM Rd, Z+ Extended Load Program Memory Rd ← (RAMPZ:Z),
RAMPZ:Z ← RAMPZ:Z+1
None 3
SPM Store Program Memory (Z) ← R1:R0 None -
IN Rd, P In Port Rd ← P None 1
OUT P, Rr Out Port P ← Rr None 1
PUSH Rr Push Register on Stack STACK ← Rr None 2
POP Rd Pop Register from Stack Rd ← STACK None 2
34.5 MCU Control Instructions
Mnemonics Operands Description Operation Flags #Clocks
NOP No Operation None 1
SLEEP Sleep (see specific description for
Sleep function)
None 1
WDR Watchdog Reset (see specific description for
WDR/timer)
None 1
BREAK Break For On-chip Debug Only None N/A
550
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
35 Electrical Characteristics
35.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Note that stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause
permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of
the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operational
sections of this specification are not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating
conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
TSTOR Storage temperature -50 150 °C
TLEAD Lead temperature T = 10s (soldering profile compliant with
IPC/JEDEC J-STD-020B)
260 °C
VESD ESD robustness Compliant to [4] 4 kV
PRF Input RF level +14 dBm
VDDMAX Maximum voltage Maximum voltage from any pin to ground -0.3 3.6 V
VDMAXEV Maximum voltage difference
between DEVDD and EVDD
-0.3 0.3 V
VDIG Voltage on all pins except pins 8,9,21,22,60,62 -0.3 VDDMAX V
VANA Voltage on pins 8,9,21,22,60,62 -0.3 2.0 V
VCOMP_IN
Comparator input voltage Pins with Comparator input connected by
the analog multiplexer
-0.3 VDDMAX V
VPGA_IN PGA input voltage Pins with PGA input connected by the
analog multiplexer
-0.3 VDDMAX V
VADC_IN ADC input voltage Pins with ADC input connected by the
analog multiplexer (PGA bypassed)
-0.3 2.0 V
35.2 Recommended Operating Range
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
TOP_ZU Operating temperature range -40 +85 °C
TOP_ZF Operating temperature range -40 +125 °C
VDD Supply voltage Voltage on pins 23,34,44,54,59(2) 1.8 3.0 3.6 V
VDEV Voltage difference between
DEVDD and EVDD
EVDD and DEVDD should be tight
together on the PCB
0.0 V
VDD1.8 Supply voltage
(on pins 21,22,60)
External voltage supply(1) 1.7 1.8 1.9 V
VOVRDRV Pin Overdrive voltage Pin Voltage exceeding supply voltage
except pins 8,9,21,22,60,62
+0.3 V
Notes: 1. Register VREG_CTRL needs to be programmed to disable internal voltage regulators and supply blocks by an external
1.8V supply, refer to section "Voltage Regulators (AVREG, DVREG)" on page 191.
2. Even if an implementation uses the external 1.8V voltage supply VDD1.8 it is required to connect VDD.
551
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
35.3 Digital Pin Characteristics
Test Conditions: TOP = -40°C to 125°C, VDD =1.8V to 3.6V (unless otherwise stated)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
VIH High level input voltage(1) Except pin RSTN 0.7 VDD V
VIL Low level input voltage(1) Except pin RSTN 0.3 VDD V
VIHRSTN High level input voltage(1) Pin RSTN 0.9 VDD V
VILRSTN Low level input voltage(1) Pin RSTN 0.1 VDD V
VOH High level output voltage(1) IOH = -12mA, VDD = 3.6V
IOH = -6mA, VDD = 1.8V
Maximum. drive strength by DPDS0/1
Except Pins 17,18
VDD –
0.4
V
VOL Low level output voltage(1) IOL = 16mA, VDD = 3.6V
IOL = 10mA, VDD = 1.8V
Maximum drive strength by DPDS0/1
Except Pins 17,18
0.4 V
VOHMIN High level output voltage(1) IOH = -3mA, VDD = 3.6V
IOH = -1.5mA, VDD = 1.8V
Minimum drive strength by DPDS0/1
Except Pins 17,18
VDD –
0.4
V
VOLMIN Low level output voltage(1) IOL = 4mA, VDD = 3.6V
IOL = 2.5mA, VDD = 1.8V
Minimum. drive strength by DPDS0/1
Except Pins 17,18
0.4 V
RRSTN Reset pull-up resistor 120 360 kC
RGPIO GPIO pull-up resistor If pull-up resistor is enabled 120 360 kC
IIL Input Leakage current VDD = 3.6V, pin low 1 µA
T = 25 °C <10 nA
IIH Input Leakage current VDD = 3.6V, pin high 1 µA
T = 25 °C <10 nA
Note: 1. The capacitive load should not be larger than 50 pF for all I/Os when using the default driver strength settings, refer
to section "DPDS0 – Port Driver Strength Register 0" on page 204 and "DPDS1 – Port Driver Strength Register 1"
on page 205. Generally, large load capacitances increase the overall current consumption.
35.4 Transceiver Pin Characteristics
Test Conditions: TOP = 25°C, VDD =1.8V to 3.6V (unless otherwise stated)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
VRFNPDC1
DC level RF pins RFN and RFP Transceiver in BUSY_TX 0.9 V
VRFNPDC2
Transceiver in receive states 0.02 V
VRFNPDC3
Transceiver, other states 0 V
VXTALDC DC level pins XTAL1 and XTAL2 CX1 and CX2 connected 0.9 V
Note: 1.
2.
Pins RFN and RFP require an AC coupling if the external parts (e.g. balun, antenna) have a DC path to ground.
Serial capacitances and capacitance of each pin to ground must be < 30 pF.
For CX1 and CX2 see "Table 32-1" on page 539
552
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
35.5 Power Supply Currents (RF transceiver in SLEEP mode)
Test Conditions: TOP = 25°C, VDD =3.0V (unless otherwise stated)
Symbol Parameter Condition / AVR mode Min Typ Max Units
ISUPPLY Power Supply Current
(PRR0=0xFF, PRR1=0x3F,
16MHz RC Oscillator selected)
Standby mode 0.31 mA
Idle 1MHz 0.45 mA
Idle 8MHz 0.8 mA
Idle 16MHz 1.1 mA
Active 1MHz 0.8 mA
Active 8MHz 2.5 mA
Active 16MHz 3.7 mA
Power Supply Current
(PRR0=0x00, PRR1=0x00)
Active, 16MHz RC Oscillator 4.0 mA
Active, 16MHz Crystal Oscillator 4.5 mA
Active, external 16MHz clock on CLKI 4.5 mA
Test Conditions: TOP = 25°C, VDD =3.0V (unless otherwise stated)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
IDS0 Power Supply current in
DEEP_SLEEP
(Transceiver in SLEEP mode, AVR
in Power Save/Down mode)
AVR in Power Down mode WDT disabled 0.75 µA
IDS_PDW Power Down mode, WDT enabled 1.4 µA
IDS_PSX Power Save mode, 32.768kHz crystal
oscillator enabled
1.5 µA
IDS_PSWX Power Save mode, WDT and 32.768kHz
crystal oscillator enabled
2.15 µA
Test Conditions: VDD =3.0V (unless otherwise stated)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
IDS0T DEEP_SLEEP current (Transceiver
in SLEEP mode, AVR in Power
Save/Down mode, WDT disabled)
T = 25 °C 0.75 µA
T = 85 °C 3.0 µA
T = 125 °C 19.6 µA
35.6 Clock Characteristics
35.6.1 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator Accuracy
Table 35-2. Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator
Frequency VDEVDD Temperature Calibration Accuracy
Factory Calibration 16 MHz 3.0V 25°C ± 10 %
User Calibration 15.1 – 17.5MHz 1.8V – 3.6V -40°C - 125°C ± 1 %
35.6.2 32.768kHz Crystal Oscillator
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
f0 Crystal frequency 32.768 kHz
CEXT32 External load capacitor to ground CEXT32 = 2·(CLOAD32 – CPAR32 – CPAR_PCB)
see Application schematic CX3, CX4
20.0 pF
553
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
CLOAD32 Load capacitance as specified by the
crystal manufacturer
6 12.5 pF
CSHUNT32
Shunt capacitance 0.6 2.0 pF
CPAR32 Internal parasitic capacitance 2.1 2.4 2.7 pF
ESR Equivalent series resistance Crystal @ 32.768 kHz 50 100 k<
35.6.3 External Clock Drive (pin CLKI)
Figure 35-1 External Clock Drive Waveforms
VIL1
VIH1
Table 35-3. External Clock Drive
Symbol Parameter Min. Max. Units
1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency 16 MHz
tCLCL Clock Period 62.5 ns
tCHCX High Time 25 ns
tCLCX Low Time 25 ns
tCLCH Rise Time 0.1 µs
tCHCL Fall Time 0.1 µs
DtCLCL Change in period from one clock cycle to the next 1 %
35.7 System and Reset Characteristics
Table 35-23. BODLEVEL Fuse Coding(1)
BODLEVEL2:0 Fuses Min VBOD Typ VBOD Max VBOD Units
111 BOD Disabled
110 1.8 V
101 1.9 V
100 2.0 V
011 2.1 V
010 2.2 V
001 2.3 V
000 2.4 V
Note: 1. VBOT may be below nominal minimum operating voltage. The device is operated down to VDEVDD = VBOT during the
production test. This guarantees that a Brown-Out Reset will occur before VDEVDD drops to a voltage where correct
operation of the microcontroller is no longer guaranteed. The test is performed using BODLEVEL = 110 for 16 MHz
operation of the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2.
554
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 35-5. Reset, Brown-out and Internal Voltage Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
VRST RSTN Pin Threshold Voltage 0.1VDD 0.9VDD V
tRST Minimum pulse width on RSTN Pin 200 300 ns
VHYS Brown-out Detector Hysteresis 7.5 50 mV
tBOD Min Pulse Width on Brown-out Reset
100 ns
VBG Bandgap reference voltage VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C 1.2 V
Table 35-6. Power-On Reset Voltage Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Condition Min(1) Typ(1) Max(1) Units
VPOT
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage
(rising) (2)
Power supply discharged 1.55 1.6 1.65 V
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage
(falling)(3)
1.45(4)
0.9(5)
1.5(4)
1.2(5)
1.55(4)
1.4(5) V
tPOT Power-on Reset recovery time Time of EVDD/DEVDD<VPOT 1.0 ms
VPSR Power-on slope rate 0.01 3300 V/ms
Note: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Values are guidelines only.
Threshold where device is released from reset when voltage is rising.
The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOT (falling).
Threshold voltage if the device is not in DEEP_SLEEP state
DEEP_SLEEP state the threshold voltage is reduced to a second level.
35.8 Power Management Electrical Characteristics
35.8.1 Power Switches
Table 35-7. Timing Characteristics of the Power Switches
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
tPOR Power-on reset time Applies if the device is powered up. Additional
delay may occur if slow rising power supply.
170 µs
tBG Bandgap startup time 7 µs
tDRT_ON DRT switch switch-on time 2 µs
tPWRSW_ON Power switch switch-on time 2 µs
35.8.2 Voltage Regulators
Table 35-8. Timing Characteristics of the Voltage regulators
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
tAVREG Power up time AVREG CAVDD = 1 µF 60 µs
tDVREG Power up time DVREG Startup after Power-On
CDVDD = 100 nF
CDVDD = 1 µF
40
60
µs
µs
tDVREG Power up time DVREG Startup after DEEP_SLEEP
CDVDD = 100 nF… 1 µF
10
µs
555
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
IRAMPMAX Max. load current during ramp-up Current limitation is applied to ramp-up only. 15 mA
35.8.3 Low-Leakage Voltage Regulator
Table 35-28. Timing Characteristics of the Low-Leakage Voltage Regulator(1,2)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
tCAL Calibration time After power-on or wake-up from DEEP_SLEEP 200 µs
Notes: 1. Values are guidelines only.
2. The autonomous calibration process must be completed before the device can enter DEEP_SLEEP mode. Entering
DEEP_SLEEP is only delayed if the CPU code execution until the sleep() command is shorter than tCAL. See sections
"Low Leakage Voltage Regulator (LLVREG)" on page 192 and "Low Leakage Voltage Regulator Control" on
page 193 for further details.
35.8.4 Deep-Sleep Mode
Table 35-10. Timing Characteristics entering Deep-Sleep Mode (256K Byte FLASH memory configuration)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
tDS Time to enter DEEP_SLEEP(1) CPU sleep() instruction to oscillator is turned off
while transceiver is already in SLEEP state 3 CLK
tDSWRC Time from wake-up event to
CPU code execution (ISR(3))
CPU running with 16 MHz RC oscillator clock,
wake-up with pin change interrupt 34 µs
tDSWRC128K Time from wake-up event to
CPU code execution (ISR)
CPU running with 128 kHz RC oscillator clock,
wake-up with pin change interrupt 420 µs
tDSWXT Time from wake-up event to
CPU code execution (ISR)
CPU running with 16 MHz crystal clock
(CKSEL = 0110), wake-up with pin change
interrupt (SUT = 00 258 clocks)(2)
600 µs
tDSWRC,TRXOFF
Time from wake-up event to
TRX_OFF transceiver state
CPU running with 16 MHz RC oscillator clock,
wake-up with pin change interrupt 650 µs
tDSWXT,TRXOFF Time from wake-up event to
TRX_OFF transceiver state
CPU running with 16 MHz crystal clock
(CKSEL = 0110), wake-up with pin change
interrupt (SUT = 00 258 clocks) (2)
650 µs
tDSWOFF,128K Reduction of wake-up time for
128K Byte FLASH memory
configuration(4)
9 µs
tDSWOFF,64K Reduction of wake-up time for
64K Byte FLASH memory
configuration(4)
13 µs
Note: 1. The automatic LLVREG calibration must have been completed or disabled. See "Low Leakage Voltage Regulator
(LLVREG)" on page 192 and Table 35-28 above for details.
2. Crystal oscillator start-up times depend on CKSEL and SUT setting. See Table 11-10 on page 179 for details.
3. ISR = Interrupt Service Routine.
4. Subtract tDSWOFF from wake-up times given for 256K Byte FLASH memory configuration.
556
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
35.9 2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics
Table 35-11 below describes the requirements for devices connected to the 2-wire
Serial Bus. The ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 2-wire Serial Interface meets or exceeds
these requirements under the noted conditions.
Timing symbols refer to Figure 35-2 on page 557.
Table 35-11. 2-wire Serial Bus Requirements
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Max Units
VIL Input Low-voltage -0.5 0.3VDD V
VIH Input High-voltage 0.7VDD VDD +0.5 V
Vhys(1) Hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger Inputs 0.05VDD(2) V
VOL(1) Output Low-voltage 3 mA sink current 0 0.4 V
tr(1) Rise Time for both SDA and SCL 20+0.1Cb(2,3) 300 ns
tof(1) Output Fall Time from VIHmin to VILmax 10 pF < Cb < 400 pF(3) 20+0.1Cb(2,3) 250 ns
tSP(1) Spikes suppressed by the input filter 0 50(2) ns
Ii Input current each I/O Pin 0.1VDD < Vi < 0.9VDD -10 10 µA
Ci(1) Capacitance for each I/O Pin 10 pF
fSCL SCL Clock frequency fCK(4)>max(16fSCL,250 kHz) (5) 0 400 kHz
Rp Value of Pull-up resistor fSCL 100 kHz VDD -0.4V 1000 ns C
3mA Cb
fSCL > 100 kHz VDD -0.4V 300 ns C
3mA Cb
tHD;STA Hold time (repeated) START condition fSCL 100 kHz 4.0 µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 µs
tLOW Low period of the SCL clock fSCL 100 kHz(6) 4.7 µs
fSCL > 100 kHz(7) 1.3 µs
tHIGH High period of the SCL clock fSCL 100 kHz 4.0 µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 µs
tSU;STA Set-up time for a repeated START condition fSCL 100 kHz 4.7 µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 µs
tHD;DAT Data hold time fSCL 100 kHz 0 µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 0 µs
tSU;DAT Date setup time fSCL 100 kHz 250 ns
fSCL > 100 kHz 100 ns
tSU;STO Setup time for STOP condition fSCL 100 kHz 4.0 µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 0.6 µs
tBUF Bus free time between a STOP and START
condition
fSCL 100 kHz 4.7 µs
fSCL > 100 kHz 1.3 µs
Notes: 1. This parameter is characterized and not 100% tested
2. Required only for fSCL > 100 kHz
3. Cb=capacitance of one bus line in pF
4. fCK=CPU clock frequency
557
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
5. This requirement applies to all the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 2-wire Serial Interface operation. Other devices
connected to the 2-wire Serial Bus need only obey the general fSCL requirement.
6. The actual low period generated by the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 2-wire Serial interface is (1/fSCL – 2/fCK), thus
fCK must be greater than 6MHz for the low time requirement to be strictly met at fSCL = 100 kHz.
7. The actual low period generated by the ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 2-wire Serial interface is (1/fSCL – 2/fCK), thus
the low time requirement will not be strictly met for fSCL > 308 kHz when fCK = 8 MHz. Still,
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 devices connected to the bus may communicated at full speed (400 kHz) with other
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 devices, as well as any other device with proper tLOW acceptance margin.
Figure 35-2. 2-wire Serial Bus Timing
tSU;STA
tLOW
tHIGH
tLOW
tof
tHD;STA tHD;DAT tSU;DAT tSU;STO
tBUF
SCL
SDA
tr
35.10 SPI Timing Characteristics
See Figure 35-3 on page 558 and Figure 35-4 on page 558 for details.
Table 35-12. SPI Timing Parameters
Description Mode Min Typ Max Units
SCK period Master See "SPCR – SPI Control Register" on
page 367.
SCK high/low Master 50% duty cycle
Rise/fall time Master 3.6 ns
Setup Master 10 ns
Hold Master 10 ns
Out to SCK Master 0.5 tSCK
SCK to out Master 10 ns
SCK to out high Master 10 ns
SS
__
low to out Slave 10 ns
SCK period Slave 4 tCK
SCK high/low(1) Slave 2 tCK
Rise/fall time Slave 1600 ns
Setup Slave 10 ns
Hold Slave tCK
SCK to out Slave 15 ns
SCK to SS
__
high Slave 20 ns
SS
__
high to tri-state
Slave 10 ns
SS
__
low to SCK Slave 20 ns
Note: 1. In SPI Programming mode the minimum SCK high/low period is 2 tCLCL for fCK < 12
MHz and 3 tCLCL for fCK > 12 MHz.
558
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 35-3. SPI timing Requirements (Master Mode)
MOSI
(Data Output)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
MISO
(Data Input)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SS
MSB LSB
LSBMSB
...
...
6 1
2 2
34 5
8
7
Figure 35-4. SPI timing Requirements (Slave Mode)
MISO
(Data Output)
SCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(Data Input)
SCK
(CPOL = 0)
SS
MSB LSB
LSBMSB
...
...
10
11 11
1213 14
17
15
9
X
16
35.11 ADC Characteristics
Table 35-13. ADC Electrical Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
VREFINT1 Internal Voltage Reference 1.5 V
VREFINT2 Internal Voltage Reference 1.6 V
VREFINT3 Internal Voltage Reference AVDD V
RAREF,EXT External Voltage
Impedance
6 <
IL,AREF Load Current Loading AREF is not recommended. 0.1 mA
ISUPPLY,ADCSE Supply Current ADC Current (Single ended conversion,
fCLKADC = 2MHz) 0.85 1.0 mA
ISUPPLY,ADCD Supply Current ADC Current with PGA (Differential
conversion, fCLKADC = 1MHz) 1.75 2.0 mA
559
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table 35-14. ADC Characteristics, Single Ended Channels (1)(2)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
dRES4M Resolution Single Ended Conversion fCLKADC 4 MHz 10 Bits
dRES8M Single Ended Conversion fCLKADC = 8 MHz 8 Bits
eABS500k
Absolute accuracy (Including
INL, DNL, quantization error,
gain and offset error) (3)
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 500kHz 2 LSB
eABS2M Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 2MHz 2 LSB
eABS4M Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 4MHz 2 LSB
eINL Integral Non-Linearity (INL) Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 4MHz 0.8 LSB
eDNL Differential Non-Linearity
(DNL)
Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 4MHz -0.5 LSB
eGAIN Gain Error Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 4MHz 1 LSB
eOFFSET Offset Error Single Ended Conversion
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 4MHz 1.5 LSB
tCONV,SE Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 3 240 s
fCLKADC Clock Frequency Single Ended Conversion 8 MHz
VREF Reference Voltage 1.5 AVDD V
VIN,SE Input Voltage 0 AVDD V
fIBW Input Bandwidth 20 kHz
CAIN Input Sampling Capacitance 14 pF
RAIN,SER Analog Series Resistance(4) Between pin and sampling capacitor 2 k<
RAIN Analog Input Resistance Static load resistor of input signal 100 M<
Notes: 1. Values are guidelines only.
2. All values are valid for EVDD = 3.0V.
3. Absolute accuracies do not include dependencies on the absolute value of the reference voltage.
4. Series resistor depends on supply voltage (MOS switch resistance ~ 1/VSUPPLY).
Table 35-15. PGA and ADC Characteristics, Differential Channels (1)(2)(4)
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
dRES,D Resolution All gain settings 10 Bits
eABS,D1
Absolute accuracy (Including
INL, DNL, quantization error,
gain and offset error) (3)
Gain = 1x
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 2MHz 3 LSB
eINL,D1 Integral Non-Linearity (INL) Gain = 1x
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 2MHz 3 LSB
eDNL,D1 Differential Non-Linearity
(DNL)
Gain = 1x
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 2MHz -0.75 LSB
eGAIN,D1
Gain Error
Gain = 1x 1
LSB eGAIN,D10 Gain = 10x 1.5
eGAIN,D200 Gain = 200x 10
560
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
eOFFSET,D1 Offset Error Gain = 1x
VREF = 1.6V fCLKADC = 2MHz 0.7 LSB
tCONV,D Conversion Time Free Running Conversion 100 s
fCLKADC Clock Frequency Single Ended Conversion 2 MHz
VREF Reference Voltage 1.5 AVDD V
VCM Input Common Mode Voltage 0 EVDD V
VIN,DIFF Input Differential Voltage Input pin voltage 0V -AVDD AVDD V
dOUT,D ADC Conversion Output -512 511 LSB
fIBW,D Input Bandwidth 20 kHz
CAIN,PGA Input Sampling Capacitance Gain = 200x 7.5 pF
RAIN,SER Analog Series Resistance(5) Between pin and sampling capacitor 0.5 k<
RAIN Analog Input Resistance Static load resistor of input signal 100 M<
Notes: 1. Values are guidelines only
2. All values are valid for EVDD = 3.0V
3. Absolute accuracies do not include dependencies on the absolute value of the reference voltage.
4. Performance of differential channels deteriorates if PGA output voltage is close to ground.
5. Series resistor depends on supply voltage (MOS switch resistance ~ 1/VSUPPLY).
35.12 Temperature Sensor Characteristics
Table 35-16. Temperature Sensor Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
TDISTNOCAL Temperature distribution Typical, No calibration performed, T = 25 ºC
Internal1.6V Bandgap reference selected 3.5 K
35.13 Analog Comparator Characteristics
Table 35-17. Analog Comparator Electrical Characteristics
Symbol Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Units
VACIO Input Offset Voltage(1) VDD = 3.0V, VIN = VDD/2, T = 25°C <10 mV
IACLK Input Leakage Current(4) VDD = 3.0V, VIN = VDD/2, T = 25°C <10 nA
tACID Propagation Delay(2) VDD = 3.0V, VIN = VDD/2, T = 25°C 175 nA
ISUPPLY,AC Supply Current(3) VDD = 3.0V, VIN = VDD/2, T = 25°C 50 µA
Notes: 1. This parameter is characterized and not 100% tested.
2. Analog delay only. Output of comparator is clocked into ACO bit of ACSR register.
3. Bit ACD in register ACSR is low.
4. See also parameters IIL and IIH in section "Digital Pin Characteristics" on page 551.
35.14 Transceiver Electrical Characteristics
35.14.1 Digital Interface Timing Characteristics
Test Conditions: TOP = 25°C, VDD = 3.0V, CL = 50 pF (unless otherwise stated)
561
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Symbol
Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
t12 AES core cycle time 24 µs
tIRQ Interrupt event latency Relative to the event on the RF pins to be
indicated (e.g. TRX24_RX_END interrupt)
9 µs
tBATMON Battery monitor latency 2 µs
35.14.2 General RF Specifications
Test Conditions (unless otherwise stated):
VDD = 3.0V, fRF = 2.45 GHz, TOP = 25°C, Measurement setup see Figure 32-1 on page
538.
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
fRF Frequency range As specified in [1],[2] 2405 2480 MHz
fCH Channel spacing As specified in [1],[2] 5 MHz
fHDR Header bit rate (SHR, PHR) As specified in [1],[2] 250 kb/s
fPSDU PSDU bit rate As specified in [1],[2]
OQPSK_DATA_RATE = 1
OQPSK_DATA_RATE = 2
OQPSK_DATA_RATE = 3
250
500
1000
2000
kb/s
kb/s
kb/s
kb/s
fCHIP Chip rate As specified in [1],[2] 2000 kchip/s
fCLK Crystal oscillator frequency Reference frequency oscillator 16 MHz
fCLK_ACC Required reference frequency
accuracy
PSDU bit rate 250 kb/s
500 kb/s
1000 kb/s
2000 kb/s
-60(1)
-40
-40
-30
+60(1)
+40
+40
+30
ppm
ppm
ppm
ppm
tXTAL Reference oscillator settling time Leaving SLEEP state to crystal clock
available
215 1000 µs
B20dB 20 dB bandwidth 2.8 MHz
Note: 1. A reference frequency accuracy of ±40 ppm is required by [1], [2].
35.14.3 Transmitter Characteristics
Test Conditions (unless otherwise stated):
VDD = 3.0V, fRF = 2.45 GHz, TOP = 25°C, Measurement setup see Figure 32-1 on page
538.
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
PTX TX Output power Maximum configurable TX output power
value
Register bit TX_PWR = 0
0 +3.5 +6 dBm
PRANGE Output power range 16 steps, configurable in
register PHY_TX_PWR
20 dB
PACC Output power tolerance ±3 dB
TX Return loss 100+j0 < differential impedance,
PTX = +3.5 dBm
10 dB
EVM 8 %rms
562
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
PHARM Harmonics
2nd harmonic
3rd harmonic
-38
-45
dBm
dBm
PSPUR Spurious Emissions
30 – 1000 MHz
>1 – 12.75 GHz
1.8 – 1.9 GHz
5.15 – 5.3 GHz
Complies with
EN 300 328/440,
FCC-CFR-47 part 15,
ARIB STD-66, RSS-210
-36
-30
-47
-47
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
35.14.4 Receiver Characteristics
Test Conditions (unless otherwise stated):
VDD = 3.0V, fRF = 2.45 GHz, TOP = 25°C, PSDU bit rate = 250 kb/s, Measurement setup
see Figure 32-1 on page 538.
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
PSENS Receiver sensitivity
250 kb/s
500 kb/s
1000 kb/s
2000 kb/s
AWGN channel, PER 1%,
PSDU length 20 octets
High Data Rate Modes:
PSDU length 20 octets
-100
-96
-94
-86
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
Antenna Diversity 250 kb/s, PSDU 20 octets -99 dBm
RL Return loss 100+j0 < differential impedance 10 dB
NF Noise figure 6 dB
PRXMAX Maximum RX input level PER 1%, PSDU length of 20 octets 10 dBm
PACRN Adjacent channel rejection:
-5 MHz
PER 1%, PSDU length of 20 octets,
PRF = -82 dBm
34 dB
PACRP Adjacent channel rejection:
+5 MHz
PER 1%, PSDU length of 20 octets,
PRF = -82 dBm
38 dB
PAACRN Alternate channel rejection:
-10 MHz
PER 1%, PSDU length of 20 octets,
PRF = -82 dBm
54 dB
PAACRP Alternate channel rejection:
+10 MHz
PER 1%, PSDU length of 20 octets,
PRF = -82 dBm
54 dB
PSPUR Spurious emissions:
LO leakage
30 – 1000 MHz
>1 – 12.75 GHz
-71
-57
-47
dBm
dBm
dBm
fRXTXOFFS
TX/RX carrier frequency offset Sensitivity loss < 2 dB -300(1) +300 kHz
IIP3 3rd – order intercept point At maximum gain
Offset freq. interf. 1 = 5 MHz
Offset freq. interf. 2 = 10 MHz
-14 dBm
IIP2 2nd – order intercept point At maximum gain
Offset freq. interf. 1 = 60 MHz
Offset freq. interf. 2 = 62 MHz
17 dBm
RSSI tolerance Tolerance within gain step ±5 dB
RSSI dynamic range 81 dB
563
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
RSSI resolution 3 dB
RSSI sensitivity Defined as RSSI_BASE_VAL -90 dBm
Minimum RSSI value PRF RSSI_BASE_VAL 0
Maximum RSSI value PRF > RSSI_BASE_VAL + 81 dB 28
Note: 1. Offset equals ±120 ppm
35.14.5 Current Consumption Specifications
Test Conditions (unless otherwise stated):
VDD = 3.0V, fRF = 2.45 GHz, TOP = 25°C, Measurement setup see Figure 32-1 on page
538. (Power Reduction Register PRR0 and PRR1 are not set).
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
IBUSY_TX Supply current transmit state PTX = 3.5 dBm
PTX = 1.5 dBm
PTX = -2.5 dBm
PTX = -16.5 dBm
(current consumption is reduced at
VDD = 1.8V for each output power level)
14.5
10
9
8
mA
mA
mA
mA
IRX_ON_RPC Supply current RX_ON state
RPC mode enabled(2)
RX_ON state, with register setting
RX_PDT_LEVEL < 8(1)
6 mA
IRX_ON_P_RPC
RX_ON state, with register setting
RX_PDT_LEVEL > 8(1)
5 mA
IRX_ON_RPC Supply current PLL_ON state
RPC mode enabled(2)
0.45 mA
IRX_ON Supply current RX_ON state
RPC mode disabled(2)
RX_ON state 12.5 mA
IRX_ON_P RX_ON state, with register setting
RX_PDT_LEVEL > 0(1)
12.0 mA
IPLL_ON Supply current PLL_ON state
RPC mode disabled(2)
5.7 mA
ITRX_OFF Supply current TRX_OFF state TRX_OFF state 0.4 mA
ISLEEP Supply current SLEEP state SLEEP state 0.02 A
Note: 1. Refer to section "RX_SYN – Transceiver Receiver Sensitivity Control Register" on
page 131.
2. Refer to section "Reduced Power Consumption Mode (RPC)" on page 104.
35.14.6 16MHz Crystal Oscillator and Crystal Parameter Requirements
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
f0 Crystal frequency For accuracy see "General RF
Specifications" on page 561
16 MHz
CL Load capacitance 8 14 pF
C0 Static capacitance 7 pF
R1 Series resistance 100 <
564
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Symbol Parameter Condition Min. Typ. Max. Units
tXTALOFF 16MHz XTAL oscillator off-time Minimum sleep time of the transceiver 1.0 ms
36 Typical Characteristics
36.1 Supply Current vs. Clock Speed with Transceiver in SLEEP
36.1.1 Clock source 16MHz RC Oscillator
Figure 36-5. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (VDD = 3.0V, PRR0/1 = 0xFF/0x3F)
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0
EVDD [V]
Current Consumption [mA]
Frequency [MHz]
565
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-6. Active Supply Current vs. VDD (fCLK=1MHz, PRR0/1 = 0xFF/0x3F)
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
EVDD [V]
Current Consumption [mA]
Figure 36-7. Active Supply Current vs. VDD (fCLK = 16MHz, PRR0/1 = 0x00/0x00)
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
EVDD [V]
Current Consumption [mA]
566
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-8. Idle Supply Current vs. VDD (fCLK = 1MHz; PRR0/1 = 0xFF/0x3F)
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
EVDD [V]
Current Consumption [mA]
Figure 36-9. Idle Supply Current vs. VDD (fCLK = 8MHz, PRR0/1 = 0xFF/0x3F)
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
EVDD [V]
Current Consumption [mA]
567
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
36.1.2 External clock source on pin CLKI
Figure 36-10. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (VDD = 3.0V, PRR0/1 = 0x00/0x00)
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0
CLK [MHz]
Current Consumption [mA]
Figure 36-11. Active Supply Current vs. Frequency (VDD = 3.0V, PRR0/1 = 0xFF/0x3F)
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0
CLK [MHz]
Current Consumption [mA]
Frequency [MHz]
Frequency [MHz]
568
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-12. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (VDD = 3.0V, PRR0/1 set and reset)
-40°C PRR set
25°C PRR set
85°C PRR set
125°C PRR set
-40°C no PRR
25°C no PRR
85°C no PRR
125°C no PRR
0
1
2
3
4
5
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0
CLK [MHz]
Current Consumption [mA]
36.2 Current Consumption of Bandgap Source and Digital Voltage Regulator
The supply currents of band-gap reference source and digital voltage regulator are part
of all supply current measurement. In DEEP_SLEEP mode both units are disabled.
Figure 36-13. Combined Supply Current of Bandgap Source and Voltage Regulator
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
CLK [MHz]
Current Consumption [mA]
36.3 Current Consumption in various Transceiver States
The AVR microcontroller is in Active state (clkCPU=16MHz) with no power reduction set
by the register PRR0 and PRR1. The clock source of the microcontroller is the internal
16MHz RC Oscillator.
Frequency [MHz]
EVDD [V]
569
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-14. TRXOFF state supply current vs VDD
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
EVDD [V]
Current Consumption [mA]
Figure 36-15. RX_ON state supply current vs. VDD
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
EVDD [V]
Current Consumption [mA]
570
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-16. RX_ON State Supply Current vs. VDD, RPC Enabled
-40°C
27°C
85°C
125°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
EVDD [V]
Current Consumption [mA]
Figure 36-17. RX_ON State Supply Current, RPC Enabled, RX_PDT_LEVEL = 15
-40°C
27°C
85°C
125°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
EVDD [V]
Current Consumption [mA]
571
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-18. TX Active state supply current vs. VDD (maximum TX output power)
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
EVDD [V]
Current Consumption [mA]
36.4 RF Measurements
For all RF power measurement results the calibration level is the differential RF input of
the device. It enables an easy calculation for the different RF front-ends with external
power amplifier and/or RF switches (diversity, RX/TX). The combined loss of Balun,
strip-line and SMA connecter on the Radio-Controller-Board is <1dB.
36.4.1 Packet Error Rate (PER)
Figure 36-19. PER vs. input power for 250kbit mode
EVDD=1.8V
EVDD=3.0V
EVDD=3.6V
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-102.0 -100.0 -98.0 -96.0 -94.0 -92.0 -90.0
Input Power [dBm]
PER [%]
572
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
36.4.2 Transmit Power
Figure 36-20. TX maximum output power
-40 °C
25 °C
85 °C
125 °C
0
1
2
3
4
5
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
Supply Voltage [V]
TX Maximum Output Power [dBm]
Figure 36-21. TX output power vs. TX_PWR in register PHY_TX_PWR
-40 °C
125 °C
25 °C
85 °C
-20
-15
-10
-5
0
5
10
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0
TX_PWR register value [#]
TX Output Power [dBm]
573
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
36.5 BOD Threshold
Figure 36-22. Brown-out Threshold vs. Temperature (Rising Supply Voltage)
BOD_LEVEL=1.8
BOD_LEVEL=1.9
BOD_LEVEL=2.0
BOD_LEVEL=2.1
BOD_LEVEL=2.2
BOD_LEVEL=2.3
BOD_LEVEL=2.4
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
-40.0 -20.0 0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120.0
Temperature [°C]
switch voltage level up [V]
Figure 36-23. Brown-out Threshold vs. Temperature (Falling Supply Voltage)
BOD_LEVEL=1.8
BOD_LEVEL=1.9
BOD_LEVEL=2.0
BOD_LEVEL=2.1
BOD_LEVEL=2.2
BOD_LEVEL=2.3
BOD_LEVEL=2.4
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
-40.0 -20.0 0.0 20.0 40.0 60.0 80.0 100.0 120.0
Temperature [°C]
switch voltage level down [V]
574
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
36.6 Pin Driver Strength
Figure 36-24. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VDD = 3.0V, DPDS0=0)
-40 °C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
IOH [mA]
EVDD-VOH [V]
Figure 36-25. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (25°C, DPDS0=0)
EVDD=1.8
EVDD=2.4
EVDD=3.0
EVDD=3.6
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
I_OH [mA]
EVDD-V_OH [V]
575
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-26. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (25°C, VDD = 3.0V)
DPD=0 DPD=1 DPD=2 DPD=3
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
IOH [mA]
EVDD-VOH [V]
Figure 36-27. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VDD=3.0V, DPDS0 = 0)
-40 °C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
IOL [mA]
VOL [V]
576
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-28. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (25°C, DPDS0=1)
-40 degC
25 degC
85 degC
125 degC
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
I_OL [mA]
V_OL [V]
Figure 36-29. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (25°C, VDD = 3.0V)
DPD=0 DPD=1 DPD=2 DPD=3
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0
IOL [mA]
VOL [V]
577
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
36.7 Power-Down Current
Figure 36-30. Power-Down Current vs. Temperature (Watchdog Disabled)
1.8V
3.0V
3.6V
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.7
1
2
3
5
7
10
-40 -25 -10 5 20 35 50 65 80 95 110 125
I
SUPPLY
[µA]
Temperature [°C]
Figure 36-31. Power-Down Current vs. Supply Voltage (Watchdog Disabled)
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.7
1
2
3
5
7
10
1,8 2,0 2,2 2,4 2,6 2,8 3,0 3,2 3,4 3,6
I
SUPPLY
[µA]
V
DD
[V]
578
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-32. Power-Down Current vs. Temperature (Watchdog Enabled)
1.8V
3.0V
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.7
1
2
3
5
7
10
-40 -25 -10 5 20 35 50 65 80 95 110 125
ISUPPLY [µA]
Temperature [°C]
3.6V
Figure 36-33. Power-Down Current vs. Supply Voltage (Watchdog Enabled)
-40°C
25°C
85°C
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.7
1
2
3
5
7
10
1,8 2,0 2,2 2,4 2,6 2,8 3,0 3,2 3,4 3,6
ISUPPLY [µA]
VDD [V]
125°C
36.8 Static ADC Parameter – INL and DNL
All static parameter of the ADC have been obtained with fADCLK = 2 MHz, SUT = 10,
THT = 0 and an internal reference voltage of 1.6V.
579
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-34. Integral Nonlinearity vs. Output Code (Single-Ended, 3.0V, 25°C)
-0.4
-0.2
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
0 128 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024
Digital Output Code
INL [LSB]
Figure 36-35. Differential Nonlinearity vs. Output Code (Single-Ended, 3.0V, 25°C)
-0.3
-0.2
-0.1
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0 128 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024
Digital Output Code
DNL [LSB]
580
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-36. Integral Nonlinearity vs. Output Code (with PGA, Gain=10, 3.0V, 25°C)
-4.0
-3.0
-2.0
-1.0
0.0
1.0
-512 -384 -256 -128 0 128 256 384 512
Digital Output Code
INL [LSB]
Figure 36-37. Differential Nonlinearity vs. Output Code (with PGA, Gain=10, 3.0V,
25°C)
-0.4
-0.2
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
-512 -384 -256 -128 0 128 256 384 512
Digital Output Code
DNL [LSB]
581
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-38. Integral Nonlinearity vs. Temperature at VDEVDD = 3.6V
Single Ended
Gain = 1
Gain = 10
Gain = 200
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Temperature [°C]
|INL|MAX [LSB]
Figure 36-39. Integral Nonlinearity vs. Supply Voltage at 25°C
Single Ended
Gain = 1
Gain = 10
Gain = 200
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
VDD [V]
|INL|MAX [LSB]
582
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-40. Differential Nonlinearity vs. Temperature at VEVDD = 3.6V
Single Ended
Gain = 1
Gain = 10
Gain = 200
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Temperature [°C]
|DNL|MAX [LSB]
Figure 36-41. Differential Nonlinearity vs. Supply Voltage VEVDD at 25°C
Single Ended
Gain = 1
Gain = 10
Gain = 200
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
VDD [V]
|DNL|MAX [LSB]
36.9 Dynamic ADC Parameter – ENOB
The dynamic ADC parameters for the single-ended channels have been measured with
fADCLK = 4 MHz, SUT = 20, THT = 0 and an internal reference voltage of 1.6V. The sine
583
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
wave of the input signal had a frequency of fIN,SIN = 20.207 kHz and peak-to-peak
amplitude of VIN,PP = 1.58V.
Figure 36-42. 2048 Point FFT Output for a Single-Ended ADC Channel (3.0V, 25 °C)
101.04; -78.53
80.83; -71.80
60.62; -74.25
40.41; -64.27
20.21; 0.00
-120
-100
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Frequency [kHz]
Amplitude [dB]
Figure 36-43. Effective Number of Bits vs. Supply Voltage for Single-Ended Channels
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
VDD [V]
ENOB [LSB]
SINAD = 57.54 dB
ENOB = 9.27 bit
THD = -63.08 dB
584
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
The dynamic ADC parameters for the differential channels with a gain of 10 have been
measured with fADCLK = 2 MHz, SUT = 10, THT = 0 and an internal reference voltage of
1.6V. The input sine wave had a frequency of fIN,SIN = 20.124 kHz and peak-to-peak
amplitude of VIN,PP = 0.31V.
Figure 36-44. 2048 Point FFT Output for a Gain=10 ADC Channel (3.0V, 25 °C)
60.37; -56.28
40.25; -53.42
20.12; 0.00
-120
-100
-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Frequency [kHz]
Amplitude [dB]
Figure 36-45. Effective Number of Bits vs. Supply Voltage for Gain=10 Channels
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
VDD [V]
ENOB [LSB]
SINAD = 43.59 dB
ENOB = 6.95 bit
THD = -51.61 dB
585
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
36.10 ADC Voltage Reference
Figure 36-46. 1.6V ADC Voltage Reference vs. Supply Voltage
-40°C
27°C
85°C
125°C
1.56
1.57
1.58
1.59
1.60
1.61
1.62
1.63
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
VDD [V]
VAREF [V]
36.11 Temperature Sensor
The temperature measurement results have been measured with an ADC clock of 500
kHz, SUT = 80, THT = 4 and an internal reference voltage of 1.6V. To enhance the
accuracy and resolution the data of 128 measurements per temperature step have
been decimated.
586
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-47. Measured Temperature Value vs. Temperature and VEVDD
1.8V
3.0V
3.6V
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Temperature [°C]
Measured Temperature [°C]
Figure 36-48. Error of Measured Temperature Value EMEAS – EIDEAL vs. Temperature
3.0V
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Temperature [°C]
Mean Error [°C]
587
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-49. Standard Deviation of Measured Temperature vs. Temperature
3.0V
-0.2
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Temperature [°C]
Standard Deviation [°C]
36.12 Internal Oscillator Speed
Figure 36-50. 128 kHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. OSCCAL Register Value
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 256
OSCCAL
fRC [kHz]
588
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-51. 128 kHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Supply Voltage
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
25
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
VDD [V]
fRC [kHz]
Figure 36-52. 16 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. OSCCAL Register Value
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 256
OSCCAL
fRC [MHz]
589
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-53. 16 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency vs. Supply Voltage VDEVDD
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
VDD [V]
fRC [MHz]
36.13 Programming Current
The programming currents shown in the following figures are averaged over the entire
write/erase time. The value is primarily defined by the integrated charge pump.
Therefore the currents for Flash, EEPROM, Fuse- and Lock-bit programming
operations are similar.
590
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Figure 36-54. Programming Current vs. Supply Voltage VDEVDD
-40°C
25°C
85°C
125°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6
VDD [V]
ISUPPLY [mA]
591
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
37 Ordering Information
ATmega2564RFR2
Speed (MHz) Power Supply Ordering Code Package Packing Operation Range
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega2564RFR2-ZU PQ Tray Industrial (-40°C to 85°C)
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega2564RFR2-ZUR PQ Tape & Reel Industrial (-40°C to 85°C)
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega2564RFR2-ZF PQ Tray Industrial (-40°C to 125°C)
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega2564RFR2-ZFR PQ Tape & Reel Industrial (-40°C to 125°C)
Notes: 5. Pb-free packaging, complies to European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).
Also Halide free and fully Green.
6. Performance figures for 125°C are only valid for devices with ordering code ATmega2564RFR2-ZF/-ZFR.
Package Type
PQ 48-lead, 7 x 7 x 0.9 mm Body, Quad Flat No-lead Package (QFN)
592
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
ATmega1284RFR2
Speed (MHz) Power Supply Ordering Code Package Packing Operation Range
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega1284RFR2-ZU PQ Tray Industrial (-40°C to 85°C)
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega1284RFR2-ZUR PQ Tape & Reel Industrial (-40°C to 85°C)
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega1284RFR2-ZF PQ Tray Industrial (-40°C to 125°C)
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega1284RFR2-ZFR PQ Tape & Reel Industrial (-40°C to 125°C)
Notes: 1. Pb-free packaging, complies to European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).
Also Halide free and fully Green.
2. Performance figures for 125°C are only valid for devices with ordering code ATmega1284RFR2-ZF/-ZFR.
Package Type
PQ 48-lead, 7 x 7 x 0.9 mm Body, Quad Flat No-lead Package (QFN)
593
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
ATmega644RFR2
Speed (MHz) Power Supply Ordering Code Package Packing Operation Range
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega644RFR2-ZU PQ Tray Industrial (-40°C to 85°C)
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega644RFR2-ZUR PQ Tape & Reel Industrial (-40°C to 85°C)
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega644RFR2-ZF PQ Tray Industrial (-40°C to 125°C)
16 1.8 – 3.6V ATmega644RFR2-ZFR PQ Tape & Reel Industrial (-40°C to 125°C)
Notes: 1. Pb-free packaging, complies to European Directive for Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS directive).
Also Halide free and fully Green.
2. Performance figures for 125°C are only valid for devices with ordering code ATmega644RFR2-ZF/-ZFR.
Package Type
PQ 48-lead, 7 x 7 x 0.9 mm Body, Quad Flat No-lead Package (QFN)
594
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
38 Packaging Information
PQ
595
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
39 Errata
39.1 ATmega2564RFR2 revision D
• Interrupt restrictions in Deep-sleep Mode
• Device does not enter Deep-Sleep if no crystal is connected to XTAL pins
39.2 ATmega2564RFR2 revision A, B, C
Not sampled.
39.3 ATmega1284RFR2 revision D
• Interrupt restrictions in Deep-sleep Mode
• Relocation of sleep instruction within boot section not sufficient
• Device does not enter Deep-Sleep if no crystal is connected to XTAL pins
39.4 ATmega1284RFR2 revision A, B, C
Not sampled.
39.5 ATmega644RFR2 revision D
• Interrupt restrictions in Deep-sleep Mode
• Relocation of sleep instruction within boot section not sufficient
• Device does not enter Deep-Sleep if no crystal is connected to XTAL pins
39.6 ATmega644RFR2 revision A, B, C
Not sampled
39.7 Detailed errata description
39.7.1 Device does not enter Deep-Sleep if no crystal is connected to XTAL pins
If the device is used without the transceiver then there may be no crystal connected to
the pins XTAL1 and XTAL2. The transceiver will then not enter its sleep state if the
SLPTR bit in the TRXPR register is set and in consequence the device will not enter the
deep sleep power-down state. (3672)
Problem Fix/Workaround
To disable the transceiver set the PRTRX24 bit in the PRR1 register.
39.7.2 PMU shows erroneous behavior with a 3µs period
The results from the phase measurement unit (PMU) depend on the length of the initial
delay between a frequency change and the start of the phase measurement process
(software timer). If the timer delay is increased then after adding 3µs, the same results
are achieved. For some delay settings the PMU results are correct, for others they are
wrong. (3768)
Problem Fix/Workaround
The software has to guarantee equidistant PMU measurements. The measurement
start must be aligned to the internal clocks for instance by tweaking the program code
with nop instructions.
596
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
39.7.3 Interrupt restrictions in Deep-sleep Mode
In Deep-Sleep Mode, there is a restriction regarding allowed memory location for the
sleep instruction. Otherwise the interrupts will be disabled and can not wake-up the
device. (4567)
Problem Fix/Workaround
There are two safe constellations where Deep-sleep Mode is guaranteed to allow
interrupts waking up the device.
• If the IVSEL bit is not set (default value), the PC must be below the lowest possible
boot segment, i.e. below word address 0x1F000 (byte address 0x3E000) for the
256K Byte FLASH memory configuration (application section of the memory).
• If the IVSEL bit is set, the PC must be above the beginning of the smallest (topmost)
possible boot segment, i.e. above word address 0x1FE00 (byte address 0x3FC00)
for the 256K Byte FLASH memory configuration. Note that the addresses mentioned
are independent of the actual state of the BOOTSZ[1:0] fuse bits in high fuse.
The memory locations for wakeup by interrupts from Deep-Sleep have to been told to
compiler respective linker as describe below.
• Pseudo-code listing including Compiler directives for actions to take for Deep-Sleep
// relocate function to last quarter of FLASH boot section
// ADDRESS=0x3FC00 / 256K Byte FLASH
void go_sleep_boot(void) __attribute__((section(".high"),
noinline));
void go_sleep_boot(void)
{
asm(“SLEEP”);
}
// relocate function to the application section
// ADDRESS=0x3E000 / 256K Byte FLASH
// default bootloader fuse settings
void go_sleep_appl(void) __attribute__((section(".text"),
noinline));
void go_sleep_appl(void)
{
asm(“SLEEP”);
}
// Beware that at least one interrupt source must
// be setup and enabled when entering here.
void gosleep(void)
{
/* prepare Deep-sleep Mode */
PRR1 = (1 << PRTRX24); /* power-off transceiver */
SMCR = (2 << SM0) | (1 << SE);
if (MCUCR & (1 << IVSEL))
go_sleep_boot();
else
go_sleep_appl();
/* back from sleep here */
SMCR = 0;
}
Linker options to relocate the interrupt functions to the required memory address the
linker need to have following options added (related to 256kByte FLASH memory
597
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
configuration):
…. -Wl,--section-start=.text=0x3E000 -Wl,--section-start=.high=0x3FC00
For other tool chains please contact the tool vendor.
If the source code needs to be portable for all memory configurations consider the
limitations as described in the chapter "Relocation of sleep instruction within boot
section not sufficient" below.
39.7.4 Relocation of sleep instruction within boot section not sufficient
Relocation of sleep instruction within the boot section as described in chapter 39.7.3
above for the 256K Byte FLASH memory configuration does not wakeup the devices
with a smaller FLASH memory configuration (128K Byte, 64K Byte). (4567)
Problem Fix/Workaround
Do not use wakeup interrupts in the boot section. It is recommended to place the
wakeup interrupts in the application section.
If it is required to save current while executing the program from the boot section
choose an appropriated mode as described in the chapter "AVR Microcontroller Sleep
Modes" on page 184.
If the transceiver is not in SLEEP state the use of PowerDown respective PowerSave
mode is possible because the device will not enter DeepSleep mode.
598
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
40 Revision history
Please note that the referring page numbers in this section are referring to this
document. The referring revision in this section are referring to the document revision
Rev. 42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
1. Routing of divided EVDD voltage to the comparator added in the chapter "EVDD
Voltage Measurement" on page 461
2. Endurance value corrected in the chapter "In-System Reprogrammable Flash
Program Memory" on page 18
3. Errata section added
4. Product names replaced by FLASH memory configuration in chapters "Stack Pointer"
on page 13 and "Deep-Sleep Mode" on page 555
5. Comment in pseudo code in chapter "Reading the Signature Row from Software" on
page 492 changed to English
6. Additional cross-link to TX chapter added in "External RF-Front End Control" on page
98
7. Assembly code and some details added to chapter "Reading the Signature Row from
Software" on page 492
8. "Factory Row" replaced by "Signature Row" in NEMCR – Flash Extended-Mode
Control-Register on page 501
9. Relation between SRT and Frame Buffer Protection added in "Dynamic Frame Buffer
Protection" on page 99 and "SRT – Smart Receiving Technology" on page 104
10. Assembly code and some details added to chapter "Reading the Signature Row
from Software" on page 492
11. Old identifier TST_FRAME_LENGTH replaced by TST_RX_LENGTH
Rev. 42073A-MCU Wireless-02/13
12. Initial release
599
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Table of Contents
Features .................................................................................................. 1
Applications ........................................................................................... 1
1 Pin Configurations .............................................................................. 2
2 Disclaimer ............................................................................................ 2
3 Overview .............................................................................................. 3
3.1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................ 3
3.2 Pin Descriptions...................................................................................................... 5
3.3 Unused Pins ........................................................................................................... 7
3.4 Compatibility and Feature Limitations of QFN-48 Package ................................... 7
4 Resources............................................................................................ 8
5 About Code Examples ........................................................................ 8
6 Data Retention and Endurance .......................................................... 8
6.1 Data Retention........................................................................................................ 8
6.2 Endurance of the Code Memory (FLASH) ............................................................. 8
6.3 Endurance of the Data Memory (EEPROM) .......................................................... 8
7 AVR CPU Core ..................................................................................... 9
7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 9
7.2 Architectural Overview ........................................................................................... 9
7.3 ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit ................................................................................. 10
7.4 Status Register ..................................................................................................... 11
7.5 General Purpose Register File ............................................................................. 12
7.6 Stack Pointer ........................................................................................................ 13
7.7 Instruction Execution Timing ................................................................................ 15
7.8 Reset and Interrupt Handling ............................................................................... 15
8 AVR Memories ................................................................................... 18
8.1 In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program Memory.......................................... 18
8.2 SRAM Data Memory ............................................................................................ 18
8.3 EEPROM Data Memory ....................................................................................... 20
8.4 EEPROM Register Description ............................................................................ 26
8.5 I/O Memory ........................................................................................................... 28
8.6 General Purpose I/O Registers ............................................................................ 29
8.7 Other Port Registers ............................................................................................. 30
9 Low-Power 2.4 GHz Transceiver ...................................................... 32
9.1 Features ............................................................................................................... 32
9.2 General Circuit Description .................................................................................. 33
600
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
9.3 Transceiver to Microcontroller Interface ............................................................... 34
9.4 Operating Modes .................................................................................................. 38
9.5 Functional Description .......................................................................................... 67
9.6 Module Description ............................................................................................... 80
9.7 Radio Transceiver Usage ..................................................................................... 90
9.8 Radio Transceiver Extended Feature Set ............................................................ 92
9.9 Continuous Transmission Test Mode ................................................................. 106
9.10 Abbreviations .................................................................................................... 108
9.11 Reference Documents ...................................................................................... 110
9.12 Register Description ......................................................................................... 111
10 MAC Symbol Counter ................................................................... 155
10.1 Main Features................................................................................................... 155
10.2 Clock source selection and Sleep/Active mode operation ............................... 155
10.3 32 bit Register Access (Atomic Read/Write) .................................................... 156
10.4 Symbol Counter (32 bit, SCCNT) ..................................................................... 156
10.5 Symbol Counter SFD Timestamp Register (32 bit, SCTSR, Read Only) ........ 156
10.6 Symbol Counter Beacon Timestamp Register (32 bit, SCBTSR) .................... 157
10.7 Compare Unit (3x 32 bit, SCOCR1, SCOCR2, SCOCR3) ............................... 157
10.8 Interrupt Control Registers ............................................................................... 157
10.9 Backoff Slot Counter ........................................................................................ 158
10.10 Symbol Counter Usage .................................................................................. 158
10.11 Register Description ....................................................................................... 159
11 System Clock and Clock Options ................................................ 174
11.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 174
11.2 Clock Systems and their Distribution ............................................................... 174
11.3 Clock Sources .................................................................................................. 175
11.4 Calibrated Internal RC Oscillator ...................................................................... 176
11.5 128 kHz Internal Oscillator ............................................................................... 177
11.6 External Clock .................................................................................................. 177
11.7 Transceiver Crystal Oscillator .......................................................................... 178
11.8 Clock Output Buffer .......................................................................................... 179
11.9 Timer/Counter Oscillator .................................................................................. 179
11.10 System Clock Prescaler ................................................................................. 179
11.11 Register Description ....................................................................................... 180
12 Power Management and Sleep Modes ........................................ 183
12.1 Deep-Sleep Mode ............................................................................................ 183
601
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
12.2 AVR Microcontroller Sleep Modes ................................................................... 184
12.2.6 Extended Standby Mode ............................................................................... 186
12.3 Power Reduction Register ................................................................................ 186
12.4 Minimizing Power Consumption ....................................................................... 187
12.5 Supply Voltage and Leakage Control ............................................................... 189
12.6 Register Description ......................................................................................... 194
13 System Control and Reset ........................................................... 207
13.1 Resetting the AVR ............................................................................................ 207
13.2 Reset Sources .................................................................................................. 207
13.3 Internal Voltage Reference ............................................................................... 210
13.4 Watchdog Timer ............................................................................................... 211
13.5 Register Description ......................................................................................... 214
14 I/O-Ports ......................................................................................... 217
14.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 217
14.2 Ports as General Digital I/O .............................................................................. 218
14.3 Alternate Port Functions ................................................................................... 222
14.4 Register Description ......................................................................................... 234
15 Interrupts ....................................................................................... 241
15.1 Interrupt Vectors in ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 ........................................... 241
15.2 Reset and Interrupt Vector Placement ............................................................. 243
15.3 Moving Interrupts Between Application and Boot Section ............................... 246
15.4 Register Description ......................................................................................... 247
16 External Interrupts ........................................................................ 248
16.1 Pin Change Interrupt Timing ............................................................................ 248
16.2 Register Description ......................................................................................... 249
17 8-bit Timer/Counter0 with PWM ................................................... 256
17.1 Features ........................................................................................................... 256
17.2 Overview ........................................................................................................... 256
17.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources .......................................................................... 257
17.4 Counter Unit ..................................................................................................... 257
17.5 Output Compare Unit ....................................................................................... 258
17.6 Compare Match Output Unit ............................................................................. 260
17.7 Modes of Operation .......................................................................................... 262
17.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams ...................................................................... 266
17.9 Register Description ......................................................................................... 268
18 16-bit Timer/Counter (Timer/Counter 1, 3, 4, and 5) ................... 274
602
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
18.1 Features ........................................................................................................... 274
18.2 Overview ........................................................................................................... 274
18.3 Accessing 16-bit Registers ............................................................................... 276
18.4 Timer/Counter Clock Sources .......................................................................... 279
18.5 Counter Unit ..................................................................................................... 279
18.6 Input Capture Unit ............................................................................................ 280
18.7 Output Compare Units ...................................................................................... 282
18.8 Compare Match Output Unit ............................................................................. 284
18.9 Modes of Operation .......................................................................................... 286
18.10 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams .................................................................... 294
18.11 Register Description ....................................................................................... 296
19 Timer/Counter 0, 1, 3, 4, and 5 Prescaler .................................... 334
19.1 Internal Clock Source ....................................................................................... 334
19.2 Prescaler Reset ................................................................................................ 334
19.3 External Clock Source ...................................................................................... 334
19.4 Register Description ......................................................................................... 335
20 Output Compare Modulator (OCM1C0A)..................................... 337
20.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 337
20.2 Description ........................................................................................................ 337
20.3 Timing Example ................................................................................................ 338
21 8-bit Timer/Counter2 with PWM and Asynchronous Operation 339
21.1 Features ........................................................................................................... 339
21.2 Overview ........................................................................................................... 339
21.3 Timer/Counter Clock Sources .......................................................................... 340
21.4 Counter Unit ..................................................................................................... 341
21.5 Modes of Operation .......................................................................................... 341
21.6 Output Compare Unit ....................................................................................... 346
21.7 Compare Match Output Unit ............................................................................. 347
21.8 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams ...................................................................... 349
21.9 Asynchronous Operation of Timer/Counter2 .................................................... 350
21.10 Timer/Counter Prescaler ................................................................................ 353
21.11 Register Description ....................................................................................... 354
22 SPI- Serial Peripheral Interface .................................................... 361
22.1 Features ........................................................................................................... 361
22.2 Functional Description ...................................................................................... 361
22.3 Pin Functionality Slave Select Pin SS
__
.............................................................. 365
603
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
22.4 Register Description ......................................................................................... 367
23 USART............................................................................................ 370
23.1 Features ........................................................................................................... 370
23.2 Overview ........................................................................................................... 370
23.3 Clock Generation .............................................................................................. 371
23.4 Frame Formats ................................................................................................. 374
23.5 USART Initialization ......................................................................................... 375
23.6 Data Transmission – The USART Transmitter ................................................. 376
23.7 Data Reception – The USART Receiver .......................................................... 379
23.8 Asynchronous Data Reception ......................................................................... 383
23.9 Multi-processor Communication Mode ............................................................. 386
23.10 Register Description ....................................................................................... 387
23.11 Examples of Baud Rate Setting ..................................................................... 396
24 USART in SPI Mode ...................................................................... 399
24.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 399
24.2 USART MSPIM vs. SPI .................................................................................... 399
24.3 SPI Data Modes and Timing ............................................................................ 400
24.4 Frame Formats ................................................................................................. 401
24.5 Data Transfer.................................................................................................... 402
24.6 USART MSPIM Register Description ............................................................... 404
25 2-wire Serial Interface ................................................................... 408
25.1 Features ........................................................................................................... 408
25.2 2-wire Serial Interface Bus Definition ............................................................... 408
25.2.2 Electrical ........................................................................................................ 409
25.3 Data Transfer and Frame Format..................................................................... 409
25.4 Multi-master Bus Systems, Arbitration and Synchronization ........................... 411
25.5 Overview of the TWI Module ............................................................................ 413
25.6 Using the TWI ................................................................................................... 415
25.7 Transmission Modes ........................................................................................ 418
25.8 Multi-master Systems and Arbitration .............................................................. 431
25.9 Register Description ......................................................................................... 432
26 AC – Analog Comparator ............................................................. 438
26.1 Analog Comparator Multiplexed Input .............................................................. 438
26.2 Register Description ......................................................................................... 439
27 ADC – Analog to Digital Converter .............................................. 442
27.1 Features ........................................................................................................... 442
604
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
27.2 Operation .......................................................................................................... 443
27.3 ADC Start-Up.................................................................................................... 444
27.4 Starting a Conversion ....................................................................................... 445
27.5 Pre-scaling and Conversion Timing ................................................................. 446
27.6 Changing Channel or Reference Selection ...................................................... 449
27.7 ADC Noise Canceller ....................................................................................... 452
27.8 ADC Conversion Result ................................................................................... 456
27.9 Internal Temperature Measurement ................................................................. 458
27.10 SRAM DRT Voltage Measurement ................................................................ 460
27.11 EVDD Voltage Measurement ......................................................................... 461
27.12 Register Description ....................................................................................... 462
28 JTAG Interface and On-chip Debug System ............................... 470
28.1 Features ........................................................................................................... 470
28.2 Overview ........................................................................................................... 470
28.3 TAP - Test Access Port .................................................................................... 471
28.4 TAP Controller .................................................................................................. 472
28.5 Using the Boundary-scan Chain....................................................................... 473
28.6 Using the On-chip Debug System .................................................................... 473
28.7 On-chip Debug Specific JTAG Instructions ...................................................... 474
28.8 Using the JTAG Programming Capabilities ...................................................... 474
28.9 Bibliography ...................................................................................................... 475
28.10 On-chip Debug Related Register in I/O Memory............................................ 475
29 IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) Boundary-scan ............................................ 476
29.1 Features ........................................................................................................... 476
29.2 System Overview ............................................................................................. 476
29.3 Data Registers .................................................................................................. 476
29.4 Boundary-scan Specific JTAG Instructions ...................................................... 478
29.5 Boundary-scan Chain ....................................................................................... 479
29.6 Boundary-scan Related Register in I/O Memory .............................................. 482
29.7 Boundary-scan Description Language Files .................................................... 483
29.8 ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2 Boundary-scan Order ....................................... 483
30 Boot Loader Support – Read-While-Write Self-Programming ... 485
30.1 Features ........................................................................................................... 485
30.2 Application and Boot Loader Flash Sections ................................................... 485
30.3 Read-While-Write and No Read-While-Write Flash Sections .......................... 486
30.4 Boot Loader Lock Bits ...................................................................................... 488
605
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
30.5 Addressing the Flash During Self-Programming .............................................. 488
30.6 Self-Programming the Flash ............................................................................. 489
30.7 Register Description ......................................................................................... 499
31 Memory Programming .................................................................. 502
31.1 Program And Data Memory Lock Bits .............................................................. 502
31.2 Fuse Bits ........................................................................................................... 503
31.3 Signature Bytes ................................................................................................ 505
31.4 User Signature Data ......................................................................................... 505
31.5 Calibration Byte ................................................................................................ 505
31.6 Page Size ......................................................................................................... 505
31.7 Parallel Programming Parameters, Pin Mapping, and Commands ................. 506
31.8 Parallel Programming ....................................................................................... 508
31.9 Serial Downloading .......................................................................................... 519
31.10 Programming via the JTAG Interface ............................................................. 523
32 Application Circuits ...................................................................... 538
32.1 Basic Application Schematic ............................................................................ 538
33 Register Summary ........................................................................ 540
34 Instruction Set Summary.............................................................. 545
34.1 Arithmetic and Logic Instructions ..................................................................... 545
34.2 Branch Instructions ........................................................................................... 546
34.3 Bit and Bit Test Instructions .............................................................................. 547
34.4 Data Transfer Instructions ................................................................................ 548
34.5 MCU Control Instructions ................................................................................. 549
35 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................. 550
35.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................................................. 550
35.2 Recommended Operating Range..................................................................... 550
35.3 Digital Pin Characteristics ................................................................................ 551
35.4 Transceiver Pin Characteristics ........................................................................ 551
35.5 Power Supply Currents (RF transceiver in SLEEP mode) ............................... 552
35.6 Clock Characteristics ........................................................................................ 552
35.7 System and Reset Characteristics ................................................................... 553
35.8 Power Management Electrical Characteristics ................................................. 554
35.9 2-wire Serial Interface Characteristics ............................................................. 556
35.10 SPI Timing Characteristics ............................................................................. 557
35.11 ADC Characteristics ....................................................................................... 558
35.12 Temperature Sensor Characteristics ............................................................. 560
606
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
35.13 Analog Comparator Characteristics ............................................................... 560
35.14 Transceiver Electrical Characteristics ............................................................ 560
36 Typical Characteristics ................................................................. 564
36.1 Supply Current vs. Clock Speed with Transceiver in SLEEP .......................... 564
36.2 Current Consumption of Bandgap Source and Digital Voltage Regulator ....... 568
36.3 Current Consumption in various Transceiver States........................................ 568
36.4 RF Measurements ............................................................................................ 571
36.5 BOD Threshold ................................................................................................. 573
36.6 Pin Driver Strength ........................................................................................... 574
36.7 Power-Down Current ........................................................................................ 577
36.8 Static ADC Parameter – INL and DNL ............................................................. 578
36.9 Dynamic ADC Parameter – ENOB ................................................................... 582
36.10 ADC Voltage Reference ................................................................................. 585
36.11 Temperature Sensor ...................................................................................... 585
36.12 Internal Oscillator Speed ................................................................................ 587
36.13 Programming Current ..................................................................................... 589
37 Ordering Information .................................................................... 591
38 Packaging Information ................................................................. 594
39 Errata ............................................................................................. 595
39.1 ATmega2564RFR2 revision D ......................................................................... 595
39.2 ATmega2564RFR2 revision A, B, C ................................................................ 595
39.3 ATmega1284RFR2 revision D ......................................................................... 595
39.4 ATmega1284RFR2 revision A, B, C ................................................................ 595
39.5 ATmega644RFR2 revision D ........................................................................... 595
39.6 ATmega644RFR2 revision A, B, C................................................................... 595
39.7 Detailed errata description ............................................................................... 595
40 Revision history ............................................................................ 598
Table of Contents ............................................................................... 599
607
42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
ATmega2564/1284/644RFR2
Atmel Corporation
1600 Technology Drive
San Jose, CA 95110
USA
Tel: (+1)(408) 441-0311
Fax: (+1)(408) 487-2600
www.atmel.com
Atmel Asia Limited
Unit 01-5 & 16, 19F
BEA Tower, Millennium City 5
418 Kwun Tong Road
Kwun Tong, Kowloon
HONG KONG
Tel: (+852) 2245-6100
Fax: (+852) 2722-1369
Atmel Munich GmbH
Business Campus
Parkring 4
D-85748 Garching b. Munich
GERMANY
Tel: (+49) 89-31970-0
Fax: (+49) 89-3194621
Atmel Japan G.K.
16F Shin-Osaki Kangyo Bldg.
1-6-4 Osaki, Shinagawa-ku
Tokyo 141-0032
JAPAN
Tel: (+81)(3) 6417-0300
Fax: (+81)(3) 6417-0370
© 2014 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved. / Rev.: 42073B-MCU Wireless-09/14
Atmel
®
, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, Enabling Unlimited Possibilities
®
, and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel Corporation or its
subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others.
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right is granted by this
document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE ATMEL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALES LOCATED ON THE ATMEL WEBSITE, ATMEL ASSUMES
NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS AND PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF
INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no
representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and products descriptions at any time
without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in,
automotive applications. Atmel products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.
